I 



«SX' 



* 






111 



liii 



m 



mm® 



\ «ffl 



iiiii 



m 



ill 



Hi 



liffii 






lians 



if! 



,'i!!- 



i I! liiPII 



i!i;;i! 



Illllil 



! i!iliili 



ill 



ii!M« 



iiii 



I 



iiliii 



■fni 



];i 



I!! 



H«S 



.,! .^, 



ti#4w: / 



I 



Wmm 









11UIU 



■* 



lli 



.'ffiffijf 



BSiPi 



fli 



iiiii 



a 



liii 



Am 



i ;!! 



MHtt 









,'** 



iiiji 



■il 



sip 



© 



! m 



Si 
■ 

m 
lliiilipiiiii 

mm 



ffisffll 



an 









PP 



Mm! i? 



mm 



\rnrn 1 



±m 



ffisaHggisis 



il 



•: ; 



illHiy 



if 



Hil! 



'"Sr'S 



JiffilHHHH 









fMffi 



lapp 



J® 



s : I 



iHppH ■ pHiiipfiippp 



WSml 

HEEit35H 3 



II 






I 



IffifiifiSW: 



1 



i 'A 



m\ 



■111'.; 



Hi 






Hi 



w 






li 



SHI 

nip 



a j lima ! 



Sip 



IIS 



:i 



«f as 







II 



ill II 
till 
il ill 



•IMA' 




Class IS:. 

Book_ J: I 

Copigliffl? 



©JEffilGHT DEPOSIT. 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2011 with funding from 
The Library of Congress 



http://www.archive.org/details/universalsheetmeOOneub 



The Universal 
Sheet Metal Pattern Cutter 

A COMPREHENSIVE TREATISE ON ALL BRANCHES 
OF SHEET METAL PATTERN DEVELOPMENT 



Volume II 

ARCHITECTURAL SHEET METAL WORK 

Including Drawing, (Full Size) Detailing and Lettering, Development 
and Construction of Sheet Metal Cornices and Skylights, Leaders, 
Roof Gutters and Conductor Offsets, Moldings, Miters, Pedi- 
ments, Copings, Finials, Circular Work, Dormer and Bay 
Windows, Sheet Metal Ornamentation, Electrically Il- 
luminated Signs, Hollow Metal Windows, Frames 
and Fire Doors, Metal Roofing, etc.; Reading 
Plans and Taking Off Sheet Metal Items 
and Quantities. 



BY 

WILLIAM NEUBECKER 



ILLUSTRATED BY MEANS OF 711 ORIGINAL 
ENGRAVINGS SHOWING ALL METHODS UNDER 
TREATMENT, AS WELL AS PERSPECTIVE 
VIEWS OF THE SUBJECTS OF THE PATTERN 
AND OTHER DEMONSTRATIONS, IN THEIR 
FINISHED STATE 



THE SHEET METAL PUBLICATION COMPANY 

Tribune Building, 154 Nassau Street 

NEW YORK, N. Y. 

1922 






u 



** 



Copyright, 1922, by 
Thk Sheet Metal Publication Company 



.3 



JAN -7 1922 
IBLA653443 






PREFACE 



— 



Of great assistance and encouragement in the 
publication of Volume Two has been the generous 
welcome and favorable criticism on the part of 
draftsmen and sheet metal workers, attending the 
appearance of Volume One of which reprint edi- 
tions were soon required to meet the general 
demand. 

The classification of the subject matter of the two 
volumes of this treatise brings to Volume Two, 
chapters that have to do principally with sheet metal 
work on the exteriors of buildings. 

The discussions are not confined exclusively to 
solutions of problems of pattern development and 
connected subjects, without regard for other phases 
of trade practice not coming specifically within the 
range of treatment suggested by the title chosen for 
this work. This would necessitate omitting impor- 
tant chapters which it is believed are highly desirable 
to include with the object of affording the sheet 
metal worker full access to various methods usually 
applied in his daily routine. 

Therefore, while adhering to the purpose of hav- 
ing the two volumes of the work present a very 
comprehensive series of pattern demonstrations em- 
bracing all prominently typical examples and for- 
mations of sheet metal work, the present volume 
aims to incorporate full information as to methods 
relating to each given branch of sheet metal work, 
including the procedure of manipulating the metal 
and executing the work at hand. 

Parts I to III of this volume were prepared with 
special regard for the requirements of the drafts- 
man and student sheet metal worker. Mainly, this 
material was prepared by the late George W. Kitt- 
redge. It treats : i — The terms and definitions of 
architecture and sheet metal work, with engravings 
of members, parts, constructional features and uses 
of sheet metal, comprising an illustrated dictionary. 
2 — The principles of projection or, in other words, 
the mechanical representation of objects on the draw- 
ing board. 3 — Architectural design, methods of 



drafting, detailing and the groundwork instruction 
for qualifying the operative to design and propor- 
tion sheet metal work for the various ornamental 
and architectural purposes for which it is extensively 
applied in the equipment of buildings. 

Proceeding from the chapters designed for the 
preparation and training of the mechanic, this vol- 
ume takes up in Parts IV to XV the numerous and 
varied solutions and discussions of methods desig- 
nated in the general table of contents. These 
methods comprise the major portion of the contents 
of Volume Two. They form the basis of its appeal 
as a work of reference for the use of sheet metal 
workers in many branches of the calling who, it is 
hoped, will find it ever responsive and reliable as a 
source of help. 

Part XVI is designed as a concise treatise and key 
to assist the many who, through lack of opportunity 
or experience are unfamiliar with the reading, or 
interpretation, of architects' plans and the language 
of scale drawings. Part XVII, which concludes the 
work, is devoted to methods of taking off items and 
quantities from plans, a subject requiring the closest 
attention of those who aim to become proficient as 
estimators. 

We believe the reader will readily share in the 
opinion that the two volumes of this work are an 
impressive testimonial to the high standard of the 
diversified calling of the sheet metal worker, which 
vocation while presenting numerous and varied ex- 
actions upon the skill of the operative, also affords, 
exceptional opportunity to such as become compe- 
tent in its pursuit. In few industries will individual 
success be more largely achieved by the capacity to> 
study and utilize information on mechanical and 
technical procedure. Thus, it would seem that there 
is almost no limit to the advantages to be gained by 
frequent reference to and study of so great a range 
of methods as are presented in Volumes One and 
Two. 

William Neubecker. 



CONTENTS 

PART I 

PAGE 

Terms and Definitions . 7 

Alphabetical List of Terms 21 

PART II 
Principles of Projection in Architectural Drawing 23 

PART III 
Architectural Design, Detailing and Lettering 30 

PART IV 
Patterns for Sheet Metal Cornices, Return, Face, Bevel and Butt Miters, Panels, Moldings, 

Pediments, Dormer and Bay Windows 53 



PART V 
Patterns for Leader Heads, Roof Gutters and Conductor Offsets 104 

PART VI 
Raking Moldings and Brackets for Angular and Segmental Pediments 122 

PART VII 

Reduced Miters for Horizontal and Inclined Moldings and Intersections of Molds of Dis- 
similar Profile 144 

PART VIII 
Patterns for Roof Flanges, Collars, Ventilator Bases and Hoods 158 

PART IX 
Patterns for Copings, Head Blocks, Hip Ridges, Finials and Spires 174 

PART X 
Circular Sheet Metal Work: Patterns for Spheres, Louvres, Panels, Finials, Dormer and 

Bay Windows, Cornices and Segmental Pediments 192 

PART XI 
Ornamental Sheet Metal Work: Patterns for Ornaments, Brackets, Chamfers, Panels, 

Molded Transitions, Gores, Keystones, Urns, Shields and Shafts 213 

PART XII 
Construction of Electrically Illuminated Sheet Metal Signs; with Method of Securing the 

Receptacles for Wiring 241 

PART XIII 
Construction of Hollow Metal Windows, Frames, Sashes, Fire Doors and Shutters . . 249 

PART XIV 
Development and Construction of the Various Types of Sheet Metal Skylights ... . 263 

PART XV 
Sheet Metal Roofing, Gutters and Siding . 312 

PART XVI 
Plan Reading 33 8 

PART XVII 
Estimating Items and Quantities of Sheet Metal in the Construction of Buildings . . 363 



PART I 
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 



I. What is termed an Order in architecture is 
one of the five principal methods of constructing 
and ornamenting a building (exemplified mainly in 
the portico). There are five orders of architecture, 
viz : Tuscan, Doric, Ionic, Corinthian and Com- 
posite. An order con- 
sists of a pedestal, a col- 
umn and an entablature. 
Fig. i shows an outline 
drawing of the Ionic 
order. 

2. A Pedestal is a 
structure consisting 
mainly of a block of 
stone (or the represen- 
tation of such) duly 
ornamented, whose use 
is to support a column, 
statue, vase or any orna- 
ment which requires be- 
ing placed in a conspicu- 
ous position. It consists 
of a base, a die and a cap 
or cornice. Designs for 
pedestals include one for 
each of the five orders. 
In modern architecture 
they may be of fanciful 
shapes to suit the char- 
acter of surrounding 
work. The lower part 
of Fig. i shows the ped- 
estal for the Ionic order, 
which does not differ 
much from that of the 
Corinthian order. 

3. A Column is pri- 
marily a pillar or support 
for the roof or upper 
part of any superstruc- 
ture. In architecture it is cylindrical in shape and 
occupies a vertical position. A column is usually 
used in its entirety but may be united with a wall, 
when it is said to be an engaged column. In such 




Fig. I. — The Ionic Order 



case it projects from the wall one-half its diameter 
or more. There is one for each of the ancient orders, 
each being designed according to a prescribed set of 
proportions. It consists of a base, including a plinth, 
a shaft and a capital, all as shown in Fig. 1. While 
the designs of the bases do not differ greatly for the 
several orders, each order has a capital which is 
distinctively its own. 

4. A Pilaster is a pillar or support but differs 
from a column in that it is square in plan instead of 
round. Although sometimes used in its entirety it 
is usually engaged, that is, projects from the face of 
the wall of which it forms a part. It may thus pro- 
ject very little or it may project as much as half or 
even three quarters of its diameter. A pilaster usu- 
ally has parallel sides while a column tapers, being 
smaller at the neck than its base as shown in Fig. 1. 

5. A Capital is the head or upper member of a 
column or pilaster. Its design varies according to 
the order or style of architecture employed. It con- 
sists usually of a neck, mold, a bell and an abacus. 
The bell is usually decorated with foliage, though 
sometimes is entirely plain. The form and details 
vary perhaps more for capitals than for any other 
unit of design all of which can be learned only from 
an exhaustive work on architecture. 

6. An Entablature , which signifies literally the 
putting on of boards, may be described as the finish 
of an order, as in a portico or at the top of a wall. 
It consists of three parts, the lintel or architrave, 
the frieze and the cornice. In Fig. 1 the different 
parts of an ancient entablature are shown and their 
names given. 

7. The Architrave is the first or lower division 
of the entablature. It is an ornamented lintel, which 
is in reality a stone or timber placed across the 
space from one column to another and is designed 
to support that which is placed above it. 

8. The Frieze is the second or middle division 
of the entablature and may be considered as a con- 
tinuation of the wall to add hight to the building 
(it being understood that the columns stand in the 
place of the wall). Its purpose in ancient buildings 
was the display of symbols, inscriptions or ornamen- 



8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



tation, suitable to the purpose of the building. In 
modern work it is often ornamented by panels, but 
its principal use is that of displaying signs. 

9. The Cornice is the uppermost projecting and 
must ornate part of the entablature. In the Tuscan 
order it is very plain, consisting of simple moldings, 
but in the other orders dentils or modillions, some- 
times both are introduced and most if not all of the 
moldings have their surfaces carved with enrich- 
ments. In modern times and especially by sheet 
metal contractors, the term cornice constitutes as 
it were, a unit of design and has come by common 
usage 'to be applied to the entire entablature or as 
much of it as is used as a finish upon a wall often 



! 


T 






CROWN 


MOLD 








PLANCLER 


Fascia 



-MOOILIION-HEAO- 



5 IDE OF 

MODULI ON 



MOD I L LI ON 



DENTILS 



DENTIL MOLD A 





STILL 




K PANEL MOLD — 


PANEL 

1 


/. 






>' 



FOOT MOLD 



Fasc/a 



Fig. 



-A Cornice and Its Parts 



of other material as brick, terra cotta or stone. A 
cornice of modern design as well as the names of 
the several parts and members are shown in Fig. 2. 

10. Lintel Cornice is designed to form a finish 
above the first story, that is in connection with the 
lintel. 

11. The term Deck Cornice is applied to the 
moldings forming the finish around or along the 
top of a mansard roof, or to finish the edge of any 
flat roof where it joins a steeper roof below. 

12. A Pediment is a triangular or segmentally 
arched ornamental finish to the wall surface over the 
end of a building portico, formed by dividing and 
varying the pitch or inclination of the cornice. 
Pediments are termed Triangular, Segmental or 
Broken according to their form or design, several 
forms of which are shown in Fig. 3. 

13. A Triangular Pediment is one in which the 



cornices above the wall surface are straight but in- 
clined, thus meeting at an apex above the middle of 
the design and forming a triangular space between 
the upper and lower or level cornices, known as the 
tympanum, as shown in diagram 3, Fig. 3. 

14. A Segmental Pediment is one in which the 
upper cornice forms an arc of a circle thus leaving 
the tympanum segmental in shape, at the top, as in 
Fig. 3, diagram 2. 

15. A Broken or Open Pediment may be either 
triangular or segmental in shape having the central 
portion of its cornice above the tympanum omitted 
to make room for an ornamental design, the upper 
cornice being terminated according to any one of 
several methods as in diagrams 4 and 5 in Fig. 3. 

16. A Gable is that part of the end of a building 
contained between and below two sloping roofs, 
shown in diagram 3, Fig. 3. 

17. An Arch is that which forms the top, usu- 
ally curved, of an opening in a wall. Its curve is 
usually a semicircle, an ellipse, or consists of two 
or more arcs of circles and is constructed to be self- 
supporting and to support also that part of a wall 
or structure which is above it. In a semi-circular arch 
a horizontal line drawn through the center is termed 
the springing line, Fig. 4, and if of masonry, the 
joints between the blocks radiate from the center of 
the circle at a in Fig. 4. 

The system of joints by which it is rendered self- 
supporting is sometimes applied to a number of 
stones placed so as to form a horizontal line in 
which it is known as a Flat Arch. Fig. 5. 

18. A Modillion would be best understood if de- 
fined as a kind of bracket. In its original form it is 
used as a support under the Ionic and the Corin- 
thian Cornices. It differs from the usual form of 
bracket in that it has more projection than depth. 
It is sometimes called a cantilever. One form is 
shown in Fig. 2 and another in Fig. 6. 

19. A Bracket in sheet metal is simply an orna- 
ment to the cornice and like the modillion simu- 
lates a support to the projecting part. Fig. 7. 

20. A Dentil is also a cornice ornament of rect- 
angular shape and much smaller than a modillion. 
Dentils are placed less than their face width apart 
and thus form a course which is placed in the bed 
of a cornice below the modillions, when modillions 
are used. Fig. 2. 

21. A Corbel is a form of bracket intended to 
appear as the support of window sills or caps, or of 
arches in the place of columns. Fig. 8. 

22. A Head Block is a large bracket placed at 
the end of a main or lintel cornice and is of suffi- 



TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 




Fig. 3. — Various Forms of Pediments 



cient projection to receive all the moldings of the 
cornice, and thus form a finish to the same as shown 
in Fig. 9. 

23. A Finial is an ornament designed to form 
the finish at the top of a spire, pinnacle, pediment, 
gable or roof. Fig. 10. 

24. A Volute is an ornament consisting of a fillet 
or small flat member accompanied by a hollow mold, 
curved into a spiral and placed under the angles of 
the abacus in the Corinthian, Ionic and Composite 
capitals, as shown in Fig. II. 

25. A Pinnacle is a slender turret rising higher 
than the main building, used usually about the base 
of a larger tower or steeple. It may be called a 
small spire. Fig. 12. 

26. A Panel is a compartment usually sunken 
below but sometimes raised above any plane surface, 
as a frieze in a ceiling, a door, etc. The part or 
margin surrounding the panel usually of uniform 
width is called the Stile. Fig. 2. 



27. A Baluster is a small column, usually of 
fanciful design, used to support the rail of a stair- 
case. In external sheet metal work the baluster in 
Fig. 13 usually stands upon a base rail and support 
an upper rail, when the whole combination consti- 
tutes a Balustrade, which is usually placed in sec- 
tions separated by pedestals. Sometimes the spaces 
between pedestals is filled by plain panels instead of 
balusters, in which case the combination is known 
as a Pedestal Course. 

28. A Molding is a combination of parallel forms 
both angular and curved, projecting from a wall or 
other plane surface. 

29. A Crown Mold is the upper and most pro- 
jecting member of a cornice. One is shown in Fig. 2. 

30. A Plancecr is the lower or under side of the 
projecting part of a cornice. It represents the under 
side of the stone, called in stone architecture, the 
Corona. Fig. 2. 

31. The Bed Moldings of a cornice comprise the 



IO 



THF UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



molding or group of moldings lying between the 
planceer and the frieze and include sometimes a 
course for modillions, or a course for dentils or 
both. See Fig. 2. 

32. A Cap Mold is the upper mold or member of 
the group, if there are more than one. It is carried 
around the top of the brackets or modillions to form 
a head or cap. Fig. 2. 

33. The Modillion Mold is that line of molding 
running below the modillions. The plain surface or 
band above the molding and back of the modillions 
is called the Modillion Band. Fig. 2. 

34. The Dentil Mold is that line of molding run- 
ning below and back of the dentils. Fig. 2. 

35. The Foot Mold is a term used to designate 
the lowest mold of the cornice. It is usually a simple 
mold of suitable design but is sometimes designed to 
represent an architrave which it replaces in ordinary 
cornice work and it is often so called. See Fig. 2. 

36. Gable Mold is the name applied to the in- 
clined moldings forming the cornice or finish of a 
gable or pediment. 

$7. A Ridge Mold is the cap or mold, usually in 
the form of a roll, used as a finish and protection to 
the ridge of a roof. Fig. 14. 

38. A Hip Mold is a mold of similar design to 
a ridge mold, and is similarly used upon the hips 
or angles of a roof. Fig. 14. 

39. A Fascia is a surface or band, usually plain 
but sometimes enriched, just below a mold. Fig. 2. 

40. A Fillet is a narrow member of a mold 
usually plain, placed above, between or below those 
which are curved in profile. Fig. 15. 

41. A Drip is a downward extension of any pro- 
jecting member or fascia used to prevent the water 
from running back and thereby down over the parts 
below. Fig. 15. 

42. The term Raking Mold signifies any mold 
placed in an inclined position as in a gable or pedi- 
ment, and therefore since it is necessary in order 
to effect a perfect miter at a horizontal angle that 
the profile of the mold forming one arm of the miter 
should be changed, the mold so treated is termed a 
Raked Mold and the miter made between the two 
arms is termed a rake miter. 

43. A Raked Profile is the profile ot a mold 
which has been changed from the normal to make a 
miter. Raked profiles are shown in most of the 
problems relating to pediments. 

44. A Normal Profile is the original or adopted 
profile for the main part of the cornice from which 
the raked profile is derived. 

45. The Return of a mold is the part running at 



right angles in the plan to the part forming, or run- 
ning parallel with the front. 

46. The term Soffit refers to the underside of 
any projecting member of a cornice as a mold or 
fillet. It is sometimes synonymous with "planceer." 
Fig. 2. _ 

47. A Stay is a piece of sheet metal cut to the 
profile of a mold. Fig. 16. 

48. A Hip is the angle formed when the two 
sloping sides of a roof meet to form an external 
angle. 

49. A Valley is formed when the sloping roofs 
meet so as to form an internal angle. 

50. A Sink is a depression of whatever shape in 
a plain surface, as in a panel, the side or in the face 
of a bracket. See a Fig. 7. 

51. Incised Work is a form of ornamentation 
sunken into a plain surface, forming narrow sunken 
lines usually in the shape of scrolls. 

Terms used by draftsmen will be defined in con- 
nection with Architectural Drawing in Part II, to 
which the reader is referred. 

52. The Enrichment of a mold is really the carv- 
ing of its surface into leaves, eggs, arrows or other 
designs which shall embellish it without materially 
changing its profile. Designs for the enriched molds 
are stamped in short length, placed in the profile in- 
stead of the regular formed mold. Fig. 17 shows 
three types of enrichments. 

53. Miter. — This term signifies primarily a joint 
at any angle between two pieces of molding having 
the same profile. The ends of the two pieces are 
cut off at such an angle as will bisect the angle of 
junction. It is a term originally used in carpentry, 
hence in reading the definitions one must have in 
mind pieces of wooden molding sawed off at the 
same angle, one right and the other left, so that the 
angle of the finished miter made by matching the 
pieces together is twice that of either piece. The 
term has, however, been extended by sheet metal 
workers to signify a joint between dissimilar parts, 
as when a molding, cylinder, cone or any geometrical 
solid is joined to any geometrical surface or solid. 
Every miter therefore has two parts or arms. "When 
the arms are similar and both arms are in the same 
vertical plane it is spoken of as a face miter. When 
both arms are in the same horizontal plane it is 
termed a return miter in which, if the miter is made 
to fit or go around an exterior angle, it is called an 
outside miter and if to fit a reentrant or interior 
angle, it is called an inside miter. Miters made for 
the top or bottom of a gable or pediment, are spoken 
of as gable miters. Sometimes one end of a mold- 



TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 



ii 



Keystone 




Fig. 4. — Semi-circular Arch 
and Its Parts 



\Yvrr/77 



Fig. 5.— Flat Arch 




Fig. 6. — Modillion 



wmiuv f 'iU'..i ; ', :;--.:.•: ■;'>.:V.w> ,t WfWU 




Fig. 7. — Brackets in Cornice Work 




- Corbels - 
Fig. 8. — Corbels on Window Cap 




Fig. o 

Head Block or 

End Truss 




Fig. 10. — Finial 




EBB 



Fig. 11. — Volute 






U 



eb 



H) 



Fig. 12. — Pinnacle 




Fig. 13. — Baluster 



m. 







Fig. 14.— Ridge of Hip Mold 




f//fet 



Fig. IS 
Fillet and Drip 



Stays 

or 
Profiles 



Fig. 16. — Stays 








1 



Fig. 17. — Enrichments 



12 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



ing is made to fit against a surface, either plane or 
curved. In such case the miter has but one arm and 
is called a butt miter. 

54. A Profile is a right section through a mold 
or combination of moldings. 

55. Impost. — Any projecting block, bracket, cap 
or capital which serves as the support for the first 
stone of an arch, and thereby for the whole arch, as 
in Fig. 4. 

56. Keystone. — The Top or middle stone of an 
arch. Fig. 4. It is usually made wider (higher) 
than the other stones of the arch and frequently has 
some device or emblem upon its face or is other- 
wise ornamented. The other stones of the arch are 
termed voussoirs. Fig. 4. 

Skylight Terms and Definitions 

57. Skylight. — A type of window built into a 
roof, ceiling or ship's deck for the admission of 



light and ventilation. Various formations of sky- 
light are designed to meet different structural re- 
quirements of buildings. 

58. Flat Skylight. — A type of skylight usually 
built upon roofs, where a curb flashing has been 
provided as in Fig. 18. Occasionally these skylights 
are set over flat roofs, when the pitch in the metal 
skylight frame occurs as at a, b, c, in Fig. 19. The 
construction may provide for ventilation, without 
impairing the light surface, by placing a ventilator 
along the elevated part of the skylight. See Fig. 20. 

59. Double Pitched Skylight. — A skylight hav- 
ing a slope in two directions. Fig. 21. When this 
type of skylight does not exceed 4 ft. width, from 
a to b, Fig. 21, the ends a, b, c are constructed of 
metal. If of greater width the ends may be con- 
structed of material alike to that of the roof, after 
which the metal roof covering is applied. This type 
of skylight is occasionally provided with a ridge 



^z±H±i±tap^ 





Fig. 19. — Flat Skylight with 
Pitch in Metal Frame, for Flat 
Roofs 




Fig. 20 
Flat Skylight with Ventilator 



'i // 1 tli /1 // 

Fig. 18 
Flat Skylight on Pitched Roof 






Fig. 22. — Double Pitch Skylight 
with Ridge Ventilator 



Fig. 23. — Double Pitch Skylight 
with Tubular Ventilator 



21.— Double Pitch Skylight 






Fig. 26. — Plain Hipped Skylight 



Fig. 24. — Double Pitch Sky- 
light with Stationary or Mov- 
able Louvres 



Fig. 25 
Skylight over Ridge of Roof 






Fig. 27. — Hipped Skylight with 
Tubular Ventilators 



Fig. 28. — Hipped Skylight with 
Ridge Ventilator 



Fig. 29. — Movable or Stationary 
Louvres Under Skylight 






Semi-Hipped Skylight 



Fig. 31. — Movable Sashes under 
Extension Skylight 



Fig. 32. — Movable Sashes under 
Hipped Skylight 



TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 



13 



ventilator, as shown in Fig. 22. Another method is 
to set in tubular ventilators at the ends, as in Fig. 23 
or stationary or movable slats or louvres may be 
placed at each end, as in Fig. 24. The term "double 
pitch" is also applicable to skylights set over the 
ridge of a roof as indicated in Fig. 25. A "ridge 
bar" or "ridge ventilator" is frequently constructed 
thereon. 

60. Hipped Skylight. — A type of skylight on 
which the four sides are sloped. Fig. 26 illustrates 
a "plain hipped skylight without a ventilator." This 
skylight is sometimes equipped with a "tubular 
ventilator" as shown in Fig. 27 or with a "ridge ven- 
tilator" as in Fig. 28. 

61. Louvres. — Sloping slats set under skylights 
to shed rain water outwardly and provide ventil- 
ation. Fig. 29. Louvres are constructed to be sta- 
tionarv or movable. They are operated with worm 
gearings which are hereinafter referred to. 

62. Semi-Hipped Skylight. — A type of skylight 
designed for junction at one of its ends to a wall. 
Fig. 30 shows a semi-hipped skylight set lengthwise. 

63. Movable or Operated Sash. — A framework 
of glass placed under various types of skylight to 
provide for light and ventilation. The operation is 
by means of "worm gearings," and the use of a "pole 
hook" or an "endless chain." Fig. 31 shows the 
movable sashes used in connection with an exten- 
sion skylight. Fig. 32 shows the sashes placed 
under one end of a hipped skylight over an attic 
roof. 

64. Extension Skylight. — A term usually ap- 
plied to a flat skylight placed at the rear of a build- 
ing and forming an extension thereto. Fig. 31. 

65. Gearings. — In skylight construction, mechan- 
ism employed to operate movable louvres and sashes. 




Fig- 33- — General View of Skylight Gearing 

A general view of skylight gearings is shown in 
Fig. 33. The names of the various parts of such 
gearings are considered under their several desig- 
nations. 

66. Lifting Power. — In skylight gearing, a 



mechanical appliance utilized for raising a skylight. 
In Fig. 34 the pipe a-b is constructed to a re- 
quired length to be reached with the pole hook, thus 
operating the handle a in Fig. t,t,. 

67. Pole Hook. — In skylight gearing, an iron 
hook for mounting upon a wooden pole, used to 
turn skylight gearing or sashes. Fig. 35. 

68. Hand Wheel. — In skylight gearing, a wheel 
for operating pipe connection to lifting power for 
operating skylight gearings. Fig. 36. 




t> Fig. 35 

Fig. 34. — Lifting Power Pole Hook 



Fig. 36 
Hand Wheel 



69. Extension. — In skylight gearing, a device of 
adjustable length to accommodate the projection of a 
lower skylight curb. Seee Fig. yj an d Fig. 33 at b. 

70. Handle. — In skylight gearing, a connection 
to pole hook for reaching and operating by hand a 
small number of sashes. See Fig. 38 and Fig. 33 
at a. 

71. Ann. — In skylight gearing, an accessory 
employed in conjunction with a Strap to assist in 
opening and closing sashes. See Fig. 39 and Fig. 

33 at c - 





Fig. 38 
The Handle 



Fig. 40 
The Hinge 



Fig. 37 
The Extension 



Fig. 39. — The Arm 



•72. Strap.— In skylight gearing, a band iron 
skylight sash operating connection. This accessory 
is cut and adjusted to accord with the bight of 
sash. See d in Fig. ^t,. 

■jt,. Hinge. — In skylight gearing, a pivotal fit- 
ting bolted to the foot of metal sash for holding the 
strap. See Fig. 40 and c in Fig. 33. 

74. Bracket.— In skylight gearing, a horizontal 
pipe support to which "lifting power" and "arms" 
are fastened. Two brackets are shown in position 
at h and i in Fig. 33. 



14 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



75. Collar. — In skylight gearing, a flange at- 
tached to the ends of the horizontal gearing pipe to 
prevent its sliding. Collars are usually placed at 
each pipe end. See I and m in Fig. 33. 

76. Universal Joint. — In skylight gearing, a 
hinge attachment for operating skylight "lifting 




Fig. 41 
The Bracket 






Fig. 42 
The Collar 



Fig. 4.3 

U .iversal 

Joint 



Fig. 44. — Chain 
Lifting Power with 
the Various Parts 



power" in construction requiring non-vertical drop 
of the handle bar, as in passing beams or intervening- 
members. Fig. 43. 

yj. Chain Lifting Power. — In skylight gearing, 
a chain-operated wheel gearing for controlling long 
lengths of movable louvres or sashes by the medium 
of "endless chain," Fig. 44. 

Skylight Curbs and Bars 

78. Curb. — The base or lower frame of a sky- 
light, resting upon the roof frame. See A B C D in 
Fig. 45- 




Fig. 45- — Plan of Hipped Skylight 
with Names of Bars 

79. Ridge Bar. — The framework at the ridge of 
a skylight. The ridge bar is incident to the con- 
struction of skylights having no ventilators at their 
ridge. Fig. 45. 

80. Hip Bar. — The corner bar of a hipped sky- 
light, set on an external or outside angle. Fig. 45. 

81. Valley Bar. — The corner bar occurring in 
the corner of a pitched skylight on an internal or 
inside angle. 

82. Common Bar. — Any skylight bar which runs 



from curb to ridge. See a in Figs. 18, 19, 20; or A 
in Figs. 21 to 31 ; also Fig. 45. 

83. Jack Bar. — A term applied to the bar which 
makes an intersection with the hip bar, as in Fig. 45. 
Two variations of jack bar are referred to below. 

84. Common Jack Bar. — A bar the half of which 
intersects a ridge bar (or a ventilator) as at a in 
Fig. 46 and the other half the hip bar at b. 

85. Center Jack Bar. — A bar which intersects 
directly between the center of two intersecting hip 
bars, as indicated in Fig. 46. 




. 46.— Plan of Hipped Skylight 
with Names of Jack Bars 

86. Cap Flange. — The lower part of a curb, 
covering the flashing around a roof curb. See A B 
in Fig. 47. 

87. Curb Rest. — A section of a skylight curb 
resting upon a roof curb, as at B D, Fig. 47. 

88. Condensation Gutter. — In a skylight curb, 
the part of the curb which receives condensation 
from skylight bars. See C D in Fig. 47. 

89. Rabbet. — On a skylight curb, a curb section 
to receive skylight glass, sometimes designated "glass 
rest." See E F Fig. 47. 

90. Weep Holes. — Small punched holes in sky- 
light curb between each light of glass, as indicated 
in Fig. 47. They are also known as condensation 
holes. 



Condensation 
or Weeo Holes 



Condensation C. 

Gofter 





Fig. 47 
The Parts of a Curb 



Relnforclng\strlp 

Fig. 48.— The Parts 
of a Skylight Bar 



91. Condensation Gutter. — In a skylight bar, 
the lower part of a bar formed to a gutter 
for receiving drippings (condensation) resulting 
from contact of warm air with the cold glass surface 
or for receiving rain leakage between the glass and 
metal bars. See Fig. 48. 



TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 



15 



92. Rabbet. — On a skylight bar, an intake in a 
bar for receiving skylight glass which latter is usu- 
ally imbedded there in putty. Fig. 48. 

93. Re-enforcing Strip. — A band for fastening 
together and re-enforcing the two walls of a sky- 
light bar. Fig. 48. 

94. Cap. — A finish between skylight glass and 
bar employed to conceal the unfinished edges of 
glass or of glass and putty. The caps are usually se- 
cured with copper wire or cleats. Fig. 48. 

95. Cleat. — In skylight construction, a metal 
strip for securing eap to bar. Fig. 49. Cleats are 
usually made of 14. oz. sheet copper, soldered or 
riveted at intervals, to the skylight bars, as indi- 
cated. 




Fig. 49 
Cleat and Core Plate 



96. Core Plate. — A central re-enforcement of a 
skylight bar for imparting rigidity and resistance to 
wind pressure and to the weight of snow or frozen 
matter. Fig. 49. On large skylights of great span 
the construction is usually of angle iron, erected by 
the iron workers. Specifications usually stipulate 
size of core plate. 

97. Saw Tooth Skylight. — A combination of flat 
skylight placed at an angle to the roof, forming a 
series of "teeth" as in a saw. Fig. 50. 

98. Theatre Stage Skylight. — Types of skylight 
designed for amusement houses and auditoriums. 




■ Fig. SO — Sectional View of Saw Tooth Skylight 



Two types of the stage skylight are the counter bal- 
anced sash, having two sashes or skylights hinged 
to the outer edge of the curbing or frame, which 
latter, if properly constructed is of hip shape permit- 
ting the upper edges to come together when the 



sashes are closed and arranged in such manner that 
one side of the skylight is provided with an over- 
hanging lip or batten to exclude snow, sleet or rain ; 
and the rolling type consisting of two rolling sky- 
lights fitted with brass wheels which revolve on hard 
brass tracks and are held together by means of two 
cords secured with a fusible link, which melts at a 
low temperature, as on the occasion of a fire. Stage 
skylights thus made conform to the regulations of 
the National Board of Fire Underwriters. 

99. Fusible Link. — A fusible metal connection in 



,-Fuse that nieltd 



Fig. 50a 
Fusible Link and Hook 



a skylight support, intended *o melt in case of fire. 
Fig. 50 a. The fusible link, disintegrating in the heat 
generated by fire releases the cords which hold the 
skylight when, by means of rolling or counter-bal- 
ancing, the skylight is automatically opened and an 
otvtlet for smoke is provided. 

100. Piittylcss Skylight. — A skylight on which 
the glass parts are set directly upon the metal rab- 




Fig. si.— Puttyless Skylight Bar 

bet of the metallic bar. In the construction of this 
skylight the necessary provision for arresting leak- 
age is effected by condensation gutters set in the 
rabbet and below the bar. Fi°-. ;i. 



Roofing Terms 

101. Eavc Gutter. — A channel for drainage of a 
pitched roof, set at its lowest extremity. Fig. 52. 

102. Roof Gutter. — A drainage channel set 
upon a roof above its eaves or outside the line of a 
wall. See a b in Fig. 53. 

103. Box Lined Gutter. — A sheathed roof drain- 



i6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



age channel, lined with metal. This gutter is usually 
sheathed to the required pitch by the carpenter, 
when it is lined by the roofer with tin, galvanized 
iron or sheet copper. Fig. 54. 




\Jj 


^ggl 






\ 1 1 




1 1 




N. ' 


1 


1 






_= — 


— _ 




b\J 


: .. ■--—-- 


_- ■ ._ 




\ 




V 


1 1 


* 




i O — 




A 



















Fig. 52. — Eave Gutter 



3 
a 



i 

Fig. 



53. — Roof Gutters 



104. Gutter Brace. — A support for sustaining a 
gutter. The brace is fastened at one of its ends to 
the gutter and the other end is connected to the 
roof. 

105. Plain Leader or Conductor. — A round, 
square or rectangular pipe connected to a roof gutter 
to conduct drainage to the building line. 

106. Corrugated Leader. — A roof gutter drain- 
age discharge pipe of corrugated sheet metal. This 
material is given preference as providing a leader 





Fig. 54 
Section of Box Lined Gutter 



Fig. 54a 
A Conductor Tube 




Fig. 55. — Plain and Corru- 
gated Leader Hooks 

that will expand when congested with ice in periods 
of low temperature, thus avoiding bursting of seams. 

107. Tube. — A short pipe forming a connection 
between a gutter and a leader. The tube is of six 
inches approximate length and is soldered to the 
gutter. Fig. 54a. 

108. Conductor Hook. — A metal fastener for 
attaching a leader or conductor to a wall. Two 



styles of conductor hook, the plain and the hinged, 
respectively, for the plain and the corrugated leader, 



are shown in Fig. 55. 



109. Ornamental Leader Fastener. — An ornate 
metal clamp placed over the hooks. Several de- 
signs of O. L. Fastener are shown in Fig. 56. 
Such fasteners are soldered to the leaders. 





Fig- 57 
Leader Head 



Fig. 56 

Ornamental 

Leader 

Fasteners 




Fig. 58 
Wire Strainer 



1 10. — Leader Head. — A receiver of molded or of 
ornamental sheet metal construction for conveying 
roof drainage to leader pipe. Fig. 57. The connect- 
ing leader indicated at A continues to the grade line 
or sewer pipe. 

in. Strainer. — A round or square shield of 
copper or galvanized iron wire, used to prevent 
clogging of tubes or leader openings. A wire 




59- — Base and Cap Flashing 
Against a Brick Wall 



strainer for protecting round leader pipe is shown 
in Fig. 58. To accommodate the angle of tube 
passing through walls, a hinged strainer is fre- 
quently employed. 

112. Rain Water Cut-Off . — A Y-shaped fitting 
formed by the junction of two elbows and equipped 



TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 



17 



with a central pivoted damper for the control and 
direction of drainage to cistern or to sewer. 

113. Expansion Joint. — A movable junction in 
the elevated part of a gutter to provide for the ex- 
pansion and contraction of the metal. 

114. Base Flashing. — A lower metal strip mak- 
ing a watertight connection for roofs and walls, in- 
serted under the cap flashing. See c in Fig. 59. 




Fig. 60. — Flashing in Stone or Terra Cotta Reglet 

115. Cap Flashing. — A metal strip which usually 
overlaps the base flashing. See a b Fig. 59. Cap 
flashing is usually built into the wall as the building 
construction progresses. An overlap from ^ l / 2 to 
4 in. is customary. 

116. Reglet. — A groove molded in terra cotta or 
cut in stone work to receive the cap flashing. X in 
Fig. 60 is the reglet, A the cap flashing and B the 
base flashing. 

II". Flat Scam Roofing. — Roofing laid with flat 
locks, which first are cleated, locked, closed and 
soldered. 

118. Standing Scam Roofing. — A rooting laid 




Fig. 61. — Cleats and Butts 
1 2 




Fig. 62.— Three Operations in Securing Cleats 



with seams extended vertically from the roof. 
Standing seams usually extend upward about one 
inch and are clcatcd and double locked. Unlike cross 
seams they are not soldered. 

119. Cleat. — In flat seam roofing. A metal strip 
for fastening roofing sheets without driving nails 
through the sheets, thus allowing for expansion and 
contraction of the metal. A B and C in Fig. 61 show 




Fig. 63. — Cleat for Standing Seam Roofing 

cleats in position on 10x14 m - sheets and 1, 2 and 3 
in Fig. 62, shows the three operations of securing 
the cleat. Cleats, in standing seam roofing are shown 
in Fig. 63 where two views indicate the method of 
fastening ; the laps a and & in A are used to lock over 
the standing edges shown in B. 

120. Butt. — An intersection of short seams in 
metal roofing. See a in Fig. 61. 

121. Roof Flange. — A plate or ring usually, of 




Fig. 64.— A Step Flashing 

sheet lead or copper, to fit around a soil pipe, vent 
pipe, or stack passing through a roof. 

122. Step Flashing. — A watertight metal pro- 
tection to a wall, run along a steep incline. Fig. 64. 
The metal is stepped as indicated at aa. 




Fig. 65. — Shingle Flashings 



x8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



123. Shingle Flashing. — A watertight protection 
for steep roofs, adjoining parapet walls or chimneys. 
Fig. 65. This flashing is usually cut to 2 l / 2 in. excess 
of length over that to which the tile or slate is laid 
to the weather and the step flashing overlaps. 

124. Deck Roof. — An upper roof level sur- 
mounting the slope of a mansard- roof. Fig. 66. 



DecU Roof 




Fig. 66.— Deck and Mansard Roofs, Dormers, Eyebrows 
and Deck Molding 

125. Mansard Roof. — A roof having two slopes 
on all sides ; or an inclined roof capped with a deck, 
as in Fig. 66 at A B C D. 

126. Deck Molding.— A molded finish or cornice 
placed above a mansard roof or around a deck roof 
at its edge. See Fig. 66 at H J. 

127. Dormer Window. — A vertical window set 
in a sloping roof, as a mansard or pitched roof. See 
Fig. 66 at E E E. 

128. Evebroiv Dormer Window, — A small win- 
down having a curved upper outline, set on a man- 
sard or pitched roof. See Fig. 66 at F F. 

129. Saddle in Roofing.— A metal lined incline 
usually placed behind chimneys to shed the water to 
either side and prevent forming of snow pockets. 
Fig. 67. 




Fig. 67.— Saddle Behind Chimney on Pitch Roof 

130. Cant Strip. — 1\ metal lined incline placed 
behind roof bulkheads to shed water to leader out- 
lets. Fig. 68. Referring to the engraving, the cant 
prevents water from settling at O. Cants at A and 
B shed the water to outlet. 

131. Bulkhead in Roofing. — A superstructure 



built on a roof, to cover stairs, elevators, ventilation 
pipes, etc. 

132. Shingled Roof.- — In metallic and tiled roof- 
ing, a term customarily applied to roofs covered 
with either metal shingles or tile. 




Fig. 68. — Cant Strips on Flat Roof 

133. Hip Tile. — A tile designed for placing along 
the hips of a roof. 

134. Ridge Tile. — A tile designed for covering 
the ride:e of a roof. 



Corrugated Metal Roofing and Siding 

135. Corrugated Iron Roofing. — Corrugated 
metal sheets for roof covering. This material is 
fastened to wood purlins by means of galvanized 
iron nails or is fastened to angle iron purlins by 
means of band iron clips which are riveted to the 
metal roofing and bent around the purlins. 

136. Corrugated Iron Siding. — Corrugated metal 
sheets for protecting the sides of buildings. This 
material is fastened to the vertical sides of struc- 
tures in the manner referred to in connection with 
corrugated iron roofing. 

137. End Wall Flashing. — A metal watertight 
protection applied to roofs which butt against walls 
at the top. Fig. 69. The vertical flashing A joins 
the wall and the corrugated flange B overlaps the 
corrugated sheets. 




Fig. 69. — Corrugated End Wall Flashing 

138. Side Wall Flashing. — A corrugated metal 
watertight protection applied to pitched roofs inter- 
secting walls at the side. Fig. 70. 



TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 



19 



139. Corrugated Ridge Roll. — A coping of cor- 
rugated metal set at the top or ridge of roof. Fig. 71. 

140. Curb Flashing. — The metal protection 
around a skylight or curb projecting above the roof 
line. 



Fig. 70. — Corrugated Side Wall Flashing 




Fig. 71. — Corrugated Ridge Roll 

141. Snow Guard. — A device to prevent the slid- 
ing of snow from pitched roofs. Snow guards are 
made in the form of small hooks of copper wire to 
be slated in with the courses of slate or shingle roof- 
Others are constructed of upright steel or 



mg 



Cap, 



FRONT VIEW 




COPPER WIRE 
SHOW GUARD 



PIPE RAIL SNOW GUARD 

Fig. 72. — Snow Guards of Copper Wire and Guard Rails 



copper standards which are placed about 6 feet 
apart and have adjustments for receiving two or 
three lines of iron pipe forming rails which serve as 
guards, thus confining the sliding snow within the 
roof's eaves. Fig. 72. 




Fig- 73- — Brick Siding 
ecin. 






V^'A?^ h&f£ 



Fig. 74. — Rock Face Siding 

142. Brick Siding. — A metal covering for ver- 
tical walls, stamped in imitation of brick work. 

Fig- 73- 

143. Rock Face Siding. — A metal side wall cov- 



ering stamped in imitation of stonework. Fig. 74. 

144. Weather Board Siding. A metal side wall 
covering stamped to imitate wooden weather boards. 
Fig. 75- 



! 



£H 



r 



— . 



^9 



F'g- 75- — Weatherboard Siding 




Single Carved for Awnings 




Single Curued 




double Curued 



Fig. 76 
Curved Corrugated Roofing 



145. Curved Corrugated Roofing. — A metal 
roofing stamped in curved formations to meet re- 
quirements of profile. Fig. 76. 



S 






sssi 



Fig. 77. — V Crimped Roofing 

146. V -Crimped Roofing. — Stamped metal sheets 
of V shape. Fig. 77. These sheets reach 10 feet 
length and have as many as four V grooves to the 
sheet. 





Fig. 78.— Metal Lath 



Fig. 79 
Corrugated Culvert 



147. Metal Lath. — Stamped metal sheets for 
supporting plastering, in place of wood laths. Fig. 78. 

148. Corrugated Culvert. — A corrugated iron 
waterway or drain. Fig. 79. 



20 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




Fig. 80. — Concrete Mold of Octagonal Column Cap 

149. Concrete Mold. — A metal form for receiv- 
ing poured concrete in the construction of columns, 
walls, etc. The molds are most frequently assembled 
from number 10 gauge steel. Fig. 80 shows a mold 
for forming a concrete octagonal column cap. 

Doors, Window Frames and Sashes 

150. Tin Clad Fire Doors and Shutters. — Fire- 
proof doors and shutters of wooden cores covered 
with tin sheets. For the purpose 14x20 in. tin is 
used, locked as shown in Fig. 81 at A and B. 

151. Hollow Metal Fire Doors. — Hollow fire- 
proof doors provided with insulated stiles and rails. 
The construction is of at least 1^4 "">• thickness with 
insulated panels of 1 in. thickness and upward. 




Fig. 81 
Locks Used in Covering Fire Doors 

152. Hollow Metallic Windows. — Windows 
having fireproof exteriors of sheet metal. There 
are several types, namely : Sliding, Pivoted, Case- 
ment, Top Hinged, Stationary, and Tilting. 

153. Sliding Window. — A window having two 
sashes usually designed to slide upward and down- 
ward. The motion of these sashes may be independ- 
ent and subject to control by weights, in which case 
the window is designated as double hung or the two 
sashes may counter balance, in which case the win- 
dow is known as counterbalanced. 

154. Pivoted Window. — A window having one 
or more of its sashes mounted on pivots, permitting 
each movable sash to turn upon an axis. 

155. Casement Window. — A window having its 
sashes attached to the frame by means of hinges at 
the vertical side and operated in the manner of a 
door. 

156. Top Hinged Window. — A window whose 
sash is attached to the frame by means of hinges at 
the upper horizontal part. 

157. Stationary Window.— A window whose 
sash has a permanent position. 



158. Tilting Window. — A window whose sashes 
are attached to the frame as well as together, so as 
to permit an inclined or tilted position. 

159. Twin Window. — A window whose sashes 
are mounted alongside in contrast to the more com- 
mon vertical construction. Fig. 82. 



-Vertical Division 
Member 




Fig. 82 — Twin Hinged Windows 

160. Combination Window. — A window which 
combines the features of construction of a number 
of types. Thus one having a pivoted upper sash and 
a stationary lower sash, is called a pivoted upper, 
fixed lower sash window. One having two sashes, 
both of which are pivoted, is called a double pivoted 
window. One having a single pivoted sash, is called 
a single pivoted window, and one having a top 
hinged upper sash and double hung lower sash is 
usually designated a double hung window with top 
hinged transom. 

t6i. Rabbeted Frames. — Frames formed with 
offsets or shoulders to receive masonry, in connec- 
tion with hollow metallic window construction. 



'ailing in Flange 
Head 

Jamb 
Upper Rail 
Stile 
Stop 



Transom Bar 
Vertical Muntin 



Horizontal 
Munttn 




Fig. 83 — Pivoted Window Before Installation 

Frames not provided with rabbets are usually 
formed with metal wings or flanges. 

162. Walling-in Flanges. — Flanges designed to 
be built into the masonry. Fig. 83. 



TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 



21 



Note: — The frames of all windows having a 
single sash and the frames of sliding sash windows 
having two sashes are composed of two horizontal 
members called the head and sill and two vertical 
members called the jambs, all as shown in Fig. 83. 

163. Head. — The top part of a window frame. 
The lower surface of the head is the soffit and the 
upper surface of the top, the member. 

164. Sill j — The horizontal piece forming the 
under part of a window frame. The uppermost 
part of the frame is the tread and the lowest the 
base. 

165. Jamb. — The vertical side of a window. 
Hence the part which is in contact with the mason- 
ry is the back of the jamb and the part in contact 
with the sash, the front of the jamb. Projections on 
the front of the jambs, designed to confine the move- 
ment of a movable sash, are called stops. Fig. 83. 
Sliding sash windows are frequently equipped with 
stops which may be separated from the jamb and 
these separable parts are customarily referred to as 
sash guide strips, while a common designation of 
the strip dividing the two sashes is sash parting 
bead. 

The frame of a pivoted window having two sashes 
is composed of the same members as that of a slid- 
ing sash window. An additional horizontal member 
is the transom bar. Fig. 83. 

The frame of a twin window is composed of a 
head, sill, two jambs and a vertical division member 
which separate the sashes. Fig. 83. 

166. Sash. — The framing in which the pieces of 



glass of a window are set. In case the sash is de- 
signed to be permanently attached to the frame it is 
called a fixed or stationary sash. If the construc- 
tion is such that its position is changeable, it is called 
a movable sash. Each sash is composed of hori- 
zontal and vertical members. The horizontal mem- 
bers at the top and bottom of the sash are called the 
rails. Fig. 83. The rails of sliding sash windows 
which join at the center of the window when the 
sashes are closed, are the meeting rails. The vertical 
members at the sides of the sash are the stiles. In 
casement windows the stiles to which the hinges are 
attached are called hinge stiles and the stiles to 
which the locking mechanism is connected are lock 
stiles. When casement windows are made in two 
parts which meet at the center, the stiles coming into 
contact are the meeting stiles. The intermediate 
members separating the glass panes are the muntins. 
Fig. 83. If a muntin be installed in a vertical posi- 
tion, it becomes a vertical muntin and correspond- 
ingly if in a horizontal position, a horizontal muntin. 
Muntins which are so designed that a part may be 
removed for purposes of glazing are separable type 
muntins, and such as are not constructed on this 
principle are designated non-separable type muntins. 
In the practice of the architect the term "muntin" is 
employed to designate vertical sash members which 
separate the lights, while the horizontal members are 
referred to as "bars." However, metal window 
manufacture in conjunction with trade parlance has 
given to these members the terms vertical and hori- 
zontal muntins, as recognized and set forth herein. 



Alphabetical List of Terms 



Paragraph 
No. 

Abacus 5 

Arch 17 

Architrave 7, 35 

Arm 71 

Baluster 27 

Balustrade 27 

Base 2 

Base Flashing 114 

Bed Moldings 31 

Bell 5 

Box Lined Gutter 103 

Bracket 19. 74 

Brick Siding 142 

Broken or Open Pedi- 
ment 15 

Bulkhead 131 

Butt Miter 53 

Butt 120 

Cant Strip 130 

Cap 2, 94 

Cap Flange 86 

Cap Flashing 115 

Cap Mold 32 

Capital 5 

Casement Window .... 155 
Center Jack Bar 85 



Paragraph 

No. 

Chain Lifting Power.. 77 

Cleat, Roofing 119 

Cleat, Skylight 95 

Collar 75 

Column 3 

Combination Window.. 160 

Common Bar 82 

Common Jack Bar 84 

Composite Order I 

Concrete Mold 149 

Condensation Gutter, of 

Curb . ._ 88 

Condensation Gutter, of 

Bar 91 

Condensation Holes ... 90 

Conductor Hook 108 

Corbel 21 

Core Plate 96 

Corinthian Order 1 

Cornice 9 

Corona 30 

Corrugated Culvert . . . 148 
Corrugated Iron Roof- 
ing - 135 

Corrugated Iron Sid- 
ing 136 



Paragraph 

No. 

Corrugated Leader .... 106 

Corrugated Ridge Roll. 139 

Counter Balanced Sash, 

98, 153 

Crown Mold 29 

Culvert, Corrugated . . . 148 

Curb 78 

Curb Flashing 140 

Curb Rest 87 

Curved Corrugated 

Roofing 145 

Cut-off 112 

Deck Cornice 11 

Deck Molding 126 

Deck Roof 124 

Dentil 20 

Dentil Mold 34 

Die 2 

Doric Order 1 

Dormer Window 127 

Double Hung Window. 153 

Double Locked 118 

Double Pitched Sky- 
light 59 

Drip 41 

Eave Gutter 101 



Paragraph 

No. 

End Wall Flashing.... 137 

Engaged Column 3 

Enrichment 52 

Entablature 6 

Expansion Joint 113 

Extension 69 

Extension Skylight ... 64 
Eyebrow Dormer Win- 
dow 128 

Face Miter 53 

Fascia 39 

Fillet 40 

Finial 23 

Fire Door 150, 151 

Flashings, Base, Cap, 
End Wall, Side Wall, 

Curb 114, 115, 137, 138, 140 

Flat Arch 17 

Flat Seam Roofing 117 

Flat Skylight 58 

Foot Mold 35 

Frames 161 

Frieze 8 

Fusible Link 99 

Gable 16 

Gable Miters 53 



22 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Paragraph 
No. 

Gable Mold 36 

Gearings 65 

Gutter Braces 104 

Gutters, Condensation, 
Eave, Roof, Box 

Lined . . .91, 101, 102, 103 

Hand Wheel 68 

Handle 70 

Head 163 

Head Block 22 

Hinge 73 

Hinge Stile 166 

Hip 48 

Hip Bar 80 

Hip Mold 38 

Hip Tile 133 

Hipped Skylight 60 

Hollow Metal Fire 

Door 151 

Hollow Metallic Win- 
dows 152 

Impost 55 

Incised Work 51 

Inside Miter 53 

Ionic Order 1 

Jack Bar 83 

jamb 165 

Keystone 56 

Lath 147 

Leader Head no 

Leader Hook 108 

Leaders, Plain, Corru- 
gated, Ornamental 

105, 106, 109 

Lifting Power 66 

Lintel Cornice 10 



Paragraph 
No. 

Lock Stile 166 

Louvres 61 

Mansard Roof 125 

Meeting Rail 166 

Meeting Stile 166 

Metal Doors 150, 151 

Metal Lath 147 

Metal Windows ..152 to 166 

Miter 53 

Modillion 18 

Modillion Band 33 

Modillion Mold 33 

Molding or Mold 28 

Movable Sash 63 

Muntin 166 

Neck Mold 5 

Normal Profile 44 

Open Pediment 15 

Operated Sash 63 

Order I 

Ornamental Leader 

Fastener 109 

Outside Miter 53 

Panel 26 

Pedestal 2 

Pedestal Course 27 

Pediment 12 

Pilaster 4 

Pinnacle 25 

Pivoted Window 154 

Plain Leader 105 

Plain Conductor 105 

Planceer 30, 46 

Pole Hook 67 

Profile 54 



Paragraph 

No. 

Puttyless Skylight .... 100 

Rabbet (on Curb) 89 

Rabbet (on Bar) 92 

Rabbeted Frames 161 

Rails 166 

Rain Water Cut Off .. 112 

Rake Miter 42 

Raked Mold 42 

Raked Profile 43 

Raking Mold 42 

Re-enforcing Strip .... 93 

Reglet 116 

Return 45 

Return Miter 53 

Ridge Bar 79 

Ridge Mold 37 

Ridge Tile 134 

Rock Face Siding 143 

Rolling Type of Sky- 
light 98 

Roof Flange 121 

Roof Gutter 102 

Saddle 129 

Sash 166 

Saw Tooth Skylight... 97 
Segmental Pediment . . 14 
Semi-Hipped Skylight.. 62 

Shingle Flashing 123 

Shingled Roof 132 

Side Wall Flashing ... 138 
Sidings, Brick, Rock 
Face, Weather Board, 

142, 143, 144 

Sill 164 

Sink 50 



Paragraph 
No. 

Skylight 57 

Sliding Window 153 

Snow Guard 141 

Soffit 46 

Springing Line 17 

Standing Seam Roofing. 118 

Stationary Window . . 157 

Stay 47 

Step Flashing 122 

Stile 26, 166 

Stop 165 

Strainer n 1 

Strap 72 

Theater Stage Skylight. 98 

Tilting Window 158 

Tin Clad Fire Door 

and Shutter 150 

Top Hinged Window.. 156 

Transom Bar 165 

Triangular Pediment .. 13 

Tube 107 

Tuscan Order I 

Twin Window 159 

Tympanum 13 

Universal Joint 76 

Valley 49 

Valley Bar 81 

Crimped Roofing 146 

Vertical Division Mem- 
ber 165 

Volute 24 

Voussoirs 56 

Walling-in Flanges . . . 162 
Weather Board Siding. 144 

Weep Holes 90 



PART II 



PRINCIPLES OF PROJECTION IN ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING 



'T'HE first practical work on the drawing board 
which demands attention is that of the me- 
chanical representation of objects upon paper, and 
commonly designated as mechanical drawing. The 
methods and principles employed in these operations 
are essentially the same for all classes of construc- 
tive work, whether the subjects treated be ma- 
chinery or buildings of whatever material, as stone, 
wood or sheet metal, or of any part of a subject 
necessary to be represented. Involving as it does the 
principles of abstract geometry, the science which 
treats of this class of representation is properly 
termed descriptive geometry. 

Descriptive Geometry, therefore, as a science 
treats of the exact representation of forms upon 
planes, the planes employed being represented by 
the surface of the paper spread upon the drawing 
board ; and the method by which the representations 
are accomplished is termed orthographic or right 
line of projection. To assist in gaining a correct 
idea of the theory of representation, we may pause 
to note, first, that objects become visible through 
the action of light which moves in straight lines, 
called rays, from the object toward the eye. In the 
natural operations of vision, the rays proceed in 
straight lines from all parts of an object viewed, to- 
ward the eye, from which it will be seen that they 
must converge. If now a plane (represented, for 
instance, by a plate of glass) be interposed between 
the object and the eye, the point of intersection with 
the plane of a ray from any point of the object 
would properly be termed the projection of that 
point and the ray itself would be termed the line of 
projection or the projector. In like manner the pro- 
jections of all the points in the outline of the ob- 
ject, if they be marked upon the glass, which may 
be termed the plane of projection, would constitute 
an outline of the object upon that plane. 

It will be seen farther that since the rays or pro- 
jections converge toward the eye, the resulting out- 
line upon the glass plate will be larger or smaller 
according as the intervening plate is farther from or 
nearer to the eye, the point of convergence. Follow- 
ing this course of reasoning still farther, the greater 



the distance between the object and the eye, the 
more nearly parallel will the rays become, hence if 
the object be placed at as great a distance from the 
eye as possible and the plane of projection be placed 
as close to the object as possible, the resulting 
image, or projection of the object upon the plane, 
will be very little smaller than the object. 

In the operations of descriptive geometry the 
visual rays or projections are considered as being 
exactly parallel, with the result that the projection 
of any object upon a plane thus becomes the full 
size of the object and constitutes a view of the same 
upon which accurate measurements may be taken. 

We have spoken of a plane (Def. 19, volume one) 
as having two dimensions and of solids i,poly- 
hedrons Def. 69, volume one) as having three di- 
mensions ; the projection of a solid upon a plane, 
therefore, is a view of the same in which two of its 
dimensions only can be shown. Thus if the plane is 
supposed to have been placed in a vertical position 
in front of any subject the resulting projection may 
show the hight and the length of the subject, and 
may thus be termed a front view. If, now, another 
projection of the subject be made upon a plane 
placed at right angles to the first, as, for instance, 
in a horizontal position, either above or below it, the 
rays or projections being carried vertically to inter- 
sect the plane, the resulting view, termed a plan or 
top view, will show the length and the width. Thus 
two projections of any subject made upon planes at 
right angles to each other are sufficient to give its 
three, that is, all of its dimensions, and the relative 
position of every part of it will be shown. While 
this is true, yet in modern methods of mechanical 
drawing, a representation of the subject upon a third 
plane placed at right angles to the other two is con- 
sidered advantageous and desirable, if not always 
necessary. 

The idea of three planes placed at right angles to 
each other can most easily be grasped by standing 
a book or the covers of a portfolio upon any hori- 
zontal surface, as the top of a table, in such a posi- 
tion that its back shall be vertical. If now the 
covers be opened until they are at right angles to 



24 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



each other, it will be seen that both are also at 
right angles to the table top because they are in a 
vertical position. Thus the three planes represented 
by the two covers of the book and the top of the 
table are all at right angles to each other. 

A projection made upon another vertical plane 
placed at right angles to the first mentioned, say 
parallel to a side or end of the subject, would thus 
show the hight and the width, and altogether, in 
the three views, each dimension would be given 
twice. Thus the hight would be shown on the 
front and the side views, the length would be shown 
on the front and the top views, while the width 
would be shown on the side and the top views. The 
methods of projection can of course be extended to 
the construction of any number of views, as for in- 
stance, a view of both sides or ends and the back of 
the subject, or to a view projected obliquely at any 
desired angle, as when the subject contains an oblique 
surface which it is desirable to show in detail, by 
placing the plane of projection at the desired angle. 

The general idea carried out in the operations of 




Fig. 84. — Theory of Orthographic Projection Illustrated by the Use of a Plane 
for Each Side of the Subject 



orthographic projections can best be fixed in the 
mind by reference to Fig. 84, in which the subject 
to be represented is, in imagination, placed within 
a rectangular prism or box having glass sides which 
represent the planes of the several views. The rays 
or projectors are partially shown by dotted lines 
carried from the principal points of the subject to 
intersect the planes of projection at right angles. 
In the illustration, projections may be supposed to 
have been made upon the front, both sides and the 
top of the box, although those upon the top and 



the left or farther side have been omitted to avoid 
confusion of lines. When these have been com- 
pleted, we may suppose the planes of the two sides 
and the top to be hinged to the plane of the front 
along the dihedral angles A B. C D and A D, and 
that the three planes mentioned are swung into one 
plane. All this having been done the several views 
would then appear as shown in Fig. 85, the lower 
part of which represents a plan of the glass box. 
The quarter circles, E E 1 and F F\ show the move- 
ment of the side planes. 

In mechanical drawing, any view is termed a 
"projection," the term being qualified when neces- 
sary by the position of the plane upon which the 
projection is made, as a "vertical" or a "horizontal 
projection." Projections made upon vertical planes 
are termed elevations, and projections made upon a 
horizontal plane are termed plans. 

It sometimes becomes necessary to show upon a 
drawing that which could only be seen if the sub- 
ject were cut by a plane passed through it in any 
desired position or direction. Such a view is 
termed a section and may be 
"longitudinal" if made by a ver- 
tical plane passed through the 
long way, or "transverse" if 
made upon a vertical plane pass- 
ing through it the shorter way. 
In the case of buildings or 
machinery a plan is often a 
section on a horizontal plane 
passed through the subject some 
distance above its base. 

The purpose of the idea il- 
lustrated and explained in Figs. 
84 and 85 is to fix in mind the 
nature and relation which the 
several views that can be made 
of any given subject bear to 
each other, from which it ap- 
pears that the elevation of 
the right end or side of 
an object appears at the right of the front eleva- 
tion, while that of the left end appears at the left 
of the front and the top view, above. This seems to 
be the most logical system, inasmuch as, if the paper 
upon which the several views have been projected 
be folded along lines corresponding to A B and 
D C of Fig. 85 and then stood up on a level surface, 
in a manner to correspond with the sides of the 
glass box shown in Fig. 84, one in passing around 
the folded paper would thus see the several views 
of the subject in the same order or succession that 



PRINCIPLES OF PROJECTION IN ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING 



25 





o 




LEFT SIDE ELEVATION 



/ 

// / y ' 
/ / / 

f/ / 

I // / 

' '/ ' 
I l I 

I ! 

J LL_J 



c 

—\F 



FRONT ELEVATION 



RIGHT SIDE ELEVATION 



/ 



''A 

I / 
I I 



o> 




Plane of Front View 



Fig. 85. — Planes of the Several Views Brought into One Plane 



he would in passing around the subject itself. This 
system is now generally recognized in this country, 
and is so obvious in character that it should be ac- 
cepted without question, and yet there are other 
methods based upon a different supposition with re- 
gard to the positions of the planes of projection by 
which the view of the right end appears at the left, 
and that of the left at the right of the main elevation. 
It must be admitted that, in the varied operations 
of pattern drafting, it is not always convenient to 
strictly follow out this system, since for the pur- 
poses of convenience and efficiency it is often neces- 
sary to place the views otherwise, but a clear idea 
of these relations will be of great assistance to the 
pattern draftsman in obtaining many of the oblique 



views required in the course of some work. 

It is especially desirable that the hinging of the 
planes along their lines of intersection just de- 
scribed be understood, as by this means a view upon 
any oblique plane is brought into the plane of the 
general view. This idea or method applies par- 
ticularly in case of the intersection of pipes at vari- 
ous angles where a right section, or, in other words, 
a profile, of an oblique branch is necessarily upon 
an oblique plane, which, for use, must be brought 
into the plane of the view in proper relationship to 
the elevation. 

The one great elementary idea of descriptive ge- 
ometry is that of determining the position of a point 
in space by the measurement of its perpendicular 



26 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



distances from three planes all at right angles to each 
other, all as explained above. Put into the form of a 
practical problem, this principle may be stated as 
follows : Given the position of a point in one view, 
required to find its position in the other two views. 
The position, for instance, of one point in a de- 
sired section or view having been thus determined, 
the remainder of the required points follow in logi- 
cal order. 

Having, we hope, conveyed a clear idea of the 
character and relationship of the several views to 
each other and of the general theory of projection, 
we shall take up the work on the drawing board. 

In the operations of mechanical drawing, it is of 
course understood that the several views of any 
subject are made before the subject is built, and 
therefore operations analogous to those illustrated 
in Fig. 84 are impossible, but since all of the views 
are to be constructed in one plane, as shown in Fig. 
85, projections can be made from one view to an- 
other as the various points of the subject are lo- 
cated. Thus one view plays the part of a model, 
as it were, to all the other views. Especially is this 
true of the plan which is so drawn or placed upon 
the drawing board that its front or that side of 
which the principal elevation is desired is turned 
toward the draftsman, that is, toward the bottom 
of the board, as shown in Fig. 85. In proceeding 
with the work, then, projections are made from the 
front side of the plan to the elevation, that is, ver- 
tical lines are erected from all the angles in the out- 
line of the plan, upon which the hights of parts 
represented by each are set up from a base line, 
called the ground line, as C B. This line is continued 
to the right and left to form the ground line of the 
other elevations, as shown by B H and C L. 

In making projections from the plan to the side 
views one of two courses may be taken. In one 
case the plan must be turned one quarter around, 
so as to bring the side or end of which the eleva- 
tion is desired toward the bottom of the board, 
as in the case of the front elevation, when the lines 
can be erected as before. In the other case, pro- 
jectors can be carried to the right and left to cut 
the lines A 1 E and D 1 F, which represent respec- 
tively the planes of the right and the left side ele- 
vations, as shown. The points so obtained can then 
be swung around the points A 1 and D 1 as centers, 
to cut the horizontal lines A 1 E 1 and D 1 F 1 , as shown 
at the left only, whence projections can then be 
made up into the side elevations. 

The swinging around of the points described ac- 
complishes upon the board just what has been done 



in theory by the hinging of the side planes upon 
the front, as described in connection with Fig. 84. 
This feature is fully shown in Fig. 85, only at the 
left of the plan, the projections from F 1 D 1 to the 
left side elevation having been omitted from the 
drawing, but the application of a T square or other 
straight edge will show the correspondence between 
the lines of the elevation and the points on F 1 D 1 . 
In regard to the hights and all other matters of 
detail necessary to complete the elevation, these 
must be made to conform to the requirements of 
the case, or specifications, for the construction of 
elevations is usually a matter of design or conform- 
ity to requirements rather than merely making a 
drawing of something which already exists. 

In mechanical drawing the students should note 
that several kinds of lines are used for different 
purposes. 

The outlines of the subject represented should be 
a strong firm line, but not too heavy. 

Lines representing parts which are invisible, but 
which it is necessary to show, should be dotted, as 
the outline at the left of the tower in the left side 
elevation, or that of the walls which are beyond the 
tower in the front and right side elevations, 
Fig. 85. 

Projectors, when it is necessary to show them, 
should be represented by a series of short dashes, 
as in the plan of the same engraving. 

Center lines are usually shown by a line consist- 
ing of a dash and two dots, although sometimes by 
a dash and one dot. So far as the pattern drafts- 
man is concerned, either will do, but in drawings 
of machinery the latter is used to show the motion 



STRETCHOUT LINES 
OUTLINES 
INVISIBLE LINES 
CENTER LINES 



PROJECTORS . . 

Fig. 86. — Lines Used in Mechanical Drawing 

or travel of a moving point, or the line upon which 
a section is taken, as the line x y in Fig. 85. 

Stretchout lines, as well as measuring lines, are 
shown by a very fine continuous line, but not as 
heavy as those used for outlines. 

Dimension lines are made the same as projectors, 
but have an arrow head at the ends to indicate the 
points between which the dimensions are taken. 
Fisr. 86 shows how these lines should be drawn. 



PRINCIPLES OF PROJECTION IN ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING 



In the application of the principles of projection 
to the representation of geometrical forms, some 
general statements kept in mind will be of value, 
viz. : 

The end view of a line is a point. A point, there- 
fore, in one view may be the projection of a line in 
another view in which many points of importance 
are located. 

The edge or side view of a plane is a line. Of 
two planes at right angles to each other, one may 
appear as a line while the other appears in full in 
the form of a plane figure. 

A plane figure may be an elevation of a solid. 

The principles which have been explained will 
now be put into practical use in the representation 
of some simple and familiar object. For this pur- 





Fig. 87. — Plans and Profiles to be Used in Fig. 88 

pose a chimney top provides an excellent subject. 
The first thing to know evidently is the breadth and 
thickness of the chimney. Knowing the dimensions 
of a brick to be 8 X 4 X 2 inches, let us suppose 
it to be 28 X 16 inches. The plan will therefore 
work out as shown in Fig. 87. Having placed the 
plan thus drawn near the bottom of the paper as 
in Fig. 88, we first erect perpendiculars from all 
its angles indefinitely as a beginning of the eleva- 
tion, as shown, drawing the lines at first lightly 
until it shall be determined just how much of them 
shall remain upon the paper. The next thing to be 
determined is the profiles of moldings to be used. 
These may be assumed to be those shown at A, B 
and C in Fig. 87, using that at A as a foot or neck 
mold, that at B as a cornice, and perhaps chamfering 
off the upper corner to form a finish, using a plain 
bevel or a small cove, as shown at C. Proceed 
therefore to place these in position at one side of 
the elevation, as shown at A and B of Fig. 88, when 



lines from their several angles or outer limits may 
be carried lightly across the elevation as shown, re- 
peating the profiles (in a reversed position, of 
course) at the opposite side as shown by A 1 and B 1 . 

Suppose now, that it should be decided to intro- 
duce a gable in the cornice mold on the two wider 
sides of the chimney, leaving the narrow or short 
sides plain. First find the center line of the eleva- 
tion by bisecting any one of the horizontal lines as 
at e, and through it drawing the vertical line a b. 
Allowing 18 inches as a suitable width for the gable 
set off 9 inches each way from c on the top line of 
the molding locating the points c and d, from which 
points draw lines at an angle of 45°, meeting upon 
the center line at b. Now, upon lines drawn at 
right angles across c b and b d at any convenient 
position, as at x and y, set off the several spaces in 
the width of the molding equal to the correspond- 
ing spaces on the line in n, as indicated by the small 
figures. Through these draw lines parallel to c b 
and b d, meeting in the- center on the line a b, and 
draw the miter lines through the intersection at the 
bottom as shown by c g and d h. The whole de- 
sign may now be completed by the addition of the 
small cove above referred to, just above the top 
point of the gable, as shown by profile C at the 
sides, the quarter circle being drawn from i as cen- 
ter. This completes the front elevation. 

The plan may now be completed by projections 
carried from the elevation back to the plan, as 
shown, drawing first those from the several angles 
in the profiles at B and B 1 , which will give the plan 
of that part of the molding which crosses the ends 
of the plan. Since the moldings are supposed to 
go entirely around the chimney, they must of course 
miter at the corners. We may therefore draw the 
miter lines from each corner of the plan by means 
of the 45 triangle and take the lines which rep- 
resent the molding across the front and back of 
the chimney from the intersections of the lines first 
drawn, with the miter lines. 

One other point demands careful attention. The 
roof on top of the profile B has been drawn slant- 
ing, as shown by m p, not as a matter of design, 
but as a wash, that is, to shed the water. As there 
is obviously no need of this on that part of the 
molding which forms the gable, one slant being 
enough, a peculiar shaped valley will thus be 
formed from q to c. This is shown on the plan by 
carrying projectors down from these points, re- 
membering that point q is on the wall line while 
point c is at the nose of the mold, thus producing 
the oblique line c 1 q 1 there shown, which is the miter 



28 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 

U 




\ 














TOP 

1 


VIEW 




1 ! 


1 


1 

1 ' 





4- 



\ 



\ 
\ 



\ 



\ 



\ 






\ l 
N 



I \ 



j 



Fig. 88. — Practical Work in Mechanical Drawing 



or joint between the two slanting surfaces, while 
the ridge b is shown in the plan by a right line, 
at b". 

In constructing a side elevation, lines may be 
carried from the several points of the plan to any 
convenient vertical line as r s, as shown at the right, 
whence they may be carried through a quarter cir- 
cle to the horizontal line r t. Projectors from the 
several points on r t are carried up into the side ele- 
vation to be crossed by projectors from the front 
elevation, all as clearly shown, thus locating all the 
required points. Note that the line b 1 d 1 is the pro- 
jection of the oblique line b d, the space between it 
and the body of the chimney showing the roof of 
the gable. 

These may be followed by a projector drawn from 
/ to meet those brought up from the corresponding 
points f 1 and f~ of the plan, as shown in the eleva- 
tion. The showing of this member upon the plan 



will make it a top view, which being the case will 
render the small members in the lower part of pro- 
file B invisible, as well as the smaller mold at A. 
The lines which represent these members will there- 
fore be drawn as invisible lines according to Fig. 
86, as shown. 

After all views in Fig. 88 have been completed, all 
lines called for by the elevation may be strength- 
ened by using a somewhat softer pencil, as shown 
by the darker lines in the drawing and the remain- 
ing lines erased, as those shown between c d and 
g h, those drawn across the mold, as at m n and 
at similar places, and any others which in the pre- 
liminary work have been drawn farther than were 
required. To make the drawing really complete, 
invisible (dotted) lines should be projected up 
through the elevations from the angles of the flues 
in plan as shown. 

An inspection of the drawing will now show that 



PRINCIPLES OF PROJECTION IN ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING 



29 



each and every point in any view is represented by 
a corresponding point in each of the other views, a 
matter which it is essential that the pupil should 
well understand since these operations are continu- 
ally required in subsequent work. 

In this figure the planes of the several views, 
though not indicated in the drawings, as in Fig. 85, 
are hinged upon the line of their intersection ; thus 
the front and the side elevations are projections 
upon vertical planes which intersect upon a line, 
necessarily vertical, somewhere in front of and be- 
tween the two views as indicated by the point r in 
the plan in Fig. 88, and the drawing of the quarter 
circles from the line r s to r t signifies the hinging 
or revolving of the plane of the side elevation to 
bring it in to the same plane with the front. 

A custom frequently employed in working draw- 
ings is to draw the profile of a part, as a mold within 
the lines of the elevation in places where the exact 
relation of parts might not be apparent or where its 
presence may be required. For instance, in the in- 



clined mold forming the small gables on the chim- 
ney above described (while it is of course under- 
stood that the profile here is the same as that shown 
at B) it becomes necessary to have the profile in 
position for use in the operations of laying out the 
pattern of that mold. The plane upon which a sec- 
tion of the mold would be taken can only be rep- 
resented by a line as x 4, since its edge is presented 
to view. The plane of the section can therefore 
be brought into view only by hinging it upon the 
line of intersection with the plane of the front ele- 
vation, which is the line x 4, it being turned in 
either direction, according to convenience, until it 
becomes parallel to the plane of the view and thus 
shows the sectional view or profile, as shown at the 
right of the line. Profiles so drawn are always in- 
dicated by the shade lines placed upon the inner 
side, as shown. Thus the hinging of the oblique 
planes follows the same law which governs the ver- 
tical planes, and if once understood, there need be 
no chance of error. 



PART III 
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



r I ''HE department of constructive drawing which 
most demands the attention of the sheet metal 
worker lies in the field of architecture because his 
work involves to a great extent, the rendering of 
architectural subjects. Sheet metal as applied to 
buildings has to do entirely with their superficial or 
external form and appearance and thereby sim- 
ulates the form of designs which were originally 
made, for the greater part, in stone. For this rea- 
son it is the matter of design and detail and not 
the construction of a building that demands first at- 
tention. 

What is usually known as practical architectural 
drafting applies to general constructive work, such 
as to cottages, city dwellings, etc., in which wood, 
brick and concrete construction form the important 
parts of the work. This, of course, does not con- 
cern the pattern draftsman ; but the details of archi- 
tectural work in the sense of the several features, 
parts or units, which go to make up a design, should 
be made a study, so far as time and opportunity af- 
ford. In this field the classic and the gothic models 
will form the principal subjects to be studied. 

In the case of buildings where an architect is 
employed, the pattern draftsman will have little to 
do in the matter of design beyond the possible al- 
teration of minor details to facilitate construction 
or more particularly forming, as for instance, the 
slight alteration in the profiles of moldings to re- 
duce them to the nearest arcs of circles where they 
have been drawn as irregular curves, and such other 
changes necessary to adapt them to the machines 
used in the process of forming. 

It often happens, however, in the experience of 
the sheet metal contractor that a building is to be 
altered or.enlarged, when an additional cornice, belt 
course or window caps are required. No architect 
is employed other than the "boss" carpenter and 
mechanics necessary to do the work. In fact, the 
owner looks upon the sheet metal man in the light 
of an architect. Since his work embodies the em- 
bellishment of the building, he is therefore expected 
to furnish designs as may be required. For such 
occasions as this it is very desirable that the pro- 



prietors of a sheet metal establishment shall have in 
their employ a draftsman who can do something 
more than merely lay out patterns. 

In the interest, therefore, of those who aspire to 
the higher planes of the science, a short chapter 
on this subject is here introduced in which some of 
the elemental features of design which the pros- 
pective draftsman should become familiar with will 
be considered, as well as the methods of detailing 
the various designs. From this point the study of 
architecture may be pursued to any desired extent 
from such works as are at hand or can be obtained, 
remembering that public libraries usually contain 
reference books on this subject. An excellent work 
for this purpose is Ware's "American Vignola." 
Chambers' "Treatise on Architecture," is a reliable 
authority and other standard works will be found. 

History of Classical Architecture 

Following this course the features of what is 
termed "classical" design will be first taken up, the 
models for which are now to be found in Greece, 
Rome and other ancient countries. These are the 
ruins of temples and other buildings constructed in 
very ancient times, when a civilization, long since 
passed, made those countries the greatest centers of 
art and learning in the world. It is deduced from 
a study of these ancient examples that the archi- 
tecture of these fine examples reached its high de- 
gree of perfection through a long process of de- 
velopment or evolution from the more primitive 
methods of building. 

It will be of little use to repeat here what is 
termed "the story of architecture" beyond the state- 
ment of a few points, viz. : The modern portico 
finds it prototype in the rude hut, built by first set- 
ting up posts, as the trunks of trees, across the tops 
of which was placed a timber or "lintel" to form 
one side or wall of a prospective structure. From 
this lintel to another similar one other timbers or 
rafters were laid across to support a roof, somewhat 
as shown in the sketch in Fig. 89. Looking forward, 
in point of time, from this primitive structure, the 



30 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



3i 



posts are the elementary columns, the lintel becomes 
the architrave, while ends of the rafters, which 
were allowed for safety to project somewhat out- 
side of the lintels, become the primitive modillions 
(or brackets) so frequently seen in modern designs. 
In the perfecting of such crude designs with the 
advance of civilization, the posts would be well 
rounded and dressed and receive capitals and bases 




Fig. 89. — Framework of Primitive Hut 

and thus become "columns," and in the further 
elaboration of the design would be placed upon 
pedestals. The projecting timbers would be cut to 
measure and the roof would be extended out to 
form extra shade and shelter, and thus, when mold- 
ings have been added for decoration, become the 
"cornice." Add to this the supposition that when 
a building is erected for a purpose, it is necessary 
to have a plain surface upon which to place an in- 
scription, and we have the "frieze," which is the 
plain surface placed between the lintel or "archi- 
trave" and the cornice. The frieze in modern 
building is designed to receive both inscriptions 
(signs) and ornamentation, usually indicative of 
the purpose of the building. The whole combina- 
tion of architrave, frieze and cornice is termed the 
entablature. 

Thus a building (or more properly a portico), 
from the ground to the roof, consists of three parts, 
the pedestal, the column and the entablature. The 
pedestal has three parts, a base, a central plain cu- 
bical block, called the die, and a projecting mold- 
ing at the top, called the cap. The column consists 
of three parts, a base, a shaft and a capital. Finally, 
the entablature consists also of three parts, the 
architrave, the frieze and the cornice. 

It should be remembered that these design? orig- 
inated in a warm climate, and that the protection 
from rain and the sun's rays came first and the wall 
afterward, which having been built between the 
columns gave rise to what is termed the engaged 
column, or to the pilaster, whose plan is square, in 
contrast with that of the column, which is round. 



li. order that the roof should form an efficient 
protection from water, it was necessary that it be 
somewhat higher along the middle than at the 
eaves ; thus the two ends of such a roof would form 
gables from which were evolved what are termed 
"pediments," a feature of ancient as well as modern 
design which provides an opportunity for the most 
elaborate ornamentation. 

Such, in brief, are the characteristics of Greek 
architecture, which, as elaborated in different parts 
of that country, became known as the Doric, Ionic 
and Corinthian orders, all differing in their details 
and styles or ornamentation. The material used 
being stone, the spaces between columns was lim- 
ited to the length of stone obtainable to form the 
lintel or architrave which must span the distance 
from center to center of columns, and support also 
the frieze and cornice, the parts of which could then 
be cut from smaller blocks. 



°T 



^ 



« 



V 



I 



-^~"~ ■ 



CAPITAL 

Fig. 90. — Corinthian Entablature 

Later the Romans, imitating their Greek ante- 
cedents, formed the Tuscan, the Roman Doric and 
the Composite orders, of which the Tuscan is the 
plainest, while the Composite is a sort of combina- 
tion of the Ionic with the Corinthian. The several 
orders are most easily distinguished by the capitals 
of their columns, although they also differ in nearly 
every detail of ornamentation and profile of mold- 
ings. Fig. 90 shows the profile of a Corinthian 



3 2 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



entablature, in which the general proportions have 
been very carefully maintained, but from which all 
carving or enrichment has been omitted. In study- 
ing its proportions it should be noted that the 
architrave and the frieze are of the same depth, 
while the cornice has a depth which compares with 
either as four to three; or, in other words, if the 
hight of the entablature be divided into ten equal 
parts, three parts are taken for the architrave, three 
for the frieze and four for the cornice. It may be 
further noted that the projection of the cornice is 
equal to its hight. This set of proportions does not 
vary greatly throughout all of the work of the 
Corinthian and Composite orders. These propor- 
tions also bear a specified relation to the hight of 
the column and the pedestal, which questions are 
identified with the study of architecture, a subject 
treated in numerous volumes and need not be con- 
sidered here at any greater length. 

The profiles of the Greek moldings were usually 
irregular in character and were carefully designed 
to produce pleasing light and shade effects, while 
the Romans reduced their profiles usually to arcs 
and circles. But the one great distinctive charac- 
teristic of the Roman architecture is the invention 
of the arch, which may be described as a curved or 
semi-circular architrave whose two ends rise from 
the caps of smaller columns or pilasters placed 
against the sides of and between the larger ones, and 
whose summit helps to support the center of the 
main or level architrave above, thus allowing of a 
wider spacing of the principal columns ; as the dis- 
tance from center to center of columns could thus 
be the length of two stones, the intermediate points 
being supported by the arches. The moldings, mo- 
dillions, friezes and capitals of the ancient buildings 
were ornamented by elaborate carvings, which the 
stamped designs, called enrichments, leaves, rosettes, 
etc., now so much used in sheet metal work, are in- 
tended to imitate. The designs of enrichments, 
as may be seen by inspection of the catalogues of 
many prominent firms in the sheet metal trade, are 
in many cases only slight modifications of the 
carving still to be seen in the ancient ruins. 

Leaving these ancient monuments of art to crum- 
ble as they must, it is of importance to note that 
approximately four hundred years ago there sprang 
up in Italy a revival of the ancient styles, which 
ultimately spread throughout Europe and became 
known as the Italian, German or French Renais- 
sance, each of which partook of the characteristics 
respectively of the people and ideas of the coun- 
tries in which they were practised. In the treat- 



ment of these styles, more or less liberty has been 
taken with the original models, the result of which 
has been the erection of many fine edifices which 
have had a governing influence upon the archi- 
tecture of this country. The greatest freedom in 
the handling of this style has been employed by 
the French, with whom originated the so-called 
French or mansard roof, named after a French 
architect, Francois Mansard. 

Many of the public buildings of this country 
have been built in this style, notable among which 
may be mentioned the Capitol at Washington and 
the City Hall in New York City. A very fine and 
more ornate example is the new Hall of Records 
in this city, which bears the stamp of the French 
influence. 

We have thus far, as we intimated at the begin- 
ning, treated of the matter of design without refer- * 
ence to material. It has been shown in many fine 
buildings that sheet metal is admirably adapted to 
the rendering of such designs. Referring again to 
Fig. 2 on a foregoing page we find illustrated 
a cornice of Renaissance design suitable for sheet 
metal construction, upon which, for the benefit of 
the beginner, the names of the several parts and 
members were placed. A comparison of this with 
the design shown in Fig. 90 will show that the 
proportions of the former are greatly at variance 
with its classical prototype. Designed as a finish 
to the top of a building, as a store front or perhaps 
a school building, the heavy architrave shown in 
Fig. 90 is no longer a necessity, and is replaced 
by what is termed the foot mold. While the term 
"cornice" properly applies only to the uppermost 
division of an entablature, common usage now ap- 
plies it to the entire design, since it constitutes, 
as it were, a unit of design and is frequently used 
as a finish upon a wall of other material, as brick 
or stone. 

The Gothic Styles 

Besides the Renaissance styles of architecture, 
which have for their antecedents the classic models 
just referred to, those styles which follow the 
Gothic forms are next in importance to the sheet 
metal draftsman. In a comparison of these two 
great schools of architecture, the feature of first 
importance is that of proportions. The designs of 
ancient Greece and Rome were regulated by a very 
exacting system of proportions in which the unit 
of measure was a recognized fraction of the di- 
ameter of the column, called a -module. Thus the 
hight of the column, or of the entablature, or the 
dimensions of any of the details, was expressed 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



33 



by a certain number of modules, in consequence of 
which it will be seen that whether a design were 
great or small, so far as its dimensions in feet were 
concerned, the proportion of one part to another, or 
to the whole, remained the same. 

With regard to the Gothic styles it must be un- 
derstood that they are, freely speaking, quite as 
much a matter of history as of form and fashion. 
Following the downfall of the Roman Empire came 
a period concerning which not much that is authen- 
tic is to be found, a period in which the principal 
occupation of mankind seems to have been war, in 
consequence of which the civilization and art of 
former ages were lost. During the slow process of 
recovery from this calamity the buildings erected 
were but a crude imitation of the ancient forms. 

Thus originated what was termed the Romanesque 
or Norman style, the principal feature of which was 
the round (semi-circular) arch, which had, how- 
ever, little resemblance to its Roman prototype. 



churches, although also applied to colleges, public 
buildings and other edifices, and sometimes to dwell- 
ings. 

Internally its chief characteristic is the groined 
ceiling, forming, in church work, a series of cross- 
ing or interlacing pointed arches rising to different 
hights and springing from the tops of the two rows 
of columns, to be found in all cathedrals, or from 
corbels placed against the walls at a greater alti- 
tude. The highest of the arches meet under the 
apex of the roof, along which runs a heavy rib 
molding. Over this rib carved bosses are placed at 
the intersections of the lesser arches or cross ribs. 
It will thus be seen that the construction of a ceil- 
ing in this style presents many interesting problems 
in mitering and the laying out of curved moldings 
of long radii, for groined ceilings are now often 
finished with sheet metal moldings and stamped 
work. Almost any catalogue of stamped ornaments 
will be found to contain a variety of finials, crockets, 




Bead Cavetto Ovolo Ogee or Reversed Ogee QutrXed Quirked Ovolo Scotia 

or Cove Cyma Recta or Cyma Reversa Ogee or Echinus 

Fig. 91. — Classical Profiles 




Ogee Base 



The columns were short, the arch stones heavy and 
often decorated with zigzag ornaments along the 
inner edge. Moldings were heavy and with little 
projection. These styles were followed throughout 
western Europe and were carried into England, to 
be followed there by what was termed the early 
English. In this style the pointed form of arch was 
adopted, a form which has since become the dis- 
tinguishing characteristic of Gothic architecture. 
As this was the style of mediaeval times, walls were 
finished at the top with parapets and battlements 
rather than projecting cornices. In some of the 
castles of England, France and Germany are to be 
found excellent examples of this style. 

After this came what is known as the "perpen- 
dicular," a style in which, as its name indicates, the 
perpendicular lines were dominant. Its leading ex- 
ternal characteristics are its buttressed walls with 
high peaked roof, its pinnacles and tall spires often 
studded with ornaments. Its window openings are 
pointed arches, finished with many mullions or di- 
visions, which combined to make often very elabo- 
rate traceries. It is a style particularly adapted to 



crestings, rosettes, leaves and capitals peculiar to 
this style. 

It may be said in general of Gothic architecture 
that it follows no system of set rules or symmetry 
of proportions, and much variety prevails in the 
capitals of the columns and other carvings. A thor- 
ough knowledge of its features can only be obtained 
from reading and from good illustrations and photo- 
graphs. 

Many fine examples in this style are to be found 
in England, Belgium and France, as well as in this 
country. Trinity Church, St. Patrick's Cathedral 
and the new Episcopal Cathedral of St. John the 
Divine, in New York City, are representative struc- 
tures of the perpendicular style. Later styles in 
England have been known as Elizabethan, Tudor, 
Queen Anne, etc., all of which may be called modi- 
fications of the Gothic style. 

In presenting to the sheet metal draftsman that 
which is useful in the matter of detail of the several 
styles to which we have referred, we note first that 
what is termed the pediment of the Renaissance 
styles is perhaps the most important feature or unit 



34 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 





<? J 4 5 6 

Fig. 92. — Additional Classical Forms Suitable for Sheet Metal Designs 



of design. On account of its general use and vari- 
ety of form, this feature, with others of less impor- 
tance, will be treated later as a separate subject. 

We shall for the present call attention to the pro- 
files of the moldings as a most distinguishing char- 
acteristic of the two styles or schools of architec- 
ture mentioned. In Fig. 91 are shown the principal 
Roman moldings with their modern and in some 
cases their ancient names, while Fig. 92 shows some 
additional combinations especially adaptable to sheet 
metal, based on the elemental forms of Fig. 91. In 
all cases the centers from which the curves are de- 
scribed are indicated by crosses so that their con- 
struction may be understood, and thereby they may 
be properly drawn. It will be noted that the curves 
are, for the greater part, quarter circles, which are 
terminated above and below by lines drawn either 
vertically or horizontally through the centers men- 
tioned, as shown by the lines a b and a c in the cove 
and the ovolo in Fig. 91. In some of the molds 
formed by compound curves, as the quirked molds 
and the scotia, the curve is composed of two arcs, 
one being greater and the other less than a quarter 
circle. 

As a matter of accuracy in naming the parts of a 
mold, the term "mold" properly belongs to the 
curved portions of the profiles, the vertical (or 
sometimes oblique ) surfaces being termed the fillets, 
and the horizontal straight parts are properly called 
the soffits. The term "soffit" is synonymous with 
"planceer," as applied to the under side of a pro- 



jecting cornice, but in a more general sense it sig- 
nifies the under side of any projecting part. As a 
rule, every mold is accompanied by one or more 
fillets. Thus the ovolos of Fig. 91 have an upper 
and lower fillet, the upper fillet being usually the 
larger. The lower fillet is spoken of as being 
"square," 'because its depth is equal to its projec- 
tion. Square lower fillets are also shown in Nos. 1 
and 6 of Fig. 92. In Nos. 5, 6, 7 and 8 the broad 
plain surface is called a fascia. 

In Fig. 91, the bead, the cove, the ovolos, the 
quirked ogee, also Nos. 1, 2 and 4 of Fig. 92, may 
be used as panel molds; the bead in Fig. 91, with a 
square fillet placed below, is commonly used as the 
neck mold of a capital, while the others of the list 
mentioned may also be used as bed molds. Nos. 1, 
2, 4 of Fig. 92, and the reversed ogee and the two 
quirked molds of Fig. 91, are suitable for the mold 
to go below a modillion or a dentil course. Nos. 
6, 7 and 8 of Fig. 92 show different forms of crown 
molds. No. 5 shows a form of foot mold in which 
the cove can be replaced by such forms as a re- 
versed or a quirked ogee shown in Fig 91, or by 
the forms shown in Nos. 1, 2 and 4 in Fig. 92. 

In strong contrast with these profiles are those 
shown in Fig. 93, which represent a few of the 
forms of the Gothic styles. In the matter of the 
carving or enrichment of moldings, the Renaissance 
designs are often very elaborate and much more 
delicately carved than those of the Gothic school, 
the moldings being first cut to profile, such as are 






Fig. 93. — Some Gothic Profiles 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



35 



shown in Figs. 91 and 92, after which the design 
was sunken into the mold. In the carvings of the 
Gothic school the matter of design is said to have 
been left in many cases to the carver, as a result of 
which rows of columns exist in which the design of 
every capital is different, each having presumably 
been carved by a different sculptor. 

In mechanical and architectural drawing it is 
customary to cross with diagonal lines all parts 
through which the cutting plane passes, covering 
thus the entire surface. In the case of sheet metal 
moldings, when the extent of the surface cut 
amounts only to the thickness of the metal, and is 
therefore too small to be shown on a drawing ex- 
cept by a single line, as in Figs. 92 and 93, it is 
usual to place a little shading just inside the line 
as shown in No. 4 of Fig. 92 and by the one next to 
the last in Fig. 93, since in some cases doubt might 
arise as to which is the outside of the mold. 

Pediments 

It will be to the advantage of the draftsman who 
aspires to become a designer in architectural sheet 
metal work, to familiarize himself with what may 
be termed the principal features of design. We may, 
for instance, speak of a mansard roof, a tower, a 
cornice, or a portico as a feature of design. The 
term may be extended to less important parts of a 
structure as a finial, a dormer, twin or triplet win- 
dow, an arch, a pediment, a belt course, a column, 
a pedestal, a capital, or even a bracket, continuing 
the list down until it becomes difficult to draw the 
line btween what may be termed "features" and 
what is only detail. 

Designing, when strict adherence to the classical 
styles is maintained, consists for the greater part, 
simply of recombinations of features whose origin 
lies in remote antiquity, the character of whose de- 
tail is, however, well understood, and is, in fact, al- 
most a fixed arrangement of details. When fol- 
lowing the Renaissance styles, however, much free- 
dom of proportion as well as of detail is permitted 
and an opportunity for inventive genius is afforded. 
When this point is reached, a more perfect knowl- 
edge of designing as an art, independent of archi- 
tecture is required. Such knowledge can, of course, 
be acquired from books on the principles of design 
and by the inspection and study of recognized good 
examples of architecture. 

One of the most important "features" of archi- 
tectural design to the sheet metal draftsman in re- 
spect to the variety of its form and particularly in 



regard to the character of the miters required is 
known as the "pediment." This feature, had its 
origin in the meeting of the end walls of a building 
with the eaves of a roof built with a ridge in the 
middle, a feature which would ordinarily be termed 
a "gable." While a gable calls usually only for an 
inclined cornice on the ends of a building so de- 
signed as to be a continuation of that on the sides, 
the pediment includes also a level cornice or perhaps 
only to a part of cornice on the end of the building 
and below the inclined cornice, the whole being so 
arranged that the several parts meet at the corner 
to form a perfect and harmonious junction or miter. 

A carefully detailed arrangement of these parts 
is shown in Fig. 94, in which it will be seen that the 
fascia and fillet below the ogee are first carried hori- 
zontally across the front of the pediment, while the 
ogee and upper fillet follow the inclination of the 
roof, a duplicate fascia and fillet being added below 
the ogee at the same angle. By this arrangement 
the profile of the inclined cornice, as shown by a 
section on any line at right angles to the same as 
a b, is the same, so far as the number of its mem- 
bers are concerned, as that on the line c d of the 
level cornice. 

This peculiarity in the design will perhaps be bet- 




Fig. 94. — Construction of a Pediment 

ter understood and more easily remembered if we 
turn back again for the moment to consider its ori- 
gin. As already explained, the antique designs 
were executed in stone. That particular stone 
which lay at the very top of an entablature and pro- 
jected out beyond the frieze (a sort of cap sheaf, 
as it were) was known as the "corona" or crown. 
It was simply a flat stone level on its lower side 
and extending back upon the wall sufficiently to 
anchor itself with safety. Its front surface was 
usually plain and vertical, though sometimes slant- 



36 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



ing back slightly, while along its upper edge a small 
fillet was allowed to project just as a finish. This 
constituted in many cases the entire top finish of 
the entablature. Consequently when a pediment 
was wanted it was formed by other stones, same as 
the corona set on above the level part at an angle, 
the whole taking the form shown in Fig. 95. In 
some of the antique examples the ogee was an added 
ornament, a separate stone set along the outer edge 
of the corona, sometimes not continuously, being 
placed only at intervals and alternated with other 
ornaments, as may be seen in illustrations of certain 
ancient temples. Therefore, when applied as the 
finish of a pediment it was placed upon the inclined 
or upper cornice only, as seen in the several designs 
shown in Fig. 3. A very small mold, sometimes 
elaborately carved, was often placed just below the 
fillet and against the fascia in both the level and 
inclined cornice, as at No. 4 of the same figure. 

The details just described are of important in- 
terest to pattern draftsmen in regard to the char- 
acter of the miters involved. In all cases where a 
level mold is required to miter at any angle in plan, 
with an inclined mold, it becomes necessary that 
the profile of the mold forming one arm of the miter 




Fig- 93- — Pediment Without Crown Mold 

shall be altered to suit the angle of inclination and 
other conditions. Miters so made are termed "rak- 
ing miters." In these cases either the profile of the 
level return or that of the inclined mold of the front 
may be selected to undergc the change, while that 
of the other must remain normal in order to effect 
a miter. This matter is decided usually by the com- 
parative number of lineal feet required of both pro- 
files, it being customary to change or "rake" the 
profile of that of which the least is required. For 
instance, if the pediment mold is part of a cornice 
or other mold carried around or along the front of 
a building, as in Fig. 94, or at No. 3 of Fig. 3, the 
inclined part is raked ; but if the pediment occurs 
upon a window cap in which the returns or side 
cornices end squarely against a wall, as in the other 
elevations in Fig. 3, then the inclined mold should 
remain normal and the returns be raked. 



Another interesting miter occurs at the base of 
the pediment, where the inclined fascia with its fil- 
let and also the bed molds, are required to miter 
upon the roof of the level part of the cornice, which 
is made slanting as a wash to shed the water. Still 
another problem is suggested in No. 3. in the pedi- 
ment or raking modillions (placed above those in 




Fig. 96. — Broken Pediment Used Over an Entrance 

the level cornice), the construction of which is a 
subject for especial treatment. These problems will 
all be treated in the later parts on Developments. 

Pediments are designated as angular or seg- 
mental, according as the moldings of which they 
are formed are straight or curved. Thus No. 2 of 
Fig. 3, and the pediment shown in Fig. 96, are 
called segmental, while all others here illustrated 
are termed angular. The triangular space between 
the inclined and the level cornice is called the tym- 
panum and is properly flush with the wall or frieze 
of the level cornice, and is in fact sometimes a con- 
tinuation of the wall when only a portion of the 
level cornice is used, as shown in the elevation of 
the segmental pediment at No. 2, in Fig. 3. 

Several methods for determining the proper in- 
clination or pitch of the upper moldings of a pedi- 
ment are explained in works on architectural draw- 
ing, but this may usually be left to fancy, remem- 
bering that the angle seldom exceeds 30 degrees. 

As before intimated, the pediment is properly 
used as the finish at the end of a roof, where it is 
treated with modillions or dentils to correspond 
with the level cornice on the other parts of the 
building. It is, however, more often used decoratively 
as a finish over doors and windows, and, with this 
in view, is often made with an opening at the top 
in which to place a vase, bust, figure or other orna- 
ment. In such cases it is properly termed a "broken 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



37 



pediment." Two methods of finishing the mold 
at the top are shown at Nos. 4 and 5 of 
Fig- 3> which are applicable to either angular or 
segmental pediments. That shown at No. 4 re- 
quires a second raking or change of profile for the 
return at the top, while the design shown in No. 5 
calls more particularly for skill in hammered zvork 
in carrying the tapering portion of the ogee around 
the curves of the scroll. 

As an example of a segmental broken pediment, 
which may be looked upon as a model of design, we 
have reproduced in Fig. 96 a photograph of the fin- 
ish over the Centre street entrance of the new Hall 
of Records at the corner of Chambers street, New 
York City. This work is executed in stone and 
shows a shield in the opening of the pediment, at 
each side of which elaborate carvings fill the entire 
space of the tympanum. 

The pediment has always been regarded as the 
place for the heaviest and most elaborate carvings 
of the building. Probably the most notable of the 
antique example of this is the Parthenon at Athens, 
Greece. Though now in a state of ruin some of 
the figures from 
the pediment are 
still preserved in 
European 
museums, and 
plaster casts of 
them are to be 
found in the art 
museums of this 
country. As a re- 
markable modern 
example of this, 
we have repro- 
duced in Fig. 97 
a view of the 
Stock Exchange 
on Broad street, 
New York City. 
This building is 
executed in mar- 
ble and is a fine 
example of Ren- 
aissance architec- 
ture. Our illustration shows also a portion of the 
supporting columns. The design follows very 
closely the Corinthian order and affords a fine study 
to architectural draftsmen whether for sheet metal 
or other material in its columns, capitals, entablature, 
and particularly the pediment in which the details 
previously described are visible, to which have been 




Fig. 97. — Pediment with Figures 



added the carving on the crown mold and the frieze, 
also the pediment figures. 

Having considered the general outlines of classical 
designs, so far as origin is concerned, we can only 
offer as advice to the draftsman for his advancement 
that he seek out and study the best Renaissance de- 
signs ; in other words, the works of recognized 
good architects, both as seen in the buildings them- 
selves when opportunity occurs, as well as in the 
illustrations to be found in books and magazines 
published in this line. 

It is of course understood that the matter of de- 
tail concerns the draftsmen for sheet metal work 
rather more than that of the design as a whole. 

In continuance of this subject we shall take up 
the analysis of the '"portico" for the principal 
reason that, generally speaking, it includes in its 
design much as regards details that is applicable 
to the various parts of an entire structure. 

Architecture has two phases or purposes to be 
considered, viz. : construction and design. In re- 
spect to the first, it is a science which deals with 
the strength of the material used, its power to sup- 
port what is above 
it, or to hold to- 
gether the several 
parts of the struc- 
ture, in which case 
it is synonymous 
with building. In 
the second, it is 
art, more par- 
ticularly that of 
sculpture, than of 
any other classi- 
fied branch, but 
withal it is art in 
respect to all that 
has to do with the 
appearance of a 
building, as its 
size, shape, pro- 
portion of parts, 
color and, above 
all, its decoration, 
w h i c h includes 
sculpture first, of the conventional variety, as in the 
enrichment of the moldings, the carving of the 
friezes, the capitals, and of other ornaments used to 
embellish its pediment, roofs and other parts ; and 
second, of the natural and perhaps higher type, as 
when statues, groups or other figures are used. 
The motive of the art expressed in the decorations 



38 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



L 



of a building lies in the fact that every part has an 
idea to express ; thus a foliated capital seems to say 
that the column has more strength than that just 
sufficient to carry what is placed above it, and that 
its surplus strength or energy has grown out at the 
top into a foliated embellishment, and further, that 
the leaves and scrolls seem to indicate the upward 
movement of growth, thereby assisting, figuratively, 
in the support of what is above. This is particu- 
larly marked in the case of the scrolls, called vo- 
lutes, which roll out under the projecting angle of 
the abacus. 

In studying the uses and forms of moldings, one 
must not lose sight of the fact that the existing and 
oft used designs were created in stone and for 
stone construction. In view of this, therefore, it 
will appear that when a stone is to support a pro- 
jecting stone above it, as an overhanging cornice, 




SQUARE CORINTHIAN 

ABACUS PROFILES 



FOOT MOLDINGS CAPITAL 




PEDESTAL CAPS 



COLUMN BASES 







PEDESTAL BASES 

Fig. 98. — Moldings Arranged According to Purpose 



its upper or supporting surface should be widened 
out or projected forward, so as to thereby assist in 
its work. A projecting molding upon the outer and 
upper edge of a frieze (as a bed molding) will 
throw the point of equilibrium of the stone above 
nearer to its outermost point and thus require less 
weight or balancing power at its inner end. For 
this reason a molding used as a support to a pro- 
jecting part should have a full or convex form, in- 
stead of being concave in profile, in which case it 
necessarily would have much less bulk of material, 
and thereby strength for supporting purposes, than 
a mold of convex profile. Ovolas, cyma reversas, 
and other forms of moldings which are full in the 
upper curves, are properly used in bed molds and 
below dentil and modillion courses, while coves and 
hollow forms may be used where no idea of sup- 
port is conveyed, as in the crown mold or the archi- 
trave or in the foot mold of a cornice. Thus each 
form has a meaning in its treatment. It is a princi- 
ple of art, however, that variety of form is also nec- 
essary in order to avoid sameness or monotony, 
thereby making the design uninteresting. 

In order the prospective designer may become ac- 
quainted with some of the primary facts of the case, 
let us refer to Fig. 1 which shows a pedestal, col- 
umn and entablature, all bearing the general pro- 
portions of the Ionic order. The reader will readily 
note the style and purposes of the several 
profiles. These we have supplemented, in Fig. 98, 
by a number of profiles in detail, adaptable to sheet 
metal work, which are arranged and classified with 
respect to the purposes and placed in which they 
may be used. In the necessarily limited space which 
can be devoted to this subject it will, of course, be 
impossible to give an exhaustive treatise, but a few 
of the more important facts will serve as a leader, 
which the interested draftsman can follow up as 
opportunity affords. 

As previously stated, an "order" (the portico 
from the ground or foundations to the roof) con- 
sists of three primary parts, viz. : the pedestal, 
the column and the entablature, each of which 
also consists of three subdivisions, thus making in 
all nine parts which require analysis as to profiles, 
proportions, etc. We have not given proportions in 
figures, for the reason that modern Renaissance de- 
sign follows the classical forms only in spirit or in 
the idea, varying proportions to suit the character 
or sentiment of the design under consideration. The 
designs shown, which are by no means exhaustive, 
are therefore capable of considerable variation in 
respect to minute detail and proportions. A glance 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



39 



through the collection will show that all curves are 
composed of arcs of circles, usually quarters, the 
greater part being made up of the combination of 
the ovolo and the cove in different positions and 
proportion. Thus the second and the last of the 
crown molds are identical so far as the elements 
of design are concerned, the difference being in 
the relative proportion of the parts. The small 
crosses show the center from which the curves are 
struck. 

In this connection we should mention that, prop- 
erly speaking, the term crown mold applies only to 
the cyma, or to the moldings above a in the illustra- 
tions, but common usage in the sheet metal trade 
applies it to the entire design from the topmost mem- 
ber down to the drip. 

The bed mold of a cornice is usually carried 
around the modillions or brackets to form a "head." 
Sometimes, however, a heavy bed mold is required, 
when the bed mold is so designed that its upper 
members only are used to form the bracket head, the 
remainder being carried behind, or through, the 
bracket. In the illustration the parts used to form 
the heads are indicated by the horizontal lines drawn 
from the profile to the left. 

Coming now to capitals, that part termed the 
"abacus" is generally a square block laid upon the 
capital, which, like the column of which it is a part, 
is round. This is true in the case of all capitals 
except those termed Corinthian, the abacus of which 
is concave on the four sides, thus leaving the angles 
projecting and supported by the volutes, as will be 
illustrated later. 

Molded capitals and the bases of columns, being 
round, are usually of spun zinc or copper, thereby 
permitting the use of somewhat finer or smaller 
members than could conveniently be formed in the 
manner usual with straight moldings. The "plinth," 
like the abacus, is square, and of the same diameter 
as the die of the pedestal upon which it stands. 

The pedestal cap is simply a small cornice and, 
like that of the entablature, has a projection about 
equal to its depth, which is about one-fifth or one- 
sixth of the width of the die. As pointed out in 
connection with pediments, it is usually designed to 
represent the "corona" of a stone cornice with the 
crown mold left off; however, a small "cyma" is 
sometimes used. Pedestal bases usually have less 
projection than the caps. 

The pilaster, which, though it may be considered 
as another form of column, yet has certain charac- 
teristics which distinguish it from the column. The 
principal difference between the two is that the col- 



umn is round in plan, while the pilaster is square. 
In embodying them into a design either may be 
used whole or in part. The column, though most 
frequently used in its entirety, is yet often used as 
part of the wall, in which case it is known as an 
engaged column, and consists in that case of not 
less than one-half, and may consist of about three- 
quarters of the whole column as measured upon 
the diameter of the moldings of the base, while the 
projection of the pilaster may be reduced to a very 
slight amount and it is less often used in its en- 
tirety. 

This will be understood by reference to Fig. 99, 
which shows a plan of each, of which A B is the 
center line. Reference to the plan shows that the 
wall surface in the case of the column could not 




COLUMN PILASTER 

Fig. 99. — Comparison of Column and Pilaster 

be brought forward of the center line without de- 
creasing the diameter of the column. In the case 
of the pilaster, however, the wall surface could be 
placed as far forward as the line a b without alter- 
ing its character or contour. Another important 
difference is in the fact that the column is always 
made tapering in its shaft, the diameter at the neck 
being usually about five-sixths of that at the base, 
while the pilaster does not usually taper. The plan 
also shows that in an engaged column the wall sur- 
face can be moved back to the center a distance 
somewhat less than half the upper diameter, as 
shown by the line c d since, if the wall were placed 
anywhere between the lines c d and E F, it might 
cut into the shaft in such a manner as to either 
leave it detached from the wall in only the upper 
portion of its length, or if placed far enough back 
to entirely free the shaft, would then cut the base 
in an awkward manner. 

In regard to the tapering of a column, the sides 
are seldom drawn straight from bottom to top. The 
usual rule is to make the sides of the column plumb 
or vertical up to a point about one-third of the way 
to the top, from which point they are curved in 
for probably more than one-half the remaining dis- 
tance and made straight but tapering to the neck 
mold. In some of the ancient examples the shaft 



4 o 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



is bellied, being larger at a point about one-third 
of the way up than at the base, the sides being 
curved throughout their entire length, this curve 
being known as the entasis. 

It is needless for our present purpose to go into 
exact details of the five orders, save in one or two 
points. Details can best be obtained when needed 
from some work on the subject. The orders are 
termed the Tuscan, Doric, Ionic, Composite and 
Corinthian, each of which has its distinctive char- 
acteristics. The names indicate their origins except 
in the case of the Composite, which by some authors 
is not considered as entitled to a place along with 
the other four, being by them regarded rather as a 
combination of the Ionic with the Corinthian, which 
in fact it seems to be. 




Fig. ioo. — Entablature and Capital of Temple of Jupiter 

Those who are interested in the study of ancient 
architecture, and who are within reaching distance 
of Central Park, New York City, will find much 
to interest them in a visit to the Metropolitan 
Museum of Art. The architectural exhibits con- 
tained therein consist in part of scale models of 
the most illustrious examples of ancient temples, 
etc., and, in many cases, of plaster casts taken di- 



rectly from the objects which they represent, in 
which, therefore, the present condition of subjects 
created many centuries ago may be seen. 

Fig. ioo is reproduced from a photograph of 
what is termed a "restored" model of a Corinthian 
entablature and capital. Reference to the illustration 
will show a line passing down through the entabla- 
ture near its center. That portion to the right of this 
line is a plaster cast made directly from a fragment 
of the entablature of what was known as the Temple 
of Jupiter at Rome, and shows the effect of over 
2,000 years of time upon its surface, which is par- 
ticularly noticeable on the facia of the cornice, the 
dentils and on the architrave. The part to the left of 
the line is a newly constructed model, representing 
the design in its original and perfect state. The 
capital is also "restored," that is, completed from 
such fragments of the originals as exist. 

This is considered by some authorities as one of 
the best examples of the Corinthian order. It dif- 
fers from other examples principally in respect to 
the interlacing scrolls seen at the middle of the 
capital, these scrolls in other examples usually com- 
ing together somewhat like the volutes at the angles, 
but without passing through one another. 

This subject besides giving a correct idea of rela- 
tive proportions of the several parts of an entabla- 
ture, is in itself an excellent study in the design, 
character and disposition of the enrichments, and 
shows how closely modern renaissance architecture 
follows the antique examples. As may be seen, 
some of the designs here shown have been almost 
exactly reproduced in stamped sheet metal. 

In the matter of details of the orders, above re- 
ferred to, the capital of the Ionic column possesses 
a distinguishing feature which will interest the 
sheet metal worker, and that is its volute or scroll. 
It is made proportionately larger in this order than 
in the Corinthian, and the method of drawing it is 
one of the problems which the draftsman should be 
familiar with, inasmuch as it can be applied to the 
Corinthian volute as well as to scrolls in all forms. 
Several methods for drawing it are given in differ- 
ent architectural works, but the method given here- 
with will render the problem in the most simple 
manner for general application. 

Theoretically, the curve is what is mechanically 
termed an involute, that is, a curve made with a 
constantly and regularly decreasing radius. Prac- 
tically, however, it is made up of quarter circles, 
each being drawn with a radius somewhat shorter 
than the preceding. The amount of decrease in the 
radius is determined by the amount of space be- 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



4i 



tween the starting point of the scroll and the end 
of its first revolution, that is, the space a b of Fig. 
101, which must be determined by the number of 
revolutions required and purpose for which it is 
intended. 

First enclose the space in which the scroll is re- 
quired to turn by the lines A C, A B and B D 
and bisect A B, obtaining the point E. Then place 




Fig. 101. — Method of Drawing Ionic Volute 

the point c below E a distance equal to one-eighth 
of a b, and from c as center describe arcs from A 
and B, as shown by A 1 and B 2. This brings the 
distance from 1 to 2 in the eye of the scroll, equal 
to one-fourth of a b, hence the perimeter of a square 
constructed upon 1 2 as a base will be equal to the 
distance a b, and the points 1, 2, 3 and 4 may be 
used in numerical order as the centers respectively 
of the arcs a c, c d, d c and c b. If now the spiral 
just drawn were continued through another revo- 
lution from the same centers, it would necessarily 
be parallel to the curves of the first revolution. A 
feature of this design is that it is desirable to have 
the space between the lines of succeeding revolu- 
tions diminish regularly, and when the method is 
applied to the drawing of the Ionic volute, it is also 
necessary to have the width a x of the scroll or fillet 
diminish toward the eye of the volute. To provide 
for this, the centers of the four following quarter 
circles continuing the outer curve must be drawn 
from the angles of a smaller square constructed in- 
side the first. The method of constructing this 
square is more fully shown in the detail above and 



to the right in which the numbers correspond with 
those in the eye of the volute as far as given. The 
other figures in the detail show the succeeding cen- 
ters, which are used in numerical order. In con- 
structing the inner squares, first bisect the side 1 4, 
obtaining the point 9, and from 9 draw lines to 2 
and 3 as shown. The point 5 is located at a dis- 
tance from point I, equal to one-fifth of the dis- 
tance 1 9, and point 6 is found by carrying a line 
from 5 parallel to 1 2, to cut the line 9 2, as shown 
at 6. The location of the remaining points will be 
understood by reference to the detail. The centers 
for the inner line of the scroll, starting at x, can be 
found by constructing squares just inside those used 
for the outer curve, as shown by the dotted lines. 
Should the fillet required be very narrow, the point 
V can be so located that the distance 1 1' is about 
one-third of 15. If a x be supposed to be equal to 
x b, then the point 1' may be located at the middle 
point between 1 and 5. The spiral lines are drawn 
from the centers thus fixed in numerical order, and 
continued till they meet to form the "eye" of the 
volute. In applying this method to the scroll on 
the side of a modillion or bracket, the inner curve 
is drawn parallel to the outer, when therefore only 
one set of centers will be required, which will sel- 
dom include more than 6 points. It is usually nec- 
essary to fix the position of the last center at will 
to suit the size of the scroll end or eye required, 
as for instance, the size of a stock rosette to be used 
thereon. In the drawing, point 10 is the center of 
the eye. 

In the erection of an order the face of the plinth 
is set flush with the die of the pedestal (when ped- 
estals are used), and the lower fascia of the archi- 
trave, as well as the frieze, are set flush with the 
column at the top. 

In the case of a cornice or entablature placed 
above a wall without columns, the frieze is always 
flush with the wall surface below it. It sometimes 
happens that a portico is formed in an opening or 
space in the wall, or that a colonade is finished 
with pilasters at the ends, the whole being sur- 
mounted by an entablature without breaks. In such 
cases the frieze is placed flush with the wall sur- 
face or with the face of the pilasters, with the re- 
sult that the frieze and architrave must project 
somewhat beyond the face columns at the top. 

In the treatment of window and door openings, 
either an arch or a lintel is the normal means of 
spanning the space. When the opening is rect- 
angular at the top the lintel takes the form of an 
architrave, which, for the sake of a finish, is carried 



42 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



also down the sides of the opening; and when the 
opening is semicircular the same profile is used, 
since the arch of the Romans is what might be 
termed a curved lintel. When a more elaborate 
finish is required the arch is made to rest upon the 
caps of small pilasters or columns. Again, in the 
case of rectangular openings, that portion of the 
architrave which spans the opening may be sur- 
mounted by a frieze and cornice, ending with what 
are termed "self-returns" at the sides, thus form- 
ing a complete entablature. Modern renaissance 
methods use the cornice often without the frieze 
or architrave, which use is undoubtedly the origin 
of the window and door cap, many forms of which 
are constructed of sheet metal. 

Detail Drawing 

Having possessed himself of a knowledge of 
architectural drawing the sheet metal pattern drafts- 
man will find it advantageous to proceed with his 
exercises by laying out full size details, preparatory 
to the development of the patterns. There are a 
number of rules applicable to laying out details or 
working drawings from architect's scale drawings 
which when well understood make comparatively 
simple that which may at first appear complicated. 
In order that these rules or methods may be estab- 
lished in the mind of the reader, three examples in 
detailing are presented. 

Detail of Square Molded Leader Head 

The first exercise is that of a square molded 
leader head. Fig. 102 shows a one-inch scale draw- 
ing- such as is furnished to the sheet metal con- 



SQUARE MOULDED prr^ i-|-----i I 



LEADER HEAD 



w 



FRONT AND SIDE 
ELEVATION 



[ QCpp i 




Scale 1 Inch =7 Foot 



SECTION THROUGH 

A -3 

Fig. 102. — One Inch Scale Drawing of Square Molded 
Leader Head 



tractor by the architect. From this is prepared a 
full size detail. Since the drawing is scaled one 
ince to the foot, the one-inch scale rule is required 
first for measuring the entire hight of the head 
and tube combined, which will be found to scale 12 
in. Such measurements should be proved by the aid 
of memorandum slips. Thus we make a note of the 
12 in. and by measuring or scaling each member 
separately they will be found to tally with the full 
size measurements shown at the right in Fig. 103. 
After placing sufficient paper on the drawing board, 
proceed to draw the detail by means of any vertical 
line, as A B, upon which place the various divi- 
sional measurements. Through these points draw 
horizontal lines indefinitely. Now we resort again 
to the inch scale rule to measure from the center 
line in Fig. 102 the various projections of the sev- 
eral members there shown, which are then placed 
on corresponding lines in the working detail in Fig. 
103, as indicated. It will be noted that the extreme 
projection at the top measured from the center line, 
is 6 in. and, that the various projections are shown 
by full size measurements at the left, the tube being 
3 in. in diameter, as shown. The quarter round or 
ovolo is struck from the center a while the cavetto 
or cove is struck from the center b. Trace the half 
elevation, just drawn, opposite the line A B as 
shown. Then will E F G H be the front elevation 
of the leader head. Referring to the scale drawing 
in Fig. 102, it will be seen that the head is orna- 
mented with raised discs and triangular dentils. The 
front of the head is designed to have three discs 
and four dentils, and the side of the head (repre- 
senting the distance to the left of the wall line), two 
discs and three dentils. These ornaments are spaced 
in the detail as shown in Fig. 103. Bisect the dis- 
tance c d on the center line and obtain the point e. 
Since the disc scales 13X in. as seen in the scale 
drawing in Fig. 102, set the compasses to ^4 m - 
radius, and using c in Fig. 103 as center, draw a 
circle of i l / 2 in. diameter as shown. Tangent to the 
circle on the left, draw the vertical line / g, form- 
ing a rectangle, shown by / g h i. From these 
corners draw two diagonal lines, partly shown, so 
that they will intersect at ; which use as a center 
and describe a circle of similar diameter. In like 
manner draw the circle to the right. The projec- 
tions of these discs are indicated in the scale draw- 
ing in Fig. 102. They measure % m - an d are so in- 
dicated in the detail in Fig. 103. Since the hight of 
the triangular dentils are equal to one half the width 
of the fascia on which they are placed as shown in 
the scale drawing in Fig. 102, draw a line in the 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



43 



detail 



Fig ich, through 



the center of the fascia, 
as shown by 4 — 8. Now 
divide the upper line of 
the fascia in two parts as 
indicated by 1 — 2 — 3 and 
the center line, 4 — 8, in 
four parts as shown by the 
divisions 4 — 5 — 6 — 7 and 
8. Proceed by drawing 
lines from 1 to 5 to 2 and 
2 to 7 to 3 which operation 
forms the outlines of two 
dentils. Repeat this pro- 
cedure on the opposite side. 
The height or rise of these 
dentils are also l /\ in., as 
shown. As the leader head 
is to lie flat against the 
wall, a perpendicular line 
erected from G to J will 
represent the wall line, and 
J E H G will be the side 
elevation of the head on 
which are placed two discs 
and three dentils, as shown. 
In this manner the front 
and side elevations are 
drawn one over the other, 
a common practice in shop 
detailing where time and 
space are important con- 
siderations. It becomes 
necessary to construct be- 
low the elevation a hor- 
izontal section through 
the line C D, which is 
accomplished as follows : 
Extend the center line 
indefinitely, and at right 
angles thereto, draw the 
wall line L M cross- 
ing the center line 




EX 



Fig. 103. — Working Detail of Square Molded Leader Head 



at t. It is required to set the compasses to one-half 
the diameter of the tube, that is, i l / 2 in., when with 
t as center describe the arc, cutting the center line 
at I. Using the same radius, with / as center describe 
the circle shown, thus representing the plan view of 
the tube. Now from the edges of the cove r and r 1 
in elevation, drop vertical lines below, indefinitely, 
as shown, and from / draw the horizontal line I m. 
Set off this distance I m as indicated by I n and com- 



plete the outline shown. From the corner draw a 
line at an angle of 45 degrees, intersecting the outer 
line dropped from r at s which becomes the miter 
line s and complete the opposite side, as shown. 
u s v w then represents the horizontal section on 
C D, and X X in elevation shows the flange of the 
tube. This completes the full size details from 
which the patterns are developed by the methods 
set forth in the following problems. 



44 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Working Detail of Ornamental 

Window Cap 

The second exercise on making working details 
is that of an ornamental window cap with a pedi- 
ment, a one-inch scale drawing of which is shown in 
Fig. 104 where are seen a front elevation and a side 
view. As will be seen the cornice or cap is to be 
placed over a door or window opening and contains 
corbels, triangular dentils in the chamfer, brackets 
and raised panels in the bed mold with an orna- 
mental scroll in the tympanum of the pediment. In 
this case the normal profile of the ogee is placed 
in the horizontal return, so the ogee in the pediment 
mold will require to be raked or modified, all of 
which procedure we will show in the working detail. 
The first step, as in the detailing of the leader head, 
is to scale the entire hight of the cap, proving this 
measurement by scaling each member separately, 
the sum of all of which will equal the full measure- 
ment just obtained. The rule scaled an inch to the 
foot is next employed to take off the distance from 
the top of the pediment to the bottom of the corbel. 
The measurement is found to be 2 ft. 6 in. as in- 
dicated to the right of the wall line in the working 
detail in Fig. 105. Each member in the scale draw- 
ing in Fig. 104 may then be scaled separately and 
the result proved. After which place these hights 
on the wall line in Fig. 105 as shown by full size 
measurements. From these divisions draw horizon- 
tal lines throughout the sheet indefinitely. Next 
scale the projection of the horizontal return in the 



side view in Fig. 104 which is found to measure 8 
in. and place it as indicated in the detail in Fig. 105, 
where the various projections are marked as of full 
size. It will be seen that the lower fascia in the 
front elevation in Fig. 104 is enriched by a molded 
chamfer, indicated in the side elevation in the work- 
ing detail in Fig. 105 from d' to C, the soffit of 
which returns and is nailed to the window frame at 
a 2 . The side view of the corbel indicated by S, is 
now drawn in position as well as the side view of 
the small bracket and cap shown by R. The dotted 
line R° indicates the sink in the face of the bracket. 
The heavy dots in the side elevation indicate the 
centers from which are struck the various molds. 
Having thus completed the side view, there remains 
only to draw the one-half front elevation proceed- 
ing as follows : Draw the center line, as shown, at 
right angles to which lay off a distance of the one- 
half width of the window opening. This distance is 
shown to be 1 ft. 63/ in. Scale the width of the 
corbel in the front elevation in Fig. 104 and place 
the distance of 53^2 in. as shown in the half front 
elevation in Fig. 105. Extend the outside of the 
corbel to point A, and make the profile A X B alike 
to A° X° B° in the side elevation. From B, draw 
the rake of the pediment B D and parallel to this 
line from points 2 and 7 in the profile B C draw 
lines as shown. Now take the hights of the various 
members between a and b in the half front eleva- 
tion, and place them at right angles to the raking 
line drawn from point 7 in the profile B C as shown 
from a' to b' . Through these points parallel to 



ORNAMENTAL WINDOW CAP 




FRONT ELEVATION 
Scale 1 lnch=1 Foot 



Fig. 104. — One Inch Sca'.e Drawing of an Ornamental Window Cap 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



45 



-v9 










46 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



B D draw lines intersecting the horizontal line C a, 
as shown. Again by means of the one inch scale 
rule, measure the distances in the front elevation in 
Fig. 104 from the corner, to the side of the bracket. 
Measure also the width of the bracket. These dis- 
tances will be found to measure 1)2 and 3 in. re- 
spectively. The sunk face in the center of the 
bracket is one inch wide. Transfer these measure- 
ments to the working detail in Fig. 105 as shown by 
corresponding measurements. Since the scale draw- 
ing in Fig. 104 calls for five brackets one directly 
in the center, lay off the half face of the bracket in 
Fig. 105 as shown by the i l /i in. division. Place an- 
other bracket between the end and center brackets 
thus locating the position of the raised panels. Ob- 
serve that the margin e between the panel or 
brackets is equal to either e' or e" which is i$ in. 
as shown in the side elevation. Again referring to 
the scale drawing in Fig. 104 it will be seen that 
twelve triangular dentils occur in the molded cham- 
fer and that the distance between the lowest line 
of the chamfer return and the inside of the corbel 
in the front elevation, scales 2 in. Set off this dis- 
tance of 2 in. in the half elevation in Fig. 105 as 
shown at c and make the profile c d to correspond to 
C d' in the side elevation. Space the half length of 
the chamfer in the front elevation in six parts as 
shown, and bisect one part, thus obtaining the point 
a", from which drop a perpendicular, intersecting 
the lower line at a". By means of the division cor- 
responding to that used for spacing the six dentils, 
step off from a"' to b"\ etc ; and draw lines con- 
necting the dentil faces as shown. The face line of 
these dentils is shown in the side elevation by the 
dotted line Y. 

Raking the Profile 

In some cases the architect will show a true sec- 
tion on the line L M at right angles to the pediment 
or gable mold, but usually the sheet metal draftsman 
is required to modify the profile from the normal or 
given profile shown from B to C at the foot of the 
pediment. The method of modification, commonly 
called "raking" is as follows : Space the normal 
profile of the ogee B C into an equal number of di- 
visions as shown by the small figures 1 to 7, from 
which points parallel to the rake B D draw lines a 
short distance above the profile as shown. Now take 
a tracing of the normal profile B C with the various 
intersections in same, and place it at pleasure, above 
the raking line B D, with care that the member 1 — 2 
is at right angles to the line B D as shown at N 1 . 
From the divisions 1 to 7 in W, at right angles to 



B D, draw lines which intersect correspondingly 
numbered lines drawn from the normal profile B C. 
Trace a line through points thus obtained. Then 
will B v C v be the modified profile of the ogee. Next 
take a tracing of the mold shown from C to X and 
place it as shown in the rake from C v to X v . Take 
the depth of the return from B° to Z° (8 in.) in the 
side elevation and place it in the rake as indicated 
from B v to Z v . Then will the shaded line from 
Z v to B v to C v to X v be the true section on L M. 
From this true section is obtained the girth in de- 
veloping the pattern for the raking molding. It now 
becomes necessary to ascertain how far the top bend 
at a in the half front elevation will turn back to 
receive the miter cut at the foot of the gable or pedi- 
ment mold. This is determined by drawing a line 
from the corner X v in the true section on L M at 
right angles to the rake until it intersects the raking 
line drawn through C v at X 1 . C v — X 1 is then the 
required distance, which is set off in the side eleva- 
tion from C 2 to X 2 , shown shaded. A flange is 
turned up at X 2 to facilitate soldering. This com- 
pletes the architectural drafting of the window cap, 
preparatory to the development of the several pat- 
terns by the sheet metal draftsman. 

Detailing a Main Cornice 

We come to the third and final exercise in detail- 
ing, that of a cornice with panels, brackets, modil- 
lions and returns. In this connection is presented 
the simple procedure of figuring the various spac- 
ings of the modillions, brackets and the lengths of 
panels based upon the measurements obtained from 
mason's work as occurs in practice. 

Computing Divisions 

Fig. 106 shows a typical quarter-inch scale draw- 
ing such as is usually furnished by the architect. 
The measurements of the piers and windows are 
those presumed to have been taken at the building, 
while the front wall was in course of erection. We 
have the following sum : 

2' — o" 



3 


— 


2' 


— 8" 


3' 


— 0" 


2' 


— 8" 


3' 


— 0" 


2' 


— 8" 


3' 


— 0" 


2' 


-0" 



24' — o" 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



47 



3 10 H 



k-7'4^J e"j<-;'4^ 6"(<-?' 4 ^i Wi 1 ij\ e'WiVs* e '*i'iM 




Fig. 106.— Quarter Inch Scale Drawing of Main Cornice, Showing Method of Obtaining the 

Various Dimensions 



SECTION 



It will be observed that the cornice in this case is 
4 ft. high with 2 ft. projection and that the end 
brackets are i ft. from the building line on either 
side, as shown. The three center brackets occur di- 
rectly over the center of the brick piers as shown. 
With the measurements just obtained from the piers 
and windows to serve as a basis, the various divi- 
sions to the centers of the three center piers are 
simply obtained as follows: 2 ft. -+- 3 ft. -J- { J / 2 of 
2 ft. 8 in.) or 1 ft. 4 in. = 6 ft. 4 in. Continuing the 
simple calculations, we have 1 ft. 4 in. -\- 3 ft. -\- 
1 ft. 4 in. = 5 ft. 8 in., as shown. Since the piers 
and windows possess symmetrical halves, the meas- 
urements of 6 ft. 4 in. and 5 ft. 8 in. naturally apply 
alike to either half. The measurements of 5 ft. 8 in. 
are seen to represent the distances from center to 
center of brackets for the center divisions. Now 
since the brackets are 8 in. wide simply deduct this 
measurement from 5 ft. 8 in., leaving 5 ft. as the 
distance between brackets for the two center divi- 
sions. The distance between the two brackets for 
the two end divisions is readily found by deducting 
the sum of 1 ft. -j- 8 in. -\- 4 in. = 2 ft. from the 
length of 6 ft. 4 in. leaving 4 ft. 4 in. as shown. 
Thus as a simple proving of these divisional meas- 
urements we have : 









6' 


— 4" 












5' 


— 8" 












5' 


— 8" 












6' 


— 4" 








24' 


— 0" 




Summing 


tl 


e faces of 


the brackets and the 


spaces 


between them 


we 


have : 














1' 


— 0" 
8" 












4' 


-4" 







5 '-o" 

8" 



4' 


— 4" 




8" 


1' 


— 0" 



24' — o" 

Proceeding in the same simple manner for the 
margin or stile between the panel and bracket which 
is to be 3 in. as shown, we have 2X3 = 6. Thus 
6 in. deducted from 4 ft. 4 in. and 5 ft. leave re- 
spectively 3 ft. 10 in. and 4 ft. 6 in. as the length 
of the panels, two of each of which are required. 



4 s 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Since two modillions occur between each two 
brackets, and each has 6-in. face, we simply deduct 
2X6 from 4 ft. 4 in. and 5 ft. respectively and 
divide by 3. Thus, 4 ft. 4 in. = 52 in. and 52 in. 
— 12 in. = 40 in. Finally 40 in. divided by 3 = 
3 spaces each of 13 1/3 in. Thus each of the spac- 
ings between the modillions in the 4ft. 4 in. division 
equal 1 ft. 1 1/3 in. Applying this simple method 
of figuring to the 5 ft. division we have 60 in. — 
12 in. = 48 in. H- 3 = 16 in. or 1 ft. 4 in. for each 
space, as shown. 

Preparing the Working Details of 
Main Cornice 
A practiced sheet metal draftsman would readily 
be enabled to obtain full size measurements from a 
quarter-inch scale drawing such as is shown in Fig. 
106, but we present in Fig. 107 a one-inch scale 
drawing from which the reader of less experience 
can obtain such measurements. With the proficiency 
acquired through experience he can obtain accurate 
measurements from the quarter inch scale draw- 
ing employing the quarter-inch scale rule. Pro- 
ceeding with the fact in mind that the hight of the 
cornice is 48 in. and the projection, 24 in. lay 



off these measurements on the detail drawing 
in Fig. 108, as shown. Now by means of the one 
in. scale rule, measure separately the hight of each 
member in the one in. scale drawing in Fig. 107, 
finding their total which correctly computed is 48 
in., as shown to the right of the wall line in Fig. 
108. From these divisions draw lines indefinitely 
to the left, upon which place the various projections 
as shown by the full size measurements all as ob- 
tained from the scale drawing in Fig. 107. Draw 
the outline of the entire cornice or entablature as 
shown. The ogee is drawn free-hand, while the 
various coves and quarter rounds are struck from 
centers indicated by the heavy dots. In a cor- 
responding manner obtaining the full size dimen- 
sions from the scale drawing in Fig. 107 and detail 
the side of the modillion and bracket as shown in 
Fig. 108, drawing the volutes free-hand as shown. 
In placing the cap mold over the sides of the mo- 
dillion and bracket as shown respectively by a b and 
a' b' , it is important that the mold be alike to the 
cap mold at A B. The preparation of these shop 
details does not involve the necessity of drawing 




Fig. 107. — One Inch Scale Drawing of Main Cornice 



front elevations of 
the bracket faces. 
It is required only 
that a section 
through the modil- 
lion and bracket 
faces be drawn 
roughly with full 
size widths of the 
face strips, t h e 
amount of sink in 
the face being in- 
dicated in the side 
views of the modil- 
lion and bracket as 
shown by the dot- 
ted lines. The band 
iron lookout or 
''brace" as it is 
usually termed is 
next drawn in posi- 
tion. This pro- 
cedure is not sub- 
ject to any fixed 
rule except that the 
band iron shall fit 
compactly ' against 
the various parts 
of the cornice in 
order to receive 
stove bolts, indi- 
cated by the short 
dashes. The for- 
mation of the brace 
is indicated by the 
shaded line. The 
detail as shown in 
Fig. 108 serves all 
requirement in de- 
veloping the pat- 
terns for the cor- 
nice as called for 
in the quarter inch 
scale drawing in 
Fig. 106. In lay- 
ing out the girth of 
the several mold- 
ings in the detail 
in Fig. 108, it is 
well to exercise 
foresight in plac- 
ing or locating the 
seams with regard 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 

■2'0" 



~T~ 




Fig. 108 
Working Detail of Main Cornice, Showing Horizontal Joints and Band Iron Lookouts 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



for the width of metal carried in stock. In 
short, the seams should be so located that the 
least amount of waste of material will re- 
sult. When occasionally it occurs that the girth 
is such, that less than the stock width is required 
a width may be selected, with a view to a trim 
that may be used for some other purpose, as sky- 
light caps, dentils or other small items. Various 
types of seam are available for constructing the 
long seams of the cornice. The simplest and most 
common is the lapped and soldered or riveted seam, 
see X 1 ; a single lock seam may also be advantage- 
ously used, see X 2 or a locked seam may be em- 
ployed as indicated at X, Y and Z in the detail. 
Note carefully at X the formation of the seam. This 
seam is secured and made tight by turning over 
the material at X as indicated by the dotted line. 
Note the formation of the lock at Y which is 
turned down at Y°. This lock occurs also at Z, 
the solid line being turned under the wash as shown 
by the dotted lines. In the case of standing seams 
as shown at X, the seams are usually turned down 
at required intervals to receive the band iron braces ; 
or the braces may be turned V shape as shown by 
the dotted line over X. Soft steel is required for 
its working properties in bending these lookouts or 
braces, since it permits bending the work cold, re- 



quiring no heating at the forge. The patterns for 
the brackets and modillion sides may be pricked 
directly upon the metal from the detail drawing, 
when allowance is provided for laps for riveting 
to the parts of the cornice. 

Lettering Applied to Sign Boards and 
Electric Signs 

The extensive use of electric, frieze and panel 
signs renders a knowledge of lettering a valuable 
acquisition to the sheet metal draftsman. The 
method of proportioning the letters and figures is 
comparatively simple. In Figs. 109, 1 10 and 111 
are shown respectively, the Block, the Roman and 
the Egyption forms of letters and figures. These 
formations constitute at least the basis of require- 
ment for constructing the letters and figures for 
the purpose under discussion. 

A rule of simple application is to divide the pro- 
posed hight of letters or figures into five equal 
spaces, taking the width of one space in the dividers 
and stepping off indefinitely as shown by the square 
divisions, when the proportions may be followed 
as shown in the engravings. 

In the preparation of such letters for electrical 
signs they are raised, "stripped" or sunk. In either 




k T i 



■ & M 

I I, J 



■ '« ■■ 


1 M 


■■ 


■ w ^ m 


1 ■: 1 


■■ 


■ Bk 


1 « 


■■ 



■■ : ibl ir mm if lr m 
1 v i 



Wfi 1 1 1 WLI 1 1 IWJWH~ 




■■■ ■■ ■■ ■■ ■■■ ■■■■«.. "■■ ■■■■ «■ * 

■■■ %» urn mw ■■■ ■■■■■'■• ■■ «■■■ «r ■ 
.•■■■ . *%- 



Itll ll llll l UJ II 




Fig. 109. — Block Letters and Figures 



ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, DETAILING AND LETTERING 



5i 



\ I U hl l TI II.I LI M\ 



i f ii i iiiii f iiifiiiiiiiiii i iiii i i M i i i i i i i 



ll l llllllilll l lllllll iiilill 



I-n-ffl-IVV-\lAlI\Tn-lXX-XV-XX-XXXXL-LLX-LXX 

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 

LXXX XC C CXXV CL CC CD D DCC CM M MM. 

80 90 100 125 150 200 400 500 700 90.0 1000 2000 

Fig. no. — Roman Letters and Figures 





mam 



■ 



*■ ■■ *+ m ma a ■■ ■ w-.sm m mi a m sh w ma a ma w ma ■ 4.1 «h~n ■■ 

■■ ■■, mw M ■■■■■■ ' «■■ ■ ■■ li ■ ■■ ■ ■■■■■■■■■ BBBk. -i«« ■■ ■■ ■ 




Fig. ill. — Egyptian Letters and Figures 



5 2 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



case holes are usually 
punched in the letters to re- 
ceive the bulbs as indicated 
in Fig. 112. According to 
common practice the punch- 
ing of the holes is done 
under the direction of the 
electrical worker, but full in- 
formation on the installing 
of electrically illuminated 
signs is presented elsewhere in this volume. Fig. 
113 indicates the procedure of laying out any size 
of letter. As an example, the words SHEET 
METAL are shown. Let A-B represent the desired 




Fig. 112. — Letter Used 
in Electric Signs 



lay out the words "Sheet Metal," in Fig. 113, as 
shown. 

Of course, the punching of holes in letters or 
figures is performed according to requirement dic- 
tated by the use for which the electrically lighted 
sign is intended. In the case of large letters of 
copper, built into the courses of brick while the 
construction of the wall is in progress, copper lugs 
of about 6 in. long and 2 in. wide are riveted to 
the top and bottom of the letters which are built 
in with the brick courses. The letters are then of 
such hight as to meet the mortar joints at top and 
bottom. 

It is hoped that this brief consideration of letter 




Fig. 113. — Drawing Block Letters 



hight of the letter. Divide this space into five parts 
and step off one of the spaces on the line A-C into 
indefinite divisions as shown. For block letters the 
proportions shown in Fig. 109 may be followed and 
for purpose of practice the student may, if desired, 



design will furnish the necessary suggestion to the 
sheet metal worker who may refer to Part XII of 
this work for a discussion of the mechanical 
methods applied to the construction of illuminated 
signs. 



PART IV 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, RETURN, FACE, 

BEVEL AND BUTT MITERS, PANELS, MOLDINGS, 

PEDIMENTS, DORMER AND BAY WINDOWS 



rpHE treatment of miters most commonly required 
in cornice work, are now in order. 

In plain square miters results are obtained di- 
rectly from the given profile in the simplest manner 
possible. 

Plain miters may be divided into three classes, 
commonly termed return miters, face miters and 
butt miters. A butt miter may really belong to 
either of the other two classes, and differs from 
them only in having but one arm. A return miter 
is one in which the two arms lie in the same hori- 
zontal plane, whence it will be seen that if the angle 
be a right angle, as it usually it, one arm will ap- 




Fig. 114. — View of Square Return Miter 

pear in elevation while the other arm appears in 
profile. This constitutes what is usually termed a 
"square miter." Fig. 114 shows a perspective view 
of a square return miter of a crown mold. 

PATTERN FOR RETURN MITER AT 
A RIGHT ANGLE IN PLAN 

Solution 1 

Return miters may be either "inside" or "out- 
side," according as they are made to fit an internal 
angle, or an external angle, as will be explained in 
succeeding solutions. 

A face miter is one in which the two arms lie in 



the same vertical plane and, like the return miter, 
may assume any angle, that at 90 degrees being 
termed a "square" face miter. Fig. 115 shows a 
view of a portion of a cornice having two face 
miters, the lower one, A B, being a "square" or right 
angle miter, while the other, C D, is oblique. 

What ever be the angle of the miter, whether its 
arms lie in a vertical or in a horizontal plane, the 




Fig. 115. — Face Miters 

method of developing its patterns follows much the 
same course of procedure, the difference being prin- 
cipally in the view from which the development is 
made. If the reader will turn for a moment to the 
carpenter and see him cut or saw a miter upon a 
piece of wooden molding, he may learn something 
that will be an unfailing help to him in making the 
necessary drawing which must always precede the 
development. Having placed the piece of molding 
in what he terms the miter-box, the carpenter 
places his saw into the proper grooves or slot and 
saws down through the wood, and in so doing pro- 
duces an olique plane surface, which may be termed 
the miter plane, that is, the plane on which the two 
arms of the miter meet when they have been 
brought together. 

The all important principle to be kept in mind 
is, therefore, that before the pattern can be devel- 



53 



54 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



oped such a view of the required molding must be 
made as will show an edge view or profile of the 
miter plane. The edge view of a plane is a line, 
consequently what is really the miter plane is com- 
monly termed the miter line. Thus when both arms 




Fig. 116. — A Square Return Miter and Method Usually 
Employed in Obtaining Pattern 



of the miter lie in a horizontal plane, the plan 
shows an edge view of the miter plane, as A B in 
the upper part of Fig. 116, and becomes the view 
from which the pattern is obtained ; while when 
both arms of the miter lie in a vertical plane, the 
elevation is the view which gives a profile of the 
miter plane, and is therefore the view to be em- 
ployed in developing the pattern. 

Having now drawn such a view as will show the 
miter plane in profile, placed at its proper angle, 
and at the same time a profile of the mold properly 



turned, the universal rule to be followed in all 
miter work is to first divide the profile of the mold 
into a convenient number of equal spaces, then to 
carry lines from each of the points thus obtained 
parallel to the lines of the view to intersect the 
miter line, and finally to carry lines from points of 
intersection thus obtained on the miter line, at 
right angles to the lines of the view, into the stretch- 
out. 

A square return miter is the only miter in the 
development of which a short and at the same time 
correct method is employed. This we have shown 
in the lower part of Fig. 116, to which we have 
added at the top a plan from which may be deduced 
the reasons why the short method is correct. The ele- 
vation in this view shows at the left, a profile, or 
in other words, an edge view of the return or re- 
ceding arm of the miter. According to the usual 
method, divide the curved portion of this profile 
into spaces, as explained above and as indicated by 
the figures, placing figures also at every angle or 
bend of the profile. On any line drawn convenient- 
ly near and at right angles to the lines of the mold- 
ing (that is vertically), as M N, called the stretch- 
out line, set off the length of the spaces upon the 
profile, placing them in successive order and num- 
bering them to correspond with the points on the 
profile. Through each of the numbered points on 
the line M N draw lines parallel to the lines of the 
elevation, extending them in this case to the left, 
thus bringing them under the profile, and from all 
the points on the profile carry vertical lines down 
to intersect lines of corresponding number in the 
stretchout, as shown by the dotted lines, called pro- 
jectors, at the left of the engraving. A line traced 
through the intersections thus obtained, as shown 
at i', 2', 3', etc., will give the outline or miter cut 
of the pattern. It must not be overlooked that, in- 
as much as the molding extends indefinitely to the 
right, some point in the pattern, as P Q, must be 
assumed at the right of the miter as the other end 
of the pattern. The elevation shows an outside 
miter. In a drawing for an "inside" miter the pro- 
file would appear reversed, turned over from right 
to left, with reference to the elevation, when the 
pattern would of course be also reversed. How- 
ever, if the line P Q were at the left of the miter 
cut, and the lines were continued to the left instead 
of to the right, the pattern would be that of an in- 
side miter, all as will be explained. 

According to the explanation given above, the 
plan is the view in which the edge view of the 
miter line is shown and should be the view em- 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



55 



ployed in obtaining the miter, and, were the miter 
anything other than a square miter, the plan is 
the only view that could be employed. A plan of 
this miter is shown in the upper part of the draw- 
ing in which the profile represents a section on any 
line drawn at right angles across the mold, as x y, 
but is shown as though hinged upon that line and 
revolved into the plane of the view. If it be sup- 
posed to be a section on x' y' , of the other arm of 
the miter, and to be hinged upon that line instead 
of upon x y, its position when brought into the 
plane of the view would then be exactly the same 
as .hat shown at the left in the elevation. Conse- 
quently, projections made from the several points 
in it would cross the miter line coincident with 
those from the profile shown and would arrive at 
the same point in the stretchout as those already 
obtained. 

Allowances for laps may be made at the dis- 
cretion of the cutter, but lines indicating where 
bends are to be made in the brake in forming are 
shown and the prick marks indicated. 

CONSTRUCTIVE VIEW OF COR- 
NICE AND GUTTER COMBINED 
Solution 2 

In the case of return miters, required for a corn- 
ice alike to that shown in the constructive view of 
Fig 117, the method of the preceding problem ap- 




plies except that the horizontal seams must first be 
located to conform to the width of the sheet iron 
carried in stock, when the patterns may be de- 
veloped. The method indicated in the figure is that 
of fire-proof construction. It will be noted that 
angle iron brackets made of 2 X 2 X J A m - angles 
are built into the wall. To this frame the cornice is 
secured by means of band iron cornice lookouts. 
To the top of these lookouts, angle iron is secured as 
shown, and the top gutter brace is secured thereto 
as indicated. Wood sheathing having the proper 
pitch toward the outlets, is then laid inside of the 
angle and band iron construction. To avoid the 
necessity of soldering along the top edge a special 
type of lock is inserted between the metal lining and 
cornice, as is more clearly shown in the detail in 
Fig. 118, in which the top of the mold is shown, 



117. — Constructive View of Cornice and Gutter 
Combined, on Angle Iron Construction 




Fig. 118. — Method of Constructing Horizontal Seams 
without Soldering 

with the flange bent at A B. The gutter lining has 
an outward flange, placed in the position shown, 
after which A is locked over the gutter flange as 
shown at A 1 . It is then double seamed against the 
wood sheathing as at A 2 . Assuming that the girth 
of the crown mold from A to B to C may be made 
up from stock widths of iron, a single edge should 
be placed along the planceer and the lock at the 
top of the bed mold made as shown at D. The 
single edge of the planceer is then set inside of this 
groove and at D the metal is turned over as shown 
in diagram X at a. Where the egg and dart mold 
is attached to the metal cornice, the background or 
metal body is formed to receive the pressed egg 



56 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



and dart, as shown from C to E. The dentils are 
set to the dentil course shown by F. G is the flange 
on the drip, built in as the construction of the wall 
progresses. The patterns for the returns are laid 
out in the usual manner, bringing into use the girth 
of the mold from A to C, and from D to G. The 
method of development is in conformity to that as 
explained in the next preceding problem. 



PATTERN FOR A BEVEL MITER 
Solution 3 

Fig. 119 illustrates the development of bevel 
miters. 

The profile chosen is modeled after a Greek form 
in which that part of the profile between points 4 




Fig. 119. — Bevel Miter in Crown Mold 

and 15 is primarily a portion of a parabolic curve. 
This has been simulated by constructing it of two 
arcs of circles. The upper part, that from 4 to the 
point c, is drawn from the center a, while the re- 
mainder, c to 15 is an arc whose center is at b. It 
should be noted that the two curves meet at a line 
drawn from b through a to meet the curve at c. Of 



course, two formers must be used in forming this 
part of the mold. 

As previously explained, the plan is the view in 
this case which shows an edge view of the miter 
plane A B. The view shown is called an inverted 
plan, that is, a view looking up instead of down. 
The profile is a section on any line as x y crossing 
the plan at right angles, upon which line the plane 
of the section is hinged or turned over to the left, 
to a position in the plane of the view as shown. 
Lines from the several points in the profile follow 
the direction of the mold till they intersect the miter 
line A B, whence they are carried at right angles into 
the measuring lines of corresponding number of the 
stretchout, which has been previously set off on M 
N, all as explained in a previous problem. 

It is easily seen that this miter does not differ in 
any respect from a butt miter, if we remove or 
erase that part of the plan to the left of the miter 
line and extend A B so that it may represent any 
plane in an oblique position, as the side of a tower 
or some surface against which the molding is re- 
quired to abut. 



DEVELOPING INSIDE AND OUT- 
SIDE MITERS AT ONE 
OPERATION 

Solution 4 

In Fig. 120 is shown a perspective view of an 
outside and inside miter. A indicates the exterior 









I II i 1 




1 1 1 III 




II 1 1 II 




II 




II 1 1 




1 1 1 II 




1 1 1 1 1 




1 1 1 1 1 




111 



Fig. 120 
Perspective View Showing Outside and Inside Miters 

or outside angle, while B shows an interior or inside 
angle. A method of developing these inside and 
outside miters directly upon the sheet metal at one 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



57 



operation is shown in Fig. 121. In this case we 
will assume that the angles are right angles or of 
90 degree. If it be a gutter miter that is sought, 
first draw the profile, as shown, from 1 to 10. Ex- 
tend the eave line 2-3 as A B and divide the cove 
mold into equal spaces, as shown. From the various 






C 






1 / 




Inside 

Miter > 


2 ' 

Outside 

< Miter 




For B 


For A 
3 






4 




! 


X 






5 






5 






7 






8 






9 






10 










D 


11 


t 



Fig. 121. — Quick Method of Obtaining Inside and Outside 
Miters at One Operation 



points i to 11, draw horizontal lines to meet the 
vertical line A B, as shown. To obtain the pattern, 
draw any line as A" B°, directly upon the sheet 
metal, and on the metal place the girth of the gutter 
profile, as shown by corresponding numbers. 
Through these small figures, at right angle to A° 
B° draw lines indefinitely, right and left, as shown. 



Then measuring in each instance from the line A 
B take the various projections, right and left, to 
points 1 to 1 1 and place them right and left to the 
line A" B° on lines of like numbers, measuring in 
each instance from the line A° B°. Trace through 
the points so obtained, the miter cut C D. Draw 
parallel to A° B° the lines E F and H G. Then 
will C D E F be the pattern for the outside miter 
A in Fig. 120 and C D H G in Fig. 121 the pattern 
for the inside miter shown by B in Fig. 120. If the 
length of the gutter is to be measured along the eave 
line indicated by the arrow on the line A B in Fig. 
121, it will be necessary in laying out the patterns to 
take the measurement at arrow points indicated, for 
the outside and the inside miters. 

DEVELOPING OUTSIDE AND IN- 
SIDE BEVEL MITERS AT ONE 
OPERATION 

Solution 5 

If the angles shown at A and B in the perspective 
in Fig. 120 were bevel miters, or miters others than 
90 degree, the development of the exterior and in- 
terior angles at one operation may be effected as 




Fig 122.— Quick Method of Laying Out Directly on the 
Metal at One Operation 



shown in Fig. 122. Here A shows the profile of an 
ogee gutter or molding or cornice, as the case may 
be. Below the profile A, draw the plan of the bevel 



58 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



as shown by BCD, exercising care to place this 
bevel so that the perpendicular arm B C is in line 
with the extreme projection of the profile A at 2-3, 
as shown. Obtain the miter line for this bevel 
as follows : With C as center, with any desired 
radius, draw a short arc cutting the arms of the 
bevel at a and a. Using a and a as centers, with the 
same or any other radius, describe arcs cutting each 
other at b. Draw the miter line C c. Now, divide 
the profile A into any number of spaces as shown 
by the small figures I to 1 1 from which points 
parallel to the bevel arm B C, draw lines cutting the 
miter line C c from 1 to 11, as shown. Through 
the extreme point II, at right angles to B C, draw 
the line d c. At pleasure directly on the metal, 
draw any line as F E, on which place the girth of 
the profile A. Through the small figures 1 to 1 1 
at right angles to F E, draw lines indefinitely, as 
shown. Next, measuring from the line e d in plan, 
take the various projections with the dividers to 
points I to 11 on the miter line C c and place them 
on similarly numbered lines in the pattern, measur- 
ing each instance from the line F E. Trace a line 
through points so obtained, 1 1 H will be the de- 
sired miter cut; H J K 11, the miter cut for the 
exterior angle and H 11 L M the miter cut for the 
interior angle. If measurements are taken along 
the eave line as at 9-10 in profile A, it will then be 
necessary to take measurements along the cor- 



responding eave line, as shown by the arrow points 
in the patterns. 

FACE MITERS AT DIFFERENT 
ANGLES 

Solution 6 

Fig. 123 shows the elevation of a cornice pedi- 
ment on which face miters are required and dem- 
onstrates that the elevation is the required view 
from which to obtain the patterns. Fig. 124, here- 
with given, is a view similar to that illustrated in 
Fig. 123. The design shows two face miters, the 




Fig. 123. — Cornice Pediment Requiring Face Miters 

lower of which is a square face miter, while the 
angle of the upper miter is greater than a right 
angle. 

In constructing the view in Fig. 124, first draw 
the profile as shown at the left and from the several 




Fig. 124. — Face Miters at Different Angles 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



59 



angles project lines indefinitely to the right, to be- 
gin the elevation. From A erect the perpendicular 
A C according to requirements. On x y, drawn 
horizontally, set off the spaces found on the per- 
pendicular a b, and through the points thus obtained 
on x y, draw other perpendiculars to cut the lines 
first drawn, as shown from A to B. As a verification 
of these intersections, it should be noticed that the 
line A B must be at an angle of 45 degrees and that 
all the intersections must fall on this line. From C, 
draw C E at the required angle and draw v w at 
right angles to C E, upon which repeat the spac- 
ings on a b as before. Through the points thus 
fixed, draw lines parallel to C E to intersect with 
the vertical line just drawn, thus establishing the 
position and angle of the miter line C D. 

Since both arms of either one of the miters 
shown are alike, we can economize labor by devel- 
oping the pattern for the middle piece, duplicating 
the other arm of the oblique miter from the upper 
end of the pattern when obtained and that of the 
square miter from the lower end of the same pat- 
tern. 

The profile of the mold is shown at the left, but 
it will be necessary to place it in the middle section 
as shown, so that lines can be projected to both 
miter lines at the same operation. This profile rep- 
resents a section on the line x y, the edge view of 
the section plane, which section is brought into the 
plane of the view by being hinged or revolved upon 
the line x y through a quarter circle. 

Therefore divide each of the curved portions of 
the profile into an)- convenient number of equal 
spaces, numbering the points of division as shown 
by the small figures, and set off a stretchout of the 
entire profile on a line drawn at right angles to the 
lines of the elevation of the piece being developed, 
as shown by M N. Draw the measuring lines 
through the points thus obtained as shown, which 
must be numbered to correspond respectively with 
the points on the profile. Project lines from the 
several points of division on the profile, parallel to 
the lines of the mold, to intersect the miter lines 
A B and C D, as shown, and, finally, project lines 
from each of the points of intersection just obtained 
on the two miter lines to cut measuring lines of 
corresponding number in the stretchout, when lines 
traced through the points of intersection thus ob- 
tained, as shown from A 1 to B 1 , and from C 1 to D 1 
will, with the line A 1 C 1 and B 1 D\ constitute the 
pattern. 

One of the principal sources of failure to get cor- 
rect results in miter cutting is carelessness in the 



numbering of points. The profile should in all cases 
of miter work first be divided into spaces and num- 
bered consecutively from one end to the other. 
Then each point on the stretchout line (M N) 
should bear the same number as the point which it 
represents on the profile. If any difficulty then 
arises, each point on the miter line can also be num- 
bered to correspond with the point from which it 
was obtained on the profile, as indicated by 1', 2', 3', 
etc., on either miter line. After this there should 
be no trouble in projecting the several points on 
the miter line into the proper measuring line of the 
stretchout. 

SQUARE PANEL MITER 

Solution 7 

In this problem and in others following in regu- 
lar sequence, various exercises are given in the de- 
velopment of the patterns for face miters in panels, 
as well as in angular and curved pediments. 

The first problem considered is that of a square 
panel miter, occurring in panel shown in the finished 




Fig. 125. — View of Panel with Square Miters 

view in Fig. 125, the development of which is 
shown in detail in Fig. 126. Let A B C D represent 
part of the panel with its section drawn in its proper 
position as shown. Divide the lower mold X into 
an equal number of spaces, as shown by the small 
figures 1 to 10. From these points draw lines 
parallel to D C until they cut the miter line C E. 
In the elevation the lines are carried around the 
panel, to intersect the upper mould in section 10'. 
This, however, is not necessary in the development 
of the pattern. 

The pattern may now be laid out as follows : At 
right angles to C D draw the line D H upon which 
place the girth of the mold X in the section as well 
as the distance from 10 to 10', as shown by cor- 
responding numbers from 1 to 10 to 10' on D H. 
Below 10', reproduce the girth of the mold X, as 
shown from 10' to 1'. Through these small figures, 
at right angles to D H, draw lines as shown which 



6o 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




Fig. 126 
Obtaining Patterns for Face Miters in Square Panel 

intersect lines drawn parallel to D H from similar 
intersections on the miter line E C in elevation. A 
line traced through points so obtained, as shown 
from J to K, will be the full miter cut for one end, 
which is reproduced at the opposite end,- when the 
proper length is known. The pattern for the molded 
miter head shown by B C E F, in elevation is de- 
veloped as follows: Take the distance from B to C 
and set it off on the full pattern, as indicated from 
K to L. In the same manner take the distance from 
E to F in elevation and place it on the pattern from 
N M. Reproduce the cut K N, as shown from L to 
M. K L M N then becomes the desired pattern. 
The lap along M N is soldered at N a in the full 
pattern. Allow laps on the miter cuts of the head 
as shown. 



A TRIANGULAR PANEL 

Solution 8 

In cornice or sign work, panels are made up in 
various shapes and, while the application of princi- 



ples is alike in all face miters, the method of draw- 
ing the miter lines in elevation requires to be care- 
fully followed. Fig. 127 shows a finished view 
of a triangular panel, also its mold section. Fig. 128 
shows how this work is laid out. First draw the 




Fig. 127. — View of Triangular Panel 

center line A C and then draw the outline of one 
half of the panel, as the halves are symmetrical 
in this case, as shown by A B C. At right angles to 
A B draw the profile or section of the panel mold, 
shown at D. The method of the next step, to ob- 
tain the miter line F B in elevation, is as follows : 
Using B as center, with any radius, describe arcs 
cutting the line A B at a, and B C at b. Again, 



TTERU 
SHAPES 




HALF FRONT ELEVATION 

Fig. 128. — Obtaining Pattern Shapes for Triangular Panel 

with any desired radius, using a and b as centers 
draw arcs intersecting each other at c. Draw the 
miter line c B. Space up the section D as shown 
from 1 to 8. Through these figures draw lines 
parallel to A B until they intersect the center line 
A C as shown, also the miter line c B at the bottom. 
If it be desired the elevation of the horizontal mold 
F G at the bottom may be completed, as shown. 
The pattern may now be laid out as follows : Take 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



61 



the girth from i to 8 of the section D, and place it 
on the line H J, which is drawn at right angles to 
A B. At right angles to H J, through the small 
figures i to 8, draw lines, as shown, intersecting 
lines, drawn parallel to H J, from similar intersec- 
tions on the miter lines A E and F B in elevation. 
A line traced through points so obtained, as shown 
by K L M N, will be the pattern for the two oblique 
molds forming the panel. The pattern for the one 
half horizontal mold B C in elevation, is obtained 
by taking this distance and placing it in the pattern 
from L to P. From P draw the perpendicular line 
P R. Then P R K L becomes the half pattern, 
shown by C G F B in elevation. If the panel is 
of such size that the triangular piece E F G in eleva- 
tion may be added, take F G as radius, with K in 
the pattern as center, and describe the arc O, in- 
tersecting another arc, struck from N as center, 
with radius equal to E G in elevation. Draw lines 
in the pattern from N to O and O to K. A lap 
is shown added along R K in the half pattern for 
bottom mold. This lap would require to be soldered 
along K O in the triangular addition. 

PATTERNS FOR AN IRREGULAR 
PANEL 

Solution 9 

Fig. 129 presents a view of an irregular panel 
whose right end has broken right angular corners, 
while at the left end the run of the molds is oblique. 
The profile of the mold is an ogee and square fillet 
as shown. Four patterns are required, namely, two 




129. — View of Irregular Panel 



of A ; two of B ; four of C ; and one of D, the pieces 
being formed right and left. 

Fig. 130 shows how these four patterns can be 
laid out after the pattern for one side of the mold 
has been developed. First, draw the profile of the 
panel indicated by A, which gives the dimensions. 
Then construct the outline shown by B C D E F 
G H J K B. Obtain the miter lines at B and J, as 
explained in the preceding problem. The corners 



at C D E F G H and K being right angles, the 
miter lines form angles of 45 degrees, as shown. 
The elevation of the panel may be completed, but 
if desired, in practice only the miter lines at J and 
H are necessary so far as concerns the miter cuts. 
For successfully drawing a complete elevation of 
the panel, it is essential that the distance K a and K 
b are perpendicular to the outline and equal to the 
vertical mold through 9-1 in the profile. 

Space the lower profile into equal divisions 
as indicated by the small figures 1 to 9. Through 
these points, parallel to J H, draw lines until they 
intersect the miter lines from the corners H and J. 
If the panel be of such size that the flat surface 

FRONT ELEVATION 




Fig. 130. — The Various Patterns in an Irregular Panel 

between 9 and 9' can be added to the pattern, the 
full pattern is laid out, by drawing the girth line 
L M at right angles to J H and on this girth line 
laying off the girth of the profile 1 to 9 in elevation 
as well as the flat surface 9 to 9', as shown by cor- 
responding numbers 1 to 9 to 9' to 1 on L M. 
Through these small figures, draw at right angles to 
L M, lines intersecting lines drawn parallel to L 
M from corresponding intersections on the miter 



(»_ 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



lines from J and H in elevation. A line traced 
through points so obtained, as indicated by N O P 
R S T U V N, will be the desired miter cuts. Be- 
tween the points U and V and P and R, reproduce 
the flat surface of the panel in elevation, as shown 
in the pattern by U W V and P X Y Z & R, re- 
spectively. The entire flat pattern outline marked 

I represents the full pattern for the flat panel proper 
marked I in elevation. 

To obtain the pattern for the panel molds marked 

II in elevation proceed as follows: The angle at K 
in elevation requires an inside miter cut. There- 
fore take the distance from J to K and place it as 
shown from T to /' in the pattern. Then obtain 
the distance from U to W in the pattern and set 
it off from U to h. Since R S in the pattern rep- 
resents the miter cut for an outside miter, take the 
reverse cut of R S or R / m S, reverse and place 
it from h to i. T U h i then becomes the pattern 
for mold II in elevation. To obtain the patterns 
for the molds marked III, use R in the pattern as 
center and with R & as radius describe an arc 
which cuts the line U R at c. Set the dividers to 
equal R c and step off this distance on each line in 
the pattern, through which trace the miter cut c d. 
S R c d then completes the pattern for the sides 
marked III. 

Obtain the pattern for side IV in elevation by 
taking the distance from E to F and placing it in 
the pattern as shown from d to c. Take the dis- 
tance from Y to Z in the pattern, and set it off 
from c to /. Then draw the miter line from / to e , 
which is a duplicate of R S reversed, c f e d is then 
the desired pattern. In this way are laid out all 
the patterns to which laps must be allowed. 

PANEL WITH CIRCULAR END 

Solution 10 

Fig. 131 is a finished view of a panel with a 
circular end. The method of obtaining the true 
miter line between the circular end and horizontal 
mold as well as the pattern for the intersection is 
shown in detail in Fig. 132. Here A indicates the 




section of the panel mold and B C D E shows the 
outline of the panel, the curve B E being struck 
from the center c. The first step is to divide the 
lower part of the mold into equal spaces as shown 
by the small figures 1 to 8. Through these points 
draw lines indefinitely, parallel to E D, as shown. 
Complete the miter lines H D and G C, which are 
angles of 45 degrees. Draw the perpendicular line 
a b crossing the lines previously drawn, as shown 
by the heavy dots. Take a reproduction of the di- 
visions on a b and place them on the radial line, 

FRONT ELEVATION 




Fig. 131. — View of Panel with Circular End 



Fig. 132. — Pattern for Panel Having Circular End 

drawn from the center c, as a'- b' , taking care that 
dot d on the line b a is placed on the intersection 
between the curve B E and line a' b' indicated by d' ■ 
Then, using c as center, with the dots on a' V as the 
various radii, describe arcs, cutting the lines drawn 
through points I to 8 in the section, resulting in the 
points of intersections shown along the miter line J e. 
Note that this miter line J c is not straight, but 
effects a curvature because the radii of the arcs 
are of differing lengths. The pattern is now in 
order. The girth of the entire panel section is 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



63 



placed on the line L M, which is placed at right 
angles to E D. Draw lines at right angles to L M, 
through the small figures 1 to 1 , and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to L M from similar points 
on the miter lines E J and H D in elevation. Trace 
a line through these points, when N O P R will be 
the desired pattern cuts. With c-8' in elevation 
as radius and S and T in the pattern as centers 
describe arcs which cut each other at U. Using 
the same radius, with U as center, describe the arc 
T S. The pattern for the molded head C D H G 
in elevation is found as by the method illustrated in 
Fig. 126. The method of obtaining the various 
patterns for the circular head indicated by B E J F 
in elevation in Fig. 132 is taken up in the part 
treating of radial line developments. Allow laps on 
all patterns for soldering purposes. 



METHOD OF TREATING VASES IN 
ANY NUMBER OF PIECES 

Solution 11 

Classed along with cornice work is the vase or 
pedestal in any number of pieces. Vases as orig- 
inally designed have usually been circular in plan, 
though sometimes elliptical, and have at times been 
cut in stone of polygonal form in any number of 
sides. As constructed of sheet metal, they may of 
course be spun in copper or zinc, and are thus round 
in plan. When made in pieces the plan is a poly- 
gon of any number of sides, and the greater the 
number of sides the more nearly is the circle ap- 
proached or simulated. Those best suited to archi- 
tectural purposes are made with four, eight, twelve 
or sixteen sides, as, when thus made, a side of the 
vase is then parallel to each of the four sides of a 
pedestal upon which it may and usually does stand. 
This fact is further shown in the plan of the twelve- 
sided object shown in Fig. 133 at the right. 

Pedestals, so far as their construction in sheet 
metal is concerned, are included in the same class as 




PATTERN 



Fig. 134. — Pattern for Octagonal Vase 



64 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



vases. In plan they are usually square throughout 
or square at the base and cap, and octagon in the 
shaft or die. 

Since the making of a vase is, with the sheet 
metal worker, more or less a matter of design, we 
may pause here to say a few words in respect to that 
feature. In the majority of cases the design is 
provided by the architect of the building or cornice 
on which it is intended to be used as a decoration. 
But in some cases the cornice maker may be re- 
quired to provide the design to the best of his abil- 
ity. In making the design, therefore, he must take 
into consideration that a vase is, in a majority of 
cases, to be viewed from a point below its level, un- 
less perchance it is to be placed upon a lawn or a 
porch, when it is, of course, below the eye. The 
designer must therefore consider how a molding or 
any part will appear as seen from a chosen point of 
view, or, in other words, what parts will be seen 
and what will not. For this reason it would be 
useless, if to be viewed from below, to introduce 
many members or an extra amount of ornamenta- 
tion between points A and B or from C to the top 
in the design shown at the left in Fig. 134. For 
instance, the molding shown at A may be made 
according to the profile there given, or it may be 
made as shown at D to the right, and the difference 
will not be apparent. On the contrary, the molding 
shown above B will come into full view, and there- 
fore may be elaborated to any advisable extent ; and 
the same is true of all parts up to point C. 

In designing the profile of a vase it is not neces- 
sary to adhere to the use of arcs of circles to the 
same extent that it is in profiling a molding, for the 
reason that the strips or patterns are narrow and 
the curves usually large and are thus easily formed. 

In the study of shapes or profiles of vases gen- 
erally, the student is referred to any of the many 
works on classical architecture. 

In drawing the design the elevation must, of 
course, be projected from the plan and the plan so 
placed upon the paper that the center line of one of 
the sides (the side from which the pattern is to be 
obtained) is in a horizontal position, as at E M. 
The correctness of the pattern, of course, depends 
entirely upon the angle made by the two lines E F 
and E G. 

The safest means of obtaining this angle is to 
construct the entire plan, that is, to divide a cir- 
cle into the required number of parts in such a man- 
ner that one-half of the angle F E G shall be on 
each side of the horizontal line E M. This having 
been done, it now remains to divide the entire pro- 



file of the vase or pedestal into spaces as shown by 
the small figures, and to then set off a stretchout of 
the same upon E M extended as shown by M N. 
Lines from every point of division may now be 
dropped vertically upon the lines E F and E G of 
the plan and then projected horizontally into the 
measuring lines of corresponding number in the 
stretchout, all as shown. Line drawn through points 
thus obtained will then constitute the pattern for 
one piece, which must be duplicated to make up the 
required number of pieces. 

We may here remark that it is not always neces- 
sary, as some are apt to think, that any portion of 
the profile, as, for instance, the part from o to 8, 
must be divided into equal spaces. In this case the 
spaces from o to 5 are equal, but larger than those 
from 5 to 8. This becomes necessary from the fact 
that the upper part of this line is more curved than 
the lower part. The same is true of the large curve 
above, in which, for the same reason, the spaces 
from 14 to 19 are larger than those from 19 to 23. 
It is, however, necessary that what ever spaces are 
assumed upon the profile must be reproduced upon 
the stretchout in the order taken. 

The gore pieces between o and the base will be 
treated in a subsequent problem. 

BEVEL AND BUTT MITER FOR AN 

OCTAGONAL BAY WINDOW 

RETURN 

Solution 12 

If an octagonal bay window has but three sides 
and the octagonal sides butt obliquely against walls, 
as shown in the plan and elevation in Fig. 135, the 
octagonal sides or returns require two forms of 



1 


1 


1 .. i_ 


FRONT 
ELEVATION 


1 1 


1 1 


1 


1 


T^— 


H 


Flashinq 


/\ 


1 ) 1 


' tl 






= . — r= 


i^E=F= 






135. — Elevation and Plan Showing Miter Patterns 
Required on Octagonal Bay Window 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



65 



miter, the one against the wall at A in plan being 
a butt miter, and the one at B an octagon or bevel 
miter. While, in this case, the angle B is octagonal 
the methods of development are alike whether or 
not the angle B is more or less than an octagon. 
The method of developing these patterns shapes is 
shown in detail in Fig. 136. First draw the plan 
of the wall line as A B and from this line place the 



tended. Note the formation of the drip at the 
bottom of the cornice, where it is bent as indicated 
by 19-20-21-22. In this groove is set the lower part 
of the cornice, as shown at a. Then the flange 21- 
22 is locked around a as shown at b. This effects a 
rigid lock, and by means of an edge bent as at a, the 
buckles and wrinkles are removed from the lower 
part of the cornice, which would have a tendency 



BUTT 

MITER AGAINST 

WALL 




Fig. 136. — Obtaining Patterns for Octagonal Bay Window Return Miters 



angle C D E in its correct position, as shown. The 
line D E must be accurately parallel to A B. Bi- 
sect the angle C D E by means of the arcs c d and 
e, as previously described, and draw the miter line 
indefinitely as shown by c D F. Extend the line 
C D indefinitely, as shown by C D 19 and on this 
place the profile of the cornice, in its correct posi- 
tion, as shown, having the planceer of the cornice, 
13-14, accurately perpendicular to the line C D ex- 



to buckle without the strengthening of the edge a. 
The profile is spaced into equal divisions and points 
and corners are numbered, as shown from 1 to 22. 
From these small figures, parallel to D C, lines are 
erected to intersect the miter line D F, as well as 
the wall line B A, as shown by the dotted lines. To 
obtain patterns proceed by drawing, at right angles 
to C D in plan, the stretchout line H J on which 
place the girth of the profile of the cornice, as shown 



66 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



by like numbers i to 22 on the line H J. Through 
these small figures, at right angle to H J, draw lines, 
intersecting lines drawn parallel with H J from 
similar intersections on the wall line A B and miter 
line D F. Trace a line through points thus ob- 
tained. K L will be the miter cut tor the bevel 
miter F D and M N the miter cut for the butt miter 
against the wall G C. Allow laps for joining. 



BASE OF AN OCTAGONAL BAY 
WINDOW, MITERING OBLIQUE- 
LY AGAINST THE WALL, RE- 
QUIRING RAKED PROFILES 

Solution 13 

The present example is that of an octagonal bay 
window whose design constitutes three sides of an 
octagon thus causing the octagonal sides to miter 
obliquely against the wall of the house of which it 
is a part, as shown in the perspective view in Fig. 
137. The method of developing the base of a bay 




Fig. 137. — Octagonal Bay Win- 
dow in which Oblique Sides Miter 
Against the Wall of the House 



of this class is shown in Fig. 138. First draw the 
center line A — D. Then draw the half elevation of 
the base of the bay, as shown by A — 2 — 12 — 18. It 
should be understood that the profile shown in ele- 
vation from 1 to 18, represents the miter or joint 



line between the oblique return C — B in plan against 
the wall line. From this miter line 1 to 18 in eleva- 
tion must be found the true profiles of the base at 
right angles to B — C and C — D in plan, as follows : 
In line with the elevation, establish the outline of 
the base B — C — D in plan, and draw the miter line 
C — E. Divide the profile in elevation into an equal 
number of parts, as shown by the small figures 1 
to 18, from which points drop perpendicular lines to 
meet the wall line in plan as shown (without num- 
bers), and from these divisions parallel to B — C 
in plan, draw lines to intersect the miter line C — E. 
From these intersections, parallel to C — D, draw 
lines to cross the center line as shown by similar 
numbers. At right angles to B — C, from the point 
E, draw indefinitely the line E — F, and intersect it 
by the lines in B — C — E extended (without num- 
bers). Now, take the various intersections on the 
line E — F in plan and place them to the right of the 
elevation on the horizontal line E 1 — F 1 where they 
are correctly numbered. In a similar manner take 
the various intersections on the line E — D in plan 
and place them on the horizontal line E° — D° to 
the right of the elevation as shown by similar num- 
bers. Next, at right angles to E 1 — F 1 , also to E° — D° 
draw lines, which intersect by horizontal lines drawn 
from like numbers in the profile in elevation. Trace 
a line through points so obtained. Then will the 
profile from 1' to 18' be the true profile through 
E — F in plan and the profile from i° to 18° the 
true profile through E — D in plan. The pattern for 
the oblique side C — B in plan, may now be de- 
veloped as follows : At right angles to C — B, draw 
any line, as H — J, on which place the girth of the 
profile 1' to 18' as shown by similar numbers on 
H — J. Through these small figures at right angles 
to H — J draw lines, which intersect by lines drawn 
parallel to H — J from similar intersections on the 
wall line E — B and on the miter line C — E. Trace 
a line through points so obtained. Then will K — L — 
M be the pattern for the side C — B. In a correspond- 
ing manner, take the girth of the profile from 1° to 
18 and place it on the center line extended as 
N — O, as shown by like numbers. From these small 
figures, at right angles to N — O, draw lines, which 
intersect by lines drawn parallel to N — O from sim- 
ilarly numbered intersections on the n^iter line 
C — E. Trace a line through points so obtained. 
Then will N — O — P be the half pattern for the 
front D — C in plan. The patterns shown are net, 
requiring allowance for flanges for riveting and 
soldering. 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



67 



ONE HALF ELEVATION 
OF BASE 



TRUE PROFILE 
THROUGH E-F 




138. — Patterns for Base of Octagonal Bay in Which 
Oblique Sides Miter Against Wall. 



68 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



BASE OF A SQUARE BAY WINDOW, 
REQUIRING RAKED PROFILES 

Solution 14 

The illustration presented in Fig. 139, shows a 
perspective view of a rectangular bay window, in 
which case the construction concerns only the soffit 
or under side of the projecting bay. The laying out 
of the surfaces forming this part, requires the de- 
velopment of new or raked profiles and is therefore 




Fig. 139. — Rectangular Bay Window 

more complicated geometrically than would be the 
development of the patterns for the upper parts 
shown in the perspective, which have been treated 
in preceding solutions. The method of raking the 
profiles and developing the patterns is shown in Fig. 
140. First draw the center line A — D, and con- 
struct the half elevation of the bottom of the bay as 
shown by A — 2 — 18. Below the elevation in its 
proper position draw the outline of the plan B — C 
— D as shown. The profile in elevation from 1 to 18 
represents the true section on T — B in plan. The 
only part of the profile to be raked, is that shown 
from 8 to 18 in elevation, as the upper portion 
8 to 1 is a square miter, represented in plan by the 
miter line C — E, drawn at an angle of 45 degrees, 
while from E, which represents point 8 in elevation, 
a miter line is drawn from E to T. Space the given 
profile in elevation into equal divisions, as shown 
by the small figures 1 to 18, from which points draw 
perpendicular lines to intersect the miter line 



C — E — T in plan. From these intersections draw 
lines parallel to C — D to meet the center line T — D, 
as shown by numbers alike, to those in the elevation. 
The true profile on the line T — D in plan is ob- 
tained as follows : Take the various divisions on 
the line T — D and place them to the right of the 
elevation on the horizontal line T 1 — D 1 , as shown by 
corresponding numbers. From these points, draw 
perpendicular lines to intersect horizontal lines 
drawn from corresponding numbers in the profile 
in elevation. A line traced through points so ob- 
tained, as shown from 1' to 18', will be the profile 
sought. The patterns may now be developed, as 
follows: Extend the wall line T — B as F — G on 
which place the girth of the return profile 1 to 18 
in elevation, as shown by corresponding numbers 
on F — G. From these small figures, at right angles 
to F- — G, draw lines, which intersect by lines drawn 
parallel to F — G from similar intersections on the 
miter line T — E — C in plan. Trace a line through 
points so obtained. Then will F — H — G represent 
the pattern for the return molding C — B in plan. 
In like manner, take the girth of the true profile 
through T — D, and place it on the center line A — D 
extended as J — K, as shown by corresponding 
numbers 1' to 18'. Through these small figures, at 
right angles to J — K, draw lines, which intersect by 
lines drawn parallel to J — K from similar intersec- 
tions on the miter line T — E — C in plan. A line 
traced through points so obtained, as shown by 
L — M — N — J, will be the one-half pattern for front 
D — C in plan. Allow flanges for soldering and rivet- 
ing, as the patterns shown are net. 



BASE OF AN IRREGULAR BAY 

WINDOW HAVING FIVE SIDES, 

REQUIRING TWO CHANGES 

OF PROFILES 

Solution 15 

Fig. 141 shows the plan and elevation of the base 
of a bay window having five sides, the two outer 
sides being very narrow, constituting only short re- 
turns, the window meeting the wall line of the main 
building at right angles. The given profiles are 
shown in the short returns, X ; the changes or modi- 
fications of profiles take place in the front, A, and 
in the oblique sides, B, of the base. 

The method of finding these modified or raked 
profiles together with their patterns, is shown in 
detail in Fig. 142. In this figure the wall line in 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



69 



ONE HALF 
ELEVATION OF BASE 




Fig. 140. — Pattern for Bay Window Base at Right Angles 
in Plan, Having Dissimilar Profiles 

plan is first drawn, as shown by B B°. Then draw 
the outline of the irregular bay window, as shown 
by B E F G H J, and from the corners, draw the 
miter lines to the center A, as shown, the center A 
being the bisection of B J. In practice it is not nec- 
essary to draw the full plan as the half shown by 
B D A serves the requirement. Through the center 
A in plan, draw the perpendicular line K L and 



above the plan draw the profile of the base as in- 
dicated by 1 — 17 — 1°. The profile shown from 1 
to 17 then represents the true profile for the short 
returns shown in the plan through A B. Divide this 
profile into equal spaces as shown by the small fig- 
ure 1 to 17, and from these points at right angles to 
B J in plan, draw lines cutting the miter line E A, as 
shown by corresponding numbers. From these di- 
visions on E A, parallel to E F, draw lines cutting 
the miter line F A, from which points, parallel to 
F G, draw lines cutting the center line A D, as 
shown by the heavy dots and partly by numbers. 

ELEVATION OF BASE 
OF BAY 




PROFILE 
AT X 



//y////j////////W^^ 




SOFFIT PLAN 

Fig. 141.— Plan and Elevation of Bay Window Having 
Base of Five Sides 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




O 



bo 

c 



J3 

U 



3 

cr 
<u 
K 

wT 

."2 

> 

E 

to 

CD 

ffl 



o 
-a 

c 



n 



3 
SO 






bo 






PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



7i 



Continue these lines until they intersect the miter 
line G A as shown. Continue the line E F in plan, 
until it intersects a line drawn from the center A at 
right angles to E F at C. By measurements it will 
be found that the distance A B is greater than that 
of A C, and of A C than of A D, so that a modified 
or changed profile must be found on the line A C as 
well as on line A D. These modified profiles can be 
taken from the plan or from the elevation. In order 
that the two methods may be understood, an ex- 
planation of each, will be given. 

To obtain the modified profile from the elevation, 
on the line A D in plan, proceed as follows : Take 
the various divisions on A D as indicated by the 
heavy dots, partly numbered from 1 to 7, and place 
them on the horizontal line A° D° to the right of the 
elevation, as shown. From these points at right 
angles to A D° draw lines, which intersect lines 
drawn parallel to B B°, from similarly numbered in- 
tersections in the true profile in elevation. Trace a 
line through points so obtained, as shown from D° 
to 17, which is the true profile for the front side of 
the bay window base. The true section of the 
oblique sides of the base on the line C A in plan can 
be obtained directly from the plan, as follows : 
From the various intersections 1 to 17 on the miter 
line E A in plan, draw lines indefinitely, parallel to 
F E, as shown to the left. At right angles to these 
lines draw the line a' b'. Then, measuring from the 
line a b in elevation, take the various hights to points 
1 to 17 in the profile, and place them on similarly 
numbered lines, measuring in each instance from the 
line a' b'. Trace a line through points so obtained, 
as shown from 1" to 17", thus obtaining the desired 
profile. The modified profiles having been secured 
the patterns are in order of procedure. 

For obtaining the pattern of the short return, in- 
dicated by A B E in plan, take the girth of the pro- 
file shown in the front elevation and place it on the 
line A B extended as N M, as shown. Through these 
small figures at right angles to N M draw lines in- 
tersecting lines drawn parallel to N M from sim- 
ilarly numbered intersections on the miter line E A 
(partly shown). A line traced as indicated by 
N R M will be the desired pattern. For the pattern 
of the oblique side, draw any line, as O P, at right 
angles to E F in plan, and upon this line place the 
girth of the true profile through A C (measuring 
each space separately as they are all unequal), as 
shown by similar numbers on O P. Through these 
small figures, at right angles to O P, draw lines in- 
tersecting lines drawn parallel to O P, from similar 
intersections on the miter lines E A and A F in plan. 



Trace a line through points so obtained when E F S 
will be the oblique side pattern. The pattern for the 
front of the bay F G in plan is developed by taking 
the girth of the true profile through A D, and plac- 
ing it on the center line A L as shown by correspond- 
ing numbers. Through these small figures draw, 
parallel to F G, lines intersecting those drawn 
parallel to A L, from corresponding points on the 
miter lines F A and AG. T U 17 gives the desired 
pattern. Laps are provided on both cuts of the 
pattern for oblique sides, as shown by the dotted 
lines. The miter lines are not projected in the ele- 
vation, as they would afford no service in securing 
the patterns. 

CONSTRUCTION OF A COPPER 
BAY WINDOW 

Solution 16 

It was thought that our readers who have to do 
with the construction of metal windows would be 
interested in and assisted by this presentation of 




Fig. 143. — View of Copper Bay Window 



7^ 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



■ <>% 



A 



SIDE 
ELEVATION 




Dlam- b l /n 




SccF.S.D. "D" 



,SccF.S:D. "E" 



3' = 



}i PLAN 
Scaled = 1 




4PLAN OF SOFFIT 
Looking up 

Fig. 144 
Scale Drawing of Bay, with Full Size Measurements 

the working drawings and description of methods 
of assembling and erecting a copper bay. The 
methods are descriptive of an actual example of 
successfully executed work, indicating the detail of 
procedure followed in this case. 

In the copper bay window under consideration is 
shown the method of construction upon the angle 
iron and terra cotta of a fireproof building. Special 
attention is given to preparing the details, locating 
the proper positions of the blockings, as well as se- 



curing the copper work to the 
building. 

In Fig. 143 is presented a 
photographic view of the win- 
dow. In Fig. 144 is shown a 
typical scale drawing of this 
bay, with full size measure- 
ments, as received from the 
architect. The one-half front 
elevation is shown as well as 
the side elevation and section, 
also the half plan and the half 
plan of the soffit. The draw- 
ings are made to a scale of 
l /4 in. to the foot. The ab- 
breviations throughout these 
scale drawings, as "F. S. D.," 
indicate full size details which 
are shown elsewhere, and cor- 
respond to the letters pre- 
sented. For instance, "See F. 
S. D. A." means see full size 
detail marked A, etc. 

The first step in working 
from the scale drawing is to 
study the various views, and 
ascertain where the joints had 
best be made and what parts 
can be completed in the shop. This is determined by 
the size of the various parts and the available means 
of transportation. As the hight of the base of the 
bay from A" to B° in the half front elevation is 4 ft. 
6j4 in. and the length 12 ft. 6J4 m -> with a projec- 
tion of 12^4 in., this lower base can be finished 
complete in the shop, including the soffit panels, as 
shown in the half plan of the soffit. On all of the 
large flat surfaces crimped copper is employed, and 
where miters cannot be soldered on the inside, 
soldering is done on the outside, all joints are 
scraped clean and emery papered, as no bronzing 
occurs. The corner pilasters from B° to C° have a 
hight of 8 ft. 5^ in., with a 10 in. face and a I2j4 
in. return. These may also be finished in the shop, 
coming out complete, smooth and clean. The mul- 
lions D° , E° , F° and the transom bars H° , E°, G° 
are made in pieces and mitered at the building, at 
D° , E° , F° and H°. The joints are carefully scraped 
so that no solder will show. The cornice from C° 
to J° being but 2 ft. 4 1 }i6 in- high with a 20^4" in. 
return, with an extreme length of 13 ft. 10% in., is 
also finished in the shop. The roof and flashings K° 
are of course laid at the job, in a manner which will 
be described. The details of the various parts, are 



SECTION 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



72, 



drawn to a scale of 2 in. to the foot, and 
attention is first given to the detail of the 
cornice shown in the section by A, in Fig. 
145 which shows the working detail of the 
cornice. It will be noted that the hight and 
projection are shown. The profile of the Uok 
full size cornice is shown by the heavy out- 
line, which has a lock at the top edge to 
which the copper roofing is locked. The 
method of securing the blocking which sup- 
ports the roof is also shown. It will be seen 
that the panel is not shown in full, its meas- 
urement between the two molds being 6% in. The 
cornice is put together complete in the shop, with the 
soldering and riveting of the seams on the inside to 
prevent solder showing. 

On the inside of the cornice painted band iron 
braces are inserted. These are made from %6 XI m - 
band iron, three feet apart, the brace being bolted 
in position by means of flathead brass stove bolts 
sized 34 m - x Y\ m - The five dashes placed on the 
brace and indicated by C, C, etc., show the position 
of the bolts, and where holes are punched in the 
brace care is taken to countersink the holes on the 
outside, so that the brass bolt-head will lay on 
smooth and flat with the copper work. 

At the bottom of the cornice the copper is turned 
upward, as shown, to form a drip. This drip rests 
upon the bronze frame shown, which in turn is 
bolted to the 2x2 in. angle. To anchor the cornice 
securely at the bottom, a 34 x l i n - band iron anchor 
is bolted to the main brace and to the 3x4 in. angle, 
as shown. At the top, R, the cornice is secured to 
the 3 x 3 in. upright, as indicated. 

The peculiar construction at the bottom of the 
cornice is necessary because the window frames 
and sashes are of bronze metal and no nailing may 
be done, as usually is required when wood sashes 
are used. 

After the cornice is secured, the roof planks are 
laid on the blocking under the lock flange, as shown. 
During the erection of the building the copper cap 
flashing is built in the wall, as shown. This cap 
flashing permits the roof flashing to be slipped 
underneath the cap, and allows for expansion and 
contraction of the metal. 

The locks of the main cornice as well as the cross 
locks in the roof are laid flat seam, all locks being 
secured to the sheathing by means of copper cleats, 
as illustrated. Before the copper roofing is edged 
and laid the sheets are tinned ij4 in. around on 
both sides, so that when the roofing is edged, laid, 
cleated and the lock closed with the mallet the seam 



Cornice Lock 

Fastened with 

Copper Cleats 'A' x 1 




Fig. 145. — Construction Drawing of Main Cornice 

can be well sweated with half and half solder, thus 
preventing leaks. 

The portion of the bay which is next placed in 
position is the paneled base shown in the half front 
elevation in Fig. 144 and in the section. The detail of 
this section of base is shown in Fig. 146 with the 
construction drawing for base C. As in the main 
cornice, the profile of the base molds and panels are 
indicated by the heavy lines, with full size measure- 
ments. A similar detail, furnished to the carpenter, 
will enable him to secure the blocking to the angle 
iron and brick work, as shown. 

The copper sill at the top is carried up as far as 
shown, while at the bottom the paneled soffit is 
flashed in the joint of the brickwork with a drip, 
bent in the position shown. If the bottom of the 
bay in diagram P should strike the center of the 
brick, as at X, the base flashing is extended down- 



74 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Detail G" for 

Panels on 

Lower Part of Bay 

s ~\ . 

I 



Cooper turned 
In as shown 




Soffit of Boo 



Fig. 146. — Construction Drawing for Base of Bay 

ward so as to meet a joint, the drip being carefully 
attached as at Y. It will be well to note the manner 
in which the bronze sill is set on the top of the 
copper sill, also the construction of the bronze sash, 
this to obtain a storm-proof job. 

The method of flashing the ends of the base into 
the wall involves similar construction to that which 
shows the corner pilaster. After the base of the 
bay is secured the two corner pilasters shown from 
B° to C° in the half front elevation in Fig. 144 are 
next placed in position. 

The detail of the corner pilaster is shown 
in Fig. 147, where the heavy line shows the 
profile of the copper formation. The method 
of connection at the brick wall, involves a 
reglet cut as indicated at A, in which the 
copper work is placed. To hide the reglet, 
a projecting edge or doubled flange is bent 



at B, as shown. As the window frames are made 
of sheet bronze, on which no nailing can be done as 
on a wood frame, the copper is bent as indicated at 
C. Wood blocking is secured to the brick wall and 
angle iron as shown, which forms a solid back for 
the sheet copper work. 




Fig. 147. — Construction Detail of Corner of Bay 

Where these corner columns join the sill of the 
base and the bottom of the cornice all joints are 
sweated with solder, then scraped clean and smooth 
and emery papered. The diamond shaped panels in 
the columns shown in the front and side elevations 
in Fig. 144 are carefully mitered so as to show clean, 
sharp joints. The mullion shown from D° to E° in 
the front elevation is next placed in position, its 
construction being indicated in Fig. 148. The cop- 
per is turned inward against the bronze frame and 
the bottom of the mullion is soldered on to the sill 
of the base, as indicated in the half front elevation 
in Fig. 144. This same mullion, shown in Fig. 148, 
is also used for the upper part of the mullion shown 
in the scale drawing in Fig. 144 from E° to F° . 

The transom bar indicated from H° to G° in the 
half elevation is shown in detail in Fig. 149. 

The copper sill is bent to prevent the water from 
backing up, and is so arranged that the lower sash 
bar will fit over it. The 
lower part of the tran- 
som bar is turned up- 
ward against the sheet 
bronze frame at A, wood 
blocking being provided, 
as shown. The construc- 



BlochiDg for Tap Screws ffLJffl 




_ . Bronze Sash 



t3"« 3"i ItJt-gfef 
_____ L — Sb.<M Bronio 

~7TV — I r™» 




DETAIL OP 
TRANSOM BAR "B" 
Scale 2=1' 



Fig. 14 
Construction Detail of Mullion 



Fig. 149. — Construction 
Drawing of Transom Bar 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



75 



tion of the bronze sash over the sill of the transom 
is provided with a condensation gutter as well as 
the outside drip, shown. Particular care is taken in 
joining the miters between the transom and mullion, 
indicated at E° in the half front elevation in Fig. 
144. At the completion of the job the work is 
cleaned and then given a coat of boiled linseed oil, 
which turns the copper to a rich dark brown color. 
The development of the various patterns requires 
only square return and face miters which have been 
previously considered. 



PATTERNS FOR LINTEL CORNICE; 

DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION 

INTRODUCING A REDUCED 

MITER, SQUARE IN PLAN 

Solution 17 

We will proceed to take up the development of 
the patterns for a lintel cornice, shown in the eleva- 
tion in Fig. 150. The method includes obtaining the 
miter cuts without using the T square, the projec- 
tions being transferred with a divider to another 
sheet of paper or directly upon the sheet metal. 
This is in most shops the usual procedure of obtain- 
ing the patterns. 

The aim is to cover the construction of a lintel 
cornice in detail and the various operations required 
to perform the work. 



The Scale Drawing 

Let Fig. 150 represent a half inch scale drawing 
of a lintel cornice as received from the architect. As 
will be noticed the full length of the cornice on the 
crown line is 10 ft. 2 in. The ends of the building 
are recessed with a 6 in. return and a 7 in. face, all 
as indicated, thus leaving the length of the foot 
molding on the drip line a a in elevation 9 ft. The 
entire hight of the cornice to the top of the roof is 
2 ft.; the front cornice has a projection of 11 in., 
while the returns have a projection of only 7 in., as 
shown in plan, thus necessitating a reduced return. 
In other words, the projection of cornice of 11 in. on 
the front must be reduced proportionately to 7 in. 
on the side. The frieze or sign board of the cornice 
is to be made of crimped iron, so as to avoid buckles 
in the flat surface as indicated. 



Laying Out the Detail 

The first step is to draw the detail of the cornice. 
This is accomplished, as will be briefly described, in 
connection with Fig. 151. As the scale drawing in 
Fig. 150 is drawn to a half inch scale, use a half 
inch scale rule and take the various bights of the 
members on the line b c in the side elevation. If no 
scale rule is at hand one can be made by simply 
drawing a line, upon which one half inch divisions 
are placed, representing feet, and dividing one of 
the half inch divisions into twelve equal spaces, each 




Fig. 150. — Half Inch Scale Drawing of Lintel Cornice 



7 6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




Fig. 151. — Making a Detail Drawing of Lintel Cornice 



space representing a full inch on the detail. In 
drawing the detail use a board of sufficient size and 
tack upon it some drawing paper as indicated in 
Fig. 151 by A. By means of the T square draw 
a vertical line as D E, upon which place the 
measurements of the various members obtained 
from the scale drawing in Fig. 150, the full size 
measurements being noted on the line D E in Fig. 
151 (the detail in this case having been drawn to a 
scale of one and one half inches to the foot). Using 
the T square B, from the small divisions on the line 
D E draw horizontal lines indefinitely as shown. 
Again refer to the scale drawing in Fig. 150 and 
scale the projections to d c f and g, measuring from 
the line b c, and place these measurements in Fig. 



151, as shown by d c f and 
g, measuring from the line 
D E the distances of 3 in., 
1 in., 73/ in. and 11 in., 
respectively. Trace the 
ogee and fillet g f, the quar- 
ter round and fillet at Y, 
the quarter round being 
struck from the center a 
and the wash X d and cove 
and drip of the foot mold- 
ing, the cove being struck 
from the center b, the drip 
having J4 m - lau - The 
cornice will be made in 
three parts, with a seam at 
X and Y and a lock at Z. 
When drawing the vertical 
lines in the detail use is 
made of the triangle C. 
Having completed the de- 
tail drawing, the reduced 
profile is found before the 
patterns can be developed. 

Obtaining the 
Reduced Profile 



This is accomplished as 
indicated in Fig. 152, in 
which is shown the plan 
view of the corner return 
and the miter line E B, 
which has been extended to 
C. In its proper position 
as shown, place the profile 
of the cornice obtained 
from Fig. 151 and divide 
the molds in same into a number of equal spaces, in 
Fig. 152, all as shown by the small figures from 1 to 
25. From these small figures draw horizontal lines, 
cutting the miter line E C as shown. From the va- 
rious intersections on the miter line erect vertical 
lines indefinitely, as shown. From the point 2 in the 
profile draw the perpendicular 2-A, and at pleasure 
draw any horizontal line in the reduced profile as 
2-A 1 , at a sufficient distance above the plan as 
shown. Measuring in each instance from the line 
2-A in the normal profile, take the various distances 
to points 1 to 25 and place them on similarly num- 
bered lines in the reduced or modified profile, being 
careful to measure in every instance from the line 
2-A 1 to arrive at the points of intersections shown. 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 

PATTERN FOR CROWN 



77 



(TWO/ LIKE THIS) 



PATTERN N 

RETURN 





F 


LAP- 




1 


* 


/V 








/ 




1 


17 


V Jl 




19 




r, [\ 




21 


22 


TWO 
LIKE 






V 




23 




ii 


R 


THIS 











13 

NT T4~ 



FOR 
CROWN 



O 



PATTERN FOR 
RETURN FOOT 
MOULD 



TWO 
LIKE 
THIS 



^ 




Fig. 152.— Obtaining Reduced Profile and Developing Patterns for Entire Cor 



78 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



A line traced through these points, as shown, from 
I to 25, will be the reduced profile of the return 
mold. 



Developing the Various Patterns 

As the frieze, 15-16 in the normal profile, is of 
crimped iron, a joint is made at 15 and 16, so that 
the first pattern to be developed will be for the foot 
mold 16 to 25 on the normal profile. Draw any ver- 
tical line, as G H, upon which place the girth 
from 16 to 25 as shown. At right angles to G H 
draw the usual measuring lines. Now, from the in- 
tersecting corner B in plan draw the vertical line 
B D and horizontal line B F. Measuring from 
the line B D in plan, take the various distances to 
similar intersecting points, 16 to 25 on the miter line 
E C, and place them on similarly numbered lines, 
measuring in each instance from the line H G. 
Trace a line through points thus obtained. Then will 
H d G be the miter cut. As the length of the wall 
in Fig. 150 is 9 ft., add 1 in. for lap, making 9 ft. 
1 in. To obtain the seam of the cornice in the center 
divide 9 ft. 1 in. by 2, which leaves 4 ft. 6>1 in., the 
distance marked from the drip edge 23-24 in the 
pattern for foot mold in Fig. 152. A lap is allowed 
for soldering, as indicated above the line 16. Thus 
two sheets of foot mold will be required, each 4 ft. 
6*/2 in. long, which will allow for a I in. lap. The 
pattern for the frieze or sign board is laid out di- 
rectly upon the crimped sheet, making the width 
equal to 15-16 in the normal profile, as indicated by 
15-16 on the line J K. As the return is 6 in. on 
the wall line as shown in plan and the frieze projects 
1 in. over the wall line, then make the distance to 
the left of J K, 7 in. and allow a lap as shown. As 
the projection to the left of the line H G in the foot 
mold pattern is ^4 in-, then 4 ft. 6j/> in. plus Y\ in. 
equals 4 ft. "34 in., the distance placed to the right 
of the line K J in the frieze pattern, two of which 
are also required. The main crown mold pattern is 
obtained by taking the girth from 15 to I in the 
normal profile and placing it on the vertical line 
L M, through which points, at right angles to L M, 
lines are drawn indefinitely. The various projec- 
tions are now taken from the line B D in plan to the 
miter line B E and placed on similar lines in the 
crown pattern, measuring from the line L M. A line 
traced through these intersected points gives the 
miter cut shown. As the length of the frieze is 4 ft. 
"jY\ in., then will the length of the crown mold 
from the point i- also be 4 ft. 7^ in. A lap is al- 
lowed below point 15, and a lock above the point 1, 



to which the roof covering can be locked and sol- 
dered. Two sheets of crown mold will be required 
as shown, making the extreme length, 5 ft. 
i~y 2 in., thus making a total length of 10 ft. 2 in. 
when set together, as called for in elevation in Fig. 
150. 

The reduced return miters are now laid out as 
shown in Fig. 152. The girths from 1 to 15 and 16 
to 25 in the reduced profile are now placed respec- 
tively on the vertical lines N O and P R, as shown 
by similar numbers, through which horizontal lines 
are drawn indefinitely as shown. Now, measuring 
from the line F B in plan, take the various projec- 
tions to intersections 1 to 15 and 16 to 25 on the 
miter or joint line E B, and place these projections 
on similarly numbered lines in the patterns, measur- 
ing in each instance from the lines N O and P R, re- 
spectively. A line traced through points thus ob- 
tained will give the pattern shapes for the return 
crown and foot molds. Lock and laps are allowed 
as indicated. As the return is 6 in. on the wall line, 
make the return foot mold 6 in. as shown. In a sim- 
ilar manner make the crown mold return 1 ft. 5 in. 
at its longest part, as indicated on the pattern, to 
correspond to its longest part w E in plan, or 1 ft. 

5 in- 
After the various pieces of the moldings have 
been cut, the moldings are formed up in the cornice 
brake as described below. 

Forming the Frieze and Foot Molding on 
the Cornice Brake 

The forms in the frieze are simply square bends, 
made, as indicated in Fig. 153, with the flange a 
turned toward the inside. Fig. 154 shows a stay or 
profile of the foot mold which is pricked direct from 



a 

F 

| 

'/////////////////////mm,, 




Fig. 153 
Forming the Frieze 



Fig. 154 
Foot Mold Stay 



the detail drawing shown in Fig. 151, with a hole 
punched at a in Fig. 154 by which to hang it up 
for future use. The numbers 16 to 24 on the stay 
are the same as those on the detail drawing, and will 
help to make clear the various operations in forming. 
When starting to form the foot mold, begin with 
bend 24, and continue until bend 18 is reached, the 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



79 



2Z 23 




155. — Bending the Cove 
in the Foot Mold 



bends all being at right angles as shown from 24 to 
18 in Fig. 155. After a square bend has been made 
on dot 18, place the proper size former B in posi- 
tion, fastening it to the bending leaf as shown, by 
means of the clamp A. 

When selecting the formers for the various 
molds, one that is a trifle smaller should be selected, 

because the metal will 
spring up again after 
being pressed over the 
former. Having the 
former in position, the 
hands are placed on top 
of the angle 21, then 
pressed down and the 
cove formed as shown, 
thus bringing bend 24 in 
the position shown by 
24'. The former is now 
removed and the 
sheet drawn out to 
dot 17, as shown in 
Fig. 156, where the 
angle a b is ob- 
tained by raising 
the bending leaf A 
to suit the stay 
shown in Fig. 154, 
so that it will give 
the proper angle as 
shown by the dot- 
ted lines at B, Fig. 
156. When bending angles, the stops on the cornice 
Drake can be used to advantage, 
setting them on the quadrant for _ , — — 

any desired angle. Using ^ 

the same stop, the sheet is y 
now reversed and a bend /? 
made on dot 16, which will ' \^ 
bring the angle in the posi- 
tion shown by the stay. 



^ss ? 




Fie 



156.— Bend for Which the 
Stop is Used 



Forming the Crown and Cap Molding 

Fig. 157 shows the profile of the crown and bed 
moldings from which stays are obtained, cut from 
scrap metal, as indicated by a and b. The corners 
or bends are numbered to corres- 
pond with those on the detail and 
also to form a guide in bending. In 
this case start the first bend on dot 
3 or the top of 
the ogee and 
.make a square 
bend as indicated 
by A in Fig. 158. 
Place the proper 
size former i n 
position as 
;hown, and firm- 
ly press down A 
until it has the 
position shown 
by B. Reverse 
the sheet in the 
brake and make 
a square ben d 
on dot 7, indi- 
cated by the po- 
sition 3 7 in Fig. 
159. Again place 
the proper 
former in posi- 
tion, and press down 3, as shown by 3', being care- 
ful in pressing down on corner 3 that the cove 3 a 




Fig. 158. — First Operation in Bending 
the Ogee 



V, 



1 , 






Fig. 159. — Finishing the Ogee 



Fig. 160. — First Operation in Bending 
the Bed Mold 



Fig. 161. — Completing the Cap Mold 



So 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



will not be pressed out of shape, always exerting 
the most pressure upon the metal below a or be- 
tween a and 7. 

Now following the stay in Fig. 157, make the 
necessary square bends on the sheet, until the bend 
11 in Fig. 160 has been made. The sheet is now 
drawn out to dot 13 and a square bend made on this 
dot as shown. In making this square bend, the sheet 
will strike the top part of the brake at a, thus caus- 
ing the flat surface between 11' and 13 to bulge at 
a, which, however, is no disadvantage. The sheet 
remaining in this position as indicated by A in Fig. 
161, the former B is fastened in position and the 
mold A pressed over the former B, until the posi- 
tion C is obtained. The last two square bends 14 
and 15 in Fig. 157 are now made, which completes 
the forming and bending operations. The foregoing 
methods apply also to the reduced return molding 
shown by the reduced profile in Fig. 152. 

Setting the Foot Molding Together 

The molding being formed, the foot molding is 
set together first, as in Fig. 162 to 164 inclusive. 
The first operation is shown in Fig. 162. Drive a 
roofing nail in the bench at a, the required distance 
from the edge, on which fasten the end of a stout 




Fig. 162 
First Operation in Setting the Foot Mold Together 

line or cord, chalking it well with lump chalk. Draw 
the line taut and fasten it at the opposite end of the 
bench at b. Now, hold the thumb on the center of 
the line, press down on the bench, and snap each 
side, thus obtaining a chalk line on the bench, after 
which the line and nails may be removed. 

The first sheet A is now laid on the bench, bring- 
ing the corner on the line as shown. It is fastened 
to the bench by the nails c and c. The second sheet 
B is now placed over A, giving the desired lap as 



shown by 0' and after the proper length has been 
measured off, sheet B is fastened, by nailing as 
shown. The sheet can also be nailed at the upper 
line or wash as indicated by e e and e' e' . The 
seam is now soldered along the flat surface at and 
o' only. 




Fig. 163. — Second Operation in Tacking the Mold 

The benches on which these moldings are set to- 
gether usually have sliding tops, that is, the upper 
boards can be moved outward if desired, as will be 
explained hereinafter. If, however, the top is sta- 
tionary, provision should be made to have a good 
projection as at Y. The nails are now removed from 
the sheets and the molding is turned over to the op- 
posite side of the bench as indicated by X, but to 




Fig. 164 
Last Operation in Setting the Foot Mold Together 

more clearly show the second operation, the mold- 
ing has been turned around and placed on the chalk 
line A-B as indicated in Fig. 163, where the sheets 
are fastened by nails as shown, after which the 
joint or seam is dressed down well and tacked with 
solder and then soldered from a to b. If the sheets 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



81 



were not thus turned and the molds were soldered 
in the position shown by X in Fig. 162, the drip 
would then be hung in the position shown by Y in 
Fig. 163 ; but as the molding lies in the position 
shown by a b, it is simply turned and hung on the 
bench as shown in Fig. 164, snapping a new line and 
straightening the line of the drip by means of the 
nails a a, etc. 

After this has been soldered and nails removed, 
the burrs caused by the nail holes are closed and 
soldered and all joints riveted with two pound 
tinned rivets. If these moldings should be of cop- 
per the joints could be made by using reverse 
wooden stays, cut from one inch thick spruce. 

Joining the Crown and Bed Molds 

The first operation in setting together the crown 
molding is shown in Fig. 165, where a new chalk line 
is made on the bench as indicated bv C. L. The 




Fig- 165 
First Operation in Setting Together the Crown Mold 




Fig. 166.— Second Operation— Straightening the Cap Mold 

first sheet A is now nailed to the bench as indi- 
cated by a and b, with care to have the corner of 
the cap mold on the line as shown. The second 



sheet B is now lapped, the corner of the cap placed 
on the C. L. at d and nails put through the sheets 
at c and / and the seam soldered along b i. Leav- 
ing the molding in the position shown, it is now 
tipped up, so that the further corner of the cap 
mold at m will come on the chalk line as indicated 
by A-B in Fig. 166, tacking with nails as shown, and 




Fig. 167. — Third Operation — Straightening the Fillet 

using short wooden braces to hold up the molding 
as shown by X. 

After soldering the cap mold, a new chalk line 
is struck on the opposite side of the bench as indi- 
cated by C. L. in Fig. 167 and the cornice is turned 
over until it sets in the position shown, thus obtain- 




Fig. 168. — Fourth Operation — Straightening the Ogee 

ing a straight line along the fillet when the flat sur- 
face a is soldered. The upper edge of the crown 
mold can now be turned down on the bench in the 
position shown by Fig. 168, the corner tacked with 
nails to the line and the ogee soldered. Finally the 
molding is lifted off the bench and hung on its 



82 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



upper edge in the position shown in Fig. 169. It is 
in this operation that the sliding bench becomes 
convenient. The detail of the standard and bench is 
shown by A and B in sketch C. The bench is now 
moved out to the required extent, as shown in the 
illustration, and the upper edge of the metal is 
tacked with roofing nails after the front edge is 




Detail of Sliding 
Bench 
169, 



Straightening the Upper Edge and Completing 
the Crown Mold 



sighted along XY. In sighting sheets to obtain a 
straight line, the sheet D should be nailed first, then 
the second sheet nailed at a. The forward end of the 
sheet at b can then be moved in or out as required 
and nailed at b. The foregoing methods are ap- 
plicable to any length or number of sheets for 
cornices, 

Joining the Foot Mold, Frieze and 
Crown Mold 

Fig. 170 shows how the foot mold, frieze and 
crown are lap joined. The foot mold A is first set 
on the bench, then the frieze B ; after which the 

LOCKING THE SEAMS 
b' 




FLOOR LINE 

Fig. 170. — Joining the Foot Mold. Frieze and Crown Mold 

crown mold C is lapped under B as shown, and sup- 
ported by the wooden brace shown. The frieze is 
now soldered throughout at a and b. Although it 



has been crimped to avoid buckles, careful solder- 
ing is required to avoid buckles in the sheet, which 
may be best accomplished as follows : 

Upon starting to tack the sheet to the foot mold 
always begin at the center and work out to both 
ends. This flattens the sheet and prevents buckling. 
A mistake is often made by starting to tack with 
solder at the ends of the frieze or sheet, thus having 
the buckle in the center of the sheet. Sometimes 
the seams at a and b are only tacked with solder and 
then riveted every two inches with two pound 
tinned rivets. A locked seam can be made at a and b 
as indicated by a' and b', which is notched at inter- 
vals of 12 or 15 inches and slightly turned down 
with the pliers, to avoid the locks coming apart. An- 




Fig. 171. — Another Method of Locking the Seams 

other lock is shown in Fig. 171 where A and B in- 
dicate the position of the seams before the edges C 
and D are turned down. The cornice having been 
soldered, the wood brace is removed, and the foot 
mold raised, bringing the cornice in the position 
shown by C in Fig. 172, ready for the insertion of 
the lookouts or iron braces. 

Bending and Inserting the Band Iron 
Braces 

These braces are usually spaced 3 feet or more 
apart, and are bent in the brace bender or vise as 
indicated in diagram A, where the various holes for 
the bolts are shown. The hole at the bottom marked 
C. S. signifies that on the lower face the hole is to be 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



83 







c.s. 

Fig. 172. — Putting in the Braces 

counter-sunk, so that a smooth surface may be ob- 
tained where it rests on the wall, while the hole 
marked a is for fastening purpose, a matter to be 
described as we proceed. 

In bending the brace, which is usually made from 
soft steel 3 /{q inch thick by i}4 inches wide, sharp 
bends are not essential. They can be bent as in- 
dicated in diagram B. Having decided upon the 
number of braces required in the cornice and located 
their positions, the cornice is raised and the braces 
are put under as shown in the cut C, after which the 
bolts are placed as indicated at a a, etc. In order 
that the metal drip may not be damaged or pressed 
out of shape when the cornice is set on the floor, a 
piece of wood about 4 or 5 inches long, 3 inches 




Brace 



Fig. 173. — Completing the Insertion 
of the Brace 



wide and about I inch higher than the hight of the 
drip, as indicated in diagram D, should be nailed to 
the drip flange. After this the cornice is placed on 
the floor, as indicated by A in Fig. 173, and a wood 
brace set up against the fillet to balance the cornice, 
after which the remainder of the bolts a, b, etc., are 



inserted. The reduced miters or returns are now 
soldered in position when the cornice is ready to be 
placed on the wall. 

Securing the Cornice to Brick Wall and 
Covering Its Top 

When the brick wall has been carried up to its 
proper hight as at A in Fig. 174, the cornice B is 
set thereon, with the anchor C bent to the brace as 
shown. A wire, D, is now fastened to the brace at 
a and the wire drawn taut and nailed to the beam at 
</. This keeps the drip snugly against the wall. 
Another wire, E, can now be fastened to the brace at 
b and secured to the beam at e by means of a wall 
hook, the wire being drawn taut until the cornice 




Fig. 174. — Securing Cornice to Brick Wall and Covering 
Top of Cornice 

is plumb. An anchor F is now bolted to the brace 
at /, after which the wall is carried up to G. The 
wooden lookouts are now placed about 3 feet apart, 
after which the brick work can be continued. 

At the second or third mortar joint, as indicated 
in this case at J, a "sand joint" should be made by 
the mason. This is a joint in which no mortar is 
placed. Sand to a depth of 2 to 2V2 inches is em- 
ployed. Upon flashing the roof covering in the joint, 
the sand is easily scraped out of the joint with a 
small trowel, saving the time and labor of cut- 
ting out the mortar joint with hammer and chisel. 
If possible, after the roof of the cornice has been 



8 4 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



planked, measurements should be taken from the 
lock of the cornice to the joint in the wall, and the 
sheets bent in the shop on the brake, so as to ob- 
tain sharp bends, on the galvanized iron. The 
roof being laid, the front edge of the cornice is sol- 
dered and the joint at J secured with wall hooks and 
paint skins. 

If the roof is to be covered with tin, the bends 
are made on a sharp corner of wooden joist or 
plank. Should a cap flashing be desired as indi- 
cated by M L, this is built in the wall as the wall 
is carried up, and the metal roofing flashed under 
same as shown. The method of using cap flashing 
is to be recommended, as it allows for settlement 
of the walls and beams and also provides for ex- 
pansion and contraction. 

Fastening Cornice to Iron Beams 

Occasionally the lintel cornice requires to be 
secured to I beams, which span the opening of the 
building, in which case the methods of fastening are 
alike to that shown in Fig. 175. In this construction, 




Wood Frame L 
of WindOiu~-—^ 

Fig. 175. — Fastening Cornice to I Beams 

accurate measurements are taken, so that the cornice 
drip flange will come directly under the I beam, as 
shown, and be held in position by means of the 
anchor A, which is bolted in its proper position to 
the main brace at C, turned down at d. This forms 
a good rest for the cornice, after which the lower 
anchor is flattened around the flange of the beam 
at a and b. The anchor B is now attached and the 
brickwork is carried up as before described. 

The drip at c can be made of sufficient length to 
form a good overhang on the wooden window 
frame. While different forms of construction of 
walls will be met with, a little study on the part of 
the mechanic will accomplish the desired results in 
respect to joining and securing the work to the 
building. 



FACE AND BUTT MITERS IN A 
PLAIN PEDIMENT 

Solution 18 

Face miters occur in angular and curved pedi- 
ments just as in panel work. Fig. 176 presents a 
view of an angular pediment such as is constructed 




Fig. 176. — View of Face and Butt Miters in a Plain 
Pediment 



over a dormer window. Here a face miter occurs 
at a and b, with a butt miter at c. The method of 
laying out the patterns for the angular and short 
horizontal molds is shown in Fig. 177. The center 
line S A is first drawn, the dimension D a is set 
off on the horizontal line, and the true profile a C 
is drawn as shown. If the distance D a be such 
that it is impracticable to place it on the drawing 
board, it is necessary to draw only the angles and 
part elevation indicated by i' i" a C B i' when the 
miter patterns are developed in a manner to be ex- 
plained. But assuming that the dormer window is of 
such size that its one half elevation can be placed 
upon the drafting table, proceed to complete the ele- 
vation as follows : From the corner C in the profile, 
draw the horizontal line C B to given dimensions and 
draw the angle B A as required. It will be noted that 
the bed mold in Fig. 176 consists of egg and dart of 
stamped metal. The background for receiving these 
enrichments is usually formed as indicated by a' 
b' in Fig. 177 and on this the egg and dart is sol- 
dered, as shown by c' . For this reason the profile 
was shaped as shown by a in elevation. Take a 
tracing from C to a and place it at right angles to 
A B, as indicated by the shaded profile spaced from 
r to 15. Through these small figures parallel to 
A B, draw lines intersecting the center line A j, as 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



85 



PA TJERN 

FOR 

PEDIMENT 

MOLD 




y Lap/ ' 
P 

Fig. 177.— Developing the Face and Butt Miters for a Plain Pediment 




XL 



86 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



shown. Bisect the angle ABC and obtain the 
miter line / B extended, by means of the small arcs 
d e and /. Thus, all points between i and 6 in the 
profile cut the miter line B s and form a face miter, 
while all points between 6 and 15 in the profile butt 
against the horizontal fillet and form a butt miter. 
The pattern for the pediment mold indicated in 
the half elevation by A B ^ i j A is developed as 
follows : At right angles to A B draw the line 
F G, upon which place the girth of the profile as 
shown by corresponding numbers on F G. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to F G, draw 
lines ; intersect these by lines drawn parallel to F 
G from similar intersections on the joint lines A j 
and i s B. Trace lines through points so obtained ; 
H J K L M will be the pattern shape. Add the 
triangular portion / E ; in elevation by using i E 
and j E as radii, with K and L in the pattern, re- 
spectively, as centers, intersecting the arcs at N. 
Draw the lines L N and N K. If it occurs that 
the width of iron in stock does not allow the tri- 
angular piece K L N to be added, provide a lap 
along L K for joining the triangle as shown. To 
obtain the pattern for the horizontal ogee mold draw 
the line O P at right angles to B C, and upon this 
place the girth of the profile from 1 to 6 as shown 
on O P. Through these small figures and at right 
angles to O P draw lines and intersect by lines 
drawn parallel to O P from similar intersections 
on B i and C c. R S T U then gives the desired 
pattern, A lap is added along U T, which allows 



this piece to be soldered along the fillet c s, as de- 
tailed in diagram X. The development of the piece 
D E c a merely indicates a square miter and it may 
be of assistance if we show how to obtain the depth 
of the roof, which extends back from the line E i 
to meet bend 15 of the shaded profile. Since the 
profile from 2 to 15 in the shaded section is similar 
to C a in elevation, proceed to extend a perpendicu- 
lar line from a until it meets the line c E at b. The 
distance b c then represents the depth of the roof, 
against which the shaded profile from 6 to 15 abuts. 
Edges and laps are to be allowed for joining the 
miters. 

INCLINED MOLD MITERING ON A 
WASH 

Solution 1 g 

In the preceding problem the inclined or bed mold 
mitered against a level roof. If this roof were 
pitched, it would be necessary to find the miter line 
in elevation before its pattern could be obtained. 
Fig. 178 is designed to show the procedure ap- 
plicable to developing butt miters of this nature. 
It represents one of the moldings of a pediment, 
as, for instance, the bed mold, which butts obliquely 
against a wash or slanting roof upon the level corn- 
ice below the pediment. This condition also ap- 
plies to the fascia and fillet of the inclined moldings 
of the pediment. 

In this class of miters it becomes necessary to first 
perform an operation whereby the position of the 
several points of the miter are first obtained in the 
elevation, or, in other words, to obtain an elevation 




Fig. 178.- 



ELEVATION 
-Obtaining Pattern for Inclined Mold Mitering on a Wash 



SECTION 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



87 



of the miter showing just how it will appear when 
finished. 

A BCD shows the elevation of an inclined bed 
mold, while the section at the right shows the in- 
clination or slant of the wash or roof E F against 
or upon which the mold is to be mitered. An in- 
spection of the sectional view shows that the greater 
the distance of any point in the profile from the 
wall surface, the lower down will it fall upon the 
wash. Therefore, having placed a duplicate of the 
profile in the elevation in the position shown in 
the upper part of the section, divide the curved por- 
tions of the both profiles into the same number of 
equal spaces respectively, as shown by the small fig- 
ures. 

From the points in the profile in the elevation 
carry lines parallel with the lines of the mold in- 
definitely toward the miter as shown, and from the 
points in the profile in the sectional view drop lines 
vertically upon the wash E F, and from the points 
of intersection thereon carry lines horizontally across 
to the elevation to intersect with lines of corre- 
sponding number previously drawn. A line traced 
through the points of intersection, as shown from 
A to D, will give the elevation of the miter. 

To obtain the pattern, first set off a stretchout of 
the profile upon any line drawn at right angles to 
the lines of the elevation, as 0-13, and from the 
points on 0-13 draw the measuring lines, as shown 
at the left ; then from the several intersections pre- 
viously obtained between A and D project lines par- 
allel with 0-13 to intersect measuring lines of corre- 
sponding number. A line traced through the sev- 
eral intersections, as shown from A 1 to D 1 , will give 
the shape of the miter cut, and A 1 B 1 C 1 D 1 will be 
the pattern, to which edges for joints can be added 
as required. 

FACE MITER BETWEEN CURVED 
AND HORIZONTAL MOLDINGS 

Solution 20 

In Fig. 179 is shown a finished view of a circular 
pediment on a cornice, the circular ogee of the mold- 
ing mitering with the horizontal ogee mold, thus 
forming face miters where indicated by the two 
arrows. The method of finding the miter line be- 
tween the curved and horizontal moldings is illus- 
trated by Fig. 180, in which also is shown the pat- 
tern developed. First draw the center line A B, 
and establish the center hight of the pediment as 
C D. Locate the distance C 9 and draw the profile 
of the mold from 9 to 2. From 2 draw a horizontal 



line indefinitely to the left, which intersects at G 
by an arc, struck from A, the desired center, with A 
D as radius. Divide the profile into an equal num- 
ber of spaces, as shown from 1 to 10, and through 
these small figures draw lines indefinitely to the left, 
parallel to C 9, crossing the line a b which is drawn 
at right angles to C 9. Take the distances of the 




Fig. 179. — Face Miter Between Curved and 
Horizontal Moldings 



various intersections on a b indicated by the heavy 
dots, and place them on the center line A B from 
D to E, as shown by the heavy dots, placing the 
dot 1' on a b at 1" on D E, as shown. Then, using 
A as center and with radii equal to the various di- 
visions between E and D draw arcs as shown, inter- 
secting similar horizontal lines previously drawn 
from the small figures in the profile 1 to 6. Trace 
the miter line through points so obtained, as shown 
from F to G. Note that this miter line F G is not 
a straight line, but is made up of varying curves, 
because each radium in the curved mold is different. 
In the angular pediment miter in Fig. 177, the hori- 
zontal ogee mold was developed separately. In this 
case and cases where the horizontal mold is very 
long, a vertical seam can be made along F O in Fig. 
180 and the entire horizontal mold can be laid out as 
follows : Draw any line as H J at right angles to 
C 9, on this place the girth of the mold 1 to 10, as 
shown by similar numbers on H J. Through these 
small figures and at right angles to H J, draw lines. 
Intersect these lines by lines drawn parallel to H J 
from corresponding intersections in the profile 1 to 
10 and on the miter and seam line, G F O. Trace 
a line through these points, when K L M N will 
be the desired pattern, K L representing the cut 
for the return miter and M N the cut for the face 
miter. It should be understood that if the curved 
pediment were of great length it would not be neces- 
sary in obtaining the miter line and patterns, to draw 
the complete half pediments, here shown. In that 



88 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




RETURN 
MITER 



Fig. 180— Obtaining the Face and Return Miters, between Curved and Horizontal Moldings 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



89 



D 







Fig. 181. — Intersecting Miters Between Curved and 
Horizontal Moldings 



in' 




case it would be necessary to draw only part of the 
pediment, after the proper radii on D E were found, 
or as much as is indicated from P to G. This also 
applies to the horizontal mold G 2, for which a 
separate miter could be laid out for the face and for 
the return, respectively. 

On large curved pediments, the curved moldings 
are usually stamped ; but if an insufficient quantity 
of curved molding is required, it would not pay the 
expense of making stamping dies ; in this case the 
molding is made by hand. The method of laying out 
the patterns for curved moldings is taken up in the 
division of this work on patterns relating to curved 
moldings. 

INTERSECTINGMITERS BETWEEN 

CURVED AND HORIZONTAL 

MOLDINGS 

Solution 21 
Fig. 181 is a view of a main cornice having an 
outside miter at A, an inside miter at B, and an 
intersecting miter between a curved and horizontal 
cornice at C C. The distinction between this prob- 
lem and the one last described is that in the former 
case the curves of the molds show in elevation, 



M 



Fig. 



MITER CUT ON 
HORIZONTAL MOLD 

182. — Methods of Obtaining Intersecting Miters 
Between Curved and Horizontal Moldings 



while in this problem the curves show in plan. The 
method of obtaining the miter cut at the intersection 
shown at C is set forth in detail in Fig. 182, where 
A indicates the center, from which the curve B X 
C is struck. D C X B E represent the wall line. 
To show the principle involved in obtaining the 



go 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



miter line in plan, we will take the crown and bed 
moldings as an example, since the entire cornice 
cannot be shown in limited space. While the en- 
tire circular wall is presented here, this is not prac- 
tical nor necessary on large work in which case part 
of the curve serves requirements as indicated by 
B H J. The wall line being drawn, place the profile 
in the position as shown, so that the face 2-3 of the 
profile is parallel to B E. Space the profile into 
diz'isions, as shown from 1 to 19, and through them 
draw indefinitely lines parallel to B E, cutting the 
line F G drawn to auv length at right angles to B 
E. Draw any radial line from the center A as H 
J, and on this place the various divisions shown by 
the heavy dots on the line F G taking care to place 
19' on F G upon the wall line at 19" on the line H 

PATTERN FOR RETURN 

D 





PROFILE 



Fig. 



184.— Patterns for a Butt Miter and Roof Flange on a Square Dormer Return, 
Intersecting a Pitched Roof 



Fig. 183. — View of Butt Miter on Square 

Dormer Return, Intersecting an Oblique 

Surface in Elevation 



J. Using A as center, with the dots on H. J. 
as radii, draw arcs as shown, intersecting 
corresponding horizontal lines drawn, 
through the small figures in the profile, as 
shown by the intersections between B and 
K. Note that the miter line between B and 
is not a straight line, because each 
arc has a different 
radius. The pattern 
is now in order and 
is obtained by plac- 
ing the girth of the 
profile from I to 19 
upon the line G L, 
as shown by corre- 
sponding number, 
through which, at 
right angles to G L, 
lines are drawn and 
intersected by lines 
drawn parallel tc 
G L from similar in- 
tersections on the 
miter line B K. A 
line traced through 
points thus obtained 
as shown by M N 
will be the desired 
miter cut. 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES. ETC. 



91 



BUTT MITER AND ROOF FLANGE 
ON A RIGHT ANGLE RETURN, 
INTERSECTING AN OBLIQUE 
SURFACE IN ELEVATION 
Solution 22 
The present demonstration is that of a return 
miter intersecting an oblique surface in elevation, 
as in the return of a dormer window against a 
pitched roof, indicated by abed in Fig. 183, the 
return being at an angle of 90 degrees or right 
angular. The development of this pattern can be 
accomplished as shown in detail in Fig. 184. Here 
A B shows the pitch of the roof, the profile of 
the mold being indicated from 1 to 11. From the 
small divisions in the profile, lines are drawn parallel 
to the lines of the molding until they intersect the 
roof line as shown. At right angles to 2-a in the 
side elevation draw any line, as D C, upon which 
place the girth of the profile, as shown by similar 
numbers on C D. Through the small figures 1 to 11, 
at right angles to C D, draw lines which are inter- 
sected by lines drawn parallel to C D from similar 
points in the profile and from intersections on the 
roof line A B. A line traced through points so ob- 
tained, as shown by E F G H, will be the desired 
pattern for the return, E F representing the butt 
miter and G H the square return miter. 

ROOF FLANGE ON RIGHT ANGU- 
LAR DORMER RETURN 
Solution 23 

In the case of a dormer return which butts against 
the roof surface, it is customary to join a roof flange 
to the butt miter of the return, as indicated by b 
c e f in Fig. 183. This flange is used when mak- 
ing water tight joints between shingle, slate, tile 
and metal roofs and it is laid out as indicated in 
Fig. 184. From the various intersections of the 
mold against the roof line A B, as indicated from 
1 to 11, draw lines at right angles to A B, as shown. 
Now draw, parallel to A B, any line, as c' d'. From 
the point 11 in the profile in the side elevation, draw 
the line 11, d, at right angles to the lines of the 
molding. Measuring from this line II, d, take the 
various projections to points 1 to 11 in the profile 
and place them on similarly numbered lines drawn 
at right angles to A B, measuring in each instance 
from the line c' d' . The result will be the developed 
section shown from O to P. Add to this shape the 
amount of roof flange desired, as indicated by L M 
N O, completing the pattern. 



OCTAGONAL RETURN AGAINST 

AN OBLIQUE SURFACE IN 

ELEVATION 

Solution 24 

This demonstration is a return molding, having 
an angle other than a right angle in plan, and which 
butts against an oblique surface in elevation, as 
shown in Fig. 185, where the return of an octagonal 
dormer is indicated as butting against a pitched 
roof. The method of obtaining the pattern is as 
indicated in Fig. 186. 




Fig. 185. — Perspective View of 

Return on an Octagonal 

Dormer 



Let A B represent the pitch of the roof and C 
the profile of the mold. Divide the profile C into 
a number of equal spaces and from these points 
carry lines parallel to the lines of the mold, until 
they intersect the roof line A B, as shown by 
similar numbers. In line with the side elevation, 
as shown by the dotted lines, draw the plan view 
of the return indicated by 2 1 D E, making the angle 
at D as required. Then take a duplicate of the 
profile C and place it in the position shown by C 1 
in plan. Divide it into the same number of spaces 
as appears in C. Through the small figures in C 1 
draw lines parallel to D 2' . Intersect these lines by 
lines drawn at right angles to the lines of the mold 
in the side elevation from similarly numbered inter- 
sections on the roof line A B. Thus is obtained the 



92 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



intersections i' to 10' in plan. Trace a line through 
points so located obtaining representation of the 
miter line in plan or joint line between the return 
mold and pitched roof. If it be desired, bisect the 
angle at D and obtain the miter line D F, extending 



which place the girth of the profile C 1 , as shown 
by similar figures ; at right angles to H J, draw lines, 
which intersect lines drawn parallel to H J from 
similarly numbered points on the miter line D F and 
i'-io'. A line traced through these points, as shown 



SIDE ELEVATION 




Fig. i 



Obtaining Pattern for Octagonal Return on a Dormer, Against an Oblique Surface in Elevation 

by K L M N will be the desired pattern. M N 
represents the miter cut for the octagon return 
angle, while K L is the butt miter against the pitched 
roof, at an angle shown in plan. 



the lines drawn through the small figures in C 1 
until they cut the miter line D F, as shown. We 
may then proceed to develop the pattern as follows : 
At right angles to D 2' draw the line H J, upon 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



93 



ROOF FLANGE BETWEEN 

PITCHED ROOF AND RETURN 

MOLD AT OTHER THAN A 

RIGHT ANGLE 

Solution 25 

This solution is that of a roof flange for a re- 
turn mold at other than a right angle, against an in- 
clined roof, as shown by a b d c in Fig. 185. It is 
laid out as indicated in Fig. 186. The girth of the 
various intersections on the roof line A B is placed 
on any vertical line, as P R, as shown by like num- 
bers. Through these small figures perpendicular 
to P R, draw lines indefinitely, as shown. Then 
from the intersection 10' in the miter line in plan, 
draw a line at right angles to D E, as shown by 10' 
a. Measuring from this line take the various dis- 
tances to points 1' to 10' and place them on lines 
having similar numbers, measuring in each instance 
to the right of the line P R, and from that line, thus 
obtaining the points of intersections 1" to 9". Trace 
a line through points so obtained. This line, 1", 7", 
10 will be the desired section. To the right of this 
section, add, as indicated, the amount of flange de- 
sired. Then will d, c, b, c, 10, 1", d be the pattern 
desired. 




Fig. 187. — View of Butt Miter of a Horizontal Molding 
Intersecting an Oblique Surface in Plan 

HORIZONTAL MOLDING INTER- 
SECTING AN OBLIQUE SUR- 
FACE IN PLAN 

Solution 26 

Fig. 187 is a perspective view of a gutter cornice 



intersecting a beveled wall in plan, the wall in this 
case being at an angle of 45 degrees, thus forming 
the intersecting joint line a b. The method of lay- 
ing out this butt miter is shown in Fig. 188, the 
principle being applicable, no matter what may be 
the angle of the wall A B C in plan. In develop- 
ments of this nature the angle of the wall ABC 
is first drawn and the profile of the mold is placed 
in the position shown. This profile is divided into 
an equal number of spaces, as indicated from 1 to 
16. Through these small figures lines are drawn 
parallel to the lines of the mold and intersecting the 
beveled wall line A B, as shown. At right angles 
to a b the girth line D E is drawn ; on this line the 
girth of the profile is placed, as indicated by the 
small figures on D E. At right angles to D E, 
through the small figures 1 to 16, draw lines, inter- 
sect these lines by lines drawn parallel to D E from 
similar points of intersections on the wall line A 
B. A line tracer! through the points of intersections 
thus obtained, as shown by F G, will be the desired 
butt miter. 



FLAT HEAD AT OBLIQUE END 
OF MOLDING 

Solution 27 

In case of requirement to place a flat head in 
the oblique end of a molding, as along c a in plan 
in Fig. 188, the head can be developed as follows: 
At right angles to c a, from the various intersec- 
tions thereon, erect line indefinitely as shown and 
from any point, as X 1 , drawn the line X 1 2 1 at a 
sufficient distance above and parallel to c a. From 
the point 2 in the profile in plan, draw the line 2 
X at right angles to a b. Measuring from the line 
X 2 take the various distances to points 1 to 16 in 
the profile and place them on similarly numbered 
lines, measuring in each instance from the line X 1 
2', thus obtaining the points of intersection shown 
from 1' to 16'. Trace a line through points so ob- 
tained, as shown. This will be the desired pattern, 
whose edge line will correspond with the edge line 
of the butt miter, shown below. 

HORIZONTAL MOLDING, INTER- 
SECTING A CURVED SURFACE 
IN ELEVATION 

Solution 28 

Fig. 189 is a perspective view of a dormer return 
intersecting a curved roof, the return being at right 



94 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



angles to the face of the dormer. The method of 
laying out the pattern is shown in Fig. 190. Hav- 
ing found the radius for the curve of the roof, use 
C as center and draw a short arc, indicated by A 
B. In its proper position, as at X, draw the hori- 
zontal line X 2, and, also in its proper position, as 
shown, draw the profile from 1 to 11. Space the 
profile as shown by the small figures, through which 



lines indefinitely. Intersect these lines by lines 
drawn parallel to C D from similar points of inter- 
sections on the roof line A B and in the profile. 
Trace a line through points of intersections thus ob- 
tained ; E F will be the butt miter and G H the 



PATTERN FOR 
FLAT HEAD 



PLAN VIEW 




Fig. li 



-Pattern for Horizontal Molding Intersecting an 
Oblique Surface in Plan 



draw lines parallel to 2 X until they intersect the 
curved roof line. Below the side elevation, draw 
any vertical line, as C D, upon which place the 
girth of the profile, as shown by similar numbers 
on C D, through which at right angles to C D, draw 



Fig. 189. — View of Horizontal Return on a Curved Surface 
in Elevation 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



95 



return miter. Where the members of the profile 
2-3 and 7-8 intersect the curved roof, as at 2'-$' 
and /'-&', the corresponding members in the pat- 
tern can be connected by straight lines as from 2" to 
3" and 7" to 8" ; but where the intersecting surface 
is large, as from 9' to 10' on the curved roof line, 
a reproduction of this curve c/-io' must then be 

SIDE ELEVATION 



189 may be laid out as shown in Fig. 190. Take 
the girth of the various divisions 1' to 11' on the 
curved roof line A B and place it on any line as 
a' h'. Through the small figures on, and, at right 




Fig. 190.— Obtaining Pattern for Horizontal Molding Intersecting a Curved 

Surface in Elevation 



transferred to the pattern 9" and 10". This curve 
can be traced or obtained as follows : Using the 
radius A C in elevation, with 9" and 10" in the pat- 
tern as centers, describe arcs intersecting each other 
at C 1 . Then using the same radius, with C 1 as cen- 
ter, describe the arc 9"- 10". 

CURVED ROOF FLANGE 

Solution 29 

A roof flange on a curved roof, to intersect with 
a horizontal return, as indicated by a b c d in Fig. 



angles to a' h' , draw lines in- 
definitely to the left as 
shown. From the point 1 1 
in the profile in the side elevation erect the per- 
pendicular line 11-a. Measuring from the line 11-a, 
take the various projections to points 1 to 11 in the 
profile and place them on similarly numbered lines, 
measuring in each instance from the line a' h' . Trace 
a line through points thus obtained, as indicated by 
be 11'. To the left of this section add the desired 
amount of flange, as shown by d e f, which com- 
pletes the pattern. 



9 6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




7JL 

11 



12 

13 



14 



THE 
PATTERN SHAPE 



15 



16 



17 



15' 



16' 



Fig. 192. — Pattern for a Horizontal Molding Intersecting 
a Curved Surface in Plan 



HORIZONTAL MOLDING INTER- 
SECTING A CURVED SURFACE 

Solution 30 

A molding butting against a curved surface in 
plan, as shown in the perspective view in Fig. 191. 
The development of the miter cut is performed as 
shown in Fig. 192. Here ABC represents the 
straight and curved wall lines. The curve B C 
is struck from the center D. The profile of the 
mold is placed in the position shown, so that the 



If: 






Ik 
















v/ % 




%,. ROOF 


vi 


y//////. \ -, f-4^"- 





1 1 1 




V' 






















1 


1 1 1 





Fig. 191. ■ 



-View of Horizontal Molding, Intersecting a 
Curved Surface in Plan 



member 7-8 of the molding lines is parallel to the 
wall line A B. The profile between 7 and 18 is 
spaced and numbered as shown and lines are drawn 
parallel to A B until they intersect the curved wall 
line. To avoid a confusion of lines, use those 
drawn through 14-15, 12 and 10 of the profile, which 
cross the wash at 4, 5 and 6, and utilized these 
points in obtaining the cut of the wash against the 
curved surface, instead of employing separate di- 
visions along the wash 3-7. The pattern may then 
be laid out by drawing the girth line E F, at right 
angles to A B. Upon E F place the girth of the 
full profile, as shown by similar numbers on E F. 
At right angles to E F and through the small fig- 
ures theron, draw lines which intersect lines drawn 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



97 



FRONT ELEVATION 




Fig. 193.— Pattern for Horizontal Molding, Intersecting a Spherical Surface, Curved in both Plan and Elevation 



9 8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



parallel to E F from similar intersections on the 
curved line B C. A line traced through points so 
obtained, as shown by H J, will be the desired pat- 
tern. Where the members 16-15, 14-13 and 9-8, 
butt against the curved surface, and are small, these 
points can be connected by straight lines in the pat- 
tern, as shown. If these members are wide, the in- 
tersecting curve against the curved wall may be 
reproduced as follows ; taking as example the curve 
on the member 16-15 in the profile. Using D B 
in plan as radius, with 16' and 15' in the pattern 
as centers, describe arcs intersecting each other, (not 
shown). Then, using this point of intersection as 
center, with the same radius, draw the arc I5'-l6'. 
By such method any of the curved surfaces can be 
transferred. 



HORIZONTAL MOLDING INTER- 
SECTING A SPHERICAL SURFACE 
Solution 31 

In the preceding solution was explained the de- 
velopment of the pattern, when a molding inter- 
sected a round surface in plan. In this problem is 
presented the laying out of the pattern for a hori- 
zontal mold when it intersects a round surface both 
in plan and elevation, such as a sphere or a dome, 
as shown in detail in Fig. 193. 

Let A-B represent the line of the horizontal wall 
in plan, or the drip line of the horizontal mold, and 
O the center point with which the semi-plan of the 
dome is struck, as shown by i'-C-i. Above the ele- 
vation draw the horizontal line D-E and obtain the 
points io a and 9-10 from the corresponding points 
in plan. With the proper centers as a and b in ele- 
vation describe the arcs 9-F and io a F respectively. 
Now place the profile in its proper position in ele- 
vation as shown, and divide it into an equal num- 
ber of spaces, as shown by the small figures 1 to 12. 
Introduce an additional point at a, as shown. From 
these small figures in the profile in elevation, draw 
lines to the right, parallel to D-E until they cut the 
dome profile 9-F, from 1 to 12 as shown ; from these 
intersections drop lines vertically until they inter- 
sect the center line of the dome in plan, also shown 
from 1 to 12. Now using O as center with radii 
equal to the various points I to 12, draw the semi- 
circles, as shown. Take a tracing of the profile in 
elevation and place it in its proper position as shown 
in plan and divide it into parts corresponding to 
those of the profile in elevation. Through the small 
figures in the profile in plan, parallel to the wall 



line A-B, draw lines to intersect similarly numbered 
arcs, as are shown by the points of intersections 
marked i' to 12'. Trace a line through points so ob- 
tained thus representing the miter or joint line be- 
tween the horizontal mold and sphere or dome. This 
miter line serves all requirements in developing the 
pattern shape, but if it is desired that the miter line 
be projected in the elevation it is but necessary to 
project vertical lines from the points of intersections 
on the miter line in plan, as partly shown by the 
line erected from 8' in plan, to intersect the line 
drawn from point 8 in the profile in elevation at 8'". 
The pattern may then be laid out as follows : At 
right angles to A-B in plan, draw any line, as H-J, 
on which place the girth of the profile in either plan 
or elevation, as shown by similar numbers on H-J. 
Through these small figures at right angles to H-J 
draw lines, which intersect by lines drawn parallel 
to H-J from similarly numbered intersections on the 
miter line in plan. Trace a line through points so 
obtained; then will L-N-P-R be the desired miter 
cut. 

INCLINED MOLDING BUTTING 

AGAINST A PLANE SURFACE AT 

RIGHT ANGLES IN PLAN 

Solution 32 

If an inclined molding butts against a plane sur- 
face at right angles in plan, as indicated in the 
perspective view in Fig. 195 where the angles are 




Fig. 



IQS. — View of an Inclined Molding, Butting Against 
a Plane Surface at Right Angle in Plan 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



99 



of 90 degrees, the pattern is developed as indicated 
in Fig. 196. In this case the angle of the incline 
is shown by A B C, the elevation of the wall line 
by A D and the section through the wall by E D. 
If it be desired to develop the butt and face miter 
on one stretchout, first bisect the angle A B C by 
using B as center, and, with any radius, draw arcs 
cutting the angle C B A at a and b. With the 
same or any other radius, using a and b as centers, 
intersect arcs at c. From c draw a line through 
B towards d, as shown. At right angles to the 
rake or incline A B, place the profile in position as 
shown, spacing it from 1 to 12 as indicated. Through 
these small figures in the profile and parallel to 
A B draw lines, cutting the miter line B d and the 
pier or wall line A D. The pattern is now in order. 
Take the girth of the profile from 1 to 12 and place 
it on the line H F drawn at right angles to B A. 



\BUTT MITER 



Through the small figures on, and at right angles to 
H F, draw lines. Intersect these lines by lines drawn 
parallel to H F from similar intersections on the 
miter line B d and the abutting line A D. Trace 
a line through points so obtained. The line J K 
will be the face miter for the angle at B and L M 
the butt miter for the intersection against A D. 




Fig. 197.— View 
Butting Again_. 
at Other than Right Angles 




INCLINED MOLDING, 

BUTTING AGAINST A 

PLANE SURFACE AT 

OTHER THAN A 

RIGHT ANGLE 

IN PLAN 

Solution 33 

Fig. 197 is a perspective view 
of an inclined molding intersect- 
ing a wall at other than a right 
angle in plan, in this case the 
angle being 45 degrees. In de- 
veloping the patterns both a plan 
and elevation are required, as 
198, in which 
A B C E repre- 
sents the angle 
of the wall and 
F the profile, 
placed in posi- 
tion as shown. 
D 11' represents 



shown in Fig 



Fig. 196.— Pattern for an Inclined Molding, Butting Against a Plane Surface at Right Angles in Plan the angle of the 



IOO 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




FRONT 
ELEVATION 



12\ 13 }0 h i 




4 3 



PLAN 




Fig. 198.— Patterns for an Inclined Molding, Butting Against a Plane Surface at Other than a Right Angle 

in Plan 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES, ETC. 



IOI 



wall in elevation, and F 1 a du- 
plicate of the profile F in plan. 
Both profiles are divided into a 
corresponding number of parts, 
as indicated by the small figures 
I to 14. Through the small fig- 
ures in the profile F in plan lines 
are drawn, parallel to A B, until 
they intersect the beveled side 
B C ; from these intersecting 
points lines are carried up at 
right angles to A B, and are in- 
tersected by lines drawn through 
similarly numbered points in the 
profile F 1 in elevation and par- 
allel to D 11', resulting in the 
intersections shown from 1' to 
14'. Trace a line through these 
points, which will show the in- 
tersecting or miter line in eleva- 
tion. The pattern may then be 
laid out by placing the girth of 
the profile F 1 on the girth line 
G H, which is drawn at right 
angles to 11' D, as shown by the 
numbers 1 to 14. Through these 
small figures, and at right angles 
to G H, draw lines which inter- 
sect lines drawn parallel to G H 
from the miter line 1' to 14' in 
elevation. A line traced through 
points thus obtained will be the 
desired pattern, as indicated by J L K. 



PROFILE 




K 


D 


7 


F 




1 


2 




/ 


3 


jy 


/ 


4 


'1 


./ 


5 
6 


----- 7 




7 


1 


1 


S 




LOWER CUT \. 
ALONG ^\ 




2" 


- 


"/ Ul 


B-6—14 1 




9 
10 








\- 


11 
12 


/ 






75" 

14 

E 






LAP 

15 


u" 

H 



"PER CUT 

ALONG 

X—U' 



QUICK METHOD OF OBTAINING 
PATTERNS FOR BEVEL AND 
BUTT MITERS IN A PEDI- 
MENT MOLDING 

Solution 34 

A finished view of a bevel and butt miter in a 
pediment is shown in Fig. 199. In this cut a b and 




Fig 199 
View of Bevel and Butt Miters in a Pediment Mold 



Fig. 200. — Quick Method of Finding Patterns for Bevel and Butt Miters in a 

Pediment Molding 



d e are bevel or face miters, while b c is a butt 
miter. If the pediment a c be of great length, it is 
impracticable to lay out the full size pediment since 
the pediment from b to i occasionally has a length 
of twenty or more feet. In obtaining the patterns 
for a large pediment, whatever may be its size, it 
is necessary to ascertain only the bevel or pitch and 
then to proceed to obtain the bevel and butt miters 
as is found illustrated in Fig. 200. Draw the de- 
sired bevel ABC, and in line with B C draw the 
profile in position, as shown. Divide this profile 
into an equal number of divisions, or for the pur- 
pose of practical work a free use of spaces is re- 
quired. From point 6 in the profile and parallel to 
C B draw a line until it meets the miter line 
obtained by bisecting the angle A B C by means 
of the small arcs a b c at 6'. Through point 6' 
draw the line 6"-6'", parallel to A B. From the 
various points, 1 to 5, in the profile and parallel 
to B C draw lines until they intersect the miter line 
c 6' as shown. In a similar manner parallel to C 



102 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



B, draw lines from points 7 to 15 in the profile 
until they cut the line of the horizontal mold 
on the line 6"-6'". Where the line drawn 
from 14 in the profile meets the horizontal line at 
14', erect the perpendicular line 14' X at right angles 
to A B, as shown. From 14' at right angles to the 
pitch B C draw the line 14' Y. This completes re- 
quirements preparatory to obtaining the patterns, 
which are laid out as follows : Draw any two verti- 
cal lines, of say 2 in. apart, shown by D E and F 
H. On one of the lines, as D E, place the girth of 
the profile, as shown by similar numbers, through 
which at right angles to D E, draw lines in- 
definitely as shown. Measuring from the line Y- 
14' in elevation take the various projections to the 
various points on the miter line X-14', and place 
them to the right of the line F H in the pattern on 
lines numbered to correspond, as shown ; through 
these points trace the miter cut J H, which con- 
stitutes the pattern for the gable miter X-14' in ele- 
vation. Proceeding in this manner, measure to the 
left of the line Y-14' in elevation and take 
the projections to the various points on the 
miter line B-6' and the base line 6'- 14'. 
Place these distances on similarly numbered 
lines in the pattern, measuring in each in- 
stance to the left of the line D E ; through 
points so obtained trace the bevel miter 
K L and butt miter L E, representing the 
cut along B-6'-i4' in elevation. As the true 
length of the pediment along c d in Fig. 199 
is known, it is only necessary when laying 
out the full size patterns, to measure from 
arrow point 14 to arrow 14" shown in the 
pattern. Should the length be greater than 
that of the sheet, straight sheets may be set 
in between, allowing 1 in. laps for joining. 

GABLE MOLDING MITERING 
AGAINST A MOLDED COLUMN 

Solution 35 

In the example of a gable mold intersecting a 
molded column, shown in Fig. 201, there is an in- 
tersection between vertical and inclined dissimilar 
moldings. This is developed as is illustrated in Fig. 
202, which shows the plan and elevation of an in- 
clined mold mitering against the side of a column. 

In the plan, A B represents the surface of a wall 
against which the back of a half round column X 
and also a mold Y are placed, the molding being 
inclined at the angle shown in the elevation, where 



the intersection of the two is shown at C D E. At 
Y of the plan is shown a profile or right section of 
the mold of which a b is the back or part in the 
plane of the wall surface, the plane of the section 
being revolved upon a horizontal line as o c until 
it is brought into the plane of the view, that is, the 
plan. In the elevation a' b' represents the line 
upon which the section is taken and upon which it 
is revolved to bring it 
into the plane of the 
elevation, as shown 
at Z. 

With these rela- 
tions well understood, 
the method of deriv- 
ing the pattern is as 
follows : First divide 
the curved portions of 
profiles Z and Y into 
the same number of 
equal parts, number- 



Fig. 201. — View of Intersection 
Between Vertical and Inclined 
Dissimilar Moldings 





PLAN 

Fig. 202 
Pattern for Gable Mold, Mitering Against Colur 



PATTERNS FOR SHEET METAL CORNICES. ETC. 



!°3 



ing the points in each profile to correspond with the 
other, and from the points thus obtained upon 
profile Y carry lines parallel to the wall line to inter- 
sect the profile of the column, as shown from G to 
H. From the points on profile Z carry lines from all 
points indefinitely, parallel to the lines of the mold, 
across the space above the plan of the miter. Then 
erect lines from all of the points previously obtained 
in the plan to intersect corresponding lines brought 
from profile Z, as shown at C D E. A line traced 
through these intersections will give the elevation 
of the miter. The pattern is obtained in the usual 
manner, by setting off a stretchout of the profile 
upon any straight line drawn at right angles to the 
mold in elevation, as M N, and projecting the points 
just obtained in the miter into measuring lines of 
corresponding number, as shown at C 1 D 1 E 1 

The intersection of the top part or roof of i b' of 
the profile, with the side of the column, presents 
some peculiarities which it is well to consider, al- 
though that part is governed by exactly the same 
rules as are the other parts of the profile. This 
part of the profile, although straight, must be di- 
vided into spaces, not because of any curve in it, 
but because it is to be mitered against a profile 
which is curved in plan. It must therefore have 
upon it, first, points which correspond with the 
angles or members of the profile against which it 
is to miter, and, second, points in that part which 
abuts against the curve of the column, which are 
close enough to yield an accurate outline in the 
pattern It will be noticed that the fillet 7 8 of the 
profile is so designed as to be flush with a similar 



member in the plan of the column shown by c f. 
That point in the profile of the roof 1 V , which 
will be cut by the surface e f of the column, can 
therefore be found by extending the line 7 8 of the 
profile up to intersect the roof line, as shown at 
point 7'. The remainder of the roof line, the part 
from point 7' to I, can then be divided into spaces, 
according to convenience. A simple way is, when 
extending the line 7 8, to also carry up lines from 
the points 2 to 6 on the curve below, or as many 
of them as may be be deemed necessary, as shown, 
when the spaces from 1 to 9/ must then be set off 
on the stretchout line, as shown, being careful that 
the spaces as they occur are carefully measured, 
since they are likely by this method to be unequal 
in length. The points on the roof can be num- 
bered the same as those in the lower part of the 
profile from which they are obtained, adding primes 
(') to them, if deemed necessary, to avoid mis- 
takes. The intersections between c' and D of the 
miter will then follow the usual rule, by being made 
between lines of corresponding number. 

The natural result of the development is to cut 
the fillet 7 8 from point Ja to E in the elevation of 
the miter, as shown by the dotted line between 
points of those numbers in the pattern. The extra 
thickness of metal caused thereby is the space ~a 
7" E of the elevation can be avoided by also pro- 
jecting the point 7" into the line 7 of the pattern 
and making the cut as there shown. 

O D 1 E 1 K L will then be the pattern sought, 
to which the necessary edges or laps can be allowed. 



PART V 

PATTERNS FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS AND 

CONDUCTOR OFFSETS 



LEADER HEAD OF DISSIMILAR 
PROFILES 

Solution 36 

In Fig. 203 is shown a perspective view of a 
leader head, whose projection of the molding at 
the sides is greater than the projection of the mold 
on the front. This problem may well be designated 




Fig. 203 
View of Leader Head Having Dissimilar Profiles 



the intersection of moldings having dissimilar pro- 
files, to the consideration of which subject attention 
is given in a number of problems which follow. 
Fig. 204 illustrates the development of the various 
patterns comprised in the present example. First, 
draw the front and side elevations in their correct 
relative positions as shown. Observe the great pro- 
jection of the ogee mold in the front elevation and 
the slight projection indicated in the side. Below 
the front elevation is shown a plan view of the 
head, which, however, is not required in the de- 
velopment of the pattern, with the exception of 
that part showing the round tube 0, the quadrants 
of which must be added to the several patterns in 
the manner to be indicated as we proceed. Any 
one of the profiles may be selected for the purpose 
of spacing into equal parts. In this case the pro- 



file of the side mold, shown in the front elevation, 
is spaced into equal divisions, as indicated by the 
small figures 1 to 10. From these points hori- 
zontal lines are drawn to the right, cutting the pro- 
file of the front mold shown in the side elevation 
also from 1 to 10. The divisions between the 
points of intersection shown in the side elevation are 
all unequal. Therefore care is required for trans- 
ferring the divisions to the stretchout line of the 
pattern for the front in order that that each space 
be separately indicated. To obtain the pattern for 
the front, place the girth of the profile, shown in 
the side elevation from 1 to 10, upon the vertical line 
D E, as shown by similar numbers above the front 
elevation. Through these small figures and at right 
angles to D E draw the usual measuring lines ; in- 
tersect these by the lines drawn parallel to D E 
from similarly numbered points in the profile in 
the front elevation. A line traced through points so 
obtained, as shown from G to /' will be the miter 
cut. Assuring that the line D E has been drawn 
in the center of the front elevation trace the half 
pattern 1 G /' 10 opposite the line D E. as indicated 
by F h'. Then F G /' h' will be the full pattern for 
the front. Add to this front pattern on the line h' 
f the quadrant h f c d in plan, which may be 
transferred as follows : From the corners e f 
h and i in plan draw lines to the center cutting 
the plan of the tube at b c d and a, re- 
spectively. With radius equal to / or h o in plan 
and with /' or h' in pattern for front as centers, 
describe arcs cutting each other at 0"' . From h' 
and /' draw radial lines to o'", as shown. Set the 
compasses to equal o c in plan and, using 0'" in 
the pattern as center, draw an arc cutting the radial 
lines just drawn at c" and d". This completes the 
pattern for the front. The pattern for the back can 
be pricked directly from the front elevation, adding 
the flange m n to the desired hight, also adding the 
lower quadrant 10" a" b" 10, which is a repro- 
duction of i a b c in plan. Transfer these various 
dimensions as previously described, m 10" a" b" 10 
104 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



105 




PLAN 
Fig. 204. — Patterns for Leader Head of Dissimilar Profiles 



n is then the pattern for the back. The pattern for 
the sides is obtained in the following manner : Ex- 
tend the wall line in the side elevation as A B ; 
upon this place the girth of the side mold, as in- 
dicated from 1 to 10 in the front elevation, and as 
shown by similar numbers on A B. Through these 
small figures and at right angles to A B draw lines ; 
intersect these lines by lines drawn parallel to A B 
from similarly numbered points of intersection in 
the mold in the side elevation. A line traced through 
points so obtained, as shown, will constitute the pat- 



tern for the two sides of the head, one formed 
right and the other left. Take a reproduction of 
c f c b in plan and place it as indicated by 10 /' 
c' b' in the pattern for sides. The various radii 
used in transferring this quadrant are taken from 
the plan, in the manner corresponding to that by 
which the quadrant was added to the pattern for 
the front. Allow laps on the two patterns for the 
sides as indicated by the arrows. Upon flanging 
the tube which is designed to be inserted on the in- 
side of the circular opening in the bottom of the 



io6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



head, the flange is turned outward at r in the side 
elevation, where it is thoroughly sweated in and 
soldered. If the heads have similar profiles all 
around, a plain square outside miter serves require- 
ments. Problems cf this nature were taken up in 
the preceding exercises, on cornice work. 



coverings are usually employed for concealing the 
malleable iron leader or conductor hooks, whether 
the leaders be against or stand partially free off the 
walls. As a rule, when leaders set away from 
walls, a special type of hinged fasteners is employed. 
These devices are so made that they serve both as 



w"- j 'M ^////////M ^mssmmmmmsmmmmmm^^m 



HORIZONTAL 

SECTION 
OF LEADER 



C ^ ^ Q 
£ O Q ^ 



Fig. 200 



ORNAMENTAL LEADER HOOK 

COVERING, FOR CONCEALING 

LEADER OR CONDUCTOR 

HOOKS 

Solution 37 

In Fig. 205 is presented a perspective view of a 
square leader, fastened at its two sides, with the 
leader hooks A and A 1 , bv the shank a driven into 




Fig. 205. View of Ornamental Leader Hook Covering 

the walls of the building. To conceal these hooks 
and provide an ornamental finish the leader fastener 
B is placed over the hooks, with any design of leaf, 
at C. After the fasteners have been placed over 
the hooks slight tacks with solder are made at b and 
c on the two sides, for holding the ornamental cov- 
ering in place. 

With work of the better class upon leaders of 
galvanized iron or sheet copper, ornamental leader 



ornaments and as fasteners, so that no other cover- 
ing is required. But if leaders be set against the 
walls, ordinary leader hooks are employed, so that 
an ornamental covering is desirable to make a neatly 
appearing job. In Fig. 206 is shown a horizontal 
section of a rectangular leader, fastened with hooks, 
one on either side. To the right of this section is 
shown a vertical section of the leader with the 
hook in position, capped by the metal band, indi- 

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\N\^^\^\\\\s\\V^^^ 



2" 



PLAN 

OF 

COVERING 



2' 





Fig. 207. — Elevation of Covering 

cated by I, 2, 3, 4. This band may be made of any 
desired width, as 2-3, and projecting sufficient at 
1-2 to cover the projection of the driving shank at a 
in the horizontal section. 

Fig. 207 shows the plan and elevation of a finished 
covering, a, b, c in the elevation represents an 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



107 



ornamental end or leaf which can be designed at 
will or according to the sketch provided by the archi- 
tect. A raised ball may be soldered to the fastener 
at d and e. This affords a neat finish and dis- 
poses of the flat surface of the leaf. Upon de- 
ciding the shape of the end leaves, the width and 
projection of the band, the pattern can be laid out 
as shown in Fig. 208. On 
any line, as a b, lay off the 
girth of the band I, 2, 3, 4 
in Fig. 206, as shown by 
similar numbers on a b in 
Fig. 208. Through these 
points, draw perpendicular 
lines indefinitely, as shown. 
Take the distance from 2' to 
d in plan in Fig. 207, and 
place it as shown from 2' to 
d in the pattern in Fig. 208. 
From d, at an angle of 45 
degrees, draw a line, inter- 
secting the perpendicular 
line drawn through 2 at r. 
From r again draw a line at 
45 degrees cutting the per- 
pendicular line drawn 
through 1 at d°, and make 
the distance d° d' equal to 
d d' in plan in Fig. 207. 
From d' in Fig. 208 again draw a line at 45 degrees, 
cutting the line drawn through 2 at m, and from m, 
draw the 45 degree line cutting the line I at d" . 
Make the distance d" 2" equal to d 2' or equal to d' 
2" in plan in Fig. 207, since they are alike. Reverse 
the miter cuts from 2' to 2" in Fig. 208, on the op- 
posite right side as shown and set off the depth of 
the strip t in plan in Fig. 207, as shown by / at both 
ends in the pattern in Fig. 208. This completes the 
pattern in one piece. 



2 




( 












d 


\ 




/ 




rf' 


/ 




\ 




a ' 


2 


3 


4 














d' 


\ 


in 


< 




d' 






2 




t 







PA TTERN 
Fig. 208 




Fig. 209. — Bending Square Covering 

Construction 

Upon forming up the fastener, the long bends 
are first made, after which the fastener is turned 
by hand in the manner indicated in Fig. 209, where 



a is the finished square bend and b is partly turned. 

Occasionally this style of fastener is used for 

round leaders, as shown in Fig. 210, when the leader 

hook is covered as indicated. In that case the end 



Mr///////////////// "■'■%, '-vm. 




Fig. 210 

leaves may be alike and the pattern laid out as shown 
in Fig. 211. That portion of the band covering 
the circular part of the leader is notched, as indi- 
cated by the heavy dashes. In bending the round 



Notch 



■ Notch 



PA TTERN 




Fig. 211 



Fig. 212. — Bending 
Round Covering 



leader covering, the long bends are first made, when 
the notching is done and turned to suit the profile of 
the leader, as shown in Fig. 212, the openings at a 
and b being cut out to receive the end leaves. If de- 
sired the notches may be soldered. 



INSIDE AND OUTSIDE MITERS FOR 

EAVE GUTTER, FORMING A 

RIGHT ANGLE IN PLAN 



Solution 38 




Fig. 213. — View of Outside Miter for Eave Gutter 

Fig. 213 gives a perspective view of an outside 
miter for an eave gutter, commonly known as an 
exterior angle, while the perspective shown in Fig. 



io8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Fiir. 




View of Inside Miter for Eave Gutter 



214 shows an inside miter or an eave gutter, used 
for an interior angle. The development of both of 
these patterns at one operation is shown in Fig. 




Fig. 215. — Obtaining Square Outside and Inside Miters for 
Eave Gutter at One Operation 



215. First draw the section of the eave gutter A, 
as shown, spaced in equal divisions as shown by the 
small figures 1 to 14. Erect any vertical line, as 
B C, upon which place the girth of the section A 
as shown by similar numbers on B C. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to B C, draw 
lines ; intersect these lines by those drawn parallel 



to B C from similar numbers in the section A. A 
line traced through points thus obtained, as shown 
from D to E, will be the miter cut. 1, D, E, 14, 
will be the miter for an outside angle of 90 degrees 
in plan. Extend i-D and 14-E in the pattern, as 
shown by D G and E F, respectively, and draw the 
perpendicular line G F. Then G D E F will rep- 
resent the miter for an inside angle of 90 degrees in 
plan. Thus it will be seen that if the miter cut D E 
is cut in the rectangular piece 1-G-F-14, the shaded 
part will be the pattern for the inside miter and the 
unshaded part, the pattern for the outside miter. 
The method of laying out square miters, as shown, 
is known as "a short rule" but it is accurate, no 
plan or miter line being required, and it can be em- 
ployed only when the finished angle is 90 degrees. 
If this angle be more or less than 90 degrees, a 
plan and miter line is employed after a manner that 
will be explained as we proceed. On measuring the 
length of the gutter at the building, the measure- 
ments are taken at the corner or eave line indicated 
by the arrow X in the section. As this corner in- 
dicates bend 13 in the gutter, the measurements are 
laid out on line 13 in the patterns, that is, from the 
arrow point Y in the pattern towards 13 for the 
outside miter, and from the arrow point Y towards 
13' for the inside miter. Allow laps for joining at 
miters. 



MITER FOR AN ENLARGED INSIDE 
GUTTER 

Solution 39 

Fig. 216 is a perspective view of an inside gutter 
miter enlarged by means of a gore piece placed be- 
tween the angle. 




Fig. 216. — Perspective View of Angle in Gutter 



To one conversant with roof drainage problems, 
it is evident that there are valleys on the roof at 
these places and that valleys deliver a concentrated 
stream of water to those parts of the gutter. With 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



109 



the customary mode of making a simple inside miter 
of the gutter, provision is not made for the large 
quantity of water delivered there. Very often the 
water flows with sufficient rapidity and volume to 
force it over the outer edge of the gutter in addi- 
tion to which, water running around the miter, from 
the high to the low end of the gutter, must turn 
abruptly at the miter with the result of retarding 
the flow. 

To avoid the possible occurrence of such troubles, 
the inside miter of the gutter can be designed with a 
gore piece, as shown in the perspective. The drawing 



vary but little if the angle of the miter, that is / d g, 
were other than the right angle shown. 

In the shop where these gutters are manufac- 
tured, the bead is made on a special machine which 
is not adjustable so far as changing its shape is 
concerned, although different sizes of rods are used. 
In view of this fact and that the profile or section 
of the gore on the line h d is necessarily different 
from A, a means of maintaining the shape of the 
bead throughout the plan must be adopted. 

The section A having been established as shown, 
the plan is delineated by first drawing lines f d g, 



=~& 




Fig. 217. — Method of Developing Pattern for Enlarged Miter 



10 It a 13 



shows that the restricted area of the usual gutter 
miter is amply enlarged by this procedure to provide 
an easy turn for the flowing water and to form a 
pan to catch the stream of water from the valley. 

Fig. 217 indicates the manner in which the pat- 
terns are obtained. A is the profile or section of the 
gutter with the plan of the miter in its correct rela- 
tion thereto, the gore being outlined by a b c d c of 
the plan. It may be said here that the process would 



representing the innermost edge of the gutter, and 
then drawing the lines of the bead parallel thereto, 
as shown by /' a and ; b. The line a b is drawn at 
an angle of 45 degrees and of a length to make the 
gore of a size deemed sufficient for the purpose and 
of pleasing proportions. 

The angles i a b and a b j are bisected by the 
method previously explained and as shown at a, 
which gives the miter line for the bead. The profile 



no 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



of the bead is then divided into spaces, as shown, 
lines are dropped to the miter line at a and then 
carried to b, all as shown in the drawing ; point 6 
shows where the gutter bead and the gutter proper 
join. Lines are then drawn from e to d and c to d, 
which will be the miter lines of the gore, extending 
through the circular part of the gutter only. The re- 
mainder of profile A is now divided into spaces, as 
shown from 6 to 14. and lines are carried from each 
point to the miter line e d, as shown. 

Before developing the patterns it is essential that 
the true section on the line h d be determined, which 
is done by first carrying lines from each point in 
profile A to any horizontal line, as k I. Another 
line is then drawn parallel to a b, as 111 11, and the 
points on k I are transferred to in n by describing 
arcs as shown, using as a center the place where 
lines m 11 and k I cross. From m 11, and at right 
angles to it, lines are projected from the points on 
it to the right, which are intersected by lines drawn 
from corresponding points on the line c d of the 
plan, thus obtaining the points through which to 
trace profile X, the true section on the line h d. 

For the pattern of the gore, line h d is continued 
indefinitely, the stretchout of profile X placed 
thereon and the usual parallel lines are drawn at 
right angles, which are intersected by lines drawn 
parallel to h d, drawn from the points on the miter 
lines e d and c d. A line traced through the re- 
sulting points of intersection outlines the pattern. 

For the pattern of the gutter, the stretchout of 
profile A is placed on line / g, extended; the usual 
measuring lines are drawn at right angles to it, and 
intersected by lines drawn parallel to ; g from in- 
tersections on the miter line, all as shown. The laps 
must be so allowed that the water will flow over the 
joint and not against it. 

INSIDE AND OUTSIDE MITERS FOR 

OGEE GUTTER AT OTHER THAN 

A RIGHT ANGLE IN PLAN 

Solution 40 

The perspective view of Fig. 218 illustrates the 
outside miter of an ogee gutter at an angle other 
than a right angle in plan, while the perspective of 




Fig. 218. — View of Outside Miter of Ogee Gutter 




Fig. 219. — View of Inside Miter of Ogee Gutter 

Fig. 219 shows the same gutter at an inside angle. 
As stated in a preceding problem, if the angle be 
scjuare no plan or miter line is required, but if the 
angle be other than a right angle a plan view giving 
the bevel of the wall must be obtained and from this 
the miter line is found by the procedure shown in 
Fig. 220. Here the section of the ogee gutter is in- 
dicated by A, the ogee of which is divided into equal 
spaces in the customary manner. From the rear line 
of the gutter where it lies against the building line, 
as at 2-3, drop a perpendicular line indefinitely at 
B C, and from any point, as C lay off the bevel B 
C D regardless of what this bevel may be. To 
obtain the miter line, bisect the angle BCD 
by using C as a center, and with any radius, 
describing arcs cutting the lines B C and C D at 
a and b respectively. With the same or any other 
radius and with a and b as centers, describe arcs, 
cutting each other at c. Draw a line from c through 
C indefinitely as shown, and from the various points 
of intersection, 1 to 12, in section A, drop vertical 
lines until they intersect the miter line c F in plan as 
shown by similar numbers. If desired, complete the 
plan of the outside angle as shown by B C D H F G, 
but this is not essential in the development of the 
pattern, all that is required being the miter line c F. 
To obtain the pattern proceed as follows : Draw any 
line as G L, at right angles to G F, upon which 
place the girth of the section A as shown by similar 
numbers on G L. At right angles to G L and 
through the small figures, draw lines indefinitely, 
which intersect lines drawn parallel to G L from 
similarly numbered intersections on the miter line 
F c in plan. A line traced through points so ob- 
tained, as shown by N M, will be the miter cut for 
the angle B C D in plan and LGNM will be the 
miter pattern for the outside angle. The reverse of 
the cut M N constitutes the pattern for the inside 
angle, as indicated by the shaded part M N O P. 
It forms the pattern for the inside angle shown by 
C D E J H F in plan. It should be understood that 
the miter cut M N in the pattern can be used for 
both inside and outside angles only when the angle 
G F H is alike to the angle F H J in plan reversed, 
or when the lines B C and D E run parallel. If the 
conditions differ from those explained, separate pat- 
terns require to be developed. 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



in 



Taking Measurement at the Building 

Diagram X shows the method of taking the meas- 
urements at the building. As the lines U V and 
Y Z are parallel to W X, the angles at W and X will 
be alike, when reversed, to the angles at V and Y. 
In this case the gutters are to have "flat heads" in 
the ends of pieces I and I both of which are alike in 
length. Pieces II and II are also alike. Therefore 
the lengths need be taken only from U to V, V to 
W and W to X. As these measurements are taken 
at the wall line and as the corner 2 of section A lies 



against this line, it is invariably necessary in placing 
measurements on the sheet metal and using the pat- 
terns just developed, to measure on line 2, from the 
arrow point S towards T for the outside miters, as 
at W and X in diagram X ; and from S towards R 
in the pattern for the inside miters, as at V and Y in 
diagram X. The heavy dots in the patterns indicate 
where the bends are to be made in the brake. The 
method of making these bends in the brake is taken 
up in a subsequent problem. 




Fig. 220. — Obtaining Bevel Miters for Outside and 
Angles of Ogee Gutter 




GUTTER BOARD 



WOOD BLOCKING 



Fig. 221. — General View of Roof Gutter Molding, for which 
Inside and Outside Miters are Sought 



INSIDE AND OUTSIDE MITERS FOR 

ROOF GUTTER MOLDINGS ON 

PITCHED ROOFS, FORMING A 

RIGHT ANGLE IN PLAN 

Solution 41 

Roof gutter moldings are usually installed at the 
eaves of pitched roofs and form a finish at the base, 
as well as a gutter and snow-guard to prevent snow 
from sliding with the downward pitch of the roof. 
Fig. 221 illustrates a typical gutter mold, with wood 



n: 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 

K , 




PLAN OF 
BEVEL 



Fig. 222. — Obtaining Snuare Inside and Outside Miters for 
Roof Gutter Mold 



blockings, etc., for which we will proceed to develop 
the inside and outside miters. The method is illus- 
trated in Fig. 222. The first step is to draw the cor- 
rect pitch of the roof as indicated by A B and then 
to indicate the profile of the mold 
C on this roof line. Space the 
mold C, including the flashing, in 
divisions, as indicated by the 

p small figures I to 15, and set off 

this girth on the vertical girth 
line D E, as shown by similar numbers. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to D E, draw 
lines ; intersect these lines by lines drawn parallel to 
D E from similarly numbered intersections in the 
profile C. A line traced through points so obtained, 
as shown by F G, will be the desired cut ; 1 F G-15 
will be the pattern for the square outside miter and 
the shaded portion, F J H G, will be the pattern for 
the square inside miter. In obtaining measurements 
for the gutter, the distances are taken along the eave 
line at B, which is bend 13 in the mold. Therefore, 
in proceeding to lay out these lengths on the sheet 
metal, measure along the line 13 in the pattern, 
measuring from the arrow S towards 13 for the 
outside miter, and from the arrow S towards 13' for 
the inside miter. Allowance for laps is essential on 
all miter cuts. If the angle of the eave line in plan 
be other than a right angle, as shown by L N K 
above the profile, this angle is bisected by means of 
the arcs a, b and c and the miter line is drawn as 
shown by N M. All the points in the profile C 
should then be erected vertically to meet this miter 
line N M, the girth of profile C placed on the girth 
line O P and the procedure explained in detail in the 
preceding problem followed. 

INSIDE AND OUTSIDE MITERS FOR 

ROOF GUTTERS ON ROOFS OF 

DISSIMILAR PITCH, FORMING 

A RIGHT ANGLE IN PLAN 

Solution 42 




Fig. 223. — View of Intersecting Roofs at an Inside Angle, 
the Roofs having Different Pitches with Roof Gutters 
at a, b and c 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



"3 



With the intersection of roofs of dissimilar pitches, 
at an interior angle, forming a valley, as shown in 
the persepctive view in Fig. 223, the method of ob- 
taining the patterns for the roof gutters a b c is 
somewhat more difficult than that set forth in the 
preceding problem, for the reason that one of the 
profiles of the gutter will require to be modified 
or changed from the normal to allow for a miter 




Mg. 224.- 



-Sketch, Showing Plan and Elevation of Roof, 
and Enlarged Section of Gutter 



joint along the miter line at b. Fig. 224 is in re- 
duced size a sketch giving the dimensions of a roof 
as well as an enlarged section of the gutter. It will 
be noted that the lower wing has a slightly different 
pitch from that of the main roof and that the gutter 
shown is at an inside angle. Observe that the hori- 
zontal distance of half of the smaller wing is 9 feet, 
while its vertical rise to the ridge line is 12 feet. 



tn l iiiiiiiiiii,rfl l iii,i'tMi,i,iiiiiiiiiiiiiii,l i 

Fig. 225. — Securing Roof Pitches 



The horizontal distance of the half main roof is 13 
feet and its rise 16 feet. With these dimensions the 
true pitch can be obtained by a steel square, as 
shown in Fig. 225, where a line drawn from 9 to 12 



and one drawn from 13 to 16 will give the correct 
pitch of the roofs shown in Fig. 224. While the 
angle 16-13-a in Fig. 225 is only a slight variation 
from 12-9-a, the difference in pitches in progress 
of developing the patterns is made more pronounced, 
in order that there will be no confusion of lines and 
so that the principle may be more readily under- 
stood. 

Fig. 226 illustrates the development of the vari- 
ous profiles and pattern shapes. Let A X represent 
the pitch of one roof, having, in this case, 45 degrees. 
From X drop a vertical line as X C. Establish on 
the line X C any point as C, and draw the line C D 
at right angles to C B, thus forming the interior 
right angle. Through X draw the horizontal line 
E F and from any desired point on the roof line, 
as A, drop a line at right angles to F E, meeting this 
line at F. On the roof pitch A X, construct the 
normal profile of the roof gutter, as from 1 to 12, 
where is indicated the construction of the wood 
blocking and gutter proper. It will be noted that the 
metal construction has been so arranged as to form a 
standing lock between the gutter mold and gutter, 
dispensing with soldering except along the cross 
seams. While the normal profile is placed on the roof 
having 45 degree pitch and the modification found 
on the 60 degree pitch, the same method of pro- 
cedure would be followed if the normal profile were 
placed on the roof of 60 degree pitch. 

Draw parallel to B C in plan any line, as E 1 F 1 , 
and extend C D until it meets E 1 F 1 at X 1 . Draw a 
short line, b c, parallel to E 1 F 1 and at a distance 
therefrom equal to F A in the normal profile as 
shown. From the corner X 1 draw the desired 
angle of the pitched roof, (60 degrees), meet- 
ing the line b c at A 1 . From this point, A 1 , and 
parallel to C D in plan, draw a line, intersecting the 
line A F extended, at A 2 . Draw the miter line in 
plan from C to A 2 as shown. Having thus found the 
miter line in plan, the modification from the normal 
profile is now in order. Set off on the mold in the 
normal profile, an equal number of spaces, and 
number the corners in the entire profile, as shown 
by the small figures 1 to 12 ; from these intersec- 
tions draw parallel to A F lines cutting the miter 
line C A 2 in plan, as shown and from these inter- 
sections and parallel to A 2 A 1 erect lines indefinitely, 
all as shown. Then, measuring from the line E F 
in the normal profile, take the various distances to 
points 1 to 12 and place them on corresponding 
lines, measuring in each instance from the line 
E 1 F 1 . Trace a line through points so obtained, as 
shown from 1' to 12'; this will be the modified pro- 



ii4 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




Fig. 226. — Patterns for Inside and Outside Miters for Roof Gutters on Roofs of Dissimilar Pitches 



file on the 60 degree pitched root. The miter pat- 
terns are now in order of procedure. 

To find the pattern for the gutter mold on the 45 
degree pitched roof, proceed as follows : Draw any 
line, as O P, at right angles to F A 2 ; upon this place 
the girth of the normal profile, as shown by similar 
numbers 1 to 12 on O P. At right angles to O P 
and through the small figures 1 to 12, draw lines; 
intersect these lines by lines drawn parallel to O P, 
from similar points on the miter line C A 2 . A line 
traced through points so obtained, as indicated by 
R S, is the miter cut, and 12 R S I becomes the in- 
side miter pattern. Extend the lines 12 R and I S 



as R U and S T respectively and draw from U a 
line parallel to P O, as shown by U T. Then R S 
T U is the miter pattern for an outside angle. 

The pattern for the modified mold on the 60 de- 
gree pitched roof is developed in a manner similar 
to that just described. Draw any line, H J, at right 
angles to A 2 H ; upon this place the girth of the 
modified profile, measuring the spaces separately, as 
they are all unequal as shown by the small figures 
1' to 12' on H J. Through these small figures and 
at right angles to H J, draw lines which intersect 
lines drawn, parallel to H J, from similar intersec- 
tions on the miter line C A 2 . Through these inter- 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



ii5 



sections trace the miter cut L K. Then 1' L K 12' 
will be the inside miter pattern and the opposite, 
L M N K, an outside miter pattern. 

In taking the measurements for the gutter mold 
at the building, measure along the eave line X and 
X 1 and place these dimensions on the metal ; meas- 
uring invariably from the arrow points, a and a', 
respectively, in the patterns, in the manner explained 
in preceding problems. 



RAKING GUTTER MITERS, METER- 
ING AT RIGHT ANGLES IN PLAN 

Solution 43 

Fig. 227 presents a practical example of raking 
gutter miter. Here is shown a plan of a pitched roof 
running in the direction of the arrow, the upper eave 



— 10 



IT 



, n w 

61 

Fig. 227.— A Practical Example 



GUTTLR 



gutter at A being designed to join the lower eave 
gutter at B, thus requiring a raking gutter between 
A and B, forming an inside as well as an outside 
miter at A and B respectively. The subject of the 
problem is more clearly shown in the 
perspective view in Fig. 228, where A 
and C represent the horizontal eave 
gutters containing the normal or given 
profile while B indicates the gutter to 
be raked which contains the changed 
or modified profile, all angles being 90 
degrees or right angles. Fig. 229 illus- 
trates the development of patterns of 
this nature. First draw the vertical 
line S T, and a line to show the pitch 
of the roof, R F. S T and S l T 1 show 
the two vertical angles or corners of 
the wall at A and B of Fig. 227, while 
the profile marked A in Fig. 229 is 



the profile of that part of the gutter shown from A 
towards the left in Fig. 227, and B in Fig. 229 is the 
profile of that part from B towards the right in 
Fig. 227. Whenever an inclined mold, be it gutter 
or any other form of mold, miters with a level mold, 
at any angle, it becomes necessary that either the 
level or the inclined mold should undergo a change 
of profile ; therefore, either one may be "raked" 
(changed), and it is usual to rake that of which 
there is the least in length. It should be understood 
that the miters at the ends of the level pieces are 
just the same as they would be if all parts were 
level, that is, ordinary inside and outside miters; 
and therefore that part of the operation is not 
shown. 

To obtain the profile for the raking or inclined 
gutter, first divide the profile A of Fig. 229 into any 
convenient number of equal spaces, as shown by 
the figures, and from each point of division carry 
lines indefinitely to the right, parallel to the angle 
of the roof, R F, as shown. Next, draw any line, 
as E G, at right angles across the lines just drawn 
and, considering it as a vertical line, construct upon 
it, somewhere below or above, another profile of 
the gutter, as shown at C, which also divide into 
the same number of equal spaces as A. Now from 
each of the points of division in C, erect lines paral- 
lel to E G, or at right angles to R F, to cut lines 
of corresponding number previously drawn from 
the profile at A. A line traced through the points 
of intersection will give the required profile of the 
inclined gutter, all as shown by profile D. The 
stretchout for the inclined mold must now be taken 
from its profile, D, and set off on any line drawn 
at right angle to R F, as M N. Remembering that 
the spaces on D have now become unequal by the 
raking operation, each space must consequently be 
taken separately and set off on M N, in the order 




' Angle 

Fig. 228. — View of Raking Gutter Miters 



n6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




in which they occur on the profile. Through the 
points thus obtained on M N, draw the usual 
measuring lines parallel to R F, as shown, and in- 
tersect each with a line from the point of corre- 
sponding number on profile A, drawn 
parallel to M N. A line traced suc- 
cessively through the several 
intersections, as shown from H 
to K, will be the 
shape of the in- 
side miter cut. 

The drawing 
indicates that 
the profile of the 
lower part of 
the gutter, 
shown by B, has 
also been di- 
vided into the 
same number of 
equal spaces as 
profile A, from 
which points 
lines have been 
projected into 
the measuring 
lines below M N (to the right), thus giving the out- 
side miter at the lower end of the raking gutter, 
which of course is the same in contour as the other. 
Laps must be allowed for soldering and riveting. It 
may be well to mention again that the miter pattern 
for the outside angle b in Fig. 228 of the level gut- 
ter is an ordinary outside square miter, while the 
pattern for a is an ordinary square inside miter on 
the level gutter a. 



RAKING GUTTERS ON PITCHED 

ROOF, AT OTHER THAN A 

RIGHT ANGLE IN PLAN 

Solution 44 

The example of a gutter on a pitched roof whose 
angle is other than a right angle in plan, shown in 
the perspective of Fig. 230, requires in the pro- 
cedure of development a plan of the miter lines and 
patterns. In this case the patterns for the miter cuts 
at A and B of the level gutters, as well as the 
raking miters, are taken up in detail. Fig. 231 shows 
how the patterns are developed. First draw the 
normal or given profile A, which represents a sec- 
tion on the line X Y in Fig. 230. Below A, in Fig. 



Fig. 229. — Method of Laying Out Raking Gutter Miters 





/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 


/ 1 1 1 1 1 


I \ 


/ 1 1 1 1 


1 








1 / 






, , 


ill l 1 


/i 1 1 1 




1 . 








, 


1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 1 ' 


/ 






1 1 1 1 1 


/ 1 1 1 1 1 




■ 1 

1 I 


III 1 1 / 


/ 1 1 1 1 1 




1 


1 1 1 11 


/\ 1 1 1 1 1 






III 1 1 \ 


/ 1 1 1 1 1 




■ 1 


1 1 1 1 


/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 




, 


1 1 1 1 1 


1 1 1 1 1 1 


\A 


, 










1 1 1 1 I 




\ 1 


l l l l l \ 


/_- ■ -^_.. = ^ 













\\l 












Ill LI 








^ 






1 1 1 1 


1 






\ 




wA 


| 




OTHER THAN V 
A RIGHT ANGLE 






\ 


2 


---- - ^ -;_=-! 






B 






rX 






) 


t 



Fig. 230. — View of Raking Gutters, Joining at Other Than 
a Right Angle in Plan 

231, draw the plan view, giving the angles in plan, 
as partly shown by B C D E. Bisect the angles 
B C D and C D E bv the miter lines C F and D G 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



117 



respectively, and complete the plan H J by project- 
ing the extreme edge of the roof flange of the 
gutter A at 12. Divide the ogee of section A into 
an equal number of spaces, shown from 3 to 8, and 
number all corners in the section A, shown from 
I to 12. From these small figures drop vertical 
lines until they cut the miter line C F in plan, as 
shown by similar numbers. 

The patterns for the exterior and interior angles 
of the level gutters may then be laid out. At right 
angles to B C in plan draw any line, as K L, upon 
which place the girth of the normal profile A, as 
shown by the small figures 1 to 12, on K L. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to K L, draw 
the usual measuring lines ; intersect these by lines 
drawn parallel to K L from similarly numbered in- 
tersections on the miter line F C. A line traced 
through points so obtained will be the miter cut. 
1-N-M-12 will then be the miter cut on the level 
gutter for the exterior angle and N O P M the miter 
cut on the level gutter for the interior angle. As the 
bend 1 1 in the normal profile A comes directly on 
the eave line, then in tak- 
ing measurements for the *s 
metal gutter the edge 11 / / / 7*"X 
of the roof board is meas 
u r e d and 
laid off from 
V in the pat- 
tern towards 
11, for the 
exterior 
angle ; and 
from V to- 
wards 11', 
for the in- 
terior angle. 

Obtaining the raked 
profile and patterns for 
the raking gutter, shown 
from A to B in Fig. 230, 
is next in order and is ac- 
complished as shown in 
Fig. 231. On the line 12 G 
in plan or the line obtained 
from point 12 in the nor- 
mal profile A, establish any 
point as a, from which 
erect a vertical line, inter- 
secting the roof line, 1 1-12 
extended at a'. Then take 
a tracing of part of the 
plan, G F C D, includ- 




es 



c 

< 

bo 
(5 



c 
H 



o 
o 



fc 



O 

bo 

c 

J2 

a 



CO 

eu 



be 



nS 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



ing the point a and the various numbers on F C and 
place it in a horizontal position, as shown to the left 
and marked Part Plan. From a and from the various 
intersections 12 to 2 in the Part Plan, erect vertical 
lines which intersect horizontal lines carried to the 
left from the various intersections of similar num- 
bers and letters in the normal profile. A line traced 
through points so obtained, as shown from a" to 
12 to 1 in R, will show a partial true elevation giving 
the miter line of the exterior angle. From the vari- 
ous intersections, I to 12, in R, draw indefinitely, 
lines parallel to a" 12, as shown towards the left. 
Take a tracing of the normal profile A and place it 
at right angles to a" 12, as shown by A 1 . Through the 
small figures 1 to 12 in A 1 , draw lines perpen- 
dicular to a" 12, intersecting lines previously drawn 
parallel to a" 12. Trace a line through points so ob- 
tained, resulting in the raked or modified profile, 
shown from 1 to 12. 

The pattern for the raked gutter may now be ob- 
tained by placing the girth of the modified profile 
on the line S T, which is drawn at right angles to 
a"-i2; through these small figures 1 to 12, on S T 
lines are drawn parallel to a" 12 and are intersected 
by lines drawn at right angles to a" 12 from simil- 
arly numbered intersections in the miter line in R. 
Trace a line through these intersections, as shown 
by U V. Then T U V S shows the raking miter for 
the exterior angle, shown at the corner B in Fig. 
230; and U V W X in Fig. 231 will be the raking 
miter for the interior angle, shown by A in Fig. 230. 
Upon laying out the length of the raking gutter, 
A B, measurements are taken on the raking pattern 
in Fig. 231 from b" towards 11, for the outside or 
exterior angle; and from b" towards 11" for the in- 
side or interior angle. The modified profile shown 
is to be used when forming up the raking gutter, 
while the normal profile is used when form- 
ing up the two horizontal gutters. Laps for rivet- 
ing and soldering should be allowed on the miter 
patterns, placing the laps so that the water will not 
run against the seams, but over them. In other 
words, laps should be allowed on the horizontal 
molding or gutter at the corner A in Fig. 230 and 
laps on the raking gutter at the corner B. This will 
provide for the water running over the seam, not 
against it. 



PANELED CONDUCTOR OFFSET 
Solution 45 

When a leader or conductor is to offset over a 



projecting wash on a building, whether the pipe be 
square, rectangular, or paneled, it is customary and 
proper that the area of the three pieces of pipe 
making the offset should be alike, that is, it is poor 
practice to modify the profile of the middle section, 
thereby reducing its area and preventing the free 
flow of water. 




Fig. 232. — View of Paneled Conductor Offset 

Fig. 232 is a perspective view of a paneled leader 
offset whose area is equal in each of the three pieces, 
thereby giving the formation of the panel heads 
shown. If the line of the panel head were re- 
quired to be level or horizontal along a b, a change 
of profile would in that case be required, in the 
oblique piece ; this would reduce the area of that 
piece and should therefore be avoided. Fig. 233 
shows how the patterns are developed for the three 
pieces or arms, as well as for the panel heads. In 
preparing the patterns, we will so develop them that 
the arms miter together, as if no panel heads were 
sought, as shown at the miters a b and c d in Fig. 
234. After these miters are joined water tight the 
panel heads A and B are set in separately, as shown 
in the diagrams at the left and right. The pro- 
cedure set forth in connection with and illustrated 
in Fig. 233 is applicable to any size or profile of 
pipe, without respect to the angle required in either 
plan or elevation. 

Let A B C D represent the slope of the wash over 
which the offset is to fit at an angle indicated by 
1-1 in plan, (in this case 45 degrees). From C in 
the slope, draw the horizontal line C E, meeting 
the line A B extended at E. E B then gives the 
vertical hight of the wash, whose base is C E. In 
its correct position, as shown in plan, draw the pro- 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



119 




120 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



file of the paneled leader, indicated by F, take a 
duplicate of F and place it in accurate position, 
shown by F°, so that the corner i in profile F is 
set at the corner i in the lower angle. Number 
the various corners in F°, as shown by the small 
figures i to 8 and, if desired, connect lines to cor- 
responding corners in the profile F, as shown. Upon 
any line in plan, as i-i, construct a true elevation as 
follows: Equal to and parallel to i-i in plan draw 
any line, as I E°, at right angles to which, from 
E°, draw the line, E° a, equal in hight to E B. A 
line drawn from a to i will give the true length of 
the line i-i in plan. From point i in the true ele- 
vation and at right angles to i E° draw i c, as de- 
sired. Also set off a b. As the angle b a i is alike 
to the angle a I c, the pattern for one arm will 
serve for the three arms required in the construc- 
tion of the offset and but one miter line will be re- 
quired. Therefore, bisect the angle, c I a, by the 
miter line 7-1, as shown. From the various corners, 
1 to 8, in the profile F° in plan and at right angles 
to i-i in plan erect lines intersecting the miter line, 
7-1, in the true elevation, as shown by similar num- 
bers. From c draw parallel to E° 1 the line c H, 
upon which place the girth of the profile F° in plan, 
as shown by similar numbers on H c. From these 
small figures 1 to 1 , and at right angles to H c erect 
lines indefinitely, as shown, and intersect them by 
lines drawn parallel to c H from similarly num- 
bered intersections on the miter line, 7-1. Trace a 
line through points thus obtained, as shown by J K ; 
1 JKi will be the pattern for the lower arm, edges 
to which have been allowed for seaming and sol- 
dering, as indicated by the dotted lines. Allow for 
two sets of laps above K J in the pattern, as indi- 
cated from K to L and set off this distance K L, 
above the miter cut K J ; draw L O, a reproduction 
of K J, and allow laps below L O as indicated by the 
dotted lines. Take the distance from 1 to a in the 
true elevation and set it off in the pattern, as shown 
from L to M and 1° to a°, and draw the miter cut 
M N corresponding to K J. L M N O then con- 
stitutes the pattern for the middle piece. Take the 
distance from a to & in the true elevation, which 
represents a line on the corner 1 in the profile F in 
plan and set it off on the lines 1 and 1 in the pat- 
tern, as shown from M to P and a° to b°, and 
draw a line from P to b° . a b° P M then rep- 
resents the pattern for the upper arm. This gives 
the three patterns from one rectangular piece of 
metal. It will be observed that the upper miter cut 
along M N has no laps, while the lower miter cuts, 
K J and O L, each have laps, for soldering pur- 



poses. Laps are allowed throughout the three pieces 
for double seaming the corners, as shown. 

If these three patterns were formed up and sol- 
dered together, they would appear as shown in 
Fig. 234, but as a panel effect is desired, as shown 
in Fig. 232, the pattern for the panel heads must 
be obtained. Preparatory to this a true face must 
be obtained, from which the development can be 




Fig. 234. — Joining the Offset Minus the Panel Heads 

made. The true face is shown by 0° b° c° d° in 
the pattern in Fig. 233 and it is reproduced by S 
at the top of the cut. Above this diagram, S, place 
a tracing of the panel profile in F° from 2 to 7, as 
shown reversed by F x above the diagram S. From 
the small figures 3 to 6, in F x , drop perpendicular 
lines in S as shown. Take the various widths on 
a b in S and set them off at right angles to n on 
d c. Complete the true elevation of the panel lines, 
as shown. Extend c d as c e and upon this place 
twice the girth of 4-3-2 in F x , as shown by 4-3-2-3- 
4 on d c. At right angles to d e and through the 
small figures draw lines, which intersect lines drawn 
parallel to d e from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions on the miter lines, n I and m 0. A line traced 
through these points, as shown by T U V W X Y, 
will be the pattern for the two miter heads. 

Construction 

When in the process of making up these paneled 
leader offsets, as well as of the leaders, which are 
usually constructed of copper, care must be exer- 



PATTERN FOR LEADER HEADS, ROOF GUTTERS, ETC. 



121 



cised in forming up the paneled formation as well 
as the corner lock. Detailed explanation is pro- 
vided in the text and illustration of Fig. 235. 

Let diagram a represent the formation of the 
right and left lock at bends marked 1, making a 
slight bend at x between 8 and 1. After the locks 



the locks at 1 and close them tightly in the jaws 
of the brake, as indicated in diagram e. The lock- 
is now closed on a mandrel stake or steel bar A, 
as shown in diagram f, using the mallet to make a 
tight seam, but exercising care that the pipe will 
not twist. The offset can now be set together to 



2 3 4 

-t 1 — i- 



5 6 7 
H 1 1- 



^ 



3 ^ 6 




6 



6 7 




Fig. 235. — Forming and Seaming the Paneled Pipe 



have been bent in the brake form the panel sinkage 
at 3, 4, 5, and 6 after the profile, so that the forma- 
tion will appear as shown in diagram b. Next, make 
square bends on dots, 7 and 8, as shown in diagram 
c, after which the final bend is made on dot 2, to 
bring it to the desired shape, as shown at d. Spring 



the correct angle, as shown by a b and c d in Fig. 
234. Thereafter the panel heads are soldered in 
position, shown at A and B. In bending the panel 
heads the center bend on each is formed to corre- 
spond to the desired exterior and interior angles, 
all as shown in the view of Fig. 2^2. 



PART VI 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS FOR ANGULAR AND 

SEGMENTAL PEDIMENTS 



rpHE present part is devoted to a class of develop- 
•^ merit termed "raking miters," which occur at 
the angles of a pediment or in any position where 
a level mold is required to miter with an inclined 
mold at any angle in plan. 

The chief characteristic of this class is the "rak- 
ing" or changing of the profile of one arm of the 
miter before the patterns can be developed. By 
far the greater number of cases are those in which 
the inclined mold on the face of a pediment is re- 
quired to miter with a square or right angle re- 
turn, in which case the miter is described as a 
"square raking" miter. Sometimes, however, the 
return or level arm of the miter may be at a more 
obtuse angle, as an octagon angle or one even 
greater, thus requiring a further complication of 
operations, all of which will be illustrated and ex- 
plained in due course. 

Briefly stated, when an inclined mold is required 
to miter with a level mold at any angle in the plan, 
it becomes necessary to change the profile of one of 
the arms. The reason for this can best be ex- 
plained by following out the operation of obtaining 
the new profile. 

In the case of any raking miter, two courses are 
open to the pattern cutter: The profile of either the 
inclined or the level mold may be changed, the 
choice being determined by conditions which may 
arise. 

Let us take up first the case in which the change 
of profile is made in the inclined mold, the level 
return remaining normal. 



RAKING CROWN MOLD IN 
ANGULAR PEDIMENT 

Solution 46 

Fig. 236 is a view of an angular pediment. A, 
represents the profile of the level molding which will 
form a raking miter with the inclined molding. B 



represents a face miter, while C shows a butt miter 
on the wash D. 

Fig. 237 shows in the center a front elevation, at 
the left a side elevation, and at the right a section 
on the center line of the pediment, such as may be 
used in a door or window cap. In constructing this 
elevation it is necessary to follow very closely the 
directions here given. Draw first the normal profile 
A B C D. The profile here shown is the simplest 
form of crown mold and the one most commonly 
used. In practical work any other profile of crown 
mold may be used instead ; but in shop work the 
profile must of course be drawn in accordance with 
the specifications or architect's requirement as re- 
gards size, shape and number of the members, etc. 
From the points B C and D only, draw horizontal 
lines as shown at the right and, having ascertained 
the required width of the pediment, draw the ver- 
tical center line E F. 

Now from point A draw A E at the required 
pitch and from points 2 and B, draw lines parallel 
to A E to reach the center line as shown. 

To obtain the raked profile or true section of the 
inclined mold, first draw the line G H at any con- 
venient position, at right angles to A E, and upon 
G H extended above or below, place a duplicate of 
the curved portion of the normal profile A B C, so 
turned that its vertical line shall coincide with G H, 
all as shown at X. Divide the curved portions of 
both profiles into the same number of equal spaces, 




Fig. 236.- 



-View of Angular Pediment, Requiring Raking 
Molds 



12: 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



123 



numbering the points in each to correspond as 
shown. Now from all the points in that part of the 
profile from A to B, draw lines parallel to A E. 
These lines may be extended, as a matter of con- 
venience, to cut the center line for further use when 
laying out the pattern for the upper miter. From 
the several points in the profile X carry lines par- 
allel to G H to cut lines of corresponding number 
previously drawn. A line traced through these in- 
tersections as shown from K to L will be the cor- 
rect profile for the curved part of the mold. 

This profile must now be completed by the addi- 



front elevation, while the third is the level mold 
consisting only of roof, fascia and fillet shown by 
B P Q F D, the two last named arms of the miter 
coming together from B to R and forming a sep- 
arate miter which is exactly the same in principle 
as that shown in Fig. 178. In order to complete 
the miter from B to R, in Fig. 237, it will be 
necessary to determine first the pitch of the roof 
whose profile is a c as shown in the sectional view 
at the right in the engraving. 

To construct this view draw first the profile 
A 2 D 2 , which is the same as A B D of the front 
view, placing the point A 2 at the required distance 
from the wall line. This determines the width 
of the two roofs E 2 S and a c, and of the planceers 
T V and J 2 W. 

We may here mention that the bed mold is usually 




FRONT LLLVATION 
Fig. 237.— Developing Pattern for Raking Crov 



Mold 



tion of the part B to D of the first profile, as shown 
from L to H. This part of the profile is added 
without change since it will not be required to miter 
with B D of the return, but will be mitered down 
upon the narrow roof shown by a c of the sectional 
view. 

The miter from A to D therefore becomes a 
compound miter having really three arms ; one arm 
being the plain return shown separately in the side 
elevation at the left, another one being the entire 
inclined crown mold shown byAEJPBof the 



included in the design filling the angles at W and V, 
but it has been omitted here because the problem 
being here considered is that of crown mold miters 
only. Reference to Fig. 178 above mentioned will 
show the bed mold in position in the pediment cor- 
nice and indicated in the level cornice below. 

Having drawn in Fig. 237 the profile A 2 D 2 and 
the wall line V S at the correct distance away, draw 
the vertical line A 2 E 2 to meet a horizontal line pro- 
jected from E and continued to the wall line at S. 
Complete the lower part of the section by outlining 



124 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



the drip D 2 T and the planceer T V. Now locate 
the point c at a sufficient hight to give the necessary 
pitch to the roof, and draw a c. It is apparent from 
an inspection of the elevation that the surfaces of 
the fascia and of the fillet of the inclined cornice, 
the part shown in the new profile by points 10, II, 
12 and 13, must be flush (i. e., must lie in the same 
vertical plane) with those of the level cornice below, 
and shown by B C D in the profile A B D. There- 
fore erect lines from points a and D 2 of the sec- 
tion, to meet lines brought over from a', d' and J 
on the center line of the elevation, as shown at io\ 
11 1 , 12 1 and J 2 . This determines a portion of the 
section through the upper cornice, on the center line. 
The continuation of the line J J 2 to W, will give 
the planceer in this view, after which all that re- 
mains to be completed of the section is the mold 
shown from E 2 to io 1 . This section, although on a 
vertical plane, is an oblique section of the inclined 
cornice, because the line E J is not at right angles 
to A E and is therefore longer than the line G H, 
which is the plane of a right section. The curve of 
the molding shown between E 2 and io 1 will there- 
fore be an elongated ogee. Extreme accuracy in 
obtaining this curve is not really necessary since no 
use is made of it beyond showing in connection 
with the lower part of the section just how the pedi- 
ment would appear if cut through the middle. 

If desired this curve can be accurately obtained 
by first dividing the profile A 2 a into the same num- 
ber of equal spaces as profile X, then erecting lines 
from each of the points of division, to intersect 
horizontal lines of corresponding number projected 
from the points on the center line between E and o' 
already obtained. The drawing shows that opera- 
tion in only one point, the middle point 6. 

The intersection of the line of the fascias, 12 1 D 2 , 
with the roof a c, at b, in the sectional view, deter- 
mines the bottom line of the fascia of the inclined 
cornice to be at b" P in the elevation, also that lines 
projected from b and c to intersect P J of the ele- 
vation, will show that P R is the line of intersection 
between the roof of the level cornice and the plan- 
ceer of the inclined cornice. 

Having thus determined the points upon that part 
of miter from B to R, we are now able to lay out a 
pattern for the crown mold. Therefore on any line 
drawn at right angles to A E, as M N, set off a 
stretchout of the profile K H, as shown from M to 
13. To this must be added the space 13 14 which 
is the width of the planceer and is equal to J 2 W 
of the section. The spaces from K to L upon the 
profile must be measured individually and set off 



successively from M, since by the operation of 
obtaining the new or raked profile these spaces have 
become unequal, and in all considerably greater than 
those shown from A to B of the normal profile. 
From the several points on M N draw the meas- 
uring lines, after which lines may be projected at 
right angles to A E, from the several points used 
in the original division of the profile A B to inter- 
sect lines of corresponding number in the stretch- 
out, all as shown from A 3 to B 1 of the pattern. Con- 
tinuing from this point, the remaining points II, 12, 
13 and 14 of the profile K PI, which fall upon the 
sloping roof, are projected from the points a", b", 
P and R respectively as shown from B 1 to R 1 of 
the pattern. A line drawn through the points of 
intersection thus obtained will give the pattern for 
the lower end of the pediment mold. 

It is usual, as a matter of convenience, to conduct 
the operation of laying out the pattern for the miter 
on the center line at the same time, which is done 
by continuing the stretchout lines upward to the 
right and intersecting them with projections from 
the points previously obtained on the center line 
between E and J. 

The pattern for the return piece, shown in the 
side elevation, is in this case a simple square miter 
and does not differ in principle from that already 
shown in preceding solutions of return miters. The 
miter for the level cornice of the front will be a 
duplicate of the return miter from B to the bottom, 
having enough metal to equal the space a c, added 
at the top. It is not considered necessary to con- 
tinue this miter to contain the points b", P and R. 



RAKING MOLDS IN A BROKEN 
ANGULAR PEDIMENT 

Solution 47 

In the preceding solution it was stated that in the 
case of a raking miter, choice might be made be- 




Fig. 238. — View of Broken Angular Pediment 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



125 



tween changing the profile of the inclined mold and 
that of the return, and the operation of changing the 
inclined mold was there shown. Fig. 238 is a view 
of a broken angular pediment, in which the given 
profile will be placed in the inclined mold A ; then 
the lower return at B and the upper return at C will 
be modified to form a perfect miter at right angles 
in plan. 

In Fig. 239 is shown how the return mold may 



full profile of the mold as shown at P, which rep- 
resents a true section at right angles to the line D F. 
To obtain the profile of the return at the foot 
of the pediment, first draw a vertical line through 
the point A or 10', forward of which, at any con- 
venient position, draw a duplicate of the ogee of 
the normal profile as shown, of which the points a 
and b are the centers corresponding with a and b 
of profile P. In placing this curve in position, 




■SIDE CLCVATION 



FRONT LLCVATION 
Fig. 239. — Raking the Returns of a Pediment and Obtaining Patterns for. all Molds 



--_- M"""'"""- % 



SECTION 



be raked or changed so as to make a perfect miter, 
while the face or inclined mold is kept normal. In 
this case, as before, we shall ask the reader to 
follow the directions very carefully. Construct first 
the angle B A C, making A C horizontal, drawing 
A B at the required pitch, and add the fascia and 
fillet below each, making those members the same 
width as measured at right angles to A C and A B 
in each case ; then add the profile of the mold proper 
above the inclined fascia and fillet, completing the 



note that the line A 10 is perpendicular, and that 
points a and b are on a horizontal line, which 
is also true in profile P, if it be supposed that the 
inclined line D F is also horizontal. Now divide 
both curves (ogees) into the same number of equal 
spaces, as indicated by the small figures, and from 
the points of division in profile P, carry lines paral- 
lel to D F indefinitely to a position between D and 
A, and intersect them with lines of corresponding 
number drawn vertically from the points of division 



126 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



in the other curve, when a line traced through the 
points of intersection will give the desired curve, 
as shown by the small figures with primes, from 
D to A, which, taken in connection with the part 
from A to G, already drawn, will constitute the 
profile of the entire return piece. 

The outline shown at D G is also a view of the 
miter and will consequently appear the same in both 
the front and the side elevations, except that in one 
view, it will appear in a position reversed from that 
which it occupies in the other. Following the usual 
rule for laying out the pattern for the return, we 
will therefore draw the stretchout line at right 
angles to the lines of the mold in elevation, which. 
in this case is the side elevation. This may most 
conveniently be done by extending the wall line as 
shown toward M 1 , upon which we set off a stretch- 
out of the profile D G, this being the newly de- 
veloped profile of the return piece. Care must be 
exercised to take the spaces separately and con- 
secutively, beginning at either end, for as explained 
in the former solution, the spaces have become un- 
equal, owing to the process of raking. To follow 
the rule for all miters still further, we must now 
project the points from D G to the miter line, other- 
wise the outline which we have transferred to the 
side elevation. But since there is a chance of error 
in doing this, and since the new profile, D G, was 
obtained by projections from the normal profile be- 
low it, it will be quite as easy, and probably more 
accurate to place below the side elevation another 
duplicate of the normal profile, as shown at R, 
which may be divided into the same number of 
equal spaces as before, and to project lines from 
the points thus obtained into the measuring lines 
of the stretchout, thus obtaining the pattern, all as 
shown above the side elevation. In actual practice, 
the process can be somewhat abbreviated by pro- 
jecting the pattern for the return directly from the 
profile D G, upon a stretchout placed immediately 
above or below that profile, thus bringing the pat- 
tern in a position the reverse of that shown above 
the side elevation. This does away entirely with 
the construction of side elevation. 

For the pattern of the front or inclined mold, 
the only requirement is to first set off its stretch- 
out taken from profile P, on any right line, as M N, 
and draw the measuring lines as shown, intersect- 
ing them by lines drawn from the profile D A into 
the measuring lines of corresponding number in the 
stretchout as shown, completing also the miter from 
A to T, all as explained in the preceding problem, 
and as alreadv fully shown. 



In the case of a broken, or, as it is sometimes 
termed, an open pediment, it becomes necessary to 
finish the inclined mold at the top with a level re- 
turn in a manner similar to that used at the bottom. 
When such a design is called for, the profile of the 
return at the top may be obtained by a method 
which is the same in principle as that already ex- 
plained, and as shown at the right. Place a dupli- 
cate, Q, of the normal profile in a position exactly 
below or above the position intended for the return 
and divide it into the same number of equal spaces 
as profile P. Erect lines from the points of division 
thus obtained, to intersect lines of corresponding 
number from profile P, all as shown, when a line 
traced through the points of intersection, as shown 
from F to V, will be the required profile. It should 
be noted that, in this case the entire profile is raked 
while in the case of the return at the bottom, only 
the ogee was changed. In obtaining the pattern for 
the return at the top, the stretchout must, of course, 
be taken from the newly obtained profile F V. 
This operation can also be very much abbreviated 
as explained for the return at the bottom, by pro- 
jecting lines from the points on the new profile into 
measuring lines drawn horizontally above or below 
the profile. 



RAKING MOLDS IN A BROKEN SEG- 
MENTAL PEDIMENT 

Solution 48 

Fig. 240 presents a view of a broken segmental 
pediment, in which we will place the given profile 
in the curved molding A and find the modified or 
raked profiles in the lower and upper horizontal 




Fig. 240.— Broken Segmental Pediment 

returns at B and C respectively. We will also de- 
velop the miter cuts for the curved molding at a 
and b. Should the segmental pediment be closed, 
that is, should it be without the broken part, as 
indicated by the dotted lines, the method described 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



127 



U \ 




Fig. 241.— Raking the Returns of a Broken Segmental Pediment and Patterns for All Molds 



in connection with Fig. 241 should be followed. 
In this figure the method of raking the returns in 
a broken or unbroken pediment, together with the 
patterns for all molds, is shown. 

The first step is to draw the one half front eleva- 
tion as follows: First draw the center line A B 
and from any point upon it, as C, draw the hori- 
zontal line C 9', of the desired length. Complete 



the profile shown from 9' to 6' and add the drip 
from 9' to 1 1'. With the desired center D upon the 
center line A B and using D 6' as radius, draw an 
arc, until it intersects the center line at 6 V . At right 
angles to A B from the intersection 6 V draw a 
line, as shown from 6 V to 6, placing 6 at the desired 
distance from the wall line, as shown. Complete the 
profile from 6 to T, as shown, making certain that 



128 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



the profile from 6 to 9 is alike to that shown from 
6' to 9' in the half elevation. As the given profile 
in this case is to be placed in the curved molding, 
complete the ogee shown from 6 to 1 and proceed- 
ing in this manner, complete in line with the front 
elevation, the section of the horizontal mold indi- 
cated by X. Y and X then represent the true sec- 
tion of the curved and of the horizontal mold re- 
spectively, on the center line A B. From this given 
profile Y the modifications of the upper and lower 
returns must be made. Space the ogee in the given 
profile Y into a number of equal divisions, as indi- 
cated by the small figures 1 to 6. From the small fig- 
ures 1 to 9 in Y, draw lines at right angles to the 
center line A B until they intersect A B, as shown by 
the heavy dots. With D as center and with the vari- 
ous heavy dots on the center line A B, representing 
the points, 1 to 9, obtained from the given profile Y, 
to mark the radii, describe arcs to the left to any 
length, as shown. Parallel to 1 d in Y draw any 
short line, as a b, and from the various points 1 to 
9, in the given profile, erect perpendicular lines 
cutting the line a b, thus obtaining the intersections 
marked 1 to 9. Take a duplicate of a & and place it, 
as indicated, below the half elevation as a' V , so 
that the point 8-9 will come directly below the line 
8'-9' in the profile, as shown. From the various 
intersections on a' b' erect vertical lines, cutting 
arcs drawn from similarly numbered intersections 
on A B, thus obtaining the intersections marked 1' 
to 6' in the lower return. This represents the raked 
profile of the ogee at the bottom. 

Should a broken segmental pediment be sought 
as indicated, establish the point 1" at any point, 
and take the divisions on a b, reversing them, as in- 
dicated on the line a" b", so that the point 1-2 comes 
directly over 1" in the elevation. From these di- 
visions on a" b" drop vertical lines until they in- 
tersect similar arcs, thus obtaining the points of in- 
tersection, marked 1" to 9", these representing the 
modified or raked profile at the top. 

The intersection of that part of the mold, indi- 
cated by 8-9-T in the given profile Y upon the 
wash of the horizontal mold X, is found in elevation 
as follows : From the various intersections upon the 
wash m n previously obtained from 8-9 and T in Y, 
carry lines horizontally to the left meeting curved 
lines, struck from the center D, at V W and U re- 
spectively, all as indicated by the dotted lines and 
as explained in a preceding problem. 

Proceeding to the development of the patterns 
that of the lower horizontal return is obtained as 
follows : Below the elevation draw anv vertical 



line, as E F, upon which place the girth of the 
modified profile shown from 1' to 10'. Measure 
the divisions separately, since all are unequal. This 
is shown by the corresponding numbers on E F. 
Through these small figures and at right angles to 
E F, draw lines and intersect these by lines drawn 
parallel to E F from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions in the modified profile. Trace a line through 
points thus obtained, as indicated by G H, and make 
the distance from G to 1' equal to 1 d in the given 
profile Y. G-H-i'-n' becomes the pattern for the 
lower horizontal return. That for the upper hori- 
zontal return is obtained by procedure corresponding 
to the foregoing. The girth of the upper modified 
profile from 1" to 9" is placed upon any vertical 
line, as P R, and the pattern is obtained in the 
manner just applied in procuring that of the lower 
return. 

The method of obtaining the patterns for the 
flaring strips for the curved molding is omitted for 
the present but will be described under Circular 
Work in another part. We will take up 
the method of obtaining the miter cuts for the 
lower and upper ends of the curved molding. The 
right and left miter cut on the lower end of the 
molding, shown in the illustration, is obtained as 
follows : Draw a line through the top curve on the 
lower end of the molding, as indicated by 1' K, 
drawing the line at such an angle, that the portion 
of the curve 1' J thus covered appears as a straight 
line. At right angles toKi' draw any line, as L M, 
and upon this place the girth of the curved mold, 
from 1 to 6 in the given profile Y, as indicated 
by like numbers, 1 to 6, on L M. Through these 
small figures and at right angles to L M, draw lines 
and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to M L 
from similar numbers in the lower modified profile, 
1' to 6'. Trace a line through these points as in- 
dicated by N. Using the dividers and measuring 
in each instance from the center line M L, take 
the various projections to the intersections in the 
cut N and transfer them on similar lines to the right 
of M L ; trace a line through points so procured, 
thus obtaining the miter cut O. This small miter 
cut should be made no wider than is absolutely 
necessary, for then, when it is formed to the profile 
Y, it may be slid along the curved molding, so as 
to mark the miter cut at each lower end of the 
mold thus forming a junction between the lower 
horizontal return. The line, 1" S, at the top of the 
curved molding is drawn, as shown, and the right 
and left pattern is obtained in precisely the same 
manner as set forth in connection with N O. The 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



129 



curved mold can be made either by hand or machine. 
Both methods will be described in their appropriate 
place. 

ANGULAR PEDIMENT HAVING RE- 
TURNS AT OCTAGONAL ANGLES 

Solution 49 

Fig. 242 illustrates an angular pediment with 
octagonal horizontal returns. In this example we 
will introduce the modified profile in the pediment 
mold A, the normal or given profile being placed 
in the horizontal mold B. When it is required to 
construct a pediment in which the inclined mold 
rises from an octagonal or any other angle instead 
of from a square return, as was previously illus- 
trated (as in the case where a building having an 




'~~~" - '" --- 



PLAN ON X-Y 

Fig. 242. — Angular Pediment Having Returns at Octagonal 
Angles 

octagonal corner is designed with a pediment either 
on the front or over the oblique side as in Fig. 242), 
the method of laying out the patterns for such a 
pediment is shown in Fig. 243. 

In this case it is necessary to first obtain the plan 
and elevation of the octagonal miter. Draw first 
the plan as shown at A B, and place the normal 
profile in either arm, as shown. Next draw the ele- 
vation of the level part of all the moldings, plac- 
ing the normal profile in that part of the elevation 




A I 2 

Fig. 243.— Elevation and Patterns for a Pediment Having an Octagonal Return 



13° 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



which is to remain level, as shown at the left of the 
octagon miter C D. Divide the curved portion of 
both profiles into the same number of equal spaces 
as shown by the small figures and project the points 
from the profile in plan horizontally to intersect, 
first, the miter line A B, thence vertically into the 
elevation to intersect lines drawn horizontally from 
corresponding points in the profile of the elevation, 
all as shown from C to D. This gives the elevation 
of the octagon miter. Now from C draw C E at 
the required angle of the pediment, and at any 
convenient position draw F G at right angles to 
C E. Upon F G, above or below the space re- 
quired for the new profile to be obtained, draw a 
duplicate of the normal profile, so placed that its 
vertical lines shall be parallel to F G, as shown at H. 
Divide the curved portion of profile H into the same 
number of equal spaces as were used in dividing 
the other two profiles, and from the points of di- 
vision carry lines parallel to F G, to intersect lines 
of corresponding number drawn from the inter- 
sections previously obtained in the octagon miter 
between C and K, carried parallel to C E, all as 
shown from i' to 10'. A line traced through the 
points of intersection will give the profile of the in- 
clined mold, to which the profile of the fascia fillet 
and planceer must be added, as shown by points 
ii' to 14'. That part of the elevation, including the 
miter from K to L, must now be completed with 
the aid of the sectional view shown at the right, all 
as explained, in preceding problems. 

In laying out the pattern for the pediment mold, 
the stretchout must, of course, be taken from the 
newly obtained profile, remembering that the spaces 
thereon are unequal, and set off on the line M N, 
when the pattern can be completed in the usual 
manner. 

It is possible in a pediment springing from an 
octagon miter to have the inclined mold of normal 
profile if desired, changing instead the profile of 
the level mold, as in the case of the pediment with 
square return illustrated in Fig. 239. To accomplish 
this result, draw first in Fig. 243 the plan and the 
elevation of all that part shown below K L, as 
before explained, and from K draw a line at the 
required inclination of the pediment. Place the 
normal profile in position upon the line F G instead 
of the one previously obtained by intersection. Di- 
vide the curved portions of this and the one in the 
plan into the same number of equal spaces and from 
the profile in plan carry lines to the miter line A 
B, as before, thence vertically to intersect with lines 
of corresponding number brought from the normal 



profile in the inclined mold, thus obtaining a view of 
the miter between C and K. 

To obtain the new profile, in this case the profile 
of the level or oblique side, it will be necessary to 
place a normal profile at any convenient position 
above or below the level mold, shown at the left of 
the miter C D, divide it into spaces as before, and 
from its points draw vertical lines to intersect with 
those of corresponding number drawn horizontally 
from the points previously obtained by intersection 
between C and K. 

The operations described in the previous para- 
graph are not fully shown upon the drawing, but 
are worked out in the problem that follows ; the only 
variation is that the pediment is curved instead of 
angular. The operations, however, are alike whether 
the pediment be curved or angular. 



SEGMENTAL PEDIMENT, HAVING 

RETURNS AT OTHER THAN A 

RIGHT ANGLE, FORMING BUTT 

MITERS AGAINST WALL 

Solution 50 

Fig. 244 shows a finished elevation, plan and pat- 
tern of a segmental pediment having returns at 
other than a right angle, the returns butting against 
the wall and forming what is known as butt miters. 
In this case the full elevation is drawn ; this how- 
ever, is not necessary in practical work as the half 
or part elevation of the curved molding serves re- 
quirements. First, draw the center line A B, on 
either side of which draw the semi-plan of pro- 
jecting pediment or lower line of the horizontal 
mold, as indicated by 12 , 12, I2 a , I2 X . Bisect the 
angle 12°, 12, I2 a , by using 12 as a center and 
describing any arc, as C D. Using C and D as 
centers, with any desired radius, intersect arcs at 
E. Draw a line from E through 12 to any length. 
As the given profile in this case is to be placed 
in the curved molding, place it also in plan in the 
position indicated by F 1 ; space this into a num- 
ber of equal divisions between 3 and 8 and number 
all the bends as shown from I to 12. Through 
these small figures, draw lines parallel to I2-I2 a 
cutting the miter line E, 2, previously drawn, as 
shown by corresponding numbers. From these di- 
visions and parallel to 1-1 draw lines cutting the 
wall line between 1° and 12°, shown by the heavy 
dots. Draw any horizontal line in elevation, as K 
K 1 , which intersects at K, H, H 1 and K 1 lines 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



131 




132 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



erected vertically from 12°, 12, I2 a and 12 K re- 
spectively. Make the hight of the lower parts of the 
mold, ii'-io 4 and t^-S 1 in elevation, equal respec- 
tively to ii-io and 9-8 in the profile F 1 in plan. 
Through these points, io l to 8' in elevation, draw 
lines parallel to K K 1 and intersect them by lines 
drawn at right angles to K K 1 from similarly num- 
bered intersections in plan, all as shown. Establish 
the hight of the panel from the line 8 l to 11-12 on 
the center line in elevation, and, using the desired 
center as X, draw an arc cutting the upper line 8 l 
of the fillet, as shown. At right angles to A B, 
from the point u-12 on the center line, draw a line 
to the left to any length. Upon this place a dupli- 
cate of the profile F 1 in plan in the position there 
shown by F. From the various intersections, I 
to 12, in F draw lines at right angles to A B, cutting 
the center line A B from 1 to 12. Using X as 
center, with radii equal to the various intersections 
on A B between 11 and 1, draw arcs, as shown, 
which intersect vertical lines erected from similarly 
numbered intersections on the miter line in plan at 
the right, thus obtaining the miter line in eleva- 
tion, indicated by the traced line from 1 to 8. 

G 1 H 1 and G II then give the miter lines, from 
which the true profile of the horizontal molding 
is found as follows : From the various small fig- 
ures, 1 to 12, in the miter line, G 1 H 1 , in elevation, 
draw horizontal lines to the right as shown. Erect 
any vertical line as a' b'. Also erect from 12 in 
the profile F any vertical line as a b. Measuring 
from the line a b take the various projections to the 
small figures, 1 to 11, and place them to the left of 
the line a V on similarly numbered lines previously 
drawn. Trace a line through points so obtained, as 
shown from 1' to 12'; this becomes the modified 
profile for the horizontal angular returns. 

If desired, the joint line between the angular 
returns in plan and wall can be projected to the 
elevation, as indicated by the dotted lines, although 
this is not necessary in the development of the pat- 
tern. Should, however, a flat head be desired, to 
solder along the wall line, I°-I2° in plan, the joint 
line shown by J K or J 1 K 1 in elevation would be 
the desired pattern. 

The pattern for the horizontal returns is obtained 
as follows : Take the girth of the modified profile 
W from i' to 12' and place it on the line L M 
drawn at right angles to i°-i in plan. Through 
these small figures, 1' to 12', and at right angles to 
L M drawn lines, which intersect lines drawn paral- 
lel to L M from similar intersections on the wall 
line, i°-I2°, and the miter line, 1-12. Trace a line 



through points so obtained ; N O P R will be the 
desired pattern. N O is the miter cut joining the 
curved molding and P R the butt miter against the 
wall. To obtain the right and left miter cut for 
the lower part of the curved mold, proceed accord- 
ing to explanation given with Fig. 241. The method 
of obtaining the patterns for the circular molds in 
Fig. 244, whether made by hand or on the machine, 
are considered under "Curved Moldings." 



GABLES ON A SQUARE PINNACLE 

Solution 51 

Following in logical order after pediment miters 
— that is, miters in which an inclined molding 
is required to miter with a level molding at the 
corner of a building — comes that class wherein two 

inclined moldings are 
required to meet 
under the same condi- 
tions, or in other 
words, the case of 
gables or pediments 
upon adjacent sides 
of any structure, as a 
tower, pavilion or 
pinnacle as shown by 
A B C in Fig. 245, 
such structure being a 
square, hexagon, oc- 
tagon or other poly- 
gon in plan. Such 
cases occur in Renais- 
sance architecture, in 
the finish of towers 
and pavilions in which 
the moldings used are 
of the profiles usually 
employed i n pedi- 
ments, and also upon 
pinnacles of Gothic 
form having moldings 
of the profiles pecu- 
liar to that style. 

It has been ex- 
plained in the prob- 
lems immediately pre- 
ceding that when an 
inclined mold is re- 
quired to miter with a 

level mold at any 

Fig. 245 . J 

Completed Square Pinnacle angle in the plan, the 




RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



l 33 



profile of one arm of the 
miter must undergo a change 
termed "raking." It can 
readily be seen that when 
both arms of the miter are 
inclined, as when both are 
level, both will be cut by the 
miter plane under exactly 
the same conditions, pro- 
vided both arms have the 
same degree of inclination, 
and therefore no change of 
profile will be necessary for 
either arm. Should one arm, 
however, differ from the 
other in the angle of inclina- 
tion, it then becomes neces- 
sary to change the profile of one arm. This last 
named condition constitutes a problem in itself, 
which will be taken up later, but for the present we 
shall consider the miter between moldings of the 
same inclination upon adjacent sides of a structure, 
such joint being commonly termed a pinnacle miter. 

Fig. 246 shows an elevation and plan of a pin- 
nacle of Gothic design in which A B C D represents 
the mold forming one-half of one of the gables. 
In the elevation, G F K L shows a portion of the 
spire, and A E F G the roof of the gable on one 
side of the pinnacle, the corresponding roof of the 
front gable being shown by the line A B. 

While no change of profile is necessary, an eleva- 
tion of the miter must be obtained before the pattern 
can be developed. To do this, it is necessary to 
place a profile of the mold in position in the eleva- 
tion, as shown at P, also another profile in its 
proper position in relation to the gable mold with 
which that of the gable on the front is to miter, as 
shown at H. First divide the curved portions of 
both profiles into the same number of equal parts, 
numbering the points of division correspondingly, 
and carry lines from each of the points in profile P, 
parallel with the mold, toward the miter, to be 
intersected by vertical lines dropped from points 
of corresponding number in profile H, all as shown 
between A and D. A line traced through these 
intersections will give the elevation of the miter. 
The stretchout of the profile P or H must then be 
set off on any line drawn at right angles to A B, 
as shown by M N, and the customary measuring 
lines drawn. Projections made from the points of 
intersection in A D, into measuring lines of corre- 
sponding number of the stretchout, will give the 
required pattern, all as shown at the left. To this 




Fig. 246 



-Method of Obtaining the Pattern for 
Miter 



Pinnacle 



pattern may be added, if desired, the pattern of 
the roof of the gable, which can be obtained quite 
simply. Its length is of course equal to A G B and 
its width is obtained by measuring the distances of 
the points F and G from the line A E. 

The miter cut for the joint B C at the top of the 
gable is obtained by extending the lines in the pro- 
file P until they intersect the miter line B C ; from 
these intersecting points they are projected to the 
measuring lines, drawn at right angles to M N, in 
the customary manner. 

GABLES ON AN OCTAGONAL 
PINNACLE 

Solution 52 

When the plan of a pinnacle form an octagon, 
and when eight gables, as A in Fig. 247, are to miter 



134 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET .METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



together at octagonal angles in plan, the pattern for 
the gable mold may be obtained with the least 
amount of labor by the method shown in Fig. 248. 
Let A B represent the center line of the pinnacle 

drawn through the ele- 
vation and plan. Using 
any point, C, as a center 
construct a one-quarter 
plan of the shaft line, as 
indicated by CRST U. 
On the shaft line U T, 
place the profile of the 
gable mold in its correct 
position, as shown by D, 
and draw the extreme 
projection of the mold 
parallel to the shaft 
lines ; all as indicated. 
Draw the miter line a to 
C and C to S. 

Space the curve in 
the profile, D, in a num- 
ber of equal divisions, as 
indicated by the small 
figures 1 to 7; through 
these points draw, par- 
allel to U T, lines inter- 
secting the miter line, T 
a, as shown. From T, 
the corner of the front 
shaft line, erect a ver- 
tical line in elevation, as 
G F, and from any point 
on this line, as F, draw 
the pitch of the gable, 
intersecting the center 
line A B, at E. E F G P 
then represents the one- 
half true elevation of 
one side of the shaft face. 
As the eight sides composing the octagon are 
alike, a half elevation serves all requirement for de- 
veloping the pattern of the gable molding. Take a 
duplicate of the profile D in plan with the various 
intersections on same and place it in the position 
shown by D in elevation having the line 6-7 of the 
profile on and parallel to the gable line E F. Through 
the various points of intersection in the profile D, 
draw lines parallel to E F and intersect them by 
lines erected from similar points on the miter line 
T a in plan, parallel to A B, thus obtaining the 
miter line in elevation, indicated between F and V. 
The pattern may now be developed in the usual 




Fig. 247 
Completed Octagonal Pinnacle 



PATTERN 
SHAPE 




ONE QUARTER 
PLAN 



Fig. 248. Pattern for Gable Molding on an 
Octagonal Pinnacle 



manner. At right angles to V W draw any line, as 
H J, upon which place the girth of the profile D, as 
shown by the small figures, 1 to 7, on H J. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to H J draw 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



J 35 



lines and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to 
H J from similar intersections on the miter line 
V F, at the bottom and E W at the top. A line traced 
through points so obtained, as shown by L M N H, 
will be the desired pattern, sixteen of which will be 
required, eight formed right and eight formed left, 
to make up the eight gables. Laps have been al- 
lowed at top and bottom. The method of develop- 
ing the gable roof, indicated by B in Fig. 247, as well 
as the spire roof C, will be considered later. 



PEDIMENTS HAVING UNEQUAL 

PITCHES, MITERING AT RIGHT 

ANGLES IN PLAN 

Solution 53 

Pediments or gables designed to miter, as upon 
the adjacent sides of a building having alternate 
wide and narrow sides at right angles in plan, pre- 
sent a case requiring the gables to rise to a corre- 
sponding hight at their apexes, necessarily causing 
the moldings to be of different inclinations. This 
condition applies likewise to pediments upon ad- 
jacent but unequal sides of a pavilion, tower or 
gable roof, in which, while the profiles, as well as 
some other details, are different from those usually 



found upon a pinnacle, the method of obtaining the 
pattern is the same. In Fig. 249 is given a perspec- 
tive view of gable moldings or pediment crown 




A AND B 

ARE OF 

UNEQUAL 

PITCHES 



249. — Gable Moldings Having unequal Pitches, 
Mitering at Right Angles in Plan 



molds having unequal pitches, mitering at right 
angles in plan. It will be noted that the ridge lines 
are on one line ; that is, the apexes have correspond- 
ing hights, forming valleys in the roofs, as shown. 
In Fig. 250 is shown the method of obtaining the 




LEFT SIDE. ELEVATION. 

Fig. 250. Miter Between Pediments of Unequal Pitch 



FRONT ELEVATION 



136 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



miter between the crown moldings of adjacent pedi- 
ments having unequal pitches. The first operation 
consists in getting the elevation of the miter, as al- 
ready described in Fig. 246 which operation, it will 
be seen by comparison, is also the same as obtaining 
the profile of a raked return, illustrated in Fig. 239. 
Attention is called here to the difference between 
the miter as it appears in the elevation and the pro- 
file of a return molding. D A of Fig. 239 is both, 
because the molding on the return is level, as shown 
by the side view in that figure, while D A of Fig. 
246 shows only the miter, since the molding on the 
return is inclined. Referring now to either Figs. 
239, 246 or 250 lines are carried from profile P, to 
intersect with vertical lines of corresponding num- 
ber drawn from a duplicate of the normal profile, 
placed in an erect position, either above or below the 
required miter, with the result shown between A 
and D. After this point has been reached, it will 
be best to make a duplicate or tracing of D A, and 
transfer it to a reversed position in line with A D, 
as shown at the left by D 1 A 1 , being careful to pre- 
serve the positions of all of the points, as 2', 3', 4', 
etc., as found in D A. 

This is the first step in the construction of an 
elevation of the adjacent left side, in which the 
pitch has in this case been made greater than that 
shown in the front elevation. 

The elevation of the level mold, constituting the 
lower part of the pediment, can be completed as 
has been described in preceding problems, all as 
shown. In constructing the elevation of the in- 
clined mold, a line is first drawn from D 1 at the 
required inclination of the pediment, as shown by 
D 1 F, when lines may now be carried from each of 
the numbered points in the miter D 1 A 1 , parallel to 
D 1 F, and continued a sufficient distance for the 
construction of a new profile shown at P 1 . First 
draw any line, as G H, at right angles to D 1 F, 
upon which, as a vertical line, place a duplicate of 
the normal profile at any convenient position above 
or below, as at E. 

Divide the curved portion of E into the same 
number of spaces as were used in dividing the nor- 
mal profile P, and from these points of division 
erect lines parallel to G H to cut lines of corre- 
sponding number previously drawn from the miter 
at D 1 A 1 , all as shown at P 1 . A line traced through 
the points of intersection will be the modified pro- 
file of the inclined mold. 

From this profile the stretchout, taken space by 
space in the order in which the spaces occur, can 
be set off upon M N in the usual manner, and the 



measuring line extended to a position above the 
miter D 1 A 1 . Lines drawn at right angles to 
D 1 F from the numbered points in D 1 A 1 can now 
be intersected with measuring lines of correspond- 
ing number to obtain the miter pattern, all as shown 
at D 2 A 2 . The full pattern, S D 2 A 2 T V W X, 
may be extended at the left to include the top pedi- 
ment or gable miter according to size and conveni- 
ence. 

As a labor saving expedient in shop practice, 
the operations above described can be very much 
shortened by constructing the elevation of the side 
shown at the left, on top of the elevation at the 
right, that is, by drawing the line D 1 F from 
D instead, at the required angle to the right, as 
shown by the dotted line D R, after which lines 
can be drawn parallel thereto from the numbered 
points in D A, and the new profile constructed all 
as explained. This method will avoid the trans- 
ferring of the miter D A to another position, as 
above directed, and the consequent liability to error 
in so doing, but will of course incur another liabil- 
ity to error in the confusion of lines which will 
result from drawing one elevation over another. 
Great care must be exercised if the advantage to 
be gained by this method is made available. The 
use of pencils of different colors is recommended. 

In the case of an octagonal tower, the elevation 
of the miter D A must be obtained from projec- 
tions made first from a plan, all as shown at T a 
and V F of Fig. 248, when the miter V F can most 
conveniently be transferred to a reversed position, 
all as just explained in connection with the miter 
D 1 A 1 of Fig. 250. From this point the operation 
will go on all as above described and shown at the 
left in Fig. 250. 



RAKING BRACKET IN PLAN, AS IN 
THE SOFFIT OF A BAY WINDOW 

Solution 54 

In Fig. 251 is presented a view of a right and left 
raking bracket in the soffit of a bay window, as 
shown in the soffit plan. The bracket marked 
A in both plan and elevation is the regular or nor- 
mal bracket, while those marked B are the raking 
brackets, whose development is shown in detail in 
Fig. 252. The method of procedure is as follows : 
First, draw the wall line in plan as A B, on which in 
its proper position place the profile of the normal 
side of the bracket, as indicated by C. From any 
point D, on the wall line A B, at the desired angle 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



137 



FRONT ELEVATION 




SOFFIT PLAN 
Fig. 251. — Raking Brackets in Soffit of Bay Window 

draw the line D E representing the one side of the 
raking bracket in plan, and intersect this side at E 
by a line drawn parallel to A B from the extreme 



projection 1-2 in the normal side of the bracket. 
Establish the width of the face of the raking 
bracket as shown by E F and from F and parallel 
to E D draw the line F G. D E F G then represents 
the plan view of the raking bracket. 

The patterns may then be developed as follows : 
Space the normal profile C in any desired 
number of equal spaces, and from these small fig- 
ures, 1 to 12, draw lines parallel to A B until they 
intersect the plan of the raking bracket, as shown by 
similar numbers I to 12, on the left side. At right 
angles to A B, draw any line, as H J, on which 
place the stretchout of the normal side C, as shown 
by similar numbers 1 to 12, on H J. Through these 
small figures and at right angles to H J draw lines 
and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to H J 
from similar intersections I to 12, on the left side 
of the raking bracket D E, in plan. Trace a line 
through points so obtained ; K L will be the miter 
cut. Set apart the dividers at a distance equal to 
that of the face of the raking bracket, as E F in 
plan ; step off this distance from every point along 
the miter cut K L ; and through points so obtained 



LINE 



A ^^^^^^^f-fr^^y^^ B 




MODIFIED 

SIDE OF 

RAKING 

BRACKET 



Pattern for a Raking Bracket in Soffit of Bay Window 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



trace the miter cut M N. K L M N represents the 
pattern for the face of the raking bracket. 

For the pattern of the sides of the raking bracket, 
extend the upper line S, i of the normal side C, as 
shown by D 1 E 1 ; on this place the various divisions 
on D E in plan, as shown from 12 to 1 on D 1 E 1 . At 
right angles to D 1 E 1 and through the small figures 
draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn par- 
allel to D 1 E 1 from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions in the normal profile C. Trace a line through 
these points, then O, P, 2, 12 will be the pattern for 
the modified side of the raking bracket, to which 
laps are allowed, as shown. If the patterns for both 
the front and side have been accurately developed, 
the spaces along the miter cut K L, of the face, will 
correspond to the spaces in the pattern for the 
modified side, O, P, 2. 



CORNER BRACKET UNDER THE 
SOFFIT OF A HIPPED ROOF 

Solution 55 

Another form of corner bracket requiring raking 
in its development is shown in Fig. 253. Here the 
detail of construction as well as the soffit plan is 
shown. 

In the constructive section, a shows the wall on 
which the plate b is set, followed by the rafter c. 
Below the rafters the blocking d is put in position 
to receive the metal cornice, all as indicated. Before 
the roof sheathing e is placed in position the metal 
cornice from / to g is secured to the wall and roof, 
the profile of the normal bracket being indicated 
by A, which is shown as butting against the cap 
mold. Below the sectional view, a soffit plan is 
drawn, in which A A show the normal brackets and 
B shows the corner or hip bracket, which is to be 



developed. 




Fig. 254. — View of Hipped Raking Corner Bracket Laid 
Horizontally on Its Side 

Fig. 254 presents a perspective view of this hipped 
raking bracket, laid horizontally on its side, so as to 
show its general appearance and to give a clearer 




SOFFIT PLAN 

Fig. 253. — Constructive Section and Soffit Plan of Hipped 
Raking Corner Bracket 

understanding of the object indicated in Fig. 255 
and now to be developed. The first step is to draw 
a section of the soffit molding at its proper angle, 
as indicated by A B, and in this mold construct the 
profile of the normal bracket C. Below this section 
draw a plan view of the corner bracket, as shown by 
D E F J G H. The building, at D E F, presents 
a right angle and therefore the miter line E G will 
be drawn at 45 degrees or the bisection of a right 
or 90 degree angle. Should the angle D E F be other 
than a right angle, it would be bisected and the 
miter line obtained, after which the face width of 
the corner bracket would be set off from G to H and 
G to J and from H and J lines would be drawn 
parallel to the miter line, G E, intersecting the wall 



RAKING .MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



J 39 



MODIFIED SIDE OF RAKING HIPPED BRACKET 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10JS11 12 



SECTION AND 
NORMAL SIDE 
OF BRACKET 




SOFFIT PLAN 



CORNER BRACKET 



Fig. 255. — Patterns for Raking Corner Bracket 



line D E F, at D and F respectively. In this case, a 
right angled corner, the full plan of the corner 
bracket is shown ; in practice, however, it is neces- 
sary to draw only the half plan indicated by D E 
G H, as the halves are alike. 

After carefully drawing the section and plan, the 
pattern for the face is the first subject for develop- 
ment. Space the normal profile C into an equal 
number of divisions, as shown by the small figures 
1 to 12, from which points and parallel to D E in 
plan drop lines cutting the side of the corner bracket 
H D, as shown by similar numbers. At right angles 
to D E draw any line, as K L, and upon this place 
the girth of the normal side of bracket C, as shown 
from 1 to 12 on K L. Through these small figures 
and at right angles to K L draw lines, and intersect 
them by lines drawn parallel to K L from similar 
intersections on the side of the corner bracket H D 
in plan. A line traced through points so obtained, as 
indicated by M N, will be the desired cut. The width 
of the corner face being equal to H G in plan, set the 



dividers apart at a distance equal to this width, and 
step off on every line measuring from the miter cut 
N M, thus obtaining the opposite cut O P. M N 
O P gives the pattern for the face of the corner 
bracket, two of which will be required to complete 
the angle. C of the normal side represents the side 
of the normal bracket, set at right angles to the 
lines of the molding. 

As the sides of the corner bracket run at an 
oblique angle, as indicated by H D and J F in plan, 
and as these sides cut the molding obliquely, they 
will become longer and the pattern may be best laid 
out as follows : From the intersections between 7 
and 10 in the normal side C extend lines upward 
until they intersect the cap mold as indicated from 
7' to 10'. From the corner 13 drop a vertical line, 
cutting the side H D in plan at 13. Take the various 
divisions on H D in plan and place them on any 
horizontal line, as H 1 D 1 , as shown by similar num- 
bers. From these small figures and at right angles to 
H 1 D 1 draw lines ; intersect these by lines drawn 



140 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Fig. 



parallel to H 1 D 1 from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions in the normal side C as well as in the cap mold 
from 7' to 13. Trace a line through points so ob- 
tained. R S T U V gives the pattern for the modi- 
fied side of the corner bracket. Laps must be 
allowed to all patterns, for joining and riveting. 



RAKING BRACKET IN A PEDIMENT 
Solution 56 

Fig. 256 illustrates raking brackets occurring in a 
pediment. The method of development of this ex- 
ample is alike to that of the preceding problems. In 
the view, A shows the normal side of 
the bracket, when the brackets join 
the horizontal cornice, as indicated 
by B. C C show two raking brackets, 
the patterns for which are obtained 
from dimensions given in the normal 
side and front A and B. D indicates 
a center raking bracket placed in the 
apex of the pediment. The method 
of obtaining these various patterns is 
shown in detail in Fig. 257. 

First, draw any line representing 
the pitch or rake of the pediment, as shown by A B. 
At right angles to this line draw the profile of the 
cornice, as partly indicated by A F G C ; then, in its 
proper position, draw the normal side of the 
bracket, shown by A and B in Fig. 256, as indicated 
by D in Fig. 257. Add the cap mold, all as shown. As 
the bracket in this case has an angular drop, draw 
the normal face of the drop in its correct position 
next to the normal side D, as shown by E. In the 
center of the angular drop a raised disc is placed, as 
shown by c d c f, the hight of the disc being in- 
dicated by 2 in the normal side. Through the various 
members of the cornice A F G C draw lines parallel 
to A B, as shown, and draw any vertical line, as 
1 — 15, in the front elevation, which intersects lines 
drawn parallel to A B from I and 15 in the normal 
side of the bracket. This side 1 — 15 then represents 
the left side of the raking bracket. Extend 15 — I in- 
definitely as 15 a. 

Obtaining Pattern for Raked Face of Drop 

Take a tracing of the normal face of drop E and 
place it, as shown by E 1 , above the front elevation ; 
place carefully the line a b in E 1 , horizontally and 
having the corner a meet the line 15 — 1 previously 
extended. Divide the circle in both E and E 1 into a 



number of equal spaces, as shown in both views by 
c d e and / (more numerous divisions are used in 
practice). From the spaces in the circle in E draw 
lines parallel to A B, and intersect them by drawing 
vertical lines from similarly lettered spaces in the 
circle in E 1 . This produces an elliptical figure, 
shown in the front elevation by c d e f. In like man- 




1 I I i I I I I'll 
256. — View of Raking Brackets in a Pediment 

ner, from the corners in the face E, draw lines 
parallel to A B, intersecting them by lines drawn 
vertically from similar corners in the face E 1 . 
5 V i d f c i' 5" gives the pattern for the raked drop. 

Drawing Elevation of Raking Bracket 

From 1' in the front elevation and parallel to 
1 -1 5 draw the line I'-IS', intersecting a line 
drawn from 15 parallel to A B. Divide the normal 
side of bracket into equal spaces as shown by the 
small figures 1 to 15, and from these small figures 
draw lines parallel to the pitch of the pediment A B, 
intersecting the sides of the raking bracket in front 
elevation as shown. In a corresponding manner 
space the cap mold F in the normal side into equal 
divisions, indicated from I to 5, and from these di- 
visions and parallel to A B draw lines to any length, 
as shown. Take a tracing of the normal cap mold F 
with its various divisions thereon and place it ver- 
tically alongside the left and right sides of the rak- 
ing bracket in front elevation, as shown by F 1 and 
F 2 respectively. From the various divisions 1 to 5, 
in F 1 and F 2 , erect vertical lines intersecting those 
previously drawn from the profile F. Trace lines 
through points so obtained. The profiles from i v 
to 5 V and 1" to 5" will represent respectively the 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



141 




MODIFIED SIDE OF 
RAKING BRACKET 



Fig. 257. — Patterns for Cap, Side and Face Drop, of Raking Bracket 



modified returns of the lower and upper cap molds 
of the raked bracket. The various patterns are now 
in order and the face of the cap mold will be de- 
veloped first. 

Obtaining Patterns for Raked Cap Mold 

Therefore, at right angles to A B, draw any line, 
as M L, on which place the girth of the normal cap 
mold F, as shown by similar numbers I to 5, on 
M L. From these small figures and at right angles 
to M L draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to M L from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions in the front elevation of the raked cap mold. 
Trace a line through points so obtained. N O P R 
will be the pattern for the cap face. 

The patterns for the raked returns of the cap, are 
found by taking the girths of the profiles, shown 
from i v to s v and 1" to 5", and placing them on the 



line S T drawn at right angles to A B, as shown by 
similar figures. From these small figures and at 
right angles to S T, draw lines ; intersect these lines 
by lines drawn parallel to S T from similarly num- 
bered intersections in the cap molds A and F in the 
normal side of bracket. A line traced through points 
so obtained, as shown by U V W X and Y Z i h, 
will be the patterns for the upper and lower cap re- 
turns respectively. If the patterns have been cor- 
rectly developed, the cut W X will correspond in 
girth to the cut O P of the cap face, and the cut 
Y h will correspond in girth to the cut N R of the 
cap face, which parts must miter together. 

Return of Raked Face Drop 

To obtain the pattern for the return of the raked 
face drop, shown from 2 X to 5 X to 2° in the front 
elevation, take the girth of 2 X , 3 X , 4 X , 5 X , 4°, 3 and 



142 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



2° and place it on any vertical line, as I m, shown by 
similar numbers. Through these small figures and at 
right angles to / m, draw lines to any length, as 
shown. Measuring from the line I n in the normal 
side of bracket, take the various projections to 
points 3, 4 and 5 on the curve 2-5 and place them 
on corresponding lines in the pattern, measuring in 
each instance from the line I m. Through points so 
obtained, trace the line 2° t 2 X , thus obtaining the 
pattern sought. 

Obtaining Pattern for Modified Side of 
Raking Bracket 

To obtain the pattern for the raking side, draw 
any line as 5 X G 1 parallel to 1/-15' and from the 
various intersections on i'-i 5' (the right side of 
the raking bracket), previously obtained from points 
1 to 15 in the normal side, draw to any length lines 
at right angles to 1/-15'. Measuring in each in- 
stance from the line 5-G in the normal side of' the 
bracket, take the various projections to points 1 to 
15 in the normal side and place them on similar 
lines, measuring in each instance from the line 
5 X G 1 . Trace a line through points so obtained ; 
5 X H J K G 1 gives the desired pattern to which 
laps must be allowed. 

Obtaining Pattern for Face of Raking 
Bracket 

For want of space, the pattern for the face of the 
raking bracket is shown developed in Fig. 258. The 

method of pro- 
cedure is as fol- 
lows : Take the 
girth of the normal 
side of the bracket 
from 1 to 15 in 
Fig. 257 and place 
it on any vertical 
line, as A B, in Fig. 
258, as shown by 
similar numbers 
Through these 
small figures and 
at right angles to 
A B draw lines to 
any length as 
shown. A t right 
angles to A B in 
Fig. 257 and from 
the corner 15 in the 




FACE OF 
RAKING 
BRACKET 



Fig. 258. — Pattern for Face 
of Raking Bracket 



front elevation of the bracket draw the line 15-tv. 
Measuring in each instance from this line 15 iv take 
the various projections to the intersections on the 
left side of the raking bracket, which were previously 
obtained from points 1 to 15 in the normal side of 
bracket, and place these projections, in Fig. 258, 
measuring in all instances from the line A B, upon 
lines having similar numbers. Trace the miter cut, 
as shown from C to 15. Set the dividers a distance 
apart equal to the face of the raking bracket in Fig. 
257 from 15 to 15' and set off this distance in the 
pattern, measuring from the miter cut C 15 in Fig. 
258, thus obtaining the cut D E. C D E 15 then rep- 
resents the face pattern for the raking bracket. 




Fis 



259-- 



-Construction of Locked Seams in Sheet Metal 
Cornice Construction 



Patterns for Raking Bracket in Apex of 
Pediment 

Should a raking bracket be placed in the apex of 
the pediment, as shown by D in the finished view in 
Fig. 256, the patterns already obtained may be used 
with slight modification. 

The pattern for the cap marked a is obtained as 
follows : From the various intersections on the 
center line r in the front elevation of raking 
bracket in Fig. 257, lines are drawn at right angles 



RAKING MOLDINGS AND BRACKETS 



143 



to A B until they intersect similarly numbered lines 
in pattern for cap face, as shown by the miter cut 
•/ 0'. N R o' r' then represents the pattern for the 
cap, shown by a in Fig. 256. The center drop face 
b is obtained by taking a tracing of 1 5* 3 X i in the 
front elevation of drop face in Fig. 257 and revers- 
ing this on the center line o 5 X , making the pattern 
appear as shown in diagram marked AA in the 
upper left hand corner of the cut. 

To obtain the pattern for the face c in Fig. 256 
it is necessary only to divide the pattern for face in 
Fig. 258 into two parts, as indicated by the center 
dotted line X Y. These two half patterns, C-X-Y-15 
and X Y E D, are formed right and left to make up 
the center bracket. The side of the bracket indi- 
cated by d in Fig. 256 is alike to the pattern for the 
modified side of the raking bracket shown in Fig. 



257. The pattern for the return on the raked face 
drop b in Fig. 256, is obtained by reversing the part 
pattern of return on face drop, shown in Fig. 257, 
by 2 X , 5 X , t, opposite the line 5 X , t. 

Construction of Locked Seams in Sheet 
Metal Cornices 

Should the construction of pediment or horizontal 
cornices require large girths of metal, wider than 
the usual stock sizes, the seams may be made as 
shown in Fig. 259. The method applies to horizontal 
as well as pediment or gable cornices. Assuming 
that joints are required at A, B, C and D, the locks 
are turned as shown by a in the four joints and then 
turned over, as shown in the small diagram b. This 
is a simple joint requiring no rivets or solder. 



PART VII 

REDUCED MITERS FOR HORIZONTAL AND INCLINED 

MOLDINGS AND OF INTERSECTIONS OF MOLDS 

OF DISSIMILAR PROFILE 



REDUCED MITERS IN RAISED 
DIAMOND PANEL 

Solution 57 

TvIG. 260 is a view of a raised diamond, which re- 
quires change of profiles preparatory to develop- 
ing the patterns. In other words, the profile of one 
of the sides being given, the other side must be modi- 
fied to admit of inhering the corners. Fig. 261 
shows how this is accomplished. Let B A D 2', rep- 




Fig. 260. — View of Raised Panel or Diamond 

resent the elevation of the panel, wherein the miter 
lines have been drawn from A to 2' and from D to 
B intersecting each other at 1'. Through 1' draw the 
vertical line F E and the horizontal line H G in- 
definitely. Parallel to and equal in length to A B 
draw the line 3 v -3° and on the center line F E ex- 
tended, place the desired hights a, b, and i° and 
complete the profile 3 V , 1°, 3 , representing the true 
section on H G. In a similar manner construct the 
section on E F as shown taking care to have the 
hights a' b' 1 alike to a b 1 ° in the section on H G. 

The patterns may then be developed as follows : 
Take the girth of i°-2°-3° and place it on any ver- 
tical line, as shown by similar numbers on H° G°, 
and through these points draw lines at right angles 
to H° G°, as shown. Measuring from the line H G in 
elevation take the distance to 2'-$' and place it on 
either side of the line H° G° on similarly numbered 
lines, as shown. Connect points so obtained ; i° JK 
will be the pattern for the short sides of the panel. 
Now take the girth of 1-2-3 in the section on E F, and 
place it on the vertical line E° F°, as shown by sim- 
ilar numbers ; through these points and at right 
angles to E° F° draw lines indefinitely. Measur- 



PATTERN FOR 
LONG SIDES 




ELEVATION 2-3 

Fig. 261. — Patterns for Reduced Miters in Raised Diamond 

ing from the line E F in elevation, take the distance 
to 2'-3' and place it on either side of the line E° F° 
on similarly numbered lines, all as shown. 1 L M 
then represents the pattern for the long sides. These 
principals are applicable to any shape, whether it be 
simply a single pitch, as here shown, or a compli- 
cated series of molds, such as are considered in the 
next succeeding problem. 



REDUCED MITERS IN A MOLDED 
ORNAMENT 

Solution 57A 

Fig. 262 presents a view of a molded ornament 
having reduced miters wherein the ends have more 



144 



REDUCED MITERS 



145 




146 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



projection than do the front and rear. The method 
of developing the patterns is shown in detail in Fig. 
263. First, draw the plan of the ornament as shown 
by F E D G and from corner to corner draw the 
diagonal lines intersecting each other at A. 
Through A draw the vertical center line, as shown. 
Parallel to F E in plan draw the base line 17-17' and 
construct the side elevation of the ornament, as 
shown. In practical work it is necessary only to 
draw the one-half elevation as well as one- 
half of the plan. The true profile through A C 
having been drawn, the various molds are di- 
vided into equal spaces, as shown by the small fig- 
ures from 1 to 17, and from these intersections, lines 
are drawn at right angles to F E, until they inter- 
sect the miter line A D, as shown by similarly num- 
bered intersections. The girth from 1 to 17 in the 
side elevation is now placed on a line drawn at right 
angles to E D in plan, as indicated by similar num- 
bers on the girth line C L. Through these small 
figures and at right angles to C L, the usual meas- 
uring lines are drawn, and intersected by lines drawn 
parallel to C L from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions on the miter line A D in plan. Trace a line 
through points so obtained, as shown by 1 M, and 
trace this miter opposite the line 1 L, as shown. 
1 N M then gives the pattern for the short ends of 
the ornament. Before the pattern for the long sides 
can be developed a true or modified profile must be 
found on the line A B in plan, since the projection 
A B is less than the projection A C. Parallel to 
G D, from the various intersections on the miter 
line A D, draw lines indefinitely as shown ; and par- 
allel to G F draw any base line as 17 to 17". Now, 
measure from the base line 17-17' in the side eleva- 
tion and take the various vertical hights to points 
1 to 16 in the profile, placing them on lines 
having corresponding numbers, measuring in 
each instance from the line iy°-iy", thus obtain- 
ing the points of intersections marked i° to 17°- 
Trace a line through these points ; this will give the 
true profile through A B in plan. It should be under- 
stood that the given profile can be placed at pleas- 
ure. While the given profile is here placed in the 
side elevation representing a section through A C 
in plan and the section or profile through A B is 
modified therefrom, the method has no advantage 
over placing it on the line A B in plan and obtaining 
from it the modified profile on A C, by reversing 
the operations. On A B, extended as B H, place the 
girth of the true profile through A B ; take pains to 
measure each space separately, as they are all un- 
equal, as shown by similar numbers, 1° to 17°, on 



B H. Through these small figures, the usual meas- 
uring lines are drawn and intersected by lines drawn 
parallel to B H from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions on A D. Trace a line through these points of 
intersections, as shown from i° to K, and transfer 
this half pattern opposite the line B H. JK 1° will 
be the pattern for the long sides. Laps should be 
allowed for joining and soldering. 



PATTERNS FOR ORNAMENTAL 
DROP WITH REDUCED MITERS 

Solution 58 

In the construction of ornamental sheet metal 
fronts, as over the entrances of a theatre, ornamental 
drops are sometimes employed, as indicated by A in 




Fig. 264 
View of Ornamental Drop Having Reduced Miters 

Fig. 264, where the ends have more projection than 
the front or rear. The method of development relat- 
ing thereto may also be applied to the bottom of 
molded soffits of a bay window. In Fig. 265, let C, 1, 
1°, D, be the plan of the ornamental drop. Bisect C 
D, obtain A and from A draw the miter lines, A I 
and A 1°. In line with C D construct the front ele- 
vation of the drop indicated by 1-12-1". The mold 
placed above the line 1-1" will have square return 
miters. The profile shown from 1 to 12 in the front 
elevation is now divided into any desired number 
of equal spaces, as shown, and from these divisions, 
vertical lines are dropped until they cut the miter 
line A 1 in plan, as shown by intersections having 
similar numbers. From these intersections lines are 
carried to the right indefinitely, crossing the center 
line A B and the miter line A 1°, as shown. As the 
projections through the center line A B is less than 
the projection on A C, a true profile must be found 
through A B, in this way: Extend the line 1-1" in 
elevation, as shown by B 1 A 1 , and upon this place 
the various divisions shown on A B in plan, as in- 



REDUCED MITERS 



147 




148 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



dicated by similar numbers on A 1 B 1 . Through these 
small figures and at right angles to A 1 B 1 draw lines 
and intersect these by lines drawn parallel to A 1 B 1 
from similarly numbered divisions in the profile 
I -i J in elevation, thus obtaining the points of in- 
tersection marked 2' to 12'; through these points 
a line is traced, forming the true profile on A B in 
plan. The patterns are now in order of procedure. 
To obtain the pattern for the front, indicated by 
1 A 1° in plan, take the girth of the profile through 
A B and place it on the line A B, extended as B E, 
as shown by similar numbers. Through these small 
figures and at right angles to B E draw lines, and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to B E from 
similarly numbered intersections on the miter line 
A 1 in plan. Through these points trace the miter 
cut G 12'. The opposite half can be traced or the 
intersecting points obtained from the miter line 
A i° in plan. G, F, 12' then shows the full pattern 
for the front piece. The pattern for the sides is ob- 
tained by taking the girth of the profile, shown from 
1 to 12 in the front elevation, and placing it on the 
line C D in plan, extended as D H, as shown by sim- 
ilar numbers ; through these and at right angles to 
D H, lines are drawn intersecting lines previously 
drawn, parallel to 1-1° from similarly numbered 
intersections on the miter line A 1. A line traced 
through points so obtained, as indicated by 1-J-12, 
will be the pattern for the sides. Laps are allowed 
on the sides as shown by the dotted lines. Above the 
line J 1 in the pattern for sides and above the line 
G F in the pattern for the front must be added the 
square miter patterns for the mold indicated by X 
in the front elevation.. 



REDUCED MITER ON A RIGHT 
ANGULAR RETURN IN A CORNICE 

Solution 59 

A view of a reduced miter on a right angular 
cornice return is shown in Fig. 266. This figure 
presents a sketch of the subject of the problem 
which is to be developed. In this case it is assumed 
that the main cornice A has a projection of 14 in., 
and that the projection of the return miter is but 
8 in., thus requiring a reduction of 6 in. The method 
of working out patterns of this nature is shown in 
detail in Fig. 267 where A B C D E indicates the 
formation of the wall line. On the wall line D E 
place the given profile of the main cornice in the 
position shown and space the profile into a con- 
venient number of divisions, as shown by the small 



figures I to 22. Through the intersections 2-3, 
and parallel to D E, draw a line and intersect it 
at F by a line drawn from B at right angles to 
B C, and then draw the miter line from F to D. 
Then, from the various intersections in the given 
profile and parallel to F G draw lines indefinitely to 
the left intersecting the miter line D F as shown. 

The pattern for the miter cut of the main cornice 
may now be laid out by drawing any girth line, as 
G H, at right angles to F G, on which the girth of 
the main cornice is placed, as shown by similar num- 
bers on G H. Through these small figures the 
usual measuring lines are drawn and intersected by 
lines drawn parallel to G H from similar intersec- 
tions on the miter line F D. Trace a line through 
these points ; then G H J K will be the miter pattern 
for the front. Before the pattern for the return can 
be developed, a true profile must be found on B C 
in plan, since the projection B C is less than the pro- 
jection of the main cornice. From the various in- 
tersections on the miter line F D project lines up- 
ward parallel to F B indefinitely. Through the 
points 1 and 2 in the given profile of the main 
cornice draw the line a b at right angles to F G. 
Draw above the plan any line parallel to B C, as 
shown by a' V , intersecting the lines previously 
erected. Measuring from the line a b in plan take 
the various distances to points 1 to 22 and place them 
on similarly numbered lines, measuring in each in- 
stance from the line a' V , resulting in the intersec- 
tions 1' to 22'. A line traced through these points 
will be the modified profile for the return. 

The pattern for the return may now be laid out. 
Take the girth of the modified profile, taking care 

t o measure each 
space separately, as 
they are all un- 
equal ; place these 
divisions on B L 
drawn at right 
angles to B F. At 
right angles to B L 
and through the 
small figures on B 
L draw lines and 
intersect them by 
lines drawn parallel 
to B L from sim- 
ilar intersections on 
the miter line D F. 
When a line is 
traced through 
points so obtained, 



PROJECTION OF 
CORNICE A-H" 

PROJECTION OF 
RETURN B-8" 

THUS REQUIRING 
A-6 IN. REDUCTION 




Fig. 



266, 
Miter 
Return in a Cornice 



■View of a Reduced 
on a Right Angular 



REDUCED MITERS 



149 




as shown by N M, it will LAPS 
be the desired miter cut 



and L M N 1' will be the pattern for the 
return mold. If these patterns have been 
carefully developed, the distances on the miter 
cut from M to N should be equal to the dis- 
tances along the miter cut from K to J 
in pattern for main cornice. Allow laps 
for joining the miters, as indicated in pattern 
for return. 

REDUCED MITER AT OTHER THAN 
A RIGHT ANGLE IN PLAN 

Solution 60 

A reduced return at other than a right angle in 
plan, as shown by the formation of the wall line 
A B C D E in Fig. 268, involves procedure alike to 
that of the preceding problem for modify in 
profile and developing the patterns. In the present 
problem the projection of the front cornice on the 
wall line D E is greater than the projection of the 
return on the wall line, C D. The first step is to 
place the given profile on the wall line D E, in its 
proper position as indicated, and to divide the molds 
therein into ecjual spaces, as shown. Number the 



■J H 

Patterns for a Reduced Miter on a Right 
Angular Return in a Cornice 



15° 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



I l 



MODIFIED PROFILE 
OF RETURN 




M- 



i i i i i i i tii 

19181716151413 12 11 10 



1 I 
I I 



!i! ! 



Fig. 268 



-Patterns for a Reduced Return at Other Than 
a Right Angle in Plan 



REDUCED MITERS 



151 



bends and divisions in the profile, as shown from 1 
to 19, and through points 2 and 3 draw a line par- 
allel to D E intersecting it by a line drawn parallel 
to C D from the corner of the wall B, thus obtain- 
ing G. Draw the miter line from G to D. Parallel 
to D E and through the various divisions I to 19 
in the profile draw lines until they intersect the miter 
line G D as shown, and from these divisions draw 
lines indefinitely toward the top and parallel to D C. 

The true profile on the line B C in plan is found 
as follows : At right angles to D E in plan and from 
the corner 2 in the given profile, draw the line a b. 
Parallel to B C in plan draw any line, as a' b'. Meas- 
uring in each instance from the line a b in plan, take 
the various distances to points 1 to 19, and place 
them on similar lines, previously erected, measuring 
in each case from the line a' /»', thus obtaining the 
points of intersection marked 1' to 19'. A line traced 
through these intersections will show the modified 
profile of the return. The patterns are now in 
order. 

For the pattern for the main cornice, take the 
girth of the given profile in plan and place it on the 
line H J drawn at right angles to G F, as shown by 
similar numbers. Through these small figures and 
at right angles to H J draw lines and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to H J from similar intersec- 
tions on the miter line G D in plan. Trace a line 
through points so obtained ; J K L H will be the 
miter cut desired. 

The miter cut for the return is obtained by taking 
the girth of the modified profile and placing it on the 
line C B extended as B M, as shown by the small fig- 
ures 1' to 19'. Through these small figures and at 
right angles to B M draw lines and intersect them by 
lines drawn from similar intersections on the miter 
line G D and parallel to B M. When a line is traced 
through these divisions as shown, O N M B 
will be the desired pattern. 



REDUCED MITER IN A GABLE 

MOLDING HAVING A RIGHT 

ANGULAR RETURN 

Solution 61 

In Fig 269 is given a perspective view of a gable 
molding having a return at right angles in plan. In 
this case it is assumed that the gable molding A has 
a 15 in. projection, while the return molding B has 
only an 8 in. projection, thus requiring a reduction 
of 7 in. The method to be employed is shown in de- 
tail in Fig. 270, where K J H G F indicates the for- 



mation of the wall line in plan, while C D I3°-I3' 
shows the elevation of the pitch of the gable wall. 
At right angles to the gable line I3'-I3° place the 
given profile A in its proper position, as shown, that 
is, at right angles to the gable line. Divide the pro- 
file into an equal number of spaces, as indicated by 
the small figures o to 14. Take a tracing of the pro- 
file A with the various divisions thereon and place 
it on the wall line in plan in the position shown by 
A 1 , placing the drip 12-13 on the wall line as there 
indicated. Through the point 1-2 in the profile 
draw the line L M parallel to F G, intersecting it at 
M by a line drawn from the corner J parallel to 
H G, and draw the miter line M G in plan. Through 
the various intersections o to 14 in the profile A 1 and 
parallel to F G draw lines cutting the miter line 
M G from o v to I4 V ; from these divisions erect ver- 
tical lines and intersect them by lines drawn parallel 
to I3'-I3° in elevation from similarly numbered in- 
tersections in the profile A, thus obtaining the miter 
line as well as the modified profile of the return, 
shown from o' to 14'. 

The pattern for the gable molding may now be 
laid out as follows : At right angles to the lines of 
the gable molding draw any line, as N O, on which 

MAIN CORNICE A PROJECTS 15" 
RETURN CORNICE B PROJECTS 8" 
REQUIRING A REDUCTION OF 7" 




Fig. 269. — View of a Reduced Miter on a Gable Molding 
Having a Right Angular Return 



place the girth of the given profile A, as shown by 
the small figures o to 14. Through these small fig- 
ures and at right angles to N O, draw lines and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to O N from 
similarly numbered intersections on the miter line 
at the eave, o' to 14', and at the ridge o° to 14°. 



15^ 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




9°-10° 



13°-H° 



U"-12° 



PATTERN FOR 
RETURN MOLD 






1 2 ONE HALF PLAN 

Fig. ^-Patterns for Reduced Miters on a Gable Molding Having a Right Angular Return 



REDUCED MITERS 



iS3 



Trace a line through points so obtained ; P R S T 
is the pattern sought. 

The pattern for the return is laid out by extending 
the line H J in plan as J U ; upon this is placed the 
girth of modified profile, shown from o' to 14' in ele- 
vation, as indicated by similar numbers on J U. 
Through these small figures and at right angles to 
J U, draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to J U from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions on the miter line G M in plan. A line is traced 
through points so obtained as shown by U V M J ; 
this is the desired pattern. Allow edges on miters 
for joining. 



REDUCED MITER ON A GABLE 

MOLDING, HAVING A RETURN 

AT OTHER THAN A RIGHT 

ANGLE 

Solution 62 

If a gable mold has a return other than a right 
angle, as shown in Fig. 271, where the formation of 
the wall in plan is as indicated by C D G H, the 
method of procedure is quite different from that 
given in the preceding problem. 

Having established the angle of the wall line C D 
G H in plan, erect a vertical line from G to the 
elevation, as shown by E 13 , and from 13 draw 
the pitch of the top of the gable wall, as shown by 
13 I3 V , intersecting the center line X J at I3 V . On 
this line 13° I3 V place the given profile A, setting the 
corner of the drip 13 upon the wall line I3°-I3 V as 
indicated. Divide this profile A into an equal 
number of spaces, as shown from o to 
14. Take a tracing of the profile A with the various 
divisions therein and place it in the plan in the posi- 
tion shown by A 1 , taking care to place the drip line 
12-13 on the wall line G H, as shown. Through 
the points 1 and 2 and parallel to G H draw the line 
J K and intersect this, at K, by a line drawn from 
the corner C and parallel to D G. From K draw a 
line to G. G K represents the miter line in plan, be- 
tween the return and gable molding. As the projec- 
tion of the return is less than the projection of the 
gable molding, a modified profile must be found, as 
indicated by B in elevation. Before this can be done, 
the miter line in elevation must be drawn ; this is ac- 
complished as follows : Through the various inter- 
sections in the profile A 1 in plan, draw lines parallel 
to H G until they intersect the miter line G K, as 
shown by similar numbers. From these intersections 



o to 14 on G K erect vertical lines and intersect 
them by lines drawn through the small figures in the 
profile A in elevation and parallel to I3 v -i3°, result- 
ing in the points of intersection marked O to 14 ; 
through these is traced a line, which represents the 
miter line in elevation. Extend the lines drawn 
through the small figures in the profile A to the 
right, cutting the center or miter line of the gable 
from O v to I4 V . From the intersections O to 14 
on the miter line G K in plan, draw lines parallel 
to G D, until they cut the wall line C D, as shown. 
From these intersections on C D erect vertical lines 
to the elevation, and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to the horizontal line 1 ° Y in elevation, from 
similarly numbered intersections in the miter line i°- 
14°. Trace the outline shown from Y to Z ; this 
indicates the outline of the return butting against 
the wall surface, shown by C D in plan. 

The modified profile of the return may now be 
developed. At right angles to D G in plan draw 
any line, as a b, crossing the lines previously drawn, 
as shown from o to 14. Take these various di- 
visions on a b and place them on a line drawn 
parallel to Y i° in elevation, as indicated by a' V . 
At right angles to Y i° and from the various in- 
tersections on a' b' draw lines intersecting those 
previously drawn from similar numbers in the miter 
line i° 14 . Trace a line through points so ob- 
tained, as indicated from o to 14 in the modified 
profile B. Take the girth of this modified profile 
B and place it on the line S o drawn at right 
angles to C K in plan. Through these small figures 
on S o draw lines parallel to C K and intersect 
them by lines drawn parallel to S o from similarly 
numbered intersections on the miter line G K and 
intersections on the wall line C D. Trace a line 
through points so obtained ; C T U K is the pat- 
tern for the return. 

For the pattern for the gable mold, take the 
girth of the given profile A and place it on the line 
L M drawn at right angles to i° i v . Through 
these small figures on L M draw lines parallel to 
i°-i v and intersect them by lines drawn parallel 
to L M from similarly numbered intersections on 
the miter lines 0° to 14 and O v to I4 V . Trace 
a line through points thus obtained, when NOPR 
constitutes the desired pattern. 

It should be noted that the angle 12, 13, 14, in the 
modified profile gives the true modified angle, but 
in practice this angle should be bent to a right 
angle so that it will set upon the wall. Therefore 
in making the bend on dot 13 upon forming up the 
returns, it should represent a right angle. 



154 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



PATTERN FOR 
GABLE MOLD 




ONE HALF PLAN 



Fig. 271. — Patterns of a Gable Molding with a 
Reduced Return at Other Than a Right Angle 



REDUCED MITERS 



155 



DISSIMILAR MOLDINGS, MITER- 

ING AT AN INTERNAL RIGHT 

ANGLE IN PLAN 

Solution 62A 

Fig. 272 is a view of two dissimilar moldings 
mitering at an internal right angle in plan, the joint 
of intersection being shown at a b. It 
will be noted that the mold on the old 
building has a profile, as at A while 
that on the new building is shown to 
be similar to B. It will be seen that 
the principles employed in developing 
these patterns can be applied to a mold 
of any shape, whether the angle be in- 
ternal or external or of 90 degrees or 
less. 

Fig. 273 shows the method of pro- 
cedure. Let A represent the profile of 
a mold having an ogee and fillet ; B 
contains a quarter round and cove. 
Either mold may then be divided into 
an equal number of spaces. In this 
case we will use profile A, as shown 
by the small figures 1 to 13. From 
these points draw horizontal lines to 
the left, cutting the profile B, which 
has been placed in its correct relation to the profile 
A, as shown, thus obtaining the points of intersec- 
tion 1' to 13' in B. Note that the corner 3 in profile 
A intersects the profile B at 3' and 3". Divide the 
cove in B into equal spaces, as shown by a, b, and c, 
and from these points draw horizontal lines to the 
right cutting the profile A at a', V , and c'. Having 
found these points of intersection in both profiles, 
the pattern may now be laid out. 

For the pattern for the molding A butting against 
the mold B, take the girth of the profile A and place 
it upon the vertical line C D drawn above the pro- 
files as shown, as indicated by the small figures 1 
to 13 on C D. Through these small figures and at 
right angles to C D, draw lines and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to C D from similar in- 
tersections in the profile B. Trace a line through 
points so obtained ; G H C D is the pattern for the 
ogee mold. For the pattern for the mold B draw 
the vertical line E F and upon this place the girth 
of the profile B, as shown from 1' to 13' on E F. 
At right angles to E F draw the usual measuring 
lines and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to 
E F from similar intersections in the profile A. 
E L M F then constitutes the pattern for the quarter 
round mold. When the two patterns, just obtained, 



are shaped after their respective profiles, they will 
form an interior angle, indicated by a b in Fig. 272. 
Should an exterior angle be desired, of the same 
dissimilar profiles, as shown in Fig. 273, it is neces- 
sary only to use the reverse cut of the miter pat- 
terns just developed, as indicated by the dotted line 
patterns G H J K at the top and L M N O at the 




272. — View of Dissimilar Moldings Mitering at an Internal Right 
Angle in Plan 



bottom. The double dots, marked / m n in the 
lower pattern do not indicate a bend ; but show 
where the cove stops, as at c in the profile B, and 
serve as a guide when forming the molding in the 
brake. The metal is drawn over the former in the 
brake, until the double dot is reached. 



DISSIMILAR MOLDINGS, MITER- 
ING AT AN INTERNAL ANGLE 
IN PLAN, AT OTHER THAN A 
RIGHT ANGLE 

Solution 63 

When two moldings are to miter at other than 
an internal right angle, the method employed is that 
shown in Fig. 274. Here the profiles, A and B, 
are to miter at an internal angle of 45 degrees, as 
shown in the plan. The first step is to obtain the 
divisions in the profiles, as shown in the lower right 
hand corner, where the profiles A and B are placed 
in line with each other, as shown, making the dis- 
tance between them, as from 2 to 2', as desired. 
Either of the profiles may be divided into an equal 
number of spaces. In this case we will employ the 



156 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



profile A, as shown by the small figures i to 15; 
from these points draw horizontal lines to the right, 
cutting the profile B as shown by intersections hav- 




Fig. 273.- 



-Pattems for Dissimilar Moldings, Mitering at an Internal Angle at Right 
Angles in Plan 



ing similar numbers. As the space between 8' and 
10' in the profile B remains to be divided, establish 
the points a, b and c and carry these points hori- 
zontally to the left in the profile A, thus obtaining 
the intersections a', b' and c' . In practice more 
numerous divisions should be employed in spacing 
the profiles. Draw the desired internal angle, as 
shown by C 3" D in plan ; take a tracing of the 
profiles A and B with the various points of inter- 
sections thereon and place them, as shown re- 
spectively by A 1 and B 1 in plan, placing the member 
2-2 of the profile A 1 and 2'-^' of the profile B 1 
upon the lines C 3 V and 3 V D, respectively, all as 
shown. From the various intersections in the pro- 
file A 1 draw lines parallel to C 3 V and intersect 
these by lines drawn parallel to 3 V D from similarly 
numbered intersections in the profile B 1 , resulting 
in the points of intersection in plan, marked i°, 2° , 
3°, 3 V , 4 , 5 , etc., up to 15°. If a line were traced 
through these points of intersection, it would rep- 
resent the plan view of the miter line or joint. 
The tracing of the miter line has been omitted to 
avoid a confusion of lines which would occur in so 
small a drawing, as also because the points of in- 
tersection are sufficient for obtaining the 
A patterns. 

7 To obtain the pattern for the ogee mold, 

g g erect the line E F at right angles to C 3" ; take 
the girth of the profile A 1 and place it on E F, 
as shown by similar numbers ; through these 
numbers draw lines at right 
angles to E F and intersect 
them by lines drawn parallel 
to E F from similarly num- 
bered intersections in the 
miter line in plan. A line 
traced through points so ob- 
tained, as shown by E F G H, 
will be the pattern for the 
ogee mold. 

In a similar manner, obtain 
the pattern for the cove mold, 
shown by the profile B 1 in 
plan. Take the girth of the 
profile B 1 and place it on the 
line J K, drawn at right 
angles to 3 V D. Through these 
small figures and letters on 
and at right angles to J K, 
draw lines and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to J K 
from similarly numbered in- 
tersections in the miter line in 



REDUCED MITERS 



157 



PATTERN FOR 
OGEE MOLDING 



PATTERN FOR 
COVE MOLDING 




Fig. 274.— Patterns for Dissimilar Moldings, Mitering 

plan ; when a line is traced through points so ob- 
tained, we have the miter cut H L. JKLH is the 
desired pattern. 

When the two patterns shown, are formed after 
their respective profiles, they will constitute an in- 



13 12 12 ' 13' 

at an Internal Angle at Other than a Right Angle in Plan 

terior angle as shown in plan. If an exterior angle, 
alike to C 3" D in plan be desired, the reverse of 
the pattern cuts should be used, as was explained 
in connection with the dotted portion of the pat- 
terns in Fig. 273. 



PART VIII 

PATTERNS FOR ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR 

BASES AND HOODS 



ROOF FLANGE AND CYLINDER IN- 
TERSECTING SINGLE 
PITCHED ROOF 

Solution 64 

A VIEW of a cylinder or pipe and roof flange in- 
tersecting a single pitched roof is shown in Fig. 
274 a , where the roof flange is indicated by A and 
the pipe or cylinder by B. The method of develop- 
ing patterns of this nature, regardless of the pitch 
of the roof, is shown in detail in Fig. 275. 

Let A B represent the pitch of the roof and D 
C 5' 1' the elevation of the cylinder. Above the line 
D C, draw the profile of the cylinder in its proper 
position, as indicated by E, and through its center 
draw the horizontal line a b. Divide the profile E 
into an equal number of spaces, as shown by the 



small figures I to 5 to 
perpendicular lines un- 
til they cut the roof 
line A B, as shown by 
similar numbers 1' to 
5'. Having obtained 
these points of intersec- 
tion, the pattern for the 
cylinder may be laid 
out as follows : Extend 
the line C D in side ele- 
vation as D F ; upon 
this place the girth of 
the profile E, as shown 
by similar numbers I 
to 5 to 1 on D F. At 
right angles to F D and 
through the small fig- 
ures thereon, draw lines 
and intersect these lines 
by lines drawn parallel 
to F D from similarly 
numbered intersections 
on the roof line A B. 
Trace a line through 




Fig. 



274a. — View of Roof Flange and Cylinder on Single 
Pitch Roof 



from these points drop 

PATTERN FOR CYLINDER 




PATTERN FOR 
ROOF FLANGE 



275-- 



-Patterns for Roof Flange and Cylinder on Single Pitch Roof 
153 



ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR BASES AND HOODS 



159 



points thus obtained ; D F G H outlines the pattern 
for the pipe or cylinder. It will be noted that the 
seam in the cylinder has been placed along D 1' in 
the side elevation ; this arrangement prevents the 
water from flowing against the seam. 

The pattern for the roof flange is laid out as 
follows : At right angles to A B from the various 
intersections 1' to 5' draw lines indefinitely, as 
shown. Then, parallel to A B, draw any line, as 
a' V, crossing the lines drawn from points 1' to 5'- 
Then, measuring in every instance from the line 
a b in the profile E, take the various distances to 
points 2 to 4, and place them on either side of 
the line a' b' on similarly numbered lines, as indi- 
cated by the heavy dots. Trace a line through 
points so obtained, as shown by the elliptical figure. 
Around this elliptical figure place sufficient ma- 
terial for the flange, as shown by the rectangle J 
K L M, which completes the pattern. When these 
collars and flanges, as they are commonly called, 
are assembled, they can be joined by soldering, edges 
being allowed as indicated in the diagram of con- 
struction. Here R° F° indicates the roof flange 
with an upturned edge at c c, while C° shows the 
collar, with an outward flange at d d. The method 
of adding these edges to the two patterns is shown 
by the dotted lines on each. These edges are thor- 
oughly sweated with solder. This method of con- 
struction may be applied to the seven examples of 
work to follow. 



ROOF FLANGE AND CYLINDER IN- 
TERSECTING A DOUBLE 
PITCHED ROOF 

Solution 65 

Fig. 276 illustrates a cylinder or pipe passing 
through the ridge of a double pitched roof. A, be- 




Fig. 276. — View of Roof Flange and Cylinder on Double 
Pitch Roof 

ing the flange and B, the pipe. The method em- 
ployed in laying out the pattern is shown in Fig. 
277. Here the pitch of the roof is shown in the 
end elevation by A 3' B, in the center of which the 
elevation of the cylinder is drawn as indicated by 




HALF PATTERN 

FOR 
ROOF FLANGE 



A B 

Fig. 277. — Patterns for Roof Flange and Cylinder on Double Pitch Roof 



i6o 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



C-D-i'-i". Above the line D C and in its proper 
position draw the profile E, with diameter equal 
to D C and through the center of the circle E draw 
the line a b. Divide the circle E into any number 
of equal divisions as indicated by the small figures 
i to 3 to i to 3 to i ; through these points and 
parallel to the lines of the cylinder drop lines cutting 
the roof line A 3' B, as shown by similar numbers. 
Having found these points of intersection, the pat- 
tern for the cylinder may be laid out as follows : 
Extend the line C D or a line drawn at right angles 
to D 1', as shown by D F and upon this place the 
girth of the circle E, as shown by similar numbers 
on D F. Through these small figures and at right 
angles to D F draw the usual measuring lines ; in- 
tersect these by lines drawn parallel to D F from 
similarly numbered intersections on the roof line. 
A line traced through points so obtained, as shown 
by 1 R S 1, will be the desired pattern. As the 
cylinder sets in a central position over the ridge of 
the roof and as the pitch of both sides of the roof 
is similar, a pattern for one side of the roof flange 
can be used for the other. Therefore, at right 
angles to the roof line 3'-B and from the various 
intersections, 1", 2" and 3', draw lines indefinitely, 
as shown ; at right angles to these lines draw the 
line a'-b', cutting the lines previously drawn, as 
shown. Then measuring in each instance from the 
line a b in the profile E, take the distances to the 
several points 2 and 3 and place them on either side 
of the line a' b' on similarly numbered lines, as 
shown by the heavy dots. Trace a line through 
these points of intersection ; L b' M is the semi- 
elliptical cut, around which the desired flange is 
added, as indicated by G H J K. This halt pat- 
tern may also be used for the opposite side, or the 
roof flange may be made in one piece by placing 
the half pattern shown opposite the line G K. Edges 
are to be allowed, as explained in the preceding 
problem. 



ROOF FLANGE AND CYLINDER IN- 
TERSECTING THE RIDGE AND 
HIPS OF A HIPPED ROOF 

Solution 66 

In Fig. 278, A represents the roof flange and B 
the pipe or cylinder intersecting the ridge and hips 
of a hipped roof. The development of these pat- 
terns is somewhat more difficult than that of the 
two preceding problems but a short and accurate 
method is set forth in Fig. 279. The patterns may 



be laid out without the usual procedure of first 
finding the miter lines in elevation by an operation 
in projections. This method saves time, but precaution 
is to be taken to number the points in plan accurately, 
according to the procedure set forth hereinafter. 
First draw the pitch of roof, as indicated by A 1' 
B, and in the center of the ridge, draw the elevation 
of the cylinder, as shown by 5' K J 5". Draw the 
horizontal line A B and below it, draw a part plan, 
as shown by C D E F. From the corners D and 
E and at angles of 45 degrees' draw lines inter- 
secting each other at H, from which point draw 
the ridge line H 1. Using H as center, with a 
radius equal to one half the diameter of J K, draw 
the plan of the cylinder, as shown, cutting the ridge 
line at 1 and the hip lines at 3 and 3 . A J K B 
then represents a section on the line b c in plan. 
To avoid the operations in projections before men- 
tioned, draw a line from the center H in plan and 
at an angle of 45 degrees, as indicated by H X. 
H-X-3 in plan will be similar to H-3-3 in the 
front part of plan, because the pitch of the roof on 
all three sides is alike. Divide the arc between 1 
and 3 in plan into equal parts, in this case two, 
also the arcs between X and 3 , also 3° and 3, both 
into the same number of spaces, as shown from 
3 to 3° to 3 in both arcs. Starting at the ridge, 
number the points 1, 2 and 3 up to X, then con- 
tinue on the next arc to 4 and 5, then back from 5 to 
4, to the hip line or 3 and number the front arc, 3 , 
4, 5, 4, 3 to correspond to the side between 3° and 
3. By following the numbers in this order, no mis- 




Fig. 278, — View of Roof Flange and Cylinder over Ridge 
and Hips of Roof 

take will occur in laying out the pattern. From 
these divisions between 1 and the hip line at 3 , 
carry up perpendicular lines as shown, cutting the 
roof line 1' B in the section, as indicated by 1', 
2', 3', 4' and 5'. 

The pattern for the cylinder cutting the three 
sides of the roof, may now be laid out. Extend 



ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR BASES AND HOODS 
J K L 12345434543454 321 



161 



SECTION 

ON b-c 

IN PLAN 



PATTERN FOR ROOF FLANGE 
ON SIDES 




PATTERN FOR 
CYLINDER 



Fig. 279. — -Patterns for Roof Flange and Cylinder over 
Ridge and Hips of Roof 

J K in the section, as indicated by L M, and upon 
this place the girth of the full circle in plan, as 
shown by corresponding numbers on L M, or 16 
divisions in all. From these divisions and at right 
angles to L M draw the usual measuring lines and 
intersect these by lines drawn parallel to L M from 
similarly numbered intersections on the roof line 
1' B. Trace the miter cut as shown ; the part from 
R to S and from T to U represents the cut on the 
sides of the hip roof, and the part from S to T 
represents the cut on the front of the hip roof. 
1 R S T U 1 represents the full pattern. As the 
roof flange for the front part in plan takes up only 
the points 5, 4 and 3, on the roof line i'-B, take the 
girth of the roof pitch where these numbers intersect, 
as from B to 5' to 4' to 3' in the section, and place 
these divisions on any vertical lines below the plan, 
as shown by similar numbers on G B. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to G B draw 



lines and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to 
G B from similar numbers in the cylinder in plan, 
cutting the front part of the roof E, 3, 3 , D. 
Trace a line through points so obtained, as shown 
by V e 5' h W. Establish the width of the flange 
5' a and through a draw a line parallel to V W 
cutting the sides e V and h W at / and g, respec- 
tively, c f g h 5' is then the pattern for the roof 
flange on front. As the roof flange for the sides 
takes up all that part of the circle between 3 and X, 
and also between X and 1, take the girth of all the 
spaces contained on the roof line 1' B in the sec- 
tion and place them on the line N O drawn at right 
angles to D C in plan, as shown by similar numbers 
1' to 5'. Through these small figures and at right 
angles to N O, draw lines and intersect them by 
lines drawn parallel to N O from similarly num- 
bered intersections in plan, all as shown by the 
dotted lines. Trace a line through points so ob- 
tained, as shown by / 5' ;' Y. Make the distance 
5' a' equal to 5' a in the front roof flange pattern, 
and through a' in the pattern for side roof 
flange, draw a line parallel to Y B, cutting 
the line / Y at i. Make the distance I a" equal to 
5' a' and from a" draw a line parallel to N O until 



1 62 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



it intersects i a' extended at d. I a" d i j 5' I is then 
the pattern sought. Edges are to be allowed, as 
heretofore specified. 



ROOF FLANGE AND OCTAGONAL 

SHAFT INTERSECTING A SINGLE 

PITCHED ROOF 

Solution 67 

When a large ventilator with octagonal bases in- 
tersects a single pitched roof, the development of 




Fig 280. — View of Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft on 
Single Pitch Roof 

the patterns is performed after the methods pre- 
viously described. Fig. 280 presents a view of an 



from 1 to 4 ; from these points vertical lines are 
projected until they cut the roof line A B from 
1' to 4', as shown. Take the girth of the octagon 
E and place it on the line C D extended as D F, 
as shown by similar numbers ; through these num- 
bers and at right angles to F D, the usual measur- 
ing lines are drawn and intersected by lines drawn 
parallel to F D from similarly numbered inter- 
sections, 1' to 4', on the roof line, A B. Trace a 
line through these points ; F G H J D is the de- 
sired pattern. 

The roof flange is laid out by drawing lines in- 
definitely at right angles to A B from the various 
points of intersection, 1' to 4' ; parallel to A B draw 
any line, as a' b', cutting the lines just drawn, 
as shown. Measuring from the line a b in the 
octagon section E take the various distances to the 
corners 1, 2, 3 and 4, and place them on either side 
of the line a' V on lines drawn from the intersec- 
tions 1' to 4' on the roof line A B, thus obtaining 
the points of intersections, 1" to 4", on both sides 
in the roof flange pattern. Around this irregular 
figure, place the size of the flange required and 
draw the rectangle c d e f. 




octagonal shaft, B, intersecting the single pitched 
roof, with roof flange indicated by A. The method 
of laying out the patterns is shown 
Fig. 281. Here A B gives the pitch of the roof, 
D C 4' 1' the side elevation of the octagonal shaft 
and E the section or profile of the octagon. Through 
the center of the octagon E draw the line a b. 
Number both halves of the octagon alike, as shown 



PATTERN 

FOR 

ROOF FLANGE 



ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR BASES AND HOODS 



163 



ROOF FLANGE AND OCTAGONAL 

SHAFT INTERSECTING A DOUBLE 

PITCHED ROOF 

Solution 68 

Fig. 282 presents a perspective of a roof flange, 
A, and an octagonal shaft, B, intersecting a double 
pitched roof, affording an idea of the manner in 




Fig. 282. — View of Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft on 
Double Pitch Roof. 

which large octagonal ventilation bases intersect the 
ridges of double pitched roofs. The method of devel- 
oping the patterns is shown in Fig. 283, in which the 
double pitch is first drawn, as shown by A a' B ; 
in the center of this the elevation of the octagonal 



shaft is drawn, as shown by i' D Ci'. Above the 
line D C place the profile of the octagonal shaft E, 
as shown, and number the corners in the manner 
indicated. Through the center E of the octagon 
draw the horizontal line a b, and from the various 
numbered corners drop lines intersecting the double 
pitched roof line A a' B, as shown by similar num- 
bers. From the ridge a' in elevation erect a ver- 
tical line cutting the side of the octagon 2-2 at a. 
This point a will be used when developing the pat- 
tern. 

For the half pattern of the shaft, take the girth 
from 1 to i° or the half octagon, as shown by the 
diagonal dotted line drawn from corner to corner, 
and place it on the line C D extended as D F, as 
shown by similar numbers ; from these numbers 
and at right angles to D F, draw lines and inter- 
sect them by lines drawn parallel to D F from sim- 
ilarly numbered intersections on the roof line a' 
A. A line traced through points so obtained, as 
indicated by J H G, will be the desired cut, and 
1 J G 1 will be the desired half pattern. 

The pattern for the roof flange for one side is 
laid out by drawing lines of indefinite length from 
points 1', 2' and a' on the roof line and at right 
angles to a' B, as shown. Parallel to a' B draw 
any line, as a" b", crossing the lines just drawn 
from a' 2' and 1' on the roof line a B. Measur- 
ing in each instance from the line a b in the pro- 
file E take the various distances to points 1 and 2, 
and place them on either side of the line a" b" 



HALF PATTERN 
FOR 
OCTAGONAL SHAFT 




HALF PATTERN 

FOR 
ROOF FLANGE 



A B 

Fig. 283. — Patterns for Octagonal Shaft and Roof Flange on a Double Pitch Roof 



164 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



in the flange pattern, thus obtaining the outline in- 
dicated by K L M N. Around this outline add 
the required width and length of the flange, as in- 
dicated by c d c f; this completes the half pattern. 
This half pattern can be duplicated opposite the 
line c f, if the full pattern is desired. 

When these ventilator bases are of large size, 
each side is made separately, riveted along the 
corners 1 and 2 in profile E. In that case each side 
of the pattern requires to be laid out separately. 

ROOF FLANGE AND OCTAGONAL 

SHAFT INTERSECTING HIPS 

AND RIDGE OF A HIPPED 

ROOF 

Solution 69 

The present example is that of an octagonal ven- 
tilator shaft setting on the ridge and hips of a roof, 
as indicated by B, in Fig. 284, and requiring a roof 
flange, A, as shown in the perspective. The laying 

H J K I 2 



SECTION 
ON 

Y-Z 

IN PLAN 



out of these patterns may be accomplished as shown 
in the drawing in Fig. 285. 

As in the preceding problems, first draw the roof 
line A 1/ B, in the center whereof draw the eleva- 
tion of the shaft, as shown by J, 3', 3", H. Draw a 



Fig. 




-View of Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft over 
Ridge and Hips of Roof 



plan view on the line A B, as shown by C D E F. 
From the corners E and D draw the two hip lines 
meeting at G; from G draw the vertical line G 1 
representing the ridge line. Using G as a center, 

3 a 3 3 a 3 ■ 3 2 1 



PA TTERN 
FOR 
OCTAGONAL 
M SHAFT 

construct the 
plan of the 
octagon al 
shaft to equal 
in width H J 
in the eleva- 
tion. As the 
pitch of the front part of 
X the roof E D G in plan 




-Patterns for Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft 
over Ridge and Hips of Roof 



will be similar to that of the 
sides, the patterns for the 
shaft and flange may be de- 
veloped without having re- 
course to projections. Other- 
wise these would be re- 
quired for finding the miter lines showing the inter- 
sections between the shaft and roof. Therefore, 
from the center G in plan and at an angle of 45 de- 
grees draw the line G a° cutting the side of the 
octagon 2-3 at 0°. a", 3, 3, a, will be similar to a, 
3, 3, a, in the front in plan. Number the ridge inter- 
section 1 and the following corner 2 and from 
the numbered points erect perpendicular lines, 
cutting the roof line 1' B, as shown by similar num- 
bers i', 2', a' and 3'. 



ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR BASES AND HOODS 



165 



The pattern for the shaft may now be laid out, as 
follows : Take the girth of all the spaces contained 
in the profile G and place them, as shown by similar 
numbers, on the line K L drawn at right angles to 
J 3'. From these small figures and letters on K L 
and at right angles thereto draw lines and intersect 
them by lines drawn parallel to K L from similarly 
numbered points, 1' to 3', on the roof line 1' B. 
Trace a line through these points, as shown by 
PONMjiPONMi gives the pattern desired, 
the angular cuts at O and N being the cuts over the 
hips at a and a in plan. 

To obtain the pattern for the roof flange on sides, 
take the various divisions, i' to B on the roof line 
in the section, and place them on the line W X, 
drawn at right angles to C D in plan, all as shown 
by similar numbers. At right angles to W X and 
through the small figures and letters, 1' to B, draw 
lines as shown ; intersect these lines by lines drawn 
parallel to W X from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions in the octagonal figure in plan. Trace the miter 
cut, e, 3', d, B 2 , as shown. Establish as desired the 
distance e a and 3' x and draw a line through x par- 
allel to B B 2 cutting the miter cut at c and meeting 
the horizontal line drawn from a at b. a b c d 3' e a 
then represents the pattern for the side roof flange. 

As the front part of the plan E D is intersected 
by the part octagon a 3 3 a, take the various divi- 
sions B 3' a' in the sectional view and place them on 
the girth line R B, which is drawn at right angles to 
E D, as shown by similar letters and figures on R B. 
Through these points a', 3' and B draw lines at 
right angles to R B, and intersect these lines by lines 
drawn parallel to R B from similarly numbered in- 
intersection in the plan. Trace the outline through 
points so obtained ; A v B v S 3' V gives the miter cut. 

Make the distance 3' X 1 equal to 3' X in the pat- 
tern for side flange and draw a line through X' par- 
allel to A v B v , cutting the miter cuts at U and T, as 
shown. V U T S 3' represents the pattern for the 
roof flanee on front. 



SQUARE TAPERING SHAFT AND 

ROOF FLANGE INTERSECTING 

THE RIDGE AND HIPS OF A 

ROOF 

Solution 70 

Occasionally large ventilators are built with 
square tapering bases mitering down on the ridge 
and hips of a hipped roof, as shown in the perspec- 



tive in Fig. 286, in which A and B show respec- 
tively, the roof flange and tapering shaft. These 
shafts or bases are sometimes round, sometimes oc- 
tagonal, in either case tapering. The octagonal base 
will be taken up in the next succeeding problem, 




Fig. 286. — View of Square Tapering Shaft with Roof Flange 
over Ridge and Hips of Roof 

while the round base will later be explained in the 
consideration of radial line developments. To lay 
out the square tapering shaft refer to Fig. 287, 
which illustrates the operations in detail. First draw 
the end elevation of the roof, which indicates the 
pitch, B A C. Below B C draw the plan view, in- 
dicated by D E F G, and draw the hip lines, F U 
and E U, also the ridge line, U a". Construct the 
elevation of the base, as shown by 1,2, 2', 1', from 
which the plan view of the top is projected, as in- 
dicated by II J K L in plan, also the plan view on 
the bottom line 2-2' in elevation, as shown by 
P O N M in plan. As the rear side of the shaft, 
P O J H in plan, sets over the ridge of the roof and 
as this side is also tapering, the intersecting line 
between the shaft and roof line is found as fol- 
lows : From the apex A in elevation and parallel to 
B C, draw a line cutting the side of the shaft i'-2' 
at a ; from this point a perpendicular line is pro- 
jected to the plan, cutting the miter line of the shaft 
at a'. From this point, a', a line is drawn parallel to 
P O cutting the ridge line at a", the desired point. 
Draw the miter lines P to a" and a" to O, as shown. 
Having completed the plan and elevation, the pat- 
terns are now in order. Assuming that the shaft is 
to be made in four parts and the corners double 
seamed, the patterns may be developed as follows: 
Take the distance of the taper i'-2' in the end ele- 
vation and place it on any vertical line, as R S, 
shown by similar numbers ; through these and at 
right angles to R S draw lines of indefinite length 
as shown. Take one-half of the distance 1-1 1 and 
2-2' in the end elevation and place it on either side 



1 66 THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 

n 




287. — Patterns for Square Tapering Shaft and Roof 
Flange on Ridge and Hips of Roof 

of the line R S, thus obtaining the points V and Y 
at the top and W and X at the bottom. Connect 
lines from V to W and Y to X. V W X Y will be 
the pattern for three sides of the tapering shaft. 

Take the distance from i' to a in the end eleva- 
tion, and set it off on the center line R S in the pat- 
tern from 1' to a, and draw lines from a to W and 
X. V W a X Y will be the pattern for the shaft cut- 
ting the double pitch roof at the ridge. 

For the pattern for the front roof flange, take the 
distance from C to 2 in the end elevation and place 



it on the vertical line A 1 B 1 below the plan, as shown 
by 2, C, through these points and at right angles 
to A 1 B 1 draw lines and intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to A 1 B 1 from similar intersections 
in plan. C l D 1 E 1 F 1 gives the pattern sought. 

The pattern for the roof flange on sides is ob- 
tained by taking the divisions A to 2 to C in the end 
elevation and placing them on the line G 1 H 1 drawn 
at right angles to D E in plan, as shown by A, 2, C, 
on G 1 H 1 . At right angles to G 1 H 1 and through A, 
2 and C draw lines to any length, as shown, and in- 
tersect these lines by lines drawn at right angles to 
D E in plan from the points of intersection marked 
a", O, N, and E in plan. Connect points thus ob- 
tained in the pattern, as shown by lines drawn from 
K 1 to L 1 to M 1 to O 1 . Establish the distance K 1 J 1 , 
and from J 1 draw the horizontal line meeting the 
line drawn through C at N 1 ; this completes the pat- 
tern. Laps are to be allowed, as specified in preced- 
ing problems. 



ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR BASES AND HOODS 



167 



OCTAGONAL TAPERING BASE; IN- 
CLUDING ROOF FLANGE, IN- 
TERSECTING THE HIPS AND 
RIDGE OF A HIPPED ROOF 

Solution 71 

An octagonal ventilator base and roof flange inter- 
secting the ridge and hips of a hipped roof is shown 




Fig. 288. — View of Octagonal Tapering Shaft with Roof 
Flange over Ridge and Hips of Roof 

in perspective in Fig. 288, where A is the flange and 
B the base or shaft. This problem presents an in- 
teresting study in projections and intersections and 
should be carefully followed as outlined in Fig. 289. 
In this connection we will take up also the method 
of laying out, all on one pattern, the various pat- 
terns for the shaft. 

As in the preceding solutions, first draw the pitch 
of the roof, as indicated by B A C in the end eleva- 
tion. Establish at any point the width of the octa- 
gon base as K L, the vertical hight as L° H° and the 
width of top as J H. In line with and below B C 
draw the plan of the roof, as indicated by 
D E F G, and draw the hip lines, E A 2 
and F A 2 ; also the ridge line, A 2 A°. Using 
A 2 as a center, construct a horizontal section on the 
line L K in elevation, as shown by the octagonal 
figure, a b c d e f g h,'m plan. In like manner, using 
A 2 as center, construct the octagonal section i j k I 
m n p, representing the horizontal section on H J 
in elevation. Connect the corners of the octagon in 
plan as a to /, b to k, c to I, etc., as shown. It is now 
necessary to find the miter or intersecting lines be- 
tween the tapering octagonal shaft and hipped roof. 
Referring to the plan, it will be noted that the sides 
of the shaft marked I intersect on horizontal lines ; 
those marked II intersect the hips; those marked 
III intersect the double pitched roof, while the one 
marked IV intersects the ridge. 

To find the intersection on the hip, take the dis- 
tance of the hip line A 2 E in plan, and place it, as 



shown from A to E° in elevation, and draw a line 
from E° to A, which shows the true length of the 
hip line. Where the flare of the octagonal base J K 
intersects this hip line at M, draw a line parallel to 
B C from this point M until it intersects the pitch 
of the roof A C at u" ; from this point project a ver- 
tical line in the plan intersecting the hip line at u' , 
the desired point. Draw a line in plan from d to u' 
to e and reproduce on the opposite side, as shown. 
The same point, 11', in plan, could be obtained by 
projecting a vertical line from the intersection M on 
the hip line in elevation until it meets the base line 
B C at u, then taking the distance from E° to u and 
setting it off in plan on the hip line from E to «'. 
From and n in plan erect vertical lines in the ele- 
vation, cutting the top line of the shaft at 0' and n' . 
In like manner, from the corners / and e in plan 
erect perpendicular lines cutting the bottom line of 
the shaft at /' and c' '. Connect lines from 0' to /' 
and ri to c ' ; from u" draw a line to c' , another from 
e' to f and another from /' to u v . This completes 
the end elevation of the shaft intersecting a hipped 
roof. 

To find the line of intersection in plan, where the 
sides of the shaft marked III meet the roof line, 
simply project a vertical line from the intersecting 
point between the miter line o' f and the roof line 
A B in elevation, indicated by r, into the plan, cut- 
ting the miter line a j at .?, and draw a line from 
s to h which can be traced to the opposite side, if 
desired. 

The intersection between the side of the shaft IV 
in plan and the ridge line is found by drawing a 
horizontal line from the ridge A in elevation until 
it cuts the pitch of the shaft H L at A°. From this 
point a perpendicular line is projected in the plan 
cutting the miter line h i at t. From t a line is drawn 
parallel to i j to cut the miter line a j at t' and from 
this point a line is drawn parallel to ;' k to cut the 
ridge line at t" the desired point. Draw a line from 
j to t" and reproduce on the opposite side, if desired. 
This completes the plan view and the patterns are 
now in order. 

By referring to the plan it will be seen that four 
separate patterns will be required for the shaft, 
which we will proceed to lay out on one pattern, as 
is done in the practical work of the shop. 

From the various intersections r and u v in the 
end elevation draw horizontal lines cutting the pitch 
of the octagonal shaft at / and M°, respectively. 
Take the various divisions in the end elevation from 
H to A° to / to M° to L and place them on the 
vertical line in diagram S, as shown by similar 



1 68 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 





o H n 




| Ja° 


V | 


/ -i r '^J 




y^° 




\L \J 



77/£ VARIOUS 
PATTERN SHAPES 

FOR THE 

OCTAGONAL SHAFT 

MARKED I TO IV 

IN PLAN 




PATTERN FOR 

ROOF FLANGE 

ON SIDES 



PATTERN FOR ROOF FLANGE ON FRONT 
I 
W 

Fig. 289. — Patterns for Tapering Octagonal Shaft and' 
Roof Flange, over Ridge and Hips of Roof 

letters. Through these letters H, r' and L and at 
right angles to H L draw horizontal lines to any 
length as shown. Measuring from the center line 
H° L° in the end elevation take the distances to 
points e' and 11' and place them in diagram S on 
either side of the line H L, as shown by c and /. 
also by n and 0, respectively. Draw lines from to f 



and n to e . n o f c will be the pattern for the three 
sides of the shaft, marked I in plan. 

From the corners e and / in diagram S draw lines 
to M°. f M° e n will be the pattern for the sides 
of the shaft, marked II in plan. 

Where the line drawn through / in diagram S 
cuts the line f 3Xv, draw a line from vtoe;oven 
will be the pattern for the sides of the shaft, marked 
III in plan. 

From v and v' in diagram S draw lines to A° 
when o v A° v' n will be the pattern for the side, 
marked IV in plan. 

Thus it will be seen that the four patterns have 
been laid out as one. In cutting out these patterns 
from sheet metal, the proper method of procedure 
is as follows : Assuming that the necessary laps 
have been allowed for double seaming and solder- 
ing, first cut three, alike to o n e f in diagram S. 
Then cut away e M° /, allowing laps, and cut two 
alike to n e M° /. Then cut away M° v, allow- 



ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR BASES AND HOODS 



169 



ing laps, and cut two alike to o n e v. Again cut 
away v A° v', allowing laps, which leaves that for 
the side intersecting the ridge. 

The roof flange is now laid out, for the front part 
of which take the girth of B L u y in end elevation 
and place it on the vertical line V W drawn at right 
angles to F E in plan, as shown by similar letters ; 
through these letters horizontal lines are drawn and 
intersected by lines drawn parallel to V W from 
similar points in plan, all as shown by the dotted 
lines. Connect the intersections thus obtained in the 
pattern, by lines ; when K v F v H v J v L K v will be 
the pattern sought. 

The pattern for the roof flange on sides is ob- 
tained by taking the girth of A r u v L B in the end 
elevation and placing these distances on the line 
T U drawn at right angles to E D in plan, as shown 
by similar letters on T U. Through these letters at 
right angles to T U draw lines and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to T U from similar inter- 
sections in plan, all as shown by the dotted lines. 
Connect lines through points of intersection thus 
obtained, as shown by E v L D v C v . Establish as de- 



sired the width of the flange E v A v and draw the line 
A v B v parallel to T U intersecting the line drawn 
through B at B v . A v B v C v D v L E v A v is then the 
desired pattern. Allow laps for soldering purposes, 
as specified in preceding solutions. 

CONICAL ROOF FLANGE ON ROOF 
HAVING ONE INCLINATION. 

Solution 72. 

Fig. 290 presents a view of a conical roof flange, 
indicated by A, while abed shows a roof plate or 





Fig. 2°l.— Method of Laying Out Pattern of Conical 
Roof Flange 



Fig. 290. — View of 
Conical Roof Flange 



flashing. The method of find- 
ing the opening in the roof 
plate will be taken up in a later 
succeeding problem. The de- 
velopment of the conical flange 
A is illustrated in Fig. 291 
where a quick, accurate method is 
shown. 

First draw a half plan and eleva- 
as shown, and draw the roof line 
', which in this case is at 45 degrees, 
ide the half circle of the plan into 
number of equal spaces, twelve in 
case, as shown in the figures, 1', 2', 
3', etc. Project the points of division vertically until 
they cut the horizontal line 13' 1' and thence carry 
them toward the apex of the cone at A. Q R shows 
the opening of the top of the flange or the outside 
diameter of the smokestack. The lines just drawn 
toward the apex are called the elements of the cone, 
and the points of intersection of the elements with 
the roof line P T give the points to be used in the 
development of the pattern. Project those points, as 
shown, horizontally toward the right to cut the 
outer edije line of the cone R 1'. 



I/O 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



For half the pattern, set the dividers to the length 
A I' and describe an arc as shown by i' 7 13, which 
divide into twelve spaces, each equal to one of those 
on the half plan, and from these points draw the 
elements toward the apex A, as shown. Now set the 
dividers to the length of the spaces from A to each 
of the points on R 1', and draw arcs to intersect the 
lines of like number drawn from points 1, 2, 3, 4, 
etc. The intersection of these arcs with the lines 
of corresponding number gives the points on the 
pattern. A line drawn through the points thus ob- 
tained gives the lower side of the pattern or the 
part which rests on the roof. With a radius A R 
describe the arc from R, which gives the upper part 
or opening in the top of the pattern. 

A 

4 



If the pitch of the roof were the line D E, the 
process of developing the pattern would be the same. 
The horizontal lines in this case would be drawn 
from the points on the line D E instead of from 
those on the line P T. 

The half pattern is indicated from the line A-i 
to the line A- 13. 



ROOF PLATE AND CONICAL 
BASE ON A DOUBLE 
PITCHED ROOF 

Solution 73 

The method of obtaining the patterns for a conical 
roof base on a double pitched roof, the conical 
base setting to one side of the center of the ridge 

or comb, is as follows: 



ONE HALF PATTERN 
FOR ROOF FLANGE 



END 
ELEVATION 




Referring to Fig. 292, 
we have a double pitched 
roof whose angle is in- 
dicated by C S D. 
Through the apex of the 
roof at S draw 
the vertical line 
S, a, as shown. 
Draw the ele- 
vation of the 
conical base 
i n i t s proper 
position as shown by 
E-F-7-1' being part of 
the frustum of a right 
cone, shown by E F 
7°-i. Extend the sides 
of the cone until they meet the 
center line at X. Below the eleva- 
tion draw the half plan, 1-4-7 
representing a half section on the 
line 1-7 in elevation. Space this 



HALF PLAN 

B 



/' 2' 3' 4' S 5' 

HALF-OPENING IN ROOF PLATE 



Fig. 292. — Patterns for Roof Plate and Base, Setting to One Side of Ridge on a Double Pitch Roof 



ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR BASES AND HOODS 



171 



semi-circle into an equal number of divisions, as 
shown by the small figures 1 to 7, from which fig- 
ures draw radial lines to the center H. From sim- 
ilar points 1 to 7 in the semi-circle erect vertical 
lines cutting the base line 1-7 in elevation, as shown 
by similar numbers 1 to 7 , from which radial lines 
are drawn to the apex X, crossing the double pitched 
roof from 1' to 7'. As none of these elements or 
radial lines just drawn pass through the apex S of 
the roof, then draw a line from the apex X of the 
cone through the apex S of the roof, extending it 
until it meets the base line of the cone at S' ; from 
this point a line is dropped vertically until it cuts 
the half plan of the base at S'". From S'" draw a 
radial line to the center H, meeting the ridge line a 
in plan at S", the point desired. 

To complete the half plan of the intersecting line 
between the cone and roof, project vertical lines 
from the intersections 1' to 7' on the roof line C S D, 
until they intersect similarly numbered radial lines 
in plan at 1, 2", 3", 4", 5", 6" and 7". Trace the 
miter line from I to S" to 7", as shown. This 
miter line is used only for obtaining the opening in 
the metal roof plate, as will be described. 

The one-half pattern for the roof base is now in 
order. Using X as center, with radius equal to 
X 7 , draw the arc J°-J. Take the girth of the 
semi-circle I to 7 in plan and place it as shown by 
similarly numbered divisions from 1 to 7 in the 
pattern. From these points draw radial lines to the 
apex X. Take the distance from 4 to S'" in the half 
plan and set it off from 4 to S in the pattern and 
draw a radial line from S to the apex X. From the 
intersections 1' to j' on the double pitched roof line 
C S D draw lines at right angles to the center line 
A B until they intersect the side of the cone F-7 , 
as shown from 1 to 7 including S'. Using X as center, 
with radii equal to the various divisions on F 7 , 
draw arcs which intersect similarly numbered radial 
lines in the pattern. Again using X as center, with 
X F as radius, describe the arc P O, intersecting the 
radial lines drawn from 1 and 7 in the pattern. Trace 
a line through points already obtained, as indicated 
by L M N. LMNOP gives the one half pattern 
for the roof base. 

The pattern for the roof plate is obtained as 
follows : 

Extend the line 1-7 in plan as 1 J, upon which 
place the girth of the intersection 1' to S to 7' on the 
double pitched roof C S D in elevation, as shown by 
similar numbers and letters on 1 J. At right angles 
to and from these points 1' to 7' on 1 J, draw lines ; 
intersect these lines by lines drawn parallel to 1 J 



from similarly numbered intersections 1 to S" to 7" 
in the miter line in plan. A line traced through 
points so obtained, as shown from 1' to S° to 7', will 
be the half opening to be cut in the roof plate to 
miter with the cut L M N in the half pattern for 
roof base. Add sufficient material around the roof 
plate opening, as indicated by b c d c J. Flanges 
should be allowed along the miter cut L M N of the 
roof base and along 1' S° 7' in the plate opening. 

TAPERING BASE AND ROOF 

FLANGE ON THE RIDGE AND 

HIPS OF A PITCHED ROOF 

Solution 74 

In Fig. 293 is given a finished view of a circulai 
ventilator with a tapering base, which is to set over 




Fig. 293.— Round Tapering Ventilator on Ridge and Hips 
of Pitched Roof 

the ridge and hips of a pitched roof. The pattern 
for the base A as well as for the roof flange B will 
be developed as shown in Fig. 294. In this figure 
A B C D gives the outline of the roof plan, A E and 
E B representing the hips and E 1 the ridge line. 
F i' H in elevation shows the pitch of the roof, 
while I K J 4' shows the elevation of the tapering 
base. In practice it is necessary to draw but one 
half of the plan and elevation here shown. The 
method, as illustrated, for obtaining the patterns is a 



172 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



short one, inasmuch as the side elevation is omitted. 
Extend the sides of the base until they meet in the 
apex L, through which the center line L E is drawn. 
Using E in plan as center, describe the large dotted 
circle representing a section on the line I 4' in eleva- 
tion, while the smaller circle in plan shows a section 
on the line K J in elevation. In this case, where the 
large circle crosses the hip line B E, number that in- 
tersection 6, as shown. Space the large circle in plan 
in an equal number of divisions, as shown by the 



HALF PATTERN 
FOR BASE 



FRONT 
ELEVATION 




PLAN 



Fig. 294. — Patterns for Tapering Base and Roof Flange on Ridge and Hips of Pitched Roof 



small figures, 1 to 8, from these points draw radial 
lines to E and from similar points, 1 to 8, erect ver- 
tical lines cutting the base line I 4' in elevation, also 
shown by the small figures 1 to 8. From these points 
lines are drawn to the apex L, cutting the roof line 
H 1' at 1' to 8', as shown. From these intersections, 
1' to 8', horizontal lines are, drawn to intersect the 
slant line of the base 4'-J at i x to 7 X . As that part of 
the base, shown in plan by 6-7-8, intersects the 
front pitch of the roof, it will be practicable to ob- 
tain the miter line in elevation if it be desired, by 
projecting horizontal lines from 8' and 7' on the 

roof line H 1'to intersect 
similarly numbered radial 
lines as shown, thus obtain- 
ing the miter line shown 
by 6'-7°-8, but this miter 
line is not essential to 
the pattern for the base. 
The half pattern for 
V7 the base may now be laid 
out. Using L as a center, 
with radii equal to L 4' 
and L J, draw the arcs 
4'-8 and J O, respectively, 
and on the arc 4'-8, set off 
the same number of di- 
visions as are contained in 
the large semi-circle in 
plan, shown from I to 8, 
all as shown by similar 
numbers 1 to 8 in the pat- 
tern, from which radial 
lines are drawn to the 
apex L. Then, using L as 
center with radii equal to 
the various intersections 
between i x and 8', draw 
arcs to intersect similarly 
numbered radial lines in 
the pattern, thus obtaining 
the intersections i v to 4 to 
6 V to 8, through which 
the miter cut is traced. N 
O 8 6 V 4 i v N will be the 
desired pattern, for which 
laps should be allowed 
for soldering and riveting. 
In using this method no 
side elevation is necessary ; 
but care must be taken 
to follow the numbers 
closely, since the numbers 



ROOF FLANGES, COLLARS, VENTILATOR BASES AND HOODS 



l 7$ 



i and 8, 2 and 7, also 3 and 5 are on one line in 
plan. 

ROOF FLANGE FITTING AROUND 
A TAPERING BASE INTERSECT- 
ING THE RIDGE AND HIPS OF 
A PITCHED ROOF 

Solution 75 

To obtain the pattern for the roof flange on the 
front and sides of a pitched roof, indicated by B in 
the view of Fig. 293, the line of intersection be- 
tween the tapering base and roof must be found in 
plan, as shown in Fig. 294. From the various inter- 
sections 8, 7° and 6' in elevation, lines are projected 
vertically in the plan, cutting radial lines having cor- 
responding numbers, thus obtaining the intersection 
points 8, 7 and 6°, as shown; these points repre- 
sent the miter line of the base and one half of the 
front of roof in plan, as shown. Where the various 
radial lines in elevation, shown by 5, 4', 3, 2 and 1 
on the line I 4', cross the roof line H 1', vertical 
lines are projected into the plan, to intersect sim- 
ilarly numbered radial lines at 5 , 4, 3 , 2° and i° ; 
the point 1 ° being obtained by taking the horizontal 
distance from 1' to i x in elevation, and setting it 
off on the ridge line in plan from E to 1°. A line 
traced from 6° to 4 to 1° in plan gives the miter 
line between the base and side of roof. 

The pattern for the flange may now be * 
laid out as follows : Extend the line E 4 
in plan as P R and upon this place the 
girth of the spaces contained on 
the roof line 1' H in elevation, as shown 
by similar numbers on P R. At right 
angles to P R and through these small 
figures, draw lines and intersect them by 
lines drawn parallel to P R from sim- 
ilarly numbered intersections in the miter line from 
8 to 6°to 4 to i°. Trace a line through points so ob- 
tained, as shown from S to 4' to T. Set the dividers 
apart a distance equal to the width of the flange re- 
quired and draw a line parallel to S 4' T, as shown 
by V U W. S 4' U V then gives the pattern for one 
half the flange on the front of the roof, and S 4' T 
W U V the pattern for the flange for the sides of 
the roof. Allow laps for soldering and riveting. 

HOOD OVER VENTILATOR 

Solution 76 

Fig. 295 presents a view of a ventilator hood. The 
method of development of the patterns is alike in 
the case of both square and rectangular work. Re- 



ferring to Fig. 296, first draw the section of the 
hood, as indicated by A, and in line therewith to the 
right draw the plan view, as shown by B C D E. In 
this case the full plan has been drawn ; this however, 
is not necessary in practical work, all that is re- 
quired being the one miter end, making the hood as 




295. — View of Ventilator Hood 



long as desired by reversing the miter cut to the 
opposite end. From each of the four corners in 
plan draw lines at angles of 45 degrees, intersecting 
at F and G, as shown. Connect the ridge line F G. 
At right angles to E D draw the girth line a b ; on 
this place twice the girth of the half section A, as 
shown from 1 to 4 to 1 on a b. Should the full girth 
of the hood A take up more material than the stock 
sizes of the sheets will allow, only the girth from 
1 to 4 is employed. At right angles to a b and 
B C 





Fig. 296.- 



-Patterns for Diamond Panel and Ventilating 
Hood 



174 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



through the small figures i to 4 to i, draw lines and 
intersect these by lines drawn from similar points 
on the miter lines E F and G D in plan and parallel 
to a b. Trace a line through these points ; the result- 
ing E D L K J H E will be the full pattern. 

For the pattern of the miter heads at the ends, 



take the distance from c' to E in the pattern and 
place it, as shown, from c' to E°, completing the cut 
E° H alike to E H. This miter head can be thus ob- 
tained, since c' E in the pattern is similar to c E in 
plan, which latter is one half of B E. Allow laps for 
riveting or soldering. 



PART IX 

PATTERNS FOR COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, 

FINIALS AND SPIRES 



MOLDED HEAD BLOCK, INTER- 
SECTING PEDIMENT COPING. 

Solution 77. 
TT , IG. 297 is a view of a molded head block inter- 
■*■ secting a pediment coping and mold, as along a b 
c. These copings are usually made of sheet copper 
and give dependable service. They do not leak at the 
joints as does stone. The method of laying out these 




Fig. 297. — View of Molded Head Block Intersecting Pedi- 
ment Coping 

patterns is shown in Fig. 298, where A represents 
the end view of the head block (only one half of 
which is it in practice necessary to draw), and 9 - 
8-B the bevel of the pediment. At right angles to 
the pediment pitch 8-B, draw a section through the 
coping, as indicated by D, taking care that the width 
from 6" to 6" is equal to 6-6' in the end view, and 
that the profiles 6" and 6" in the side view are sim- 
ilar to the profile shown in the end view. Draw the 
bevel of the coping between 6" and 6" in the section 
as shown. Bisect the angle of the pediment 9°-8- 
B as follows : Using a as center with any radius, de- 
scribe the arcs cutting the angle lines at b and c. 
Using b and c as centers with any desired radius, 
intersect arcs at d. Draw the miter line d 5'. Divide 
the mold from 5 to 1 1 in the end view into an equal 



number of spaces and from these points project 
horizontal lines to the right until they cut the miter 
line d 5', as shown. Divide the bead in the head 
block in the end view into an equal number of divi- 
sions, as shown in the right half from 1 to 4. Take 
a tracing of this upper bead and place it in central 
position over the coping in the section D, as shown 
by similar numbers from 1 to 4 ; from these points 
lines are projected at right angles to the lines of the 
coping until they cut the beveled coping also from 
1 to 4. From these divisions and parallel to the lines 
of the coping, lines are drawn and intersected by 
lines drawn parallel to the lines of the head block, 
from similar intersections 1 to 4 in the end view, 
thus resulting in the miter line shown between 1' 
and 5'. Finding this miter line is the principal and 
most difficult part of the operation; after this is 
achieved the patterns are in order. 

To obtain the one half pattern for mold and roof 
over head block, draw any line at right angles to 
X 1' in the side view, as shown by O N, and on this 
place the girth of the half top and mold shown in 
the end view from 1 to 11, as shown by similar num- 
bers on N O. Through these small figures and at 
right angles to N O draw lines ; intersect these lines 
by lines drawn parallel to N O from similarly num- 
bered intersections in the miter lines, between 1'- 
5'-n and 5 T -9° in the side view. A line traced 
through points thus obtained as shown by T, S, U, R 
and P, 6, 1 will be the desired pattern. 

To obtain the pattern cut for one half the coping 
and mold for the pediment, draw any line, as G H, 
at right angles to F E. Take the girth of the pedi- 
ment mold in the end view from 1 1 to 5 and place 
it on the line G H, shown from 11 to 5 ; to this add 
the girth of the intersections obtained on the coping 
from 5 a to 1 in the section, as shown from 5 to 1 on 
G H. Through these small figures and at right 
angles to G H, draw lines and intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to G H from similarly numbered in- 
tersections in the miter line in the side view, all as 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 



175 



ONE HALF PATTERN 

FOR MOLD AND ROOF 

OVER HEAD BLOCK 




PARTIAL 
SIDE VIEW 



END VIEW 



Fig. 298. — Pattern for Molded Head Block Intersecting Pediment Coping 



176 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



indicated by the dotted lines. Trace a line through 
points thus obtained ;JKL M will be the desired 
miter cut. Laps should be allowed for seaming the 
apex of the coping and riveting the miters. 

Securing Metal Coping to Brick Wall. 

Fig. 299 demonstrates how metal copings are best 
secured to a brick or other kind of wall. The use of 
18 oz. cold rolled copper is recommended for the 




r~ — r 

ELEVATION 



Fig. 299. — Constructive Details of Securing Metal Coping 

to Wall 

coping and head, as far superior to stone, since the 
mortar is subject to cracking, softening and washing 
out from the joints of a stone coping while the latter 
permits ice to form therein occasionally 
forcing the stone out of position, while any 
unevenness in the surface of the wall be- 
comes visible because of the depth of the 
mortar under the stone coping required 
to provide a level surface when it is set. 
A metal coping obviates these disad- 
vantages, since the wall is protected against 
snow, rain, or ice leakage by means of the 
drip at the bottom of the molding, which 
also conceals uneven wall lines. The sec- 
tion at the left of the illustration shows the 
wall in which the bolt A is built in and is 
used in securing the wooden plate B. After 
this plate is bolted in position, wooden 
brackets are cut, as indicated by C, spaced 
about 3 ft. apart and sheathed on the top, 
as shown. An elevation of this wood 
framing is indicated by the broken view 
A B C C in the elevation. In fitting the 
coping over the frame work, the former 
is made in two parts with a drip, as shown, 
and a locked joint along the apex of the 
coping. The drip should be so bent that it 
will spring tight against the wall when it is Fig 



set in place and the lock bent towards the rear so 
that it cannot be seen from the front. This lock 
should be bent in the brake as indicated by o and b 
in the upper diagram to the left, so that when the 
two halves are set on the wall, and over the coping, 
it can be turned over, as shown by c in the lower 
left diagram; after those operations it is double 
locked as shown by d in the right diagram. 



RIDGE CAPPING REQUIRING RE- 
TURN HEAD AND BUTT MITER 

Solution 78 

Fig. 300 illustrates a ridge capping, placed on the 
wing of a hipped roof, requiring a square return 
miter, at A B, and butt miter against the main roof, 
at C. The method of laying out miters of this nature, 
regardless of the pitch of the roof, is found in Fig. 
301. 

First, draw the section through the ridge roll, as 
indicated by A, and space one-half of its profile 
into an equal number of divisions, as shown by the 
small figures, 1 to 9. Draw the pitch of the main 




300. — View of Ridge Capping Having Return Head and Butt Miter 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 



177 



roof B C and draw a partial side elevation of the 
wing, as shown, the pitch D in this case being sim- 
ilar to the pitch in the section A. Take a reproduc- 
tion of the half profile 1 to 9 in section and place it, 
as shown from 1' to 9' in the side elevation, the line 
g-a and 9' a' in either view being placed vertically 
on the line drawn through the apex X and X 1 re- 
spectively- Through these small figures 1 to 9 in the 
section draw lines horizontally to the left cutting 
the main roof B C from 1 to 9. 

For the pattern for both miters, take the girth of 
the half section in A and place twice this girth on the 
line E F drawn at right angles to 9-9' in the side 



THE PATTERN SHAPES 




elevation, as shown by the small figures 1 to 9 to 1 
on E F. Through these small figures and at right 
angles to E F draw lines and intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to E F from similar points of inter- 
section on the roof line B C and the profile 1' to 9'. 
A line traced through points thus obtained, as shown 
by H J K, will give the butt miter cut, while L 9 b 
will give the square return miter cut. 

If a vertical line is drawn from point 9 in the 
pattern until it cuts the edge line of the pattern at 
a", and, measuring from this line a" 9, the various 
projections are taken to the various points along 
the miter cut 9 b and placed opposite the line 9 a", 
as shown from 9 to a, then gab 
will be the pattern for the return 
head, shown in the sectional view. 
This method avoids the making of 
a separate pattern, since the miter 
cut 9 b is similar for both the front 
and side patterns. Edges should 
be allowed along the pattern g-a b 
for soldering purposes. 



INTERSECTION BE- 
TWEEN HIP RIDGE 
AND RIDGE CAPPING 

Solution 79 

Fig. 302 presents a view of two 
hip ridges mitering with a ridge 
capping, at a and b. In laying out 
these patterns it is necessary to ob- 
tain only short miter cuts about 6 
in. long, when the desired length 
can be laid out directly on the metal 



SECTION THROUGH 
RIDGE ROLL 



SIDE ELEVATION OF WING 
Fig. 301.— Patterns for Ridge Capping Requiring Butt Miter and Square Return Head 



i 7 8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



sheets. The first step is to obtain the correct pitch 
of the roof, either from the architect's drawing, or 
by the use of a bevel and spirit level directly from 
the building. In using the bevel one arm is laid di- 
rectly on the roof rafters as shown by A, while the 
other arm, B, is raised until the small spirit level 
shows true, as at C. The distance between the inner 
edges of the arms is now measured, as indicated by 
the arrows. Assuming that it measures 8 in., the 
bevel is closed, until the patterns are to be developed, 
when it is opened again to the 8 in. distance be- 
tween the inner corners and placed on the drawing 
board, so that the upper arm will be horizontal, as 
shown by the dotted bevel in Fig. 303. The line 
through the lower arm of the bevel is now extended 
to any distance desired, say 18 in., as shown from 
1 to 2 ; from these points the horizontal lines 1 A 
and 2 B are drawn, thus representing a partial side 
elevation. Below the elevation draw the plan of the 
corner, as indicated by C D 2' E F 1', and draw the 
hip line in plan i'-2'. As the bevel of the end of the 
roof 1-2 is similar in this case to the two sides, 1 N 
is then drawn at a corresponding bevel to 1-2. N 1 2 
becomes a partial front elevation, whose purpose we 
will explain in due course. Preparatory to develop- 
ing the patterns a true face of the roof is to be 
drawn ; this will show the true angles of A I 2 and 
N 1 2 in the elevation. 




Fig. 302. — View of Hip Ridge Mitering With Ridge Capping 

Extend the line C 1 to any length as C 1" ; and on 
this line set off the distance 1-2 in elevation, as in- 
dicated by 1" 2" in the true face. Through these 
two points draw horizontal lines and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to C 1" from similar num- 
bers in elevation. J 1" G H shows the true face de- 
sired and J 1" G the true angle of A 1 2 in elevation. 
The angle J 1" G in the true face is now bisected by 



means of the arcs d e and /; the miter line 1" / 
drawn, as shown, forms the joint line between the 
hip and ridge in the side elevation. As N 1 2 in the 
side elevation forms a partial front elevation and as 
the angle or pitch 1-2 in the elevation is alike on 
the three sides, the joint line between the two hip 
molds shown by b in Fig. 302, is determined by the 
perpendicular line 1" i in the true face in Fig. 303. 

The pattern for the ridge capping is laid out as 
follows: Place the half profile of the ridging, what- 
ever may be its shape, in the position shown by X 
to the left of the true face; space the half profile 
into equal divisions, as shown from 1 to 5. Through 
these small figures and parallel to J 1" draw lines to 
the right until they intersect the miter line 1" /, as 
shown; from these points and parallel to 1" G lines 
are drawn until they cut the miter line 1" i and the 
base line G H. At right angles to J 1" draw the line 
J K ; on this place double the girth of X, as shown 
from 5 to 1 to 5 on J K. At right angles to J K 
draw the usual measuring lines, and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to J K from similar inter- 
sections on / 1" in the true face. A line traced 
through points thus obtained, as shown by L a M, 
will be the desired miter cut for the cap ridging. 

The pattern for the hip ridge, is obtained by plac- 
ing twice the girth of the half profile X upon the 
line O P drawn at right angles to 1" G in the true 
face, as shown by the small figures 5 to 1 to 5. At 
right angles to O P draw the usual measuring lines, 
intersecting them by lines drawn parallel to O P 
from similar intersections on G H, i"-i and i"-f. 
Trace a line through points thus obtained ; Y c X° 
will be the miter cut at the bottom, V b the miter cut 
joining the ridge capping at a in Fig. 302 and b W 
in Fig. 303 the miter cut where the two hips join, as 
at b in Fig. 302. 

Should a pattern for the lower head in Fig. 303 
be desired to close the opening of the hip ridge along 
G 5 in the true face, this may be laid out by drawing 
lines at right angles to H G in the true face from 
points 1 to 5, as shown ; then, measuring from the 
finished roof line, extended in profile X, take the 
various horizontal projections to points I to 5 and 
place them on similarly numbered lines, measuring 
in each case from the line H G in the true face. A 
line traced through points thus obtained, as indicated 
by X 2 , will be the desired pattern. 

All that portion from 1 to 5 in the ridge and hip 
patterns will be formed after the stay shown by X, 
bending the hip pieces right and left. But prepara- 
tory to making the bend along the line b c in 
the pattern for hip ridge, the true angle is 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 

K 

PATTERN FOR 
RIDGE CAP ' 



179 



PATTERN FOR 
HIP RIDGE 




PLAN 
F'g- 303- — Patterns for Intersection Between Hip Ridge and Ridge Capping 



i8o 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



first to be found, in the following manner : At any 
desired distance between and on the hip line i' 2' 
in plan draw at right angles to 1' 2' any line, R-S, 
cutting the right angle D 2' E at R and S. Con- 
struct an oblique view on the line 1' 2' in 
plan by drawing the line i° 2° equal to and par- 
allel to r'-2' in plan. From 1° erect the perpendicu- 
lar line i° i x equal to n 1 in the side elevation and 
draw a line from i x to 2°, the oblique view desired. 
Extend S R in plan until it cuts the base in the 
oblique view 1° 2° at T and from T and at right 
angles to i x 2° draw a line cutting the slant line at 
U. Take the distance T U and set it off in plan 
from the line R S, as shown from T° to U°, and 
draw the lines R U° S , the true section on the hip 
line, also the true stay; after this stay, the bend on 
the line b c in the pattern is formed. Should 
the angle of the roof in plan be other than a right 
angle, the same methods are employed, care being 
taken, however, that the miter line i'-2' in plan 
always constitutes the bisection of the angle of the 
desired outline. 



HIP RIDGE INTERSECTING A VER- 
TICAL PLANE AT A RIGHT ANGLE 

Solution 80 

A hip ridge butting against a vertical surface, as 
against the base of a square ventilator or cupola is 



BASE OF 
VENT 




Fig. 304. — View of Hip Ridge Intersecting the Base of a 
Square Ventilator or Other Object 

shown in Fig. 304. The development of the pattern 
is shown in detail in Fig. 305. Here A B C D indi- 
cates the elevation of part of the roof and E F G 



H J K the plan of one corner or hip. As explained 
in the solution just preceding, the length of B C in 
elevation need not be any greater than required to 
get the miter cut, say about 18 in., the full size meas- 
urements being laid out on the 8 ft. sheets. 

The first step is to find the oblique view on the 
line J F in plan, as follows : Draw J 1 F 1 equal to 
and parallel to J F in plan, as shown, and from J 1 
erect the perpendicular J 1 b equal to a B in elevation. 
Draw a line from b to F 1 in the oblique view; this 
shows the true length of the hip on J F in plan. From 
any point on the line J F as e' draw a line at right 
angles to J F cutting the right angle E F G at c and 
d. Extend c d until it cuts the base line in the 
oblique view at e ; from this point and at right angles 
to b F 1 draw a line cutting the line b F 1 at /. Take 
the distance from c to f and place it from c' to /' 
in plan ; draw lines from d to /' to c, which give the 
true angle through the hip, at right angles to the 
hip line b F 1 in the oblique view. On this true angle 
in plan, place the profile of the hip ridge, as indi- 
cated by X, one half of which space into equal 
divisions, as shown by the small figures 1 to 5. 
Through these divisions draw lines parallel to J F 
cutting the line J K at the top and E F at the bot- 
tom. Through the apex /' in the true angle in plan 
draw a line parallel to c d, as shown by h i. Take 
a tracing of the profile X with the various divisions 
thereon, and place it in the oblique view, placing the 
apex /' in X directly on the line b F 1 in the oblique 
view, so that the line h i in plan will rest on the line 
b F 1 in the oblique view. Through the small figures 
1 to 5 in f° draw lines parallel to b F l and intersect 
them by lines drawn at right angles to J F in plan 
from the various intersections 1 to 5 on J K and 
F E, thus obtaining the miter lines Y and F 1 respec- 
tively in the oblique view. 

The pattern for the hip ridge may now be laid out. 
Take the full girth of the profile f° and place it on 
the line L M, drawn at right angles to b F 1 . At 
right angles to L M and through the small figures 
1 to 5 to 1 draw lines and intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to L M from similar points of inter- 
section in the miter line Y at the top and F 1 at the 
bottom. Trace a line through points thus obtained ; 
N O P R S T will be the desired miter cut. 

For the pattern for the corner head used to close 
up the opening at the bottom of the ridge extend the 
line J 1 F 1 as F 1 U ; on this place twice the number 
of divisions contained on the line E F in plan be- 
tween 2 and 5, as shown from 2 to 5 to 2 on F 1 U. 
Through these small figures and at right angles to 
F 1 U erect lines and intersect them by lines drawn 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 



181 




IS2 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



parallel to F 1 U from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions in the miter line F 1 in the oblique view, i V 
5° W I shows the full corner head pattern. 

A square bend is made along the line 5-5 ° in 
the corner pattern, while the ridge pattern will be 
formed after the profile X in plan or f° in the 
oblique view. 



RIDGE AND HIP FINIAL WHEN 
ALL ROOF PITCHES ARE EQUAL 

Solution 81 

Fig. 306 presents a view of a ridge and hip finial, 
when the end roof, A, and side roofs, B, are of 




Fig. 306. — View of Ridge and Hip Finial 

equal pitch. The method of procedure in laying out 
finials of this formation is shown in detail in Fig. 
307- 

First draw the front elevation, ABC, giving the 
pitches of the sides of the roof, from which the 
side elevation, D E F G is projected and giving the 
pitch of the front roof as shown by D E. Draw the 
desired side elevation of the finial to whatever in- 
tended shape it should have, taking pains to have a 
symmetrical curve sloping down the incline of the 
roof E D. In line with the side, draw the front ele- 
vation of the finial, again having the curves slope 
symmetrically to the line of the pitch of the roof 
B C. While the full front elevation is shown, it is 
necessary to draw only one half, as the halves are 
symmetrical. 

Having drawn the elevations in their correct rela- 
tive positions the patterns may be developed. Be- 
ginning at 1 in the side elevation, divide the entire 
outline up to 16, as shown by the small figures 1 to 
16 ; through these points draw horizontal lines to the 



left, cutting the outline in the front elevation as well 
as the center line M N, as shown by the small fig- 
ures 1 to 16. As all that portion of the finial be- 
tween 5 and 16 in the side elevation stands vertical, 
as shown by the vertical line 16-10 in the front 
elevation, it will not be necessary to project the 
points 5 to 16 from the side elevation to the front. 
Take the girth of the front and top of the finial, 
shown from 1 to 16 in the side elevation, and place 
it, as shown, on the line M N by similar numbers. 
Through these small figures and at right angles to 
M N draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn 
from similar numbers in the front elevation par- 
allel to M N. Trace a line through points thus ob- 
tained, as shown from V to R, and transfer this cut 
opposite the center line N M, as shown by W P. 
Take a tracing of 5 X , 5, a. a", B, a* 5* in the front 
elevation, which represents a true section on line 
16-a in the side elevation, and place it in a re- 
versed position, as shown by W V S O W. Then 
will P R S O represent the full pattern for front, 
top and back combined. 

For the pattern for the sides project lines to the 
right from points 1, 2 and 3 in the side elevation, 
cutting the outline I'-a at 2' and 3'. Establish an 
extra space between 3' and a and call it a. Project 
a' horizontally to the left, cutting the outline in 
the front elevation at a and the roof line at a", ex- 
tending the line to the center line M N, as shown. 
Take the girth of 1, 2. 3, a, 4, 5 in the front eleva- 
tion and place it on the vertical line drawn above the 
side elevation as H J, as shown by similar numbers. 
Through these small figures, draw lines at right 
angles to J H, and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to H J from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions in the side elevation. As the side elevation be- 
tween 5 and 16 lies in a vertical plane, indicated by 
16-10 in the front elevation, take a tracing of 5, 6, 
8, 10, 13, 16 in the side elevation and place it as 
shown by L, 8", 10", 13", 5, in the side pattern, care- 
fully placing the line 5-16 in the side elevation on 
the line L, 5, in the pattern. K, L, 10", 5, a K, is the 
desired pattern. 

If a scroll is desired at Y this can be added and 
then raised by means of a strip soldered to the 
proper projection, or a rosset can be put into posi- 
tion as shown in the side elevation. 

Another pattern will be required for the return 
strip against the main roof from a to 1' in the side 
elevation. Take the girth of 1', 2', 3', a' a in the side 
elevation and place it on any line, as T U, as shown 
by similar numbers. Through these small figures 
and at right angles to T U draw lines to any length 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 



180 



as shown. Measuring from the line M N in the 
front elevation take the various projections to 
points a", 3", 2" and 1, also from the center line M N 




Back 



w 



PATTERN FOR 
FRONT-TOP 
AND BACK 
COMBINED 



PATTERN FOR 

RETURN STRIP 

AGAINST PITCHED 

ROOF 



to points a, 3 and 2, and place them on similarly- 
numbered lines, measuring in every instance from 
the line T U, thus obtaining similar points a", a", 3", 
2" and 1, also a, a, 3 and 2. When a line is traced 
through these points a" a 1 will be the pattern for 
the return strip against the pitched roof, shown in 
the side elevation by a I'. 



PATTERN FOR HIP AND RIDGE 

FINIAL, WHEN THE ROOF 

PITCHES ARE UNEQUAL 

Solution 82 

In Fig. 308 is shown a type of hip and ridge finial, 
which sets on a roof whose pitches on the sides as at 
A are unlike that on the front B. We will develop 

SIDE PATTERN 




FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION 

F'g- 307. — Patterns for a Ridge and Hip Finial, when all Roof Pitches are Equal 



1 84 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



only the patterns for that part shown to the arrow- 
point. The portion above the arrow, C, consists 
simply of square return miters and above C is the 
sphere D. 

Fig. 309 shows how the four patterns are laid out. 
First, draw the front elevation giving the pitch of 
the side roofs, which, in this case, is 60 degrees, as 




Fig. 308. — Another Type of Hip and Ridge Finial, in which 
the Roofs Have Unequal Pitches 

shown by B A C. From this front view, draw the 
side elevation G D E F, indicating the pitch of the 
front roof, which is 45 degrees, as shown by G D. 
In drawing the two elevations of the roof, care must 
be taken that the ridge line E D corresponds to the 
similar ridge line A in the front elevation, as shown 
by the dotted construction line. In making the de- 
tails in practice, only a half elevation of the front 
is necessary. Draw the front and side elevations of 
the finial in their proper positions as shown, draw- 
ing well rounded curves in both views to follow the 
pitches of the roofs, so that no breaks will show. 
Set off the curve in the side elevation into an equal 
number of divisions, as shown by the small figures 
1 to 7, and continue to 8 and 9 where the flat area 
lies parallel to the roof. Through these small fig- 
ures 1 to 9, draw lines to any length cutting the 
right outline in the side elevation from 1' to 5" and 
the right outline in the front elevation from i a to 9 a . 
The method followed here is to use but one set of 
lines, taken from the equal divisions in one profile, 
thus making the divisions in all other profiles un- 
equal. This method obviates a confusion of lines 
which would occur if each profile were spaced 
equally and separately. 

To obtain the pattern for the front piece take the 
girth of the profile 1 to 9 in the side elevation and 
place it on the center line A P extended in the front 
elevation, as shown by similar numbers 1 to 9 on 
P R. At right angles to P R and through these 



small divisions draw lines and intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to R P from similarly numbered in- 
tersections in the front elevation. Trace a line 
through these points, as shown by U V, and trace 
this miter cut opposite the center line P R as shown 
by S T. U V S T gives the desired pattern. 

For the pattern for the back, shown from 1/ to 5" 
in the side elevation, take this girth (including the 
extra point a which has been introduced between 
4' and 5', because of the width of this space) and 
place it on the center line P R above the front eleva- 
tion, as shown by similar numbers 1' to 5". Through 
these small figures draw the usual measuring lines 
and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to P R 
from similarly numbered points in the front eleva- 
tion. Trace a line through points thus obtained, as 
shown by X Z, and trace this miter cut opposite the 
line P R, as shown by W Y. W X Z Y gives the 
pattern for the back. 

The pattern for the flat head along the line 5" gr 
in the side elevation can be pricked direct from the 
front elevation as shown by 9 a , 8, 5, 5 a , 8 a , 9 b , A, 9 a ; 
or it can be made in two pieces with a seam along 
the center at A. 

The pattern for the sides is now in order. Take 
the girth of the various unequal spaces between 
i a and 9 a in the front elevation and place it on the 
vertical line H J, located above the side elevation as 
shown by similar numbers. Through these small fig- 
ures and at right angles to H J draw lines and in- 
tersect them by lines drawn parallel to H J from 
similarly numbered intersections in the side eleva- 
tion. Trace a line through points thus obtained ; 
K L M N O is the pattern for the sides. Laps 
should be allowed on the sides, excepting along M 
N, but none are required on the front or back. Laps 
are also allowed on the flat head. 



ROOF PATTERNS FOR SPIRE AND 

GABLES, WHEN A SQUARE 

SPIRE INTERSECTS FOUR 

GABLES 

Solution 83 

In Fig. 310 is given a finished view of a square 
spire intersecting four gables in a turret. The sub- 
ject of this solution is that of obtaining the pattern 
for the spire A and for the gable roof B. For de- 
tailed procedure see Fig. 311. 

First, draw the center line A B, on either side of 
which draw the elevation of the spire and gables. The 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 

R 

I/' 



I3 5 



PA TTERN 
FOR BACK 



PATTERN 
FOR FRONT 




FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION 

Fig. 309. — Patterns of Hip and Ridge Finial for Roofs of Differing Pitches 



[86 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



SQUARE 



continuation of the mold 4 

in the gable is omitted as 

this pattern has been treated 

in a preceding solution. 

After the elevation of the 

front gable 4', 2', 4 has 

been drawn, establish the 

lowest point of the spire, 

as 3, and then draw the 

pitch of the spire, as 3 to 1. 

In practice it is necessary 

to draw only a one-half 

elevation. From the point 

3 draw a line at right 

angles to A B cutting this 

line at e. 

The patterns are now in 

' order and that for the 

spire is considered first. 

Fig. 310.— View of Square Draw any line, as A B°, 
Spire on Four Gables . ... 

and on it place the pitch 

1, 2, 3 in elevation, as shown by 1, 2 and 3 on the 

line A° B°. Through points 1 and 3 draw lines at 

right angles to A° B°, as shown. Measuring from 





PATTERN FOR 
ONE SIDE 

OF 
GABLE ROOF 



PATTERN FOR ONE 
SIDE OF SPIRE 



ELEVATION 

Fig. 311. — Patterns for Spire and Gable Roofs in a Square 
Spire Intersecting Four Gables 



the line A B in elevation take the various distances 
to points 1 and 3 and place them on similar lines on 
either side of the line A° B° in the pattern, thus ob- 
taining the points a a and b b, respectively. Connect 
lines on both sides from a to b to 2, thus obtaining 
the net pattern for one side of the spire. Laps should 
be allowed for riveting, as shown by the dotted lines. 
For the pattern for one side of the gable roof 
extend the line 4 C in elevation, as shown by C D ; 
on this place the girth of 2'-3~4 in the front 
gable, as shown by similar numbers on C D. 
Through these small figures and at right angles to 
C D, draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to C D from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions 2, 3 and 4 in the front elevation. Trace a line 
through points thus obtained. 4, c d 2' represents the 
desired pattern. Laps are to be allowed wherever 
required. 



SPIRE AND GABLE ROOFS, WHEN 

AN OCTAGONAL SPIRE MITERS 

ON FOUR GABLES 

Solution 84 

In the case of an octagonal spire intersecting four 
gables, as shown in Fig. 312, the method of obtain- 
ing the pattern for the 
spire roof piece, A, as well 
as for the gable roof piece, 
B, corresponds to that 
explained in the preced- 
ing solution, but pre- 
sents a more complicated 
problem in projections. 
This example is fully set 
forth in Fig. 313 where a 
full elevation is drawn, al- 
though only a half eleva- 
tion is actually necessary. 
As in the preceding solu- 
tion first draw the center 
line A B, construct the 
front elevation of the gable, 
as shown by D 2' D°, 
and below the elevation 
draw the square plan, rep- 
senting a section on the line 
D, D°. Draw the two 
diagonal lines in plan, representing the valley lines 
between the gables, less the spire, and through the 
center B 1 draw the horizontal and vertical lines rep- 




Octagon 



-Square 



Fig. 3i2.— View of Octag- 
onal Spire on Four Gables 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 



187 



resenting the ridge lines of the gables, less the spire. 
Establish the extreme width of the spire at its base 
as a in the elevation, which is usually placed ver- 
tically over the shaft line X. Project this point to 
the plan and obtain a'. Then using B 1 as a center, 



PATTERN FOR 
ONE SIDE OF 
CABLE ROOF 

F 

I 

.1 
2 





ffs' 

Y* 
1 

B' 

PATTERNS FOR 

ONE SIDE OF 

OCTAGONAL SHAFT 

OVER GABLE, 

AND ANOTHER SIDE 

INTERSECTING VALLEY 



PLAN 

Fig- 313.— 'Patterns for Spire and Gable Roofs in an 
Octagonal Spire Intersecting Four Gables 

construct the quarter plan a' c' c" V of the octagonal 
spire on the line a b in elevation. This quarter plan 
between C 1 and B 1 serves all requirements in prac- 
tice, the full plan here shown being employed for 
clearness of treatment. Establish the apex of the 
spire at A and draw a line from a to A, cutting the 
horizontal top at 1. It now becomes necessary to 
ascertain where the octagonal side c' c" in plan will 
intersect the valley line in elevation between the two 
gables. This point of intersection is found by taking 
the distance B 1 C 1 in plan and setting it off from B 
on the center line in elevation, indicated from B to 



C, and from C drawing a line to the apex 2', cutting 
the spire line 1 a at 4 ; from there a line is drawn 
parallel to C B cutting the valley line in elevation at 
4.', the desired point. From c" in plan erect a vertical 
line, cutting the base line of the octagonal shaft at 
c in elevation ; from this point a line is drawn to the 
apex A cutting the gable at 3' and horizontal top at 
X. From 3' parallel to B C draw a line cutting the 
spire line a I at 3 and draw the miter line 3-4'. 
2', 3', 4', 3, 2 represents the line of intersection be- 
tween the octagonal shaft and gables in the half 
elevation, which is reproduced on the opposite side. 

The patterns can now be laid out. Take the girth 
of 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the spire and place it on any ver- 
tical line A 1 B 1 , as shown by similar numbers. 
Through the figure 3 draw a line at right angles to 
A 1 B 1 , as shown. Take the horizontal distance from 
3 V to 3' in the elevation and place it on line 3 on 
either side of the line A 1 B 1 in the pattern, thus ob- 
taining points 3' and 3'. From these two points 3' 
draw lines to 2. Make the distances from the center 
line A 1 B 1 to points 1 and 1 equal to the distance of 
measurement taken -from the center line A B in ele- 
vation to the intersection X. Connect lines in the 
pattern. i-3'-2-3'-i will be the pattern for the 
four sides of the spire intersecting the gables. 

For the pattern for the four sides of the shaft 
cutting into the valley simply draw lines in the pat- 
tern, shown dotted from 3' to 4 to 3'. i-3'-4-3' 1 is 
the desired pattern. 

For the pattern for one side of the gable roof, 
extend the line D E in elevation as D F and on this 
place the girth of the one side of the gable, shown in 
the front elevation by 2'-3'-4'-D, as shown by 
similar points on F E. Through these points and at 
right angles to F E draw lines and intersect them by 
lines drawn parallel to E F from similar intersec- 
tions 2, 3, 4' and D in the elevation. Connect lines, 
as shown in the pattern; 2' D° S is the desired 
pattern. 



SPIRE AND GABLE ROOFS WHEN 

AN OCTAGONAL SPIRE MITERS 

ON EIGHT GABLES 

Solution 85 

Fig. 314 gives a completed view of an octagonal 
spire mitering on eight gables. The problem for 
solution is the development of the roof pieces, A and 
B, shown in Fig. 315. In this example operations in 
projections are required before the patterns can be 



1 88 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




OCTAGON 



Fig. 314. — View of Octag- 
onal Spire on Eight Gables 



developed, and it is to these 
operations that special at- 
tention must be given. As 
mentioned in the preced- 
ing problem, in practical 
work, it is necessary to 
draw only a half elevation 
and a quarter plan, while 
here a full elevation and 
plan is given to make each 
operation clear. First draw 
the center line A B, and, 
using C upon it as a center, 
describe an octagon D E F 
G H J K L representing 
octagon a horizontal section on the 
line M N in elevation. 
From these various corners 
in plan draw lines to the 



F 
2 

FULL PATTERN 

FOR 

GABLE ROOF 




Fig. 



B 

PLAN 

315. — Patterns for Spire and Gable Roofs 
Octagonal Spire Mitering on Eight Gables 



center C. From the corners E and F in plan extend 
vertical lines to the elevation, cutting the base line 
M N at E° and F°. Establish the night of the gable 
on the center line as i and draw the front elevation 
of the gable for one of the octagonal sides shown by 
E° i F°. Bisect D E in plan this obtaining a ; project 
this point a vertically, cutting the horizontal line 
drawn through the apex i of the gable at a'. Draw 
lines from a' to M and E°, thus getting a foreshort- 
ened view of the gable on the line D E in plan. Draw 
a line from M to i in elevation ; this represents a ver- 
tical section of the valley line D 2' extended in plan 
as D C, when viewed parallel to D L. Establish the 
width at the base of the spire where it intersects the 
valley line at 2, and from 2 and parallel to M N draw 
a line cutting the front gable at 2° and 2°. From the 
apex of the gable at i draw a line parallel to M N 
meeting at X a vertical line erected from M. Where 
the line X ;' intersects the spire line 1-2 at a' drop 
this point in plan, parallel to A B, cutting the line g 
C in plan at a". Take the distance from C to a" and 
set it off from C to a°, and from a" project a vertical 
line in the elevation cutting the line X i at a x . Con- 
nect the concealed line from 2 to o x and the exposed 
line from a x to 2°. This can be repeated on the right 
side of the elevation if desired. The full plan is 
shown, the lines drawn from a b c d e B / and g 
representing the ridge lines of the gables, while a° 
2' a" shows a partial intersection be- 
tween the spire and gable, which is fully 
completed in the plan. The projections 
1 and 3 in elevation are projected from 
the plan as shown by the dotted lines 
and a line is drawn from 3 to 2° to complete the ele- 
vation of the spire. 

To obtain the pattern for one side of the spire 
roof take the girth of 1 a' 2 in the elevation and 
place it on the line P R, as shown by similar num- 
bers. Through 1 and 2 and at right angles to P R 
draw lines as shown. Measuring from the line A B 
in elevation take the distances to points 2° and 3 and 
place them on similar lines, measuring on either side 
of the line P R in the pattern. Connect lines from 
U to S to a' to T to V, thus obtaining the pattern for 
one side of the spire roof. 

The pattern for one of the gable roofs is obtained 
by taking the girth of E° 2° i 2° F° in the elevation 
and placing it on the line M X extended, as shown 
by similar divisions on X Y. Through these small 
figures and at right angles to X Y draw lines and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to X Y from 
similar points M, 2 and a' respectively, in eleva- 



PATTERN FOR 

ONE SIDE OF 

00T AGONAL SPIRE 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 



189 



ROUND 



SQUARE 



tion. Lines connected to points so obtained, as in- 
dicated by F° W E°, will give the desired pattern. 



CIRCULAR SPIRE MITERING ON 
FOUR GABLE ROOFS 

Solution 86 

Fig. 316 indicates at A, a round spire which in 
this demonstration is to miter on four gable roofs on 
a square turret or other 
object. The method of pro- 
cedure is outlined in detail 
in Fig. 317. First ; draw 
the plan of the gable out- 
lines, as shown by A B C D. 
Draw the two diagonal lines 
representing the valleys 
and the vertical and hori- 
zontal lines through J, rep- 
resenting the ridges. In line 
with the plan draw the 
elevation of the gable E 1" 
G. As the diameter of 
the base of the spire usually 
has the width of the 
square shaft, make a 1 
equal to the width of the 
shaft as shown, intersecting 
the gable lines at a and 
1, from which points draw 
the pitch of the spire to 
meet the center line drawn 
through J in plan, at H. In practice it is necessary 
to draw only the one-half elevation and the one- 
quarter plan; from these all necessary projections 
are obtained, as shown. Draw a plan view of the 
spire on the line a 1 in elevation as shown by i'-i- 
X-Y and space the one-quarter plan into any desired 
number of equal spaces as shown by 1, 2, 3, 2', 1'. 
From these points vertical lines are erected to cut 
the base line of the spire in elevation at 1-2-3-2'-!'. 
From these points lines are drawn toward the apex 
H as shown. The point where the radial line drawn 
from 3 on the base line a 1, intersects the gable line 
at 3", gives the correct point of intersection between 
the spire and valley line. Where the radial lines 
drawn from 2' and 1' on the base line a 1 cross the 
gable line at 2" and 1", draw horizontal lines from 
these points of intersection to the right, to intersect 
similarly numbered radial lines drawn from 2 and 1 
on the base line a 1 at 1° and 2 V . A line traced 
through i°-2 v -3" will show the miter line between 




Fig. 316. — View of Round 
Spire on Four Gables 



one-eighth of the circumference of the spire inter- 
secting one side of the gable. Extend the horizontal 
lines drawn from 2" and 3" until they cut the side 
of the spire i-H at 2° and 3 , respectively. After 
this procedure the half pattern for the spire can be 
developed. Using H as a center, with radii equal 
to H 1 and H L, draw the arcs 3-3 and L M, re- 
spectively. Take double the number of divisions 
contained in the quarter circle in plan, and place 



HALF PATTERN 
FOR SPIRE 




PLAN 
Fig. 317. — Patterns for Round Spire and Gable Roofs 

them on the outer arc, as shown by similar numbers 
3 to 1 to 3 to 1 to 3 ; from these points lines are 
drawn to the apex H and intersected by arcs struck 
from H as center with radii equal to the various in- 
tersections marked 1°, 2° and 3° ; in this way are 
obtained the points of intersection on similarly num- 
bered radial lines in the pattern, through which the 
miter cut N O P R S is traced. L M N S L then 
shows the one-half pattern for the spire, to which 
laps must be added. 



190 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



The pattern for the gable roof joining the round 
spire, indicated by B in the finished view in Fig. 316, 
is obtained as shown in Fig. 317. Draw any vertical 
line, as G° G°, on this place the girth of the divi- 
sions on the gable line G 1" in elevation, as shown by 
similar letters and numbers on the girth line G° G°. 
Through these small figures and at right angles to 
G° G° draw lines to the left to any length, as shown. 
Measuring from the line T G in elevation, take the 
various projections to points i°-2 v and 3" and place 
them on similarly numbered lines in the pattern, 
measuring in every instance from the line G° G°, 
thus obtaining the points of intersection marked 
l°-2 v -3 v . Draw a line from G° to 3 V (which repre- 
sents the square inside miter or valley line between 
G and 3" in elevation), and trace the curve from 
3 V to i° to 3 V in the pattern. G°-3 V -3 V -G° then be- 
comes the pattern for the gable roof. 

ROUND SPIRE MITERING ON 

EIGHT GABLE ROOFS, IN AN 

OCTAGONAL TURRET 

Solution 87 

When a circular spire is to join on eight gables, 
as shown by A in Fig. 318, the development is sim- 
ilar to that in the preced- 
ing problem, except that 
in this example closer 
study must be given to 
projections. This will be 
brought out in detail 
with the aid of Fig. 319. 
Here ABCDEFGH 
shows the outline plan of 
the eight gables. All lines 
drawn from the corners 
to the center a form the 
valley lines between the 
gables and all lines from 
the bisection of the gable 
outlines, indicated by the 
letters b, to the center a 
form the ridge lines of 
the gables. Above the 
plan draw any hori- 
zontal line as J P equal 
to the width in plan, as shown by the 



Round 




Octagon 



Fig. 318. — View of Round 
Spire on Eight Gables 



dotted 

lines erected from b and b. From the center a in 
plan erect the center line a d to any length. On this 
center line and measuring from the line J P set off 
the hisht of the sable as K 1. From 1 in elevation 



draw to any length the horizontal line 1 R. From 
C in plan, representing the foot of the gable, erect 
the perpendicular line cutting the base of the gable 
in elevation at N. From b° in plan, representing the 
apex of the gable, erect the perpendicular line, cut- 
ting the apex line in elevation at b'. Draw the gable 
lines 1 to N to b' to P and erect a perpendicular line 
from P to intersect the apex line at R. In practice 
it is necessary to draw only a one-quarter plan and a 
one-half elevation. Assuming that the diameter at 
the base of the spire, where it intersects the valley 
lines of the gable, as at 1 in Fig. 318, is to be as 
great as the width of the octagonal shaft or body 
L L° in elevation in Fig. 319, a true elevation on 
the valley line H a in plan must first be found be- 
fore this extreme point of intersection can be de- 
termined. The procedure is as follows : Take the 
distance of the valley line a H in plan and place it 
as shown on the line K J extended in elevation, as 
from K to H\ and from H 1 draw the true length 
and pitch of valley line to 1. Extend a perpendic- 
ular line from L in elevation until it intersects the 
valley line H 1 1, at M, the desired point. It will be 
noted that if L M is extended it will meet the apex 
of the gable at b" ; this is merely a coincidence. 
Take the half distance of the base a' M and set it 
off on the opposite side as a' M° and from M and 
M° draw lines to the desired apex O. With a. 
radius equal to a' M and using a in plan as center, 
describe the horizontal section of the base of the 
spire, as shown by the true circle in plan. As one 
quarter of this full circle serves all requirements 
and as this quarter circle is again divided into four 
parts or one-sixteenth division of the full circle,, 
divide each division in the quarter plan into a sim- 
ilar number of spaces, as shown by 1-2-3, 3-2-1, 
1-2-3 ar) d 3-2-1- In actual practice a greater num- 
ber of spaces are required. From these small fig- 
ures in plan, erect perpendicular lines to intersect 
the base line of the spire in elevation, as shown 
by the heavy dots. The points 3 and 3' in 
elevation show their true positions, as proved by 
the horizontal line projected from point M on the 
true valley line. From the various intersection 
dots on the base line a'M° in elevation, draw radial 
lines to the apex O, as shown. Where the radial 
lines intersect the true elevation of the gable at 
1, 2 and 3, draw horizontal lines to the right in- 
tersecting similarly numbered radial lines at 2°, i°, 
2 V , 3', 2' and 1", also cutting the side of the spire 
at 1", 2" and 3". Trace a line through points thus 
obtained ; the miter line i"-3' represents the spire 
cut against the roof of the gable R P; the miter 



COPINGS, HEAD BLOCKS, HIP RIDGES, FINIALS AND SPIRES 



191 



line i°-3' against the roof of the gable P b' ; the 
miter line i°-3 against the roof N b' and the miter 
line 1-3 against the roof N 1. In practice the only 
necessary miter line for obtaining the roof of the 
gable is that shown by i"-2'-3'. So far as concerns 
the pattern for the spire, no miter lines are neces- 
sary, the only requirement being the intersections 
against the spire line at i"-2" and 3". 

The one-quarter pattern for the spire may now 
be laid out as follows : Using O as center with 
radii equal to O-3" and O-Y draw the arcs T-S 
and W respectively. On the arc T S, set off 
the girth of the quarter circle in plan, as 
shown by similar figures on T S ; from these 
points, radial lines are drawn to the apex O, 
and intersected by arcs drawn from similarly 
numbered intersections l"-2" and 3", 
struck from the center O. Trace lines 
through points so obtained ; W, V, 3, & 3, 
U, gives the desired quarter pattern. 

The pattern for the gable roof, of which 
eight will be required, is developed as 
follows: Erect any vertical line as R 1 P 1 
and upon this place double 
the number of the spaces 
on the front elevation of 
the gable N, 3, 2, 1, as 
shown by similar letters 
and figures on R 1 P 1 . 
Through these small figures 
and at right angles to R 1 
P 1 draw lines to any 
length, as shown. Meas- 
uring from the line R P 
in elevation take the vari- 
ous projections to 1", 2' 
and 3' and set them off 
on corresponding lines in 
the pattern, measuring in 
each instance to the left 
of the line R 1 P 1 , thus ob- 
taining the points of in- 
tersection marked 1", 2' and 
3'. Trace a line through 
points thus obtained. N-3'- 
i"-3'-N gives the pattern 
for the gable roof, to 
which laps should be al- 
lowed. 



TTERN 



SPIRE 




G b F 

Fig. 319. — Patterns for Round Spire, Mitering on Eight Gable Roofs 



PART X 

CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 

PATTERNS FOR SPHERES, LOUVRES, PANELS, FINIALS, 

DORMER AND BAY WINDOWS, CORNICES, AND 

SEGMENTAL PEDIMENTS 



'T'HE general principles underlying the develop- 
ment of patterns for all curved work are the 
same, yet there are well defined conditions to be 
observed. The intelligent mechanic will consider 
the nature of the curved object he is to make, 
before averaging the flare, in determining the blank 
or pattern. Most cornice moldings are stamped 
or pressed, providing there is enough of the work 
to pay for the making of the dies. When but a 
small amount of work is required, the molds are 
usually made by hand. This applies also to spheres, 
urns, finials, etc., which are usually spun on a lathe, 
from sheet zinc or copper in case a large quantity 
is required. On occasions only one large finial 
may require to be made, so that it would not be 
profitable to prepare dies or a set of chucks. In 
such cases it is more economical to hammer this 
work by hand. The procedure for determining the 
patterns for hand and for machine work varies, 
according to the methods following. 



SPHERE OR BALL, HAVING HORI- 
ZONTAL ZONES 

Solution 88 

Spheres to be hammered by hand are usually 
made in two styles, as shown in Fig. 320. That 
illustrated in diagram A is made of horizontal zones, 
while that shown by B is made up in vertical gores. 
As an example there is shown in Fig. 321 the 
method of developing the patterns for a ball in 
eighteen pieces made up in horizontal zones. The 
principles set forth are alike applicable to any num- 
ber of zones. 

First draw a circle whose diameter corresponds 
to the size of ball required ; divide half the circum- 
ference into ten spaces or such number of spaces as 



are required to form the ball, as indicated by 
A, B, C, D and E. Pattern A is merely a round 
piece of metal with enough stock added to allow 
for raising or bumping up and for laps. To obtain 
the pattern of the piece A, it is required to divide the 
arc A 1 A A 1 into a number of equal spaces, eight 
in this case. Extend the chord A 1 A 1 both ways 
outside of the circumference of the circle and set 
off on it these eight spaces. This will give the diam- 
eter at pattern A to which lap must be added. 

Line x y divides the circle into halves, one half 
only being needed to develop the patterns. To get 
the remaining patterns, for instance that for C, draw 
a line tangent to the arc included between a' and d' 
intersecting the vertical center line in O 4 . Divide 
the arc into three equal spaces as shown by a b c d 
and set off these spaces on the line just drawn from 
O 4 to d'. This will give the width of pattern C. 
With O 4 as a center and O 4 d' as a radius describe 
another arc. Divide the semicircle 1 5 d into a 




Fig. 320. — Sheet Metal Spheres 

number of equal spaces, eight in this case, as shown 
by 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and d, and transfer them to the 
arc, previously drawn from d' by corresponding 
numbers 1', 2', 3', etc. This will give the half pat- 
tern for zone C. Repeat this operation with all the 
zones as B, D and E. This is classed under approxi- 
mate pattern developments, as every pattern must 
undergo the raising or bumping up process. 
192 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



193 



For pattern A two pieces will be required. For 
patterns B, C, D and E, four pieces each are wanted, 
making in all eighteen pieces. 



SPHERE MADE UP IN VERTICAL 
GORES 

Solution 89 

If a ball be made of vertical gores, as shown by 
B in Fig. 320, the method to be employed is that 
shown in Fig. 322. 

Draw the elevation of the required size of ball, 
as indicated by A, and, in its proper position below 
the elevation, draw the plan B of the same diam- 
eter. In practice it is necessary to draw only a 
o n e-quarter elevation 
and a one-quarter plan. 
Divide the elevation into 
an equal number of 
spaces, as shown by the 
small figures 1 to 4. 
From these small figures 
drop perpendicular lines 
to cut the horizontal line 
drawn from the center 
B in plan, at 1', 2', 3' and 4'. A divi- 
sion of the half plan into as many 
spaces as the half ball is to have pieces, 
gives in this case five spaces, or ten 
for the entire ball, as shown by the 
small letters a to /. From any point 
next to the center line B 4', as d, draw 
the joint line d B. Using B as a center, 
with radii equal to B 2' and B 3' draw 
short arcs, cutting the joint line d B Fig. 321 

at 2" and 3". 

The pattern for one of the sections may now be 
laid out as follows: 

Draw any vertical line, as C D, upon which place 
the girth of the half elevation 1 to 1, as shown by 
similar figures 1 to 4 to 1 on C D. Through these 
small figures draw lines perpendicular to C D, as 
shown. Measuring from the center line B 4' in 
plan step off the distances along the arcs 2' to 2", 
3' to 3" and 4' to 4" (not straight across) and place 
them on similarly numbered lines in the pattern, 
measuring in each instance from and on either side 
of the line C D, thus obtaining points h, i, etc. Trace 
lines through points thus obtained, as shown ; these 
will outline the desired pattern, of which ten will 
be required. These gores require to be raised on 
the block with a raising hammer, care being exer- 




-Patterns for a Ball in Eighteen Pieces. Made in 
Horizontal Zones 

cised that the curve in elevation is used as a profile 
along 1-1 in the pattern and that the curve in plan 
is used as a profile along h i in pattern. Allow 
edges for soldering. 



CONSTRUCTION OF A BASEBALL 

Solution 90 

Fig. 323 shows four views of a baseball, each 
view representing a one-quarter revolution of the 
ball. The covering of the baseball has a peculiar 
cut, by which but two pieces of material are re- 
quired. The seam line is shown by the illustration 
in four positions. The method of laying out an 
approximate pattern is indicated in Figs. 324 and 



194 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



325. Some trimming will be required in joining the 
seam, since an accurate pattern cannot be developed, 
because the surface has a double curvature and more 
will depend upon the skill of the mechanic with the 
raising hammer than upon the pattern, which at best 
is only approximate, as stated. To develop the ap- 
proximate pattern proceed as follows : 

Let A in Fig. 325 represent the elevation of the 
ball. Using the radius with which the circle was 



ELEVATION 
1 





PA TTERN 

FOR 

ONE 
SECTION 




Fig. 322.— Pattern for Ball in Ten Pieces Made in Vertical 
Gores 



drawn, step off the circumference of the circle, 
which will result in six divisions, as shown from 1 to 
6 to 1. Next take the girth of five divisions from 1 
to 6 and place them on any line as B-C, shown from 
1 to 6. Bisect this length 1-6 and obtain point a, 
through which at right angles to 1-6 draw the line 
i°-6°, making a-i° and a-6° equal respectively to the 
girth of a-i and a-6 in elevation. Thus the distance 



from 1 to 6 in the pattern takes up the girth from 1 
to 6 in the elevation, while the distance from i c to 6° 
in the pattern takes the remainder of the girth 
from 1 to a to 6 in elevation. In practice it is neces- 
sary to obtain only a one-quarter pattern and then 
duplicate it by the method hereinafter described. 
Space the distance from a to 1 in the pattern in 



Raised 
Bead 





Fig. 324. — Method of Raising the Beaded Seam for Orna- 
mental Purposes 



three parts as shown by a-b-c-i and through b and 
c draw perpendicular lines indefinitely. Make the 
distances c-b' and c-b" in the pattern equal to one 
of the spaces as c-b. From b' draw a line parallel 
to B-C, to meet the line erected through point b at X. 
In a corresponding manner draw from 1 ° a line to 
intersect b-X at Y. Bisect X-Y and obtain point d. 







Fig. 323. — Four Views of a Baseball Showing the Seam Line Which Makes a Quarter Revolution in Each View 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



195 



Next, from point 1, draw a symmetrical curve 
through points b'-d-l° as shown and trace this out- 
line below the line i-a as shown by i-b"-d'-6°. Pro- 
ceed to trace the half pattern opposite i°-6° as 
shown by i°-b°-6-b*-6°. Then will i-i°-6-6°-I rep- 
resent the approximate pattern shape, of which two 
will be required to make up the ball. 

Care must be taken when raising the ball on the 
raising block to hammer up true to the circle shown 
in elevation. When joining the ball, the edges of 
the pattern must be trimmed for an accurate fit. 
It will be understood that in the process of manu- 
facturing base balls, the leather covering of the ball 
can be moderatelv stretched to fit. In making a 




Fig- 32S-— Elevation of Ball with Method of Obtaining an 
Approximate Pattern 

ball of sheet metal constant care is required for 
hammering the material to the given profile, which 
must fit the sphere in whatever position the profile 
is placed as, of course, its spherical surface is al- 
ways the same. The making of sheet metal base 
balls for ornamental purposes does not usually in- 
volve the use of the seam as shown in Fig. 323, 
but spun balls or those hammered in the usual man- 
ner are employed, and on the spheres the outline 
of the base ball seam is marked with a crayon when, 
on these lines, a raised bead is soldered, as shown 
in the illustration A in Fig. 324. Assuming that the 
outline i°-b°-6 in the pattern in Fig. 325 has been 
transferred as shown by i°-b°-6 in Fig. 324, simply 
add one-half the girth of the desired bead, on either 
side of and parallel to the line i°-6°-6 as indicated 
by a-a and b-b at both ends. Lines are drawn as 
shown. Four of these patterns are required and 
the small raising hammer is employed for raising 



in a manner alike to diagram X. As previously 
stated, much depends upon skill with the hammer 
for obtaining satisfactory results. 



CIRCULAR LOUVRES 

Solution 91 

In Fig. 293 is shown a view of a round ventilator 
containing circular louvres, which are marked A A. 
The method of striking the pattern is shown in 
Fig. 327. Here A B represents the center line of 
the ventilator. Using C as center, draw the half 
plan of the ventilator, also the location of the two 

A 



v<^ CONSTRUCTIVE 
DIAGRAM 




Fig. 327. — Patterns for Louvres in a Circular Ventilator 



196 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



columns D and E, the full ventilator having four 
columns. Above the plan in its proper position 
draw part of the semi-sectional view showing one 
or more louvres, as indicated by one marked abed, 
since the pattern for one will serve for all. Now 
it is necessary only to extend the lines of the louvre 
a b, b c and c d until they intersect the center line 
A B at H, J and K respectively. 

To obtain the pattern for the flare a b, use as 
radii H b and H a and, using H° as center describe 
the arcs 7-12 and a' a". Starting from 7 in the 
pattern, lay off the girth from 7 to 12 in plan, which 
is the plan view through the corner b of the louvre 
in the sectional view. All this procedure is shown 
by the corresponding numbers in the pattern. Draw 
radial lines from H° through 7 and 12, cutting the 
outer arc at a' and a", thus forming the desired 
pattern. 

The pattern for the louvre b c is found by using 
J b and J c as radii and describing the arcs b' b" 
and 1-6, using J° as center. The girth from 1 to 6 
in the louvre pattern is obtained from 1 to 6 in 
the plan, which represents a section through the 
corner c of the louvre in the sectional view. In 
a similar manner is obtained the pattern for the 
flare c d, all as indicated by similar reference num- 
bers. Laps are allowed on the louvre patterns, as 
shown by the dotted lines ; this allows the water 
to pass over, as indicated in the constructive dia- 
gram x t. 

COVE MOLD IN A CIRCULAR 
PANEL 

Solution 92 

A finished view of a circular panel having a cove 
mold is shown in Fig. 328. The rule here given 




Fig. 328.— Front View of a Circular Panel with Section 
of Cove Mold 

for developing the blank applies to panels made up 
by hand, when the cove is made separately and 
soldered in position, as shown in the view of con- 



struction diagram in Fig. 329. When it is desired 

to hammer up or raise this cove, in one full circle, a 
special method is required to determine the girth 
of the pattern, as follows: 

First, draw any vertical line, as A B, and to the 
right, as shown, construct the half sectional view 



A' 



E"j 



—[c* VIEW OF 




Fig. 329. — Pattern for Cove Mold in a Circular Panel 

of the panel, as indicated by C D E F. Connect 
the corners of the cove by the line D E, which bisect 
and obtain a. From a draw a line at right 
angles to D E, meeting the cove at c. Divide the 
distance a c into as many parts as the semi-diameter 
a b has inches. It is assumed that the distance a b 
is 2J4 in., which represents 3. Any fraction less 
than one-half is not taken into account, while any 
fraction greater than one-half represents one. This 
rule applies to any diameter. Since a b counts as 3, 
simply divide the distance a c into 3 parts, as shown, 
and through the first part nearest the mold, marked 
8. draw a line parallel to D E until it intersects the 
center line A B at K. From this first division 8 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



197 



draw a horizontal line to intersect the center line 
A B at c ; using c as a center, with £-8 as radius, 
draw the quadrant 8-/, as shown; divide this into 
equal spaces as shown from 8 to 6. 

The one-quarter pattern may now be laid out as 
follows : Take the girth of the mold from c to E 
and from c to D and place it, as shown, from 8 to H 
and 8 to J. Using K as center, with radii equal 
to K J, K 8 and K H, draw arcs, as shown. Draw 
any radial line as H° K cutting the center and inner 
arc at /' and J° respectively. Take the girth of the 
quadrant 8 / and set it off on the center arc in the 
pattern from f to 8, as shown by similar numbers. 
From K draw a line through 8, intersecting the 
inner and outer arcs at J 1 and H 1 respectively. J° 
J 1 H 1 H° is then the desired quarter pattern. If 
preferred, this pattern may be made in one piece, 
by joining the four quarters, when the seam can be 
riveted and the blank raised to the required profile 
E c D. If this panel be made by hand, its con- 
struction is as follows : Referring to the view of 
construction, A x is a circular ring whose inside 
radius is Y E in the sectional view, while D x is 
a flat disc, whose radius is C D. B x and C x are 
straight strips, while E x is the curved mold. Note 
where edges are allowed for soldering. 



QUARTER ROUND MOLD IN A CIR- 
CULAR PANEL 

Solution 93 

Fig. 330 shows the method of averaging the pro- 
file and developing the pattern for a quarter round 
mold in a circular panel. Draw the center line A B 
and in its proper position the outline of the panel 
indicated by C D E F G. The following method 
will provide for the stretching of the quarter round 
mold required in this case, as well as to the stretch- 
ing of all molds of this shape : 

Drawn a line from E to D, bisect it and obtain a. 
From a and at right angles to E D draw a line in- 
tersecting the mold at b. Through b and parallel to 
E D draw a line, until it meets the center line A B 
at H. Take the girth of the mold from b to E and 
from b to D and set it off from b to K and from 
b to J. From b draw a horizontal line to intersect 
the center line at c. Using c as center, with radius 
equal to c b, draw the quadrant b H ; space this into 
equal divisions, as shown from 1 to 7. This quad- 
rant then represents a quarter section on the line 
b c. Using H as center, with radii equal to H J, 
H b and H K, draw the arcs as shown. Starting 



from any point on the center arc, as b', lay off the 
girth of the quadrant b 4 H as shown by similar 
numbers and letters in the pattern. From the center 
H draw radial lines through b' and H° cutting the 
inner and outer arcs as shown, J 1 K 1 K° J° then 




Fig- 330. — Pattern for Quarter Round Mold in a Circular 
Panel 

represent a quarter pattern. In reference to the 
stretching of the mold, point b in the profile remains 
stationary, while b K and b J are stretched over the 
blow horn stake until it has the shape indicated by 
b E and by b D, respectively. The method of con- 
structing the panel is alike to that explained in the 
preceding problem. 



REVERSED OGEE IN A CIRCULAR 
PANEL 

Solution 94 

The pattern for an ogee or a reversed ogee in 



198 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



a circular panel is laid out as shown in Fig. 331. 
Here, as before, the center line A B is first drawn 
and to the right thereof the outline of the panel 
profile is drawn, as shown by C D E F. Through 
the flare of the reversed ogee D E draw the line 
H T, extending it until it meets the center line A B 
at G. Take the girth of the mold from a to E, and 




Fig. 331.— Pattern for Reversed Ogee Mold in a Circular 
Panel 



from b to D and place it on the line H J, from a to 
H and from b to J. H J shows the girth of the 
mold E c D. Bisect a b and obtain c and from this 
draw the horizontal line c d. Using d as a center, 
with d c as radius, draw the quadrant c c ; divide 
this into equal spaces, as shown from 1 to 6. Using 
G as center, with radii equal to G J, G b, G c, G a 
and G H, draw the arcs shown. From any point, 
as <~', on the center arc, lay off the girth of the 
quadrant c c, as shown by similar letters and num- 
bers in the pattern. From G draw radial lines 
through c' and c' cutting the inner and outer arcs 
as shown. H° H v ] v J° then represents the quarter 
pattern. That portion of the pattern indicated be- 
tween the arrows or S remains stationary, while 
that part marked X will be stretched and the por- 
tion marked Y will be raised. Care should be taken 
when raising and stretching not to go inside the 
lines on either side of S. When the panel is small, 
the pattern can be made in one entire piece, riveting 
the seam ; if the panel is large, the pattern can be 
made in halves or quarters. 



ROUND FINIAL FOR CIRCULAR 
TOWER 

Solution 95 

In Fig. 332 is shown a photographic view of a 
round finial on a circular tower roof. The method 
of developing these various patterns is alike appli- 
cable to any profile or diameter of finial. Fig. 333 
shows a front elevation of the finial, the numbers 
indicating the patterns, of which there are five. In 
order that one may proceed intelligently with the 
development of the patterns, it will be necessary to 
know just where and how the seams in the finial 
are to be made. For this purpose Fig, 334 has been 




Fig- 332. — View of a Finial on a Circular Tower Roof 

prepared. Note the flanges and joints from A to R; 
also that the bead J is soldered separately to the 
flat band H at a and b. The method of obtaining 
the pattern for the mold 1 between the arrow points 
in Fig. 333 is laid out as shown in Fig. 335. In 
this figure A B is the center line, on either side of 
which the profile of the mold is drawn, as shown. 
In practice only a one-half elevation is required. 

Pattern for Flare 

To obtain the pattern for the flare 1-2 simply 
extend this line until it meets the center line A-B 
at A. With a as center and a 2 as radius describe 
the quarter circle 2-10; divide this into parts as 
shown by the small figures 2 to 10. With radii 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



199 



equal to A I and A 2 and with A 1 as center describe 
the arcs i'-2° and 2'-io. Starting from 2' set off 
the girth of the quarter circle 2-10, as shown by 
similar numbers in the pattern. From A 1 draw 




Fig- 333- — Front Elevation of Finial 

radial lines through 2' and 10 intersecting the outer 
arc at i' and 2° respectively. i'-2'-io-2° represents 
the one-quarter pattern for the flaring strip. 

Pattern for Quarter Round 

To obtain the correctly averaged line and pattern 
for the quarter round mold 2-c-n, the following 
rule gives accurate results : 

Draw a line from 2 to 11, bisect it and obtain 
12. From point 12 and at right angles to 2-1 1 
draw a line meeting the mold at c. From 12 draw 
the horizontal line meeting the center line at b. 
Let us assume that this distance 12-b measures 6 in., 
and divide the line 12-c into six equal parts or, in 
other words, into as many parts as the semi-diam- 
eter 12-b measures in inches. Through the first 
part nearest the mold (as 13), and parallel to 2-1 1, 
draw a line until it intersects the center line A B 



at B. Space the mold 2-c-ii into equal divisions, 
as shown by the small dots, and take the girth from 
c to 2 and from c to 11, and place it on the aver- 
aged line just drawn, as indicated from 13 to 2 V 
and from 13 to u v , respectively. Using B-2 V , B-c 
and B-n v as radii, with B 1 at 
the right as center, draw the 
arcs 2 VV -2 VV , i3'-2i' and n vv - 
n vv . From point 13 on the 
averaged line draw a hori- 
zontal line intersecting the 
center line A B at d. Using 
d as center and with d-13 as 
radius draw the quarter circle 
13-21, and divide into equal 
parts, as shown. Take the 
girth of this quarter circle, 
and starting from any point 
on the center arc in the pat- 
tern, as 13', step off these di- 
visions, as shown from 13' to 
21'. Draw lines from B 1 
through 13' and 21' intersect- 
ing the inner and outer arcs, 
as shown. 2 vv -ii vv -ii vv -2 vv 
gives the quarter pattern for 
the quarter round mold, which 
must be raised on the raising 
block. 

Pattern for Curved Shaft 
on Bead 

To obtain the pattern for 
the curved shaft and bead 
marked II, in Fig. 333, follow 
the method illustrated in Fig. 
336. Here the full elevation is 
drawn but only a half eleva- 
tion is required in practice. 
After the elevation of the 
shaft, fillet and bead has been drawn, erect the center 
line X Y, as shown, and space the shaft into as many 
parts as it is to contain pieces. In this case four parts 
are employed, as shown by 1° to IV°, the dotted lines 
representing the seams. In laying out work of this 
nature it is preferable to introduce a few more 
seams, thus saving time and labor incident to stretch- 
ing or hammering, for the more numerously seams 
are introduced, the nearer to a straight line will be 
the sections, thus necessitating but little hammering. 
In making up the bead a seam is introduced into 
its center, as shown, so that the pattern for one 
half can be used for either side. The method of 




Fig- 334-— One Half 
Construction Draw- 
ing, Showing Lo- 
cation of Seams 
and Method of 
Lapping 



20O 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



laying out the raised bead, is similar to that em- 
ployed in the preceding problem. Draw a line from 
I to 2 in the half bead, bisect it and obtain 3. From 
3 draw the horizontal line meeting the center line 
X Y at 4. Assume that 3-4 measures 2 in., and 
divide the line 3-5, which is drawn at right angles 
to 1-2, in two parts as shown by x. Through x 
parallel to 1-2 draw the line to intersect the center 
line X Y at A. From x draw the horizontal line 
x a ; using a as center and with a x as radius, draw 
the quadrant 5-10; space this into convenient parts, 
as shown. Take the girth of the half bead from 
5 to 1 and from 5 to 2, and place it on the averaged 
line, shown from j to 1' and x to 2'. i'-2' then 



The pattern is obtained as follows : Using b as 
center and b 11 as radius, draw the quarter circle 
11-15, and space this as desired. Space the curve 
or profile, as indicated by 16, 17, 18. Take four 
times the girth of the quarter circle 11-15 and set 
it off on the vertical line ii'-ii x at the left, and 
make the distance of 11' to 16' to 18 equal to 11 
to 16 to 18 in elevation. Complete the rectangle in 
pattern for 1°, as shown by ii'-i8°-i8 x -ii x . The 
part between n' and 16' in pattern for 1° remains 
straight, while that part from 16' to 18° will be 
stretched to conform to the curve 16-17-18 in ele- 
vation. 

The method hereinafter given to obtain the pat- 




Fig. 335- — Patterns for Base Mold 



shows the amount of material required to form up 
the half bead. With radii equal to A-i', A-x and 
A-2 r , and using A 1 as center, draw arcs as shown 
by similar numbers. Starting on the center arc at 
X°, lay off four times the girth of the quarter circle 
r-10 in elevation, as shown by similar numbers in 
the pattern. From A 1 draw radial lines through 
X c and X x intersecting the inner and outer arcs 
as shown. 2° 2 X i x 1° then gives the full pattern 
for the half bead. Respecting the pattern for the 
upper part of the shaft marked i c , note that a per- 
fect cylinder occurs up to 16, when it gradually 
curves to meet the top of H°. In cases of this nature 
a cylinder is used, made up of number 24 iron, 
or copper and flanged at the bottom. 



tern for 11° will also apply to 111° and IV , so 
that care should be taken to follow each step care- 
fully, as 111° and IV° will be but briefly described. 
Draw a line from the extreme points in the mold 
11°, as shown from 18 to 19. Bisect the mold and 
obtain point 20. This represents the stationary 
point from which the true girth measurement can 
be obtained. Through point 20 and parallel to 
18-19, draw a line until it intersects the center line 
at b. From 20 draw a horizontal line until it in- 
tersects the center line at c. Using c as center and 
with c 20 as radius, describe the quadrant 020-25, 
which space up as desired. This quadrant repre- 
sents the quarter section on the line 20 c. Take the 
girth of the mold 20 to 18 and 20 to 19 and place 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



20 1 



it on the averaged line, as shown 
from 20 to 18" and from 20 to 
19". Using b 18", b 20 and b 19" 
as radii, with b' to the right as 
center, draw arcs as shown by 
similar numbers. Take twice the 
girth of the quadrant 20-25, and, 
starting on the center arc in the 
pattern at 20 x , set off the proper 
number of spaces, as shown from 
20 x to 25 to 2o v . Draw lines 
from the center b' through 20* 
and 20 v intersecting the inner and 
outer arcs, as shown. I9 x -i9 v - 
i8 v -i8 x then gives the half pat- 
tern. To obtain the radii for 111°, 
a line is drawn through 27 (the 
bisection of the curve 19-26), 
parallel to 19-26, until it meets 
the center line at B. The girth 
of the mold 27-19 and 27-26 is 
now placed as shown by 27-19" 
and 27-26". The quarter section 
on the line 27-rf is struck by 
using d as center. Then B-19", 
B-27 and B-26" are used in 
striking the arcs of the pattern 
shown in Fig. 337, while the 
girth along 27-27 in this pattern 
is twice the girth of 27-33 m tne 
elevation in Fig. 336. The pat- 
tern for the lower section IV is 
obtained in precisely the manner 
specified in the preceding prob- 
lems, all as shown by similar 
letters and figures in Fig. 338. 
Laps are to be allowed on all patterns for riveting 
and soldering, 

Gothic Mold 

For the pattern of the gothic mold marked III 
in Fig. 333, proceed as shown in Fig. 339. Draw 
the elevation of the mold and through it the center 
line. In this case it is assumed that the mold 2-3 
is to be made in two pieces with a seam at I. Should 
the mold be large, two or more seams can be made, 
the patterns being developed in a manner to be 
described. Since the mold is to embody two parts, 
with a seam at 1, draw a line from 2 to 1 to 3. 
Bisect the mold 2-1 at 4, and from 4 draw the hori- 
zontal line meeting the center line at a. Use a 
as a center with radius a-4 and draw the quadrant 




'**- 



Fig- 336. — Obtaining Radii and Patterns for Bead and Shaft 

a-4-9 and divide this into equal parts, as shown. 
Through 4 and parallel to 2-1 draw a line cutting 
the center line at A. Take the girth of the mold 

B 




^< 



Fig. 337-— Half Pattern for Portion of Shaft 111° in Fig. 336 



202 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



from 4 to 2 and from 4 to I 

and place it on the averaged 

line, as shown from 4 to 2' 

and 4 to 1'. With radii equal 

to A-i', A-4 and A-2' and 

using A 1 as center, describe 

the arcs, as shown by similar 

numbers. Take the girth of 

the quarter circle, shown from 

4 to 9 in elevation, and step 

off four times the number of 

spaces (20), starting at 4 on 

the center arc in the pattern, 

as shown from 4 to 4". Draw 

radial lines from A 1 through 

4° and 4* intersecting the 

inner arc at 1° and i x and the 

outer arc at 2° and 2 X . 2°-2 x - 

i x -i° is the full pattern for the upper part of the 

mold, which requires to be stretched. In other words, 

the point 4 in the elevation represents the stationary 

point, while that part from 4 to 2! and from 4 to 1' 

must be curved to the shape shown by 4-2 and by 

4-1 in the profile. 

The pattern for the lower part of the mold is 
obtained in a similar manner. Draw a line from 
1 to 3, then bisect the mold 1-3 and obtain point 
12; through this point and parallel to 1-3 draw a 
line to intersect the center line at B. Take the 
girth of 1 2- 1 4-3 and of 1 2-1 3-1 and place it on 
the averaged line, as shown by i2-i4'-3' an d T2_I 3'- 
1". From 12 draw the horizontal line 12-b, and, 
using b as center, draw the quarter section on the 
line 12-b, as shown by 12-18; space this, as shown. 
The pattern is now laid out, as shown to the left, 
using as radii B-i", B-12 and B~3', all as indicated 
by similar numbers in the pattern. The pattern 
is shown entire, by the use of four times the girth 
of the quadrant 12-18 in elevation. Laps are to be 
added to these net patterns. 

Pattern for Reversed Ogee and Flare 

For the pattern of the reversed ogee and flare, 
marked IV in Fig. 2,Z2>^ proceed as shown in Fig. 
340. Draw the elevation of the ogee, and, in its 
proper position, draw the center line A B. Extend 
the flare 1-2 until it meets the center line at A. 
Using a as a center, with a-2 as radius, draw the quar- 
ter section 2-8 ; divide this into equal parts, as shown 
by the small figures. With A as center and with 
radii equal to A-i and A-2 draw the arcs shown. 
From any point on the outer arc, as 1', draw a 




Fig. 338-— Half Pattern for Portion of Shaft IV in Fig. 336 



radial line to A, intersecting the inner arc at 2'. 
Starting from 2' lay off double the girth of the 
quarter section 2-8, as shown from 2' to 8 to 2° 
in the pattern. From A draw a radial line through 
2 cutting the outer arc at 1°. i°-2°-2'-i' then 
becomes the half pattern for the flare. 

The pattern for the ogee, no matter what its 




FULL PATTERN 

FOR 

LOWER PART 

OF MOLD 




FULL PATTERN 

FOR 

UPPER PART 

OF MOLD 



Fig- 339- — Patterns for Lower Part of Cap 

position (reversed or otherwise), is developed as 
follows : 

Divide the curved part of the ogee into equal 
spaces, as shown by 9-10-11 and by 12-13-14-15. 
Through the flaring part 12-11 draw a line inter- 
secting the center line at B. From either point 
11 or point 12, in this case from 11, draw a hori- 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



20: 




Fig. 340. — Patterns for Upper Part of Cap 



zontal line intersecting the center line at b. With b 
as center and with b-11 as radius draw the quarter 
circle 11-20; space this at will. Take the girth of 
the mold from 11 to 9 and from 12 to 15 and place 
it on the averaged line from 11 to 9' and from 12 
to 15', respectively. 9'- 15' then represents the 
amount of material required to form up the ogee. 
With radii equal to B-9', B-11, B-12 and 6-15' and 
using B° as center, draw arcs to any length, as 
shown by similar numbers. As the quarter section 
11-20 in elevation is taken from point 11 in the 
profile, then starting from any point on the arc n° 
in the pattern, lay off four times the number of 
spaces contained in the quarter section 11-20 in 
elevation, as shown by similar numbers in the pat- 
tern. From B° draw radial lines through n° and 
n x , cutting the arcs shown. i5°-i5 x -9 x -9° is the 
full pattern for the ogee mold. That part of the 
pattern between g x and n x has to be raised, while 
the part between I2 X and 15" requires to be stretched, 
ii x -I2 x remaining stationary. Laps are to be al- 
lowed for riveting and soldering. 

Pattern for Spire 

The pattern for the spire, indicated by V in 
Fig. 333, is laid out as shown in the final pattern 



in Fig. 341. Through the 
center of the elevation 
of the spire draw the 
center line shown and at A 
intersect it by the taper 
4 B extended. As the 
curved part at its base will 
be added to the tapering 
spire pattern and stretched, 
divide the lower curve 
from 4 to 1 into any de- 
sired number of parts, as 
shown by the small fig- 
ures. From 4 draw the 
horizontal line to intersect 
the center line at a. Use 
a as center and draw the 
quarter section on a-4, 
as shown ; space this as de- 
sired. Using A as center 
and with radii equal to A 
B and A 4, draw arcs 
as shown. From any 
point, as 4', on the lower 
arc, step off four times 
the number of spaces con- 
tained in the quarter section, as shown by similar 
numbers in the pattern. From A draw to any 
length radial lines through 4' and 4 , cutting the 



SPUN 
BALL 




ELEVATION 



Fig. 341. — Pattern for Spire 



204 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



upper arc at B 1 B° as shown. Take the girth of 
the curve from 4 to i in elevation and place it on 
the lines extended in the pattern from 4' to 1' and 
from 4 to 1°. Using A as center and with A-i' 
as radius draw the outer arc i'-i . Allow laps for 
riveting and soldering. The ball shown at the top 
is usually spun. 

Cases which Arise in Laying Out Circular 
Moldings Made by Machine 

The method of averaging the profile of moldings 
made by machine differs from that just considered. 




Fig. 342.— A Molding Curved in Plan, as Required when a 

Horizontal Cornice Sets Over the Rounded Corner 

of a Building 

A circular molding may be concave or convex in 
plan, or it may be concave or convex in elevation. 
The significance of this is indicated in the four 
accompanying illustrations. In Fig. 342 is shown 




Fig- 343-— A Molding Curved in Plan, but in an Opposite 
Direction. 

the plan of a molding such as is required when a 
horizontal cornice sets over the rounded corner of 
a building, which is convex, while Fig. 343 shows 
the same molding curved in plan, but in an opposite 
direction, which is concave. The method of pro- 
ceeding with a development such as is shown in 



Fig. 342 is taken up in the course of this discussion. 
Corresponding principles would apply in the ex- 
ample of Fig. 343, simply reversing the averaged 
line. This statement applies also to curves made in 




Fig. 344. — A Molding Curved in Elevation, as in a Circular 
Pediment 

elevation. Fig. 344 shows a molding curved in eleva- 
tion, as in a circular pediment, while Fig. 345 shows 
a molding, also curved in elevation but in an oppo- 




Fig. 345.— A Molding Curved in Elevation but in an 
Opposite Direction 

site direction. Whatever the averaged line for the 
convex curve, in Fig. 344 may be, it should be re- 
versed in averaging the profile in a concave molding 
as represented by Fig. 345. 

AVERAGING PROFILE AND DE- 
TERMINING PATTERN IN THE 
CURVED MOLDING OF A DOR- 
MER WINDOW, MADE BY 
MACHINE 

Solution 96 

Fig. 346 presents a view of a dormer window,. 




Fig. 346. — View of Dormer Window 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



205 



having a segmental top mitering to the horizontal 
moldings at a a. The window opening is to be ellip- 
tical, as indicated at b b. The method of averaging 
the profiles for this dormer is shown in Fig. 347, 
where a one-half front elevation is shown by A C 
D B. The center from which the segmental curve 
is struck is indicated by E, while the curves of 
the elliptical window opening are struck from the 
various centers E, P and O. As the profiles of 
the horizontal and curved molds are alike, take a 

A 
HALF FRONT 

ELEVATION 



of the profile, as shown by c d. Bisect the distance 
between the two lines, as at e and i, and draw the 
averaged line i e, as shown. The girth of the pro- 
file from b to a is now laid off on the line 
e i, starting invariably from a point nearest 
the lowest member b, as /. Assuming that this 
has been done in the profile F G, extend the 
averaged line J G until it meets the horizontal 
line drawn from the center E, at right angles to 
A B, at L. Take the girth of the mold from r to s 




F'g- 347-— Averaging Profiles and Developing Patterns of Molds Made By Machine 



tracing of the profile C, and place it in its proper 
position to the right of the center line A B, as shown 
by the dotted lines and as indicated from F to G. 
Below G draw the profile of the elliptical mold, as 
shown by G H. In averaging profiles for molds 
to be hammered by machine, the following method 
has afforded excellent service. Referring to the 
engraving, diagram A x gives an enlarged view of 
the ogee and fillet for the dormer in question: 

First, draw a line touching the extreme points 
inside of the profile, as shown by a b; then draw 
a line touching the extreme points of the outside 



and place it, as hitherto described, and allow a 
lap at top and bottom for joining, all as shown 
from G to J. With radii equal to L G and L J 
and using L° as center draw the arcs 1-6 and J 1 J°, 
respectively. Space the lower member of the curve 
in elevation, as shown from 1 to 6, and place these 
divisions on the lower curve in the pattern, also 
shown by similar numbers. ]°-y~i-6 is then the 
one-half pattern. In practice more material is added 
to the pattern as allowance for trimming the miters 
on the curved mold. 

The method of developing the pattern for the 



206 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



horizontal mold C was previously explained. 
Let B x represent the profile of the mold to go 
around the elliptical window frame ; it is ham- 
mered up in one piece from g to r. In averaging 
this profile the method found in diagram A x is fol- 
lowed. Draw the inner and outer extreme lines in 
B x as g h and I m. Bisect the distance between 
these two lines, as n and o, through which the 
averaged line is drawn. In the same manner draw 
the averaged line M N through the profile u t in 
the elevation. As the half ellipse is struck from 
three centers, E, P and O, and as the radius E-7 is 
equal to O-16, take the distance of the radius x P 
and set it off on the center line, as shown from x' 
to R. From E and R and at right angles to A B 
draw to the right, lines of any length and intersect 
them by the averaged line M N extended at S and 
T respectively, which give the centers for striking 
the arcs in the pattern. Let N M represent the girth 
of the mold from t to u, obtained in the manner ex- 
plained in connection with diagram B x . Using S as 
a center and with S N and S M as radii, draw the 
arcs 7-10 and M° M v , respectively. Space the curves 
of the inner elliptical arcs in elevation, as shown 
from 7 to 10, 10 to 13 and 13 to 16, having the points 
start and end on the radial lines there shown. Take 
the divisions from 7 to 10 and place them on the 
inner arc of the pattern, as shown by similar num- 
bers. From the center S draw a line through 10, 
extending it to the right until it cuts the outer arc 
at M v , and to the left to any length. Take the 
length of the radius from M to T and set it off 
from M v to T° in the pattern; then, using T° as 
center and with T°-io and T° M v as radii, draw the 
arcs shown. Take the girth from 10 to 13 in eleva- 
tion and place it in the pattern, as shown by similar 
numbers, and draw a line from T° through 13 until 
it meets the outer arc at M x . Reproduce the pattern 
S M° M v , as shown by S 1 M x M\ the distance from 
13 to 16 on the inner arc being equal to 13 to 16 in 
the elevation. y-i6-M 1 -M° then shows the half pat- 
tern for elliptical molding. 



PATTERNS FOR CURVED MOLD- 
INGS IN A CIRCULAR BAY 
WINDOW, MADE BY 
MACHINE 

Solution 97 

Fig. 348 is a view of a circular bay window in 
which the molds were hammered by machine. In 



this case we will take up only the method by which 
the patterns for the crown mold B are developed, as 
the principles are alike for laying out any other 
profile. In the previous solution the moldings were 
curved in elevation, while in this example they are 
curved in plan. Fig. 349 illustrates the method of 
procedure. 

First, draw the wall line P-7 and at right angles 
thereto draw any line, as 12-D. On this line lay off 
the projection of the bay, as indicated from 1 to X, 
and, using the desired radius, as D 1, draw the arc 
1-6. In its proper position above this plan draw the 
profile or sectional view ABC; project the points 
y'-a-e to the plan and describe the arc 12-7 for meas- 
uring purposes. From D, the center from which the 
arcs in plan have been struck, erect the vertical line 




Fig. 348. — View of Circular Bay Window 

D E. The mold ABC will be made up in three 
pieces, viz., the flare or wash A, the upper cove B 
and the lower cove C. These molds should be aver- 
aged in the way explained in connection with Fig. 
347. When this procedure has been followed, refer 
to Fig. 349 and extend the flare A until it intersects 
the line D E at H. Using H as center and with radii 
equal to H b and H-7' draw the arcs to any length, 
as shown. Take the girth from 7 to 12 in plan and 
place it on the inner arc 7'- 12 in the pattern, as 
shown. Draw a line from H through 12, intersect- 
ing the outer arc at M. M-&-7'-i2 then shows the 
one-half pattern for the wash, to which laps are 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



207 



HALF PATTERN 
FOR FLARE A 



HALF PATTERN 
FOR MOLDB 




Fig. 349. — Patterns for Curved Molding in a Circula 

allowed. Draw the averaged line through 
mold B until it intersects the line D E at G. Take 
the girth of the mold a b and set it off on the aver- 
aged line, as shown. Then, using as radii G a and 
G b, draw the arcs shown. Starting at 7 on the inner 
arc, lay of the girth of 7-12 in plan, as shown by- 
similar numbers in the pattern. From G draw lines 
through 7 and 12 cutting the outer arc at L and K. 
7-12-K-L then gives the one-half pattern for mold 
B in the sectional view. Allowance must be made 
at the ends of the pattern for trimming and fitting 
against the wall. J-H-6-1 shows the half pattern 



for the mold C and is ob- 
tained by using F as center, 
with radii equal to F d and 
F e, averaging the line 
through the mold C, and 
obtaining the girth in the 
usual manner, as described 
in connection with mold 
B. Allow laps on all pat- 
terns for trimming, riveting 
and soldering. 



MOLDED BASE 

IN A CIRCULAR 

BAY WINDOW 

Solution 98 

If the base of a circular 
bay window be molded, 
as shown by A in Fig. 348, 
the usual method is to 
hammer it up in horizontal 
sections, thus requiring 
flaring strips at various 
angles, as shown in Fig. 

350. - 

In this illustration A 
represents the center from 
which the arcs in plan are 
struck, while the distance 
from X to B shows the 
extreme projection of the 
base. Through X the ver- 
tical line C K is drawn, 
representing the wall line 
both in plan and sectional 
view. In its proper posi- 
tion, as shown, draw the 
outline or profile of the 
base, and locate at will the 
horizontal seams in same, as shown by D, E, F, H, J. 
The spaces between these seams should not be made 
so wide that they may not be hammered with ease. 
Through A, the center from which the arcs in plan 
were struck, erect the line L M. From the various 
seam lines D, E, F and H drop lines in the plan to 
intersect the center line B X at a, c, e and h. Using 
A as center draw the various arcs a b, c d, e f, and 
h i, which we will use in obtaining the lengths. of the 
several patterns. Extend the averaged lines through 
the profile until they intersect the line L M, as 
follows: Draw a line through D E until it inter- 



Bay Window Made by Machine, 
the 



2o8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



sects L M at L; through E F to intersect at P; 
through F H to intersect at N ; and through H J to 
intersect at O. Using L as center, strike the pattern 
R, taking the girth of a & in plan and placing it along 
the outer arc in R. Using P as center, strike the 
pattern T, placing the girth of c d in plan along the 
outer arc in T. In like manner use N as center and 
strike the arc S, and take the girth along e f in plan 
and place it along the outer arc in S. O is used to 
strike the pattern M, taking the girth of h i in plan 




HALF 
PLAN 



Fig. 350. — Patterns of the Flaring Strips for Bay 
Window Base 

and placing it along the outer arc in M. When this 
has been accomplished net half patterns of the vari- 
ous flares are the result ; to these laps are to be 
added for joining. Patterns R and T will be raised ; 
pattern S remains flat, while pattern M must be 
slightly stretched. The lower ball is spun or ham- 
mered and the method of executing this work was 
previously given. 



SEGMENTAL PEDIMENT MADE 
BY HAND 

Solution 99 

Fig. 351 is a view of a segmental pediment, in 
which the circular molded part is hammered by 
hand and the balance of the work is stripped. Fig. 
352 represents the working drawing and the method 
of construction, as well as the methods used in de- 
veloping the various patterns. 

First, draw the one-half front elevation, the given 
profile of the horizontal return being shown from 
1 to 28. Divide the molds in this profile into an equal 
number of parts, as shown by the small figures. 
Only the ogee mold, shown from 23' to 28, will re- 
quire to be raked or modified in the curved mold- 
ing. Using X as the center, draw arcs from points 
24 to 28, cutting the center line, as shown. From 
the various intersections of the arcs on the center 
line draw horizontal lines indefinitely to the right. 
Take the horizontal projections between points 22 




Fig. 351. — Front View of Segmental Pediment 

and 28 in the normal profile, as shown on the line 
r s, and place them in a reversed position, as shown 
by similar numbers on f s', to the right of the 
center line. From these points on r' s' draw lines 
parallel to the center line until they intersect lines 
obtained from similar numbers, as shown from L 
to P. The profile from P to H in the vertical section 
can be made similar to the given profile from 23' to 
1 1 in the horizontal return. Care should be taken, 
in drawing the vertical section, that a vertical line, 
dropped from P, intersects a line drawn from 23' in 
the given profile, as shown by 23 ° . From 23 ° down 
to 3° the profile is similar to 23' to 3 in the half 
elevation. Lay off the projection of roof A B in the 
vertical section, and draw the wall line, shown by 
B a'. Draw the depth of the frame line, as a' 2'. 
The half pattern for the horizontal front mold and 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



209 



\ 



x>- 



*f k 



«ev 



— © © 






€\x¥ 



A' 



23' 



/ w 



/ 



\ 



ONE HALF FRONT. ELEVATION 
\ / 

\ / 



\ 

\ 
< \ 



\ 



Ai£ 



$f 

tf 
$ 

i 

/ 



.A 




-Raised 



"Raised 



■ Stretched 



VERTICAL SECTION 
ON CENTER LINE 



m 



\ 



-+\4 1 , 



Lap/* 



■27- 

26— I- 



t+»" 






^ 



1 *i 



\ 



rzt 



=tts 



tf 



^ 



J \ HALF PATTERN FOR FRONT 



t 



,7 °fi,' 

76 
75 
M 
(3 



Fig. 352. — Working Drawing and Patterns for Segmental Pediment Made by Hand 



2IO 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



the pattern for the horizontal returns are shown be- 
low the elevation ; they are obtained by means of 
parallel lines, as shown by reference to similar 
letters and figures. A 1 B 1 C 1 represents the pattern 
for the lower horizontal returns. In making up the 
segmental pediment the various faces are stripped 
as follows : 

The upper segment d e 2j, 28 in elevation is shown 
in the section by L, which has a lap at L, to which 
is soldered the roof A B, with a flange added at B. 
To the lower part of L the straight strip D is sol- 
dered. 

The next segment to be pricked from the eleva- 
tion is shown by c, g, o 23^27 and is indicated in 
section by P P° ; it is soldered at the top to the 
straight strip D and at the bottom, the strip equal in 
width to E is soldered. The segment, shown in ele- 
vation by g, h, n, o, is shown in section by R, which 
joins the strip E at the top and the strip F at the 
bottom. 

The next segment to be pricked from the eleva- 
tion is shown by h i m n and is indicated by the line 
X c in the section ; it is soldered to the straight strip 
F at the top and to G at the bottom. 

i j I m is the last segment, shown in section by 
H ; it is soldered to G at the top and to the strip, 
whose width is Z, at the bottom. The back ground 
shown by / k I in elevation completes the square 
angles in the segment. In these square angles at 
K, O and S the ogee, cove and quarter round, re- 
spectively, are soldered. 

The method of obtaining the radii with which 
these flares are struck is now to be considered. The 
ogee K will be taken up first. At right angles to the 
center line and from the center X, from which the 
arcs in the segment were struck, draw a line to the 
left, as shown. Average a line through the modi- 
fied profile of the ogee, as shown by L M in the ver- 
tical section, extending it downward until it meets 
the horizontal line drawn from X at J. Take the 
girth of the ogee in the sectional view and place it, 
as shown from L to M. Using J as center and with 
radii equal to J M and J L draw the arcs M 1 M 2 
and L 1 L 2 , as shown in the part pattern. The true 
length of the ogee pattern is found by measuring 
along the arc 27-e in the half elevation and placing 
it along the outer arc L 1 L 2 in the pattern. When 
these molds are hammered by hand, they are usually 
cut about 3 ft. long from sheets 36 in. wide. The 
averaged line for the cove mold O in the vertical 
section is drawn, as indicated by the line P R ex- 
tended, until it meets the line at N. The girth of the 
mold O is now placed as shown from R to P. Using 



radii equal to N R and N P and from N 1 as center 
the arcs R 1 R 2 and P 1 P 2 are struck. Obtain the 
girth of the arc g in elevation and place it along 
the outer arc P 1 P 2 in the pattern to obtain its 
length. The quarter round S in the vertical section 
is averaged by drawing the line in the direction of 
T U and extending it until it meets the line X Y 
at V. The girth of the quarter round S is then 
placed, as shown by U T, and using V U and V T as 
radii and V 1 as center the arcs U 1 U 2 and T 1 T 2 are 
struck. Along the outer arc T 1 T 2 the girth of mi 
in elevation is placed. Laps are to be allowed on 
all patterns to provide for soldering. Work of this 
kind, made by hand, should be scraped clean on 
completion. 



CURVED DORMER WINDOW WITH 

CURVED ROOF AND ROOF 

FLANGE 

Solution 100 

Fig. 353 presents a view of a curved dormer win- 
dow, usually designated as an "eye brow dormer." 
Since the roof of this dormer runs at an incline, the 




yM^\W'\w^ 



, M I l I I I I l/l I ' 

^ SLATE OR TILE RQOfs 

Fig- 353- — View of Curved Dormer Window, Requiring a 
Raked Roof and Roof Flashings 

profile of the dormer roof requires a change of 
profile from that shown in the face. A roof flash- 
ing is also indicated by the dotted line, with an 
apron along the bottom of the dormer, as shown. 
The method of obtaining the patterns for the dormer 
roof and flange is illustrated in Fig. 354. 

First, draw the center line A B, and construct the 
one-half elevation of the dormer face, shown by 
7-2-1 -V. In line with this half elevation, construct 



CIRCULAR SHEET METAL WORK 



211 



+&> % 




HALF PATTERN 
FOR FLASHING 



ONE HALF TRUE PROFILE 
ON 7'-1° 

Fig- 354- — Patterns for Raked Roof and Flashings on a Curved Dormer 



the side elevation, indicated by ~'-j"-\', D C repre- 
senting the pitch of the main roof and j'-j" the 
pitch of the dormer roof. Preparatory to laying out 
the roof pattern of the dormer, a true profile must 
first be found on the line j'-b, drawn at right angles 
to 7'~7". This is obtained as follows : Divide the 
half elevation into an equal number of parts, as 



shown by the small figures i to 7, from which 
points and at right angles to A B, draw lines, cut- 
ting the vertical line 1'-/' in the side elevation, as 
shown from l'-j'. From these intersections and 
parallel to the roof line J'-j" draw lines crossing 
the line 7' b from i° to 6°, and cutting the main 
roof line C D from 2" to 6". Take the various di- 



212 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



visions from i° to 7' on the line 7' b and place them 
on the line A B extended as B E, all as shown by 
similar figures 7 to i°. From the small figures and 
at right angles to B E draw lines and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to B E from similar inter- 
sections in the half elevation. Trace a line through 
points thus obtained ; the outline from i v to 2 V to 7° 
will be the half true profile on "f-i" in the side 
elevation. 

The pattern for the roof is next in order and may 
be developed as follows : At right angles to the 
dormer roof line j'-j" draw any line as F G, on 
which place the girth of the one-half true profile, as 
shown by similar numbers on F G. Through the 
small figures i v to 7 and at right angles to F G, 
draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn parallel 
to F G from similarly numbered intersections on the 
roof line V to 7" and on the face line 1' to 7'. A line 
traced through points thus obtained, as shown by 
H J K, will be the one-half pattern for raked roof. 

To obtain the pattern for the roof flange or 



flashing, indicated in Fig. 353, proceed as shown in 
Fig. 354. Parallel to the main roof line C D draw 
any line, as L M, and at right angles thereto, from 
the various divisions 1', 2", 3" to 7" on the main 
roof line, draw lines to any length, as shown. Meas- 
uring from the line A B in the half elevation, take 
the various projections to points 1 to 7 and place 
them on similarly numbered lines, measuring in each 
instance from the line L M in the flashing pattern, 
all as indicated by the heavy dots. Trace a line 
through these points, as shown by P O N, which rep- 
resents the outline or opening in roof. Set the di- 
viders to equal the desired width of flashing, as a, 
and describe a line parallel to P O N as shown by 
MRS. M R S N O P will be the one-half flashing 
pattern. The edge line along NOP will be equal 
in girth to the edge line J K in the raked roof pat- 
tern, while the edge line H J in the roof pattern will 
correspond to the outline 1-2-7 m tne one-half ele- 
vation. Allow on all patterns laps for joining and 
soldering. 



PART XI 

ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 

PATTERNS FOR ORNAiMENTS, BRACKETS, CHAMFERS, 

PANELS, MOLDED TRANSITIONS, GORES, KEYSTONES, 

URNS, SHIELDS AND SHAFTS 



A TEN SIDED BALL 

Solution 101 

"DALLS to be made of any number of sides, to 

represent a true circle in elevation but in the 

shape of a regular polygon in plan, involve the same 

principles as in developing bevel miters. As an ex- 



ELEVATION 
7 




PATTERN FOR ONE SIDE 



Pattern for Ten-Sided Ball 



ample, we will consider a ten sided ball. The per- 
spective of this ball, shown in Fig. 355, indicates a 
regular polygon when viewed in plan or, as so 
viewed, the geometrical figure known as the decagon. 
The number of sides possessed by the ball does not 
affect the application of the principles set forth in 



Fig. 356. The methods there shown are applicable 
to any regular polygon. 

Let A represent the elevation of the ball, through 
the center of which draw to any length the vertical 
line 1 /. On this vertical line establish any point as 
B ; using this point as a center draw a circle of any 
size, as shown. Since the ball is to have ten sides, 
divide one-half the circle into five 
spaces, as shown by the letters abed 
e and /. From c and d draw the miter 
lines to the center B as c B and d B. 
Divide the semi-circle in elevation into 
an equal number of parts, as shown by 
the small figures 1 to 5 to 1. From 
point 5 draw a line parallel to A B, 
crossing the miter lines c B and d B, 
as shown. I m B then represents the 
plan view of one side or one-tenth of 
the ball, constituting all that is neces- 
sary for developing the pattern. 

The pattern may now be laid out. 
At right angles to I m draw the line 
C D ; upon this place the girth of the 
semi-circle in elevation, as shown by 
similar numbers on C D, and through 
these points and perpendicular to C D, 
draw lines ; intersect these lines by 
lines drawn parallel to C D from sim- 
ilar intersections on the miter line / B, 
which points were obtained by drop- 
ping perpendicular lines from the 
small figures in elevation. A line 
traced through points thus obtained, 
as shown by 1 F 1, will be the miter cut. Trace this 
curve below the line C D, as indicated by 1 F° I, 
which completes the pattern for one side ; ten of 
these, with an edge on one side will be required to 
complete the ball. It will be understood that the 
more numerous the addition of sides in plan the 



213 



214 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



more nearly spherical will the ball become. Some- 
times these developed sides are raised with the rais- 
ing hammer ; in such cases a true sphere is the re- 
sult. This would require, however, a change in de- 
veloping the pattern, a subject already considered 
in a preceding solution in the part on Circular Work. 



TRIANGULAR MOLDED ORNA- 
MENT 

Solution 102 

Molded ornaments required in cornice work, 
whose plans are regular polygons such as are shown 
in the perspectives in Figs. 357 and 358 are devel- 
oped as is illustrated in Fig. 359, where the same 
profile or section is used for both the triangular and 
hexagonal plan. In laying out the triangular plan, 
care must be taken in obtaining the miter line. First, 
locate the length of one side of the triangle, as 
shown by the horizontal line, A B. As the three 
sides are equal, use A and B as centers, and with 
A B as radius, describe arcs intersecting each other 
at C. Join B C and C A and obtain the miter lines 
and center D as follows : Bisect the angle CAB 




Fig. 357- — View of Triangular Ornament 

in the usual manner by means of the arcs a, b and c 
and draw a line from A to c, intersecting this line at 
D by a vertical line dropped from the apex C ; D is 




Fig. 358. — Shaded Elevation of Hexagonal Ornament 

the desired center of the triangle. Draw a line from 
D to B, completing the three miter lines. Parallel to 



PLAN 




F'g- 359- — Patterns for Triangular and Hexagonal Ornaments Having the Same Profile 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



215 



C D draw any line, as d 10, and from the center D 
in plan and parallel to B A draw the line D 1 to any 
length, cutting d 10 at d. Establish the hight of the 
section as d 1 and draw the desired profile from 1 
to 10, as shown. Divide the curves in this section 
into equal parts and number all points, as shown 
from 1 to 10. From these small figures and parallel 
to A B draw lines, intersecting the two miter lines 
A D and D B in plan, as indicated. Extend C D in 
plan as C F and upon this place the girth 
of the section, as shown by similar numbers 
on C F. Through these divisions and at right angles 
to C F draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to C F from similar intersections on the 
miter lines B D A in plan. Trace a line through 
these points of intersection. / 1 c will be the pattern 
for all three sides. Laps are to be allowed on one 
side as shown by the dotted lines and then all sides 
are formed one way. In other words, all laps 
must face toward the one side. This permits joining 
together. 



HEXAGONAL MOLDED ORNA- 
MENT 

Solution 103 

To develop the pattern for the hexagonal molded 
ornament shown in the shaded elevation in Fig. 358, 
proceed as shown in Fig. 359. The hexagon plan, 
G H J K L M, is drawn and the six miter lines are 
drawn to the center N, although only two miter lines 
are necessary, as indicated by N M and N G. The 
profile, or section E, is placed in its proper position, 
as shown, spaced into equal divisions and from the 
small figures thereon lines are carried to the right, 
parallel to M G, intersecting the miter lines G N M, 
as shown. The girth of E is now placed on the 
girth line O P, as shown by the small figures 1' to 
10'; through these and at right angles to O P lines 
are drawn and intersected by lines drawn parallel to 
O P from similar intersections on the miter lines, 
G N M in plan. Trace lines through points thus 
obtained, g h 1' will be the pattern for the six sides. 
Allow laps on one side of all six, as specified in the 
preceding problem. 



A FIVE-POINTED STAR 

Solution 104 

Fig. 360 is a view of a five-pointed star, in the 
development of which triangulation is required. Fig. 




361 illustrates the procedure involved, which may 
be applied to a star having any number of points or 
any hight at its apex. It is to be borne in mind that 

whatever the number of 
points the star may have, 
one of the points must lie 
on a horizontal line, as 
shown by A B in plan. 

To draw the plan of the 
star proceed as follows : 
Using A as center and with 
the desired radius draw 
the circle, as shown. From 
A draw the horizontal 
line A B intersecting the circle at B. From B divide 
the circle into parts, providing one for each of the 
five star points, as shown by B, C, D, E and F, 
from which, draw lines to the center A. Again using 
A as center and with the desired inner radius draw 
the circle shown, intersecting lines previously drawn 
at b, c, d, c and /. Bisect each of these spaces ob- 



PATTERN FOR 
ONE POINT 



Fig. 360. — View of 
Five-pointed Star 



ELEVATION 
A' 




1' V 2' 

TRUE ANGLE 

ON 1-2 

IN PLAN 



PLAN 
Fig. 361. — Pattern for Five-pointed Star 

taining points 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, and connect these 
points by lines, as shown. Establish the hight of the 
star on its center line in elevation as a A 1 , and com- 
plete the elevation, as shown by the dotted construc- 
tion lines. As one of the points A B in plan lies on 
a horizontal line, then A 1 B 1 in elevation will show 



2l6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



its true length. B I in plan also shows its true 
length, while the true length of i A is found as 
follows : Since all lines from A i to A 5 are of cor- 
responding length and as A 4 lies on a horizontal 
line, simply project, point 4 to the base line in ele- 
vation at 4' and draw a line from 4' to A 1 , obtain- 
ing the true length sought. If 4 A in plan did not 
lie on a horizontal line, its distance would be meas- 
ured and set off, as from a to 4' in elevation. Hav- 
ing thus found the necessary true lengths the pattern 
may be laid out. 

Take the distance of A 1 B 1 and set it off on any 
line, as A° B°. Using B 1 in plan as radius and 
with B° in the pattern as center, describe the arcs 1' 
and 2'; intersect them by arcs struck from A° as 
center and with A 1 4' in elevation as radius. Con- 
nect points in the pattern by straight lines; A° 1' 
B° 2' will be the pattern for one point, five of which 
will be required. 

To obtain the true angle on the line 1-2 in plan, to 
be used in bending the points of the star on the line 
A° B°, extend the line 2-1 in plan until it meets the 
base of the star in elevation at i ; from this point 
and at right angles to A 1 B 1 draw the line i t. Set 
off the distance 1-2 in plan, as shown by 1/-2' in the 
true angle. Bisect i'-2' and obtain i', from which 
point erect the perpendicular i' t' equal to i t in ele- 
vation. 1/ t' 2' gives the true angle or stay, and the 
girth of 1' /' 2' will be equal to V t" 2' in the pattern. 
If desired, two or more points may be joined to 
avoid soldered seams. 

A MOLDED CHAMFER 
Solution 105 

Fig. 362 illustrates a chamfer or broken 
corner. We will obtain the pattern for the molded 
chamfer A. The method of developing the gore or 




chamfer is shown in detail in Fig. 363. First, draw 
the profile of the mold as viewed from one side, 
shown by A, 1,7, B, C in the partial elevation. Be- 
low and in line with B C draw the plan D 7 E, rep- 
resenting a section on B C in elevation. Project 1 
in elevation to cut the side 7 D in plan at 1, from 

PARTIAL ELEVATION 
A 



TRUE PROFILE 
OF CHAMFER 
ON LINE 7-a 
IN PLAN 




J 
PA TTERN 

FOR 
CHAMFER 



Fig. 362. — View of Chamfer on One Corner 



Fig. 363. — Method of Developing Chamfer Pattern 

which point and at an angle of 45 degrees draw the 
line 1-1°. Then D, 1, 1°, E in plan shows a section 
through the line 1 c in elevation. Divide the profile 
from 1 to 7 in elevation, into an equal number of 
parts ; from these points of division, drop lines per- 
pendicular to B C until they cut the line 7 D in plan, 
as shown by similar numbers. From these divisions 
on 7 D and parallel to 1-1 draw lines cutting the 
opposite side 7 E, as shown. From the corner 7 and 
at right angles to 1-1° draw the line 7-a crossing the 
lines previously drawn, as shown from 1' to 7. Take 
these various divisions on 7-a and place them on any 
line drawn parallel to B C in elevation, as shown by 
similar numbers on F G. At right angles to F G and 
from the small figures thereon erect lines and inter- 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



!I7 



sect them by lines drawn parallel to B C from sim- 
ilarly numbered points in the profile in elevation. 
Trace a line through points thus obtained ; this will 
give the true profile of the chamfer on the line j-a 
in plan. 

For the pattern, extend the line a 7 in plan as H J 
and on this place the girth of the true profile of the 
chamfer, measuring each space separately, since all 
are unequal, as shown by similar numbers on H J. 
Through these small figures and at right angles to 
J H draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to H J from similarly numbered points on 
the outline D 7 E in plan. A line traced through 
points thus obtained, as shown by L M H, will be 
the pattern for the molded chamfer. If the pattern 
has been accurately developed the girth along the 
miter cut L-7 in the pattern will be equal to the girth 
of 1-7 in the profile in elevation, to which it is 
soldered. Allow laps for soldering purposes. 

MOLDED BASE, FORMING A TRAN- 
SITION FROM SQUARE TO 
OCTAGON 

Solution 106 

Taking up the subject of gore pieces on molded 
bases the illustration presented in Fig. 364 shows a 



design which may be used for a pedestal or base of 
a flagpole, cross or other ornament on the top of a 
building. The pedestal is made octagonal at the top 




Fig. 364.- 



-View of Molded Base. Forming a Transition from 
Square to Octagonal 



and square at the bottom, the transition between the 
two shapes being accomplished by the gore piece 
shown, which differs somewhat in shape, but not in 
principle, from that found at the base of the vase 
shown in a preceding solution. X in Fig. 364 is 
known as a gore piece, forming a transition from the 
square corner at a to the octagon at b. 

The patterns are shown developed in Fig. 365 
which presents an elevation and half plan of the 
pedestal in which A D is the entire profile of one 




Fig. 365.— Method of Developing Pattern for a Gore Piece 



!l8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



of the four sides. The molding A B is carried 
around the top of the pedestal, forming a regular 
octagon, as shown by F G H J, etc., of the plan, 
while H J C 1 is the plan of the gore piece, shown 
in the elevation by E B C. In an analysis of the 
several parts it should be noted that since the mold- 
ing A B forms a regular octagon its miter lines 
for one piece are shown on the plan by J L and 
H P, while J C 1 and H C 1 are the miter lines for 
the gore piece, and that the base mold of which C 
D is the profile forms regular square miters at the 
corners, the miter line being C 1 D 1 of the plan. 

Therefore, to obtain the pattern for one of the 
four sides in one piece, divide the curved portions 
of the entire profile A D into any convenient num- 
ber of spaces, as shown by the figures, and set off 
a stretchout of the same on any line, as M N, drawn 
at right angles to the side in plan. 

Project lines from the points of division on pro- 
file A B to intersect the miter line J L, as shown, 
and carry them thence parallel with M N, to cut 
measuring lines of corresponding numbers, as 
shown from J 1 to-L 1 of the pattern. Lines from 
that part of the profile indicated by B C are pro- 
jected in a similar manner to cut the miter line 
J O, and from that part of the profile from C to D 
to cut the miter line C 1 D 1 , when all are carried as 
before to cut the measuring lines of corresponding 
number, as shown by L 1 C 2 D 2 . A line traced 
through these points, as shown from J 1 to D 2 , will, 
with the center line, form a half pattern of the side 
piece. 

Before laying out a pattern for the gore piece 
it will be necessary to construct a profile of the 
same or otherwise a section through the pedestal 
on the line K C 1 of the plan. This may be accom- 
plished in connection with the laying out of the pat- 
tern by first carrying the points on the line J C 1 
across to cut the other miter lines H C 1 , cutting 
at the same time the center line K C of the gore. 
The points thus obtained on K C 1 will give the pro- 
jection of the points of the new profile, that is, their 
distances from the center toward C 1 , while the 
hights of the several points will be the same as 
those of the profile B C of the elevation. We may 
therefore transfer the line K O to a position at one 
side of the profile B C, as shown by K 1 C 3 , keep- 
ing the spaces thereon respectively equal to those 
on K C 1 , all as shown. Lines erected from the 
points on K 1 C 3 to intersect lines of corresponding 
number carried horizontally from the points on 
profile B C will give the required profile, as shown 
by B 2 C 3 . 



To obtain the pattern for the gore piece a stretch- 
out of the new profile must be set off on the line 
K C 1 , extended, as shown by M 1 N 1 . Care must 
be taken to transfer the spaces one at a time, in 
consecutive order, from B 2 C 3 to M 1 N 1 , since, in 
the construction of B 2 C 3 , the spaces have become 
unequal. This having been done, lines may now 
be carried from the points on the two miter lines, 
J C 1 and H O, to cut measuring lines of the stretch- 
out of corresponding number. 

It will be noticed that the stretchout of the pro- 
file A B has been added to that of B 2 C 3 , as shown 
by M 1 B 3 , and that the projections have been car- 
ried from the lines J L and H P to meet them, so 
as to have the pattern for the oblique side or gore 
in one piece, as mentioned above, thus making this 
part of the pattern exactly the same as the corre- 
sponding part of the pattern of the side, whose 
stretchout is M B 4 . 

Projections carried back into the elevation from 
the points on H C 1 to intersect lines of correspond- 
ing number, already drawn from profile B C, will 
give the correct elevation of the gore piece, as 
shown by E C B, and lines similarly drawn from 
points on H P to meet the lines from points on 
A B (not shown), will give the elevation of the 
octagon miter in the mold around the top of the 
pedestal, thus giving with the gore piece the correct 
elevation of the entire pedestal. 

In the illustration a number of the lines of pro- 
jection have been omitted in order to avoid con- 
fusion. 

MOLDED CAP, FORMING A TRAN- 
SITION FROM OCTAGON TO 
SQUARE 

Solution 107 




Fig. 366.— View of Molded Ornament or Cap, Forming a 
Transition from Octagon to Square 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



219 



FRONT ELEVATION 
X 




TRUE PROFILE 
THROUGH C-0 



Fig. 367.— Patterns for an Ornamental Molded Cap Forming a Transition from Octagon to Square 



220 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Fig. 366 presents a perspective view of a molded 
ornament or cap from octagon to square. It will be 
noted that the top diamond is a true square, while 
the base is a true octagon. The alternate sides 
of the octagon, marked A, form the gores, which 
in turn form the transition from octagon to square. 
The method of obtaining the pattern shapes is 
shown in Fig. 367. 

First, draw the center line X Y and, using A 
upon it as center, draw a regular octagon, as in- 
dicated by F G H J K L M N. From F and J erect 
perpendicular lines to meet the horizontal line drawn 
above the plan at E and 14. From E and 14 draw 
the profile of the cap. as shown from E to I and I 
to 14. Since the top portion of the cap, indicated by 
1, 2, 3 in elevation, is to be treated as of square for- 
mation, drop a perpendicular line from 2-3 to the 
plan, as shown, and complete the square O P R S. 
From the corners H and J in plan draw lines to the 
corner O; from L and K to the corner C; from M 
and N to R ; and from F and G to S. In practice it 
would be necessary to draw only the half elevation 
X m 14 and the one-quarter plan B A B 1 , from 
which the patterns are obtainable as follows : 

Divide the cove and quarter round in elevation into 
equal parts and number the entire profile from 1 to 
14. From these small figures and parallel to the 
center line X Y drop lines cutting the miter lines 
J O and P K in plan, as shown. From the intersec- 
tions on K P and parallel to K L draw lines cutting 
the miter line L C and from these intersections and 
parallel to L M draw lines cutting the miter line 
R M, all as shown. At right angles to K L from the 
corner P draw the line P D crossing the lines pre- 
viously drawn, shown by the numbers 1 to 14. 
From these intersections, I to 14, on P D erect lines 
to any night at right angles to P D, as shown. Draw 
the line m 14 parallel to P D. Measuring from the 
line m 14 in the front elevation take the various 
hights from 3 down to 14, and place them on lines 
drawn from similar numbers in plan, measuring in 
each instance from the line m'-l4. Trace a line 
through points thus obtained ; the shaded profile 
3 to 14, will be the true profile for the gore piece on 
the line C D in plan. 

To obtain the pattern for the gore piece extend the 
line C D in plan as D W and upon this place the 
girth of the true profile through C D, measuring 
each space separately, as the spaces are all unequal, 
as shown by similar numbers on D W. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to D W, draw 
lines and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to 
D W from similar intersections on the miter line 



K C and C L. Trace a line through these intersec- 
tions ; A v , B v 3 is the pattern for the gore pieces. 

To obtain the pattern for the side marked B or B 1 
in plan take the girth of the normal profile, 1 to 14, 
in the front elevation, and place it on the center line 
X Y, as shown from 1 to 14. Through these small 
figures and at right angles to X Y draw lines and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to X Y from 
similar intersections on the miter lines ACL and 
A R M in plan. Trace a line through points thus 
obtained ; V U 1 gives the desired pattern. That 
part of the pattern indicated by n 1 forms the 
square diamond shown by 1-2-3 in the front eleva- 
tion. The pattern could also have been obtained 
from the side A O J K P A in plan. 

Should it be desired to project the miter lines in 
elevation, the method would be as follows: From 
the various intersections previously obtained on the 
miter line O J in plan draw lines parallel to J H 
until they cut the miter line H O, as shown, and 
from these intersections erect vertical lines cutting 
horizontal lines drawn from similar numbers in ele- 
vation, as shown. Through these points of intersec- 
tion the miter line 3 T is traced, this if desired be- 
ing reproduced on the opposite side at T°. It is to 
be understood, of course, that these miter lines are 
not necessary in the development of the patterns ; 
they show, however, a completed elevation. 

PITCHED RECTANGULAR PANEL 

Solution 108 

Fig. 368 is a view of a raised rectangular panel. 
The procedure of laying out the pattern by a quick 
and accurate method is shown in Fig. 369. Draw 
the plan of the rectangular panel 1-2-3-4, taking care 
that its corners will touch the circle struck from a, 




Fig. 368.— View of Pitched Rectangular Panel 

the intersection of the two diagonal lines. At right 
angles to one of the miter lines, as a-2, erect the line 
a-A, equal to the desired hight of the panel, and 
draw a line, as A-2, showing the true length of the 
corner as also the radius with which to strike the 
pattern. Using A-2 as radius and from A° in the 
lower diagram as center, draw the circle X-Y. As- 
suming that a seam is desired along a-b in plan, take 
the distance of 4-1, 1-2 and 2-3 and, starting at any 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



point on the circle in pattern, as 4, step off 4-1, 1-2 
and 2-3 ; from these points draw lines to the center 
A . Bisect the side 1-2 and obtain b. Using i-b as 



/ At- f° r Pattern \ 

— — — \2 





Fig. 369. — ■Pattern in One Piece 

radius and with 4 and 3 as centers, describe arcs at 
V and b" and intersect them by arcs struck from 
A° as center with radius equal to A°-b. Draw lines 
from 4 to b' to A° to b" to 3 ; the net pattern in one 
piece is thus completed. 



TRIANGULAR PYRAMID 

Solution iog 

In Fig. 370 is given a view of 
a triangular pyramid, such as is 
often used in the ornamental 
design of cornice work. The de- 
velopment of the pattern which 
is alike in principle to that 
found in the preceding problem, 

, is shown in Figf. ^71. The circle 
370. — View of . . , - 

Triangular Pyramid in plan is struck from the 






S PLAN 
\ ^ 

Fig. 371. — Pattern for a Triangular Pyramid 

center and the equilateral triangle is inscribed in 
the same, as shown by 1-2-3. From these three 
corners the hip lines are drawn to the center a. The 
elevation is shown above, although this is not a 
necessary procedure in the development of the pat- 
tern. The hight of the pyramid is equal to 1 a', 
which is laid off at right angles to la in plan, as 
shown from a to A. Using A-i as radius and with 
A 1 as center describe the arc b c. Set the dividers 
apart to a distance equal to one of the spaces in plan, 
and, starting from any point on the arc b c, as I, 
step off three spaces, as shown by 1, 2, 3, 1. Connect 
lines as shown. These give the full pattern. 

HEXAGONAL PYRAMID 

Solution no 

Fig. 372 presents a finished view of a pyramid, 
whose base is hexagonal or six sided. The pattern 
is obtained as shown in Fig. ^"jt,. The outline or 
circle is first drawn, as shown in the plan, and the 




Fig. 372. — View of a Hexagonal Pyramid 

hexagon is inscribed as shown. From the corners, 
1 to 6, the hip lines are drawn to the center a. The 
elevation is omitted here as unnecessary. The ver- 
tical rise of the pyramid a A is set off at right angles 
to a 2 as shown, when A 2 will be the radius with 
which to describe the pattern. Using A 2 as radius 
and with A° as center describe the dotted circle, as 



222 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



shown. Take the width of 1-2 in plan, and, starting 
from any part of the circle in the pattern, as 1, step 



0,-- -^7 




Fig. 373. — Pattern for a Hexagonal Pyramid 

off six spaces, as shown from 1 to 6 to 1. Draw 
solid lines as shown, thus obtaining the full pattern. 

DEVELOPING PYRAMIDS RE- 
GARDLESS OF THE SHAPE OF 
POLYGON IN PLAN 

Solution in 

The methods of procedure contained in some of 
the preceding problems apply also to pyramids whose 
bases are irregular. Without respect to the forma- 




tion of the outline of the pyramid's base the pro- 
cedure indicated in Fig. 369 may be followed since 
there is no differing principle involved. It is re- 
quired only that all corners of the outline or base 
touch the circle and that all hip lines drawn from 
these corners come directly over the center from 
which the circle has been struck. Thus in Fig. 374, 
we have a base whose angles are octagonal, but 
whose long and short sides alternate. Note that all 
corners inscribe the circle and that lines drawn 
from those corners come directly to the apex A, the 
center of the circle. Let us assume that the rise of 
the pyramid is A C, which is laid off at right angles 
to A B, thus that C B is the radius with which the 
pattern can be developed in the usual manner. 
Another irregularly shaped base is shown in- 



Fig. 374. — Alternate Long and Short Sides of 
Corresponding Angles 




Fig- 375- — Irregular Pyramid Having Dissimilar Angles 

scribed in the circle in Fig. 375. Each side is of dif- 
ferent length but each corner meets the circle, while 
lines drawn from these corners meet the center of 
the circle A or the apex of the pyramid, and make 
every hip line, 1 to 6, of equal length. As previously 
described the desired hight A a is laid off at right 
angles to any line, as 6 A, when 6 a becomes the 
radius from which to describe the circle in develop- 
ing the pattern. 



TRIANGULAR DENTIL, INTER- 
SECTING COVE MOLDING 

Solution 112 

Fig. 376 shows a partly finished front elevation 
of a window cap, in which triangular dentil enrich- 
ments are placed in the cove molding of the molded 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



223 



chamfer, indicated in the sectional view at a. The 
principle, to be explained, applying to the develop- 
ment of the pattern, is applicable whether the dentil 




PART 
ELEVA TION 




SECTION 



Fig. 376. — Part Elevation and Section of Window Cap, 
Showing Triangular Dentils Intersecting Chamfer Cove 

has a triangular face or other shape, and whether it 
intersects a cove mold or mold of other shape. The 
method of developing the pattern shape is shown in 
Fig. 377, and comes under that class of develop- 
ments known as miters between dissimilar moldings. 
First, draw the profile of the chamfer, as indicated 




Fig. 377. — Pattern for Triangular Dentil Return on 
Chamfer Cove 

by A B. Draw the side view of the dentil where it 
intersects the cove, as shown by 104. In line with 
the side, draw the front of the triangular dentil, 
shown by i'-^'-i". Space the intersection upon the 
cove between 1 and 4, in the side, as shown by the 
small figures 1, 2, 3 and 4; from these points draw 
horizontal lines to the left, until they intersect the 
side of the dentil 1/-4' in the front, as shown by 
similar numbers. Take the girth of the unequal 
spaces between 1' and 4' in the front and place them 
on the line i-a extended in the side as a b, as shown 



by similar numbers 1' to 4' to 1'. Through these 
small figures and at right angles to a & draw lines 
and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to a b 
from similar points of intersection in the cove mold- 
ing. A line traced through points thus obtained, as 
shown from 1' to C to i', will be the full pattern 
shape. The dots on the line 4' C show where the 
bend will be made at an angle indicated by 1' 4' 1" 
in the front. 



PATTERN FOR RETURN OF 
BRACKET DROP 

Solution 113 

In Fig. 378 are presented the front and side ele- 
vations of a finished cornice bracket, on which a 
face drop. A, is introduced with a return, B, mitering 




FRONT 



SIDE 



Fig. 378. — Front and Side View of Cornice Bracket, 
Showing Face Drop and Return 

against the cove mold in the bracket, the pattern for 
which is to be developed. The molds or profiles 
marked C, D and E indicate the profiles of the cor- 
nice molds to which the bracket will be joined. 
The method of developing the return on the bracket 
drop is shown in detail in Fig. 379, where A B in- 
dicates the profile of the upper part of the bracket, 
and C D E F the front elevation of the upper part 
of the bracket. The face of the drop is shown by 
D, C, 1", 1, 5, 1", D; H represents the center from 
which the semi-circle of the face drop is struck. 
Divide one-half of the face into equal parts, as 
shown from 1 to 5, and from the small figures 2 
to 5 draw horizontal lines to the right cutting the 
cove mold in the side elevation from 1/ to 5'. As 
the division between 1' and 2' is too great, bisect 



22 4 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



this division and obtain the point a' and project 
this point back to the face in the front elevation 
and obtain point a between I and 2. Take double 
the number of spaces contained in the half face in 
the front elevation and place them on the line i' b 
extended as J K, as shown by similar numbers and 
letters, taking care to introduce the point a be- 
tween i and 2, as shown. Through these small 



FRONT 



SIDE 
ELEVATION 




Fig. 37g. — Patern for Return on Face Drop 

figures and at right angles to J K draw lines and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to J K from 
similar intersections on the cove line i'~5' in the 
side elevation. Trace a line through points thus 
obtained, as shown by J L K; this represents the 
full pattern. 



ORNAMENTAL DROP RETURN, 

INTERSECTING NUMEROUS 

MOLDS 

Solution 114 

Fig. 380 shows the front and side of an orna- 
mental face drop, A representing the face and B 
its return, mitering on a succession of molds as 
indicated in the side. The profiles cut out on the 
side of the bracket at a, b and c, indicate the pro- 
files of the cornice against which the bracket is to 



join. The method to be followed in obtaining the 
pattern for this ornamental return is indicated in 
Fig. 381. 

First, draw the upper part of the front elevation 
of the bracket or other object, as shown by A B 
C D, and upon this draw the face of the drop, 
indicated by A B X 13 Y A, the curves being struck 




FRONT SIDE 

Fig. 380. — An Ornamental Face Drop 

from the centers a, b and c. In line with the front 
elevation draw the side elevation of both the profile 
of the bracket and the return of the drop, as shown 
by B, 1' 13' and B F E, respectively. It will be 
noted that the bends 1, 4 and 5 in the front eleva- 
tion are in line with the bends I', 4', 4", 5' and 5" 
in the side elevation. As the bend 8' in the side 
does not run in line with any bend in the front, 
project 8' to the left horizontally, thus obtaining 
the intersecting point 8 in the cove in the front 
elevation. Divide the molds in the front elevation 
into any convenient number of spaces, as shown 
from 1 to 4, 5 to 9 and 9 to 13. From these di- 
visions draw horizontal lines to the right, cutting 
the profile of the bracket in the side from 1' to 4', 
from 5" to 8' and from 8' to 13'. Where the lines 
drawn from 4 and 5 in the front elevation intersect 
the profile of the bracket in the side, indicate these 
points as 4', 4" and 5'-5". As the distance between 
i' and 2' and that between 7' and 8' are too great, 
establish an extra point in each, as a' and V , re- 
spectively, and from these two points draw hori- 
zontal lines to the left, cutting the profiles at a and 
b, respectively. Having thus found the various 
points of intersections in both elevations, the pat- 
tern may now be developed. 

Extend the line B F, as shown by F J, on which 
place the girth of the semi-face 1 to 13 in the front 
elevation, taking care to include the points a and b, 
all as shown bv similar letters and figures on F J. 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



225 



Through these small figures and at right 
angles to F J draw lines, as shown, and 
intersect these lines by lines drawn par- 
allel to F J from similarly numbered 
and lettered intersections on the profile 
l'-l3' in the side elevation. Trace a line 
through points thus obtained ; 1 H G 13 
is the half pattern shape, with a seam 
along 13 G. 



TAPERING DIAMOND IN 
A KEYSTONE 

Solution 115 

Fig. 382 presents a view of the 
diamond in a tapering keystone, which 
requires triangulation in its development, 
shows how the various patterns are developed. 

First, draw the side view of the diamond, as 
shown by 1,2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, and in its proper posi- 
tion draw the front view, as shown by 2'-2"-5"-5'. 
In practice it is necessary to draw only the one-half 
front view, the halves being alike. Through the 
center of the front view draw the center line 2>'A' 
to any length, as shown. The pattern for the top 
and bottom of the diamond may now be developed 
by parallel lines, as follows : 

Take the girth of 1-2-3 an d °f 4~5~6 in the side 
view and place it on the center line in front, as 
shown by 1-2-3 at the top and by 4-5-6 at the 
bottom. Through these small figures draw the 
usual measuring lines and intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to the center line from similarly 
numbered intersections in the front view. Draw 
lines through points thus obtained ; 2 v -3-2° will be 
the pattern for the upper head and 5 v -4-5° the pat- 
tern for the lower head. 

The pattern for the two sides will be developed 
by triangulation, but, before doing so, the true 
length of 2"-5" and of the dotted line 3'-5' in the 
front view must first be found. To find the true 
length of 2"-5" draw a line, 5" a', at right angles 
to 2"-5", making 5" a' equal to the horizontal dis- 
tance between the corners 2 and 5 in the side view, 
as indicated by 5 a. Draw a line from a' to 2", 
the true length sought. In like manner take the 
horizontal distance between the corners 3 and 5 in 
the side view, indicated by 5 b, and place this dis- 
tance on a line drawn at right angles to 3'-5' in 
the front view, as shown from 5' to V . Draw a 
line from b' to 3', the true length sought. 

The pattern for the two sides in one piece may 



FRONT ELEVATION 



SIDE 
ELEVATION 




o_f 



now be developed. Take 
the distance of 3-4 in 
the side view, which 
shows its true length, 
and place it, as shown 
by 3-4 in the face pat- 
tern. Using 4-5 in the 
pattern for the lower 
head as radius and 4 in 
the face pattern as 
center, describe the arc 
5 and intersect this by 
an arc struck from 3 as 
center with the true 
length, 3'-fc' in the 
front view, as radius. 
With radius equal to 

3-2 ° in the pattern for the upper head and with 3 in 
the face pattern as center describe the arc 2° ; inter- 
sect this by an arc struck from 5 as center and with 
the true length, a'-z" in the front view, as radius. 
Draw lines from 3 to 2° to 5 to 4 in the pattern and 
at right angles to 2°-$° from 2° and 5 draw the 



Fig. 381.— Pattern for Return 
on Ornamental Face Drop 




Fig. 382.— View of Triangular Diamond Panel on 

Keystone 



226 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



PATTERN FOR 



SIDE 
VIEW 




Fig. 383. — Pattern for Keystone Diamond 

lines 2° c and 5° d, equal to 1-2 or 5-6 in the side 
view. Draw a line from c to d in the face pattern ; 
this completes the half pattern. Trace this half op- 
posite the center line 3-4, as shown by c' d' at the 
left, c d d' c' is then the full face pattern. 



MOLDED KEYSTONE IN A CIR- 
CULAR ARCH 

Solution 116 

Fig. 384 shows the front elevation of a keystone, 
A, in a circular arch, the sides of the keystone being 
drawn radially from the center a, as shown. At 
the right of the front elevation is shown the section 
of the circular mold as well as the keystone. The 
method to be employed in laying out the patterns 



for the sides and front is shown in detail in Fig. 

385- 

Here the center line A B is first drawn, and, using 
the desired radii with a as center, part of the cir- 
cular arch is drawn, as indicated by C D E F. 
Establish the height of the key as A d, also its 
width at the bottom as d b and d 8' ; and from the 
center point a draw radial lines through b and 8' ; 
intersecting them by a horizontal line drawn through 
A in the keystone. From the various intersections 
of the arcs of the mold on the center line A B, 
draw lines to the right, as shown, and draw a 
section of the circular mold on the line A B, as 
shown by e, f, 6, 8, 9. From the intersection of 
the keystone upon the center line A B in the front 
elevation, draw lines to the right, intersecting the 
section of the circular molding at 1 and 9. Be- 
tween these points 1 and 9 draw the desired pro- 
file of the keystone, as shown. Divide its curved 
part into an equal number of spaces, as shown from 
1 to 8, and from these points draw horizontal lines 
to the left cutting the sides of the keystone in front 
elevation, as shown by similar numbers on the right 
side. 

For the pattern for the front proceed as follows : 
Take the girth of the profile of the keystone from 
1 to 9 in the section and place it on the line B A 
extended, as shown by similar numbers ; through 
these and at right angles to 1 A draw lines and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to A B from 




Fig. 384. — Keystone in Circular Arch 

similarly numbered intersections on the side 1' 8', 
as partly shown by the dotted lines. Trace the 
miter cut through these points, as shown from J 
to K, and transfer this half pattern opposite the 
center line 1 A, as shown by G H. G K J H will 
be the full pattern for front. 

The pattern for the side to miter with the front, 
also to join the circular mold, is laid out on the 
same principle. Take the girth of the various di- 
visions on i'-8' in the front elevation and place 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



227 



these divisions on any perpendicular line, as L M, 
as shown by similar numbers. Through these small 
figures and at right angles to L M draw lines and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to L M 
from similar numbers in the profile of the key- 
stone, thus obtaining the miter cut O P R V . 

As the sides of the keystone in front elevation 
run radially to the center point a, the section through 
the curved molding on this line will be the same 
as the section of the mold at the right and will con- 
stitute the shape to be cut in the pattern for sides. 
This is laid out as follows : Take the distance from 
the bottom of the keystone b in the front elevation 
to the lower line of the curved molding c and place 



PATTERN FOR 
FRONT 




it, as shown in the pattern for sides from b' to c'. 
Take a tracing of the section e, f, 6, 8, 9 and place 
it, as shown in the pattern by O T c', which com- 
pletes the pattern for the sides. Laps are to be 
allowed for joining the curved molding. 



RAISED KEYSTONE 
Solution 117 

In the view of Fig. 386, A shows a raised dia- 
mond keystone, for which a pattern is required. 
This problem presents an interesting study in draw- 
ing and development, occurring frequently in re- 
lation to window work. The methods of procedure, 
which follow, are illustrated by means of the details 
given in Fig. 387. Draw the center line A B and 
construct a sectional view on this line, as indicated 
at the right, where the profile of the cornice is 
shown, and against which the various keys will 
miter. Complete the side of the keystone, from 
which the half elevation is drawn, all as indicated 
by the dotted lines. 

The pattern for the top of the keystone is the 
first subject for development. Extend the center 



I 

1 SECTION OF 
e CIRCULAR 
MOLD 
ON LINE 
A-B 



PATTERN FOR 
SIDES 




2' 
3' 

4' 

5' 
6' 

7' 

8' 



Fig. 385. — Patterns for Molded Keystone 



228 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



line A B in the two directions, shown by A C and 
B F. Take the girth of the top, numbered in the 
section from i to 5, and place it on the girth line 
A C, shown by 1-2-3-4 and 5. Through these small 
figures and at right angles to A C draw lines, and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to A C from 
intersections 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in the half elevation. 
Trace a line through these points from D to 5 and 
transfer the half pattern opposite the center line 
A C, as shown from 5 to E. D E 5 shows the 
pattern for the top of the keystone. Take the girth 
of the bottom of the keystone in the section num- 
bered 5 to 9, taking care to introduce the inter- 
section at a between 8 and 9 ; place all these di- 
visions on the line B F below the half elevation, 
as shown by similar numbers 5, 6, 7, 8, a, 9. 
Through these small figures 5 to 9 and at right 




Fig. 386. — Raised Keystone in a Flat Arch 

angles to B F draw lines and intersect them by 
lines drawn parallel to B F from similar numbers 
5, 6, 7, 8, a', a, 9, thus obtaining the miter cut, 5 
to G in the pattern. Trace this half opposite the 
center line, as indicated from 5 to H. 5 G H will 
be the completed pattern of the lower part of 
the keystone. 

For that part of the tapering face of the key- 
stone, shown by 2, 3, 7, 8, in the half elevation, 
take the girth of 2, 3, 7, 8 in the section, and place 
it on the girth line A C, as shown by 2', 3', 7', 8'. 
Through these figures and at right angles to C A 
draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn par- 
allel to C A from the intersections 2, 3, 7 and 8 in 
the half elevation. Draw lines through points thus 
obtained, as shown by P R S T. 

For the pattern of the adjoining keystone, shown 
by b a a' b' in the half elevation, take the girth of 



b a in the section and place it, as shown by b a, on 
the vertical line J K. Through b and a and at 
right angles to J K draw lines and intersect them 
by lines drawn parallel to J K from the intersec- 
tions b V and a a' in the half elevation. Connect 
L M N O. 

To obtain the pattern for the strip, shown by 
3, 4, 6, 7, in the section, take the girth of 3-4, 6-7 
in the half elevation and place it on any vertical line, 
as shown by 3-4, 6-7 on the line c' d'. From these 
two points and at right angles to c' d' draw lines 
to any length, as shown. In the sectional view 
draw any vertical line, as shown by c d. Measuring 
from this line c d take the various projections to 
points 3, 4, 6 and 7 and place them on similarly 
numbered lines, measuring in each instance from 
the line c' d' , thus obtaining the points 3" 4" 6" 
and 7" ; this is the desired pattern. 

For the pattern of the return on the center key- 
stone on the line 1, 2, a', 8 in the half elevation, with 
its intersection against the fillet and adjoining key- 
stone, as shown in the section, take the girth of 
1, 2, a!, 8, with its intermediate points, as indicated 
by the heavy dots, and place it, as shown by 1,2, a', 
8 on the vertical line W X. Draw the usual meas- 
uring lines, as shown, and intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to W X from similar points in the 
section, all as shown by the dotted lines. Connect 
points by lines, as shown ; D 1 E 1 F 1 will be the 
desired pattern. 

For the pattern of the return of the adjoining 
keystone on the line b a in the half elevation with 
its intersection against the horizontal molding, in- 
dicated in the section between b and 9, first divide 
the curves in the mold between b and 9 into equal 
parts, as shown ; from these points draw lines par- 
allel to lines of the molding, cutting the line b a 
in the half elevation, as shown by the heavy dots. 
Take the girth of & a in elevation with the various 
intersections thereon and place it on the vertical 
line U V, as shown by similar numbers and divisions. 
Through these points and at right angles to U V 
draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn paral- 
lel to U V from similar points in the section, all 
as shown by the dotted lines. Trace a line through 
points thus obtained, as shown by A 1 B 1 C 1 , the 
desired pattern. 

The pattern for the entire side of the keystone 
can now be joined into one, as shown in the full 
pattern for the sides. First, take a tracing of pat- 
tern marked I, to which add the pattern marked II. 
Add the patterns marked III, IV and V in the 
manner shown in the full pattern for sides. With 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



229 



FULL PATTERN 
FOR SIDES 




Fig. 387. — The Various Patterns for Raised Keystone 



230 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



radius equal to c 5 in the pattern for the top and 
with e' in the full pattern as center, describe the 
arc 5° ; intersect this by an arc struck from /' 
as center and with / 5 in the pattern for bottom 
as radius. Connect lines from c' to 5 to /' in 
the full pattern, as shown. Allow laps for solder- 
ing purposes on the sides only, providing no laps 
on the top or bottom patterns. In this way the 
keystone can be made in four pieces ; that is, the 
top, the bottom and two sides are formed right 
and left. 

ORNAMENTAL TRIMMINGS ON 
URNS 

Solution 118 

When stripped ornamental trimmings are to be 
placed on urns, as indicated in Fig. 388 by that 
portion marked A, they can be developed by means 
of parallel lines, whether the rest of the urn be 
round, square or octagon. In this case, the base 



J.. 




-View of Round Ornamental Vase 



of the urn is square and the rest of it round, the 
trimmings intersecting the semi-sphere b. The pat- 
terns for the circular work were taken up in another 
part on Circular Work. 

Four semi-circles, like a, are placed around the 
circumference, with bands alternating. The semi- 
circles and bands are stripped, as indicated by c c, 
forming the intersection with the sphere. The 



method of developing the various patterns is shown 
in Fig. 389, where is found a part elevation of the 
urn ; this, however, is not essential, all requirement 
being served by the semi-circle, on which the orna- 
mental face and return strips miter. 

Therefore, first draw any horizontal lines, as c d, 
and with A on the same line as center, describe the 
semi-sphere of the required size shown by B C D. 
Below the elevation draw any horizontal line, E F, 
and intersect it at G by the vertical line drawn from 
A, in elevation. Establish the projection of the 
face strips over the sphere line, as indicated by 
B d and D c in elevation. Using G in plan as center 
and with radius equal to A c or A d in elevation, 
describe the semi-plan, as shown by H 4 X J. As 
there are to be but four semi-circular faces around 
the circumference of the sphere, draw two lines 
at 45 degrees from the center G in plan, as shown 
by G a and G b. This gives one full and two half 
spaces in the half plan. 

Should six semi-circles or other ornaments be 
desired to encircle the sphere in elevation, it will 
be necessary only to divide the half plan into two 
whole and two half spaces, thus finding the proper 
width of the semi-circle or ornament in elevation. 
This method applies to any number of face drops 
or ornaments. Having thus drawn the lines G a 
and G b in plan, to form an intersection with the 
face line H 4 X J in plan at c and /, erect from 
these two intersections vertical lines cutting the line 
c d in elevation at g and h. Establish the width 
of the band /; i and between i and r draw the drop 
or semi-circle 1-4-1 , using K as a center. In prac- 
tice it is necessary to draw only the one-half eleva- 
tion, as well as the one-quarter plan. Divide one- 
half of the semi-circle in elevation into equal parts, 
as shown from 1 to 4, and from these points and 
parallel to B D draw lines to the right cutting the 
outline of the sphere at i'-z'-t,' and 4'; from these 
intersections drop vertical lines in the half plan, 
cutting the center line E F at 1", 2", 3" and 4". 
Using G as center and with radii equal to G i'', 
G 2", G 3" and G 4", draw semi-circles as shown, 
and intersect them by vertical lines drawn from 
points 1 to 4 in the elevation, thus obtaining the 
intersections i v , 2 V , 3 V and 4 V and cutting the outer 
edge of the band in plan at i x , 2 X , 3 X and 4 X . From 
the miter line thus obtained in plan, the patterns 
can now be developed. 

For the face pattern of the drop, take double 
the girth of c, i x , 2 X , 3 X and 4 X in plan and place 
it on the line d c extended in elevation, as shown 
by similar letters and numbers from e to 4 X to e" 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



231 




23- 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



From these small figures and at right angles to 
e e" draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to e c" from similar numbers in the drop 
in front elevation. A line traced through points thus 
obtained, as shown by e P R S T U e", will be the 
pattern for one face, or one-fourth the circum- 
ference around the sphere. 

The pattern for the return strip against the sphere 
is obtained by taking double the girth from i to 4 
in the front elevation and placing it on the center 
line E F in plan, as shown by similar numbers, 1 
to 4 to 1. From these small figures and at right 
angles to E F draw lines and intersect them by 
lines drawn parallel to E F from similarly num- 
bered intersections in plan, as i v to 4 V and i x to 4 X . 
Trace a line through points thus obtained ; L M N O 
will be the pattern shape. 

On O N add a duplicate of i x , l v , r, e in plan, as 
shown by N O r' c' to the right of the pattern and 
M L r" e" to the left of the pattern. The cut r" 
L O / will miter against the sphere and the cut 
e" M N c' will miter with P R S T U in the face 
pattern. To the right in the elevation has been 
demonstrated the way to project the various points, 
so as to show the intersection of the return strip 
mitering with the face drop and sphere ; while this 
is not necessary in the development of the patterns, 
it is shown here to make clear the various opera- 
tions, should this view be desired. 

The first step is to take a reproduction of the 
various points of intersection in plan, as 4 V , 3 V , 2 V , 
i v , i x , 2 X , 3 X , 4 X , and place them in their proper 
positions to the right in plan, as indicated by 4", 
3 a , 2 a , i a , i b , 2 b , 3 b and 4 b . This can be best ac- 
complished by taking the various projections, meas- 
uring from the line 4 V 4 X to points 3 V , 2 V , i v , i x , 2 X 
and 3 X , and placing them below the line 4" 4 b on 
similar arcs, as there indicated. From the various 
intersections i b to 4 b and from i a to 4" erect ver- 
tical lines, cutting similarly numbered horizontal 
lines in elevation, thus obtaining intersections 
marked i e to 4 e and i l to 4', respectively; through 
these intersections the lines are drawn, as shown. 
These miter lines may be traced to the opposite side 
in both plan and elevation, as shown. 



THE VARIOUS FLARING STRIPS 
AROUND A BEVELED SHIELD 

Solution 119 

Fig. 390 is a view of a beveled shield, the bevels 
or chamfers being: indicated in the shaded section 



a b. The principles demonstrated in preceding 
problems may here be applied. In working out the 
full size detail it is necessary to draw only the half 
elevation, as shown in Fig. 391. 

First, draw the center line A B, to the right of 
which design the half elevation of the shield, the 
various arcs being struck from the centers C, D, E, 
F and G. Where the outer and inner arcs inter- 
sect draw the miter lines a I, b 5, c 7 and d 18. 
Space the inner outline of the shield into an equal 
number of divisions, as indicated by the small fig- 
ures 1 to 18, and from the inner intersections at 
1, 5, 7 and 18 draw lines to the centers from which 
the arcs were struck, at C, D, E and G, respect- 
ively. As the distance between points 10 and 11 
in the shield is straight, draw a line from point 
10 to the center E, and from point 11 to the center 

F. Since 15 represents the point of tangency be- 
tween the two arcs struck from F and G, respect- 
ively, draw a line from the center F to the center 

G. a° b° c° d° is a section drawn at right angles 
to io-n and gives the bevel of the chamfer around 
the entire shield. The inner outline of the shield 
having been spaced into equal divisions, measure- 
ments must be placed on the inner outline in the 
patterns. 

Three patterns will be required, as indicated by 
I, II and III in the half elevation. The first step 




Fig. 390. — View of Beveled Shield 

is to find the true radii for striking the various pat- 
terns. This is accomplished as follows : 

Take a tracing of the bevel a° b° c° d° and place 
it, as indicated by a' b' c' d'. Since the center F 
is on the inside of the curve 11-15 in the half ele- 
vation, take the distance from 11 to F and set it 
off on the line b' a' from V to F. Through F and 
at right angles to a' V draw the line X F°. Extend 
the flare c' V until it intersects the vertical line just 
drawn at F°. Extend the flare b' c' to any length 
towards C°, as shown. As the centers C, D, E and 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



>-tt 



G in the half elevation are on the outside of the 
outline of the shield and as the radii C i, E 7 and 
G 15 are alike, take the distance of any one, as C 1, 
also the distance of D 5 and place it on the line a' b' 
extended, as shown from b' to C, E, G and D, re- 
spectively, and from these points draw perpendic- 
ular lines to a' V intersecting the flaring line previ- 
ously extended at C° and at D°, as shown. This 
diagram, F° C°, then shows the various radii re- 
quired for developing the various flaring or chamfer 
strips. 

To obtain the pattern for the flare, marked I in 
elevation, proceed as follows : Using the radii CV 
and C° b' and with C 1 as center draw 
the arcs a b and 1-5. Take the girth 
from 1 to 5 in the half elevation and 
place the same number of divisions in 
the pattern for I, as shown by similar 
figures 1 to 5. From 1 and from 5 
draw lines to the center C 1 , intersect- 
ing the inner arc at 1' and at 5'. Meas- 
ure the distance from 1' to a and from 
5' to b in the half elevation and set it 
off on the inner arc of pattern for I, 
as indicated from 1' to a and from 5' 
to b, and draw the miter lines a 1 and 
b 5. a b 5-1 shows the pattern for flare 
I, with the miters attached. 

The pattern for flare II in the half 
elevation is obtained in like manner. 
Using the radii D° c' and D° b' and 
with D 1 in the upper diagram as center 
draw the arcs b c and 5-7. Take the 
girth from 5 to 7 in the half elevation 
and place the same number of divi- 
sions in the pattern for II as shown 
by similar figures, 5 to 7. From 5 and 
from 7 draw lines to the center D\ 
intersecting the inner arc at 5" and at 7". Measure 
the distance from 5" to b and from 7" to c in the 
half elevation and set it off on the inner arc of pat- 
tern for II, as indicated from 5" to b and from 7" 
to c, and draw the miter lines from 5 to & and from 
7 to c. be 7-5 shows the patterns for flare marked 
II in elevation with miter cuts attached. 

The development of flare III. involves four dis- 
tinct patterns and is obtained as follows : Using 
the radii C° c' and C° b' and with C 2 in pattern 
for III as center draw the arcs c 10' and 7-10. Take 
the girth from 7 to 10 in the half elevation, and place 
an equal number of divisions in the pattern for III 
as are shown by corresponding figures 7 to 10 on 
the outer arc. From points 7 and 10 draw lines 



to the center C 2 , inter- 
secting the inner arc at 7' 
and at 10'. Measure the 
distance from 7' to c in 
the half elevation and 
place it as shown from 
7' to c in pattern for III. 
Draw the miter line j-c. 
As the line 10-11 in the 
half elevation is drawn 
at right angles to the 
radial line 10-E take the 
distance from 10 to 11 



C' 

A 





5 6 7 
PA TTERN 
FOR n 




FINDING TRUE 

RADII FOR 

PA TTERNS 

C 
. , E 

\b D G 



■io° 



8 


I //•>•-. 


-. 


V 
10 


_.(/<?'- 


->•>< 


11 


1--W 




n 




PATTERN 


13, 




FOR in 



\c° 



Fig. 391.— Patterns for the Various Flaring Strips Around Shield 



and set it off at right angles to 10 C 2 in pattern 
for III, as shown from 10 to 11 and from 
10' to 11', and draw a line from 11' through 
1 1 indefinitely. As the radius for the flare between 
F n-15 in the half elevation is indicated by F° V 
in the true radii, take this distance and set it off 
in pattern for III. from 11 to F 1 ; using this same 
radius and with F 1 as center, draw the arc 11-15, 
equal in girth to 11-15 in the half elevation. From 
F 1 in the pattern for III. draw a line to any length 
through 15 towards C 3 , as shown. Using F 1 as 
center and with F 1 n' as radius describe an arc 
cutting the line F 1 C 3 at 15'. As C° b' in the true 
radii is the radius for the flare along 15-18 in the 
half elevation, use this radius and set off its length 



2 34 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



from 15 to C 3 in pattern for III. Using the same 
radius and with C 3 as center draw the arc 15-18, 
equal in girth to 15-18 in the half elevation. Draw 
a line from 18 toward C 3 in pattern for III., cross- 
ing the inner arc drawn from 15', at 18'. Take the 
distance from 18' to d in half elevation and set it off 
on the inner arc in pattern for III from 18' to d. 
Draw a line from d to 18. 7-18-d c will be the de- 
sired pattern for flare III in the half elevation. This 
method of joining the various arcs or flares may be 
applied to an ornament of any shape. 



SQUARE SHAFT, INTERSECTING 
A SPHERE CENTRALLY 

Solution 120 

In ornamental sheet metal work, as in the con- 
struction of finials, ornaments, crosses, etc., spheres 
or balls are used, and they may be interesected by 
various shaped shafts. 




Fig. 392.— View of Square Shaft Intersecting a Sphere 
Centrally 

Fig. 392 shows the square base of a finial inter- 
secting a sphere or ball. If this shaft sets directly 
over the center of the ball the pattern development 
is simple, being accomplished as shown in Fig. 393. 
Here A represents the center from which the ball 



is struck. Through the center A draw the center 
line A B and construct a section of the square shaft, 
indicated by C D E F, although this section may 
be dispensed with in actual practice. One side of 
the shaft, as C F, is extended until it intersects 
the ball at a. From a a line is drawn at right angles 



B 

1 
1 
I 



SECTION 
OF 

square'* shaft 
I 




ELEVATION 
Fig- 393-— Pattern for Square Shaft Intersecting a Sphere 

to A B until it intersects the center line at b. Using 
A as center and with A b as radius draw the arc 
K L and intersect it at K and L by the sides of the 
shaft extended. Establish the hight of the square 
shaft as L H and complete the elevation of one 
side of the shaft, shown by H J K b L H, which 
also becomes the pattern for one side. If the shaft 
is small in size, four of these patterns are joined 
in one to effect the full pattern. 



ANOTHER METHOD OF DEVELOP- 
ING SQUARE SHAFT 

Solution 121 

A quick and accurate rule for developing the pat- 
tern is shown in Fig. 394. Using any point, A, 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



235 



as a center, describe the sphere of the desired size. 
Directly over A draw the plan of the square shaft, 
of the required dimensions, as shown by 1-2-3-4. 
Extend one of the sides, as 1-2, until it intersects 
the ball at a and b. Bisect a b and obtain c. c a 

PLAN 



? c 2 


\ 


\ / 


\ / 


\ / 


X 


/A \ 


/ \ 


/ \ 


\ 



2 3 

FULL PATTERN SHAPE 



X 



X 

e 



X 



X 



Fig. 394. — Short Method of Obtaining Pattern for Square 
Shaft Intersecting Sphere Centrally 

or c b is then the radius for striking the pattern, 
as follows : 

Take the girth of the square shaft 1 to 4 to 1 
and place it, as shown in the pattern. Draw the 
hight 1-/1 and 1 i and complete the rectangle shown. 
With radius equal to c a in plan and with 1 and 2 
in the pattern as centers describe short arc inter- 
secting at c. Repeat this operation, using 2 and 3, 
3 and 4 and 4 and 1 as centers. Then using the 
same radius and with e as center draw the arcs 
shown ; this completes the pattern. 



OCTAGONAL SHAFT INTERSECT- 
ING SPHERE 

Solution 122 

If a shaft be octagonal and intersects a sphere 
centrally, as shown in Fig. 395, the procedure found 
in the preceding problem is employed and applied as 
shown in Fig. 396. Using A as center draw the 
sphere and octagonal shaft, as shown in plan. Extend 
one of the sides of the shaft, as 1-2, cutting the 
sphere at a and b, bisect this extended side and ob- 
tain c. Take the girth of 8 times 1-2 in plan and set it 
off in the pattern, as shown. Make the hight i-S 



in the pattern, as required. Using c a or c b in plan 
as radius and with 1 and 2 in the pattern as centers 
describe arcs intersecting each other at i, i, etc. 




Fig- 395- — Octagonal Shaft 
Centrally over Sphere 

Using the same radius and with i as center, describe 
the arcs from 1 to 2 as shown, completing the 
pattern. 

PLAN 




X 

/ 



i 



2 12 1 

FULL PATTERN SHAPE 

X X X X 

/ / / i 



i 



X 
i 



Fig. 396.— Quick Rule for Obtaining Pattern of Octagonal 
Shaft, Intersecting Sphere Centrally 



ANOTHER METHOD OF DEVELOP- 
ING OCTAGONAL SHAFT 

Solution 123 

Another method of development is shown in Fig. 
397, where the octagon intersects the sphere directly 



236 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



in the center as shown in plan. The pattern is 
developed as follows : A in plan represents the 
center from which the sphere is struck, as well as 
the octagonal section shown by the letters a. 
Through the center A draw the center line B C 
and using D upon it as a center describe a sphere 
of like size in elevation. From the left side of the 
octagon in plan drop a vertical line cutting the 
sphere in elevation at a' ; from this intersection 
draw a horizontal line to the right to any length, 
cutting the center line B C at a". Using D as 
center and with D a" as radius describe a short arc ; 
intersect this arc by perpendicular lines dropped 
from the corners a v a v in plan, thus obtaining the 
points of intersection, a v a v in elevation. Draw the 
horizontal line E F to the desired hight, thus com- 
pleting the elevation of the upper line of the shaft. 




ONE HALF FULL PATTERN 



x x x x 

D° D° D° D° 



Fig. 397. — Pattern for Octagonal Shaft, Intersecting a 
Sphere Centrally 

J L a v ay shows the true elevation and pattern for 
one side of the shaft. 

If the foreshortened elevation of the two oblique 
sides of the shaft be desired, as shown by a a v in 
plan, simply draw to the left from a v in elevation 
a horizontal line, intersecting it by the line E a' 
extended at a x . Bisect the line a' c, obtaining the 
point 2, and draw a symmetrical curve through the 
three points a x , 2, a v . In the same manner obtain 
the curve a v , 1, a x to the right. 

The one-half full pattern may be reproduced 
from J I o v a v in elevation as follows : Extend 
E F as E G and place thereon one-half of the 



girth of the octagonal section, as indicated by the 
five letters marked a on F G. Through these small 
letters and at right angles to F G draw lines and 
intersect them by lines drawn from a v in elevation, 
parallel to F G, thus obtaining the intersections 
marked a"'. With radius equal to D o" in eleva- 
tion and using all points a" in the pattern as centers 
draw arcs intersecting each other at D°. With the 
same radius and D° as centers, draw the various 
arcs marked a'" to a'", a'" a a a"' will be the half 
pattern sought. 



SQUARE SHAFT INTERSECTING A 
SPHERE OFF THE CENTER 

Solution 124 

In the two last preceding problems the shafts 
intersect the spheres centrally. In the problem now 
under consideration, shown in Fig. 398, the square 
shaft intersects the sphere off the center, as shown 
in the plan, where A is the center from which the 
sphere is struck and 1, 2, 3 and 4 the position of 
the corners of the square shaft. Through the 
center A, the center line A B is drawn, and, with 
B as center, the same size sphere is struck in ele- 
vation as shown. It now becomes necessary to 
find the intersecting points in elevation of the cor- 
ners of the square shaft, marked 1 to 4 in plan. 
The procedure is as follows : With A as center 
and using the radii A 1, A 2, A 3 and A 4, arcs 
are struck until they intersect the center line a 3' 
in plan, at 1', 2', 3' and 4'. From these small fig- 
ures 1' to 4' vertical lines are drawn downward, 
until they intersect the outline of the sphere from 
1" to 4", as shown ; from these intersections hori- 
zontal lines are drawn to the right indefinitely and 
intersected by vertical lines drawn downward from 
the corners of the square shaft 1 to 4 in plan, all 
as indicated by the dotted lines, resulting in the 
points of intersection i°, 2°, 3 and 4° in elevation. 
As already mentioned, these represent only the 
points of intersection of the four corners of the 
shaft. 

If the entire miter line were desired, showing the 
intersection between the full sides of the shaft and 
sphere, more numerous divisions would be placed 
in each side of the shaft and arcs drawn to the 
center line in precisely the manner described in 
Solution 125, Fig. 400, where a fluted shaft inter- 
sects a sphere. 

Upon finding the intersections of the corners 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



237 



1° to 4° in elevations in Fig. 398, the pattern may 
be laid out as follows : 

Extend the line C D in elevation, previously 
drawn at will, as shown by D E ; upon this place 
the girth of the square shaft in plan, as shown by 
similar numbers, 1 to 4 to 1 on D E. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to D E, draw 
lines, as shown, and intersect these lines by lines 
drawn parallel to D E from the intersections 1°, 2°, 
3 and 4° in the elevation, thus obtaining the inter- 
sections i a , 2 a , 3 a , 4 a and i b in the pattern. 

The next step is to find the radius for striking 
the various arcs in the pattern. Extend the several 
sides of the square shaft in plan as 1-2 until the 
outline of the sphere is intersected at b and c. 
Bisect b c and obtain d. Then d b or d c represents 
the radius of a circle, which would represent a 
section on the line b c. As this radius was obtained 
by a line drawn through 1-2 in plan, then using i a and 
2 a in the pattern as centers and with the radius d b 
or d c in plan, draw arcs intersecting each other at 
d' in the pattern. With the same radius and using 
d' as center describe the arc i a 2 a . In like manner 



extend the line 3-2 in plan as ye ; bisect this line 
and obtain /. Using / c as radius and with 2 a and 3 a 
in the pattern as centers, intersect the arcs at /' ; 
use /' as a center and with the same radius describe 
the arc 2 a 3 a . Extend the line 3-4 in plan and obtain 
yh; bisect 3-/; and find i. Use i h or i 3 as radius 
and with 3 a and 4 a in the pattern as centers, de- 
scribe the arcs crossing each other at i '. Use i' 
as center and with the same radius draw the arc 
3 a -4 a . Extend 4-1 in plan, cutting the sphere at 
n and 0. Bisect this and obtain /. Using I o or 
7 n as radius and 4 a and i b in the pattern as centers, 
describe arcs cutting each other at /'. With the same 
radius and I' as center describe the arc 4 a i b . This 
completes the full pattern. 

In case the shaft were octagonal, as in Fig. 397, 
and were placed off the center on the sphere, there 
would be no change of principle involved than are 
found in the procedure of Fig. 398, the eight sides 
of the shaft being extended until they intersected 
the outline of the sphere, to find the true plane, 
as was done with the square shaft. 



FLUTED SHAFT INTERSECTING A 
SPHERE CENTRALLY 

Solution 125 

Fig. 399 shows in perspective a view of a fluted 
shaft intersecting a sphere centrally. It is devel- 
oped as shown in detail in Fig. 400. Here A shows 
the center, from which the sphere is drawn as well 
as the plan view. Through A the diameters a b 




Fig. 398.— Pattern for Square Shaft Intersecting Sphere Off the Center 



2 3 8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



and c d are drawn ; upon these lines the centers 
e, f, g and // are placed, from which the section of 
the fluted column is drawn. Extend the center line 
d c, as shown, and upon it use B as a center to draw 
the elevation of the sphere alike in size to that in 
plan. At a proper distance above B draw the hori- 
zontal line C D representing the top of the column 
or flute in elevation. Since the four flutes in plan 
are alike, divide into equal parts, as indicated by 
the small figures i to 3, placing the figures in the 
manner shown. Using A as center and with radii 
equal to A-2 and A-3 draw arcs cutting the center 
line at 2' and 3'. From these points 1, 2' and 3' drop 
vertical lines cutting the sphere in elevation at 1", 2" 
and 3"; from these points lines are drawn to the 



right, as shown, and intersected by vertical lines 
drawn from similarly numbered intersections shown 
in the fluted column in plan, resulting in the points 
of intersection 1° to 3 to 1" in elevation, through 
which a line is traced showing the miter line. 

The pattern is 
obtained b y ex- 
tending C D as E 
F, upon which the 
girth of two of the 
flutes are placed 
(for the half full 
pattern), as shown 
by similar numbers 
on E F. Through 
these small figures 
the usual measur- 
ing lines are drawn 
and intersected by 
ines drawn par- 
allel to E F from 
similar numbers in 
the elevation. Trace 
a line through 
points thus obtained. E F G H J will be the desired 
pattern. In developing the pattern in practice more 
numerous spaces should be employed in dividufg the 
flutes. 




Fig. 399. — View of Fluted Shaft 
Intersecting a Sphere Centrally 




ELEVATION 

Fig. 400. — Pattern for Fluted Shaft Intersecting a 
Sphere Centrally 



MOLDING INTERSECTING A 
SPHERE OFF THE CENTER 

Solution 126 

In the case of a sphere or ball, intersected outside 
of its center, as shown in the finished elevation in 
Fig. 401, the methods of the preceding problem are 
followed. In this finished view is shown a gable 
molding intersecting a sphere off the center. The 
same procedure applies, whether the molding in- 



ORNAMENTAL SHEET METAL WORK 



239 



tersects vertically, horizontally or at an oblique 
angle, as shown. If the mold intersects at an ob- 
lique angle, as indicated by a b, it is but necessary 
in developing the pattern to assume that a is a pivot 
and b is drawn over until the oblique line a b stands 
in a vertical position, as a c. Then the pattern can 
be developed as shown in Fig. 402. The sphere in 
plan is first drawn from the center A ; through this 
the vertical center line A B is drawn ; using B 
upon it as a center the elevation of the sphere is 
drawn, as shown, and of similar diameter, as in 
the plan. The section of the molding is now drawn 
in its desired position in plan, as shown, and the 
curved part is divided into equal spaces. As the 
halves of the molding are symmetrical, it is neces- 
sary to divide only one half into equal spaces, as 
shown by the small figures, 1 to 6. Using A as 
center and with the spaces in the upper half as 
radii draw the arcs from points 2, 3, 4 and 5 until 
they intersect the center line at 2', 3', 4' and 5', 
from which intersections carry vertical lines to the 



elevation, cutting the sphere in elevation at i°, 2°, 
3 , 4 , 5° and 6°. From these points of intersec- 
tion, 1° to 6°, draw horizontal lines to the right and 
intersect them by vertical lines dropped from sim- 
ilar numbers in the profile in plan, as shown. Trace 
a line through points thus obtained, as shown from 




Fig. 401. — Finished Elevation of Gable Mold Intersecting 
Sphere Off the Center 

2 V to 5 V in elevation. This will represent the miter 
line, between the ogee mold and sphere. It should 
be understood that, so far as the pattern is con- 
cerned, this miter line is not necessary, because the 
projecting points for the pattern could be taken as 
well from the intersections 1° to 6° on the sphere. 
To complete the elevation of the molding, draw the 




ELEVATION 

Fig. 402.— Pattern for Molding Intersecting a Sphere Off 
the Center 



line D C at the desired hight, as shown. 

The pattern is laid out as follows : Extend the 
line D C as E F and upon this place the girth of 
the full profile in plan, as shown by similar num- 
bers on E F. Through these small figures and at 
right angles to E F draw lines and intersect them 



240 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



by lines drawn parallel to E F from similarly num- 
bered points in the elevation. Trace a line through 
points thus obtained between 3, 6 and 3, as shown 
from G to H. 

To find the pattern cut for the members 1-2, 
and 2-3 of the molding in plan proceed as follows: 
Extend the lines 1-2 and 2-3 in the plan until they 
cut the outline of the sphere at a b and c d, respect- 
ively. Bisect the line a b and obtain the point e. 
Also bisect the line c d and obtain A. Using A c 



or A d as radius, and G and J, also H and K in 
the pattern, as centers, describe arcs intersecting 
each other at A°. With A° as centers, with the 
same radius, draw the arcs G J and H K. Using 
e a or e b in the plan as radius and from L and J, 
also K and M, in the pattern as centers, describe 
arcs intersecting each other at e' Using e' as cen- 
ters and with the same radius describe the arcs L J 
and K M. 1-L-J-K-M-1 then represents the full 
pattern shape. 



PART XII 

CONSTRUCTION OF ELECTRICALLY ILLUMINATED SHEET 

iMETAL SIGNS; WITH METHOD OF SECURING THE 

RECEPTACLES FOR WIRING 



A PROFITABLE field of endeavor available to 
sheet metal workers occurs in connection with 
electrically illuminated signs, the construction of the 
framework of which brings into exercise the mech- 
anical skill of the sheet metal worker as well as his 
equipment of material, tools and appliances. 

It will be seen that the construction of such signs 
is essentially simple and although it may sometimes 
be necessary to engage the electrician to give atten- 
tion to the wiring equipment the main function, that 
of the construction of the sign, involves chiefly the 
manipulation of sheet metal. In the case of orders 
for signs in quantity, it may prove the better part 
of economy to have the electrical contractor do his 
customary part of the work, preferably at the sheet 
metal shop in order that the sheet metal worker may 
put on the outside caps and turn in the laps properly 
so as to be assured of the best workmanship. In 
like manner if the painting is executed at his shop 
the sheet metal worker may be certain that the work 
is well done and frequently a saving of cartage will 
result. 

Storekeepers, merchants and competent adver- 
tisers are making extensive use of illuminated signs 
to draw attention to their wares or locations so that 
it is but fitting that a well equipped sheet metal shop 
should be prepared to furnish such signs as they are 
likely to be called upon to make. 

It may be well to mention that the laws of States 
and municipalities vary as to the conditions under 
which electric street signs may be hung and 
used. It is therefore wise to inquire of the 
local electric company regarding regulations and 
also concerning the laws and ordinances governing 
the character of sign that it is desired to erect, so as 
to avoid later difficulty, as it is unwise and costly 
to attempt the construction and erection of a sign 
that will meet some legal obstacle. 



BLOCK LETTER SIGNS 

Solution 127 

While there are a number of types of illuminated 
signs of sheet metal we will take up the block letter 
sign as prominently typical of this class of work, 
proceeding with the word "HATS" as an example. 
The question of the suitable hight of the letters, a 
matter usually determined by the merchant, is gov- 
erned by the distance to which it is desired to make 
the sign effective. If it is required that the sign 
ma)' be read from a distance of 250 to 300 feet 
only, a letter 12 inches high is large enough. If it 
is to be read at a distance of 350 to 500 feet, it will 
be advisable to employ a letter at least 15 inches and 
preferably, 18 inches high. This letter will give the 
best results, and does not cost very much more. 

Therefore let us proceed on the basis of the 18 
inch letter. The next step is to determine the size 
of background which is a simple matter. Letters 18 
inches high will require a background at least 24 
inches high, and as electrical letters should never be 
crowded closely together we may allow the same 




Fig, 403. — Frame and Background for Illuminated Sign 

distance for width, that is, 24 inches for each letter. 
This will allow for the space on either end of the 
sign, giving a background 8 feet long. 

The first step in the construction is the building 
of a frame, of \]/ 2 x iy 2 x % inch angle iron, 2 by 8 
feet, as shown in Fig. 403. The ends are joined se- 
curely at a. After punching % i ncn holes for stove 
bolts about 4 inches apart on the face of the angle 
iron frame, a piece of 20 gauge galvanized iron is 
bolted on the inside of the frame, placed inside to 



241 



242 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



better protect it from damage. Upon this a draft 
of the letters is to be made. In this connection it is 
suggested that the reader refer to the chapter on 
Drawing and Lettering, where this branch of the 
subject is considered. 

In constructing the letters, first cut strips of No. 
20 gauge galvanized iron 1 J4 inches wide and, after 



Fig. 404. — Strips for Forming Outlines of Letter 

notching them 34 inch deep, as shown in Fig. 404, 
bend them in the folder along the dotted lines. 
This is to allow the strips being bent into the shape 
of the letters, preparatory to being soldered to the 
background. Solder on first the strips, making the 
outside line of the letters and afterward filling in the 




Fig. 405. — Outlines Completed 

inside strip. This work when finished, will appear 
as shown in Fig. 405. 

On completing the bottom part of the letters (that 
part coming against the background), next drill 
two holes }i inch in diameter through the back- 
ground at a point near the bottom on the inside of 
each letter. These are for the wires to pass through 
when the sign is finished. 

The faces of the letters are next cut from metal 
of the same gauge iron as the strips, when we are 
ready for drilling the holes for the lamp receptacles. 

These can be punched, or drilled with an ex- 
pansion bit in an ordinary brace. The holes must 
be the size of the receptacle used. There are sev- 
eral good receptacles on the market which are espe- 
cially designed for electric signs. Different makes, 
however, differ slightly in size, so it will be impos- 
sible to state the exact size of hole to be drilled. It 
is approximately 1% inches in diameter. 

There should be at least four receptacles in each 
perpendicular bar of the letter, and not more than 
five. The number of receptacles in the other bars 
must be determined by the shape of the letter. A 
good example is shown in Fig. 406. 

Before placing the receptacles in the holes it will 
be necessary to cut additional i*4 mcn strips as be- 
fore, and solder them around the edge of the face 
of the letter on its under side, being careful that 



sufficient allowance is made for the top to slip over 
the outline strips of the letters already soldered to 
the background, just as a cover slips over the top 
of a can. 

When this is done we are ready for the electrical 
part of the work, which is very simple when one 
understands it. 

The receptacles are screwed into the holes in the 
face of the letter, from the back, when No. 14 
B & S gauge double braided, rubber covered wire 



<c 




' 


< 





' 




































J° 


\ 


) 





• 



Fig. 406. — Spacing Receptacles 

is connected under the binding posts on the back 
of the receptacles, as shown in Fig. 407. The ends 
of the wires are left about 12 inches longer than the 
letter. Each letter is treated the same, and the ends 
of the wires are then led through a separate battery- 
bushing (standard in the electrical trade), for each 
wire and the bushings are then slipped through the 
holes between the outlines of the letters in the back- 
ground. The face of the letter is then slipped over 
the outline letters and tacked down with a little 
solder on each side and at top and bottom. 

The front of the sign is now ready for painting, 
which is a matter of individual taste. An especially 
good electrical effect is gained by a white letter on 




Fig. 407. — Back of Letter Showing Wiring 

black background. Before otherwise painting, how- 
ever, the entire surface should have two coats of 
red lead paint to prevent rusting. 

Inspection of the back of the sign will now reveal 
a flat surface with a lot of wires coming through 
holes. As each letter contains enough receptacles 
to make a complete circuit it will be best to make 
four circuits for the whole sign. This is easily done 
by attaching a wire to each of the wires that come 
through the background from each letter and, wrap- 
ping each pair with insulated tape, leading them to 



ELECTRICALLY ILLUMINATED SHEET METAL SIGNS 



243 



one end of the sign, then into a piece of iron con- 
duit and through the wall of the building to the cut- 
out box containing the branch cutouts and fuses on 
the inside of the building. 

If the sign is in a very much exposed place, it 
will be well to enclose the back of it with galvanized 




Fig. 408. — The Completed Sign 

sheet iron to protect the wires. When the sign is 
complete it will appear as in Fig. 408. 

If a double-sided sign is required, in order that 
it may be read from both sides, it is but necessary 
to make two like the one described and place them 
back to back. 

The method of hanging the sign will vary with 
its size and weight. If it be a sign having only one 
side and is not too heavy, it can be hung by lugs, 
fastened to the angle frame. If it is large and 
heavy it may be necessary to use brackets or other 
supports as the circumstances demand. 



CONSTRUCTION OF PANEL SIGNS 
Solution 128 

The construction of what are known as panel 
signs is illustrated in Figs. 409 and 410. 

The use of panel signs is much more common 
than that of any other type because of the fact that 




Fig. 409. — Panel Sign with Ornamental Border 



electric lighting companies rent them out at a given 
price per month including the furnishing of current. 
Therefore, these signs can be sold most readily to 



electric lighting companies, and sheet metal work- 
ers should have no difficulty in securing the business 
in their localities. 

The construction of panel signs is more simple 
in many respects than that of block letter signs. 
There are not letters to cut or form, these being 
painted on the panel in the center of the design. 
Many designs are made and sold, but the most 




Fig. 410. — Panel Sign with Plain Border 

popular style is the rectangular, whose size is about 

sixty inches long by thirty-two inches high, outside 
dimensions. The panel of this sign should be 
about 18 inches by 48 inches, depending on the size 
of the ornamental sheet metal border. 

To construct a sign of this description it is neces- 




Fig. 411. — Angle Iron Frame for Double-Faced Panel Sign 

sary first to build two angle iron frames. In the 
case of a sixty-inch sign the frame should be fifty- 
six inches long by twenty-six inches high, as shown 
in Fig. 411. 

Angle iron ^4 inch by % inch by y% inch is heavy 
enough for this frame, as the body of the sign 
affords additional strength. 

The next step is to procure the ornamental border 
which may be obtained of dealers in pressed metal 
work. Proceed to put the lamp receptacles in the 
borders in practically the same manner as in con- 



244 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



nection with the block letter signs, holes being 
punched or cut to admit the body of the receptacle 
which is passed through and fastened from the 
front by aid of two small screws. 

After placing the receptacles, say twelve in num- 
ber, at equal distances apart around the edge of the 
border, they are wired or connected together with 
No. 14 B and S rubber covered wire, care being 




Fig. 412. — Wiring a Panel Sign 

taken to have about three feet of wire extending 
from the last receptacle, as shown in Fig. 412. 

After wiring the receptacles, it is next in order 
to fasten the border to the angle iron frame, which 
is usually done by means of stove bolts. 

In placing the receptacles in the border, care 
should be taken to have them far enough toward 
the center so that they may readily pass the inside 
edge of the angle iron frame. 

After securing the border to the angle iron 
frame, the other side of the sign should be prepared 
in the same manner and two sides fastened to- 
gether with short pieces of angle iron placed about 
5 inches apart at the four corners of the frames as 
shown in Fig. 411. 

When this is finished the open space around the 
angle iron frames must be enclosed with sheet iron, 
preparatory to which a strip of band iron is placed 
on the two short angles at the top to serve as hang- 
ers, as shown at A and A in Fig. 411. 

When the angle frame has been covered, the 
wires left extending from the last receptacle on 
each side in Fig. 412 should be passed through holes 
on the end of the sign which is to go nearest the 
building. 

Finally, the panel on each side of the sign must 
be placed in position. This panel is merely a flat 
piece of galvanized iron cut to fit into the rabbet or 
flange on the inner edge of the border, and is 
fastened by means of solder, at several places 
around the edge. As it is sometimes necessary to 
change the lettering on the panel, it is advisable not 
to fasten it more tightly than is necessary to pre- 
vent its being blown from its place. 



After proceeding to this point the sign is turned 
over to the painter, who will letter the panel and 
paint the border according to requirement. 

Hanging the Panel-Sign 

Panel signs are hung on outriggers of iron pipe 
fastened to the wall of the building by a pipe flange. 
They are supported either by wire or by chains, as 
may be desired, or as indicated in either Figs. 409 
or 410. 

The ornamental heads for the pipes can be pro- 
cured from any first class hardware store, as may 
also the chains. 

The sign is connected to the electric light wires 
in the same manner as in the case of block letter 
signs. 

Two illustrations are given as being representa- 
tive styles. In Fig. 409, the more ornate design, 
the lamps project squarely from a flat surface, 
while in Fig. 410 the receptacles are set in the bevel- 
ing surface of the frame or molding around the 
panel, thus illuminating the letters more strongly. 



ENAMELED LETTER SIGNS 

Solution 129 

The enameled letter sign is of the most simple 
construction. It embodies some of the features of 
both the block letter and the panel sign, as will 
readily be seen by comparing the construction of 
all three styles. 

To serve the purpose of an example we have 
selected the name GRAND. Let us assume that the 
hight of the letters is to be 14 inches. As enameled 
letters should be much heavier than those of any 
other material, we will allow for letters of 12 inches 
a width, say 16 inches. This will afford ample space 
between the letters and make them stand out clearer 
both at night and in the day-time. Following the 
foregoing method of deciding upon the size of 
letter and the necessary space between, we find that 
this sign should be 8 feet long by 2 feet high. 

The next step is to build a frame of angle iron 
in the manner already described. This frame should 
be of practically the same size as the sign, that is, 
8 ft. X 2 ft- When the sign is to be double faced, 
a space of at least 6 inches should be left between 
the two faces in order to afford easy access to the 
wiring when assembling the parts. 

The next step is to build a frame of angle iron 
for the faces of the sign. These should be punched 



ELECTRICALLY ILLUMINATED SHEET METAL SIGNS 



245 



at the edges so that they may be bolted to the frame, 
in which corresponding holes have been punched, 
when they are ready to be placed in position. Draft 
the letters on the faces of the sign and cut the holes 
in the sheet, for the lamp receptacles, as shown in 
Fig. 413. 




Fig. 413. — Placing Holes for Lamp Receptacles 

When this has been done on both faces — for we 
are assuming that we are building a double face sign 
— the faces are turned over to the painter to paint 
the background and letters, which is done in the 
same manner as upon any other flat surface signs, 
the only difference being that in this case the letters 
are studded with electric lights. 

While the painter is doing his work proceed to 
finish the sheet metal work, cutting pieces of sheet 
iron to enclose the edges of the frame. This is done 
as in the other forms of signs, care being taken to 
have pieces of band iron fastened to the frame to 
serve as hangers. The bottom edge should be re- 
movable, so as to allow access to the electric wires at 
any time. When the faces have been returned by 
the painter, the lamp receptacles are added in the 
manner previously described. When all receptacles 
are in position they are wired as heretofore indi- 




Fig. 414. — Back of Sign, Showing Wiring 

cated, care being taken not to put more than one 
letter on a circuit. By bearing this in mind much 
trouble will be avoided. The back of each face 
should now appear as in Fig. 414. When both faces 
have been thus wired it remains only to fasten them 



to the frame. This is easily accomplished by the use 
of stove bolts, when the wires are carried through 
porcelain bushings in one end of the sign to the 
cut-out box, as in the other signs. When a final coat 




Fig. 415. — The Finished Sign 

of paint has been applied, the sign should appear as 
in Fig. 415, and is ready for erection. 

If a more ornate design is desired it may easily 
be secured by adding regular moldings or special 
sheet metal ornaments. 

The illustrations given herewith show some signs 




Channel Letter Sign. 



now in use. Fig. 416 shows a very well designed 
block letter sign in channel form. It has letters in 
good proportion and the molding on the edge adds 




Fig. 417. — Scroll Design 

much to its appearance. Fig. 417 shows a scroll 
effect, which is very ornamental as a sign in the 
day-time, but very poor at night. Since the main 
purpose of an electric sign is for advertising at 
night, effect is lost if it is not readable. 

Fig. 416 shows a block letter sign with the slight 
variation that the sides of the letters are carried up 
beyond the faces of the letters, in other words a 
channel form, and are fastened to the face by means 
of a lock seam. The effect is very good, as the tend- 



246 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



ency is to thus concentrate the rays of light from 
the electric bulbs. The general design is also very 
good, presenting a dignified and substantial ap- 
pearance. 



'. I 



Fig. 418. — Another Design for Channel Letters 

Fig. 418 shows a panel sign of great simplicity, 
which is its chief claim to recognition. It may be 
built in a manner both easy and inexpensive, so that 
it can be sold in many places where a more elabor- 
ate design would not be acceptable. 



-;--■?- -n 



GRAND 



v 



-*r 



Fig. 419. — A Simple Design 



The various styles shown in this discussion are 
perhaps as good illustrations of panel signs as can 
be found. They are the accepted styles of the large 
lighting companies, and are more commonly sold 
than any other. It is an easy matter, however, to 
create a design with a little time and study. 

Experience has taught that the plain, straight, 
black and white work proves most effective from an 
advertising point of view. 



DEVELOPING THE PATTERNS 
AND ASSEMBLING A SHEET 
METAL PANELED ELEC- 
TRIC ILLUMINATED SIGN, 
WITH METHODS OF 
HANGING 

Solution 130 

A sign, simple in construction, yet attractive, and 
at the same time furnishing exceptionally good 



street illumination, is shown in Fig. 420. It is en- 
tirely of sheet metal construction, and hangs from 
an iron pipe supported from the building. This sign 
is made to hold twenty-four incandescent lamps, 
twelve on each side. 

Drawings to indicate the necessary features in 




Fig. 420. — Illuminated Sign 

the pattern forms and assembling are reproduced 
in Fig. 421. The method of developing the patterns 
is so elementary that it does not require further 
demonstration than that given under Face Panel 
Miters. It is to be understood, however, that both 
the front and the back of the sign are the same. The 
end of the front elevation shows the general form of 
the sign, which when considered in connection with 
Fig. 420, and the vertical section through the center 
Fig. 421, gives a very good idea of its general form. 

In the vertical section, Fig. 421, A represents the 
top cap ; B, the bottom cap ; C, the top frame or 
molding; D, the bottom frame or molding; E, the 
sheet on which the lettering is painted, or the sign 
board proper, and F, the stamped beading planted 
on the outer face of C and D. Care should be taken 
to have one edge of the stamping at the outside ends 
of the sign kept even with the end of the lock bend, 
so that when the caps are put on, they will slide 
freely over the projecting edges of the caps and 
touch the stamping, thus making a closed and con- 
tinuous surface. 

Make the pattern for the top molding in the 
regular way, erecting lines from the miter line in 
the end of front elevation to be intersected by lines 
on stretchout not shown, as in a panel miter. The 
measurements to be placed on the stretchout line 
should be taken from the drawing of the vertical 
section. Connect the proper points of intersection 
and the pattern for one end of the top molding is 
obtained as shown. This should be left without laps, 



ELECTRICALLY ILLUMINATED SHEET METAL SIGNS 



247 



except the one shown at G. In putting the dots in 
the patterns, it should be remembered that it will 
save trouble, and will be easier for the operator of 
the brake, if they are kept 3/16 inch away from the 
edge of the cut. 




PATTERN FOR 
TOP MOLDING 




PATTERN FOR 
BOTTOM MOLDING 




PATTERN FOR 

TOP 

AND 

BOTTOM 

CAPS 



The pattern for the end moldings is made from 
the pattern for the top molding, but laps are 
added as shown. K is a lap that is about l /$ inch 



3£ Pipe 



(1^=- 





a 






.- 


A 














S=H 


" tt 




■< — 


_^xl 




PUP 


Band Iron 








1 





I 




SIDE ELEVATION " E 

SECTION 

Fig. 422. — Details of Hanger 



less than the depth of the pocket, so as to preserve 
a good clearance, that it may not interfere with the 
putting together of the miters. L suggests where 





o 

L 



o 

L 



PATTERN FOR 
END MOLDINGS 



o 

L 



o 

L 




SECTION OF CAPS 

AND HOW CORNERS 

SHOULD BE TURNED IN 



PATTERN FOR 
END CAP 



VERTICAL SECTION 

THROUGH 

CENTER 



Fig. 421. — Patterns and Details 



While the cuts and the face of the frames are all 
the same, there is a slight difference relating to the 
pockets, I, where E slides in and rests at the base. 
When making the pattern of the bottom molding, 
no pocket should be provided for at H, as is shown 
in the top molding at I. Laps should also be left 
as indicated on pattern for bottom molding. 



holes may be punched in the metal for lamps. These, 
of course, should be of appropriate size for the 
electrical fittings and placed where desired on the 
special sign under construction. 

The patterns for the top and bottom and end caps 
are developed in the regular manner. It is only 
necessary to determine one corner, for all corners 



248 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



are alike, on top, bottom and end caps. Care must 
be taken as to how the laps are turned, so that they 
will not run against water coming down from the top 
of the sign. The section of caps and how they 
should be turned in is shown clearly in the detail 
in Fig. 421 by A and B. 

As to the size of the face E, we need only to re- 
member to allow % inch to the inside measurement 
of the hight to permit it to enter the pocket I, J / 2 inch 
and to turn out at the bottom *4 inch, and to add 1 
inch to the inside length to permit it to enter the 
side pockets in the end moldings l /> inch each. 

The method of constructing hangers in such a 
manner as to combine rigidity and permanence is 



shown in Fig. 422, where the various letters A, C, 
E and I correspond to similar letters in the vertical 
section through the center in Fig. 421. Care must 
be taken to prevent rust from weakening the hanger, 
or where it is attached. 

On a 5 ft. sign, two hangers, as shown in Fig. 
422, should be used, one placed about 10 inches 
from each end. The hangers are made of y& in. by 
1 in. galvanized band iron, which should be bent and 
fastened with bolts as shown. A % in. galvanized 
pipe will safely support the sign, and can be securely 
attached to a wooden part of the building with a 
floor flange, the street end being supported by gal- 
vanized iron chains as shown in Fig. 420. 



PART XIII 



CONSTRUCTION OF HOLLOW METAL WINDOW 
SASHES, FIRE DOORS AND SHUTTERS 



FRAMES, 



HOLLOW metallic windows may be divided 
into six general types, namely : The Sliding, 
the Pivoted, the Casement, the Top Hinged, the 
Stationary, and the Tilting Window. 

Sliding Windows are those having two sashes 
ordinarily designed to slide up and down. The 
motion of these sashes may be independent each of 
the other and be controlled by weights, in which 
case the type is designated the double hung window; 
or one sash may counter balance the other, in which 
case the window is called counterbalanced. 

Pivoted windows are those having one or more 
sashes mounted on pivots, allowing each movable 
sash to be turned on an axis. 

A Casement window is one having its sashes at- 
tached to the frame by hinges at a vertical edge, op- 
erated after the manner of a door. Top hinged win- 
dows are those which have the sash attached to the 
frame by hinges at the upper horizontal edge. 

A Stationary window is one having the sash in a 
fixed position. 

A Tilting window is one in which the sashes are 
attached to the frame and each to the other in such 
a manner that a sliding and tilting movement of the 
sashes is effected. 

A Twin window is one whose sashes are mounted 
alongside, instead of vertically. 

Some windows embody combinations of the fore- 
going types. For example, a window having a 
Pivoted upper sash and Stationary lower sasli is 
called a Pivoted upper, fixed lower sash, window. A 
window having two sashes, each of which is pivoted, 
is called a Double pivoted window. A window hav- 
ing a top hinged upper sash and a double hung lower 
sash is usually designated a Double hung window 
with top hinged transom. 

Frames and Frame Member 

Hollow metallic windows of any type consist of a 
frame and one or more sashes. Frames formed 
with offsets or shoulders to receive the masonry as 
at a in Fig. 423 are called rabbeted frames. Frames 



not provided with rabbets are generally formed with 
metal wings or flanges, which are designed to be 
built into the masonry, as shown in Fig. 424. These 
are called walling-in flanges. When the frame is 
installed in an old wall, the flange of the frame is 
spiked to the brick work, as shown in Fig. 425. 

The frames of all windows having a single sash 
and the frames of sliding sash windows having two 




Fig. 423. — Jamb with Rabbets or Offsets to Receive Masonry 



sashes are composed of two horizontal members 
called the head and sill and two vertical members 
called the jambs. The head is that portion of the 
frame which forms the top, the lower surface of the 
head being called the soffit and the upper surface the 
top of the members. 

The sill is that portion of the frame which forms 
the bottom. The upper surface is called the tread 
and the lower surface the base. The jambs form 
the sides of the frame, the part in contact with the 



249 



250 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 







HOLLOW METAL WINDOW FRAMES, SASHES AND FIRE DOORS 



251 



masonry being called the back of the jamb and the 
part in contact with the sash the front of the jamb. 
Projections on the front of the jambs, designed 
to limit the movement of a movable sash, are called 
stops. Sliding sash windows are frequently 




Walling-ln 
flange 



Fig. 424. — Frame with Walling-in Flange 

equipped with stops which may be separated from 
the jamb ; these separable strips are commonly re- 
ferred to as sash guide strips, the strip dividing the 
two sashes being frequently designated sash parting 
bead. 

The frame of a pivoted window having two sashes 
is composed of the same members as the frame of 




Fig. 425.— Frame Installed in Old Wall Opening 



a sliding sash window and an additional horizontal 
member, which is called the transom bar. 

The frame of a twin window is composed of a 
head, sill, two jambs and a vertical division member 
which separates the sashes. 

That part of the wall structure between two win- 
dows is called the mullion. The mullion may be an 
integral part of the wall structure or it may be built 
in with the window. 

Sashes and Sash Members 

The sash is that part of the window construction 
which holds the glass. It may be permanently at- 
tached to the frame, in which case it is called a fixed 
or stationary sash; or it may be so constructed that 
its position can be changed, in which case it is called 
a movable sash. A sash is composed of horizontal 
and vertical sash members. The horizontal members 
at the top and bottom of the sash are called rails. 
In sliding sash windows the rails which join at the 
middle of the window when the sashes are closed, 
are called the meeting rails. The vertical members 
at the sides of the sash are called stiles. 

In casement windows the stiles to which the win- 
dows are attached are designated hinge stiles and 
the stiles to which the locking mechanism is at- 
tached are called lock stiles. When casement win- 
dows are made in two parts, meeting at the middle, 
the stiles in contact are called meeting stiles. 

The intermediate members separating the panes 
of glass are called muntins. If the muntin is in- 
stalled in a vertical position, it is called a vertical 
muntin, if in a horizontal position, a horizontal 
muntin. Muntins which are so designed that one 
part may be removed for glazing are called separ- 
able type muntins; muntins which cannot be taken 
apart for glazing purposes are designated non-sep- 
arable type muntins. In architecture, the word 
"muntin" is employed to designate the vertical sash 
members separating the lights from one another, 
while the horizontal members are called bars. The 
commonly accepted shop term is "vertical and hori- 
zontal muntin." 



CONSTRUCTIVE FEATURES OF 

REGULATION TYPE OF DOUBLE 

HUNG WINDOW 

As Approved by the National Board of 
Fire Underwriters 

Solution 131 

In Fig. 426 is shown the elevation of a single 



252 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN I UTTER 



window, also the elevation of mullion windows, in- 
cluding a section. Detailed working sections are 
given through A, B, C, D, E and F. Attention is 
particularly called to the explanatory notes given 
with the detailed sections in the illustration. These 
details have been reduced from full size sections 
and may be relied upon for substantial construction. 
They have been used extensively in practice and have 
been approved by the National Board of Fire 
Underwriters. 

Hints on Glazing 

All glass must be at least % mcn thick at the 
thinnest area. The wire mesh in the glass must be 
not larger than J4 in., and the wire used for such 
mesh must be not less than No. 24 B. & S. 
gauge. The plane of the wire mesh shall be prac- 
tically midway between the two surfaces of the 
glass. The actual bearing of glass in grooves shall 
be at least JHi in. at all points. Since the maximum 
depth of the grooves is J4 in., a space of yfc in. is 
allowed between the bottom of the groove and the 
edge of the glass. Careful glazing is necessary to 
prevent an edge of glass resting on the bottom of 
the groove, thus decreasing the bearing- surface on 



Good 



Bad 





Joint not well 
filled with Putty 



Glass not 
centered 
in Groove 



Glass 
resting on 

bottom of 
K -Crooue 



Fig. 427. — Proper and Improper Glazing 

the opposite side, shown in Fig. 427. This figure 
also shows the correct and incorrect methods of 
glazing. In glazing it is required that the glass be 
set in putty and that all spaces between glass and 



metal forming the sides and bottom of grooves be 
well filled with the same material. The surface of 
putty should be flush with the top of the groove and 




\£7 







Good 




Fig. 428.- 



-Another Example of Proper and Improper 
Glazing 



should be finished smooth. Fig. 428 shows the cor- 
rect and incorrect methods of glazing in connection 
with the stiles and muntins. 



COMBINATION PIVOT HUNG AND 
STATIONARY FIRE PROOF 
WINDOWS 

As Approved by the National Board of 
Fire Underwriters 

Solution 131a 

In Fig. 429 is shown the constructional features of 
a combination pivot hung and stationary window. 
An elevation of a single window, as also of mullion 
windows, is shown, together with a section. De- 
tailed sections showing construction are given 
through A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, and I, to which are 
appended explanatory notes : these should be read 
carefully. In sections C, D, E. and I the method of 
fastening the hardware is clearly shown. Section C 
shows where the fusible link is attached to the 
bottom lock. Note the construction of the mullion 
in section G, to the 5 in. I beam. 



VARIOUS TYPES OF AUTOMATIC 

CLOSING, TIN CLAD FIRE 

DOORS, SHUTTERS, ETC. 

Solution 132 

To one not familiar with the various types of tin 
clad automatic closing fire doors and shutters some 



HOLLOW METAL WINDOW FRAMES, SASHES AND FIRE DOORS 



253 



^ 1 . ; . 



ebi-fsLQ'mqzfDJCiz. 



^S'egment-H'ead^^ 



NOTES 

IWutlions are required for 

Openings ouer 5-0"ln width. 

Transoms Bars are requir- 
ed for Openings ouer 9~0 
in height, of similar con- 
struction as Mullione. 
The design of Bar will vary 
ding to style of Tran- 
som Sash used. 

Bach Glass Light must not 
be ouer 720 n Inches. 




SECTION G 

THROUGH MULLION 



Fig. 429. — Combination Pivot-Hung and Stationary Fire-Proof Window 



254 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




p 

u 



z 



< 



w 



u 



"J 'C 



3 
< 



> 

I 

d 



HOLLOW METAL WINDOW FRAMES, SASHES AND FIRE D 



ow _^ 



^55 



difficulty may be involved in becoming conversant 
with the various constructions, unless information, 
such as is indicated in Fig. 430, is available. In this 
illustration ten types of doors and shutters are 
shown. Types I, 2, 3, 6, 7, and S are balanced by 
weights to facilitate and adjust opening and closing. 
They are also attached to fusible links, so that if the 
door be open in case of fire, the link will fuse or melt 
when the weight of the door will close it auto- 
matically. Types 4 and 5 show single and pair 
swinging doors. Type 9 shows double fire shutters, 
and type 10, a double fire door used to cover belt 
holes in walls, etc. The method of covering the 
doors or shutters with tin plate, the construction of 
the lock, and like information can be obtained from 
the Board of Fire Underwriters in any city. 

The Boards have as a rule special booklets con- 
taining just such information. In this connection it 
may be helpful to call attention to the methods of 
laying out the pattern for metal corners with the 
miter fold, the pattern for the right hand sheets, 
for the center sheets, for the left hand sheets and 
for the finishing course at the top. All of these 
methods can be used for a fire door or shutter of 
any size. 



PREPARING THE PATTERN SHAPE 

FOR CORNER MITER FOLD AND 

METHODS OF CONSTRUCTING 

LOCK AND FOLD 

Solution 133 

Perspective views of the corner miter fold are 
shown by A and B in Fig. 431. The method of lay- 
ing out this pattern is illustrated in the diagram of 
Fig. 432. In covering any door or shutter the four 



four corners and scribe a 5g in. edge around the 
entire sheet. Through the center of the 20 in. length 
draw the line A-B. The thicknesses of the door to be 
covered being known lay off this thickness on the 









All Edges 
Cut Off at -\ 
45°Anqle \ 




1 




\ 




/ 


K° 


A N 








■^/ All Edges. 
4b°/ 5 4' Wide > 


■ 








/ ~* 


u" ( 


sC 


1 G 


/ F 




/ 


Thickness 




\ 




\ 


of Door 




; 


' D 


\ 


\ f 


\ 








\45° 




\ 


J" 


\v 


/ 


y 


\ 


/ B —? 






Fig. 431.— Method of Putting on Sheet Metal Corner with 
Miter-Fold 

corners are first laid on with a full 14 x 20 in. sheet, 
without any cutting, making a miter fold instead 
of a mitered seam, prepared as shown in Fig. 432. 
Ascertain that the sheet is perfectly square on all 



Fig. 432.— Pattern of Corner Miter Fold for Tin Clad Fire 
Doors and Shutters 

sheet, directly in the center of the sheet, as shown by 
C-D and E-F, crossing the center line A-B at G and 
H, from which points draw lines at angles of 45 de- 
grees, intersecting the scribed edge lines at K and 
J, respectively. Take the distances from A to K and 
from B to J and set them off from A to K° and 
from B to J° ; cut away the % in. edge between K 
and K°, also between J and J°, as shown. All edges 
on the entire sheet are notched off at 45 degree 
angles, as indicated. When a pattern is laid out as 
just described, it may be saved for future use, a 
change being made for the thickness of the door as 
required. 

The edges on the sheet are now bent all one way, 




Fig. 433- — The Corner Miter Fold, Edged and Creased, 
Ready for Bending 

as shown in Fig. 433. To facilitate the bending of 
the miter lock when these corners are made by hand, 
creases should be made along the top as shown, 
from a to b and from c to d ; while creases along th« 
bottom of the sheets should be made from e to /, 



256 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



from i to j and from g to h. These creases can be 
made quickly by hand, by means of the rounded 
point of a three-cornered file, laying the sheet on a 
number of folded papers, thus providing a soft layer 
into which the crease is impressed. The file point 
should be rounded, not sharp, to avoid cutting the 
metal. After the creases have been made, two right 
angular bends are provided along the lines C-F and 
E-D ; then the creases a-b and f-c, also d-c and g-h, 
are turned right and left on the hatchet stake, the 
sheet being thus brought into the position, shown in 




Fig. 434. — Bending the Corner Miter Fold 



Fig. 434. When this sheet is slipped over the corner 
of the door it will appear as shown in diagram A 
in Fig. 431 ; after the miter fold is closed with the 
mallet it will have the appearance shown in diagram 
B in that illustration. The remainder of the sheets 
along the edges of the door are made of tin in 20 



A 

A 



% 



II 
II 

II 

L-.M 



SECTION 
OF LOCK 
ON A-B 



J) 



Y 

B 



Fig. 435. — Bending 

and Edging the 

Stiles 




Fig. 436.— Method of Covering 
Around Edges of Door 



in. lengths, formed and edged as indicated in Fig. 
435, all edges being locked into one another, as 
shown in Fig. 436. No nails are used in fastening 
the locks of the stiles. 



LAYING OUT PATTERNS FOR 

RIGHT HAND STARTING AND 

CENTER SHEETS AND THE 

METHOD OF APPLYING 

Solution 134 

The pattern for the right hand starting sheet may 
be laid out as shown in Fig. 437. This pattern is 
used also for all center sheets. Care must be taken 
to have all locks made y% in. wide, for nailing under 
the seams ; all nails are placed in the center of the 
joints, in the manner to be described. The formation 



- 



Top of Sheets 



SECT/OH THROUGH HORIZONTAL EDGES 



A 



V 
/a 

m 



AH Edges Around 

Entire Sheet Must 

be B / s In. Wide 




/s Locks 



-7— 






Jv t 1 



fJU 



Fig. 437-- 



-Pattern for Right-Hand Starting and Center 
Sheets 



of the locks through the horizontal edges is shown 
at the top of Fig. 437, while the formation of the 
vertical edges is shown at the right in the diagram. 
With the formation of the edges known, lay out 
the pattern for the right hand starters and center 
sheets for all courses as follows : On the one 20 
in. side and the two 14 in. sides of the sheet scribe 
lines with the dividers y% in. apart, as shown. On 
the opposite side of the 20 in. sheet, scribe three 
widths of y$ in. each and notch the corners care- 
fully, as shown. To allow for the thickness of the 
metal, and to have the seams lie smooth, notch out 
the corners at A and A, according to the dimensions 
shown in the diagram. The required number of 
sheets are now cut from this pattern and the edges 
bent, as indicated in the sectional views at the top and 
to the right of the diagram. In forming the double 
lock at D, it is first bent on the line a-a in the pat- 
tern, thus giving it the appearance of diagram A in 
Fig. 438. Along the line 1-1 in A, which corresponds 
to 1-1 in the pattern in Fig. 437, a right angular bend 
is made, thus giving the formation shown in dia- 
gram B in Fig. 438. The operations just described 
are those required in edging the sheets by hand ; 



HOLLOW METAL WINDOW FRAMES, SASHES AND FIRE DOORS 



257 





Fig. 438. — Bending Double Edge on Right Hand Side of Sheet 




Fig. 439. — Finished Edged Sheet 




where large quantities are required, special dies 
are used. These save time and labor. 

The opposite three locks shown in Fig. 437 are 
bent as called for in the two sectional views, this 
completing the sheets, one of which is shown in 
Fig. 439- 

The method of applying the right hand starter 
is shown in Fig. 440 where a-b-c-d represents such 
starter. The sheet is first hooked along the edge d-c 
of the metal stile in the manner indicated to the 
right by diagram A, nailing through the three thick- 
nesses of metal as shown by a. The sheet is then 
turned down, as indicated by the dotted line B. 



APPLYING 
THE SHEET 
ALONG d-c 




Fig. 440.— Method of Applying the Right Hand Starting 
Sheet 



After the sheet has been so turned down the double 
lock a in Fig. 439 is sprung outward with the fingers, 
as shown in the diagram D in Fig. 440 ; the lower 
edge is sprung into the lock of the stile at i, as 
shown ; then the lock at is drawn tightly together 
and nailed through the four thicknesses of metal, as 
shown in diagram A in Fig. 441, and the standing 
lock e is turned down as shown in diagram B. 

The operations described must be carried out in 
applying the middle sheets, until the finishing sheet 
at the left side of the course is reached. This re- 
quires a different pattern, which will be described 
in the next solution. 



258 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 





LUJJJ. ' ' ' / 



i 




•'iLUL 



Fig. 441. — Final Operations in Closing the Lock 



PATTERN FOR LEFT HAND FIN- 
ISHING SHEET AND THE 
METHOD OF APPLYING 

Solution 135 

Fig. 442 shows how the pattern for the left hand 
finishing sheet is laid out. The entire length of a 20 
in. sheet is used, its width being determined by the 
requirements, that is, the distance between the stile 
and the next middle sheet. Note that double locks 
are placed on the two long sides of the sheet, as 
shown in the pattern, while two single edges are 
placed on the narrow ends, also shown. The method 
of turning these edges is like that previously de- 

s~ Top of Sheet -^ 



SECTION THROUGH HORIZONTAL EDGES 



as Required 



All Lock 
% In. Wide 



°r 



|L 



Fig. 442.— Pattern of Left-hand Finishing Sheet 



scribed; the formation of the locks is indicated in 
the two sectional views. When springing in the 
double locks a and b, shown in the section through 
the vertical edges, they are drawn outward with the 
fingers, as already explained, and as illustrated in 
Figs. 439, 440 and 441. When the second course is 
started, in fact all courses, invariably break joints 
as in tin roofing, taking care that the sheets lie close 
against the door, in order to avoid the occurrence 
of air spaces. When the top or last course is reached, 
new patterns must be developed for the top course 
right hand starting sheet, the top course center sheet 
and the top course left hand finishing sheet. 



LAYING OUT PATTERN FOR 

RIGHT HAND STARTING AND 

CENTER SHEETS FOR TOP 

OR FINISHING COURSE, 

AND METHOD OF 

APPLYING 

Solution 136 

Fig. 443 illustrates the method of developing the 
pattern for the right hand starting and center sheets 
for the top course. Note that a double lock is pro- 
vided for along a-b and b-c, all corners being notched 

„-Top of Sheet -^ [1 



SECTION THROUGH HORIZONTAL EDGES 






^ 



Same as T 



As High 
as Required 



All Edges 
% In. 



# 



\AV 



N 



^ ** 
^ <--> 



IL 



All Angles 
45° 



Fig. 443. — Pattern of Right-hand Starting and Center 
Sheets for Top Course 



out at angles of 45 degrees, as shown, so that they 
will miter when flattened. Notches of the dimen- 
sions noted are also made at the corner T, in this 
way the thicknesses of the metal are provided for. 
The forming of the locks of the vertical and hori- 
zontal edges or joints is done as previously de- 
scribed. In laying these upper course starters, the 
double locks must be sprung into the edges on the 
stiles, both at the side and top. The same pattern is 
used for the center sheets, springing the double 
lock into the edge of the sheet to the right and into 
the edge of the stile along the top. 



HOLLOW METAL WINDOW FRAMES, SASHES AND FIRE DOORS 



259 



PATTERN FOR LEFT HAND FIN- 
ISHING SHEET AT TOP COURSE 
AND METHOD OF APPLYING 

Solution 137 

Fig. 444 shows how the pattern for the upper 
left hand finishing sheet is laid out. In this case the 
sheet is notched, as indicated. The lower edge is 
bent at right angles downward, while the three re- 
maining sides have double locks, as shown in each 

s~- Top ofSheet^ n 



\SECTION THROUGH HORIZONTAL EDGES 



'8 
Ml' 



All Locks 

or Edges 

5 /a In. Wide 



As High and 
— as Wide — 
as Required 



i 5/' 

" 1 7 

X 



All Angles 
45° 



CD Co 

* p 

a: "J 



r 






45° 
> Angles 



IL 



Fig. 444. — Pattern of Left-hand Finishing Sheet for Top 
Course 

of the two sections, through horizontal and vertical 
edges. As stated in the preceding problem, these 
double locks must be sprung into the edge or lock 
of the center sheet at the right and into the lock at 
the stile both at the left side and at the top. This 
completes the full set of patterns for any size of 
fire door or shutter. Once developed, these patterns 
may be saved for future use, the thickness C-D of 
Fig. 432, being merely changed to conform to the 
thickness of the door under construction, or what is 
termed the wood core. 

COVERING SEGEMENTAL HEADS 
.IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF TIN- 
CLAD SHUTTERS 

Solution 138 

Fig. 445 gives a general view of a tin clad shutter. 
The operations of covering such shutters do not 
differ from those applied to fire doors. If shutters 
are made in pairs, the edges coming together should 
be slightly beveled, not rabbetted. This method per- 
mits the shutter to be readily opened and closed and 
aids in making a close fit. If the shutters have seg- 
mental heads, as shown by a and b in the illustration, 
the heads should be covered, as indicated in the three 



views A, B and C in Fig. 446. In the first operation 
at A, the main sheets on both sides of the shutter are 
flanged out a half inch, as shown by a and a ; then 
they are nailed as shown by b and b. A cap covering 




1 ' 1 ' 1 1 — 
Fig. 445. — Tin-clad Fire Shutters with Segmental Heads 

with a y% in. lock is now slipped over a-a, as shown 
in diagram B. The locked edges are then turned 
down with the mallet, as shown in diagram C. It 



'2 Flange 




Edges 
Turned Down 



Fig. 446. — Covering Segmental Heads 

will be understood that locks facing the weather 
must be laid so that rain will flow over the seam, 
not into it. 



26o 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



FIREPROOFING WOODEN WIN- 
DOWS IN OLD BUILDINGS 

Suggested Methods Requiring Moderate 
Equipment 

Solution 139 

Where it is necessary to fireproof windows, as is 
often called for by state and municipal ordinances 
designed for protection against fire, it is not always 
expedient for the owner of a building to rip out the 
entire frame and sash and replace it with a modern 
hollow metal frame and sash. To do so would un- 
doubtedly insure the best manner of fireproofing the 
window openings but the cost and the attendant in- 
convenience to tenants often prohibit such a sub- 
stitution. 

If some method could be evolved whereby these 
windows could be rapidly and economically fire- 
proofed a way out of the difficulty would be found. 
Some have tried to cover the old frames, that is, the 



fe 






■ 

-A_ 



J 



i_ 






r 




r~ 



x — [ 



TZ ^^^^S- 1 



i_ r 



Fig. 447- — General View of Typical Factory Window 

jambs, head and sill of the window, with light gal- 
vanized sheet iron such as in kalamein work. They 
have also tried to cover the sash in the same man- 
ner, replacing the usual thin window glass with 
heavy wired glass. This was a decidedly difficult 
procedure because of the poor condition of the 
woodwork and most of the work had to be done at 
the window, which involved unsatisfactory condi- 
tions for the tenant. 



The following is a plan adopted by many. While 
there are probably variations in the different jobs, 
this outline of the procedure will perhaps be of ser- 
vice. In Fig. 447 is given a general interior view 
of a typical factory window. In a majority of cases 
there is no interior trim or embellishment, but if 
there be such, it is not difficult to either leave it 
intact or cover it with sheet metal. In general the 
procedure is to make a sleeve casing to cover the 
eld wood sill, the two jambs and head ?.nd then to 
hang new sashes of hollow metal. 

A horizontal section of the right hand jamb (fac- 
ing the window while standing inside) is given in 




Fig. 448. — Section on Line A of Fig. 447 

Fig. 448 with the stile of the lower sash. This is a 
section viewed on line A of Fig. 447. In Fig. 449 is 
given a horizontal section of the left hand jamb on 
line B of Fig. 447, and stile of upper sash. In Fig. 
450 is a vertical section of the head and top rail of 
upper sash on line D of Fig. 447. Fig. 451 is a ver- 
tical section of the sill and bottom rail of lower sash 
on line C of Fig. 447. Fig. 452 is a vertical section 
of the meeting rails of the sashes on line E of Fig. 
447. The horizontal section of the muntins on line F 
is given in Fig. 453. 

The pattern cutting requires more of a practical 
knowledge of construction than ability in scientific 
developing of surfaces of solids, because all patterns 
are simple, but the joints and miters must be de- 
signed to have positive strength, and the profiles 
alid the like designed with the equipment of the 
shop in mind. The profiles or shapes of the various 



HOLLOW METAL WINDOW FRAMES, SASHES AND FIRE DOORS 261 



parts shown in the accompanying diagrams are de- 
signed with the limitations of the ordinary hand 
brake in mind, and cause no greater difficulties in 
bending than might be expected for such work. Of 




Fig. 449. — Section of Jamb on Line B, Fig. 447 

course, with a modern power drop brake the bend- 
ing operations would be greatly simplified. 

From the diagrams it will be seen that the right 
hand jamb of sheet metal has the parting head and 




the inside stop parts integral to the general part of 
the jamb, those on the left hand jamb being re- 
movable. One who has observed a carpenter re- 
move and rehang sash has noticed that he only re- 
moves the stops on one side, usually on the left 
hand jamb. It is suggested to do the same with the 
sheet metal window, especially when it is desirable 
to conserve working time, material and the like. 




Fig. 450. — Vertical Section of Head on Line D of Fig. 447 



Wood Sub Si 1 1 or Stool-'' 
Fig. 451. — Vertical Section of Sill on Line C, Fig. 447 

The diagrams show that all the sash rails or stiles 
are in three parts. This is necessary if only a hand 
brake is available to form these parts. However, 
if a drop press is available, the rivet joint in the 
glass pockets can be done away with. The pockets 
of the top rails of both the lower and upper sashes 
are very deep. The idea is to allow for pushing the 
glass up far enough to pass over say point B, Fig. 
45i, of the sash and then dropping it into that pocket. 

A piece of wood is placed on the bottom rail of the 
lower sash, as shown at A so that the hand sash 
lifts may be fastened on with ordinary wood screws. 
Likewise wood is placed in the top meeting rails 
for the catch lock, as may be seen in Fig 452. Note 
the band iron knee A, riveted to the bottom rail of 
the upper sash. The upper sash usually is fixed 
rigidly in place so that it is always closed. This 
method of supporting and securing the upper sash 
in place is adopted by many. The wood screw 
B driven through the jamb — there being a knee 
at each jamb — is the medium of support for the 
knee. There are devices almost without number 
patented, or on which patents have been applied 
for, that allow the upper sash to slide, and a fusible 
link attached to a chain or cable which in turn is 



262 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



fastened to weights either in the sash itself or 
weight box of the frame parts in case of fire, and 
the upper sash immediately slides closed. That, 
however, is a matter for the individual shop or de- 
signer. So long as it is permissible to keep the 
upper sash fixed closed it seems that the knee 
method should be the most acceptable, as the more 
complicated the closing mechanism is the less will be 
opportunity for mishap and danger of the window 
not operating at a crucial moment. 

It is primarily essential that the lower sash be 
self-closing. The method usually employed is to 
fasten a chain by a heavy wire hook to the slide or 
filler piece B, Fig. 448, say 6 in. from the top rail. 
This hook is inserted in a hole punched into the 
band iron strip A, which, of course, is riveted to the 
slide piece. The chain passes over the new 
pulley shown in Fig. 450 and is fastened to 
the weight in the jamb box. This is done on 
one side only. The chain on the other side 
of the sash, instead of being fastened to the 
side of the sash, is extended down to the 
bottom of the sash and fastened to a fusible 
link secured to the wire hook on the band 
iron about midway on the slide piece of the 
bottom rail of the lower sash. The fusible 
link is placed here so that should the win- 
dow be open it is more accessible to the play 
of the flames than if it were placed, as many 
do, at the top rail of the lower sash and 
when but one weight is released the sash 
will not drop with force as it would if both weights 
were released. 

In Fig. 453 is shown the muntin or center vertical 
bar of the sash. Part A is riveted and soldered to 
the sash while part B is removable, the screw plate 
and muntin pin joining the two after the glass and 
putty is set in. 

Fig. 454 shows how a sheet metal case placed be- 
tween the muntin pins acts as a truss member and 
stiffens or reinforces the muntin. These muntins 
are somewhat wide and heavy. Should the sash be 
narrow they would appear clumsy. They should 
then be made as shown in Fig. 455. 

The method of fireproofing windows as here de- 
scribed comprehends making the sheet metal frame 
complete in the shop, riveting and soldering all 
joints or miters as strongly as possible, but leaving 
off the outside sheet metal casings. Also, the sash 
are made complete and glazed in the shop when all 
are shipped to the job. 

At the job the wood sashes are removed, then all 
the stops on the jambs, head and sill, also the old 
pulleys. The sheet metal frame is then forced into 



the window opening and nailed here and there. 
Outside casings are then put in position, the Pitts- 
burgh seam clinched over them and the new pulley 
screwed in place. It is to be understood that an 
opening for the pully has been previously cut in 
the sheet metal jamb, the old hole in the wood 
jamb doing service as before. And, again, open- 
ings are cut as at A', Fig. 447, for weight pockets. It 
is best to have the pockets here rather than in the 
old position or runway, in the jambs, for the lower 
sash. These pockets are covered with sheet metal 
suitably formed and held in place by two wood 
screws. If required, and as shown in the diagrams, 
the wood subsill and lintel are covered with sheet 
metal. 

The upper sash is now put in position, shored up 




,] g- 45 



Fig- 455 



Fig. 454 

Rails of Sashes on 



Fig. 452. — Vertical Section of Meeting 

Line E of Fig. 447 
Fig. 453. — Horizontal Section of Muntins on Line F of 

Fig. 447 
Fig. 454. — Core to Reinforce Muntin 
Fig. 455. — Attenuated Muntins for Narrow Sash 

tight to the head of the frame, and while held there 
the wood screws B, Fig. 452, are driven in. Then 
cover piece D, is put on and held by one or two 
wood screws as shown, and a tack of solder applied 
here and there on the pocket joints. 

The parting bead or stop of the left hand jamb 
in Fig. 449 is inserted in the pocket of the jamb and 
securely nailed. Note the wood reinforcing core in 
the stops to stiffen them and to give a body for 
driving the nails. The chains are hooked to the lower 
sash, passed over the pulley and hooked to the 
weights — or vice versa. The inside stop is now nailed 
on and the job completed by attaching the hardware. 

It very often occurs that the weight of the new 
lower sash equals the combined weight of the old 
upper and lower sashes, so that the four old weights 
will serve for the new sash. If not, they may be dis- 
posed of and new ones installed. 



PART XIV 



DEVELOPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE 
TYPES OF SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



VARIOUS 



IN taking up the developments applied to the con- 
struction of metallic skylights, it may be well to 
offer suggestions to the reader as follows : 

All skylights should be constructed with the aim 
that they shall be watertight. For sash bars, curbs 
and ventilators, galvanized iron or sheet copper is 
required, the glazing to be of either hammered, 
ribbed or wire glass. Provision should be made for 
the escape of condensation, and consideration must 
be given to necessary allowances for expansion and 
contraction of the metal under the influence of 
changing temperature, to prevent breakage of glass. 
The curb or frame should be placed not less than 
five inches above the finished roof line. Flat sky- 
lights should have a pitch of at least three inches 
to the foot. Double pitch and hipped skylights 
should have a pitch of at least six inches to the foot 
or should be given the regulation pitch of eight 
inches to twelve inches, known as one-third pitch. 

In glazing skylights make with putty a bed on re- 
bate of the bar, to give the glass a level or even 
bearing, thus providing security against breakage. 
Allow a space of at least one-eighth inch on each side 
of the glass for expansion and contraction. The 
joints between the glass and metal bars should be 
covered with metallic caps and secured to the bar by- 
copper clips or brass bolts, as was explained in the 
chapter on Terms and Definitions and as is consid- 
ered further in the ensuing treatment. 

In spacing the skylight bars in a large skylight 
care should be taken that the glass panes are not 
over eighteen or twenty inches wide and that each 
pane does not exceed 720 square inches in area, re- 
gardless of the size of the skylight. This is one of 
the regulations of the National Board of Fire 
Underwriters for the construction and installation 
of skylights, and we suggest that it will be to the 
advantage of the sheet metal worker to procure a 
copy of these regulations, obtainable on application 
to the National Board. 

263 



PATTERNS FOR A FLAT SKYLIGHT 

WHEN ROOF CURB HAS THE 

REQUIRED PITCH 

Solution 140 

Fig. 456 shows a view of a flat skylight, set on 
a curb already in the roof at the required pitch. Note 
in the lower curb under the center of each pane of 
glass, that small condensation or weep holes are 



TOP 



:: 



uu^<^/^ 




-View of a Flat Skylight Set on a Pitched Curb 
in Roof 



punched, to allow the drip to flow to the outside. 
The method of laying out the patterns for flat sky- 
lights of this nature is shown in detail in Fig. 457, 
where the skylight has been laid out in a horizontal 
position to facilitate development. In laying out the 
patterns it is necessary to make a drawing about 
only twelve inches long, simply to obtain the vari- 
ous miter cuts. The full size patterns of the re- 
quired lengths can then be laid out directly on the 
sheet metal, employing the short miter cuts men- 
tioned. 

First, draw a sectional side view, as shown, mak- 
ing the formation of the top and two side curbs 
alike to the profile marked A. In line with this pro- 
file and at a distance of about twelve inches, draw 
the profile of the lower curb B. Note its formation 
and that the arrow indicates the position of the 



264 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




PATTERN FOR BAR 
Fig. 457. — Patterns for Flat Skylight to be Set on a Pitched Curb 



PATTERN FOR 
FRONT OF CURB 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



265 



weep holes and the hem edge, 2-3, represents the 
thickness of glass. In line with the curbs A and B 
draw the profile of the bar marked C. This small sec- 
tional view serves the requirements for laying out all 
patterns, including skylights of the largest size. A 
sectional front view is shown which, however, is 
not essential in the development of the pattern but 
is presented only to make each step clear to the 
reader. It will be understood that where the runs 
of the rafters or bars are very long, the bars and 
curbs must be re-enforced to give strength and 
rigidity against snow and wind pressure. The con- 
struction of re-enforced bars will be considered in 
the progress of our treatment. 

To obtain the pattern for the common bar C, num- 
ber the one-half profile, shown from 1 to 6, and 
through this draw lines intersecting the curbs A and 
B, as shown. Take twice the girth shown from 6 to 
1 in the profile C and place it on the vertical line 
D E, as shown by corresponding numbers 6 to 1 to 6. 
Through these small figures and at right angles to 
D E draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to D E from the points where the bar C in- 
tersects the curbs A and B. By following the dotted 
lines in the pattern the points of intersection can 
readily be found. Trace a line through points thus 
obtained. F G H J K L will be the desired pattern. 
As the profile of the curb marked A is the profile 
for the top, as well as for the sides of the curbs, the 
pattern for the sides can be laid out as follows : 
Number the various corners in the profile A, shown 
from 1 to 10, and place this girth on the vertical 
line M N, as shown by like numbers. Through these 
small figures and at right angles to M N draw the 
usual measuring lines ; intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to M N from similarly numbered intersec- 
tions in the profile A at the left and from the inter- 
sections in the profile B at the right, where lines 
drawn from 1 to 10 in A intersect the profile B ; all 
as shown by the dotted lines in the pattern. Trace a 
line through these points. O P R S T will be the 
pattern for the side curbs, T S being the miter cut 
at the top and R O the miter cut at the bottom. If 
the girth lines drawn through M N are extended to 
the right and lines are projected vertically from the 
profiles A 1 and A 2 in the front view, the pattern 
thus obtained, as shown by S 1 T 1 , and S 2 T 2 , will be 
alike to the miter cut, S T, already obtained in the 
side pattern. Therefore the miter cut S T can be 
used for the top as well as for the side curbs. 

The pattern for the front of the curb is obtained 
by numbering the corners in the profile B as shown 
by the small figures, 1 to 9, and placing this girth 



on the vertical line U V below the front view, 
as shown by the small figures, 1 to 9. Through these 
small figures and at right angles to U V, draw lines 
and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to U V 
from similar points in the profiles, A 1 and A 2 . A 
line traced through points thus obtained, as indi- 
cated by W X Y Z, will be the right and left miter 
cut for the lower curb. As previously stated, the 
sectional front view is not essential in the develop- 
ment of the front or back curb patterns, since the 
profiles A 1 and A 2 are similar to A in the side view, 
and the miter cut S T in the side pattern can be 
used instead of S 1 T 1 or S 2 T 2 in the back pattern. 

The pattern for the front of the curb may be ob- 
tained without the front view as follows : 

In the sectional side view, draw any line, as n 0, 
at right angles to the lines of the skylight ; then, 
after the stretchout lines have been drawn in the 
front curb pattern, draw any line, as n' 0', parallel 
to U V. Measuring from the line n o in the side 
view take the various projections to the proper 
points where the lines drawn from the profile B in- 
tersect the profile A and place them to the left of 
n' 0', thus obtaining the miter cut Y Z, which is sim- 
ilar to the cut X W. 

LAYING OUT FULL SIZE PAT- 
TERNS ON THE METAL 

The arrow points marked on all patterns indicate 
the points from which measurements should be 
taken in laying out the full size patterns on the 
metal. Assuming that the flat skylight is to be 7 ft. 
9 in. wide by 6 ft. run of bar, as shown in Fig. 456, 
and that the skylight is to have seven lights of glass, 
the various patterns are laid out as follows : 

Using the pattern for the sides in Fig. 457, mark 
off upon the sheet the miter cut S T ; then measure 
6 ft. from the arrow point T to O, move the pattern 
over to point O, and scribe the cut O P R. Allow 
laps on the side pattern, as shown. Care must be 
taken that T O always remain on a horizontal line. 
In like manner lay off the pattern for the front of 
the curb, measuring from the arrow points below 
Y and X a distance of 7 ft. 9 in. taking care to place 
the weep holes above line 5, as shown, in the center 
of each light of glass. The same measurement of 7 
ft. 9 in. is laid off for the pattern of the back curb, 
measuring from T 1 to T 2 . 

The length of the six common bars is obtained as 
follows : 

Proceeding with the curb measurement as 7 ft. 
9 in. and assuming that the shoulders 3-4 in A in 



266 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



side view and 5-7 in B each measure one inch or a 
total of two inches, we have 7 ft. 9 in. less 2 in which 
equals 7 ft. 7 in. Assuming that the distance 4-3 in 
profile B is 1*4 in., then 7 ft. 7 in. plus i l 4 in. equals 
7 ft. 8J4 in., the length of the bars from the arrow 
points K to G in the bar patterns. Allow laps where 
indicated by the dotted lines. 

As the condensation gutter of the bar C in the side 
view miters with the condensation gutter of the 
upper curb A, it will be necessary to obtain the 
miter pattern in the gutter of the curb A as follows: 

In the pattern for the back of the curb draw any 
vertical line, as i'-4', as shown. Measuring from the 
line 1-4 in the profile C in the side view take the 
horizontal projections to points 6 and 5 and place 
these distances on either side of the line i'-4' in the 
back curb pattern on similarly numbered lines, as 
shown, thus obtaining the miter cut A c , as indicated. 
To this miter cut laps are allowed ; they miter with 
the cuts L and J in the pattern for bar. 

The distance that the cut A° should be spaced in 
the pattern for the back is computed as follows : 

The width of the top is 7 ft. 9 in. less 2 in. for 
the shoulders r and r in front view, leaving 7 ft. 7 
in. or 91 in. As the skylight is to have 7 lights, as 
shown in Fig. 456, 91 in. divided by / gives 13 in., 
the space between the bars a a, etc. This represents 
the distance sought from the corner t to the center 
i'-4' in the pattern for back in Fig. 457. The rule 
applies to a skylight of any size and to curbs of any 
shape. 

CONSTRUCTING LARGE SINGLE 

PITCH SKYLIGHT AND THE 

METHOD OF FRAMING AND 

RE-ENFORCING THE BARS 

Solution 141 



For the development of large flat skylights the 
method of obtaining the various patterns is alike in 
principle to that considered in the preceding prob- 
lem. In this case we will assume that a single pitch 
skylight, whose size is 20 ft. x 20 ft., as is indicated 
in Fig. 458, is to be constructed. We will indicate 
methods by which the bars may be reinforced and a 
watertight joint obtained between the panes of glass. 

The dotted lines in the elevation, as indicated by 
a a and b b, show the rafters which should run 
through underneath the skylight, the width of the 
skylight being spaced in three equal parts, so that 
the beam will not come below a light of glass and 
thus throw a shadow. The skylight has been spaced 
for fifteen lights of glass, each 16 in. wide, thus 
bringing a skylight bar directly over the center of 
the beams b b as shown, but making the width of 
the end lights only 14^2 in. each, because the 




Fig. 459. — One-fourth Full-size Section 

shoulder C in Fig. 459 takes up ij^ in. of space. As 
the length of the glass required will be 20 feet, as 
shown in the section in Fig. 458, this space should 
be divided into three equal parts, as shown by c d, 
d d and d c, and cross beams placed in position, on 
which the cross bars can rest, as shown also by i i 



!k- 



-20'0- 



16 k 




REQUIRES 1* BARS lo'^PART 

II !! 

! !! 

!!s !!j 

ELEVATION 

Fig. 458.— Section and Elevation of Single Pitched Skylight Showing Framing Required 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



267 



and j j of the front elevation, while on the curbs C 
and c, the frame of the skylight can rest. 

If the regulations of the Board of Fire Under- 
writers are followed, the spaces cd, dd and dc in the 
section will again be divided by a cross bar, to bring 
the area of each light of glass within the regulation 
area required, namely 720 sq. in. 

It is important that not less than two beams be 
placed lengthwise and two crosswise under the sky- 
light, which, in addition to the re-enforced core 
plates in the bars, will take care of the snow and ice 
load as well as the wind pressure. 

In giving the details of the skylight, one-fourth 
full size sections are shown, which will need to be 
enlarged four times to obtain the full size detail. 
Thus in Fig. 459 is shown a one-fourth full size sec- 
tion through the skylight bar and curb on the line 
A B of the elevation in Fig. 458. A in Fig 459 
represents the wood curb, which is flashed 
before the skylight curb is set over it. The 
metal curb is formed up in one piece from B 
to C to D to E to F. This formation brings the 
half bar C D E F directly upon the center of the 
wooden curb, as shown. The skylight bar is formed 
as shown by H J K, in which the iron core plate is 
riveted as shown at a. When the core plate is in 
position, the bottom of the condensation gutters is 
re-enforced by the metal plate K L H, locked at K 
and H as shown. This makes a rigid bar, which is 
secured to the upper and lower metal curbs c and 
c in the section in Fig. 458, the bottom of the bar 
resting upon the two cross beams at d and d. 
Where the skylight bar rests on the rafters b b in 
the elevation, they are, if made of wood, 
chamfered on each side as indicated by a and a in 




construction as indicated by A in Fig. 461, the rafters 
shown by b b of Fig. 458 and the cross beams d d in 
the section being then of iron, I shaped, as shown 
by B in Fig. 461. 

A one-fourth full size section through C D of 
Fig. 458, showing the lower and upper curb as well 
as the cross bar or clip, is shown in Fig. 462, in 
which A and B show respectively the lower and 




Fig. 460. — Chamfering the Wood Beam 

Fig. 460. This makes a neat appearance from below 
and avoids shadows. If the framing of the building 
is of iron, then the side curbs are set on angle iron 



Fig. 461. — Setting Skylight on 
Iron Construction 



upper wooden curbs. The formation of the upper 
curb is indicated by C D E F G and the lower curb 
by H J N K L M, both being similar to the curb 
shown in Fig. 459. By making the four sides of the 
curb alike, only one miter pattern is required and 
all four sides are formed up similar, excepting the 
lower curb in Fig. 462, which is bent down at N, a 
distance equal to the thickness of the glass in use, 
as indicated, thus bringing K in the position shown 
by K 1 , which also answers "as a drip. In the lower 
curb, copper condensation tubes are placed in the 
center of each light as indicated by c ; these tubes 
are about % inch in diameter, soldered water tight 
at b and extending beyond J of the curb on the out- 
side. 

P, represents the section of the common bar shown 
also in Fig. 459, and is shown in Fig. 462 so as to in- 
dicate how the cross bar R miters to the common 
bar. Attention is called to the formation of this 
cross bar, which is as indicated by S T U V X. 
The groove between S and U is made wide enough 
to allow the glass to slip in, well bedded in putty, 
and the flange T S acts as a cap flashing over the 
glass. The upper glass sets against the edge T and 
the shoulder V, also well bedded in putty. Should 
a leak occur in the cross joint, the water will drip 
into the condensation gutter, /, then follow into the 
gutter of the bar P at a, and in turn, follow along 
the gutter of the bar P, into the gutter of the lower 
curb at b, then out on the roof through the copper 
tube c. 



j()8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



CROSS-BAR FOR MAKING WATER- 
TIGHT CONNECTION BETWEEN 
PANES OF GLASS 

Solution 142 

The method of obtaining the pattern for the cross 
bar R in Fig. 462 is illustrated by the diagram in 
Fig. 463. Here A and A show the profiles of the two 
common bars, against which the cross bar B is to 
miter. The construction of this cross bar and its 
operation is alike to that already taken up and illus- 
trated in Fig. 462, the pattern is developed as shown 
in Fig. 463. 



used. Any leakage from the cross bar B will follow 
the gutter along a a, draining in the main bar at 
either side, as shown by the arrow. 

Glazing the Skylight and Securing the 
Caps to the Bar 

In glazing a skylight of the kind shown in Fig. 
458, the rabbets of the bars should be laid with soft 
putty, then the glass well bedded in. The surplus 
putty on the inside is cut off with a putty knife, while 



FLOW OF WAT En 



COMMON BAR 




Fig. 462. — One-fourth Full-size Sections 

Draw any vertical line, as C D, upon this place 
the girth of the profile B, as shown by similar num- 
bers, 1 to 8. Through these small figures 1 to 8 draw 
lines at right angles to C D ; intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to C D from similarly numbered in- 
tersections, 1 to 8, on the bar A, which were pre- 
viously obtained from the profile B of the cross bar. 
A line traced through points thus obtained, as shown 
by E F, will be the required cut ; this is also used for 
the opposite side. 

The method of laying out the cross bar is as 
follows : 

As the main bars are 16 in. apart, as shown in the 
elevation in Fig. 458, use the miter cut in Fig. 463 
and make the distance from the arrow point E to the 
opposite side 15% in., using and reversing the same 
miter cut E F, allowing y & in. less in length, in this 
case, for the thickness of the bars or core plates 



Fig. 463. — Pattern for Cross Bar 

that on the outside is smoothed out and capped with 
metal capping, two styles of which are shown in 
Fig. 464. The first is by means of the copper clip„ 




Fig. 464. — Securing the Capping 

shown by A, which is soldered on each side at a. 
The cap is formed V shape, as indicated by B, in 
the top of which slots are cut, through which the- 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



269 



copper clip passes, as shown by A 1 . The folded 
edge at A 1 is then cut off and the clip turned over, 
one right and the other left, as shown by A 2 . The 
cap can also be formed as shown by C. With this 
style of cap, holes are punched alternately with the 
rivet holes in the core plate and the cap fastened 
to the bar through these holes by means of brass 
bolts and nuts, indicated by b. By the use of brass 
bolts and nuts the nut can be easily removed if a new 
light is to be inserted, whereas an iron bolt would 
soon become tight from rust. 

Skylights of this size are constructed direct on the 
framing at the building, planks laid upon the cross 
beams being used to obtain a footing. 



ROLLING TOP THEATRE STAGE 
SKYLIGHT 

Details Showing Construction as Re- 
quired by the National Board of Fire 
Underwriters 

Solution 143 

In the construction of the theater stage skylights 
the specifications given by the Board of Fire Under- 
writers must be followed by the sheet metal worker. 
There are two types of these skylights. The first 
is known as the counterbalanced sash. This has 
two sashes hinged to the outer edges of the curb- 



ing or frame, which should be hipped shape, allow- 
ing the upper edges to come together when the 
sashes are closed and arranged in such a manner 
that one side of the skylight is provided with an 
overhanging lip or batten to keep out the rain, 
snow and sleet. 

Each sash must have extension bars or angles 
at the lower hinged edge, projecting beyond the 
curb for a distance not less than the width of the 
sash, and to these bars weights not less than 50 
per cent, heavier than the weight of the sash should 
be securely attached. The hinges must be of heavy 
brass bolted to the sash and curb and set well back 
from the edge of the frame. These weights at the 
bottom of the sashes permit the skylights to open 
when the cords which hold the skylights together 
at the ridge are loosened. 

The second type of skylight, which is illustrated 
in Fig. 465, and described herewith, consists of two 
rolling sashes, fitted with brass wheels not less than 
2. 1 /? in. in diameter and set inside of the outer edges 
of the sash and well secured to the angle iron frame 
of the skylight sash. The wheels roll on hard brass 
tracks properly secured to the angle iron curb, ex- 
tending the full width of the skylight beyond the 
frame or curb and fastened to the roof. The frame 
is made preferably to pitch both ways and the slope 
should be sufficient for the sash to be inclined at 
an angle of not less than 30 degrees. The hight of 
the roof curb should be such that the lowest por- 




Fig. 465. — View of Two Rolling Type Stage Skylights 



270 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



tion of the brass tracks will not be less than 12 in. 
above the roof, as indicated from W to E in Fig. 466. 

A one-half sectional view of the rolling sashes is 
shown here ; in this view A B represents the fin- 
ished roof line and G F B J the half opening over 
the theater stage, constructed of angle iron with 
fireproof block fillings. The bight of the uprights 
from F to G must be such that the distance from 
W to E is not less than 12 in. when the pitch has 
an angle of 30 degrees. The length of the angle iron 
track frame E X must equal the length of the sash 
H J so that the entire opening of the shaft over 
the stage will be uncovered when the sashes are 
run down. The skylight illustrated had a pitch 
length of 7 ft. 6 in. and was 13 ft. 6 in. 
wide, thus giving an approximate open- J? 

ing over the stage of 13 ft. 6 in. x 14 ft. A 

The four sides of the walls of the curb 
were flashed with copper 8 in. above the roof line 
and the side walls covered with 24-gauge crimped 
galvanized iron. The angle iron F of the upright 
track support W E was flashed its entire hight 
with copper to make a water-tight connection to 
the roof. The brass track was run down the full 
length of the track frame from b to E. The bronze 
rollers which roll down the track when the cords 
are released are indicated by a and b, E being the 
guard against which the lower angle of the sky- 
light X stops. 

Sometimes the angle E at the bottom is fitted 
with steel buffer springs to take up the shock and 
prevent breakage of glass when the sashes are 
opened by being allowed to run down in case of 
fire or for cleaning purposes. When the two sashes 
of the skylight are closed they join at the ridge at /, 
over which a stationary ventilating hood is placed. 
This is formed to correspond to the pitch of the sash 
as indicated by M L N, and is made with a stand- 
ing seam 2 in. high at L to give rigidity to the hood. 
This hood is fastened to the side walls and the heads 
come down a good distance at the side walls to se- 
cure rigidity. This hood also acts as a ventilator, 
as ventilation is possible between the two angles of 
the skylight at the ridge, the one angle being shown 
by /. By having the hood come down a good distance 
over the ridge leakage is avoided. 

To conform with the requirements of the Board 
of Fire Underwriters, the skylight should be made 
in sub-divisions approximately 18 in. wide, glazed 
with single thickness sheet glass, with weather laps 
not less than 2 in., and should be putty set. By 
weather laps is meant that the glass panes should 
overlap one another a distance of 2 in., thus dis- 



30" Pitch-. 




Line of Finished Roof 



mzmtmzmmrfmzmzmqm 



L, Hatchwa- 



under 



zhway 
Skylight 



ilfo 



Hemp A 
Cord' 



^ 



Fig. 466. — Half -sectional View through Rolling Skylight 

pensing with the cross bars. Each pane of glass 
should measure not less than 300 sq. in. and should 
not exceed 720 sq. in. in area. 

The operation of the skylight is as follows : A 
brass pulley, P, is fastened to the angle iron roof 
frame at 2. Through this pulley a brass chain is 
passed and secured to the lower angle of the sky- 
light curb c. The chains must be of sufficient length 
to allow the skylight to open to the full width and are 
joined to one ring at R, from which a ^ in. cotton 
or hemp rope is attached to a fusible link at T. A 
chain can be continued from C to hold the skylight 
in position. The brass chain from the opposite side 




Fig. 467.— Sectional Detail through Lower Curb — 
One-third Full-size Detail 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



271 



of the skylight not shown is indicated by 5. In case 
of fire, the cord can be cut or the heat will melt the 
fusible link, which releases the two skylights, when 
they roll down the track to E, and open the entire 
hatchway. 

The details showing the construction of the vari- 
ous curbs, bars, storm cap, rollers, tracks, angle iron 
framing, etc., are shown one-third full size or to a 
scale of 4 in. to the foot. While the sectional view 
shown is drawn at an angle of 30 degrees, the de- 
tails are shown laid horizontally. A sectional detail 
through the lower curb is shown in Fig. 467, A in- 
dicating the $xt,x % in. angle iron over which the 
copper skylight curb is formed as shown by BCD 
E F. The angle iron of the side curb H is bolted to 
the lower angle A at X X. These bolts are loosened 
to admit the double flange of the metal curb D, after 
which they are fastened down again. 

Between each pane of glass a copper condensation 
tube is placed as indicated by /. This 
drains the condensation or leakage 
from the skylight bar gutter along b a. 
A good size rabbet or glass rest is pro- 
vided from E to F. The hem edge at 
F should never be higher than the 
thickness of the glass in use; if too 
high it holds the water. 

Fig. 468 presents a sectional detail 
through the upper curb, showing the 
ventilating hood, also the formation 



The angle iron 



of the ridge curb B C D E. 
of the side curb bolts to A of the top curb at 
a and b. After the glass has been putty set, the cap 

covering the putty 
joint is bent as in- 
dicated by F G H 
and is bolted 
through the angle 
iron as shown by 
the brass bolt /, 
holes being punch- 
ed into the angle 
before being covered with copper. By using brass 
bolts for this purpose the thread of the bolt will not 
rust through t h e 




Fig. 469.- 



-Sectional Detail through 
Common Bar 



action of the 
weather and the 
bolt can be released 



Brass 
Bolt- 





Fig. 468.— Section through Upper Curb- 
Full-size Detail 



-One-third 



■-Wood 
Sheathing 



Fig 470.— Sectional Derail through Side Curb, Showing- 

Bronze Roller and Brass Track— One-third Full-size 

Detail 

breakage. The one-half ventilating hood is indicated 
by 1 2 3 4. the standing seam at 4 not being shown. 
Note the formation of the hood at 1 2 for stiffening 
purposes. 

Fig. 469 shows a sectional detail through the com- 
mon bar. It is formed in once piece as shown, being 
re-enforced with a metal band core A, 3/16 in. thick 
and 2,y 2 in. wide as shown. The condensation 
gutters of the bar are further strengthened by lock- 
ing on a separate metal strip indicated by a b. The 
copper capping B is secured through the core plates 
by the brass bolt c. These core plates are punched 



272 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



at intervals of about 20 in. and through them the 
brass bolts are placed. 

Fig. 470 is a sectional detail through the side curb 
showing the construction of the bronze rollers and 
the hard brass tracks. After the wood sheathing 
has been secured to the hollow fireproof bricks it is 
covered with sheet metal, turned over at the top 
and nailed at X. The hard brass track D is now 
fastened to the angle iron roof curb at intervals of 
18 in. with flat head machine screws shown bv E 
and F . The end and side views of the bronze rollers 
are shown riveted to the angle A of the skylight 
in its proper position at 5" and T and R. These 
rollers are cast 1 in. thick with a ]/ 2 in. diameter 
axle. Before the copper curb b c is fitted over the 
angle iron frame A, the storm cap B, made of 3/16 
in. x 8 in. band iron or of a size wide enough to 
cover or form a cap over the curb, as shown, is 
riveted to the side angle at a and b at intervals of 
2 ft. or less, holes having been previously punched 
for this purpose, and also to receive the brass bolt C 
to secure the capping as previously described. 

When the angle iron frame A and the storm cap 
B are being fitted, care must be taken to allow a 
play of y,\ in. at H to allow the rollers to work 
without any friction caused by the storm cap rub- 
bing against the metal siding. The band iron 
storm cap here described makes a first-class job. 
If a cheaper construction is desired, one can be had 
by using, instead of the band iron storm cap B, a 
rubber or canvas storm check, lead weighted at the 
lower edges and fastened as before at a and b. 

The Board of Fire Underwriters also requires 
that under the entire glass surface a protection of 
woven galvanized wire, 8 to 12 gauge, of diamond 
pattern mesh iy 2 x \y 2 in. be arranged in frames, 
to give protection against 
falling broken glass, and 
so that these protective 
screens can be taken out 
from below to give ac- 
cess to the glass for 
cleaning, Fig. 471 shows 
-he arrangements made 
to receive these pro- 
tective wire screens. 
Angle irons l /& x I x I in. 
in size were bolted at in- 
tervals to the angle in the 
side skylight curb at B B, 
and on these 1 in. angles 
the wire screen were 
laid as shown b C C. 



This type of construction has given satisfaction 
in practical work and may be recommended. The de- 
velopment of the various pattern shapes does not 
differ in method from those already described under 
the section on Flat Skylights. 



CONSTRUCTION OF A VENTI- 
LATED MARQUISE 

Structural Details of a Copper and Wire 
Glass Marquise Erected on an Apart- 
ment House 

Solution 144 

The structural details of a marquise in which 
provision for ventilation has been made where it 
is attached to the wall of the building, are shown 
in the accompanying illustrations. The marquise, 
which is an example of construction that has taken 
place is 27 ft. 6 in. long, and was erected on an 
apartment building. In Fig. 472 is reproduced a 
photographic view of the marquise, and in Fig. 473 
is given a scale drawing of it. In its construction an- 
gle iron, sheet copper and wire glass were employed. 
The arrangements for ventilation are shown in the 
construction details in Fig. 474. 

In this case the entire framing of angle iron was 
erected by the iron contractor and it remained for 
the sheet metal worker to construct the ventilating 
hood as well as the copper gutter and moldings 
under the sheet copper skylight. The glass was laid 
on inverted T bars. Particular attention is requested 
to the constructional details. 

It will be noted that the ridge curb is secured to 
the brick wall at the top by means of expansion 




Fig. 471. — Method of Securing Protective Wire Screens under Skylight — One-Third Full 

Size Detail 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



273 




and covered the top by turning down from 
H to J before the gutter lining was set. 

To hide the ridge angle and make a neat 
finish at the top or under side of the mar- 
quise, a mold was placed from L to M, and 
flashing employed in the brick joint at M. 

To ventilate the under side of the mar- 
quise a three-inch opening was left along 
the entire' length as shown, with a glass 
pocket and copper catch formed in the shape 
shown by NOP. The copper was doubled 
over at and stiffened with a wire edge at 
P. To avoid leakage a copper hood was 
formed, as indicated by R S T. This hood 
was fastened as shown, and had a %-inch 
rod running throughout the front edge the 
length of the marquise. The top of the hood 
was placed under the stone sill, which had a 
drip cut in it to prevent the water from fol- 
lowing its bottom. Ventilation was thus 
secured as indicated by the arrow. 

Before the wire glass was put in position 
a sheet lead cap, F was set over the edge of 
the angle iron so that the glass had a snug 
rest. 



Fig. 472. — View of Marquise 




bolts. The lower support or channel is 
bolted to the ornamental uprights as shown. 
Around this iron construction sheet copper 
was placed. The outer cornice A was 
formed as shown, flashed under the channel 
at B and with a flange at X. Inside of this 
cornice a gutter was laid hollow and was 
formed to shed the water as shown by C D 
E. After the gutter was set the flange X 
was turned down, as indicated by the arrow. 
On the lower inner side of the marquise 
an ogee mold was placed to make a finish. 
This was flashed under the channel as at G, 



Fig. 474.— Structural Details of the Marquise 



274 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



The skylight bars were of inverted T iron design, 
made of rolled steel. The clips used in fastening the 
lov/er angle curb or glass rest are shown in the 
illustration at V . 

From Fig. 472, it will be noted that an angle iron 
guard was erected to protect the glass in the mar- 
quise. The frame supporting the wire mesh was 
constructed of angles and tees I^xi^xj4 in- in 
size. The uprights were made of angles with in- 
verted tee cross bars placed at the top and in these 
inverted tee irons the wire was laid. 

This construction is equally suggestive and ap- 
plicable in that it is representative. 



CONSTRUCTION OF SKYLIGHT 
OVER PHOTOGRAPHIC STUDIO 

Solution 145 

Fig. 475 shows a type of skylight for erection over 
a photographic studio. It is an example taken from 
work successfully executed and is treated as from 




Fig. 475. — A Skylight for a Photographic Studio 

the original subject since its design and construction 
are representative of and applicable to studio sky- 
lights of any dimensions. 

It is essential in designing a studio skylight to 
give it the proper pitch or angle and if it be possible 
to have it facing to the north for securing the most 
favorable light. 

This type of skylight should have two pitches. 
Figure 476 shows the angles usually employed and 
those that have given good service in the past. The 
base of the skylight should start about 3 ft. above 
the floor line as shown from A to B and from B it 
should slant at an angle of 10 degrees to the per- 
pendicular, as shown from B to C. 



The bight of B C will depend upon the hight of 
the studio. 

In this case the hight of the studio was 10 ft., and 
the first pitch from B to C was made at 6 ft., or 9 
ft. above the floor line, from A to C, thus bringing 
C, 1 ft. below the ceiling line of the studio. From 
C the upper skylight has a slope of 35 degrees, as 




Fig. 476. — General Layout of a Photographic Skylight 

indicated, and runs back 12 ft. from C to D, with a 
closed back placed at right angles to C D down to 
the roof line as shown at E. This brings the ex- 
treme hight of the skylight at D 15 ft. 6 in. above 
the floor line at X. 

The width of the skylight as well as the hight 
of the front light B C and the depth of the top light 
C D, is, of course, regulated according to the width, 
hight and depth of the studio, respectively. This 
skylight was made 126 in. wide, divided into seven 
lights of 18 in. each. 

After deciding on the size and pitches of the 
skylight, the constructive features are next in order. 
Thev are shown in Figs. 477 to 482 inclusive. 
These parts can be changed to suit conditions. It 
is seldom that two shops will use the same methods 
of construction, and the shapes of bars, curbs, etc., 
vary. 

The accompanying illustrations show one of the 
many styles of bars and curbs in use. Where 
the run of the rafters is long they are usually re- 
enforced and cross bars are inserted between them 
when the glass is put on in sections. 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



275 



In Fig. 477 is shown the constructive section of 
the skylight at B in Fig. 476. Here we have a main 
cornice with a gutter, Fig. 477 the lining of which 
is locked in the main cornice at A to allow for ex- 



Metnod of cutting 
the slots 




t ''/3 Slots cot under 
■ each ligh t of glass 
■' to dro/n conden- 
sation See 'S " 



Fig. 477. — Constructive Section of Skylight at B, Fig. 476 

pansion and contraction. The lining is carried up 
over the wood skylight frame at B. Over this frame 
B the lower metal curb of the skylight is placed. 
Note the formation of the curb from C to D to E. 
To allow for the escape of the condensation a gutter 
is bent below e, which catches the drip, and dis- 
charges it to the outside through ^4-in. semi-circular 
slots cut below each light of glass at the bottom of 
the condensation gutter indicated by the arrow. 
Diagram S shows how these slots are cut. 

A semi-circular cut is made with the small chisel 
or die, as shown at i, and this part is drawn down- 
ward as indicated at n, just enough to let the drip, if 
any, run out and keep the driving rain or snow 
from blowing in underneath. 

The common rafter F also has condensation gut- 
ters at b and c which come down in front of the 
guard D and discharge any drippings in the gutter 
at e. In mitering the bar or rafter F to the curb, 
the bar should not enter the gutter at e, but should 
miter across the gutter as shown by the dotted line 
at e. Care must be taken that the top of the main 
gutter A is always lower than the bottom of the 
condensation gutter, as indicated between the ar- 
rows at r, to avoid any water entering the build- 
ing should the main gutter overflow at any time. 

The glass should be well imbedded in white lead 
putty on the rabbets of the bars, as shown by 



in F, and then capped with a metal cap and cleat- 
ed as shown at a in this same illustration. 

After the curb is set the inside wall can be com- 
pleted as shown by A' Y, providing sufficient wood 
work on which the light and dark rolling shades can 
be secured. 

At the intersection between the two skylights at 
C in Fig. 476, a simple watertight curb can be con- 



30°Pitch 




Horizontal Ime 



Fig. 478. — Constructive Section of Skylight at C. Fig. 476 

structed as shown in Fig. 478. To support this curb 
an angle or channel iron must be run across the 
entire width of the skylight as indicated by A, the 
angle being placed at right angles to the upper or 
35-degree pitch. Before this angle iron is encased 
with sheet metal a few holes should be punched in 
it to secure the wood blocking B by wood screws, 
as shown. 

Proper measurements of the angle iron are now 
taken and the curb formed, as shown from C to D 
to J to E to A to F. Note that the metal is turned 
downward at J, which hooks on to the angle iron 
and prevents the upper skylight trom sliding, and 
can be clinched around the angle iron, as shown by 
the dotted lines, while a solid bearing is obtained 
for the bars resting on the angle iron at D. Note 
the formation of the groove at A, into which the 
glass is placed, the overlapping cap E, making a 
weather tight joint. 

In forming the groove A it is so arranged that 
the left corner t lies against the angle iron and 
forms a rigid construction for the glass rest. At 
the bottom of the condensation gutter at D semi- 



276 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



circular slots are cut, as previously explained, and as 
shown by a a in diagram X. The extent to which 
these slots are turned away from the body is shown 
by b — just enough to allow the drip to run through 
and still keep out the driving rain and fine snow. 

The profiles of the rafters at the bottom and top 
respectively, with their capping in place, are shown 
by G and L. The gutter of the bar L is notched 
off at D to allow the drip, if any, to flow into the 
curb gutter. 

Where the bar G miters with the curb E A F at 
E, the standing edge of the bar is cut off at an 
angle, as shown at H, which is capped and soldered 
watertight. 

To make a finish on the inside a wooden board 
covered with sheet metal is secured to the wood 
blocking B. This provides for securing pulleys for 




Horizontal line 

Fig. 479. — Constructive Section of Skylight at D in Fig. 476 

rolling shades, etc. Fig. 479 shows the constructive 
section of the skylight at D in Fig. 476. The back 
of the skylight shaft being closed, it is covered with 
metal roofing, as shown in Fig. 479, and flashed up 
to the top and nailed at e. The formation of this 
half bar curb is indicated from A to B to C. It is 
locked together at A. This profile is used at the top, 
as well as along the sides of the skylight. The 
rafter D miters at A, thus conveying any condensa- 
tion to the lower gutter. 

The half bar is capped and cleated as indicated 
at C, and the lower cap flange B of the curb is se- 
cured to the back frame by means of brass screws 
and lead washers at a. 

Referring to the photograph in Fig. 475, it will 




Fig. 480. — Section of Cross Bars Shown at A in Fig. 475 

be noted that the 12 ft. run of the top skylight was 
divided into three panes, and where the joints take 
place, special formed clips or cross bars were placed 
at A, A, etc. 



The method of constructing these cross bars is 
shown in Fig. 480. Here A and B represent the 
profiles of the common rafters and C the profile of 
the cross bar. Note its formation from 1 to 2 to 
3 to 4 to 5 to 6, the line 2 3 being in line with the 
lower line of the glass. Note that the bottom of the 
cross bar comes slightly above the top edge of the 
condensation gutters of the common bars. 

The water running in the direction of the arrow 
will require the cross bar to be placed in the posi- ' 
tion shown, with the lower glass slipping into the 
groove between 1 and 2 and the upper light setting 
on rabbet 3. Should any leak occur at 3 it will 
drain into the gutter 6, then run out at a a into the 
gutters of the rafters A and B. 

Where the length of the rafter is over 6 ft. it is 
advisable to re-enforce the bars with core plates, as 



i^S 




Fig. 481. — Full-Size Section of Re-inforced Bars 

shown in Fig. 481, which give a greater sustaining 
power against wind pressure, snow, ice and 
sleet. 

A section of common rafter is shown at A, the 
core plate being made of 22-gauge galvanized iron. 

The walls of the bars are secured by the lower 
encasing B to C, and E E shows the glass imbedded 
in putty at a and a. 

The capping of the bar is a little different from 
that shown in other cuts. It is bent as indicated 
with a brass bolt and nut securing the five thick- 
nesses of metal. 

Another style of re-enforced bar is shown at F, 
wherein the core plate F is of band iron, J^-in. 
thick by 2 in. wide. The sizes of these cores are 
usually specified in the specifications of the architect, 
who as a rule, figures their sustaining power. 

When glazing studio skylights the best glass to 
use for this work is single thickness of clear ham- 
mered wire glass, which is also approved by the 
Board of Fire Underwriters. 

Fig. 482 gives an interior view of the studio sky- 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



277 



light, showing the arrangement of the shades, also 
the position of the tungsten lamps for night work. 
The equipment consists of one set of dark opaque 
shades and one set of white linen shades, which 




Fig. 482. — Interior View Showing Shades and Electric Bulbs 

are used to regulate the lights and shadows. The 
electric lighting for night work consists of twenty- 
four 100-watt tungsten lamps placed in the position 
shown. 



SINGLE PITCH SKYLIGHT, WITH 

PITCH FORMED IN THE METAL 

CURB 

Solution 146 

In Fig. 483 is shown what is designated a single 
pitch skylight, with the pitch or slope formed in 
the metal curb. As a rule, when the skylight is over 




Fig. 483.— View of Single Pitch Skylight, with Pitch 
Metal Curb 



4 ft. wide from a to b, the side cheeks are made of 
wood, which is covered with metal, and over this 
framing the ordinary flat skylight is set. If the curb 
measurement from a to b is less than 4 ft., the side 
cheek can be formed directly on the lower curb and 



half bar at the side, which procedure will be taken 

up and illustrated in Fig. 484. 

Here the sectional view shows all requirements in 
the development of the patterns. A partial front 
elevation is also shown, in order to make each step 
clear. This front elevation indicates as well, one of 
the weep holes, but in practice no front elevation 
need be drawn. After ascertaining the pitch of the 
skylight or the rise it is to have from R° to W° in 
the sectional view, draw the profile of the rear curb, 
as shown from 1 to 10 in the profile A. Ascertain 
the width of the skylight from 2 to 2 and draw the 
profile of the lower or front curb, B. Note the for- 
mation of this curb from 1 to 10. Also note that 
this lower curb B differs from the lower curb B 
given in Fig. 457. Curbs of various shapes will be 
taken up as we proceed with skylight work. From 
these the mechanic may select and obtain an un- 
derstanding of curb formations. After drawing in 
its proper position, the curb B in Fig. 484, connect 
the glass line 6-7 in the curb A with the glass line 
8-9 in the curb B. On this glass line draw the 
section or profile of the common bar, C; allow its 
condensation gutter to miter with the condensation 
gutter of the profile A, and lay over the condensation 
gutter of the lower curb B at 5-6, all as shown. 
The edge, 7-8, of the lower curb B should be no 
higher than the thickness of glass in use. At right 
angles to the pitch of the skylight draw the profile 
D, making D a one-half bar of the full bar C. At 
right angles to the curb line R° U° draw the pro- 
file of the side curb, indicated by E, taking care 
that the shoulder or rest, 3-4, in curbs A, B and 
E are equal, thus requiring only a square miter cut. 
The sectional view having been completed, the pat- 
terns may now be laid out. 

The pattern for the common bar C is laid out 
by taking the girth of the bar C and placing it on 
the line F G, drawn at right angles to the pitch of 
the skylight, as shown by the small figures, 1 to 6 
to 1. Through these small figures and at right an- 
gles to F G draw lines ; intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to F G from the various points 
where lines drawn through the profile C intersect 
the upper and lower curbs, A and B, respectively. 
Trace a line through points thus obtained. H J K 
represents the upper cut and L M N the lower cut. 
Where the glass rest, 8-9-10, in the lower curb B 
intersects 4-5 of the glass rest in the bar C, notches 
are to be made in the bar pattern to receive this 
glass rest, as indicated by the notches e and e in the 
bar pattern. These notches should be cut on the 
lines 5 in the pattern, then upward toward 6, about 



j;8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



MITER CUT 
FOR FRONT CURB 



RIDGE 
BAR /S 




PATTERN FOR SIDES 



MITER CUT 
FOR BACK CURB 



Fig. 4S4. — Patterns for Single Pitch Skylight with Pitch in Metal Curb 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



'■79 



l /i in. wide or just enough to allow the thickness 
of the hem edge, e' in the sectional view, to slip 
in easily. 

The pattern for the side curb, cheek and half 
bar combined in one piece, is laid out as follows : 

Take the girth of the side curb E from I to 4 
and place it on any vertical line, as O P, as shown 
by similar numbers. Through these small figures 
and at right angles to O P draw lines ; intersect 
them by lines drawn parallel to O P from simi- 
larly numbered spaces in the profiles A and B in 
the sectional view. Through the points thus ob- 
tained trace the miter cuts, R S T U in the pattern. 
Take a tracing of R° W° V° U° in the sectional 
view and place it, as shown by R W V U in the 
pattern. 

If the skylight is of such size that a tracing or 
reproduction cannot be taken, this side cheek in 
the sectional view can be joined to the pattern in 
the following manner : 

At right angles to U R in the pattern draw the 
line R W equal in length to R° W° in the sectional 
view. With W° V° as radius and W in the pattern 
as center, describe the arc V ; intersect this arc by 
an arc struck from U as center, with U° V° in 
the sectional view as radius. Connect lines from 
W to V to U in the pattern. Take a tracing of the 
half bar pattern J M N II and place it in the pat- 
tern for sides, as shown by W V N° H°. N° T S 
H° gives the combined side pattern. Take the girth 
from 1 to 10 in the back curb A in the sectional 
view and place it on any line, as A 1 B 1 , as shown 
by similar numbers. Through these small figures 
and at right angles to A 1 B l draw lines, as shown. 
Draw at pleasure the vertical line C 1 D 1 between 
lines drawn through points 1 and 3, as shown. Take 
the projection of the curb E in the sectional view and 
place it, as shown by E 1 in back curb pattern. From 
this point of intersection, t, erect the vertical line 
between lines drawn through figures 4 to 8, extend- 
ing the line indefinitely as shown by i'. Measuring 
from the line i in the profile D in the sectional view, 
take the projections to points / and / and place 
them to the right of the line i' t in the pattern, thus 
obtaining the points /' and /' on the lines drawn 
through 9 and 10. This gives the miter cut of the 
condensation gutter of the upper curb A, mitering 
with the condensation gutter of the side curb D. 

The girth of the front curb B from 1 to 10 is 
laid off on the vertical line C 2 D 2 , as shown. Here, 
as before, the projection E 2 is obtained from the 
curb E in the sectional view, the miter cut, of course, 
taking place in the space between lines 3 and 4 in 



the front curb pattern. Note that the weep hole 
X is placed below the line 6 in the pattern, that is 
from 6 towards 7. C 2 D 2 F 1 H 1 represents the pat- 
tern for the front curb. Allow laps on patterns, 
as shown by the dotted lines in the side pattern 
and the bars. 



Laying Out Full Size Patterns 

Let us assume that a skylight is to be made up 
to a size of, say, 3 ft. 2 in. by 7 ft. 2 in., as shown 
in Fig. 483, the method of development will be as 
follows : 

In the first place, the given curb distance of 3 ft. 
2 in. will require to be laid out (in Fig. 484) in the 
sectional view from corner 3 in the curb A to cor- 
ner 3 in the curb B ; proceed then with the bar and 
side patterns, as already described. The distance 
of 7 ft. 2 in. in Fig. 483 will have to be laid out (in 
Fig. 484), measuring from the arrow point F 1 in 
the front curb pattern and the arrow point O in 
the back curb pattern, as shown by the arrows, and 
then reversing the miter cuts to the opposite sides. 
Weep holes will be placed under the center of each 
light of glass. As six panes of glass are required, 
Fig. 483, the spacing of the panes can be found 
as follows : 7 ft. 2 in. = 86 in. ; less 2 in. for shoul- 
der rest on curb, = 84 in. This result divided by 
6 gives 14 in. as the space of the panes required. 
The first weep hole will therefore be 7 in. from 
the end. Follow with 5 spaces of 14 in. each, leav- 
ing 7 in. space on the opposite end. Where the 
gutter of the bars miters with the top curb, the 
miter cuts in the top curb to receive the bars will 
be spaced 14 in. on centers and obtained by the 
method which was applied to the miter cut, A°, 
in the back curb pattern in Fig. 457. In forming 
up the various bars care must be taken that they are 
bent true to the stay or profile. This will save 
time in assembling the skylight. 



A DOUBLE PITCHED SKYLIGHT 

Solution 147 

With double pitched skylights to be constructed, 
as shown in Fig. 485, the principles given in the 
preceding problem are employed. The present ex- 
ample is that of a skylight whose curb measures 
6 ft. 4 in. by 8 ft. 11 in. In laying out a skylight 
of this description it is but necessary to divide 6 ft. 
4 in. by 2, when we obtain the center line, which 
would be represented by the line W° R° in Fig. 



28o 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



484. Under such conditions all patterns would be 
obtained as described in connection with that illus- 
tration (Fig. 484), with the exception that the line 
W R in the pattern for side would be extended to 
A\ Then W A* T N° H° would be the one-half side 
pattern for a double pitched skylight, shown in 




Fig. 485. — View of Double Pitch Skylight 

Fig. 485, with a seaming through the center. A 
ridge bar a b would be necessary. This would be 
made 8 ft. 9 in. long, after deducting two inches, 
required for the curb rests on each side, using the 
pattern shown by 5-5" I' -10 in the pattern for back 
curb in Fig. 484, measuring from the point 5 a . As 
this pattern would be the pattern cut for the half 
ridge bar, shown from 5 to 10 in the curb A in the 
sectional view, the pattern would require to be re- 
versed on the line 5-5' 1 in the miter cut for back 
curb, to complete the full ridge bar shown by A T in 
the upper left hand corner. If the patterns shown in 
Fig. 484 were laid out for a skylight, whose width 
was 3 ft. 2 in., as is indicated in Fig. 483, these 
same patterns, Fig. 484, with the modifications above 
referred to, would be available for the skylight 
shown in Fig. 485, since its width is twice 3 ft. 2 in., 




SECTIONAL 
VIEW 




Fig. 486. — Constructing the 
Cheek ia Two Pieces 

or 6 ft. 4 in. As the length is 8 ft. 11 in., or 107 in., 
the 7 panes would measure 107 in., less 2 in. for 
shoulder rests, or 105 in., which divided by 7 gives 
15 in., the width of each pane. Without regard to 



the width from c to d, simply divide by two and pro- 
ceed according to the method given in connection 
with Fig. 484. 

Should it be desired to produce the side cheeks 
in two parts, make the joint as shown in Fig. 486, 
allowing to the half bar pattern an extra lap, as 
much as is shown at A. This can then be locked 
and riveted to the cheek, as shown. The construc- 
tion of the louvres shown in Fig. 485 are taken up 
in connection with subsequent procedure. 

Patterns for a Hipped Ventilating Sky- 
light 

The construction of a hipped ventilating skylight, 
such as is shown in the perspective in Fig. 487, re- 
quires five separate patterns, namely, the curb, ven- 




Fig. 487. — Hipped Ventilating Skylight 

tilator, common bar, hip bar and jack bar. In some 
skylights, in addition to the above there would be 
required the ridge bar, center jack bar, common 
jack bar and intersecting hip bar. All these pat- 
terns will be taken up in their order. In the illus- 
tration of Fig. 487, A is the ventilator, B is the 
curb, C the common bar, D the hip bar and E E 
E E E are jack bars. In the perspective in Fig. 




Fig. 488. — Plain Hipped Skylight with Ridge Bar 

488, A is the ridge bar, C the center jack bar, D the 
common jack bar and B one of the intersecting hip 
bars. 

The method of drawing the sectional view and 
obtaining the patterns is shown in the detail in Fig. 

489. In this connection it may be well to remark 
that in laying out these various patterns, the sec- 
tional view need not be more than 12 in. wide, 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



281 



whatever be the pitch desired. In 
this case, a one-third pitch is drawn, 
that is, an 8 in. rise to a 12 in. 
base, since twice 12 represents 24, 
one-third of which is 8. Thus if 
a one-fourth pitch be required, 
12 multiplied by 2 = 24 and one- 
fourth of 24 is 6. In other words, a 
6 in. rise to a 12 in. base consti- 
tute a one-fourth pitch. In con- 
structing the sectional view and 
one-quarter plan, first draw the 
center line A B and from any point 
upon it, as b, draw the horizontal 
line b a equal to 12 in. On the 
center line A B, set off a distance 
of 8 in. from 6 to f and draw the 
one-third pitch c a. This tri- 
angle, whose hypothenuse has a 
one-third pitch, forms the basis 
for obtaining all the patterns for 
the hipped skylight. 

The line a c represents the 
glass line, at right angles to which 
the profile of the common and jack 
bars is placed, as indicated by A. 
In its proper position draw the 
profile of the ventilator frame B, 
whatever the shape desired, making 
the distance from the center 
line c to 1' as desired. Draw 
the profile of the ventilator body 
C, making the space indicated by 
the arrow n about one-quarter 
inch, and over C draw the profile 
of the hood D. E represents the 
profile of the brace to sustain the 
hood D. Draw the profile of the 
curb a, taking particular pains that 
a vertical line drawn from the 
outer edge of the glass rest at 2' 
will meet the curb line, as shown by 
the dotted line. When this lower 
edge of the glass rest 2' is made to 
be perpendicular above the curb 
flange, as shown, the length of the 
skylight bar will be also the true 
length of the glass, so that all glass 
can be cut, long before it is used, 
thus saving delay in finishing the 
work at the building. The arrow 
in the curb a indicates where the 
weep holes are to be cut. 




ONE QUARTER PLAN 
Fig. 489. — Patterns of the Curb, Common and Jack Bars 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



CURB IN HIPPED SKYLIGHTS 

Solution 148 

The sectional view having been completed accord- 
ing to the method in the preceding solution, the 
pattern for the curb may be laid out. Parallel to 
the line A B draw any line, as F G, on which place 
the girth of the curb a. To avoid a confusion of 
numbers, the bends in the curb a are not numbered, 
but measurements with the dividers will show 
whence the spaces were taken, when placed on the 
line F G. From the various points on F G and 
at right angles to this line draw the usual measuring 
lines and intersect them by lines drawn parallel to 
F G from similar points in the profile a. Trace 
lines through points thus obtained. F H J K G 
will be the curb pattern. In using this pattern for 
the curb, all measurements must be taken from the 
arrow point K. Note that the weep holes are placed 
above the third bend marked 3, as called for in 
profile a. 

COMMON BAR IN HIPPED SKY- 
LIGHTS 

Solution 149 

To obtain the pattern for the common bar, shown 
by C in Fig. 487, take the girth of the profile A 
in Fig. 489 and place it on a line drawn at right 
angles to a c in the sectional view, as shown by the 
small figures, 6 to 1 to 6 on the line L M. Through 
these small figures and at right angles to L M draw 
the usual measuring lines and intersect them by 
lines drawn parallel to L M from the several points 
where lines drawn through the profile A intersect 
the curb a at the bottom and the ventilator frame 
B at the top, all as shown by similar numbers, 
marked 1' to 6', in both profiles. A line traced 
through points thus obtained, as shown by N O P 
at the top and by R S at the bottom, will be the 
desired miter cuts. Since bend 2 in the bar profile 
A intersects the curb bend, which is perpendicular 
over the measuring point in the curb a, upon laying 
out the length of the common bars all measure- 
ments must be made on line 2 from the arrow points 
e to d. 

JACK BAR IN HIPPED SKY- 
LIGHTS 

Solution 150 

Preparatory to developing the pattern for the 
jack bars, marked E in Fig. 487, a partial plan view 



must be drawn, Fig. 489, from which the miter line 
can be obtained in the sectional view. From this 
the miter pattern is obtained. 

It is customary to draw a one-quarter plan as 
follows : From any point on the center line A B 
draw the horizontal line W X. From W at an 
angle of 45 degrees (the skylight being a right 
angle, or of 90 degrees) draw the line, W 1 ; inter- 
sect this at 1 by a line dropped from 1' in the lower 
part of the sectional view. From 1 in plan draw 
the horizontal line 1 Y. Parallel to a c in the sec- 
tional view draw a short line above the profile A, 
as / g, and upon this obtain the projections of 
the bar A at right angles to a c, as shown by the 
small dashes having similar numbers. Take a trac- 
ing of these spaces on / g and place them at right 
angles to W 1 in plan, as shown by /' g', being care- 
ful to place the point marked 1-2-4 directly upon 
the line W-i in plan, as shown. Through these 
small figures 1 to 6 on /' g' and parallel to W 1, 
draw lines ; intersect these lines by lines drawn 
parallel to A B from similar numbers, 1' to 6', in 
the profiles a and B in the sectional view, thus ob- 
taining the points of intersection, 1 to 6, at the 
bottom a° and at the top B°, respectively, in plan. 
A line drawn through these points will show the 
miter lines, where the hip bar miters with the curb 
and ventilator frames, respectively. If desired, the 
opposite lower half of the hip bar in plan can be 
intersected, as shown by horizontal lines drawn 
parallel to W X, from intersections on the hip line 
W 1, thus obtaining intersections marked 1 to 6'. 
These miter lines are introduced in the development 
of the hip bar pattern in subsequent problem. From 
any desired point, as t, in plan, draw a line parallel 
to W X, meeting the hip line at 2. Again take the 
projection of the bar A in the sectional view, shown 
on the line / g and place it as indicated, at right angles 
to t 2 in plan, as shown by /" g" ; through the small 
figures thereon and parallel to t 2 draw lines, inter- 
secting lines previously drawn through the hip bar. 
Through the points of intersection thus obtained, 
draw the two miter lines, shown in S between 1 
and 6 on both sides. This gives the intersections 
of the long and short cuts of the jack bar ; these 
points are projected vertically to the sectional view, 
intersecting similarly numbered lines, drawn 
through the profile of the bar A. Connect the 
points thus obtained. 1 to 6 in 5"° will be the miter 
line of the short cut and 1 to 6° the miter line of the 
long cut. The pattern for the jack bar may now be 
developed. From the various intersections 1 to 6 
and 1 to 6° in S° draw lines at right angles to a c. 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



283 



intersecting similarly numbered lines previously 
drawn for the common bar. Trace a line through 
points thus obtained. T U will be the miter pattern 
for the long cut and U V the miter pattern for the 
short cut of the jack bar. The measuring point for 
the jack bars will also occur on line 2, as shown by 
the arrow points from d to v. Laps should be allowed 
on all patterns, as shown by the dotted lines. 



RIDGE VENTILATOR IN HIPPED 
SKYLIGHTS 

Solution 151 

The patterns required for the ventilator, illus- 
trated by A in Fig. 487, are shown developed in 
Fig. 490. Draw any perpendicular line as A B and 
on it place the girth of the profile of the ventilator 
frame B, in Fig. 489, as well 
as the girth of the profile of 
the ventilator body, C, the 
girth of the profile of the 
hood, D, and the girth of the 
brace, E, all as shown on the 
line A B in Fig. 490. In 
measuring the girth of the sev- 
eral profiles of the ventilator, 
numbers have been omitted to 
avoid a confusion of figures, 
in Fig. 489. At right angles 
to A B in Fig. 490, draw lines 
to the right as shown. Meas- 
uring in each instance from 
the line A B in Fig. 489, take 
the various horizontal projec- 
tions to the various corners in 
the profiles B, C and D of the 
ventilator, as shown by the 
dotted lines, and place them 
on their proper lines in Fig. 
490, measuring invariably 
from the line A B. Trace a 
line through points thus pro- 
cured and obtain the miter 
pattern for the hood, ven- 
tilator body and ventilator 
frame. In laying out full size 
patterns, measurements are 
taken from a, c and d, in the 
hood, body and frame, respectively. The length of 
the brace is always made equal to the width of the 
hood, whatever that may be, as shown at b. The ven- 




PA TTERN FOR „ 
VENT. BODtO 
IN FIQ. 489 

d 



PATTERN FOR 
VENT. FRAME B 
IN FIG. 489 



B 

Fig. 490. — Various 
Patterns in Ven- 
tilator 



tilator patterns here shown represent the half pat- 
terns for a given half width of ventilator, as indi- 
cated in the sectional view in Fig. 489. Assuming 
that this semi-width in the sectional view is 2 in. 
from the center line A B to i, the patterns shown 
in Fig. 490 are half patterns for that width. If, 
however, a ventilator whose full width is 8 in., be 
required, simply measure from the arrow point d 
a distance of 8 in. and reverse the cut for the full 
pattern. The other two patterns would then be in- 
creased in the same proportion, and the miter cut 
h I of the hood extended until it met the opposite 
miter line h i, also extended, at its apex. The ac- 
ceptable rule for finding the accurate lengths of 
ventilators will be taken up in the course of this 
treatment. Laps should be allowed on the short 
sides of the vent patterns, as shown by the dotted 
lines. 



HIPPED BAR IN HIPPED SKY- 
LIGHTS 

Solution 152 

The pattern for the hip or corner bar, indicated 
by D in Fig. 487, is shown developed in Fig. 491. 
W 1, the plan of the hip bar, is a reproduction of 
W 1, the plan of the hip bar previously obtained, 
as shown in Fig. 489. Because of the limits of 
space, the plan of hip bar with its various num- 
bered points of intersection has been traced to Fig. 
491, where the hip bar is presented horizontally to 
facilitate the development of the pattern with the 
tee square. 

Parallel to and equal in length to W 2 draw the 
line b 2. At right angles to b 2 erect the line b c 
equal to 8 in., or equal to b c in the sectional view 
in Fig. 489. Draw a line from c to 2 in Fig 491 ; 
this is the true length of the hip bar on the line 
W 2 in plan. At right angles to W 1 in plan and 
from the various intersections, 1 to 6, at the curb 
X and vent frame Y erect lines to any hight, as 
shown. Measuring from the line a b in the sectional 
view in Fig. 489 take the various hights above and 
below this line to points 1' to 6' in the curb a, also 
to points 1' to 6' above the line a b in the vent frame 
B ; place these bights above and below the line a b 
in Fig. 491 on similarly numbered lines, previously 
erected from similar numbers in the miter lines in 
plan. Trace the miter lines in the elevation of 
hip bar, through points thus obtained, as shown 
from 1 to 6 at bottom and top. Connect these points 
in the miter lines by lines drawn from 1 to 1, 2 to 2, 



284 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



etc., all of which will 
be parallel to line c 
2 previously obtained. 
This gives the eleva- 
tion of the hip bar. 

Preparatory to lay- 
ing out the pattern, a 
true profile of the hip 
bar must first be 
found as follows : 

Take the various 
projections on the line 
/ g in the sectional 
view in Fig. 489 and 
place it in Fig. 491, 
as indicated by / g 
drawn parallel to c 2. 
From the various in- 
tersections 1 to 6 on 
/ g and at right angles 
to c 2 draw lines 
which will intersect 
similarly number ed 
lines in the elevation, 
as shown. Through 
these points trace the 
modified profile of the 
hip bar, A. Take the 
girth of A from 6 to 1 W^ 
and place it on the 
line B C drawn at 
right angles to c 2, 
as shown by the fig- 
ures 6 to 1 to 6. At 




Fig. 491. — Pattern of the Hip Bar 



right angles to B C and through these small figures 
draw lines and intersect them by lines drawn par- 
allel to B C from similar points of intersection in 
the miter lines in elevation, all as shown. Trace 
a line through points thus obtained. The miter 
D E F will be the cut against the curb at the cor- 
ner and G H J the cut against the vent frame at 
the top. As the glass line is the measuring line, 
all bars are measured on line 2, indicated by the 
arrows. 



OTHER BARS REQUIRED IN 
HIPPED SKYLIGHTS 

Solution 153 

A requirement occurring in skylight construction 
is that of a skylight on which the four hip bars 
intersect, as seen in Fig. 492, forming what is known 



aj>~ intersecting hip bars, shown by the intersecting 
lines a b and c d. Reference to Fig. 491 shows also 
the method of developing this cut. Here the frame 
line of the ventilator, in plan, is extended, as shown 




Fig. 492. — Plan of Intersecting Hip Bars 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



285 



by the line i h and where this line intersects the 
various lines of the hip bar in plan, as at 1, 2, 3 X , 4, 
5 X and 6 X , lines are erected at right angles to W 1, 
thus cutting similarly numbered lines in the eleva- 
tion of the hipped bar indicated also by 1,2, 3 X , 4, 5 X , 
6 X . From these points, 3 X , 5 X and 6 X , lines are drawn 
at right angles to c 2, cutting the lines in the pat- 
tern, also at 3 X , 5 X and 6 X , and dotted lines are 
connected, as shown. This cut has been projected 
to only one-half of the pattern. 

If a full pattern be desired for an intersecting hip 
bar, simply take a tracing of the cut n H 3* b x in the 



















a 


k 




\3 X 




















1 


















1 


' 


n 


1 







Fig. 493. — Miter Cut for In- 
tersecting Hip Bars 

hip bar pattern and place it, as shown in Fig. 493, 
on either side of the line H, n, as shown by n H 3 X 
6 X . The lower cut on this bar will be the same as in 
the hip bar pattern in Fig. 491. 




Fig. 494. — Intersecting Hip Bars, Joining to Ridge Bar 

When hip bars intersect, as shown in Fig. 494, 
that is, the two hips intersecting along a d on the 
one side, and intersecting with the ridge bar at d c 
and d b on the other, the pattern is laid out as 
shown in Fig. 495. Here n H 3* 6 X is a reproduc- 
tion of corresponding letters and figures in the hip 
bar pattern in Fig. 491. Take a tracing of the 
upper part of the hip bar pattern n H G and place 
it, as shown by n H G in Fig. 495. The cut H 6 X 



in the pattern will be the miter pattern for the in- 
tersection a d in Fig. 494, and the miter pattern for 
the intersection d b or d c is shown by the cut H G 
in Fig. 495. 

In the two patterns just developed, Figs. 493 and 

H 



Fig. 495.- 



-Miter Cut for Intersecting Hip Bar, One-half of 
which Joins the Ridge Bar 



495, all measurements are laid out on line 2, indi- 
cated by the arrows. 

The pattern for the ridge bar, shown by B in 
Fig. 494, will be twice the girth of e d' in the pat- 
tern for the vent frame B in Fig. 490, cutting off 
the miter d t and turning over on the line d d'. 
This bar would be formed as indicated in Fig. 489 
in the sectional view at c. If bars are to be spaced 




Fig. 496. — Plan of Common Center Jack and Center 
Jack Bar 

as shown in Fig. 496, the resulting formations will 
constitute center jack bars and common jack bars. 

The miter cut for the center jack bar is laid out 
as shown in Fig. 497. Take a tracing of the long 
cut in the jack bar pattern in Fig. 489, shown by 
X U T, and place it on either side of the line U V 
in Fig. 497, as shown by x\ U T on both sides. 
T U T is then the miter cut for the center jack bar, 
since the center jack bar, shown in Fig. 496, has 
a long miter cut on each side. The cut at the bottom 



286 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



of the pattern, shown in Fig. 497, is, of course, the 
same as the lower cut of the jack bar pattern shown 
in Fig. 489. 

To obtain the miter cut for the common jack bar, 
which is so named for the reason that half of the 




Fig. 



497. — Miter Cut 
Center Tack Bar 



for 



bar intersects the hip just as does a jack bar, while 
the other half intersects the ridge as does a common 
bar, Fig. 496, take a tracing of the cut x U T in 
the jack bar pattern in Fig. 489 and place it, as 



U 




Fig. 498. — Miter Cut for 
Common Jack Bar 

shown by x U T in Fig. 498. Take a tracing of 
the half upper cut of the common bar in Fig. 489, 
indicated by x O N, and place it on the line U x 
in Fig. 498, as shown by x O N. NOUT gives 
the miter cut for the common jack bar. 



FINDING THE TRUE LENGTHS OF 
THE VARIOUS CURBS, BARS 
AND VENTILATORS IN HIP- 
PED SKYLIGHTS 

Solution 154 

There are three methods of finding the true 
lengths of the several bars, curbs and ventilators 



required in hipped skylight work, namely, by means 
of a scale drawing, by computation and by the aid 
of triangles. To one versed in figures computation 
is the readiest method ; to one not so apt the tri- 
angles will prove serviceable. As the use of the 
scaled drawing requires an expenditure of time to 
secure accuracy, the other two methods may be 
recommended and we will explain them by selected 
examples. 

Let us assume that patterns have all been laid out 
for one-third pitch and that a skylight is to be made 
whose curb measure is 6 ft. 6 in. by 10 ft. o in., as 




Fig. 499. — Example in Finding the True Lengths of Sky- 
light Bars 

shown in Fig. 499, with a ridge ventilator thereon 
whose width is 6 in., as indicated. The size of the 
curb and width of the ventilator determine the basis 
of the various lengths to be found by means of the 
triangles ; the construction is as follows : 

Take a tracing of the triangle ab cm the sectional 
view in Fig. 489 and place it as shown by a b c in 
Fig. 500. Since in obtaining the patterns this dis- 
tance, a b, was drawn to 12 in. length, divide that 
length into inches, half inches, etc. (as they would 
appear a rule), and erect perpendiculars until they 
cut the slant line c a, as shown. This slant line or 
hypothenuse may be employed in determining the 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



2 S 7 



true lengths of the common and jack bars, its use, of 
course, being restricted to skylights whose pitch is 
represented in the sectional view, Fig. 489, from 

c 




12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 
TRIANGLE FOR DETERMINING THE TRUE LENGTHS 
OF THE COMMON AND JACK BARS 



Fig. 



500. — Constructing the Triangle used 
and Jack Bars 



for Common 



which the patterns were obtained, namely, a one- 
third pitch. Any other pitch would require a dif- 
ferent pattern and triangles to correspond. Fig. 




10 9 8 7 5 4 3 2 

TRIANGLE FOR DETERMINING THE TRUE LENGTHS 

OF THE HIP BAR 

Fig. 501. — Constructing of Triangle Used for Hip Bar 



501 shows the triangle required for determining the 
true length of the hip bar for one-third pitch; it 
is constructed by taking a tracing of 2 b' c in Fig. 
491 and placing it, as shown by a b c in Fig. 501. 
Since we find that the distance, a b, represents the 
length of the diagonal or hip line in plan, whose 
sectional view is 12 in., as shown in Fig. 489, we 
divide the line (7 b in Fig. 501 into twelve equal 
parts and divide these again into halves, etc. From 
these divisions, I to 12, erect vertical lines, cutting 
the hypothenuse, c a, as shown. These triangles 



may be made on heavy cardboard and saved for 
repeated use for any size of skylight whose pitch 
is 8 to 12, or one-third. 

The first step in finding the true lengths is to pre- 
pare a rough diagram, reducing therein all meas- 
urements to inches, so that the curb will measure 
78 in. by 120 in. as shown in Fig. 499. Always divide 
first the narrow side of the curb. In the present 
case there are six lights of 13 in. each. Space the 
long side so that the jack bars will meet, thus ob- 
taining six lights of 13 in. and 3 lights of 14 in. 
The rough sketch will show the number and kind 
of bars required and as well give the true dimen- 
sions for spacing the bars when the skylight is as- 
sembled. 

In this connection it may be well to remark that 
glass is to be obtained only in uniform widths, as 
io"-i2"-i4", thus graduating by multiples of two. 
While the size here given serves as an example for 
practice a skylight should be so spaced as not to 
occasion wastage of glass, and needless loss may 
be averted by careful preliminary attention to meas- 
urements and available stock sizes. 

Referring to the rough sketch, we find that 4 hip, 
8 jack number 1, 8 jack number 2 and 10 common 
bars will be required, as well as the curb and ven- 
tilator. The length of the curb, shown on the sketch, 
is to be laid out bringing into use the curb pattern 
shown in Fig. 489, measuring from the arrow point 
K, with care to place a weep hole under the center 
of each light of glass. 

The length of the ventilator frame B is found as 
follows : 

Deduct the narrozv side of the 
curb from the long side and add 
the width of the vent frame. The 
narrow side of the curb is 78 in., 
as shown in Fig. 499, and the 
long side is 120 in. Thus, 120 in. 
less 78 in. leaves 42 in., which, 
plus 6 in. = 48 in. The inside 
vent frame will thus be computed 
as 6 in. by 48 in., measured from the arrow point d 
in Fig. 490. Measuring from the arrow point c in 
the pattern of the vent body, the lengths would be 
found to correspond to the inside vent frame, plus 
twice the projection of n in the sectional view, in Fig. 
489. If this projection n were one-quarter inch, the 
vent body would measure 63/2 x 485/2 in. The hood 
pattern would be measured from the arrow a, in Fig. 
490 indicating the same length as of the inside vent 
frame, plus twice the projection of v, in Fig. 489. 
If the projection v were two inches, the hood would 



288 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



measure 10 x 52 in. The length of the brace pat- 
tern E in Fig. 490 would be equal to the width of 
the hood, or 10 in., measured from the arrow b. 

To find the true length of jack bar number 1 
in Fig. 499, use the triangle shown in Fig. 500. 
As the width in Fig. 499 is 13 in. or 1 ft. I in., 
simply measure the distance of a c in Fig. 500 and 
add to it the true length of a d. Then 1 ft. on the 
horizontal equals c a on the slant plus 1 in. on the 
horizontal, which equals d a on the slant. With the 
two foot rule measure the length of c a plus da; 
this gives the true length of the jack bar, which 
is measured from the arrow points d to v in the 
jack bar pattern in Fig. 489. 

Whatever be the length of jack bar number 1 in 
Fig. 499, jack bar number 2 will be twice the length 
of number I, since the two divisions of glass 
are equal. Should it occur that the divisions 
between the jacks are unequal, as shown in the 
lower right hand corner of the sketch, where bar A 
is spaced 15 in. and bar B 17 in., the length of bar A 
would be found by measuring the distance c a in 
Fig. 500 plus e a, which represents the true length 
of the horizontal 3 inches. 

Since the second bar B in Fig. 499 is 17 in. from 
A, we find the true length of jack bar B by adding 
15 in. and 17 in., resulting in ^2 in. or 2 ft. 8 in. 
Use the triangle in Fig. 500 and add c a plus c a 
plus / a, which is the desired length. 

To obtain the measuring lengths of the common 
and hip bars, the following method is used: Deduct 
the width of the ventilator from the short side of the 
curb and divide the result by tivo. The width of 
the vent in Fig. 499 is 6 in., the short side of curb 
is 78 in. Thus, 78 in. less 6 in. = J2 in., or 6 ft. ; 
divide this by 2 and we have 3 ft. As the length 
c a of the triangle, in Fig. 500, is the true length 
on the 12 in. horizontal, 3 ft. will represent 3 times 
c a, the true length of the common bar, measured 
from d to c in the pattern for common bar in Fig. 
489. 

This 3 ft. is also used for finding the true length 
of the hip bar. Applying the triangle to the hip 
bar, in Fig. 501, multiply c a by 3, the true length 
of the bar, measuring from the arrow points on 
line 2 in the hip bar pattern in Fig. 491. 

Fig. 502 indicates another example in skylight 
computation by the aid of the triangles. Here we 
have a skylight 5 ft. by 10 ft. with a ridge bar. The 
glass is spaced 15 in. all around, as shown. The 
length of the ridge bar is found by deducting the 
short side of the curb from its long side, leaving 
5 ft. as the length, measured from d in Fig. 490, 



where the miter is cut off at d t, reversing on the 
line d' d to obtain the full girth of the ridge bar. 
The cut is made along d t for the reason that the 
ridge bar is cut off square at the ends and requires 
no miter. Since the spacing between the jacks is 
15 in., in Fig. 502, the true length is found by using 
the triangle, Fig. 500, and adding the sum of the 
distances c a and e a. To obtain the measuring 
lengths of the common, hip, center jack and com- 
mon jack bars, divide the short side of 5 ft. by 2, 
which gives 2 ft. 6 in. 

The true length of the common, common jack 
and center jack bars is found by the use of the tri- 
angle, Fig. 500, and finding the sum of c a plus c a 
plus h a; lay out this length full size, measuring 
from arrow points in the pattern for the common 
bar in Fig. 489 and the pattern for center jack bar 
in Fig. 497 and the pattern for the common jack 
bar in Fig. 498. The lower end cut for the two last 
mentioned patterns is alike to the cut against the 
curb, shown by R S in the bar pattern in Fig. 489. 

The true length of the hip bar shown in Fig. 502 
is found by the triangle, Fig. 501, adding together 
the distances of c a plus c a plus d a, this repre- 
senting the true length on the 2 ft. 6 in. horizontal. 

On finding the true lengths of the several bars, 
the glass is usually ordered, considerably in 
advance of setting up the work to anticipate the 
ordinary delays of delivery. The width of the glass 
will be equal to the dimensions given in either Fig. 






Fig. 



f 








—JO 


'0-- 








— A 


\/5" 


15" 


15" 


15" 

RIDGE 


15" 

BAR 


15" 


15" 


15'J/ 


CEN 


TER \ 


44 




- JACK 


BAR / 
/ e 


O 

-3 
















>o / 


5s 










502. — Another Example in Skylight Computation 



499 or Fig. 502 and the length will be equal to the 
true lengths of the bars, less for expansion one- 
quarter inch in length and in width. 



FINDING THE LENGTH OF THE 
BARS BY COMPUTATION 

Solution 155 

Another method of finding the true length of 
bars without the aid of triangles, Figs. 500 and 501, 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



is to figure the various lengths, using factors which 
are found as follows : 

With the length of the line a c in the sectional 
view in Fig. 489 known to be 14^ in.,* as nearly 
as it can be measured with a two-foot rule, divide 
14.5 by 12, which gives 1.2, the factor to be used 
for the common and jack bars. Also with the length 
of the line c 2, in the elevation of the hip bar in 
Fig. 491 known to be 18.75 in.,f as nearly as it can 
be measured with a two-foot rule, divide 18.75 by 
12. This gives 1.56, the factor for the hip bars. 

If the patterns have been developed for skylights 
having a one-third pitch the lengths of the venti- 
lator, common, hip and jack bars may be obtained 
quickly by a little figuring, according to the follow- 
ing method, without using drawings, diagrams, 
scales, triangles, etc. 

The factors here given for obtaining the lengths 
of common, hip and jack bars are based on one- 
third pitch or 8 to 12. Should the reader be accus- 
tomed to employ some other pitch, it is an easy 
matter to find the factors. This subject will be 
taken up in due course. 

Assume that a skylight is to be made of one-third 
pitch, the curb of which measures 4 ft. x 6 ft. 8 in. ; 
the width of the ventilator to be 6 in., all as shown 
in Fig. 503. What must be the length of the ven- 
tilator? 







— S'-8-- 










* 










/.J.B. 


* 


I 












19.2" 










... s ^: ,. 




> 


Y 




7 




<C1 












■$4 


F, S I 






j 




«„./«-*.-;>. 


<; 


■f6 '-- *■ 


«—/*---•• 


«...-, ■£.'.. 


- C- 


■~~/6 "-—>- 





Fig. 503 — Skylight, One-third Pitch, with Ventilator 

The rule is to deduct the short side of the curb 
from the long side and add the width of the venti- 
lator. Thus 6 ft. 8 in. less 4 f t. = 2 ft. 8 in. ; and 
2 ft. 8 in. plus 6 in. (the width of the ventilator) 
= 3 ft. 2 in., as shown in Fig. 503. 

The factor to be used in obtaining the lengths of 
the common and jack bars on a one-third pitched 
skylight is 1.2, as already explained, and the follow- 

*The accurate of a c is 14.42. 4/l2 2 +8— 14.42. 
tThe accurate distance of a2 is 18.76. ■V / 12 2 +12 2 +8"— 18.76. 



ing rule applies to all skylights of one-third pitch : 
Deduct the width of the ventilator from the short 
side of the curb, then divide by 2, and multiply 
this by 1.2. The short side of the curb, 4 ft., 
less 6 in. (the width of the ventilator), leaves 3 ft. 
6 in. Divide this by 2, thus obtaining 1 ft. 9 in., or 
21 in. Now multiply 21 in. by 1.2, obtaining 25.2 
in., the length of the 4 common bars in Fig. 503. 
Having found the width between the hips and jack 
bars to be 16 in., as shown, multiply 16 x 1.2, obtain- 
ing 19.2 in., which is the length of the eight jack 
bars. 

The factor used for the hip bar is 1.56 on one- 
third pitches only, as explained. Using the same 
number (21) as was used in getting the length of 
the common bars, 21 x 1.56 = 32.76 in., the length 
of the four hips. The same factors can be used 
when the skylight is smaller or larger providing, 
however, that one-third pitch be employed. 

Assume that a skylight is 3 ft. 3 in. x 5 ft. 5 in., 





* 


... /j--. i.^...-/^ ''--=- 


< // ■>+< — fS- — «4< — /3"—v 




4 














X 


5 














i 


t 












/J.B 


I 


A 








/S.6" 




*, 






\ R 


2-2" 


B / 




"•) 


> 








s 


Y 






<0 


V 


<P\ 




: 


i 












*? 




*4 


r"'S4 








i 


r 














V 




-^ 




s'-s-"- 







Fig. 504. — Skylight, One-Third Pitch, with Ridge Bar 

with a ridge bar, as shown in Fig. 504. The rule 
for finding the length of the ridge bar is simply 
to deduct the short side of the curb from the long 
side. Thus 5 ft. 5 in. less 3 ft. 3 in. = 2 ft. 2 in., 
the length of the ridge bar. To find the length of 
the common bar, divide the short side of the curb 
by 2 and multiply by the factor 1.2. Thus 3 ft. 
3 in. = 39 in. -^- 2 equals 19.5 and 19.5 x 1.2 
= 23.4 in., the length of the four common bars. 

The width between the hip and jack bar is 13 in. 
13 x 1.2 = 15.6 in., the length of the eight jack bars. 

With the same figure (19.5) as was used for the 
common bars, find the length of the four hips by 
multiplying 19.5 x 1. 56 (the factor for the hips), 
thus obtaining 30.42 in. 

It will be seen that the use of the factor saves much 
of the time that is expended for finding the lengths 
of the various bars by charts or scale drawings. 



290 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



FINDING THE LENGTH OF BARS 
FOR SKYLIGHTS OF ANY PITCH 

Solution 156 

The following method of finding the factors used 
in computing the true length of the various bars for 
skylights of any pitch is applicable to any skylight, 
regardless of its pitch. 

In the preceding solution the pitch taken up was 
8 to 12 or one-third. We will now show the method 
of application employed on an odd pitch, as 6^4 in- 
to 12 in. In other words, on every run of 1 ft. the 
rise is to be 6^4 in, 




Fig. 505. — Diagram Showing How to Find Factor for 
Obtaining True Lengths 

With a steel square, Fig. 505, set the rule from 
6% to 12, as shown from B to A, and it will measure 
13^4 in. There is a slight variation of a fraction 
of an inch, but the difference is so small that the 
measurements found in this case, as well as in those 
to follow, will be of sufficient accuracy for all prac- 
tical purposes. As the run is 1 ft., divide the 13% 
in. by 12 thus: 13.75 divided by 12 = 1.14, which 
is the factor for obtaining the true lengths of the 
common and jack bars. The method applies also 
to finding the factors for single or double pitched 
skylights. 

To obtain the factor for the hip bar in a skylight 
with a pitch of 634 to 12, measure the distance 
from 12 to 12 on the steel square, as shown from A 
to C, obtaining 17 in., which represents the dimen- 
sion, in plan, of the hip bar. As the rise is 6^4 in. 
to the foot in this case, measure on the steel square 
the distance from 6;>4 to 17, shown from B to D; 
this distance is found to be i8>4 in- Divide 
18.25 by 12, obtaining 1.52, the factor for finding 
the true length of the hip bars. 

The foregoing method applies to hipped sky- 
lights of all pitch. With the factor for the common 



and jack bars known to be 1.14, and the factor for 
the hip bar to be 1.52, in skylights having 6J4 in. 
rise to 1 ft. of run, the true lengths may be found 
as explained in the two examples illustrated by 
Figs. 506 and 507. \ 



1 




k— 14--- *)< 14---»f«— 14— ~>]« 14" --*M — 14~-»j< — 14-- 



Fir;. 506. — Example of Problem for Skylight with Ven- 
tilator 



Fig. 506 is a skylight with a ventilator 8 in. wide, 
with a curb measuring 4 ft. 8 in. x 7 ft. The length 
of the ventilator is found by deducting 4 ft. 8 in. 
from 7 ft. and adding the width of the ventilator, 
thus : 84 in. less 56 in. = 28 in., plus 8 in. = 36 in., 
or 3 ft. 

To obtain the length of the common bars, deduct 
the width of the ventilator from the shortest side 
of the frame and divide by 2, thus : 56 in. less 8 in. 
= 48 in. divided by 2 = 24 in. Multiply 24 in. by 
1. 14; this gives 27.36 in., which is the length of the 
common bar shown in Fig. 506. Multiply 24 in. by 
1.52, which will give 36.48 in., or the length of the 
hip bars. As the space between the jack bars is 
14 in., multiply 14 in. by 1. 14, which will give 15.96 
in., or the length of the jack bars. 

If a skylight is desired without a ventilator, as 
shown in Fig. 507, say 6 ft. 6 in. by 9 ft. 9 in., the 
length of the ridge bar would be found by sub- 
tracting the short from the long side, as 9 ft. 9 in. 
less 6 ft. 6 in. leaves 3 ft. 3 in., which is the length 
of the ridge bar in Fig. 507. 

In this skylight there are two jack bars, marked 
1 and 2, a center jack bar marked Cen. J. B., also 
a common jack bar marked Com. J.'B. To find 
the true length of the common bars, simply divide 
the narrow side of the curb by 2, thus : 6 ft. 6 in. 
divided by 2 gives 3 ft. 3 in., or 39 in. As every 
inch in the run is increased 0.14 in. in the pitch, 
multiply 39 in. x 1.14, which will give 44.46 in., 
the true length of the common, center jack and 
common jack bars. Using the same number, 39. 
as was employed in obtaining the length of the 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



291 



common bar, multiply 39 in. x 1.52, which will give 
59.28 in., the length of the hip bars as shown in 

Fig- 5°7- 

As the jack bars are 13 in. apart, use the proper 
factor 1. 14 and multiply it by 13, resulting in 14.82 
in., the length of jack bar No. I. As the bars are 
equally spaced, namely 13 in., then bar No. 2 will 







-- 


b a 




CO 


\ 






< 


-3'3- 






1C" 


13"/ 
/J.B. 


> 
1. 




CO 






/ 14.82 ■' 
/ J.B. 


4 

CO 

I 






29.64" 

Cen. J. B. 


~C£ 


-} 

CO 

i 


v 


03 



R.B. 



s 






5 


44.46" 


q 


4 

CO 

1- 

CO 

T 


/if 
















V 

























|<^13^-13^-13 : 4^13 : H^13 :i >j<-13->{^13 ! VJ<-13 I: >}<- 13^ 

Fig. 507. — Example of Problem for Skylight without 
Ventilator 

be twice 14.82 in., or 29.64 in. long. Should the 
bars be unequally spaced, as shown at a and b, the 
length of bar at a would be 13 times 1.14 in., and the 
length of jack bar b would be 13 plus 16, or 29 
times 1. 14 in. 

The use of this simple method for obtaining meas- 
urements will upon practice demonstrate it to be 
the most effective means of saving time. 



HIPPED OCTAGONAL SKYLIGHT 

Solution 157 

Fig. 508 presents a plan and elevation of an octa- 
gonal skylight of hip shape. The methods followed 
in developing these patterns are alike to those used 
in the hipped skylight discussed in the preceding 
pattern solutions. Hence the description given in 
connection with Fig. 509 is brief. 

Let G H be the center line, and, using any point 
upon it, as C, describe the one-quarter plan of the 
octagonal skylight on its curb line, as indicated by 
D E F G. Draw the hip lines, E C and F C. Above 
this quarter plan draw a sectional view of the sky- 
light on the line C D in plan, as follows : In line 
with the curb line E D in plan, draw the profile 
of the curb, indicated by A, from which the desired 
pitch of the skylight is drawn until it cuts the center 
line, G H, as shown. Draw the profile of the jack 
bar, indicated by B, and, parallel to the pitch of the 



skylight draw any short lines above the profile B. 
as X Y. From the various intersections or small 
figures, 1 to 6, in B, draw lines at right angles to 
the pitch of the skylight, intersecting the line X Y 
from 1 to 6, as shown. Parallel to the pitch of the 
skylight, from the intersections 1 to 6 in profile B, 
draw lines intersecting the curb A from 1' to 6', 
as shown. Take a tracing of the various numbered 
intersections, 1 to 6, on X Y in the sectional view, 
and place it at right angles to the hip line C E in 
plan, as indicated by X° Y", taking care that the 
points 1, 2, 4 come directly on the line C E. Through 
these small figures, 1 to 6, in the upper half of the 




PLAN 

Fig. 508. — Plan and Elevation of Octagonal Skylight Having 
Intersecting Hips 



bar, draw lines parallel to C E cutting the center 
line C D in plan from 1 to 6 and intersecting lines 
drawn vertically from similar numbers, 1' to 6', in 
the profile A, thus obtaining the miter line in plan, 
between the hip bar and curb, as shown from 1' to 
6'. From the intersections, 1 to 6, on the center 
line C D in plan erect perpendicular lines cutting 
similarly numbered lines in the sectional view, as 
shown from i° to 6°. 



292 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 

6 




Fig. 509. — Patterns for Curb and Ears in an Octagonal Skylight 



These points of intersection are used in obtaining 
the pattern for the hip bar, as follows : Take a 
tracing of the upper half of the hip bar as shown 
by C, 6, 3', E and place it in a horizontal position, 
as shown by C°, 6, 3', E° at the right. From the 
various intersections, 1 to 6 in C° and 1' to 6' in 
E°, erect perpendicular lines ; intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to C° E° from similarly numbered 
points, i° to 6° and 1' to 6' in the sectional view, 
thus obtaining the intersecting points i x to 6 X in 
both M and N in the elevation of the hip bar. Con- 
nect similar points in the miter lines M and N, as 
shown. 



Take a tracing of X° Y° in the plan view, with 
the various intersections thereon, and place it above 
the line i x i x in the hip bar elevation in the position 
shown by X v Y v . At right angles to X v Y v and 
from the small figures thereon draw lines cutting 
similar lines in the elevation of the hip. Trace a line 
through points thus obtained. The profile L will be 
the profile of the hip bar. 

The pattern for the hip bar may be laid out as 
follows : 

Take the girth of the hip bar L and place it on 
the line e f drawn at right angles to i x i x . Draw 
the usual measuring lines and intersect them by 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



293 



lines drawn parallel to e f from similarly numbered 
intersections in the miter lines M and N, which 
will give the pattern for the hip bar, shown by A 
in plan and elevation in Fig. 508. 

To obtain the pattern for the jack bar, marked 
B in plan and elevation, proceed as follows : 

Take the divisions on the line X Y in the sec- 
tional view in Fig. 509 and place them, as indicated 
by the line X a Y a in plan, which is drawn at right 
angles to C D, taking pains to place the intersection 
1, 2, 4 upon the line g l v , which may be drawn at 
will. Through the small figures on X a Y a , draw lines 
parallel to g i v , thus obtaining the miter line be- 
tween the hip and jack bars in plan, as shown from 
i v to 6 V . From the various intersections, i v to 6 V 
in plan, erect lines (partly shown) which should 
intersect similarly numbered lines in the sectional 
view in the same way that the miter line of the 
jack bar was obtained in the sectional view in Fig. 
489. Then the pattern for the jack bar in Fig. 509 
may be developed in the usual manner, laying off 
the girth of the profile B on the line a b drawn at 
right angles to the pitch of the skylight. 

To obtain the octagonal miter pattern for the curb 
A, take this girth and place it on the line c d, drawn 
at right angles to the curb line E F in plan. Draw 
the usual measuring lines and intersect them by lines 
drawn parallel to c d from similar intersections on 
the miter line Cl', all as shown by the dotted lines. 
J R then represents the miter cut, and all measure- 
ments must be taken from the curb line J in the 
pattern to the required length of one side of the 
curb, as indicated by the arrow points E to F in 
plan. 



A VALLEY BAR 
Solution 158 

Fig. 510 gives a perspective view of 
a pitched skylight having an interior 
and an exterior angle. On the exterior 
angle a hip bar becomes necessary, 
while in the interior angle a valley bar 
is required. Note that in the hip, the 
jack bars intersect the hip bar from 
the bottom up, while in the valley bar 
the jacks intersect the valley from the 
top down. The method of constructing 
the valley bar and obtaining the pat- 
tern therefor is shown in detail in 
Fig. 51 1. 

The ridge line C F is first drawn. 
Then the sectional view is constructed 



to show the profiles of the curb A, the ridge bar B 
and the common and jack bars E. Above this sec- 
tional view is shown the plan of the interior angle 
of the skylight, H C representing the center line 
of the valley bar. On either side of this center line 
C H in plan lay off about 3 in., making the width 
of the metal valley about 6 in., indicated by the 
arrows. Number one-half of the profile E in the 
sectional view, as shown by the small figures, 1 to 6, 
and above the profile E draw the short line a b par- 
allel to the pitch of the skylight. Project the points 
1 to 6 to the line a b, as shown. Transfer the spaces 
on a b to the line a' V in plan, which is drawn at 
right angles to C H, taking care to have the points 
1, 2, 4 come directly on the line L, as shown. 
Through these small figures, 1 to 6, draw lines par- 
allel to C H, intersecting lines erected from similarly 
numbered intersections between the bar and curb 
and ridge in the sectional view. Through points thus 
obtained draw the miter lines in plan, as shown 
from 1' to 6' at top and bottom. It will be noted 
that only the lower part of the valley bar in plan 
appears in the engraving. It serves all requirement, 
as the opposite or upper side is alike. Since the 
jack bars intersect the valley bar from the ridge 
down, draw any line at right angles to C F in plan, 
as c 2 ; on either side of this line, lay off double the 
projection of the spaces on a b in the section view, 
shown by a" b" in plan, taking pains to have the 
points I, 2, 4 placed directly on the line e 2. Through 




Fig. 510. — View Showing Location of Valley Bar 



294 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



MITER CUT 
FOR RIDGE BAR 
N 




K 



Fig. 511.— Obtaining Sectional View, Plan and Miter Lines for Jack, Common and 

Valley Bars 

these small figures, 1 to 6, and parallel to e 2, draw 
lines which intersect similarly numbered lines in the 



4 5 6 

valley bar, as shown by 
similar numbers. These 
points are now pro- 
jected to the sectional 
view at right angles to 
e 2, as partly shown by 
the dotted lines. Thus 
the heavy line drawn 
from 1 to 6 in X repre- 
sents the miter or short 
cut between the jack 
and valley and the heavy line 
from 1 to 6 in Y represents the 
miter or long cut between the 
jack and valley. 

In laying out the pattern for 
the jack bar, all that remains to 
be done is to take the girth of 
the profile E, set it off on the 
line m n drawn at right angles to 
the pitch of the skylight, draw 
the usual measuring lines and 
intersect them by lines drawn 
parallel to m n from similarly 
numbered intersections in B, Y 
and X. This operation is not 
shown in the drawing, as it is 
similar to the problems on jack 
bars already described. 

The pattern for the curb A is 
simply a miter cut of an inside 

angle and needs no description. 

The ridge bar B in the sectional 
view miters at an inside angle, as 
at C in plan, and the gutter of 
the ridge B miters with the gut- 
ter of the valley bar, as shown by the dotted lines 
4', 5' and 6' in the miter line S in plan. 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



295 




1-2-4 



Fig. 512. — Pattern for Valley Bar 



To obtain these two cuts proceed as follows : 
Draw any line at right angles to F C in plan, as 
shown by it v; on this place the girth of the ridge 
bar B in the sectional view, as shown by similar 
letters and numbers on u v. Through these small 
figures and at right angles to u v draw lines and 
intersect these lines by lines drawn parallel to u v 
from similar points of intersection on the miter line 
O' T and S in plan. Trace a line through points 



thus obtained. N O P R will be the desired miter 
pattern. 

Referring to the upper part of the jack bar where 
it miters with the gutter of the ridge bar, this miter 
cut is obtained, as was explained in connection with 
Fig. 457. where was obtained the cut A" in the 
pattern for back of curb. 

The method of obtaining the pattern for the valley 
bar is shown in Fig. 512. Take a tracing of the 



2<5t> 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



half valley bar C H in plan in Fig. 511, and place 
it in a horizontal position, as shown by C H in 
Fig. 512; from the various points of intersection, 
o to 6 in H and o to 6 in C, erect perpendicular 
lines to anv hight. Parallel to C H draw any line, 
as D d. Measuring from the line d D in the sec- 
tional view in Fig. 511 take the various distances to 
points o to 6 in the profile A, also to points o to 6 
in the profile B, and place them in Fig. 512 upon 
lines drawn from similar numbers in plan, measur- 
ing in each instance from the line D d thus obtaining 
the points of intersection at the bottom or curb and 
at the top or ridge, both miter lines being indicated 
by the heavy lines drawn from o to 6. Connect these 
points by lines, as shown, thus obtaining the eleva- 
tion of the valley bar. 

The true profile of the valley bar must now be 
found, as follows : Extend the line a' V in plan in 
Fig. 511 as a' c' and transfer the divisions from 
o to 6 on this line, as shown from o to 6 on both 
sides on the line a' c' in Fig. 512, drawn parallel to 
the pitch of the valley bar. At right angles to a' c' 
and from the various figures thereon, erect lines, 
which will intersect lines having similar numbers 
in the elevation. The lines are indicated also by the 
small figures 6 to o to 6, through which points the 
profile of the valley bar is traced. Note the forma- 
tion of the bar and be careful to make the hight of 
the standing edge, 1-2 on either side, no 
more than the thickness of the glass to 
be used, thus allowing the water to flow 
off readily into the metal valley. 

The pattern may now be laid out. Take 
the girth of the profile W and place it on 
the line J K drawn at right angles to the 
pitch of the valley bar. Through these 
small figures and at right angles to J K 
draw lines and intersect them by lines, 
drawn parallel to J K from similarly 
numbered points of intersection in both 
miter lines in the elevation of the 
valley bar. Trace a line through 
points thus obtained. L M S O P R 
will be the desired pattern. 

The cut on the con- 
densation gutter at N 
S will miter with the 
cut on the condensa- 
tion gutter of the ridge 
bar, shown by P R in 
the ridge bar pattern 
in Fig. 511. 



CONSTRUCTION OF A RAISING 
SASH 

Solution 159 

A perspective view of a raising sash is given in 
Fig- 513- A sash of this nature is used to provide 
for ventilation. When the sash is not too long, it is 
usually raised its entire length, as shown in the en- 
graving, and is operated by means of gearings as 
explained under Terms and Definitions. If the 
sash be of such length that it cannot be raised in its 
entirety the upper part is arranged to open, as 
from a to b' '. 

The method of developing the patterns for a sash 
of this nature is alike to that by which the patterns 
for a flat skylight are obtained, the consideration of 
main importance being the constructive features for 
avoiding leaks, to which relates the illustration of 

Fig. 514- 

Here is shown a constructive section through c b 
in Fig. 513. A in Fig. 514 indicates the formation of 
the upper curb, so arranged as to rest upon the 
flange of the I beam. B shows the profile of the 
half bar or side bar of the raising sash, inhering at 
the top with the upper sash bar, formed in one 
piece from a to b. The formation of the weather 
cap is indicated from c to d and so arranged that 




Fig. 513. — Perspective View of a Raising Sash 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



297 



the cap enters the brick joint at d and with 
a hooked arrangement at c, so that when the 
sash is closed it locks at a and forms a weather- 
proof connection. Should fine snow or rain pene- 
trate at c, the dripping runs out through small 
weep holes cut at the lowest part of the cap 




sash bars at d and d. c c in- 
dicates the pivot shown by e 
in Fig. 514 and is made of 
hard brass wire 3/16 in. 
thick. 

A detailed working sec- 
tion through c f in Fig. 513 
is shown in Fig. 516. A 
shows the main curb over 
which the sash curb B oper- 
ates. It is formed as shown 
from 1 to 2, with weep holes 
cut in the corner a of the 
sash curb, permitting the 
condensation to escape to the curb A, where it passes 
to the outside through the weep holes cut at b. This 
bottom curb, B miters with the side sash bar, indi- 



514. — Constructive Section 
through a b in Fig. 513 

hood, indicated by the arrow. 
The dotted lines and section in- 
dicate the appearance of the sash 
when open, swinging on the 
pivot c. 

A detailed section through c d 
in Fig. 513 is shown in Fig. 515. Here A and A 
show the two half bars, while B and B show the 
two sash bars, overlapping the glass laid in the 
half bars at b and b. On the bottom of the 
sash bars, gutters are formed, as 
shown by a a. c c shows the half 
caps, which are soldered to the 



1 ^ 



Constructive Section through c d in Fig. 513 




cated by C, which over- 
laps the half bar D, as 
described in connection 
with Fig. qi;. 



Fig. 516. — Sectional View through ( - / in Fig. 513 



WATERTIGHT SKYLIGHT 
CONSTRUCTION INVOLVING 
RAISING SASHES 
Solution 160 

To determine the methods to be followed in the 
construction of a watertight and storm proof sky- 
light with raising sashes, we may take for purpose 
of treatment an example of successfully executed 
work. The example is a skylight made of 18 oz. cold 
rolled copper, 6 ft. wide 14 ft. long, double pitched, 
of 30 degree slope, the two sides raised to the full 
14 ft. length, see Fig. 517. 



298 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



BOTH SIDES TO 
RAISE FULL LENGTH 




if 



"Ilk 



II '' , 
I 1 1 



M 






p 



v 






ii. 



"Mi 



m 



fijii 

m 



m 



mi 



END VIEW 



H- 



— u' <P- 



SIDE VIEW 
Fig. 517. — End and Side View of Skylight 



% III. OPENINGS 
TO BE MADE STORM PROOF 
BETWEEN RAISING BAR OF SASH 
AND MAIN RIDGE BAR 



RAISING RIDGE BAR- 




- HINGE 



PLAN OF 
MAIN RIDGE BAR AND HINGE 



■ HINGE 



HINGE- 



HINGE 



RAISING SASH 
14 FT. LONG 
IN SECTIONS 



RAISING SASH 
14 FT. LONG 
IN SECTIONS 




SECTIONAL VIEW 
Fig. 518. — Construction of Lifting Sash in Long Lengths 




SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



299 



The raising sashes on both sides of the sloping 
skylight were hinged to a main ridge bar made of 
3 x Y2 in. bar iron, shown in the sectional view in 
Fig. 518. The problem presented for solution is 
that of obtaining a tight connection against rain, 
snow and wind over the openings, which occur be- 
tween the main ridge bar and raising sash bar., 
shown by the spaces between the hinges, and indi- 
cated by the arrows a and b in the plan of main 
ridge bar and hinge. Referring to the sectional view 
it will be observed that the hinges are riveted to the 
main ridge bar A and the raising ridge bar B. Two 
hinges are used for each light shown in the side 
view in Fig. 517, and between each hinge a % in. 
opening remains, as indicated by a and b in the plan 
view in Fig. 518. An ordinary ridge cap would prove 
of no value, because the raising of the sash would 
break it off. 




Operating Lifting Sash in Long Lengths 



The method indicated in Fig. 519 has worked to 
the utmost satisfaction in practice. Simply add to 
the ridge bar at A the louvre formation shown by 
A-B. Over this form a hood, as shown by C-D-E-F, 
and secure the hood by putting a sheet metal head 
at each end, and at intervals of 24 in., rivet to the 
main ridge bar, y$ in x 1 in. band iron braces, as 
shown by M-N-O. The lower edge of the hood D-a 
should run at an incline and holes should be punched 
at intervals of 12 in. in the corner a, before bending, 
to allow for the escape of drip and driving rain or 
snow. A bolt in the hood brace at b secures the 
metal hood. Thus it will be seen that when the sash 



is closed, as indicated at the left, ventilation is se- 
cured through the y$ in. spaces between the hinges, 
along the 14 ft. ridge, and escape of air occurs along 
B-C and a. The right side of the cut shows the sash 
in an open position, as indicated by G-H-J-K-L. 
Care must be taken to adjust the operating gears of 
the raising sash so that they do not raise the sash 
above P, to avoid breakage of the hood. 



CONSTRUCTION OF STATIONARY 
AND MOVABLE LOUVRES 

Solution 161 

Louvres are illustrated in the perspective view in 
Fig. 520. They are constructed to be stationary or 




louures 



Fig. 520. — View of Stationary and Movable Louvres 

movable. Movable louvres are operated by means of 
cord, chain and pulley, the larger sizes, however, by 
means of gearings, which are illustrated under 
Terms and Definitions. 

The constructive details of stationary or fixed 
louvres are shown in Fig. 521. A, in plan shows the 
formation of the corner posts, made up in two 
pieces and locked at a and b. The center post 
indicated by B is bent in two parts and 
locked at c and d. Against this projecting flange 
a d and c the louvres are placed, as shown in the 
illustration. C indicates the formation of the curb 
setting over the roof frame. Note that a louvre is 
added to this curb, shown by /. The middle louvres 
are formed as shown by D D, care being taken that 
bend / lies in the same line as bend e, as shown by 
the dotted lines e f. If desired, the louvres may be 
set closer together. The upper louvre is shown by 
E, making the hight of h about y 2 in. Over these 
posts, A and B in plan, the skylight curb is set, as 
shown by F. 

Movable Louvres 

Louvres to open and close are constructed as 
shown in Fig. 522. Note that the louvres are so 



3°o 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




PLAN OF POSTS 
21. — Constructing Stationary 
Louvres and Posts 



Fig. 522. — Constructive Section 
of Movable Louvres 



bent, that they overlap well 
and are weather proof. 
In this case A shows the 
skylight curb of the sky- 
light overhead with a pro- 
jecting lip at a, which cov- 
ers the pivot, to prevent 
leakage. The curb A rests 
upon posts illustrated in 
the preceding diagram. B 
shows the formation of 
the lower curb, bent in one 
piece, as indicated, with 
a projecting flange at b. The 
operating louvres 
are formed, a s 
shown, with a pivot 
in the wired edge, 
indicated by the 
heavy dot. The 
solid lines of the 
louvres show them 



closed, and the dotted lines show them open. In 
operating the louvres, a band iron strip, D, is used ; 
to this the arm C is pivoted at c and riveted to the 
louvres at c. The louvre is opened by raising strap 
D. The length of the arm C limits the action ; when 
the strap D comes in contact with the beaded edges 
at t, the louvre will open no farther. If chain and 
pulley be used to open and close the louvre a hole is 
required in the strap D at / and /;. If it be operated 
by gearings the hole at / is not requisite. 
See Gearings in Terms and Definitions. 



CONSTRUCTION OF MOVABLE 
SASHES IN A TURRET SKYLIGHT 

Solution 162 

Fig. 523 presents a perspective view of movable 
sashes in a turret skylight, whose upper light may 
be either flat, double pitched or hipped. The patterns 




Fig. 523. — View of Skylight Equipped with Movable Sashes 

for these operating sashes consist simply of square 
and butt miters which require no further attention 
than has been given. 

The consideration of main importance is that of 
the construction. Shops employ various methods of 
constructing this movable sash, the determining prin- 
ciples being much the same in all cases. 

An acceptable method of construction is shown in 
Fig. 524, which shows a carefully drawn construc- 
tive sectional view. In the diagram, X shows the 
curb, over which is set the lower metal curb, formed 
as indicated from A to B. On to the pitch of this 
lower curb A B, the posts indicated by C, C°, miter. 
Note that the post is made up in two sections, locked 
as indicated at 1 and 1 in the upper section C.° The 
post joins the upper rail D ; it is made up in one 
piece, with a lock at 2 and a weather cap turned at 
an angle formation as at 3. Over this top rail D the 
combined skylight curb and gutter is set, bent as 
shown from E to F to G to H to J. Short leaders 
are connected to the bottom of the gutter, to conduct 
the water to the main roof, indicated by K. The for- 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



301 




SECTION OF POST 
AND SASH ABOVE PIVOT 



XSo 



SECT I ON OF POST 

AND SASH BELOW PIVOT 

ALSO 

I SECTION OF 

STATIONARY SASH 



HARD BRASS ROD 
FOR PIVOT 



Fig. 524. — Section View Showing Details of Construction 
of Movable Sashes 



8, cutting the standing 




mation of the sash below the pivot is shown on both 
sides of the lower post section C, by a b c. The edge 
a can be bent to accommodate the thickness of glass 
in use. b forms a rabbet for the glass, and c locks 
over the standing edges of the post, as shown. 

The formation of the sash above the pivot 4 is 
alike to a b c, with the exception of the omission of 
lock c, as indicated by d c 1, on both sides of the 
upper post section C°. The pivot passes through 
the standing seams on the outside of the post and 
sash, as indicated by the hard brass rod b b in the 
lower section C. The rods are usually 3/16 in. thick. 

In line with the center of the rod b b establish the 
pivot center in the post, as shown by dot 4. From 
the top of the pivot 4 draw a horizontal line to the 
right meeting the outer edges of the standing seam 
c c of the post C at 5. From 5 draw an angle of 45 
degrees cutting the line of the post i in C° at 6. Make 
the vertical distance 6 to 7 not to exceed % in. and 
draw the horizontal line 
edges of the posts 1-1 in C° at 
8. 5-6-7-8 shows how the stand- 
ing edges of the posts are cut out. 
Using the pivot center 4 as 
center, with a radius equal to 
4-6, draw the dotted arc 6 /. in- 
tersecting the line erected from 
the outer edge of the sash / / in 
C at 9, and the outer edge of the 
sash d-c in C°, as P and L at 10. 
Draw a line from 9 to 10. 

If the sash turn on the pivot 
4, the sash angle 9 comes in con- 
tact with the post angle at 6 and 
leaves the sash open in the posi- 
tion shown by the dotted line. 

The perspective view in Fig. 
525 makes this clear and shows 
the right side of the sash, indi- 
cating its formation, its angle 
cut 9-10, and pivot hole. To 
prevent leakage between the sash 
and post at the pivot, a capping 
is set over the upper part of the 
post C°, Fig. 524, forming it as 
shown by L M N O P in the 
upper post section C° ; it is 
fastened with two brass screws, 
should reach down slightly below the top of the 
pivot, as indicated by /. 

R S A T U shows the formation of the lower 
part of the sash, indicating at A, its lock to the 
flange of the main curb A B. A hinge is fastened to 



JO 



PIVOT 



525. 



View 



Showing Right 
Side of Sash 



as shown, and 



302 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



the double flange at S ; to this the straps are pivoted. 
At the top, V W is a plain angle, capping the glass 
at W ; when the glass is in position, this angle V-W 
is tacked with solder, at intervals along XX to the 
upper part of the sash X-X-Y-Z. When the sash is 
closed the projecting lip V enters the V shaped for- 
mation at 3 and the rear flange Z lies against the 
upper rail D, thus making a snug joint. 

If sashes are to remain fixed or stationary, the 
entire side is bent in the same way as the section C 
below the pivot, shown by a b I c. 

In the turret skylight here shown, no special 
corner posts are provided. All are bent, as shown 
by section C. If a corner be made, two posts are set 




Fig. 526.- 



-Obtaining a Weather Tight Joint between 
Corner Posts 



together, as shown in Fig. 526, and a water pro- 
tected corner is obtained by forming a tight angle 
at a b c d e locking this on the standing seams of 
the post, as shown. 

BENDING THE TOP RAIL 

The formation on the brake of the top rail D in 
Fig. 524, including the lock 2 and the V groove 3, 
is shown in Figs. 527 and 528. This rail is first 
formed, as shown by A in Fig. 527. Then the angle 





Fig. 527. — Bending the Top Rail D in Fig. 524 

a is pressed down between the jaws of the brake, 
giving it the appearance indicated by diagram B. 
This finished rail B is then reversed, placed in the 





Fig. 529. — General View of Roof with Curbless Skylight 



Fig. 528. — Bending the Weather Cap 

brake, as shown in Fig. 528, and at the proper posi- 
tion 1, A is turned over as far as the brake action 
permits, bringing A into the position shown by B ; 
this completes the bending. 

The various other bends required on these turret 
lights must be carefully formed to their respective 
profiles. If accurately formed, the assembling of 
the various sashes, curbs, posts, etc., will be 
facilitated. 



CONSTRUCTION AND PATTERNS 
OF CURBLESS FLAT SKYLIGHT 

Solution 163 

For a skylight con- 
structed without a 
curb, similar to that 
shown in Fig. 529, the 
method of detailing 
the various sheet 
metal frames is unlike 
that applied to the 
shapes generally used. 
This style of skylight 
is usually employed 
where the roof cover- 
ing is of metal, and 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



303 



particularly so when battens or standing seams 
occur, when the bars are spaced to correspond to 
the widths of the battens or seams, giving the effect, 
when viewed from below, of the ribs and seams con- 
tinuing in one line. This will be better understood 
by referring to the illustration, where the skylight 
bars are spaced so as to be in line with the standing 
seams of the roofing. Thus a and b are in line with 
the seams a' a" and V b" respectively. 

The first step in constructing a skylight of this 
kind is to obtain measurements at the building. This 




Fig. 530.— Showing How a Curbless Skylight is Measured I 

may be accomplished as shown in Fig. 530, where 
the framing on the roof is ready for measurements. 
With the corners forming right angles, measure- 
ments are taken from inside to inside, both ways, 
as from a to b and c to d. If, for example we have a 
measurement of 20 ft. X 6 ft., then in laying out 
the pattern for the metal frame the measurement 
would be considered as 19 ft. 11 j4 in. X 5 lr - n^ 
in. This gives one-half inch play either way and 
allows the skylight to slip in easily between the 
beams. 




Fig. 531. — View of Top and Side Frames 

Fig. 531 is a perspective view, showing the forma- 
tion of the top and side metal frames. A shows 
the side frame with a lock at E, while B is a simi- 



lar shape used for the top frame with a lock at E 1 . 
The formation of these frames is such as to give a 
hem edged cap, under which the glass is placed as 
at a and b. The water coming down in the di- 
rection of the arrow passes over this cap and thus 
prevents leakage. 




Fig. 532. — Sectional Detail through A B in Fig 529 

Fig- 53 2 is a sectional detail through A B of Fig. 
529 and shows the method of construction. In Fig. 
532, a is the profile of the top frame with a folded 
edge cap flashing at c and a lock at c to which the 
metal roofing is connected. In the groove formed be- 
tween a and e, the glass is placed, it being well 
bedded in white lead putty, which makes a tight 
joint. Any putty projecting on the inside, as at m, 
should be cut off smooth with the putty knife, b 
shows the formation of the lower skylight frame, 
sufficient material being allowed from f to d that 
connection can be made to the metal roofing by lock- 
ing and seaming. Again at /, the glass should be 
bedded into a good layer of white lead putty ; should 
a leak occur at this joint or should condensation take 
place on the inside, it is received in the drip gutter 
at i and is carried to the outside by means of the 
copper tube h. These tubes are usually placed under 
each alternate light of glass. The holes are punched 
ni the metal frame b before bending; then the frame 
is set in the wooden frame and the position of the 
holes is marked. The metal frame is then removed 
and holes are bored through the wood work by the 
carpenter. When the metal frame is set in position, 
the copper tubes are passed through from the out- 
side. Care must be taken to solder tightly around the 
roof at h and inside of the drip gutter at i. If 
required to prevent snow blowing in at /;, a small 
shield is soldered over the opening at i. Underneath 



304 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



the drip gutters on all four sides a wooden mold is 
placed as at X and X. 




Fig. 533. — Sectional Detail through C D in Fig. 529 

Fig. 533 shows a sectional detail through C D in 
Fig. 529. A in Fig. 533 shows the profile of the 
side frames which is similar in shape to that of the 
top a in Fig. 532. B in Fig. 533 shows the profile of 
all the common bars. It should be noted that the top 
of the bar between B and C is made only so high as 
to pass under the groove e in Fig. 532 while the 
bottom of the bar B in Fig. 533 passes over the drip 
gutter i in Fig. 532 and is flush with /. The glass is 
also bedded to the common bar B in Fig. 533 and 
over these joints a metal cap C, is fastened, the 
upper edge of the cap passing under the hem edged 
cap e at the top in Fig. 532. The fastening of the 
cap C in Fig. 533, is accomplished as shown in Fig. 




Fig. 534. — Fastening Cap on Bar 

534, in which a shows a soft copper clip, one-half 
inch wide and about one inch long, doubled over as 
shown and riveted through the bar at b. These clips 
are placed about 18 in. apart. After the glass has 
been laid in putty, slots are cut through the top of 
the cap C, as shown ; then the cap is set over the 
clip a, pressed down firmly, the bent edge of the 
clip is cut off with the shears and the parts are 
turned right and left over the cap, as shown, and 
well soldered. 

When the patterns are laid out for a skylight 
of this kind, only one pattern is required for the 
four sides ; it is developed as shown in Fig. 535. 
A is the profile for the side and top frame and is 
so placed that the line 11 -12 will be vertical, as 
shown. All the bends in the profile should be 
numbered, as shown from 1 to 13. Parallel to 11-12 
draw the line B C, upon which place the girth of the 



profile A, as shown by similar numbers. Through 
the points indicated by the small figures draw the 
usual measuring lines at right angles to B C and 
intersect them by lines drawn parallel to B C from 
corresponding numbers in the profile A. A line traced 

through points of inter- 
sections thus obtained, as 
shown by D E, will be 
the miter cut for the top 
and sides of the flat sky- 
light. As the profile of 
the bottom of the frame 
is similar to the sides and 
top with the exception 
that at the bend 4 in A 
the metal turns over to- 
wards the roof as indi- 
cated in Fig. 532 at f, 
the same pattern may be 
used for the bottom, by 
simply extending the line 

4 in the pattern until it 
intersects the vertical 
line dropped from D, 
making the distance a 
D of the desired length. 
Then B abE will be the 
miter cut for the bottom 
of the frame. 

The measurements of 

5 ft. uy 2 in. X J 9 :t - 
11JX in. are taken from 

the arrow point or from the line n' 12' in the pat- 
tern, which corresponds with the line 11 12 in the 
profile and represents the rear wall of the metal 
frame, placed inside of the wood frame at n and 
in Fig. 531. 



CONSTRUCTION OF A SINGLE 
PITCH SKYLIGHT 

Over Elevator and Stair Shafts 

Solution 164 

The following example of skylight construction is 
one drawn from actual practice as indicating how a 
flat skylight of the single pitch type is made and 
erected. This skylight is approximately 26 feet long 
and 16 feet on the pitch, containing seventeen lights 
of glass 18 inches wide in the length and two lights 
96 inches long to the width, is illustrated in Fig. 
536. Four brick walls built above the roof form a 




7 ig- 535-— Obtaining the Pat- 
terns and Measuring Point 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



305 




Fig. 536.— Construction of Skylight over Stair and Elevator Wells 



penthouse for the housing of the elevator machinery, 
and these four walls surround the skylight, the two 
side walls being stepped to rise above the high point 
of the skylight, since considerable pitch must be 
given to a roof of glass. 



Side Wall 




Fig- 537- — Longitudinal Section Showing Profile of Bars 
and Construction of End Bar with Stepped Cap Flashing 

A cross section is given in Fig. 537, which shows 
that the usual custom of forming a half bar to finish 
against the wall and capping the glass with the 
flashing was departed from in this design. The 
half bar was kept about 2 inches from the wall, the 
back of the bar being bent out and up the wall to 
form a base flashing, which is step capped. This 
arrangement provides for the removal of the cap 
in case of need for changing the glass, thus obvi- 
ating the disturbance of the flashing ; further, by 
this arrangement the wash from the wall does not 
fall on the glass but into the gutter in the side of the 
bar and thence into the main eaves gutter. Further 
description of the bar for that side is unnecessary, 
its good features being apparent. 

The main bars are conventionally designed ex- 
cept that a more generous gutter for condensation 
drip and possible leakage through the putty was 



formed on them, as shown in Fig. 537. In this con- 
nection the average designer makes a serious mis- 
take in endeavoring to get the bar out of a certain 
girth of material, sacrificing the width of the gutter 
and making it so narrow as to be useless. 

As will be observed, these bars have the usual re- 
enforcing core of plate iron. In this case the plate 
is 3-16" thick by 3" in depth. The cap for covering 
the glass is likewise of conventional tee shape and 
is bolted to the bar at intervals of 4 feet. 

In Fig. 538 a transverse section at the eaves is 
presented. The gutter, it will be noted, is of a sim- 
ple contour, pitched from the ends to the center 
where the leader is located. To overcome the un- 
sightly appearance of the slanted bottom a leveling 
shell is riveted thereto, as indicated by the section. 
Undue spreading and sagging of the gutter is pre- 
vented by means of braces spaced 3 feet apart, 
formed and riveted and bolted on as shown. 

The girth of the gutter is such that the curb of 
the skylight could not be cut from a single sheet 
of material, hence the joint. Attention is now called 
to the scupper, which is merely a good sized hole 
punched in the curb between the bars. To keep out 
beating rain or snow a small guard, formed to the 
shape shown, is soldered to the curb. 

The top of the wall being level and the curb 
pitched, it was necessary to provide some sort of 
bolster required by this type of curb. This design 
of curb is regarded as superior to that style which 
lies flat on the brick wall, as the last mentioned pre- 
vents adequate drainage of water, shedding from 
the glass. 

The extra strut piece bolted to the bolster anchor 
is so constructed as to transmit the thrust of the 
bar and glass in a more or less downward pressure. 
Another reason for this shape of strut is to add 



3° 6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Leveling Shell 




Fig. 538. — Transverse Section at Eaves, Showing the Construction of Gutter and 

Skylight Curb 



rigidity to the anchor and thereby prevent its bend- 
ing at the point of contact with the wall. These 
anchors are of light band iron and one is placed di- 
rectly under each bar. They are fastened by ex- 
pansion bolts to the wall and will hold down the 
skylight. Two light expansion bolts are employed, 
though only one is shown. The concrete, which 
was slushed under the curb after it was set, formed 
a sill for the support of the curb. 

It will be seen in Fig. 539 that the top wall was 
channeled to give a seat for the bars, which were 
simply set in the depression. The cross clips, which 
were tacked to the bars about a foot from the top, 
kept the bars spaced correctly ; then the channel in 
the wall was pointed up with cement. 

The top cross clips shown in the drawing were 
then soldered in position, the flashing piece hooked 
on and riveted thereto, after which the center cross 
clips were moved down to their correct positions, this 
being indicated on the bars by heavy dots 
punched with the scratch awl. This marking 
was done when the bars were laid out. The 
same method applies also to the top clip. 

The purlin shown in the drawing is a deep 
I beam set centrally with respect to the width 
of the skylight from bottom to top, giving 
support to the skylight throughout its center 
so that the span of the bars is really but 8 
feet. The anchor strap is fastened to the 
core plate and wrapped around a flange of 
the purlin. These straps would appear to be 



superfluous were it 
not that experience 
has taught, that no 
matter how heavy a 
skylight may be, the 
wind sliding over it 
creates a partial 
vacuum, which draws 
up the skylight, caus- 
ing it to rise and fall 
like the pulsating of a 
huge diaphragm. The 
constant upward and 
downward movement 
and the consequent 
shock from the impact 
of the bars striking 
on the purlin, even 
though that movement 
be slight, will event- 
ually disturb the set 
of the putty, causing 
leaks and the breakage of glass. 

At the top and at the bottom of the skylight it 
was necessary either to block up the bars (or the 
anchors of the curb) or to chip away the bricks, in 
order to align the bars ; for in skylight work it is 
essential that the glass rabbets of all bars lie in one 
plane at top, center and bottom. Then, too, the 
opening of the walls is sometimes considerably out 
of square, requiring that the 2 inch gutter of the 
side bars be made in such a way as to provide for 
any inequality ; that is to say, the gutter at one end 




End View 

ShowiDg Connection 

of Cross Clip 

with Bar 



Fig. 539. — Transverse Section at Ridge Showing Construction at 
Top Wall ; and Section at Center Showing Cross Clip Joint 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



307 



of the skylight may be 2 inches wide at the bottom 
and 4% inches at the top, while at the other end of 
the skylight this gutter is 3>4 inches at the bottom 
and 1 Y\ inches at the top. 

In conclusion, it may be well to state that the 
sheet metal used on work of this kind, is usually 
18 oz. copper. The glass was l /\ inch plain ribbed 
and the entire skylight was covered with an extra 
heavy diagonal mesh screen, which is supported on 
angles independent of the skylight (not shown in the 
drawings. ) 

All of the methods here described are in accord- 
ance with underwriters' and building department 
regulations. 

CONSTRUCTION OF THE SAW 
TOOTH SKYLIGHT 

A Practical Description of this Form of 
Roof Light; with Helpful Hints 

Solution 165 

In buildings of modern construction increas- 
ing attention is being given to light and ven- 
tilation. The so-called "saw-tooth" type of skylight 
is at present being used extensively in factory con- 
struction. One of these is illustrated in Fig. 540. 

The details as given herewith are for a method 



that the shape of the sheet metal work is such that 
no difficulty should be experienced in bending it 
on the brake. This is true indeed of all the shapes 
of this skylight. Furthermore, the shape is such 
that all condensation flowing into it from the bars 
will readily drain to the outside through the scup- 
pers. These scuppers can be of either square or 
round tubing, and one should be placed between all 
of the bars. 

The curb is carried through the entire length of 
the skylight, as is also the top rail, which is indi- 
cated as B in Fig. 541, and is a section on line B in 
Fig. 540. The part marked 2 is cut away over the 
raising sashes ; otherwise there is no change at these 
sashes. 

As a rule a crown mold like that shown in Fig. 
540, caps these skylights. This can merely lap over 
the flange of the top rail, as shown in Fig. 541. Note 
the shoulders 3 and 4 in both the curb and the top 
rail. The purpose of these is to act as a glass rest 
and as a means of securing the bars without doing a 
lot of soldering, because in erecting these skylights 
the top rail and curb are set in place first and then 
the bars. 

The section of the bar is C of Fig. 541 ; that is, on 
line C of Fig. 540. This is an ideal shape of bar, 
inasmuch as the generously large condensation gut- 
ters 5 provide a sure means of catching the drip 
from the bars and conveying it to the curb. Also, 




Fig. 540.— General View of One Tooth of a Saw Tooth Roof or Skylight 



that is economical and still practical, weathertight 
and proof against condensation trouble. In Fig. 
540 is a general view of one tooth. It is understood 
that usually there are more than one of these lights 
to a roof — a series like the teeth of an inverted saw. 
In Fig. 541 various details, or rather sections, are 
presented of the stationary parts of the skylight; A 
is the curb or section on line A of Fig. 540. Note 



the straight part 6 enables a better connection to be 
made with the cross clip. 

The customary T cap 7 covers the putty joint of 
the glass with the bar. This cap is secured to the 
bar by a small round head bolt, and the putty joint 
at the top rail is protected by a half T cap, 8, which 
is held in place only by the thrust of the cap 7. 

One of the essentials not to be forgotten in de- 



3 o8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




signing these sky- 
lights is the demand 
for plenty of ventila- 
tion. For that reason 
it is generally speci- 
fied that a certain 
number and size of 
ventilators are to be 
set on the ridge of the 
saw-tooth, and that 
some of the lights are 
to be so arranged that 
they may be opened 
either their entire 
length or, more likely, 
their upper half. 

In Fig. 542, D is a section on line D of Fig. 
540. The part 2 of Fig. 541 is removed so that 
the weather-cap. 2 of Fig. 542, may be in- 
serted in the resulting slot, this of course to 
be soldered water-tight at 3. Note the shape of the 
top rail, 4, of the raising sash and how its upper 
part moves within the weather-cap when being 
opened or closed. A 3/16 in. rod is the pivot about 
which this top rail revolves, this rod to be passed 
through holes in the bars on either side of the raising 
sash and through holes in the sides of the top rail 
of the lifting sash. This rod should be soldered to 
the top rail of the sash, so that it will not shift out of 
place and will turn on the side bars. The holes of 
the side bars are therefore reenforced by soldering 
small washes, 6 in E of Fig. 542. 

The E mentioned is a section on line E of Fig. 

540 looking up toward the top rail. Note the shape 
of the bar on either side of the sash. The bar at this 
place is made in two parts — the shape of C in Fig. 

541 from the curb up to the bottom rail of the sash, 
then the shape E of Fig. 542 up to the top rail. Also, 
the cap from the curb up to the bottom of the sash 
is like that in Fig. 541, then the upper half is as in 
Fig. 542. This cap is not bolted on, but tacked with 
solder at 7, in E Fig. 542. 

Note the shape of the sides of the lifting sash, 
and how part of it forms over the stationary bar 
to make a weathertight joint and still permits the 
sash to lift. Note also that the putty joint is capped 
by a simple half V cap, which is tacked with solder, 
at 9 to the side of the sash. 

A section on the line F in Fig. 540 is given by F in 
Fig. 542. The lower half or stationary part of the 
light is topped out by an ordinary cross-clip 10, the 
lower rail of the sash, 12, being shaped so that it 
rests on the cross-clip in a manner that assures the 



shedding of the water from the glass 
of the sash onto the glass of the 
lower or stationary part, a hole at 
15 draining condensation in the gut- 
ters of the sash into the cross-clip, 
then into the gutter of the bars and 
thence into the scuppers. Should it 
be required that the entire light be 
movable, the lower rail of the sash 
would have the same shape, part 16 
of Fig. 542 lapping onto part 16 of 

Fig- 541- 

Although the sheet metal worker 
may not be concerned with the 
method of framing these roofs, it 
should be remembered that struts are 
usually placed at the ends, whether 




Roof 
Flashing 



Fi K S4I —Details of the Parts of the Stationary Sections of 
the Skylight 

the end butts against a wall, as shown at one end in 
Fig. 540, or if a framed-in end as shown at the 
other end in Fig. 540, and again intermediate struts 
occur at intervals, as at G in Fig. 540. Consequently, 
in this method of making a skylight, a special bar is 
required like G in Fig. 543, which is a section on 
line G of Fig. 540. 

Part 2 of Fig. 543 for the ends is turned around 
the side to lap over or be connected to the tin, or 
to whatever other material covers the bulkhead and 
roof proper. At the wall end this part is bent out 
upon and stepped into the joints in the wall and 
cemented tightly with elastic cement. For the in- 
termediate struts part 2 simply caps the strut, and 
is the connecting medium of a bar G on both sides 
of the strut. 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



309 



Various means and devices 
are employed to raise the 
sashes. However, should gear- 
ing be specified, it would be 
necessary to make a different 
side bar at the sashes, but al- 
most always a simple arc, 25 
of Fig. 542, of band iron, 
riveted to the sash and actu- 
ated by the pull of a cord is 
the means of opening the sash. 
A band iron is riveted to the 
side bars, at 28. At the center 
of this band iron, knees 35, are 
riveted, to which the arc 25 
is riveted. A heavy piece of band iron is riveted 
to the bars (not to the cross-clip, which would 
fail to provide sufficient strength), and to this 
band iron a damper-pully, 42, is riveted. Then a 
sash cord is tied to a ring in the arc, passed through 
the pulley and wrapped about an awning cleat, 
which is placed conveniently somewhere below. 

The ventilators shown in Fig. 540 may be of any 
type desired, but they should be provided with 
dampers, and a drip pan should be placed inside 
under the opening to catch the condensation, inas- 
much as these ventilators sweat excessively on this 
type of roof. 



CONSTRUCTION OF SKYLIGHT 

ON STRUCTURAL STEEL 

FRAMING 

Solution 166 

When skylights are placed over large openings, 
having long spans, their frames are usually made of 
angle and tee irons by the structural steel contractor, 
and later made water and storm proof with either 
galvanized iron or copper by the sheet metal worker. 
Fi g- 544 gives a typical sectional view of a structural 
steel frame having stationary louvres at the sides, as 
usually placed over buildings of fireproof con- 
struction. 

The following description of the structural steel 
work, as well as of the concrete base and wood 
blocking over which the sheet metal worker is to 
place his metal, presents a typical job from which 
measurements must be taken by the skylight maker. 
A plan of the corner is shown in the lower part of 
the illustration, and illustrates the angle which sup- 
ports the upper tees, placed at intervals, between 



Fig. 543.— Section of the End 

Bar and One-half Section of 

the Bar at the Struts 




Fig. 542.— Details of the Raising Sash 



which stationary louvres (in this case) are to be set. 

Wood blockings are placed around the angle in 
plan forming panels as indicated. In this construc- 
tion the sheet metal worker should note that the 
metal covering is so constructed that three standing 
seam locks as placed at A, B and C can be locked 
with the least amount of labor. The locks A and B 
are so placed that they form a flange, against which 
the back of the louvres are set as indicated, while 
the standing lock at C comes directly on the corner 
at the outside. Where there are middle mullions the 
same construction is employed. 

The base of the curb above the roof line indicated 
by X in the section view is made of concrete around 
the angle. Over this a wood sill has been placed. At 



3*° 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




Scale 3 = J 

Fig. 544. — Sectional View of Structural Steel Frame Show- 
ing General Details of Construction 

the eave of the frame blocking has again been intro- 
duced. This is fastened around the angles and 
channel as shown. 

The ridge of the skylight is supported by an 
I-beam, over which the T is placed. The common 
bars are also made of T irons, as shown in the sec- 
tional view Fig. 545. 



The method of covering the blocking, tees, chan- 
nels, etc., will now be taken up in detail. Starting 
at the base flashing G of the roof, as seen in Fig. 
544, it will be seen that this flashing, as well as the 




Condensation 
Gutters 



Fig. c;4s. — Section of Common 
Skylight Bar 

bottom of the sill, is secured by means of copper 
cleats about 1 J /> in. wide in the following manner : 
The cleat is first nailed to the concrete by means of 
the nails H, placing them at intervals of 12 in. or 
more, and bending them as shown in the diagram 




Fig. 546.- 



-Securing Flashings and Lower Parts of Sills by 
Means of Cleats 



marked 1 in Fig. 546. The base flashing shown by G 
in the sectional view Fig. 544 is now set in position 
as shown in diagram 2, Fig. 546, and the cleat turned 
down as indicated. The sill is next covered in sec- 
tional view, Fig. 544, and the back is formed as 
shown by D-E. The front and drip flange are made 
as indicated from D to F and an acute drip is made 
at /. The sill is locked at D, care being taken to have 
this lock come directly behind the lock B in plan. 

The lower flange of the drip of the sill at / is now 
set over the cleat as indicated in diagram 3, Fig. 546, 
and the cleat turned against this flange as shown. 
Thus it will be seen that this cleat secures the base 
flashing as well as the sill flashing and still allows 
for the expansion and contraction of the metal. 

The upper part of the blocking is covered with 
sheet metal as shown in Fig. 544 from a to b to c 
to d, making a double edge at b. This edge should be 
bent so that it will set on the outside of the lock 
shown by B in plan. The entire covering a-b-c-d 
can then be pressed up from below and fastened at 
a and d. 

If a gutter is desired at the eave, which is the 
proper construction, light band iron brackets in- 



SHEET METAL SKYLIGHTS 



3" 



dicated by P are screwed at intervals of 24 in. on 
the wood blocking at i. The supporting bar is then 
bolted at h, the hole being countersunk on the in- 
ner side of the brace to receive the gutter as shown, 
after which the bar and brace are secured at /. The 
gutter with curb combined can next be set, but care 
should be taken to see that the iron worker has 
bolted the tees to the horizontal channel in the man- 
ner shown by the angle Y , allowing a space in which 
to slip up the condensation gutter flange t. 

The curb and gutter are bent in one piece from 
S to t to R. A wired edge is formed at the front 
and the distance at 5 should be equal to the thick- 
ness of glass in use. At the bottom of the con- 
densation gutter t, holes must be punched for the 
escape of any inside condensation, as indicated by 
the arrow. 

The common bar is indicated in Fig 545 and 
bent as shown from / to m to n, allowing the con- 
densation gutters at / and n and allowing for the 
thickness of the tee at 111. This method permits the 
metal covering to slip over the tee from the top, 
and the mitering of the bar to the curb at the bot- 
tom, to allow the escape of the condensation. 

The glass is now set in white lead putty, and care 
must be exercised to keep the putty from filling the 
condensation gutter on the inside. Over the glass, 



caps are placed, forming them as shown by r. 
Through holes, previously punched in the tee bars 
by the iron worker, 3/16 in. brass bolts with round 
heads are passed through the cap, sheet metal bar 
and tee bar and secured by nuts indicated by j. 

In a similar manner the ridge bar V in Fig. 544 is 
formed. The condensation gutters placed at u and 
v miter with gutters in the common bar. When the 
glass has been set the ridge cap W is bent as shown 
by w-x and secured with the brass bolt y. 

This method of construction is simple and effec- 
tive. When the span of the bar is long and the 
glass cannot be obtained in long lengths, instead of 
using a cross bar the glass is overlapped 3 in., using 
a twisted strand made of oakum, which allows for a 
soft rest and tight joint. 

The stationary louvres are indicated by L, M, N 
and 0. L and are false louvres, flanged out at 
e and /. Of course, these louvres are spaced as de- 
sired, according to the hight required between c and 
/. Sometimes the louvres are made movable, so that 
they can be closed or opened as desired. In that 
case a pivot will have to be placed through the center 
of each louvre and into the wood or iron work at the 
sides. Then by means of skylight gearings they can 
be operated by pole, wheel or chain as described in 
preceding solutions. 



PART XV 
SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



Constructive Features of the Various Forms 
of Metal Roofing in Flat Seam, Standing 
Seam and Batten Roofing, By the Medium 
of Tin Plate, Galvanized Sheet Iron, 
Copper or Zinc as Roof Covering; the 
Methods Employed in Allowing for the 
Expansion and Contraction of the Metal; 
Also the Method of Applying Corrugated 
Galvanized Iron or Copper Roofing and 
Siding and Obtaining Water-tight Joints 
at the Eave, Wall, Valley and Ridge. 
OHEET metal roofing may be laid on any surface, 
whether flat, inclined, curved or vertical. There 
are four forms of construction in which the sheet 
metal worker is interested. These are known as flat 
seam, standing seam, that form of roofing employ- 
ing wood battens and finally corrugated roofing and 
siding, chiefly used on piers and storage structures. 
Flat seam roofing is adaptable to all conditions, 
while standing and batten seams should be laid on 
roofs whose pitches are not less than four inches 
to the foot or in other words a one-sixth pitch. Pre- 
paratory to applying metal roofing it is important 
to select wood sheathing of well seasoned dry lum- 
ber, of even thickness and free from holes. The 
roof as well as the gutters should have sufficient 
slope to shed the water and thereby prevent gath- 
ering of dirt in shallow accumulations. If steam, 
fumes or gases are likely to reach the under side of 
the metal, water-proof sheathing paper is an 
effective protection for placing beneath the metal. 
Tar paper is not adapted to this purpose. 



LAYING FLAT SEAM ROOFING 
Solution 167 

The following methods are applicable to laying 
both tin and copper flat seam roofing. While the ex- 
pansion of copper roofing varies in greater extent 
than that of tin plate, the methods of allowing for 
the expansion and contraction of the metal at the 
walls and in fastening the sheets, do not differ. 
Upon selecting the suitable size of sheets for use, 
the first step is to properly notch the corners of the 
sheet, as shown in Fig. 547. If, for example, a 
;Hs-inch lock is desired simply set the dividers at 
% inch and scribe a line around the entire sheet, as 
partly shown in the upper right hand corner ; where 
the lines intersect at a draw a line at an angle of 45 
degrees as shown by 1-2, in other words the dis- 
tances from b to 1 and b to 2 must be alike. On 
finding the amount required to be notched, as 1-2, 
the gauges on the tin plate notcher are set accord- 
ingly. The edges of the sheets are next folded, or 
edged, on the edging machine, as shown in Fig. 548, 
the long and short sides of the sheet being turned 
right and left, as indicated. The sheets are then 
ready for flat seam roofing. If a valley occurs in 
the roof, the sheets therefor are notched as in Fig. 
547, but are edged as shown in Fig. 549, where the 
two narrow sides of the sheet are shown as turned 
one way and the long sides as turned right and left. 
If so required the two long sides may be turned one 
way, and the two narrow sides to the right and left. 
For wall flashings, to be laid, the sheets are notched 



/" 



; b 



a 



s 



3 J 

a 



547 

Fig. 547. — Proper Method of 
Notching the Sheet Pre- 
vious to Edging for 
Flat Seam Roofing 




54-S 



TOP J 



Fig. 548. — Sheet Edged for 
Flat Seam Roofing 




549 



ropS 



Fig. 549. — Edged Valley 

Sheet for Flat Seam 

Roofing 



312 



550 

Fig. 550. — Notching the 

Sheet for Wall Flashings 

for Flat Seam Roofing 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



313 



on the narrow end, as shown in Fig. 550 and are 
edged as indicated in Fig. 551, the unedged end 
being placed under the cap flashing when the base 
flashing is laid. On beginning work upon a flat seam 
tin roof the wall flashings are first installed. The 




55! ~™^~ 

Fig. 551.— Edged Sheet for 

Wall Flashing in Flat 

Seam Roofing 

sheets are locked together to the required length, 
with care to make them up right and left, that is, 
for each side of the roof, so that drainage will not 
flow against the seam. When the required number 
of sheets have been so locked they are turned up, 
under the cap flashing, as shown in Fig. 552, with 
care that part X is of equal width throughout the 
flashing. The cap flashing a should be given a sub- 



The back and bottom of the tin base flashing as well 
as the outside portion that underlaps the cap flash- 
ing should be coated with durable metallic paint or 
a layer of one ply oiled paper may be placed behind 
the base flashing to prevent the moisture in the wall 
or, lime in the mortar, from attacking and destroy- 
ing the tin plate. 

On fastening the lock of the base flashing, as well 
as of the edged sheets, cleats should be employed as 
shown in Fig. 553. Such cleats may be made about 
2 1 /, in. long x l / 2 in. wide; they are locked and 
nailed as shown. The cleat is turned over the nail 
head as indicated in Fig. 554. This serves to pre- 
vent the nail from raising and consequent rusting 
of the underside of the upper sheet. Only the I in. 
tinned barbed wire nails are successfully used for 
this purpose. Over the cleat the next sheet is locked 
as shown in Fig. 555 when the seam is closed down 
with a smooth faced mallet. If the question of ex- 
pense is not of the first consideration and a superior 
class of work be desired, the roof boards are covered 
with a layer of oiled paper before the metal roofing 
is applied. Thus, moisture or fumes are prevented 
attacking the tin plate from underneath. Fig. 556 




Fig. 552.— Method of Building in Cap Flashing and Setting 
Base Flashing 

Fig. 553-— Securing the Metal Sheets with Cleats 

stantial coat of metallic paint, and be permitted to 
dry before delivery of the flashing to the mason 
who builds it into the brick wall. These cap flash- 
ings are usually made up in the shop during slack 
season, the method being to lock together and solder 
five sheets of 14x20 in. tin and to edge the 14 in. 
sides of the sheets only. They are then cut through 
the center, each strip being 7 in. wide by five sheets 
long. They are next bent in the brake, through the 
center, thus providing 33^ in. on each side. Upon 
being well painted and thoroughly dried they are 
ready for delivery to the mason ; see a in Fig. 552. 



555 
Fig. 554-— Covering the Nail Head 

Fig. 555-— Locking the Adjoining Sheet and Closing the 
Seam 

illustrates the laying of a flat roof with the outlet 
in its center, at the wall. The outlet box a-b-c-d 
has locks on three sides ; it is cleated as shown and 
as previously described. The water flowing in the 
direction of the arrows, requires a valley, along 
I_2 -3-4 for which purpose, valley sheets are em- 
ployed, as shown in Fig. 549 ; they are cleated as in- 
dicated on the sheets 1-2-3 ar >d 4 in Fig. 556. Only 
by proper care in all cases to break joints in the 
tin plate, as indicated, may the work be successfully 
executed. Thus starting with the half sheet 5, con- 
tinue with 6 and 7, then with a full sheet at 8-9, 



3 J 4 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




Fig. 556.— Plan View of Roof Through Line of Cap Flashing in Wall, 

Showing Cap Flashing, Base Flashing, Outlet Box, Valley Sheets and 

Method of Laying and Cleating the Sheets 

etc. ; invariably use three cleats to the sheet, as in- 
dicated by the letters a-a, etc. Since the roof drain- 
age flows the two ways, the opposite side of the 
valley is also started with a half sheet, at 10, con- 
tinuing with full sheets 11-12, etc. The main con- 



pers," are brought into use. The 
soldering coppers should be given the 
proper heat and be permitted to rest 
over and upon the lock so that the 
seam may be sweated throughout, as 
indicated at b in Fig. 557. Haste in ap- 
plying the soldering copper over the 
edge of the lock, results in the solder 
sweating in only to a limited extent, 
as shown by the shaded part a, in Fig. 

558. On frame buildings having shed 
roofs, the eave line of the roof is 
sometimes finished as shown in Fig. 

559. A lower strip is formed as shown 
from C to A ; it is nailed at A and the 
lock is hammered flat to prevent the 
nails from drawing outward. Over 
this upper edge, the tin sheets are 
locked, at C, and the lock B is cleated, 
as at D. Should the roof. X, have but 
little pitch and there be danger of 
drainage penetrating between the lock, 
at C, the lock C may be turned down 
with a mallet as indicated in diagram 
Y, to the right. If no parapet wall runs 
above the line of the roof, a ledge 
strip may be used, as shown in Fig. 

560; this is nailed below at a, with a drip at b, a 
standing ledge at c and the lock d which is cleated as 
has been described. After completion of the metal 
roofing, all rosin should be scraped off and the roof 
given three coats of metallic or red lead paint. 




Fig. 557- — A Thoroughly Soldered 

Seam 
Fig. 558. — Improper Method of Sold- 
ering Seam 





Fig. 559- — Finishing Metal Roof at 
Eave 



Fig. 



560. — Finishing Roof at 
Sides 



sideration is, always to lay the roof from the outlet 
without regard to where the latter is situated, in 
order that water will flow over the seam and not 
against it. When the roof has been laid and the 
seams well malleted to effect a smooth surface, 
rosin is used as a flux and the seams are thoroughly 
"soaked with solder" ; for this purpose the 10 lb. to 
the pair soldering coppers, known as "roofing cop- 



LAYING METAL ROOFING OVER 

WOODEN STRIPS OR BATTENS 

Solution 168 

When a tin or galvanized iron roof is to be laid 
over wooden strips to give a prominent ribbed ef- 
fect to the roof, something after the fashion of a 
copper roof, it can be accomplished as herein de- 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



315 



scribed and illustrated. The first step is to prepare 
the tin in strips or the galvanized iron in sheets. 
Tor this purpose either 14 in. X 2 ° m - or 2 ° m - X 




Fig. 561. — Laying the Tin Sheets in Strips 

28 in. tin, as shown in Fig. 561, can be used or sheets 
8 or 10 feet long, of galvanized iron. The proper 
width of sheet to use is determined by the spacings 
between the wooden strips and the amount that the 
metal is to turn up on either side as will be shown. 

Having determined the required size of the 
sheets, they are laid in strips of the desired length, 
soldering the cross seams abed of Fig. 561. As 
will be noticed, only the long sides of the tin sheets, 
or the narrow sides of the galvanized iron are 
edged, right and left, to admit the locking of the 
sheets. Care should be taken to have the sides of 
the strip from A to B straight and true. This can 
best be accomplished be either striking a chalk line 
on the floor, to act as a guide, or a straight strip of 
wood can be nailed to the floor, against which the 
sheets are laid when they are being locked together. 
The required quantity of roofing is prepared, after 
which care should be taken that the wooden strips, 
known to the carpenter as "battens," are nailed in 




Fig. 562. — Spacing the Wooden Strips and Fastening the 
Cleats 

their proper positions as shown by B and C in Fig. 
562. When nailing these strips the roofer and car- 
penter should consult, so that the proper dimen- 
sions are obtained, and to avoid error a wooden 
template should be used, as shown. 

The battens, which are usually about 2 inches 
high by 2 inches wide on top, taper toward the 
bottom, to allow for expansion of the metal, as will 
be explained. After the battens have all been nailed 
in position, cleats approximately 1 inch wide and 
of sufficient length are nailed at intervals of about 



12 inches along the batten, as shown by a, b, d, e, 
and /, pressing them snugly against the slanting 
sides of the battens, as shown. The metal strips 
are now turned up square at either side at the 
required hight with the roofing tongs, after which 
they are placed between the battens, as shown in 




Fia 



563. — Reason for Beveling the Wooden Strips and 
Method of Fastening the Metal Roofing 



Fig- 563- These strips having been bent up square, 
their width is thus made equal to the distance be- 
tween the upper part of the battens, and thereby 
provides a space on either side for expansion, as 
indicated at d and d. Without this the sheets would 
buckle upward when heated, there being no room 
for the metal to expand. 

The strips are now pressed down firmly and the 
cleats turned over, as shown at a and b. These 
cleats hold the roofing in position and nailing 
through the sheets is thus avoided. Under no cir- 
cumstances should a roof of this kind be nailed. 
Every strip should be allowed to contract and ex- 
pand freely by using the cleats, as just mentioned. 
If any objection should be raised to nailing the 
cleats to the roof surface, as at a and b in Fig. 562, 
it can be overcome by the use of two nails, each on 
the side of the battens, as indicated by x and x. 
After the strips have been fastened to the roof in 
this way, an edge must be turned thereon, to which 
the capping of the batten can be secured, in a man- 




Fig. 564. — Bending the Edges on the Standing Seam 

ner indicated in Fig. 564. A wooden strip B, about 
3 feet long and as high as the batten, is placed on 
the inside of the tin strip, as shown, and by means 
of a mallet a half inch edge is turned over, as shown 
at C. Over these edges the capping is to be slipped. 
Measurements are now taken for this capping, 



3 l6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



which can be formed up in the brake in 8 feet 
lengths, as shown in Fig. 565, where the edge a is 
bent acute and b is bent at right angles. The bends 




Fig. 565. — Method of Bending the Cap 

are made in the manner shown, to allow them to 
slip easily over the edges of the metal roofing. 
Where no brake is at hand, the capping may be bent 
with a roofing tongs. 

The method of fastening the capping and obtain- 




Fig. 566. — The Three Operations in Fastening the Cap and 
Obtaining Watertight Joints over the Wooden Strips 

ing a watertight joint between the wooden strips 
and roofing is shown in three operations in Fig. 566. 
The first operation, A, shows the cap in position, 
the edge a, having the acute angle, being slipped in 
position first. B shows the cap with the edges 
pressed together with the tongs, while C shows the 
edges turned down with the mallet. Thus it will 
be seen that, by using this method of construction, 
no nail is driven through the tin plate, thereby giv- 
ing free movement for expansion caused by the 
heat of the sun, or contraction caused by snow or 
ice. At the eaves, heads must be soldered at the 
front of the battens, and the cross joints of the cap- 
ping are soldered where necessary. At the ridge of 
the roof a batten is also employed, making a finish 




Fig. 567.— Finishing the Battens at the Ridge 

along the ridge alike to the illustration in Fig. 567. 
Before the caps A and B are put in position, the 



upright corner of the sheet at a is soldered, and 
after the caps have been locked, a square piece of 
metal is soldered over the opening at X. 

Laying Sheet Copper Roofing and Gutters; 
with the Methods Employed in Pro- 
viding for the Expansion and 
Contraction of the Metal 

One of the main considerations arising in the ap- 
plication of all metal roofing sheets, whether of 
copper, tin, galvanized iron or zinc is that of allow- 
ing for the expansion and contraction of the metal. 
Of these metals zinc is subject to the greatest ex- 
pansion, under the influence of heat, copper is next 
and iron is the least influenced by changes of tem- 
perature. Familiarity with copper roofing indicates 
how it will readily expand with the heat from the 
sun's rays during the day, and will contract in the 
cool of the nights. Thus the variation in tempera- 
ture from the summer's heat to the winter's cold is 
so marked that construction of the various joints 
and seams to allow free movement of the metal is 
a positive essential. Results of failure to provide 
for the expansion and contraction of metal roofing 
causes the joints to burst or in the case of large 
sheets, cracking in their centers. The accompany- 
ing illustrations show how the joints and locks are 
prepared, cleats are fastened, and expansion joints 
in the gutters (where lies the chief source of trouble 
to the mechanic ) are made and placed, also how 
stone and terra cotta gutters may be lined. 



LINING GUTTERS WITH SHEET 
COPPER 

Solution 169 

The first question to dispose of is the selection 
of the gauge of copper to be used for gutter linings. 
While gutters are frequently lined with 16 oz. soft 
copper, the requirements of reliable permanent work 
demand 20 oz. cold rolled copper, that is, hard 
rolled copper weighing 20 oz. to each square foot 
or 12 in. X I2 m - The content is 4 oz. more of 
weight to the square foot assuring a secure, durable 
job. 

On first class work the cornices are sometimes of 
stone or terra cotta, cut as in Fig. 568, in which A 
represents the stone or terra cotta cornice having a 
gutter with the proper pitch cut in it as shown. The 
top of the cornice A, slopes toward the gutter, to 
prevent the water dripping down the front. The 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



3U 



plate F and rafter H forms the rear part of the 
gutter after the sheathing is put on, as shown. In 
this case dovetailed holes as shown in detail X, l / 2 
in. in diameter, are drilled in the stone work 1 in. 
deep, 9 in. apart, or are modeled in the terra cotta 
clay before it is baked hard. The holes are filled 
with molten lead, then a hole is punched in the 
center of the cooled lead about Y\ in. deep with a 
prick punch. This hole is used as a starter in screw- 
ing in the brass screw. 

A copper ledge of 20 oz. cold rolled copper of the 
shape indicated in the section A is bent in 8 foot 



half and half solder. Under no circumstances should 
the nails be driven through the sheets. Thus in the 
gutter described the entire lining is free to move 
in any direction. 

On very long gutters, expansion joints are placed 
in the cross seams as described hereinafter. On 
gutters having short runs architects sometimes 
specify that the lining at the front edge be caulked 
direct to the stone or terra cotta base. While the 




Fig. 568. — Fastening Copper Lining to 

Ledge Strip in a Stone or Terra 

Cotta Gutter 



Fig. 569. — Securing Copper Fig. 

Lining in Raggle 



570. — Securing Lining to Metal 
Cornice and Wood Base 



lengths and these ledges are screwed to the lead 
plugs previously cast in the small holes, with flat 
head brass screws, as indicated by a. By placing the 
holes 9 in. apart the ledge is secured, and on to this 
ledge the gutter lining B is locked at b, and the 
lining is flashed on the roof as indicated by C. The 
back of the lining has a lock attached by which it is 
fastened to the roof with the cleat D. These cleats 
are made about i l / 2 in. wide by 3 in. long and are 
secured to the roof with a brass or copper nail. 

Note that the metal lining has sufficient play all 
around the back, bottom and front, so as to allow 
for expansion without buckling the metal. Failing 
to make a proper allowance in the lining will cause 
broken seams and cracks in the center of the sheet. 
Occasionally a mechanic will make the gutter fit 
snugly into the gutter proper which is not good 
practice. We have noted cases where the metal has 
been forced into the gutter proper with the aim of 
securing a tight fit but by this method the metal can- 
not "move." If there be expansion the metal buckles 
in the center of the sheet and eventually cracks. 

The cross seams in the gutter should be tinned 
iy 2 in. wide on each side; then a y 2 in. lock is 
turned on it and cleated as shown by D. The seams 
are then malleted flat and thoroughly sweated with 



method just explained is recommended, Fig. 569 
was prepared to show how the specifications are 
followed. A raggle is cut in the stone or modeled 
in the clay as indicated at A, with a sloping top 
constructed from c to d to shed the water toward 
the gutter. In this raggle and gutter proper, the 
lining is laid as shown, with a lock B on the rear 
flange to be cleated, as before described. After the 
lining is set the raggle at a is either filled with 
molten lead or sulphur. Lead is usually employed 
on stone, because it can be caulked into the raggle 
with a hammer and caulking chisel, a method de- 
sirable in the case of cornices of stone. In respect 
to cornices of terra cotta, caulking is likely to split 
the terra cotta and therefore sulphur is used, be- 
cause it expands when cooling and fills the raggle. 
The cross seams are made as before explained. 

Cornices of sheet copper should be constructed 
so that the lining can be locked in as indicated in 
Fig. 570. In this case and in first class work, the 
inner braces or lookouts are made of angle iron, a, 
painted with red lead before insertion and bolted in 
five places indicated by the short dashes as b. The 
holes in the braces should be countersunk on the 
outer side and bolted to the copper cornice with 
flat head brass stove bolts. This angle iron brace 



3i8 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



extends back the thickness of the wall as shown, 
with a reinforced angle riveted in the corner at o. 
When the wall has been carried as high as c the 
molding or cornice is set, being secured temporarily 
with wire to the wood beam or to the iron beam at 
X, until the balance of the wall has been carried up 
and the plate and rafters set. This will hold the 
cornice in position, when the wires may be removed 
from the beams. 

The f ramer now lines out the gutter to the proper 
pitch in connection with which procedure care is re- 




- Fig. 571. — Section of Wooden Gutter and Lining 

quired to have the front sheathing come directly 
under the angle iron, which is bolted to the front 
edge of the cornice as shown. The iron braces in 
work of this kind are usually spaced 30 in. apart, 
which insures a good solid base. The gutter lining 
is now locked to the projecting ledge of the upper 
member of the main cornice as shown by the beaded 
formation A. This bead can be formed on the 
gutter header, making a clean, neat finish, or if it 
be preferred an ordinary lock may be used. 

It is advisable, when the gutter linings require a 
large girth, to compute requirements before the job 
is ready and order the extra wide copper direct 
from the mill. While this extra width will cost a 
trifle more, it is less expensive than running a long 
seam in the bottom of the gutter as is usually done, 
which seam is likely to open and leak if not prop- 
erly laid. In fact it is always advantageous to order 
copper in correct widths so that there will be no un- 
necessary waste. A lock is placed at B, for securing 
the cleats and the cross seams are made as usual. 

With cornices of galvanized iron, it is not good 
practice to connect the copper lining to the cornice 
for it is well known that copper coming into con- 
tact with galvanized coating creates an electrical ac- 
tion, which, with the addition of moisture, starts 
corrosion of the iron or steel sheet. In some cases 



galvanized iron cornices are specified with copper 
linings, so that some form of construction must be 
devised to avoid this electrical action. This may best 
be done by insulating the galvanized iron with sheet 
rubber, as shown in detail T. Pure sheet rubber )/& 
in. thick is formed V-shape over the ledge of the 
cornice and is riveted at intervals to take a firm hold. 
Over this rubber the copper may be locked with 
safety. Some mechanics use oiled canvas, but this 
will rot with the action of the weather. 

With gutters and cornices made entirely of wood, 
the methods of securing the front ledge strips vary. 
Fig. 571 shows the section of a wooden gutter and 
the lining. Particular care should be taken that the 
top of the cornice at a is planked to shed the water to 
the rear as destruction of the paint on the outside 
of the cornice is often caused by the rain running 
down the front from the top of the cornice when 
the top is laid level. After the wooden linings are 
all in, a ledge strip of copper is nailed with copper 
or brass nails as indicated, at intervals of 9 or 10 
in. This ledge strip is more clearly shown in dia- 
gram A. Over this ledge strip the copper lining is 
locked at b, with a lock on the back at c for cleating 
purposes. Note the allowance for expansion at d? 
which must not be overlooked in connection with 
the bending of the lining. In diagrams B and D two 
simple ledge strips are shown, while diagram C in- 
dicates the most substantial of the four. 



EXPANSION JOINTS IN COPPER 
LINED GUTTERS 

Solution 170 

Copper lined gutters of great length, require ex- 
pansion joints, to be placed at the high ends of the 
gutter, as shown in Fig. 572. This device consists 






1 



Detailed 



. Section through 
b E * pa nsi on J01 nt 



Avy 



Water 
Spreader 




Fig. 572. — Expansion Joint in Gutter 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



319 



simply of a lapped joint, with a flat head soldered 
to each end and covered with a locked sliding cap. 
The gutter is locked to the front ledge, as shown, 
and cleated at the rear lock, in the usual manner. 
The cross seam of the gutter at the expansion joint 
is made as shown in the detailed section indicated 
above the cut, where the joint is lapped 1% in; it is 
not nailed or soldered. Preparatory to soldering in 
position the expansion heads indicated by a and b 
it is necessary to compute the distance apart at 
which the heads are to be placed, first ascertaining 
the length of the gutter. Let us assume that the 
entire gutter will be 75 ft. in length, with a leader at 
each end, in which case expansion heads are 
soldered to the highest point of the gutter, in the 
center, or 7,7 ft. 6 in. from each end. The accepted 
coefficient of linear expansion or contraction for 
copper, per foot of length is .0000095 for each de- 
gree of temperature. Assuming zero to be the 
minimum of winter and 90 degrees the warmest 
weather of the summer, the expansion or contrac- 
tion is calculated by multiplying the number of feet 
in the length of the gutter by the variation in tem- 
perature and multiplying by the coefficient. 

Thus : 75 X 9° X .0000095 = 6750 X -0000095 
= .0641250 ft. By referring to a table of decimal 
equivalents we find that .0641250 ft. equals — il — 
in. or say }% in. for practical work. In other words 
when the temperature is zero the 75 ft. length of 
copper gutter will contract so that the two heads 
a and b will stand f\ in. apart. If this gutter were 
lined in a temperature of 90 degrees the heads 
would require to meet. As gutter lining is seldom 
installed during either extremes of temperature, it 
is necessary to exercise judgment, to deciding ac- 
cording to the prevailing temperature, how much 
allowance should be made for expansion or for con- 
traction. Thus if a gutter were lined when the tem- 
perature was 45 degrees, equal provision for ex- 
pansion and for contraction would be made and in 
soldering the two heads, a and b in position, they 
would be placed Y% in. apart; this would give an al- 
lowance of }i in. for further expansion and y% in. 
for further contraction. Assuming that the heads 
are soldered in position, with the temperature at 
45 degrees, the one head a is soldered flush with the 
edge of the sheet, while the head b is soldered so 
that there will be a ^ in. space between the two 
heads, which allows fully for expansion as above 
explained. These two heads a and b are partly 
shown by head a" in the perspective view. On the 
upper side of the heads a ^4 m - flange is bent out- 
ward as shown in the detailed section, over which a 



locked cap is placed as indicated by c, with about 
Yx in. play between the edges and locks as shown. 
The heads have laps for soldering purposes on both 
sides, as indicated by the numbers I, 2 and 3 in the 
perspective view. 

The front part of the expansion head is carried 
to the extreme line of 'the gutter indicated by the 
arrow at i while the rear part of the expansion head 
runs flush with the outer edge of the gutter lock 
at 4. When these heads have been soldered in posi- 
tion as indicated in the detailed section, the cap, in- 
dicated by c, is slipped over the projecting edges 
of the heads, and locked under the front edge of the 
gutter shown in the perspective view by C and D. 

To protect from leakage the ij4 in. lapped joint 
at the lock from 4 to 5, a gore piece indicated by 
e f is cut off diagonally so water will flow over with- 
out getting into the seam ; it is slipped under the 
flange lock as shown by the dotted lines and is 
soldered only along the top of the locked cap from 
x to .r. This combines the locked cap and gore in 
one but allows free movement of the main gutters. 

Sometimes when the roof is laid flat seam, this 
style of expansion joint shown in the detailed section 
is carried throughout the pitch of the roof, with the 
sides a and b bent direct on to the roofing sheets. To 
avoid the water running down the top of the expan- 
sion cap over the front edge of the cornice, there can 
be placed in the position shown by the arrow E a 
water spreader, as shown by E°. This throws the 
water to each side into the gutter where otherwise it 
would wash down over the front. 

These expansion heads serve in connection with 
any shaped gutter, and when placed in position as 
described relieve the metal of the strain caused by 
expansion and contraction. This, if carefully done, 
prevents the cracking of the soldered joints. 



PROVIDING FOR EXPANSION AND 
CONTRACTION OF THE METAL 
IN BASE AND CAP FLASHINGS 

Solution 171 

Copper base and cap flashings; usually occur 
against fire walls, chimneys, gables, curbs, dormer 
windows, etc., and the building materials are either 
of brick, stone, terra cotta, iron or wood. The fol- 
lowing methods are for providing for expansion 
and contraction when the flashings butt against 
various building materials. Thus, Fig. 573 shows 
the regulation base and cap flashings against a 
brick wall. The cap flashing a b, on a good job is 



}20 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



usually cut y]/ 2 in. wide or four strips from a 30 in. 
wide sheet, in 8 ft. lengths. In the process of form- 
ing, it is bent 4 and 35/ in. The 3j/£ in. side is built 
into the wall as the work progresses, as indicated 




fig. 573. — Base and Cap Flashing, Against a Brick Wall 

by b. while the 4 in. apron a forms a cap over the 
base flashing c. This method allows for the expan- 
sion and contraction of the metal as well as for the 
settlement of the beams, wall, etc. The flashing is 
used in flat as well as in standing seam roofing and 
is of the same construction that is used upon roofs 
covered with slag, tile or pitch. 

Occasionally there is trouble from leakage of the 
joints in the coping A thus making the walls damp 
on the inside. This is overcome by having the cap 
flashing extend through the wall, as indicated in 




F'g- 574- — Copper Cap Flashing Covering Entire Wall 

Fig. 574, where a b shows the cap flashing with up- 
right ridges at c c to meet the width of the bricks, 
so as to form a good bond. 

With parapet walls of stone or terra cotta, it is 
seldom that a mortar joint is in the proper position 
for the building in of the copper cap, the joint be- 
ing either too high or too low. For this reason a 
raggle is cut in the stone work, as indicated by A" in 
Fig- 575> or if the wau i s °f terra cotta this raggle 
is modeled in the terra cotta before the latter is 



baked. Then the cap A is formed 
the section at a and is secured in the 
of small lead plugs shown in diaj 
lead plugs are cast in tapering form 
4 in. long and in thickness so that 
the copper cap firmly in the wall, 
placed about 12 in. apart and the 



as indicated in 
raggle by means 
;ram X. These 
as shown, about 
they will wedge 
These plugs are 

spaces between 




Fig. 575. — Securing Flashing in 
Reglet 



Stone or Terra Cotta 



them are filled with roofers' cement to match the 
color of the wall. This roofing cement can be ob- 
tained to match any color. Under no circumstances 
should wooden plugs be used as is frequently done, 
for the wood will eventually rot away and a poor, 
insecure job is the result. 

The base flashing B is then passed under the cap 
A in the usual manner. Sometimes on a coping wall 
of a mansard roof the distance between a and b is 
so short (say 6 in. ), that the flashing may be put in 
in one piece, that is, without a cap. In this case the 
base flashing B would be secured direct to the raggle 
as before explained ; and since the amount of metal 
exposed would be so small, there would be no con- 
siderable expansion or contraction. 

On a large job, where a number of lead wedges 
are required, it is best to cast the wedges to the 
proper size. This is a much quicker method than 
pounding together sheet lead to the proper thick- 
ness, as is usually done, a procedure which does not 
give as good results as casting in the manner shown 
in Fig. 576. This figure shows an angle iron frame, 
over which a casting pan is hung at A B, made of 
16-gauge black iron with heads rivetted in at a, b 
and c. By having the plugs cast in these pans, three 
plugs are made at one operation and they will be of 
the proper size for the raggle joint. 

Fig. 577 shows how the base flashing is laid to 
allow for expansion and contraction under slate, 
tile or shingle siding. A lock B, is bent to the 
flashing A and fastened with the cleat C of the same 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



321 




Fig. 576.— Molds for Casting Lead Plugs 

material. There must be absolutely no nailing 
through the metal work. 

When the construction is of angles and tees, and 
the siding is of corrugated copper, the flashing un- 
der this siding is prepared as shown in Fig. 578. In 



indicated at a. This band iron is held in its proper 
position against the metal wall and the holes are 
marked on the wall, after which they are drilled and 
tapped to correspond with the thread of the round 
head machine screw in use. When all the holes have 
been tapped, the band iron, around which the copper 
cap has been bent, is screwed in position indicated 
by A. The base flashing is slipped under the cap, 
as shown. So that no leaks will occur between the 
copper cap and metal wall, soft roofers' cement is 
placed between the copper cap and wall before the 
screws A are drawn tight. Then when the cap flash- 
ing has been securely fastened, roofing cement is 
neatly set at an angle over the projecting ledge, as 
indicated by 0. This makes a compactly finished 
piece of work. The base flashing is then slipped 
under the cap as shown. 




Fig. 577. — Allowing for Expansion 
and Contraction of Copper Flash- 
ing Under Slate, Tile or Shingles 




Concrete 
Base 




Fig. 578. — Securing Flashing 
Under Metal Siding 



Fig. 579. — Secure Base and 
Cap Flashing to Metal Back 



this construction, under no consideration, should 
the bolts pass through the metal flashing which 
should be left free to "move" as shown at A, as the 
corrugated side will hold it in position when the 
siding is secured to the iron laths c c by the cleats 
b b. In roofs of this class which are constructed of 
iron and concrete, the roof covering is usually of 
slag or gravel, or sometimes tile. The constructive 
features, however, are alike whether the roof be of 
slag, gravel, tile or copper. 

When requirement demands a flashing, placed 
against a metal surface or wall, as shown in Fig. 
579, an entirely different construction must be em- 
ployed in securing the cap flashing and making a 
water tight joint. The upper part of the copper cap 
flashing is bent around a J4 x 1 in. band iron, as 
shown in the illustration, and through this band at 
intervals of 8 or 9 in. holes of }4 in. diameter are 
punched, through which the screws are to pass, as 




Fig. 580.— Securing Base Flashing and Sill Cap with Cleat 

Where a projecting sheet metal sill is to serve 
for the cap flashing, as shown in Fig. 580 arrange- 
ment is made to secure the base as well as the cap 



3 22 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



flashings with copper cleats constructed to allow for 
the expansion and contraction of the two flashings. 
This is accomplished by the peculiar bent cleat 
shown by a, secured and bent as follows : The 
cleats are made about 2 in. wide, first bent as shown 
in diagram X by i, 2 and 3. With the bight of the 
flashing known the cleats are nailed through flange 
1, as indicated by A. The base flashing is placed in 
position, as indicated by B and 2 in diagram X 
turned down. This holds the base flashing B in 
position. The sill C is then set and the flange 3 in 
diagram X turned upward, as indicated by a, which 
holds the cap flange of the sill in position. These 
cleats are usually placed about 12 in. apart. 



METHODS EMPLOYED IN PROVID- 
ING FOR EXPANSION AND CON- 
TRACTION OF THE METAL 
IN LAYING FLAT-SEAM 
ROOFING 



Solution 



172 



For flat-seam copper roofing good sheathing 
boards are an important requisite. They should be 
of even thickness, thoroughly seasoned; if not dry, 
they will shrink after being laid and will strain and 
break the seams in the roofing, causing constant 
buckling of the metal. Nor should the boards be 
light or springy, because the locked seams can be 
pounded down more smoothly when the boards are 
laid solid. 

The size of the sheets to be used in copper roof- 
ing varies according to the specifications given. 
With the size of the roof and the size of sheets de- 
termined, the number of sheets required can be 
ordered direct from the copper mill, cut to the 
proper size, thus saving the labor of this work in 
the shop. It is best also to have the sheets tinned at 
the mill, with pure tin i]/ 2 in. wide, all around the 
edges on both sides. The tinning may be done 
more cheaply and cleanly at the mill than in 
the shop by means of dipping or with the 
soldering copper. Whatever size sheets may 
be used the following explanations will apply 
to notching, edging and soldering. 

A most important point often overlooked is 
the notching of the sheets. Fig. 581 shows 
how to determine the amount that should be 
notched off the corners of the sheet. Deter- la- 
mination upon the size of the lock to be used, 
which should neither be upward of ]/> in. nor 



less than Y & in. Set the dividers to the desired width 
of the edge and on a sheet of copper scribe a line 
around the entire area as indicated by the dotted 
lines. Where these lines meet at 1 at each corner, 
cut off at an angle of 45 degrees, slightly more in- 
side the corner 1, as shown from a to b. This notch- 
ing is sometimes done by hand, in the smaller shops, 
with a gauge made of sheet iron as a guide. It is 
preferable and less expensive to use a corner notch- 




Fig. 582. — Corner Notching Machine 

ing machine, as shown in Fig. 582. This machine 
is designed for notching several thicknesses of 
roofing sheets at one time. There is one fixed or 
stationary gauge and the other is adjustable to regu- 
late the size of the corner notches. 

After the sheets are properly notched and edged, 
the fold at the corner will have the appearance of 
A in Fig. 583, but where the corner of the sheet has 
been cut off too much, as at B in Fig. 584, the sheet 
when edged will show a large opening as indicated 
by C, and when the sheets are laid as shown in 
Fig. 585, instead of the "butt" being covered, it 
would show an opening which is exaggerated by A; 
this makes a poor job and requires a quantity of 
solder to close up the opening. 

On laying the sheets, cleats should be employed 
to take care of expansion or contraction. If the nail 




Figs. 581, 583, 584.- 



A \ 




-Diagrams to Illustrate Proper and Improper 
Notching 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



3 2 3 



were driven directly through the sheet, the move- 
ment of the metal would be likely to cause a tear, 
but if the sheets are fastened by cleats as shown in 




Fig, 585. — Opening at "Butts" 
on Improperly Notched Sheets 

Fig. 586, the entire metal roof surface is free to 
move without breakage. The number of cleats 
shown in the cut is based on the use of a small 
sheet. Note that one cleat is placed near the "butt" 




Fig. 586. — Spacing the Cleats 

at A, and another midway between at B, while a 
cleat is placed in the center of the narrow side of 
the sheet at C. 

It frequently occurs that the nail with which the 
cleat is fastened rises from the heat of the sun, and 
footsteps on the nail head will show an impression 
on the upper sheet, and wear through. This can be 
avoided by cutting the cleat y 2 in. longer and turn- 
ing this J^-in. flange over the nail head, as indicated 




Fig. 587- — Three Operations in Securing Cleats 

in the diagrams 1, 2 and 3 in Fig. 587. In the first 
diagram, the cleat is shown nailed at a. The surplus 
flange b is then turned up' as indicated by c in 2, and 
is then flattened down as shown by d in 3. 

When the roof has been laid the sheets are flat- 
tened to a smooth surface with a flat faced mallet, 



when with rosin as a flux, the seams are thoroughly 
sweated with half and half solder (50 new tin and 
50 new lead) with 10-lb. soldering coppers. In 
soldering, it is desirable to solder the long seams 
first, then to slightly tap the "butts" a in Fig. 586 
with the hammer, to smoothen same and then to 
solder the short seams. When the roof has been com- 
pletely soldered including the upright seams of the 
flashings, the seams should be gone over carefully to 
prevent possible leaks and at the same time to scrape 
off the surplus rosin. Then the roof is carefully 
swept and flashings paint-skinned ; and if the seams 
have been well sweated lasting results are assured. 



METHODS EMPLOYED IN PROVID- 
ING FOR EXPANSION AND CON- 
TRACTION OF THE METAL 
IN LAYING STANDING 
SEAM ROOFING 

Solution 173 

The procedure on roof sheathing in the preceding 
solution applies also to standing seam roofing. In 
laying such roofing, of copper, the sheets can be 
bent up in 8 or 10-ft. lengths in the cornice brake, 
or of such length as the brake will permit. Usually 
sheets of 20x96 in. are employed, bent to the 




Fig. 588.— Vertical Heights 
of Standing Seam 



Fig. 589. — Cleat to 
Suit Lock in Fig. 588 



dimensions indicated in Fig. 588, which gives a 
finished standing lock of 1 in. Occasionally instead 
of bending up 1*4 an d 1J/2 in. on the sheet, only 1 
and 1% in. are turned up, thus giving a j4-in. fin- 
ished seam. 

The cross seams in standing lock roofing must 
have the edges tinned as in flat seam roofing; the 
edges are also cleated and soldered to make tight 
cross joints. The cleats used for standing lock 
roofing can be cut from scrap. For these 14-oz. 
copper is heavy enough. They are cut and formed 
as shown in Fig. 589, which gives full size measure- 
ments to work in connection with the seams shown 
in Fig. 588. 



3 2 4 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



/YaAe X '//e" /n w/n/er ; 
c/ose //? summer- 




Fig. 591 Fig. 592 

Fig. 590. Three Operations of Double Seaming in Laying Standing Seam Copper Roofing 



Copper standing seam should not be laid too 
snugly ; a slight space should be allowed, as in- 
dicated by the arrow A* in Fig. 590. This gives 
some slight play for expansion in connection with 
the use of the cleats. The cleats should be placed 
about 18 in. apart in a manner as follows : If the 
sheet A be laid first, the cleat B is set against A 
and nailed at a, and the upper j4-in. edge is turned 
down as indicated by B. The sheet E is now laid 
against the cleat and the %-in. edge is turned down 
as shown at D. Thus the turned down edges B 
and D hold both sheets in position ; this is the first 
operation. With the hand roofing double seamers 
and mallet, the quarter in. edge on sheet A is turned 
over as indicated in the second operation shown 
in Fig. 591, which shows part of the cleat exposed 
at C. Again with the hand double seamers and 
mallet the double seamed lock is completed as shown 
in Fig. 592, which covers the cleats entirely. 

When the lower end of the sheet join to an 




Fig. 593. — Locking the Strips to Eaves Gutter and Solder- 
ing the "Butts" 

eave gutter it is locked, as shown in Fig. 593, the 
sheet having been previously prepared as indicated 
in diagram X, where an edge occurs at h i, for 
locking to the gutter. This lock is bent with the 



roofing tongs and is locked to the gutter as shown 
at A. Then, after the standing lock has been tightly 
closed, the butt is soldered water tight along a b. 
It is sometimes seen in practice that this butt is 
turned along b c at an angle of 45 degrees, in the 
direction of the arrow, or that the double seam will 
show on the outside, where it must be soldered up 
to the line of bend b c. 

The method of joining the lock to the gutter also 
applies to connecting the standing lock roofing to 
the valley. Of course in the case of the valley 
the sheets must be cut to the proper bevel, with 
allowance for the lock made in a similar manner to 
that explained in connection with diagram X. 




Fig. 594. — Completed Comb Ridge Which Can be Applied 
to Finish Against Hips 

Fig. 594 shows how the roofing is finished at the 
ridge. In this case the finish is made with a 
comb ridge as indicated by A. This comb is pre- 
pared by means of a standing lock as shown, the 
doubled standing seam of the roofing proper being 
cut to miter against this comb ridge at a b, which 
must be carefully soldered. Preparatory to closing 
tightly, the standing lock A, red lead should be 
placed between the locks at A and then tightly 
malleted down. A rag dipped in turpentine is then 
used to wipe the red leaded seam clean, so that the 
copper will show clean. 

Sometimes the standing lock as indicated at A 
is substituted by turning this same lock over, as 
shown in diagram X, where the top ridge is finished 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



3^5 



by double seaming. If this style of finish be utilized, 
the standing seams at b a are turned down flat a 
short distance and double seamed with the ridge 
finish as indicated in X, with the standing seams on 
both pitches of the roof breaking joints as shown 




Fig. 595- 



-Breatcing Joints when Double Seaming Ridge 
Lock 



in Fig. 595. If the double seams meet it will be im- 
possible to double seam the ridge because of the 
many thicknesses of metal. 

The foregoing method of procedure applies also 
to finishing the hip ridge with the exception that the 
sheets are cut at a bevel to conform to the angle of 
the hip. 



LAYING ZINC OR COPPER ROOF- 
ING ON WOOD BATTENS 

Solution 174 

Battens are usually employed with zinc and cop- 
per roofing, and have a greater value in allowing 
for expansion of the sheets than can be obtained by 
any other method. This style consists of a series 
of battens nailed at proper intervals and covered 
with either sheet zinc or copper. 

Wood battens must be carefully spaced with a 
gauge so that the proper width may be maintained 
as shown in Fig. 596 by A A. Note the formation 
of the batten ; it is narrow on the roof line but wide 
at the top. 

The metal sheets can be bent in the brake in 8 
or 10-ft. lengths, as shown by B B B, with a flange 
turned outward as shown at F. The sheets are se- 
cured by cleats, C, which are spaced 10 in. apart, 
nailed to the batten and locked to the sheets. Note 
that the sheets B are bent up square, which gives 
ample space between the sheet and batten to allow 
for expansion, as indicated by the arrows a, a, a, a. 

When the roof is not steep the cross seams are 





OPERATIONS IN CONNECTION WITH BATTENS 
Fig. 596. — (Top) Spacing Battens and Cleating Copper Sheets 
Fig- 597- — (Center) Capping the Battens. Fig. 598. — (Be- 
low). Double Seaming the Corners 

cleated, locked and soldered in batten roofing, the 
same as in flat seam roofing. If the roof is very 
steep, say one-half pitch, the cross seams need only 
be cleated and locked, with the lock about i/\ in. wide. 
In turning up the sides of the sheet X care must be 
taken not to close the lock so that the lower and 
upper sheets can be hooked together. The closing 
of the lock can be avoided by placing a piece of 
leather or sheet lead in the lock. When the long 
strips have all been laid, the caps are slipped into 
position from the bottom, as indicated in Fig. 597,. 
and then turned down and double seamed, as shown 

at the corners A in 
Fig. 59§- 

Where the com- 
mon battens meet 
the ridge batten X, 
as in Fig. 599, the 
wood battens are so 
cut that they run 
flush at e°. The 
metal sheets are 
then formed 
against the ridge 




P'g- 599- — Cleating Sheets at Ridge 
or at Hip 



326 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



batten, as indicated in the cut, and the upright corner 
is soldered at A, with the corners at B notched out 
as indicated. Cleats, about 10 in. apart, are used to 
fasten the sheets at a, b and c. This allows free 
movement of the sheet at the side n as well as at 
the top e. 

The caps are then slipped over the common and 




Slipping on the Caps 



ridge battens as in Fig. 600 by A, B and B, with i-in. 
lap at a and b for soldering purposes. The notches 
at F and F are greatly exaggerated. The caps are 
then turned down and double-seamed at the sides as 




Ridqe. 
Batten 



Common 
Batten 



Fig. 601. — Double Seaming the Caps and Joining the 
Common and Ridge Batten Caps 

shown by A in Fig. 601 with the upright corner at 
x x soldered to prevent leakage. Then over the laps 
a, b and c the piece B is soldered. This soldering of 
the cap corners and top B in no way interferes 
with the free movement of the sheets, which are 
free to expand and contract. 

This method of finishing at the ridge also can 
be applied to the hip, with the exception that the 
common battens have to be cut at an angle against 
the hip batten. 

The finish at the eave, whether connected to an 



eave strip or gutter, is shown in connection with 
Fig. 602. Care must be taken that the top of the 
gutter is at least 2 in. below the lower edge of the 
eave edge as indicated at A, and that the eave 
edge is not less than 1^4 in. wide as shown. The 
wood battens should project over the back of the 
gutter a distance equal to the projection of the 
eave edge as shown in the reduced side view, 
and then cut at an angle shown from e to /, so 
that / will be in line with the back of the gutter. 
The batten will then look as shown by a' a. Over 
the bottom end of each batten a flashing cap is set 




View 



Fig. 602. — Applying Copper Flashing Cap at Eave 

as shown at B. This must fit snug and tight and 
be made to the dimensions shown in Fig. 602. 

A head is soldered at a a b b and the lower edge 
is locked to the ledge at c, and the cap nailed to the 
roof boards as shown. This flashing cap is to pre- 
vent any leaks from driving snow or rain, as no 
soldering must be done at the ends of the battens 
when the sheets are laid, as this would prevent the 
free movement of the sheets when expanding and 
contracting. 



Detai I of 
tj^.Eave 
Jlx Lock 




Rear of - 
Gutter Lining 



Fig. 603. — Laying Sheets Over Flashing Cap at Eave 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



327 



After this flashing cap has been placed on all 
battens, either common or hip, the metal sheets 
are then laid as shown in Fig. 603, in which a b c 
shows the flashing cap and A and B the roofing 
sheets bent as before explained. These sheets 
are allowed to project below the battens sufficiently 
to allow the front ends to be turned over as indi- 
cated by the under lap 1 and the top lap 2. When 
making the lock along the eaves strip at C D, it 
should be formed as shown in the detail at x. This 
acts as a precautionary drip. 

The cap is then slipped over the edges and double- 




Fig. 604. — Completing the Locked Cap 

seamed, as shown in Fig. 604, with the cap pro- 
jecting sufficiently beyond a and b so that the lap 1 
can be turned down over the side laps as indicated. 
No soldering must be done at the ends of the bat- 
tens, as this would prevent the free movement of the 
sheets. No leak will occur at this point because the 
flashing cap c d e will prevent any leakage. 

This method of finishing at the eaves is also 
used for finishing in the valleys. The sheet metal 
valley should turn up 14 in. on each side, with a 
1 -in. lock, thus using a 30-in. sheet. The battens 
should be cut on this line. The same, shaped 
flashing cap should be used in the valley as at the 
eaves, and should hook in the lock of the valley, 
but should not be soldered. 

The sheets should be locked to the lock of the 




Fig. 605.— Locking Sheets to Valley 



valley as shown in Fig. 605. They should have 
rounded edges, and the lock on the lower sheet or 



valley B must be larger than the lock on the roof- 
ing sheet C, so that in case of any water soaking 
under the lock and filling the lock on the roofing 
sheet C, it will overflow and return to the roof 
without getting on the inside. This lock is also likely 
to be filled with water in a driving wind storm, the 
rain striking the upper part of the lock on B and 
filling the lock of the sheet C with water as high as 
X Y, when it overflows without entering the in- 
side. The valleys are cleated the same as in flat 
seam roofing. 



LAYING A STANDING SEAM CIRCU- 
LAR METAL ROOF 

Method of Laying Out the Work, Obtain- 
ing the Width and Length of Sheets 
and Cutting Them to Avoid Waste 

Solution 175 

When circular towers are to be covered with 
standing seam metal roofing the method is alike to 
that of standing seam roofing, but the laying out of 
sheets requires special attention. Fig. 606 shows a 
plan and elevation of a circular roof over the rear 
of nave and altar of a church. That part of the 
straight double pitched roof between X Y 1 16 is 
laid in the manner previously described, but the 
semi-circular roof between 1, 7, 16 in plan is the 
subject under consideration. 

The semi-circular roof is divided into equal 
spaces of such dimensions that the metal sheets can 
be cut without waste. In copper or galvanized iron 
roofing of this kind sheets 8 or 10 ft. long are used. 
In tin roofing the sheets can be locked together any 
desired length. The spacings are indicated in the 
plan in Fig. 606, from 1 to 16. 

The next step is to obtain the length of the rafter 
from B to the apex C in elevation and then deduct 
the distance equal to C A, as the finial will set over 
same, thus allowing it to overlap the roofing to the 
extent indicated by A. Tack a piece of building 
paper or roofing felt on the roof or floor in the 
building and lay off on the line a b in Fig. 607 the 
distance from B to A to C in elevation in Fig. 606 
as shown from B to A to C in Fig. 607. At right 
angles to A B, through A and B draw lines as 
shown. Now take the length of one of the spaces in 
plan in Fig. 606 as 1-2 and set off one-half of same 
on either side of the line A B in Fig. 607 as shown 
by 1 and 2. From 1 and 2 draw lines to the apex C, 
cutting the line drawn through A as shown. Allow 



328 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Lock 



Ouflet 



606 




roof that the straight line from I to 2 is entirely 
practical to use. 

When the length of the rafter is such that two or 
more large sheets are required, the pattern is laid 
out as shown in Fig. 608. In this case we will as- 
sume that the distance on the center line A B from 
B to D is 14 ft., and that 8-ft. sheets or strips are 



Cr 035 Lock 



607 



PL/7/Y 




60S 



Fig. 606. — Plan and Elevation of a Circular Roof 



Fig. 607. — Getting Pattern 
for Individual Sheets 



for the standing edges on both sides as indicated at 
X and Y. Then 1 2 A will be the pattern, of which 
15 will be required as called for in plan in Fig. 606. 

If desired the paper pattern, Fig. 607, can be sent 
to the shop to be cut and formed or the pieces can 
be cut at the building and roofing tongs used for 
bending up the standing edges. 

Some may consider that as this pattern is laid out 
on the principle of developing a right cone, the bot- 
tom cut from 1 to 2 should be slightly curved. While 
this is true, the curvature is so small on a full sized 



Fig. 608. — Getting Pattern for In- 
dividual Sheets when One or 
More Long Sheets Are Required 



employed. The distance from B to C is figured 7 ft, 
11 in., which allows y 2 in. lap at top and bottom for 
locking the sheets. So that the cross locks will not 
meet in double seaming the standing locks always 
break joints in the sheets ; therefore on the next layer 
the distance of 7 ft. 11 in. will be measured from D 
to E. This will break joints alternately. For a roof 
of this run of rafter we would require eight sheets 
from B to C and eight from C to D ; also seven 
sheets from D to E and seven sheets from E B 
breaking joints alternately. While the diagram 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



shown is net, cross locks must be allowed to the 
paper patterns for the cross seams. 

When the various tapering sheets are being cut 
the proper width of the sheet must be selected, from 
which there will be the least waste, as shown in 




method of development is given. First draw the 
center line A B, at right angles to which draw the 
line C D to equal the half diameter of the roof. 
Establish the hight of the roof at its apex, as shown 
by C E. Lay off the semi-width of the ventilator 
as shown at H. With E as a center, and E D as a 
radius, draw the arc D G. To provide for the di- 
vision of the roof into twenty sections, the one- 
quarter plan BCD struck from C as center, is di- 
vided into five spaces as indicated from I to V, and 
one of the spaces as I is laid off into equal divisions, 
as shown by the heavy dots. With this distance 
D D° divided into five spaces, we start from G in 
the pattern and set off five corresponding spaces, as 
shown from G to F, and draw the radial lines F E 
and G E. Refer to where the ventilator intersects the 
roof line at H, and proceeding to use E as center and 
E H as radius, intersect the radial lines previously 
drawn from G and F, as shown. Many of these bins 



Fig. 609. — Showing Minimum Waste on Sheets when 
Proper Width is Selected 

Fig. 609 where the only waste is indicated by the 
shaded portion. The heavy dashes at a and b in 
both sheets indicate notches at the lower end of the 
sheet, on which locks are turned to attach to the 
gutter lining. Where one or more sheets are to be 
locked together, edges are added to top and bottom. 

The sheets are cleated, locked and double seamed 
as already described. 

Where the finial sets over the apex of the roof as 
shown in Fig. 606, mechanics sometimes flatten 
down the standing lock, which destroys the archi- 
tectural effect of the standing seam. A better 
method is to notch out the lower flare of the finial 
at F wherever the standing seam occurs and then 
set this over the standing edges, which makes a 
first class finish. 



STANDING SEAM CONICAL ROOF 
OVER LARGE GRAIN BIN 

Solution 176 

The perspective of Fig. 610 shows a roof laid 
out in 20 sections, alike to A, with standing seams 
indicated by B, B, C showing a plain ventilator at 
the apex. The ventilator at the top brings the roof 
to the formation of a frustum of a right cone, which 
is laid out as shown in Fig. 611, where the shortest 




6/0 




i'JtL. 



o/st6/e/r/t x 



i\\ 



\ \ 



owe Qi/#/?rfff Pt/jH 



7Z~ 



! ^ 

[B L 

Fig. 610, 
Fig. 611 



JF~ 



m 



6// 



D/i4Gtf4/1 

r 




Perspective View of Conical Roof over Large 

Grain Bins 
Obtaining the Pattern for Conical Roof over 
Bins 



33° 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



are of large size, and if we assume that the bin in 
question measures 6 ft. 6 in. diameter or a total of 
78 in., it is not necessary to draw the quarter plan, 
since the circumference may be simply computed, as 
follows: 78 in. X 3- I 4 J 6 = 245 in. 245 in. divided 
by 20, the number of roof sections sought, equals 
1234 in., the distance to be laid off along the line 
F G in the pattern. The standing seams are 
usually made as indicated in sketch X, with rivets 
at intervals, as at d, and we allow the single edge of 
1 in. to the pattern at a and a double edge of 2 in. 
at b. The twenty sections are then bent on the 
brake, as shown at X, when they are locked together 
on the bin. Including the standing edge about 15% 
in. of material would be required along F G in the 
pattern; therefore, two sections may be obtained 
from a 20 in. wide sheet, on which the pattern is 
moved along as indicated in diagram Y the shaded 
portion represents the waste. 



LAYING CORRUGATED GALVAN- 
IZED IRON OR COPPER ROOF- 
ING AND SIDING 

With Methods of Obtaining Water-Tight 
Connections at Eave, Wall and Ridge 

Solution 177 

Galvanized iron or copper corrugated sheets, usu- 
ally employed for roofing and siding, measure 2^2 
in. from center to center and have y§ in. depth. The 
full width of sheet with corrugations is 26 in. and 




Fig. 612. — Corrugated Sheet Iron Roof Covering 



Fig. 613. — How the Corrugations are Measured 

the covering width is 24 in., Fig. 612. The sheets 
may be obtained in from 5 to 12 ft. lengths, and 
gauges from Nos. 16 to 28 inclusive. The meas- 
urement of the corrugations is indicated by A and 
a in Fig. 613, A representing 2% in. and a %& in. 



Fig. 614 indicates the lap recommended for roof- 
ing. The left edge a curves upward and the right 
edge downward, to the center of the corrugation. 
Thus in the use of the sheets of the standard width 





Fig. 614. — Lap Required 
for Roofing 



Fig. 615. — Lap Required 
for Siding 



of 26 in., alternate sheets are inverted when applied 
to the roof. A satisfactory siding with one corru- 
gation side lap is shown in Fig. 615. Referring 
to Figs. 614 and 615 the nail of galvanized iron is 
invariably driven through the highest point of the 
corrugation. The nails and lead washers employed 






Fig. 616. — Lead Washers and Galvanized Nails used on 
Wood Framing 

are shown in Fig. 616. The lead washers effect a 
water-tight joint, preventing leakage and rusting at 
the nail hole, thereby prolonging the life of the roof. 
The ends of the corrugated sheets, applied to roofs, 
should be lapped from three to six inches as re- 
quired by the pitch of the roof, but for siding two 
inches is sufficient. For corrugated roofing, the 
quickest method of fastening the sheets to iron 
purlins or iron frame work is by means of clinch 
nails, in addition to lead washers. The nails are 
of No, 9 galvanized wire, in lengths of from 3 to 14 




Fig. 617. — Clinch Nails for Fastening Corrugated Sheets 
to Iron Purlins or Iron Framework 

inches, Fig. 617. Roofing or siding made from 
copper sheets requires to be secured with either brass 
or copper fastenings. In the procedure of applying 
metal corrugated roofing on wood sheathing or 
rafters, the roofer of experience begins by laying 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



33i 





the roofing from the side opposite to that from 
which the wind blows ; in other words, at the right 
of the building should the wind current come from 
the left, and vice versa. The purpose is to prevent 
the wind driving under the laps. If a finish at the 
eaves be desired, a molding may be formed, as in- 
dicated by A-B-C in Fig. 618; the upper flange is 
nailed on the rafters at X and allowance is made 
for a drip and pocket at B-C ; the flange C is nailed 
to the uprights, as shown. The sheets should pro- 
ject over the eaves from two to three inches, as 
indicated at a. An eave gutter may also be hung 
over the flange X and connected to the ground by 
conductor pipes. In all cases care should be taken 
to have all corrugations on the length of the rafter 
run in straight lines. If roofing be of light gauge 
metal, as numbers 28 or 26, the roof should be 
close sheathed ; for the heavier gauges, sheathing 
boards may be dispensed with and be substituted by 
purlins, whose distances from center to center equal 
the nailing distances of the sheets. The groove or 
pocket between B and C should be of accurate 
width to hold the corrugated sheet compactly. 
Where corrugated roofing abuts a brick wall, as in 
Fig. 619, sheets known as "corrugated side wall 
flashings" are employed, not less than 6 in. of which 
should be turned up against the wall as indicated 
at A. In this case the rafters B and C are spaced 



Fig. 618.— Finishing at the Eaves when the Framing is of 

Wood 
Fig. 619.— Finishing at Gable Walls when Framing is of 

Wood 

Fig. 62a— Finishing at Gable End when Framing is of 

Wood 

Fig. 621. — Finishing at the Ridge 

Fig. 622.— Corrugated V Ridge Capping 

to conform to the width of the sheets used; 
the sheets are nailed 12 in. apart at D and H, 
with galvanized iron or zinc nails with lead wash- 
ers. The flashing is then counter-flashed as indi- 
cated at E and F, allowance being made for a i 1 /- 
in. flange, a-b, to be securely fastened and paint- 
skinned into the joints of the brick work. When 
there are no brick walls present and the entire 
structure is of wood or iron framing, the finish 
at the gable end or elsewhere may be made as in- 
dicated in Fig. 620. Note that the formation of 
this gable end finish A, is to receive the corrugated 
sheet on the roof as well as at the sides. It is 
nailed at the side at a and has an upturned edge 
to meet the high point of the corrugation at e. The 
edge e is secured to the roof by means of cleats, 
shown in detail at X, nailed 12 in. apart. The roof- 
ing sheet slips in at e, and the siding should fit 
compactly into the side pocket at i. In the case of a 
roof having no sheathing, it is necessary to sheath 
its gable end sufficiently to receive the ledge cleats 
and form a solid foundation. If framing be of iron 
angles and tees, the flange of the gable finish A, 
may be extended to meet the second corrugation 
at r. The finish at the ridge can be made in three 
ways. The first method is illustrated by Fig. 621. 
The ridge is formed with a groove therein, as 
shown by A-B-C, and is nailed to the roof at a-b-c 
and d. The width of the groove at X is such that 
the corrugations will fit closely. Should there be 
exposure to leakage from driving storms, the groove 
may be filled with roofer's cement and the sheets 



33- 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



pressed in. The second method of finishing at the 
ridge is by means of a corrugated V ridge capping, 
shown in Fig. 622. The corrugations of these cap- 
pings are pressed in and fit over the corrugated 
sheets ; they are nailed, riveted or bolted thereto. 
Another shape of ridge covering is shown in Fig. 




Fig. 623. — Corrugated Ridge Roll 

623. This has pressed corrugation in addition to 
a ridge roll, as shown. In the use of this ridge roll 
it is desirable to fasten a ridge pole to the roof, as 




Fig. 624.— Wood Ridge Pole to Receive Metal Ridge Roll 

shown in Fig. 624. to receive the metal roll and 
prevent injury to the metal during the erection and 
use of scaffolding. 

A corrugated roof abutting a vertical wall or shaft 
is finished against the wall by means of a corru- 




Fig. 625. — Corrugated Flashing for Wall Abutment 

gated wall flashing, shown in Fig. 625. Such 
sheets are pressed in conformity with the standard 
requirements of corrugated material and have a 
flat upright metal surface which it is found in prac- 
tice should measure not less than 6 in. It will be 
understood that these flashings are to be cap flashed 
to make a tight joint with the wall abutment. 





When fastening the sheets to iron framing the 
side laps are riveted at intervals of from 12 to 15 
in. or less ; the end laps on every alternate corru- 
gation. Four methods of fastening the corrugated 
sheets to the iron framing are illustrated in Figs. 

626 to 629 inclusive. The first method, Fig. 626, 
is to pass a cleat of galvanized band iron, % in. 
wide and 1/16 in. thick, around the purlin or beam 
and to rivet each end to the sheet at a and b; 
by contracting or pressing this band iron cleat 
towards the web of the beam or purlins at ;', a com- 
pact and secure fastening is made which also allows 
for expansion and contraction of the sheet. Fig. 

627 shows how galvanized band iron cleats are 





Fig. 628. — Using Clinch 

Nails Shown in Fig. 617 

for Iron Framing 



Fig. 629. — Using Strap Iron 
Cleats for Iron Framing 



Fig. 626. — Using Strap Iron 
Cleat on Iron Framing 



Fig. 627. — Using Band Iron 
Cleat on Iron Framing 



firmly riveted to the sheet, at c, and bind against 
the flange of the Z bar or angle iron. Fig. 628 
shows a galvanized clinch nail, d, driven through 
the corrugated sheet and bent around the angle 
iron. Another fastening is shown in Fig. 629, where 
the cleat is riveted to the sheet at c and clamped 
to the flange of the channel iron. When nailing 
the corrugated siding to wood framing without 
sheathing boards, the studding should be framed 
to measure 24 in. from center to center, unless 
it is preferred to place them farther apart and nail 
the sheets to furring or batten strips, placed approx- 
imately two feet apart, or the distance from nailing 
centers of the sheet. The vertical seams of the siding 
are invariably nailed through the tops of the cor- 
rugations, as indicated in Fig. 630 by 1-2-3 anc ^ 4 > 
the horizontal seams are nailed in the valleys of the 
corrugations, as indicated in the illustration by a-b-c, 
etc. In fastening the siding laps at the ends of 
the sheets, the nails or rivets should be placed about 
2 in. above the upper edge of the lower sheets, thus 
providing latitude for movement should there be 
any settling. The use of heavy gauge corrugated 
sheets, dispensing with wood sheathing board, re- 
duces fire risk, favoring minimum insurance cost. 
The siding should be set clear off the ground, em- 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



333 




A/S 20 Orf/U/J/V/ZFO 
/tfO/V BrtS£ 




Fig. 632. — Metal Corner Stile to Re- 
ceive Corrugated Siding 



Fig. 630. — Lapping and Nailing 
Vertical Seams of Corrugated Siding 



Fig. 



631. — Sheet Metal Base to Re- 
ceive Corrugated Siding 



heavier galvan- 
the lower part 



ploying a base of No. 20 or 
ized iron, as shown in Fig. 631 
should be covered with two coats of asphalt paint, 
thickly applied. Fig. 632 shows the method of 
employing a metal corner stile to receive corrugated 
siding. It is nailed or bolted to the framing, 
through the flanges a and i, the grooves b and / 
being of a size to admit and hold the corrugation 
compactly. The width of the stile c-d or d-e is de- 
termined by individual preference. On first class 
work, sheets and trimmings are usually painted on 
the two sides with red lead ; they must be thoroughly 
dry before being applied. 

COVERING DOMES WITH FLAT 
SEAM ROOFING : METHODS AP- 
PLICABLE TO ROOFS OF 
TIN, COPPER OR ZINC 

Solution 178 

Fig. 633 shows a front elevation of a dome roof 
which we will assume is to be covered with flat 
seam roofing. The gutter, indicated in the cornice, 
requires to be carefully lined with a view to locating 
the first lock about 2 in. above the cornice top, as 
shown at a; thus overflowing drainage will be in- 
tercepted and run over the front edge of the cor- 
nice, without reaching the lock, since no locks on 
the roof are to be soldered, excepting the extreme 
top of the dome below the finial, or those locks 
occurring as far down as is indicated by AA. Great 
care is required in laying out the various patterns 
for the several courses ; the method illustrated by 
Fig. 634 applies to roofing of tin, sheet iron, zinc, 
and sheet copper. After the dome has been care- 
fully wood sheathed, find the exact center of its 



top and drive a wire nail therein, to which fasten 
some spool wire. The spool wire is drawn over the 
roof of the dome and to the bottom of the first 
course, indicated by X-X in Fig. 634, a circle 




Fig. 633. — Front Elevation of Dome Roof 

is drawn around the base of the dome, forming 
a guide line for giving the metal a straight and 
level start; this operation requires to be conducted 
with considerable care. 

The base line, X-X, around the entire dome is 
divided into an equal number of parts, when careful 
consideration of the diameter of the dome is re- 
quired in order that the spaces or parts are so 



334 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



separated as to readily conform to the curve of the 
dome ; the sheets must not be of excess width, 
else they will buckle when the locks are closed ; 
they must be made to lie smoothly and compactly 
against the dome, so that, when the work is com- 
pleted the dome will present a true spherical surface. 
In this case, in which we have considered a dome of 




Fig. 634. — Obtaining Dimensions for Laying out Patterns 
of Sheets for Courses 

33 ft. diameter, which is reduced to inches, as 12x33 
or 396 in. We find the circumference of the base of 
the dome by multiplying 396 by 3.1416, the product 
being 1,244 m - We space this sum of distance into 
56 parts or 14 parts to each quarter, as indicated 
in the one-quarter plan, making each space to 
slightly exceed 22.2 in. The reader should not over- 
look that the smaller the diameter of the dome, the 
smaller will be the required size of sheet. The 56 
divisions in the first course form the basis for 
obtaining the pattern for each succeeding course. 



The sheets in the first course are triangular in 
shape, as shown in the one-half elevation, and they 
have the lock turned up and down, so that water 
will flow over the seam. Laying the sheets diago- 
nally as shown disposes of vertical seams and per- 
mits water to pass without the likelihood of leakage. 
The pattern for the first course, marked E in ele- 




#£& 



637 





Fig. 635. — Pattern for First Course 

Fig. 636. — Pattern for Second Course 

Fig. 637. — Operations in Turning the Cleat 

Fig. 638. — Soldered Cleat to Hold Down Butts of Sheet 

vation, is laid out as shown in Fig. 635. Take the 
length of one of the divisions previously obtained 
from the circumference of the first course or C-D 
in the quarter plan in Fig. 634 and lay it off on 
any line, as C-D in Fig. 635. From C and D, draw 
lines at angles of 45 degrees, meeting at a. Connect 
lines C-fl and a-D and allow half-inch locks on the 
three sides, as shown. E indicates the pattern for 
the sheets in the first course, of which 56 are re- 
quired. When these are cut, turn the lower lock 
downward and the two diagonal locks upward as 
indicated in diagram E c . The first course, E, in 
Fig. 634 is then laid ; the lock of the gutter lining 
is adjusted and each side lock secured with two 
cleats as indicated by i-i, etc., in the half elevation. 
When this first course has been laid, measurements 
may be taken for the second course, indicated by 
F. Take accurately the distance across from a to b, 
which must be the same between each sheet around 
the entire circumference, and place it on any line 
as a-b in diagram F, in Fig. 636. Proceed by taking 
accurately the equal distances from to a or from 
o to b in Fig. 634; using a and b in diagram F, 
Fig. 636, as centers, describe arcs intersecting each 
other at c and c' ; complete the outline a-c-b-c'. 
Allow half-inch locks on the four sides ; turn two 
locks downward and two locks upward as indicated 
in diagram F c . In like manner there will also be 
56 sheets required for course F, Fig. 634, fastened 
with cleats, as shown. Note how the edges are 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



335 



notched in E, Fig. 635, and in F, Fig. 636; it will 
be seen that the notching is vertical at the sides 
and horizontal at top and bottom. In the manner 
described each succeeding pattern or course is meas- 
ured from the course previously laid. Thus the 
pattern for course G in Fig. 634 is found with the 
distance between the corners c and d and the lengths 
b-c and b-d, as radii. Course H is laid out by means 
of the distance c-f with the distances c-c and c-f, 
as radii. All sheets must be secured with cleats 
which are approximately 1 in. wide ; the cleats are 
turned as shown in the three operations in Fig. 637 ; 
the first diagram indicates the nail inserted ; the 
second shows the back of the cleat turned up and 
ready to close over the nail head which is shown 
in diagram 3. In cases of tendency on the part of 
the butts, at a, c and / in Fig. 634, to raise, a cleat 
is required to be soldered under the sheet, as indi- 
cated at a, in Fig. 638, and when the butt cleat is 
nailed to the roof the nail head requires to be cov- 
ered, as was explained heretofore. When the dome 
has thus been completely covered, the seams are 
carefully malleted down; at the top of the dome, 
the seams are soldered where it is necessary. If 
no soldering be undertaken, white lead is placed 
between the locks, with a small tool brush ; this is 
done before malleting down the locks and gives 
additional security. If the roof is of galvanized iron 
or tin, the white lead may remain, to be covered 
with the desired color of paint ; but the seams of 
roofs of copper should be cleaned promptly by the 
usual means of rags saturated with turpentine. 

Number of Sheets Required to Cover a Given 
Surface of Tin Roofing 







Flat Seam 






Stand 


ng 5 


earn 














— 





Sing 


e Lock 


L 


ouble Lock 














Edged 


Edged 


H 


-In. 


1- 


In. 


U 


-In. 


1-In. 






54 

14 


In. 
20 


H In. 
14 20 


S 


;am 


Si am 


Seam 


Seam 






14 


20 


14 


20 


14 


20 


14 


20 




Given 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


X 


Given 


Surface 20 


28 


20 


28 


20 


28 


20 


28 


20 


28 


20 


2S 


Surface 


Sq. Ft 


. s 


S 


S 


S 


S 


S 


S 


S 


S 


S 


S 


S 


Sq. Ft. 


40 


24 


12 


24 


12 


26 


13 


26 


13 


26 


13 


27 


13 


40 


41 


24 


12 


25 


12 


26 


13 


27 


13 


27 


13 


28 


13 


41 


42 


25 


12 


25 


12 


27 


13 


28 


14 


28 


13 


28 


14 


42 


43 


26 


13 


26 


13 


28 


13 


28 


14 


28 


14 


29 


14 


43 


44 


26 


13 


27 


13 


28 


14 


29 


14 


29 


14 


30 


14 


44 


45 


27 


13 


27 


13 


29 


14 


30 


14 


30 


14 


30 


15 


45 


46 


27 


13 


28 


14 


29 


14 


30 


15 


30 


15 


31 


15 


46 


47 


28 


14 


28 


14 


30 


15 


31 


15 


31 


15 


32 


15 


47 


48 


28 


14 


29 


14 


31 


15 


32 


15 


31 


15 


32 


16 


48 


49 


29 


14 


30 


14 


31 


15 


32 


16 


32 


15 


33 


16 


49 


50 


30 


15 


30 


15 


32 


16 


33 


16 


33 


16 


34 


16 


50 


51 


30 


15 


31 


15 


33 


16 


34 


16 


33 


16 


34 


17 


51 


52 


31 


15 


31 


15 


33 


16 


34 


17 


34 


16 


35 


17 


52 


53 


31 


15 


32 


16 


34 


16 


35 


17 


35 


17 


36 


17 


53 


54 


32 


16 


32 


16 


35 


17 


36 


17 


35 


17 


36 


17 


54 


55 


33 


16 


33 


16 


35 


17 


36 


18 


36 


17 


37 


18 


55 


56 


33 


16 


34 


16 


36 


17 


37 


18 


37 


IS 


38 


18 


56 


57 


34 


16 


34 


17 


36 


18 


37 


18 


37 


18 


38 


18 


57 


58 


34 


17 


35 


17 


37 


18 


38 


19 


38 


18 


39 


19 


58 


59 


35 


17 


35 


17 


38 


18 


39 


19 


39 


19 


40 


19 


59 


60 


35 


17 


36 


18 


38 


19 


39 


19 


39 


19 


40 


19 


60 


61 


36 


18 


37 


18 


39 


19 


40 


19 


40 


19 


41 


20 


61 


62 


37 


18 


37 


18 


40 


19 


41 


20 


41 


19 


42 


20 


62 


63 


37 


18 


• 38 


18 


40 


20 


41 


20 


41 


20 


42 


20 


63 


64 


38 


18 


38 


19 


41 


20 


42 


20 


42 


20 


43 


21 


64 


65 


38 


19 


39 


19 


41 


20 


43 


21 


42 


20 


44 


21 


65 


66 


39 


19 


40 


19 


42 


20 


43 


21 


43 


21 


44 


21 


66 


67 


40 


19 


40 


20 


43 


21 


44 


21 


44 


21 


45 


22 


67 


68 


40 


20 


41 


20 


43 


21 


45 


22 


44 


21 


46 


22 


68 


69 


41 


20 


41 


20 


44 


21 


45 


22 


45 


22 


46 


22 


69 


70 


41 


20 


42 


20 


45 


22 


46 


22 


46 


22 


47 


22 


70 


71 


42 


20 


43 


21 


45 


22 


47 


23 


46 


22 


48 


23 


71 


72 


42 


21 


43 


21 


46 


22 


47 


23 


47 


22 


48 


23 


72 


73 


43 


21 


44 


21 


46 


23 


48 


23 


48 


23 


49 


23 


73 


74 


44 


21 


44 


22 


47 


23 


48 


23 


48 


23 


50 


24 


74 


75 


44 


22 


45 


22 


48 


23 


49 


24 


49 


23 


50 


24 


75 


76 


45 


22 


46 


22 


48 


23 


50 


24 


50 


24 


51 


24 


76 


77 


45 


22 


46 


22 


49 


24 


50 


24 


50 


24 


52 


25 


77 


78 


46 


22 


47 


23 


50 


24 


51 


25 


51 


24 


52 


25 


78 


79 


47 


23 


47 


23 


50 


24 


52 


25 


52 


25 


53 


25 


79 


80 


47 


23 


48 


23 


51 


25 


52 


25 


52 


25 


54 


26 


SO 


81 


48 


23 


48 


23 


52 


25 


53 


26 


53 


25 


54 


26 


81 


82 


48 


24 


49 


24 


52 


25 


54 


26 


53 


26 


55 


26 


82 


83 


49 


24 


50 


24 


53 


26 


54 


.26 


54 


26 


56 


27 


83 


84 


49 


24 


50 


24 


53 


26 


55 


27 


55 


26 


56 


27 


84 


85 


50 


24 


51 


25 


54 


26 


56 


27 


55 


26 


57 


27 


85 


86 


51 


25 


51 


25 


55 


26 


56 


27 


56 


27 


58 


28 


86 


87 


51 


25 


52 


25 


55 


27 


57 


28 


57 


27 


58 


28 


87 


88 


52 


25 


53 


25 


56 


27 


58 


28 


57 


27 


59 


28 


88 


89 


52 


26 


53 


26 


57 


27 


58 


28 


58 


28 


60 


28 


89 


90 


53 


26 


54 


26 


57 


28 


59 


28 


59 


2S 


60 


29 


90 


91 


54 


26 


54 


26 


58 


28 


60 


29 


59 


28 


61 


29 


91 


92 


54 


26 


55 


27 


58 


28 


60 


29 


60 


29 


62 


29 


92 


93 


55 


27 


56 


27 


59 


29 


61 


29 


61 


29 


62 


30 


93 


94 


55 


27 


56 


27 


60 


29 


61 


30 


61 


29 


63 


30 


94 


95 


56 


27 


57 


27 


60 


29 


62 


30 


62 


30 


64 


30 


95 


96 


56 


27 


57 


28 


61 


29 


63 


30 


62 


30 


64 


31 


96 


97 


57 


28 


58 


28 


62 


30 


63 


31 


63 


30 


65 


31 


97 


98 


58 


28 


59 


28 


62 


30 


64 


31 


64 


30 


66 


31 


98 


99 


58 


2S 


59 


29 


63 


30 


65 


31 


64 


31 


66 


32 


99 







Flat Seam 


c 


ingl 


St 

2 LOC 


anding S 
k D 


earn 
aubl 


; Loc 


k 




Number of Boxes and Sheets 


Required to Cover 














Edged 
14 In. 


Edged 
¥s In. 


ii-Ln. 
Seam 


1-ln. 
Seam 


-Vln. 
Seam 


1-In. 
Seam 




Given 

Surface 




a Given Surface 


of 


T 


n Roofing 






14 


20 


14 


20 


14 


20 


14 


20 


14 


20 


14 


20 










flat 


beam 






St 


andin 


g Seam 


Given 
Surface 


Given 
Surface 


X 

20 


X 

2S 


X 

20 


X 

28 


X 

20 


X 

28 


X 

20 


X 

28 


X 

20 


X 

28 


X 

20 


X 

28 


Given 
Surface 


of Roof 
to be 


Edged 
'A In. 






Edged 
Vs In. 




Single Lock 
^'4-In. Seam 

14x20 20x28 


of Roof 
to be 


Sq. Ft 
10 


S 
6 

7 


S 

3 

4 


S 
6 
7 


S 
3 

4 


S 
7 

7 


S 
4 

4 


S 
7 
8 


S 

4 
4 


s 

7 
8 


S 
4 
4 


S 
7 
8 


S 
4 
4 


Sq. Ft. 
10 
11 


Covere< 


— 
14 


x 20 


20x28 


14x 


20 




28 


Covered 


11 


Sq. Ft. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


'S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


Sq. Ft. 


12 


7 


4 


8 


4 


S 


4 


8 


4 


8 


4 


8 


4 


12 


100 





59 





29 





60 





29 





64 





31 


100 


13 


8 


4 


8 


4 


9 


4 


9 


5 


9 


4 


9 


5 


13 


200 


1 


5 





57 


1 


7 





57 


1 


15 





61 


200 


14 


9 


4 


9 


4 


9 


5 


10 


5 


10 


5 


10 


5 


14 


300 


1 


63 





85 


1 


66 





86 


1 


78 





91 


300 


15 


9 


5 


9 


5 


10 


5 


10 


5 


10 


5 


10 


5 


15 


400 


2 


10 


1 


1 


2 


14 


1 


2 


2 


29 


1 


9 


400 


16 


10 


5 


10 


5 


11 


5 


11 


5 


11 


5 


11 


6 


16 


500 


2 


68 


1 


29 


2 


73 


1 


30 


2 


92 


1 


39 


500 


17 


10 


5 


11 


5 


11 


6 


12 


6 


12 


6 


12 


6 


17 


600 


3 


14 


1 


57 


3 


20 


1 


59 


3 


43 


1 


70 


600 


18 


11 


6 


11 


6 


12 


6 


12 


6 


12 


6 


12 


6 


18 


700 


3 


73 


1 


85 


3 


79 


1 


87 


3 


106 


1 


100 


700 


19 


12 


6 


12 


6 


12 


6 


13 


6 


13 


6 


13 


6 


19 


800 


4 


19 


2 


1 


4 


27 


2 


3 


4 


57 


2 


18 


800 


20 


12 


6 


12 


6 


13 


7 


13 


7 


13 


7 


14 


7 


20 


900 


4 


77 


2 


29 


4 


86 


2 


32 


5 


8 


2 


48 


900 


21 


13 


6 


13 


6 


14 


7 


14 


7 


14 


7 


14 


7 


21 


1000 


5 


23 


2 


57 


5 


33 


2 


60 


5 


71 


2 


78 


1000 


22 


13 


7 


14 


7 


14 


7 


15 


7 


15 


7 


15 


7 


22 


1100 


5 


82 


2 


85 


5 


92 


2 


89 


6 


22 


2 


109 


1100 


23 


14 


7 


14 


7 


15 


7 


15 


8 


15 


8 


16 


8 


23 


1200 


6 


28 


3 


1 


6 


40 


3 


5 


6 


85 


3 


27 


1200 


24 


14 


7 


15 


7 


16 


8 


16 


8 


16 


8 


16 


8 


24 


1300 


6 


86 


3 


29 


6 


99 


3 


34 


7 


36 


3 


57 


1300 


25 


15 


8 


15 


8 


16 


8 


17 


8 


17 


8 


17 


8 


25 


1400 


7 


33 


3 


57 


7 


46 


3 


62 


7 


99 


3 


87 


1400 


26 


16 


8 


16 


8 


17 


8 


17 


9 


17 


8 


18 


9 


26 


1500 


7 


91 


3 


86 


7 


105 


3 


90 


8 


50 


4 


5 


1500 


27 


16 


8 


16 


8 


18 


9 


18 


9 


IS 


9 


18 


9 


27 


1600 


8 


37 


4 


2 


8 


53 


4 


7 


9 


1 


4 


35 


1600 


28 


17 


8 


17 


8 


18 


9 


19 


9 


19 


9 


19 


9 


28 


1700 


8 


96 


4 


30 


9 





4 


35 


9 


64 


4 


66 


1700 


29 


17 


9 


18 


9 


19 


9 


19 


10 


19 


9 


20 


10 


29 


1800 


9 


42 


4 


58 


9 


59 


4 


63 


10 


15 


4 


96 


1800 


30 


18 


9 


18 


9 


19 


10 


20 


10 


20 


10 


20 


10 


30 


1900 


9 


100 


4 


86 


10 


6 


4 


92 


10 


78 


5 


14 


1900 


31 


19 


9 


19 


9 


20 


10 


21 


10 


21 


10 


21 


10 


31 


2000 


10 


46 


5 


2 


10 


66 


5 


8 


11 


29 


5 


44 


2000 


32 


19 


9 


19 


10 


21 


10 


21 


10 


21 


10 


22 


11 


32 


2100 


10 


105 


5 


30 


11 


13 


5 


37 


11 


92 


5 


74 


2100 


33 


20 


10 


20 


10 


21 


10 


22 


11 


22 


11 


22 


11 


33 


2200 


11 


52 


5 


58 


11 


72 


5 


65 


12 


43 


5 


105 


2200 


34 


20 


10 


21 


10 


22 


11 


23 


11 


22 


11 


23 


11 


34 


2300 


11 


110 


5 


86 


12 


19 


5 


93 


12 


106 


6 


23 


2300 


35 


21 


10 


21 


10 


23 


11 


23 


11 


23 


11 


24 


11 


35 


2400 


12 


36 


6 


2 


12 


79 


6 


10 


13 


57 


6 


53 


2400 


36 


21 


11 


22 


11 


23 


11 


24 


12 


24 


11 


24 


12 


36 


2500 


13 


2 


6 


30 


13 


26 


6 


38 


14 


8 


6 


83 


2500 


37 


22 


11 


22 


11 


24 


12 


24 


12 


24 


12 


25 


12 


37 


2600 


13 


60 


6 


58 


13 


85 


6 


67 


14 


71 


7 


1 


2600 


38 


23 


11 


23 


11 


24 


12 


25 


12 


25 


12 


26 


12 


38 


2700 


14 


7 


6 


86 


14 


32 


6 


95 


15 


22 


7 


32 


2700 


39 


23 


11 


24 


12 


25 


12 


26 


13 


26 


12 


26 


13 


39 


2800 


14 


65 


7 


2 


14 


92 


7 


11 


15 


85 


7 


62 


2800 



33 6 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Given 
Surfac 

of Roo 








Fl.it S'-am 






Standin 

Singh 


g Scam 
Lock 


Given 
Surface 
of Roof 


Nu 


mber of Sheets Required for 
Gutter-Strips 


Tin Rolls 


and 


t 


Edged 






Edged 






tO be 


•A 


In. 






«« 


In. 




2 


4-In. 


Seam to be 

(""nverprl 


Num 
Feet 


Der 
W 






-j 


. 


__ r_„ 


r 1 






t„overe 


14 


x20 


20 


<28 


14 j 


20 


20 x28 


14 


^20 


20x28 




of sheeib icquneu pci 

dths Widths 


line.il 1UUI 1U1 C\t ttllU ^O-lllL'Il WILllUi 

Widths Widths 


Sq. Ft. 


11. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


l: 


S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


Sq. Ft. 


20 


28 


reel 

20 


28 


? eet 


20 


28 


reel 

20 


28 


2900 


15 


1 ] 


7 


M 


15 


39 


7 


40 


16 


36 


7 


92 


2900 






















3000 


15 


69 


7 


59 


15 


'IX 


7 


1,8 


16 


99 


8 


10 


3000 


1 


1 


1 


35 16 


23 


69 


31 


44 


200 89 


128 


3100 


16 


li. 


7 


87 


li. 


45 


7 


97 


17 


50 


X 


40 


3100 


2 


1 


2 


36 16 


23 


70 


32 


45 


300 134 


192 


3200 


li. 


74 


8 


3 


16 


105 


x 


13 


1.x 


1 


8 


70 


3200 


3 


2 


2 


37 17 


24 


71 


32 


45 


400 178 


256 


3300 


17 


20 


8 


31 


17 


52 


8 


41 


IX 


64 


8 


101 


3300 


4 


2 


3 


38 17 


24 


72 


32 


46 


500 223 


320 


3-100 


17 


78 


8 


59 


17 


1 1 1 


8 


70 


19 


15 


9 


19 


3400 


5 


3 


4 


39 18 


25 


73 


33 


47 


600 267 


384 


3500 


18 


25 


8 


87 


1.x 


58 


8 


[IX 


19 


78 


■i 


44 


3500 


6 


3 


4 


40 18 


26 


74 


33 


47 


700 312 


444 


3600 


18 


83 


9 


3 


19 


6 


'' 


14 


20 


29 


9 


79 


3600 


7 


4 


5 


41 19 


27 


75 


34 


48 


800 356 


512 


3700 


19 


30 


'' 


31 


19 


65 


9 


43 


20 


92 


9 


109 


3700 


8 


4 


5 


42 19 


27 


76 


34 


48 


900 401 


576 


3800 


19 


88 


> 


59 


2(1 


12 


9 


71 


21 


43 


10 


28 


3800 


9 


4 


6 


43 20 


28 


77 


35 


49 


1,000 445 


640 


3900 


20 


35 


9 


S7 


20 


71 


9 


100 


21 


106 


10 


58 


3900 


10 


5 


7 


44 20 


28 


78 


35 


50 


1,100 495 


704 


4000 


20 


92 


10 


3 


21 


19 


111 


16 


22 


57 


10 


88 


4000 


11 


5 


7 


45 20 


29 


79 


36 


50 


1,200 540 


768 


4100 


21 


39 


10 


31 


21 


78 


10 


44 


23 


8 


11 


6 


4100 


12 


6 


8 


46 21 


29 


80 


36 


51 


1,300 585 


832 


4200 


11 


97 


in 


59 


22 


25 


10 


73 


23 


71 


11 


36 


4200 


13 


6 


9 


47 21 


30 


81 


36 


52 


1,400 630 


896 


4300 


22 


44 


in 


88 


22 


85 


111 


101 


24 


22 


11 


67 


4300 


14 


7 


9 


48 22 


31 


82 


37 


52 


1,500 675 


960 


4400 


22 


102 


1 1 


4 


23 


32 


11 


18 


24 


85 


11 


97 


4400 


15 


7 


10 


49 22 


31 


83 


37 


53 


1,600 720 


1,024 


4500 


23 


48 


11 


32 


23 


91 


: i 


46 


25 


36 


12 


15 


4500 


16 


8 


11 


50 23 


32 


84 


38 


54 


1,700 765 


1,088 


4600 


23 


107 


1 1 


60 


24 


38 


1 1 


74 


25 


99 


12 


45 


4600 


17 


8 


11 


51 23 


33 


85 


38 


54 


1,800 810 


1,152 


4700 


24 


53 


11 


85 


24 


98 


li 


103 


26 


50 


12 


75 


4700 


IS 


8 


12 


52 24 


33 


86 


39 


55 


1,900 855 


1,216 


4800 


24 


111 


12 


4 


25 


45 


12 


19 


27 


1 


12 


105 


4800 


19 


9 


12 


53 24 


34 


87 


39 


55 


2,000 900 


1.280 


4900 


25 


57 


12 


37 


25 


ID 1 


12 


48 


27 


64 


13 


24 


4900 


20 


9 


13 


54 24 


34 


88 


40 


56 


2,100 945 


1,344 


5000 


26 


4 


12 


60 


26 


51 


12 


76 


28 


15 


13 


54 


5000 


21 


10 


14 


55 25 


35 


89 


40 


57 


2,200 990 


1,344 


6000 


31 


27 


15 


5 


31 


84 


15 


24 


33 


85 


16 


20 


6000 


22 


10 


14 


56 25 


36 


90 


40 


57 


2,300 1,035 


1.472 


7000 


36 


50 


17 


62 


37 


4 


17 


84 


39 


43 


18 


98 


7000 


23 


1 1 


15 


57 26 


36 


91 


41 


58 


2,400 1,080 


1,536 


8000 


41 


73 


20 


7 


42 


37 


20 


32 


45 


1 


21 


63 


8000 


24 


11 


16 


58 26 


37 


92 


41 


59 


2,500 1,135 


1,600 


9000 


46 


95 


->2 


65 


47 


70 


22 


"1 


50 


72 


24 


29 


9000 


25 


12 


16 


59 27 


38 


93 


42 


59 


2,600 1,170 


1,664 


10O00 


52 


6 


25 


8 


52 


102 


25 


39 


56 


30 


26 


107 


10000 


26 

27 
28 


12 
12 

13 


17 
18 
18 


60 27 

61 28 

62 28 


38 
39 

40 


94 
95 
96 


42 
43 
43 


60 
61 
62 


2,700 1,215 
2,800 1,260 
2,900 1,305 


1,738 
1,792 
1,856 


Number 


of Boxes and Sheets Required to Cover 


29 
30 


13 

14 


19 
19 


63 28 

64 29 


40 
41 


97 
98 


44 

44 


62 
63 


3,000 1,350 
3,100 1,395 


1,920 
1,984 






a Given Surface of Tin Roofine 






31 


14 


20 


65 29 


41 


99 


44 


64 


3,200 1,440 


2,048 






























32 


li 


21 


66 30 


42 


100 


45 


64 


3,300 1.485 


2,112 












St 


mdini? Spam 












33 


15 


21 


67 30 


43 








3,400 1,530 


2,170 




























Given 


34 


16 


22 

11 


68 31 
2 sheets 


43 
n 28- 


n. roll cover 1 75 


3,500 1,575 
lin. ft. 


2,240 


Given 




























Surface 

/if I?,,,. 


S 


ngle 


Lock 








D mble 


Lock 






Surface 
of Roof 






11 


2 sheets 


n 20- 


n. roll cover 24$ 


lin. ft. 




()| l\ • , j 
































1 12 : 


in 14- 


n. roll cover 35C 


lin. ft. 




to be 1-in. 


Seam 




J4-ln 


Seam 




1-In. 


Seam to be 

("rniprnd 






11 


2 sheets 


in 10- 


n. roll cover 49( 


lin. ft. 






14 


k 20 


20 x 28 


14 x 


20 


20 x28 


14 


ic 20 


20x28 




This 
to lock 


table enables tin roofers to tell how many 
together to cover any desired length. For 


sheets 


Sp. Ft. 


B 


S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


B. 


S. 


Sp. F. 


exam- 


100 
200 



1 


65 
18 






32 
63 




1 


65 
18 






31 
62 




1 


67 
21 






32 

63 


100 
200 


pie : 


How many 20 x 


28-in 


ch sheets 


shall be locked together 


300 


1 


83 





94 


1 


82 





92 


1 


88 





95 


300 


to " 


-cnock out" a gutter strip 


72 feet long. 28 inches 


wide. 


400 


2 


36 


1 


13 


2 


35 


1 


11 


2 


42 


1 


14 


400 






















500 


2 


101 


1 


44 


2 


99 


1 


41 


2 


109 


1 


46 


500 


Now 


if tl 


e strip 


s to 


be 28 inches wide it means that 


600 
700 


2 

4 


54 
6 


1 

1 


75 
106 


3 

4 


52 
5 


1 

1 


72 
102 


3 

4 


63 
18 


1 
1 


77 
108 


600 
700 


the 


sheets are to be 


edged on the 


28-inch sides so that 


800 
900 


4 
5 


71 
24 


2 
2 


25 
56 


4 

5 


69 
22 


2 
2 


21 

51 


4 
5 


84 
39 


2 
2 


28 
59 


800 
900 


from turned 


edge to turned 


edge 


will 


be approximately 


1000 


5 


89 


2 


87 


5 


86 


2 


82 


5 


105 


2 


91 


1000 


19 inches and it will 


then 


take 46 


times 


this dimension to 


1100 
1200 


6 
6 


42 

107 


3 
3 


6 

37 


6 
6 


39 
103 


3 
3 



31 


6 

7 


59 
14 


3 
3 


10 
42 


1100 
1200 


make 7 


2 fee 


; so referrin 


g tc 


first 


column locate 72 feet, 


1300 


7 


59 


3 


68 


7 


56 


3 


62 


7 


80 


3 


73 


1300 


read 


across 


to column under 


28-ii 


ch width and find a6. 


1400 


8 


12 


3 


99 


8 


9 


3 


92 


8 


39 


3 


104 


1400 






















1500 


8 


77 


4 


18 


8 


73 


4 


11 


8 


101 


4 


24 


1500 


meaning 46 


sheets are required. 


Supposing the strip is 


1600 
1700 


9 
9 


30 
95 


4 

4 


49 
81 


9 
9 


26 

90 


4 

4 


41 
72 


9 
10 


56 
10 


4 
4 


55 
87 


1600 
1700 


to be 20 inches wide, which 


would mean that the 


edges 


1800 
1900 


10 
11 


48 



5 
5 



31 


10 

10 


43 
108 


4 
5 


102 
21 


10 

11 


77 
31 


5 
5 


6 
38 


1800 
1900 


are 


to 


be turned on 


the 


20-inch s 


des, 


30 that there will 


2000 


11 


65 


5 


62 


11 


60 


5 


51 


11 


97 


5 


69 


2000 


be about 27 


inches : 


rom 


turned edge tc 


turned edge and 


2100 
2200 


12 
12 


18 
83 


5 
6 


93 
12 


12 
12 


13 

77 


5 
6 


82 



12 
13 


52 
6 


5 
6 


100 
20 


2100 
2200 


the 


20- 


inch wide col 


umn 


directs that 32 


sheets be 


ocked 


2300 
2400 


13 
13 


36 

101 


6 
6 


43 
74 


13 
13 


30 
94 


6 
6 


31 
61 


13 
14 


73 

27 


6 
6 


51 
83 


2300 
2400 


together for 


72 feet 


ength 


. 










2500 


14 


53 


6 


105 


14 


47 


6 


92 


14 


94 


7 


2 


2500 






















2600 


15 


6 


7 


24 


15 





7 


11 


15 


48 


7 


34 


2600 






















2700 
2800 


15 
16 


71 
24 


7 
7 


55 
86 


15 
16 


64 

17 


7 
7 


41 
72 


16 
16 


3 
69 


7 
7 


65 
96 


2700 
2800 








Weig 


ht 


f Sheet 


Copper 




2900 


16 


89 


S 


5 


16 


81 


7 


102 


17 


24 


8 


16 


2900 






















3000 


17 


42 


8 


36 


17 


34 


S 


21 


17 


90 


S 


47 


3000 


Stubs 


' Thickness Oz. 


Sheet 


Sheets 


Sheets Sheets 


Sheets 


3100 


17 


106 


8 


67 


17 


98 


8 


51 


IS 


44 


8 


79 


3100 


Gauge in 


Decim 


al Per 


4x48 


, 24 


x48, 


30 x 60, 36 x 72, 48 x 72, 


3200 


18 


59 


8 


98 


18 


51 


8 


82 


18 


111 


8 


110 


3200 


Nearest 


Parts 


f Sq. Ft. 


Weight W 


eight 


Weight Weight Weight 


3300 


19 


12 


9 


18 


19 


4 


9 





19 


65 


9 


30 


3300 


No. 




1 Inch 




n Lbs 


ir 


Lbs. 


in Lb 


s. in Lbs. in Lbs. 


3400 
3500 


19 


77 


9 


49 


19 


68 


9 


31 


20 


20 


9 


61 


3400 
3500 






















20 


30 


9 


80 


20 


21 


9 


61 


20 


86 


9 


92 


35 




00537 


4 


1.16 




2 


3.12 4.50 


6 


3600 


20 


95 


9 


111 


20 


85 


9 


92 


21 


41 


10 


12 


3600 


33 




00806 


6 


1.75 




3 


4.68 6.75 


9 


3700 


21 


48 


10 


30 


21 


38 


10 


11 


21 


107 


10 


43 


3700 


31 




.0107 


8 


2.03 




4 


6.2 


5 9 


12 


3800 


22 





10 


61 


21 


103 


10 


41 


22 


62 


10 


75 


3800 


29 




0134 


10 


2.91 




5 


7.81 11.25 


15 


3900 


22 


65 


10 


92 


22 


55 


10 


72 


23 


16 


10 


106 


3900 


27 




.0161 


12 


3.50 




6 


9.37 13.50 


18 


4000 


23 


18 


11 


11 


23 


8 


10 


102 


23 


82 


11 


26 


4000 


26 




.0188 


14 


4.08 




7 


10.93 15.75 


21 


4100 


23 


83 


11 


42 


23 


72 


11 


21 


24 


37 


11 


57 


4100 


24 




.0215 


16 


4.66 




8 


12.50 18 


24 


4200 


24 


36 


11 


73 


24 


25 


11 


51 


24 


103 


11 


88 


4200 


23 




.0242 


18 


5.25 




9 


14.06 20.25 


27 


4300 


24 


101 


11 


104 


24 


89 


11 


82 


25 


58 


12 


8 


4300 


22 




.0269 


20 


5.83 




10 


15.62 22.50 


30 


4400 


25 


53 


12 


23 


25 


42 


12 





26 


12 


12 


39 


4400 


21 




0322 


24 


7 




12 


18.75 27 


36 


4500 


26 


6 


12 


54 


25 


107 


12 


31 


26 


79 


12 


71 


4500 


19 




0430 


32 


9.33 




16 


25 


36 


48 


4600 


26 


71 


12 


85 


26 


59 


12 


61 


27 


33 


12 


102 


4600 


IS 




.053S 


40 


11.66 




20 


31.25 45 


60 


4700 


27 


24 


13 


4 


27 


12 


12 


92 


27 


100 


13 


22 


4700 


16 




.0645 


48 


14 




24 


37.50 54 


72 


4800 


27 


89 


13 


35 


27 


76 


13 


10 


28 


54 


13 


53 


4800 


15 




.0754 


56 


16.33 




28 


43.75 63 


84 


4900 


28 


42 


13 


67 


28 


29 


13 


41 


29 


9 


13 


84 


4900 


14 




.0860 


64 


18.66 




32 


50 


72 


96 


5000 


28 


106 


13 


98 


28 


93 


13 


72 


29 


75 


14 


4 


5000 


13 




.095 


70 






35 


55 


79 


105 


6000 


34 


83 


16 


72 


34 


67 


16 


41 


35 


67 


16 


94 


6000 


12 




.109 


81 






40^ 


63 


91 


122 


7000 


40 


59 


19 


47 


40 


41 


19 


10 


41 


60 


19 


72 


7000 


11 




.120 


89 






4454 


70 


100 


134 


8000 


46 


36 


22 


21 


46 


15 


21 


92 


47 


52 


22 


51 


8000 


10 




.134 


100 






50 


78 


112 


150 


9000 


52 


12 


24 


108 


51 


101 


24 


61 


S3 


45 


25 


29 


9000 


9 




.148 


110 






55 


86 


124 


165 


10000 


57 


100 


27 


83 


57 


74 


27 


31 


59 


37 


28 


7 


10000 


8 




.165 


123 






61 


96 


138 


184 



SHEET METAL ROOFING, GUTTERS AND SIDING 



\o7 



Stubs' Thickness Oz. Sheets Sheets Sheets Sheets Sheets 

SSSLt-^^tfsJSt^SS Weft' '&& Sfiggg 

No. l I nc h in Lbs. in Lbs. m Lbs. in Lbs. in Lbs. 



7 


.180 


134 


6 


.203 


151 


5 


.220 


164 


4 


.238 


177 


3 


.259 


193 


2 


.284 


211 


1 


.300 


223 





.340 


253 



67 


105 


75>4 


118 


82 


128 


88;: 


138 


96 


151 


10554 


165 


11154 


174 


126/ 


m 



151 201 

170 227 

184 246 

199 266 

217 289 

238 317 

251 335 

2S5 380 



Official table adopted by the Association of Copper Manufacturers 

0f Ro. e .ed Un co e p d pe S r ta ha S s specific gravity of 8.93 . One* = foot 
weighs 558 12^1000 pounds. One square foot, of 1 inch thick, weighs 
46 51 ,ioo pounds. 

Helps for Figuring Corrugated Sheets 



Number of Corrugated 
•Sheets in One Sq. 



Number of Sq. Ft. in 
One Corrugated Sheet 



Length 2. 2 ■/, and 3 inch 154 inch Length 2,2/2 and 3 inch 1/inch 

Sheet Corruga- Corruga- Sheet Corruga- Corruga. 

Feet tionstwidth tionslwidth Feet tlonsCwidth tionsCwidth 

26 inches) 25 inches) 25 ,' n S es) 2S l ?^ e , s) 

c q it, 9.60 5 10.83 10.42 

J 7.11 8.00 6 13.00 12.50 

7 6" c 9 6.86 7 15.17 14.58 

a 5 77 6.00 8 17.33 16.67 

5 513 5 33 9 19-50 18.75 

, HI Ho 10 21.67 20.83 

? 4 i3 4 37 11 23.85 22.88 

!i 3 - 8S 4.00 12 26.00 25.00. 

Full width of Corrugated Sheets is charged for. No allowance is 

made for laps in these tables. 



Weights of Roofing Materials 

Table showing approximate weights in a square foot of 
various materials used for roofing. 



MATERIAL 



Average 

Weight 

Pounds to a 

Square Foot 

Asphalt on slabs ■ • • • ■ • ....... - • • • ■ • • 20 

Corrugated Galvanized Metal Sheets, No. 20 unbearded 2J4 

Copper, 16 oz. standing seam 1/4 

F'elt and asphalt, without sheathing * 

Glass, 'A inch thick ,•■••.-,- i« 

Hemlock sheathing, 1 inch thick ^ 

Lead, about 'A inch thick I 

Paper, tarred ° 

Spruce sheathing, 1 inch thick 'A 

Slate, $'i6 inch thick, double lap °n 

Slate, 'A inch thick, 3-inch double lap 4/i 

Slate, on iron ] 

Shingles, 6 x 18— one-third to weather. « 

Skylight of glass, tym to / inch, including frame 4 toll) 

Slag roof, 4-ply. 4 

Terne plate, 1C, without sheathing A 

Terne plate, IX., without sheathing Ya 

Tiles (plain) 10^x6/— 5J4 inches to weather ... 18 

Tiles (Spanish) 14/ x 10/— 7/ inches to weather... 

White pine sheathing, 1 inch thick 

Yellow pine sheathing, 1 inch thick 

Zinc, sheet 



2/ 

4 
8 



Calculating Flat Seam Sheets 

One table is calculated on a basis of 4-inch edges on 
14x20 and 20x28 sheets, consuming nearly I inch, cover- 
ing a space 13*4 x ioJ4 and IC.J4 x 274 inches and exposing 
a surface a trifle more than 247 and 513 square inches 
respectively. 

The other table is calculated on a basis of 34-inch edges 
on 14x20 nd 20x28 sheets, consuming I l /t inches, cov- 
ering a space 12% x 1874 and i&/% x 26^ inches and ex- 
posing a surface of 243 1/64 and 507 17/64 square inches 
respectively. 

Calculating Standing Seam, Single Lock Sheets 

The basis of calculation is for 34-inch single lock cross 
seams, consuming i/s inches of tin and covering 22817/32 
square inches when edged 1 and i4 inches, giving a finished 
seam 34-inch high, and covering 2223/32 square inches 



when edged 1% and 1 4 inches and giving a finished seam 
1 inch high, with 14x20 tin. With 20x28 tin edged in 
the same way with a 34-inch finished seam 477 1/32 square 
inches are covered, and with a 1-inch finished seam 463 19/32 
square inches are covered. 

Calculating Standing Seam, Double Lock Sheets 

The basis of calculation is the quantity of tin consumed 
by double lock machines, which is 1 7/16 inches by measure- 
ment for cross seams and covering 222 63/64 square inches 
when edged I and i4 inches and giving a finished seam 
34 inch high, and covering 21645/64 square inches when 
edged 1 4 and 1 4 inches, giving a finished seam 1 inch 
high, with 14x20 tin. With 20x28 tin edged in the same 
way with a J^-inch finished seam 471 3l/ 6 4 square inches 
are covered, and with a i-inch finished seam 45813/64 
square inches are covered. 

How to Use the Tables 

Refer to the number of squares nearest the required 
surface. See the quantity of tin opposite in the column 
for the nature of the roof to be put on, whether of 4-inch 
or 34-inch Flat Seam or -4-inch or I -inch Standing Seam, 
Single Lock or Double Lock. Sot down the amount. In 
the same manner determine the quantity of tin for 
the odd feet and add this to the former amount. The 
sheets are reduced to boxes by dividing by 112. 

Example for Flat Seam Roof 

How much 14x20 tin edged '4-inch covering 134x194 
will be required to cover a roof of 5,060 square feet Flat 
Seam? 

First look for 5,000 square feet (=50 squares) and 
set down the quantity opposite, thus : 

26 boxes 4 sheets 
Then for 60 square feet and set down.. 35 sheets 

Making a total of 26 boxes 39 sheets 

Example for Single Lock Standing Seam Roof 

How much 14x20 tin will be required to cover a roof 
of 3,984 square feet with cross seams and i-inch single lock 
standing seams? 

First look for 3,900 square feet (=39 squares) and set 
down the quantity opposite, thus : 

22 boxes 65 sheet's 
Then for 84 square feet and set down.. 55 sheets 

Making a total of 22 boxes 120 sheets 

which is equal to 23 boxes and 8 sheets, as there are 112 

sheets to a box. 

Example for Double Lock Standing Seam Roof 

How much 20x28 tin will be required to cover a roof 
of 3,452 square feet with double lock cross seams and 
34-inch standing seams? 

First look for 3,400 square feet (=34 squares) and set 
down the quantity opposite, thus: 

9 boxes 3 1 sheets 

Then look for 52 square feet and set 

down l6 sheets 



Making a total of 9 boxes 47 sheets 



PART XVI 
PLAN READING 



T^HE most valuable acquirement by tbe student for 
obtaining ready familiarity with the reading 
or interpretation of architects' plans is a knowledge 
of that department of mechanical drafting known 
as projection drawing. Those who are thus quali- 
fied may, with the aid of a set of specifications, 
read plans and compute the items and quantities 
of material for construction purposes, without any 
difficulty. 

However, during the writer's contact with hun- 
dreds of mechanics and students, much inquiry on 
this subject has been raised and particular ques- 
tions asked. This has served to bring to his atten- 
tion the basis of requirement for a useful treat- 
ment. The aim is to place in the hands of the 
reader who is not versed in the art of plan reading 
a fund of practical information, providing the nec- 
essary aid and guidance in respect to the require- 
ments of sheet metal workers. 

The general term "set of plans" will be under- 
stood as having reference to plans, elevations, sec- 
tional and constructive views, etc. Plans are com- 
monly presented on blue print paper. They com- 
municate the architect's conceptions with the pre- 
cision necessary for realizing them in actual con- 
struction, through the medium of other hands. They 
express his thought in the shortest and most direct 
manner, without the usual detail of verbal commu- 
nication. Through them he indicates such infor- 
mation as is necessary to construct a given object, 
presenting the necessary data as to structure, de- 
tail, sizes and items. The method by which plans 
are prepared also assists sufficiently in visualizing 
the subjects to which they relate. 

In taking up the treatment of this subject, we 
will consider first the various technical terms which 
have to do with plan reading and the preparation 
of plans. 

Definitions 

Plan View. A view of an object when viewed 
directly from the top. 

Soffit Plan. The view of an object viewed from 
the bottom, or looking up. 



Front Elevation. The view of an object when 
looked at from the front. 

Rear Elevation. The view of an object as seen 
from the back or rear. 

Side Elevation. The view of an object looked 
at from the side. 

Horizontal Section. The section of an object 
taken on a horizontal plane. 

Vertical Section. The section of an object taken 
on a vertical plane. 

Constructive View. A view showing the methods 
of construction of an object to be made. 

To read a plan effectively it is very necessary first, 
to study its several views, until one possesses a 
faithful conception or pictural impression of the 
object to be constructed. One must be able to 
visualize the completed work, since the "flat" draw- 
ing before him is largely a language of lines, or 
"short hand" instruction from the architect. In 
the various solutions presented herewith the fore- 
going definitions are illustrated and exemplified. 

PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF A 

BEVELED TUBE 

Solution 179 

In Fig. 639 is presented a perspective view of 
a beveled tube. The two sides are flat and parallel 




Fig. 639. — Perspective View of 
Beveled Tube 

to each other and the angle at the top and 
bottom bevel toward the apex at 45 degrees. 



338 



PLAN READING 



339 



Fig. 640 illustrates how the end and side eleva- 
tions are drawn, as well as the plan. Here, as in 
general, it will be found that the ability to read the 
drawing is acquired in learning how to draw it. 
First, draw the shape of the object, as shown by 
A-B-C-D, placing it in its proper position, as shown. 
This becomes the end elevation of the object. From 
the various corners of the object, looking in the 



/V 



F 




S/DE eL£Mr/OM 




K 


1 1 
3° ! ! \b° 


J 1 1 




y / 


n 


I 


/ 



6fO Pltf/V 

Fig. 640. — Plan and Elevations of Beveled Tube 

direction indicated by the arrow X, draw horizontal 
lines towards the left, as shown. Make the side 
elevation of the desired length, as G-H, and draw 
the vertical lines G-F and H-E; this completes the 
side elevation. Note that in the side elevation four 
lines are shown, since we look against the corners 
A-a-b and C, following in the direction of the arrow 
X. In drawing the plan of this object we look 
downward on it in the direction of the arrow A, 
and see only three lines, as indicated by the corners 
a-A and a'. The plan view, which is shown by 
K-L-M-O, is of length equal to the elevation F-E. 
It will be noted that projection lines are employed 
to obtain the lines in plan ; these are drawn from 
the intersections on a°-b° to the line K-L, with 
a° as center. 

This simple example, presents the principles of 
drawing in their proper relative positions, the vari- 
ous plans, elevations and other views to which fuller 
attention is devoted in exercises following. 

PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF A TEE 
JOINT 

Solutions 180 

Familiar to all sheet metal workers are the plans 
and elevations of a tee joint shown in Fig. 641. 



It will be seen that the diameters of both ver- 
tical and horizontal pipes are equal, thus giving the 
points of tangency a'-a in the end elevation, while 
the corresponding points are indicated by a in the 
side elevation and by a"-a" in plan. Projection 
lines are used to draw the plan where b is used as 
center and quadrants are drawn between c-b and b-a. 
The side elevation shows the outline of the tee, 




69/ PlrtN 



Fig. 641. — Plan and Elevations of a Tee Joint 

with miter lines meeting at a. The end elevation 
shows the profile of the horizontal pipe, as well as 
the elevation of the vertical pipe. In the plan — 
that is, looking down on the object — is seen the 
profile of the vertical pipe and the plan view of 
the horizontal pipe. 



ELEVATIONS AND SOFFIT PLAN 
OF A LEADER HEAD 

Solution 181 

The present example illustrated by Fig. 642 shows 
both a plan (as looked at from above) and a soffit 
plan (as looked at from beneath). The side eleva- 
tion is drawn off the wall line, as indicated, and 
ir> line therewith is drawn the front elevation. Note 
that both in the front and side elevations there is 
a projecting panel, indicated by A and B, whose 
projection is shown by a and b respectively, on the 
opposite elevations. Thus, the projection of the 
panel A in the front elevation would be indicated 
by a in the side elevation, while the projection of 
the panel B in the side elevation would be shown 
by b in the front elevation. 

The plan would be seen by looking downward on 



340 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



WALL L/NE 



M/////I/////////////////. 3 _/-'. 



FRO/vr SLEWr/ON 



S/Df £L£l/#r/OM 




Plan and Elevations of Transition 
Piece 



AND ELEVATIONS 
TRANSITION PIECE 



WML 1//VLT — > 



i' 



64 'Z Pi#/v #r rop of head 

Fig. 642. — Plans and Elevations of Leader Head 

the top of the leader head, where the projection 
l'-2' is made to equal 1-2 in the side elevation. 
Looking at either front or side elevation fads to 
indicate whether the tube X is designed to be round 
or square. The soffit plan (seen by looking up- 
ward) shows the tube to be round. Here, by means 
of projection lines introduced between the angle 
a-b-c, is drawn the soffit plan, showing the project- 
ing panels, already referred to. Note that the 
coves O and O in the front elevation show miter 
lines at O' and O' in the soffit plan. 

This drawing may be carefully studied with much 
advantage, as it exemplifies the principles of pro- 
jections, utilized in examples of a more compli- 
cated nature. 



Solution 182 



Let us assume that there is received at the sheet 
metal shop a blue print for a transition piece, rec- 
tangular to square, of the dimensions given in plan 
in Fig. 643, and of the hight shown in the eleva- 
tion. In this case, the plan is first drawn and 
from it the front elevation is projected. Then, 
from both of these views the side elevation is drawn. 
In projecting this the right angle a-b-c is used. 
Observe that the base collar in both the front and 
the side elevation shows a flat surface, while the 
top collar in each elevation shows the corner lines 
1 and 2 in plan, indicated respectively by 1' and 2' 
in either elevation. The lines drawn from the 
square collar at the top, to the base line, in the 
front and side elevations indicate slight bends, which 
are also shown in the plan. 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF AN IR- 
REGULAR FITTING OR FRUST- 
UM OF A SCALENE CONE 

Solution 183 

Fig. 644 represents a plan and elevation of an 
irregular fitting, round to round, tangent at one 
side, as shown in the plan. If the two pipes are 



PLAN READING 



34i 



tangent at one side, the one view, found in the side 
elevation, shows a straight line at d and a taper at 
e, while the opposite view, shown in the front 



(SISEp^ - " 




Fig. 644. — Plan and Elevations of an Irregular Fitting 

elevation, has equal tapers at / and g. 

The front elevation has been projected from the 
plan and side elevation, shown by the dotted lines. 

PLAN, ELEVATION AND CON- 
STRUCTIVE VIEW OF A 
ROUND VENTILATOR 

Solution 184 

Fig. 645 shows the plan and elevation of a plain 
round ventilator. In this case, but one elevation 
is required, as the diameter is the same, from which- 
ever direction the ventilator is viewed. 1-2-3 and 
4 indicate by dotted lines the braces used to uphold 
the ventilator hood. Looking down on the venti- 
lator, for a plan, presents only one circle, as indi- 
cated. The smaller and dotted circle in plan indi- 
cates the diameter of the body, shown by A in 
elevation. A dotted line, shown on a drawing, al- 
ways indicates a hidden profile or some object 
below or behind the part we are viewing. 

Constructive View 

A section taken on the line a-b in plan will give 
a vertical constructive view, shown to the right of 





comrpacr/i/£ t//fiv 



Pi/m 



Pig. 6 4S . — Plan, Elevation and Constructive View of a 
Round Ventilator 

the elevation. This is the same in outline as the 
elevation, but comprehends the constructive fea- 
tures, as well as an inside elevation, behind the 
sectional lines, as shown by the horizontal lines 
drawn therein. 



PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND CON- 
STRUCTIVE VIEWS OF A TOOL 
BOX 

Solution 185 

In Fig. 646 are presented eight views of a tool 
box, defining the various views, given under the 
heading Definitions, in this part. 

The constructive view, A, is first drawn. This 
shows the formation of the upper frame of the 
body, which receives the beaded edge of the bev- 
eled cover. The bottom is double-seamed toward 
the bottom of the box, as shown. From the con- 
structive view, A, the rear, side and front eleva- 
tions are drawn, the outline profiles being made 
alike to those in A. In the front elevation a clasp 
is indicated by a, while i-i in the rear elevation 
show the hinges. 

A plan view, looking downward on the box, is 
shown above the side elevation, the length c'-d' 
being made to equal c-d in the front elevation. Note 
that the corner miters, m-n in plan, show lines, 
indicating bevel or molded corners. 

The soffit plan is shown below the side eleva- 



342 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




in Fig. 647, to which reference will be made in 
the explanation of the eight views shown in Fig. 648. 
The constructive view shown is first drawn. From 
this the other seven views are obtained. In the con- 
structive view, note that the back of the base is 
bent, as shown from 4 to 1, and the front is bent, 
as shown from 6 to 2. In the front elevation note 
that the returns, 3-5-7 and 8-9-10, miter on the 
inside at i and i, in Fig. 647, and on the outside at 




fROHT ELEUHT/O/Y 



/ftW/P £i£i/#r/0// 




s/oR/zo/vrsiL sect/o/v oa/ x-y 



J 

m 

1/fRT/C/U SECE/OAf 

cw c/-y 



T b' sorr/r pia/v 

Fig. 646. — Various Views of a Tool Box 



tion ; this gives a view looking upward. The length 
of b-b' in the soffit plan is made to equal B in the 
front elevation. Take note that the corner, as o-s 
in the soffit plan, shows a line, indicating a beveled 
joint of the bevel 1 in the side elevation. 

If a vertical section on the line U-V in rear eleva- 
tion be desired, this would constitute a section alike 
to A, except that here a hinge is found at u in J 
and the clasp at w, in the vertical section on U-V. 

A horizontal section on X-Y in the side elevation, 
shown at L, is made of length corresponding to B, 
in the front elevation. It shows the double seaming 
of the corner t, as indicated by t'-t" in the hori- 
zontal section. 

The views here outlined are complete and should 
be studied carefully. 

PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND CON- 
STRUCTIVE VIEWS OF AN IR- 
REGULAR BASE 

Solution 186 

A perspective view of an irregular base is given 



b and b; while in the back, these same returns butt 
against the surface 1, in the constructive view, in 
Fig. 648, also shown at o and o in Fig. 647, and 



This face <3 verf/ca/ fi/ane 
surface w/6ouf dei/e/ as on 
orher three sides 




Fig. 647.— Perspective View of an Irregular Base 

against the rear surface 4 in Fig. 648, at a and a 
in Fig. 647. 

The front elevation in Fig. 648 indicates the 



PLAN READING 



343 



D 




i I 
I III 

^ 1 — :— i- 



>ii ! i 



SfOG, £l£f#r/0// i 





ON C-O 



f 



jor^/r ,0/rf// 



//OR/zowr/qi. 
sec now o/v /?-a 



Fig. 648. — Various Views of an Irregular Base 



length, correspondingly indicated in the rear eleva- 
tion ; the dotted lines in this figure represent the 
returns mentioned. 

The side elevation at the right is of correspond- 
ing size and shape to the constructive view, but is 
reversed, and in the side elevation, the elevation 
lines are shown, while the dotted lines indicate the 
inside returns. 

By means of projection lines, drawn from the 
constructive view on the planes, c-a and a-b, the 
plan view of the base is constructed, as shown above 
the front elevation. Observe that miter lines are 
shown at c-c, while / and / show the intersections 
with the flat back. As the surface, 5 and 9 in the 
front elevation, shows a flat surface, no miter line 
appears in plan for that part at h-h. 

In like manner, by using the projection lines from 
the constructive view to the planes d-c and c-f, the 
soffit plan is drawn, or a view looking into the 
base, from the bottom. Note the position of the 
miter lines, m and m, in the soffit plan, making com- 
parison with that in the plan. 

If this base were cut on the line A-B in the side 
elevation, it would give the horizontal section, shown 
below the side elevation. 

If the base were cut on the line C-D in the rear 
elevation, it would give a vertical section, shown 
below the rear elevation. Cutting through on the 
line C-D also brings to view those parts that are 



behind the plane C-D, these parts being shown in 
elevation between r and 5 in the vertical section. 
Thus this view is part elevation and part section. 
Careful consideration of the interesting study pre- 
sented in this solution is suggested. 



Plans and Elevations for Buildings 

In Figs. 649 to 672 inclusive are illustrated the 
relations of all parts, namely, front, rear, left side 
and right side elevations, with plan, obtained by 
projection lines. Although in architects' drawings 
the projection lines do not appear, their use here 
will give the student a better understanding of the 
various views. 



PLAN AND SECTIONAL VIEW OF A 
FLAT ROOF 

Solution 187 

Fig. 649 is a plan view of a flat roof, in which 
a hipped ridge skylight is shown, as well as a chim- 
ney, E, and a scuttle, S. The roof pitches in the 
direction of the arrows to the leader outlet, shown 
in the gutter. Behind the skylight and scuttle, at 
C, and in the corner of the chimney, at D, saddles 
or cant boards are placed ; these are put on before 



344 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




//5 




oi 







e><=>9 



Fig. 650.- 



-Showing Cant Strips or Saddles to 
Prevent Snow Pockets 



the roof is covered with metal, to shed the water 
to the roof proper and also to prevent the occur- 
rence of snow pockets. These saddles are formed, 
as shown in Fig. 650, where that illustrated by dia- 
gram C is the formation used behind the scuttle 
or skylight, and the saddle shown by diagram D 
is the formation used in the chimney corner. A 
section on A-B in Fig. 649 is given below the plan. 
This vertical section shows the profile of the gutter 
resting on the wall, also the pitch of the flat roof. 
A section, given on any line, as that of A-B, indi- 
cates that the portion in front of the line, A-B, has 
been removed and that we are therefore looking into 
the building from the line A-B, obtaining the view 
shown below the plan and in line with it. 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 
BUILDING WITH GABLE ROOF 

Solution 188 

Fig. 651 presents the plan and elevations of a 
building with a gable roof. The end and side ele- 
vations and the plan are represented by means of 
projection lines. From a as a center the horizontal 
projections are carried to the plan, as shown, while 
the vertical projection lines are used in drawing 
the side elevation. Note that the side elevation 
shows but two lines in the roof, taken from 1 and 2 
in the end elevation, while the plan shows three lines 
in the roof, taken from 1-2 and 3 in the end eleva- 
tion, and projected by the quadrants struck from a. 




-3 



Fig. 649. — Plan and Sectional View of Flat Roof 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 

BUILDING WITH HIPPED ROOF 

OF EQUAL PITCH 

Solution 189 

A building having a hipped roof of equal pitch 
is shown in Fig. 652. In this case, the plan of 
the roof is square, making the front and side ele- 
vations alike, as shown. Where a roof thus inclines 
on four sides, a line is always introduced in eleva- 
tions, as at b and c ; while, in Fig. 651, where the 
roof inclines on only two sides, a line is shown only 
as represented at b. In the plan, in Fig. 652, the 
diagonal lines indicate the lines of the hip. 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 

BUILDING WITH HIPPED ROOF 

OF UNEQUAL PITCHES 

Solution 190 

Fig. 653 gives the plan and elevations of a hipped 
roof having unequal pitches. Here the plan is in 
the shape of a rectangle, but the apex of the roof 
is directly in the center in plan or, at the intersec- 
tion of the two diagonal lines, at b. As the vertical 
hight, from 2 to 1, is alike in both elevations, un- 
equal pitches therein result. Note that the projec- 
tion lines from the plan and from side elevation 
s;ive the end elevation. 



PLAN READING 



345 






S/OE E/Et/rfE/O/Y 



mom £i£v#r/0tf s/de ftfuer/a/y 



Pltf/V 



6-51 

Fig. 651. — Plan and Elevations 
of Gable Roofs 



A\ 


-- 


A\ 


a 




1 c 




a 




1 




/ ; 

i 1 
/ 1 
/ / 






/ 
/ 

















Plffff 



6^5^ 



5/DE E/fV/WM 


fm eieme/o// 


^^T^\ 




/N 


^2 


3 


1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 


1 1 


J ! '< 


^^<^^ 


' 1 

/ 1 

_ --- t 


^^^\ 


/ 
s 


PlEl/Y 


6S3 



Fig. 652. — Plan and Elevations 

of Hipped Roof of Equal 

Pitches 



Fig. 653. — Plan and Elevations 

of Hipped Roof of Unequal 

Pitches 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 

BUILDING WITH HIPPED ROOF 

HAVING RIDGE AND HIPS 

Solution 191 

In Fig. 654 is shown a plan with side and end 
elevations of a building with a hipped roof having 
ridge and hips. As the pitch of the four sides of 
the roof are the same, the hip lines in plan present 
angles of 45 degrees, as shown. The end elevation 
is obtained from the side elevation and plan by 
means of projection lines. The ridge line is indi- 
cated by the letter R, in both the plan and side 
elevation. 

PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 

BUILDING WITH FOUR GABLE 

ROOFS, HAVING EQUAL 

PITCHES 

Solution 192 

A roof having four equal gables is illustrated in 

■S/DE ELEVAT/Off E/l/O E/EMf/Ort 



Fig. 655. In this case, the plan of the building is 
square, so that the four gables are alike on the 
four sides ; hence the elevation shown represents 
the elevation for all sides. Note the lines in plan. 
The diagonals, marked V, form the valley lines 
where the returns of any of the two gables meet, 
while the lines, marked R, show the ridge lines in 
plan, the same ridge lines being marked R° in 
elevation. 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 

BUILDING WITH FOUR GABLE 

ROOFS HAVING UNEQUAL 

PITCHES 

Solution 193 

Fig. 656 shows a plan of a building of rectangular 
shape, on each side of which is placed a gable of 
the vertical night, indicated bv H between the two 



R j\ 





S/DE ElEME/OW 



EffO ftfMW/Y 



EiEMr/o// o/v/Ju Eoe/fc j/gej 



1 1 
' 1 1 

1 
.-- / 



>r / 


- /* 








i?~W^ 


R^^l/ 







65*9- 



Fig. 654- 



-Plan and Elevations of Hipped 
Roof with Ridge 



CSS PLrf/V 

Fig. 655. — Plan and Ele- 
vation of Four Intersect- 
ing Gable Roofs Hav- 
ing Equal Pitches 



6S6 

Fig. 656. — Plan and Elevations of 
Four Intersecting Gable Roofs hav- 
ing Unequal Pitches 



34<J 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



sioe euwr/cw em eui/zir/or/ 



,5/z>^" eiei/^r/o/v 



wo etep/tr/o/y 




PIS7H 



G£>7 



Fig. 657. — Plan and Elevations of 
Mansard and Deck Roofs 













/1\ 


























. 


I 




/ 


1 
















/ / / / 

/ 1(1 








1 










/ til 




































\t/ 


l/f 




y 










/ 
,* / 




/u 




















PL4N 










_„.- 


,-'' 6v5S 





Fig. 658. — Plan and Elevations of Four Intersecting, Projecting Gable Roofs 



elevations, thus making the pitch of the gables in 
side and in end elevations unequal, as indicated. 
In the plan view the ridge lines are indicated by 
the letter R and the valley lines forming the junc- 
tion between the gables by the letter V. The end 
view is projected from the plan and side elevation, 
as shown. 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 

BUILDING WITH MANSARD 

AND DECK ROOFS 

Solution 194 

Fig. 657 gives the plan and elevations of a build- 
ing having deck and mansard roofs. The deck roof 
is the flat part at the top, indicated by the letter D 
in the elevations, and the mansard is the inclined 
roof, marked M, in both plan and elevations. Dor- 
mer windows are usually placed in the mansard 
part of the roof, forming valleys and cheeks with 
the mansard roof. The deck roof is usually pitched 
to shed the water into a leader not shown in these 
diagrams. 

PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 
BUILDING WITH FOUR INTER- 
SECTING PROJECTING GABLE 
ROOFS 

Solution 195 

Four intersecting, projecting gable roofs on a 



building, whose outline is shown in plan in Fig. 658, 
form the subject of this demonstration. Note that 
both ends and both sides are similar in 
plan, the two short wings intersecting the main 
building, thus forming the valleys, shown by V in 
plan. Observe the appearance of the side elevation 
and its relation to the plan view, as shown by the 
dotted lines. The end elevation is projected from 
the plan and side elevation, as shown by the projec- 
tion lines. Two elevations only are necessary in this 
case, as the opposite sides are alike, as shown in 
plan. 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 

BUILDING HAVING HIPPED 

AND GABLE ROOFS WITH 

WING ON ONE SIDE 

Solution 196 

In Fig. 659 are presented a plan, with front, rear, 
left side and right side elevations of a building with 
wing connected. As no two sides of the plan cor- 
respond, an elevation must be shown for each side. 
The plan view is marked front, rear, L-S (left side) 
and R-S (right side). Note that hipped roofs occur 
at A and B ; C-C indicate the valleys and D the 
right side with a gable. Referring to the eleva- 
tions, note that the left side of the front elevation 
shows the roof at an incline, while on the right 
side, at a, the vertical line indicates the gable d, 



PLAN READING 



347 



— )-■ 







f 



Fig. 659. — Projection Lines Showing the Relation of Plan and Elevations 



which is seen in the right side elevation. The left 
side elevation is drawn by means of projection lines, 
as well as the rear elevation, where i indicates the 
gable line in that view, shown in the right side ele- 
vation by d. The relation between the plan and 
elevations should be carefully studied ; the elevations 
should be turned back along the curved lines to 
their respective positions in plan. 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 
BUILDING HAVING INTER- 
SECTING HIPPED ROOFS WITH 
RIDGE OF WING LOWER THAN 
THAT OF MAIN ROOF 

Solution 197 

When a plan of a roof indicates an intersecting 



1 1 



PL /IN 



T" 

1 



\ ^ 

\ \ \ 

-• s \ \ 

N \ X \ 

\ ^ \ \ 

\ \ V \ 

\ \ \\ 

'. \ \ 



\ \ 




o- 






I I 



r--X<*" 



LEFT .SIDE ELEl/FIT/OrV 



FROA/r ELEl/AT/ON 
Fig. 660. — Plan and Elevations of Intersecting Hip Roofs 



R/C»r S/DE ELEV#r/OfV 



34§ 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




fi&t/e £££t//rr/o# 



iffrs/o£fiftwr/0/Y f/zowr aev/rr/a/y 

Fig. 661. — Relation of the Various Elevations in a Complex Roof Plan 



#/ff//r s/of fiepwr/o/v 



roof, showing the intersecting lines in plan, as in 
Fig. 660 at a, we are to understand that the ridge 
at b is lower than the ridge at c. The intersection 
of the ridge line b in plan with the pitched roof at 
a is shown by means of projection lines by a' in 
the front elevation and by a" in the right side eleva- 
tion. The rear elevation would present the same 
appearance as the front elevation, but in a reversed 
position. The left side elevation, having no inter- 
secting wing, will show the view indicated. 



PLAN AND ELEVATIONS OF 

BUILDING WITH COMPLEX 

ROOF INTERSECTIONS 

Solution 198 

An interesting exercise in plan reading which 
should be carefully examined, is presented in Fig. 
661, where is shown, by means of projection lines, 
the relation of the various elevations to the plan. 
First, note the outline of the building, shown in plan 
by A-B-C-D-E-F-G-H. Observe the ridge lines 
O-i, 1-2 and 3-4; also the hip lines H-O-a, E-2-3, 
C-4-B and b-i ; and the valley lines, D-3 and F-i. 
Follow the projection lines carefully and note the 
positions of the front, right side, left side and rear 
elevations, where each elevation is lettered and num- 



bered to correspond with similar letters and num- 
bers in plan. Note that where the hip lines, O-a 
and l-b in plan, meet the face of the wall at a and b, 
partial gable lines appear in the front and left side 
elevations, shown by G-a and A-b, respectively. 



ELEVATION AND SECTIONS OF A 
PANEL, SHOWING THE IM- 
PORTANCE OF SECTION LINES 

Solution 199 

Section lines are used to indicate a section or 
profile of an object; they are usually introduced at 
an angle of 45 degrees and serve to show the inner 
side of the profile. 

A in Fig. 662 illustrates the partial elevation of 
a panel, in which are to be placed raised letters, 
a-b-c representing the profile of the panel molding. 
As no section lines have been marked on the pro- 
file a-b-c, we are at a loss to determine which is 
the inside and which the outside of the panel. By 
placing the section lines, as in diagram B, a sunk 
panel would result, the letters being placed on the 
outer surface indicated by the arrow. By using 
the same profile, but placing the section lines, as 
in diagram C, a raised panel is the result, the letters 
being placed on the outer surface indicated by the 



PLAN READING 



349 



A 



LJ*i 



/RAISED i£TT£/?5 




Fig. 662. — Elevation and Sections of a Panel, Showing 
the Importance of Sectional Lines 

arrow. This will illustrate the importance of the 
section lines, the side having the section lines always 
indicating the inside and the side having no section 
lines always representing the outside. 



ELEVATION AND SECTIONAL 
VIEW OF CORNICE 

Solution 200 

Fig. 663 exemplifies how the elevation and sec- 
tional view of a cornice are shown. Note the posi- 
tions of the dentils and 0; also that the dotted 

INCHES 



Mill 




sect/owl i//fiv 



, 



f/eoA/r ei£V<tr/OA/ 




663 



F " ..' I 



L 1 

Fig. 663. — Elevation and Sectional View of Cornice 

The following table gives the scales employed in 
drawing plans, elevations and sectional views, and 
their proportions to full size dimensions : 

y$ in. to the foot equals 1/96 full size. 
]A, in. to the foot equals 1/48 full size. 
y 2 in. to the foot equals 1/24 full size. 
y<\ in. to the foot equals 1/16 full size. 
1 in. to the foot equals 1/12 full size. 
l J / 2 in. to the foot equals 1/8 full size, 
in. to the foot equals 1/6 full size, 
in. to the foot equals 1/4 full size, 
in. to the foot equals 1/3 full size, 
in. to the foot equals 1/2 full size, 
in. to the foot equals full size. 
Whatever the scale be called that distance is 
divided into twelve equal parts, and each of these 
parts represents an inch. Thus, referring to Fig. 
664, showing part of a one-inch scale rule, note that 
the first inch to O is divided into twelve equal 
spaces. Again, in Fig. 665 is shown a partial one- 
half inch scale, in which the first half inch is divided 

ffet 



2 
3 
4 
6 
12 



o 1 

65-? ONE //VCff SCfiLE RUIE 



//vches 



J 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 [ 



66.5 



1 2 3 4 5 

OA/E WIE /NCrt SCrfLE /?ULE 

Fig. 664.— One Inch Scale Rule 
Fig. 665.— One-half Inch Scale Rule 



lines, a and b, indicate the hidden bends or lines 
of the drip below the crown and foot moldings. 

Scale Rules 

Scale rules are employed in measuring drawings 
drawn to a scale. The usual architect's drawing 
is executed to the scale of one-quarter inch to the 
foot. 




into twelve equal parts, each division representing 
one inch in the procedure of checking up a half- 
inch scale drawing. 

Using the Scale Rule 

Fig. 666 illustrates a partial roof plan, drawn to 
a scale of one-quarter inch to the foot, showing a 
hipped and ridge skylight. Applying the one-quarter 



35° 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



rART OF ROOF PLAN SCALE— # IN. = 1 FOOT 




6SG 



Fig. 666. — Method of Using Scale Rule 



inch scale rule A. we find that the length of the 
skylight on its curb line measures II ft. 6 in. In 
like manner the rule is applied in obtaining the 
width, which will measure 5 ft. 3 in. In this manner 
the scale rule is applied in obtaining measurements 
from drawings made to any scale. 

PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND SEC- 
TION OF ARCHITECTURAL 
WORK 

Solution 201 

Fig. 667 presents the front elevation of an ex- 
ample of architectural work ; the four sides which 
are alike are drawn to a scale of one-half inch to 
the foot. At the left is shown a sectional view, on 
the line A-A in the elevation. Below the elevation, 
at the right, is shown the plan of the base and a 
sectional view on the line C-C in elevation, and, at 
the left, below the elevation, the ceiling plan and 
section on the line B-B in the elevation. Careful 
study of these views is urged. 

READING PLANS OF FURNACE 
PIPING 

Solution 202 

Figs, 668, 669 and 670 present the plans of the 
basement, first and second floors of a residence. 
They afford an interesting study in reading plans 
of furnace piping and ventilation. 



Fig. 668 is the basement plan showing the dis- 
tribution of warm air, ventilating and smoke pipes. 

Fig. 669 illustrates the first floor plan, showing 
four rooms and a pantry. The reception room, liv- 
ing room and dining room are warmed and ven- 
tilated, while the kitchen is ventilated only, not 
warmed. 

On the second floor, Fig. 670, four bed rooms and 
two bath rooms are warmed and ventilated. 

The living room and dining room on the first 
floor, Fig. 669, are ventilated by means of open fire 
places. The servant's bed room and the bath room 
on the second floor, Fig. 670, are ventilated by con- 
necting the vent ducts with a 9x10 in. vent flue 
built against the kitchen smoke flue, from which it is 
heated. The ventilating ducts from all other rooms 
connect into a 13 in. x 19 in. vent flue, through 
which a 9 in. terra cotta smoke flue which serves 
the furnace, is carried. The ventilating flue, 13 
x 13 in. in size, is carried up through the first story ; 
it is enlarged to 13 in. x 19 in. before the ventilating 
ducts of the second floor are connected into it. 

The kitchen ventilation is not included in the 
foregoing arrangement. At a point near the ceiling, 
Fig. 669, this room is equipped with a 10 in x 14 in. 
ventilating register connected into the 9 in x 10 in. 
vent, flue for carrying off steam and odors of cook- 
ing and excessive heat from the range, in summer 
or winter. The basement plan, Fig. 668, illustrates 
also the arrangement for supplying fresh cold air. 

With this general specification of requirements 
outlined, we proceed to read the plans for the heat 



PLAN READING 



35i 




SCALE Vi"= l'o" 



CEILING PLAN AND 
SECTION AT B 



PLAN OF BASE AND 
SECTION AT C 



Fig. 667.— Plans, Elevation and Section of Architectural Work 



35-2 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



\J 




Fig. 668. — Easement Plan 

and vent pipes. Starting with the basement plan 
in Fig. 668, let us follow the three warm air pipes, 
marked a, a, a, whose dimensions are 3^ in. x 8 in., 
4 in. x 11 in. and 4 in. x 12^4 in, respectively. They 
are connected to the furnace casing by 6 in., yyi in. 
and 8 in. round pipes, respectively. 

Following these flues to the first floor plan in Fig. 
669, we locate their positions by corresponding let- 
ters, a, a, a; and, as we find no outlets marked, we re- 
fer to the next, or second floor plan, Fig. 670, where 
we find them to be shown by dotted lines at the cor- 
responding letters, a, a, a. The dotted rectangles 
indicate that they do not rise over the second floor 
line but that elbows connect under the floor line 
between the floor beams and are carried under the 
floor between the beams to heat chamber No. 1 and 
the bath room. The one flue, marked a', is carried 
under the floor, as shown by the dotted lines, and 
then rises within the partition, to heat a bed room 
in the attic or third floor, no plan of which is shown. 
It should be borne in mind that the presence of 
dotted lines in a plan signifies that the flue or other 



object is hidden ; thus in the case 
just considered it is to be under- 
stood that the flue is under the 
floor. 

Again referring to the base- 
ment plan in Fig. 668, let us fol- 
low the three warm air pipes 
marked b, b and b, which connect 
to the furnace casing by means 
of two pipes each of 10 in. 
diameter and one of 1 1 in. 
diameter. On examining the first 
floor plan, Fig. 669, we find that 
these three pipes connect to floor 
registers, also indicated by b, b 
and b, one in the living room and 
two in the reception room. 

Again referring to the base- 
ment plan in Fig. 668, let us fol- 
low the uptake c , which connects 
to the furnace casing by a 7 in. 
round pipe. The rectangle over 
the circle at c indicates that a 
transition elbow will be required, 
forming a transition from the 7 
in. round pipe to the 3^2 in. x 1 1 
in. riser. Referring to the cor- 
responding position of this flue 
on the first floor plan, in Fig. 669, 
we find it in the stair partition 
marked c ; as no outlet is indi- 
cated, we examine the second 
floor plan, in Fig. 670, and find it at c, where it is 
shown to be dotted, from the partition, indicating 
that it is carried under the floor, between the beams 
and up in the partition, as shown, to heat chamber 
No. 2. 

d in the basement plan, in Fig. 668, again indicates 
that a transition elbow or boot is required to con- 
nect a 9 in. round pipe from the furnace to a 4 in. 
x 16 in. riser. Following this riser to the first floor 
plan, in Fig. 669, where it is shown at d, we find no 
outlet marked ; this indicates that the riser continues 
to the second floor, where in the plan, Fig. 670, it is 
shown at d. The small arrows indicate that it will 
warm the bath room, as well as the servant's cham- 
ber, No. 3. 

It may be well in this connection to call the read- 
er's attention to the fact that in all plans of heating 
and ventilation work, arrows pointing outward 
from the partitions into the rooms always in- 
dicate warm air pipes ; while arrows pointing 
toward the partitions or registers always in- 
dicate vent pipes. 



PLAN READING 



1 C "» 



The riser, marked c in the 
basement plan, Fig. 668, which 
connects with the furnace casing 
by an 8 in. round pipe, is 4 in. x 
\2 l / 2 in. in size and is shown by 
c in the first floor plan, Fig. 669 ; 
here no outlet is shown. This in- 
dicates that the riser continues to 
the next floor, shown by c in Fig. 
670, where the arrow indicates 
its outlet through a 10 in. x 10 
in. register face. 

Again referring to the base- 
ment plan, Fig. 668, let us follow 
riser i, which connects to the 
furnace casing by an 1 1 in. round 
pipe. The outlet of this flue, as 
indicated by i in the first floor 
plan. Fig. 669, is to the dining 
room. 

The position of the furnace 
smoke pipe is clearly indicated in 
the basement plan, in Fig. 668, 
where it connects to the tile flue. 

Reading the Plans of 
Ventilating Flues 

As already mentioned, the 





669. — First Floor Plan 



kitchen is ventilated by direct 
connection at the ceiling line to 
the tile flue at A, in Fig. 669. The 
dining room and living room are 
ventilated through open fire- 
places. On the second floor plan, 
Fig. 670, the servant's cham- 
ber, No. 3, is ventilated at the 
ceiling line through direct con- 
nection to the tile flue at B. The 
ventilation of the servant's bath 
room is indicated by the vent flue 
D, which is carried up to the 
attic floor (not shown), thence 
to the left on the unfinished attic 
floor to connect with the tile flue, 
B, which is carried upward. 
Chamber No. 4 is ventilated by 
means of the open fire place. The 
main bath room is ventilated by 
the metal flue, E (shown dotted), 
carried under the floor to connect 
with the tile vent flue, F. Cham- 
ber No. 1 is ventilated by direct 



Fig. 670. — Second Floor Pla 



354 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



connection to the tile flue at F. Chamber No. 2 is 
ventilated through the vent register H. This flue is 
carried under the floor, as shown dotted at J, so as 
to come in line with the first floor partition, shown at 
J in Fig. 669 ; it continues down to the cellar or base- 
ment ceiling line, where it is indicated by J in the 
basement plan, in Fig. 668, from which it is carried 
along the ceiling to connect to the 13 in. x 13 in. tile 
vent flue, as shown. The foregoing methods of 
delineation apply universally to plans of heating and 
ventilating pipes. 



Because of the limitation necessarily imposed by the 
size of page, the plans, elevations and sectional 
view presented here have been reduced to one-eighth 
inch to the foot. 

This full set of plans for a private residence con- 
sists of four plan views and four elevations, in- 
cluding a sectional view, and comprehends Figs. 
671 to 678, inclusive. 

Fig. 671 shows the front elevation facing west. 
To the left of this elevation is presented a sec- 
tional view giving the hights of the cellar, first and 



FLUE LINING 




READING A COMPLETE SET OF 

ARCHITECT'S PLANS DRAWN 

TO A SCALE 

Solution 203 

As already stated, architect's plans are usually 
drawn to a scale of one-quarter inch to the foot. 



Fig. 671. — Front Elevation, Facing West 

second stories. Note that the concrete footing is 
12 in. thick, upon which concrete blocks 12 in. thick 
are placed up to the grade line. Above the grade 
line the blocks are 8 in. thick, as indicated. The 
hight of the basement is 7 ft. in the clear as in- 
dicated, that of the first floor 10 ft. 2 in., and that of 
the second floor 9 ft. 2 in. The beams are marked 
2x10 — 16, these figures indicating that they are 2 
in. thick, 10 in. high and 16 in. on the centers. The 
roof rafters are 2 in. x 6 in., placed 20 in. on 



PLAN READING 



003 




w 






356 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



centers. The windows are 5 ft. 2 in. high, placed 
2 ft. above the floor line. As shown in the front 
elevation, the first story is of stucco and the second 
and attic stories are covered with shingles. The 
main roof has a roof gutter lined with tin, while 
the porch roof and extension in rear have box 
formed gutters, also lined with tin. The letters 
B. P. G. in the front elevation front doors indicate 
beveled plate glass. The figures i]/ 2 x \y 2 below the 
porch rail indicate the size of the balusters. 

The side elevation facing south is presented in 



view shows the side of the dormer window, found 
in the side elevation facing north in Fig. 674. The 
position of the main gutters and leaders are here 
shown. The cross lines under the porch, also shown 
in both front and side elevations, indicate the lattice 
work. 

Note that in the door leading to the basement in 
Fig. 674, a sash is placed in the upper panel. 

The foundation plan, shown in Fig. 675, gives a 
mass of information for the mason, the framer, the 
plumber, the roofer and the steam fitter. First, the 




Fig. 673. — Rear Elevation, Facing East 



Fig. 672, which shows the gutters and tin roof over 
extension. The arrow lines, marked 3" L indicate 
the position of the 3 in. leaders or rain water con- 
ductors. The mark L. G. in the windows indicates 
leaded glass. In reading plans it is always well to 
place the various elevations over the proper side in 
plans ; this shows at once the various relations of 
similar parts. 

Fig. 673 gives the rear elevation facing east. This 



contractor should check up the various dimensions 
on the plan, to find if they tally. Note the location 
of the windows and door, A, and of the stairs lead- 
us from the grade line to the basement floor, which 
is of cement. The location of the concrete footing 
for the metal columns, also the 6 in. x 8 in. spruce 
girder, is also shown. B indicates the steam boiler 
and C the laundry stove. The wash trays and maid's 
toilet are also indicated, as well as the lines of waste, 



PLAN READING 



357 




w 

o 

c/5 



ho 



358 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




ALL TRIMMERS AND HEADERS 

TO BE DOUBLED AND HUNG 

WITH(APP.)BRIDLE IRONS 



"WATER CATCH 20 O 
FROM BUILDING 



SCALE V 8 "= 1 r o" 



Fig. 675. — Foundation Plan 



PLAN READING 



359 



soil and house drains. The heavy line shown in the 
center of the plan, marked 4" E. H. I. house drain, 
indicated that the house drain will be of extra 
heavy iron pipe of 4 in. diameter. The 4 in. fresh 
air traps and the return fresh air bend are also 
shown. In this case a cesspool can be installed ; and 
the four down spouts, marked 3" L ; are connected to 
a water catch 20 ft. from the building, to prevent the 
near approach of water to the cellar. Cast iron pipes 
are also connected to the house drain, so that when 
sewers are laid in the street, the down spouts are 
connected to them. The size of the doors to the 
coal bin, wood bin, laundry and maid's toilet are 
indicated. The faint lines shown, with the various 
sizes thereon, indicate the first floor and porch floor 
beams. Those for the porch are 2 in. x 8 in., 20 in. 
on centers ; and those for the first floor are 2 in. x 
10 in., 16 in. on centers, with 1*4 hi. x 3 in. cross 
braces. Girders are placed at intervals in both first 
and porch floors, as indicated. The brick chimney 
is also shown, with two flues ; one for the steam 
boiler and the other for the kitchen range. Three 
gas and electric lights are shown in the basement 
plan ; they are marked I L, indicating one electric 
and gas light for the toilet, the same for the laundry 
and the same at the foot of the stairs, on the 
column. C. O. indicates clean outs for the house 
drain and 4" S. and 2" S. indicate cast iron drains 
connecting to the house drain. 

The first story plan, shown in Fig. 676, should 
also be checked up before any measurements are 
laid out. Note the cement walk around the north 
side, front and rear, with dimension widths marked. 
The veranda or porch has four steps and one elec- 
tric light in the ceiling. As an illustration of the 
method of indicating the size and thickness of 
doors, note the front doors, which are marked 

a' a" -*r to 1 A" 

4 — 4 x / — o 

— . This conveys the meaning that the 

2" 
front doors are 4 ft. 4 in. wide and 7 ft. 6 in high 
by 2 in. thick. In this way all doors are indicated. 
The double oblique lines in the front doors in- 
dicate that they are double doors. Otherwise in- 
dicated, the doors are single and the direction in 
which they open, is shown. A double oblique line 
such as is shown between kitchen and dining room, 
indicates a swinging door. The doors indicated be- 
tween the parlor and dining room are of the rolling 
type. An "opening" as marked between the recep- 
tion hall and parlor, indicates that no door is to be 
installed. Note that the vestibule floor is tiled and 
that the dotted lines in both reception hall and din- 



ing room indicate paneled beamed ceilings. In both 
of these rooms plate shelf and wainscot strips are 
indicated. The full size dimensions of all window 
frames are shown. Along the stairs in the reception 
hall a seat is placed, with hinged covers, forming a 
moth-proof box. One electric ceiling light is in- 
dicated in the reception hall by the double cross. 
The stairs, with newel posts, leading to the second 
floor, are also indicated. In the kitchen the range, 
boiler and sink with drain board are indicated, as 
also provisions for ice box drain in the rear entry. 
Two lights are indicated in the kitchen, one in the 
ceiling and the other alongside the range. The loca- 
tion of the 2 in. waste pipe from kitchen sink is 
shown, as also the 4 in. soil pipe from the upper 
bath room. In the dining room, a mantel is shown, 
as also a four-light gas and electric dome. The 
parlor has a console mirror and a three-light gas and 
electric fixture. The faint lines show the size and 
location of the floor beams. 

The second floor plan is given in Fig. 677. Here 
we find the roof plan of the veranda, showing a tin- 
lined box gutter, the arrows indicating the flow or 
pitch toward the 3 in. leader marked 3" L. This 
roof is covered with shingles and the faint lines on it 
indicate the rafters, which are 2 in. x 6 in., placed 
20 in. on centers. The location, swing and door 
dimensions are all shown. The faint lines in the 
plan show the size of the floor beams. The three 
bed rooms have each a two-light gas and electric 
fixture, the bath room two single lights, one on either 
side of a mirror, and there is a single electric light 
in the hall, all as indicated. The bath room is tiled. 
The 4 in. cast iron soil pipe, the 2 in. cast iron 
waste pipe and the 2 in. cast iron vent are all shown. 
The roof over the rear extension is covered with 
tin; it has two hips as indicated, the water pitching 
north and south to the outlets marked 3" L. The 
projecting cornice of the bay window on the south 
side is also covered with tin ; the water is carried 
off by means of a box gutter, pitching toward the 
outlet 3" L on the east end. This tin roof over 
the bay is more clearly shown in Fig. 672, giving the 
side elevation facing south. The roof plan over the 
rear porch shown in the second floor plan, in Fig. 
677, is covered with shingles, as shown. 

It is well to remark here that in case of doubt 
as to the correct reading of plans, the proper eleva- 
tion should be placed to face the proper side in 
plan, as this will bring the various views into their 
right relation. 

The last plan view is that given in Fig. 678, which 
shows the plan of the roof and attic. The dimen- 



360 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 




Fig. 676. — First Floor Plan 



PLAN READING 



361 




Ph 



< 



bo 

E 



ALL TRIMMERS AMD HEADERS 
TO BE DOUBLED AND HUNG 
WITH (APP.) BRIDLE IRONS 




fe 



in 
I 



bo 
E 



?6j 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 





Fig. 679. — Facing Northwest 



Fig. 680. — Facing Southwest 





Fig. 681. — Facing Southeast Fig. 682. — Facing Northeast 

Figs. 679 to 682. — Photographic Views of a Residence at Four Angles 



sions on this plan should also be checked to avoid 
error in laying out the work or in estimating on the 
job. The heavy lines, marked R, are the ridge lines 
of the two gables on the north and south sides, seen 
in the elevations. The line marked M-R indicates 
the main ridge of the gables facing east and west, 
seen in the elevations. The valley lines are indicated 
by the letter V. The tin-lined gutters on the north 
and south sides are indicated and are seen to pitch 
toward the leader outlets. The faint lines indicate 
the rafter lines, serving to show that 2 in. x 6 in. 
rafters, placed on 20 in. centers, are required. The 
ridge beams are of a size of 2 in. x 8 in., as shown. 
In the plan of the attic which is also shown, note 
the sizes of all window frames and doors. A wash 
basin is placed in the hall connected to the 4 in. 



soil pipe, as shown. A 2 in. vent pipe is also in- 
dicated. Note that the stair rail stops against the 
front bed-room wall. In the three bed rooms and 
hall, four single electric wall lights are indicated 
by 1 L. The reader should compare carefully the 
various elevations with the plans, until he can 
readily comprehend all the views. 

Figs. 679 to 682, inclusive, are photographs of the 
house under consideration, giving the views facing 
northwest, southwest, southeast and northeast, re- 
spectively. These photographs will be of consider- 
able assistance when compared with elevations and 
plans of the structure facing in like direction, giving 
the actual positions of gutters, leaders, ridging and 
valleys. 



PART XVII 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 
IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDINGS 



r F'HE mechanic who has mastered the science of 
sheet metal pattern drafting is possessed of 
the practical means of a livelihood in a successful 
calling and he who combines with his knowledge of 
that important department of sheet metal work an 
understanding of the methods of taking off items 
and quantities from architects' scaled plans is still 
more substantially equipped for successful occupa- 
tion in the sheet metal trade. 

The aim of the present part is to furnish guid- 
ance to the mechanic applicable at all times for tak- 
ing from plans, the items to be comprehended in 
sheet metal worker's contract, as cornices, skylights, 
roofing, gutters, spouting, furnace piping, etc., with- 
out reference, however, to price schedules of ma- 
terial and labor which, subject as they are to vary- 
ing circumstances and ever changing market condi- 
tions are necessarily omitted from consideration 
here. 

The exercise on estimating the material for cov- 
ering a hipped roof is of special value as showing 
how to find the true lengths of the hips, ridges and 
valleys which is equivalent to finding the true 
lengths, by means of triangulation. The method 
usually employed is to take off the quantities from 
a set of plans in the order of their occurrence in the 
specifications, which latter are the medium by which 
the architect indicates requirements, gauge of ma- 
terial to be employed, manner of construction, etc. 
The first example given consideration is that of a 
copper coping as follows : 



FINDING QUANTITIES IN COPPER 

COPING OVER WALL ON 

PITCHED ROOF 

Solution 204 

Fig. 683 presents a finished view of a molded 
coping, to be installed above the gable walls over 
a pitched roof. These copings are constructed of 
copper, a light and durable substitute for stone 



which does not leak at the joints, as stone copings 
usually do. The following is a typical specification 
for this class of work. 

Specifications 

"Copings over gable walls to be made of 20-oz. 
cold rolled copper ; all seams to be riveted with 1 
lb. copper rivets and thoroughly sweated with solder 
on the inside ; all outside seams to remain clean and 
smooth ; all miters to be re-enforced, according to di- 
rections hereinafter. 

"The coping is to be secured to wooden frame 
work prepared by the carpenter ; all work is to be 
well secured by means of round head brass screws ; 
the bottom of the coping is to have sufficient drip 
to protect the wall and the top is to be secured by 
means of a standing locked seam. All work is to be 
executed in a first-class, workmanlike manner." 

Computing the Quantities 

After reading the specification, it should be com- 
pared with the notes on the drawing and the draw- 
ings should be thoroughly studied, so that the esti- 
mator may understand precisely what is wanted. 
Pencil, note book, scale rule, a pair of four-inch 
dividers and some tracing paper, will serve require- 
ments. 

The view given in Fig. 683 is drawn to a scale 
of 1/16 in. to the foot. The extreme length of the 
coping scales 24 feet for side A and the same meas- 
urement for side B. When a drawing is made to so 
small a scale, an enlarged scale detail is usually 
furnished. From this the accurate girth of material 
can be taken. This enlarged scale detail also shows 
the character and requirements of construction and 
erection. In Fig. 684 is given a two-inch scale de- 
tail of the wall, the rough framing and method of 
fastening. Note that iron bolts are built in the wall 
at intervals of four feet ; to these the solid wooden 
brackets i8y 2 in. long are secured, and over 
these brackets are placed sheathing boards on which 



363 



364 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 

3- g" tot/u o//?r// o/v % fj 

BOW ■S/DFS 



?/'/-,' G/&r/r 



20'4,~0//?Trt 



„°< /// r=i 



/8H0M6 Bf?#CX£r5 





f/r 






a\ 




1 


n 


|r 


} 


n 


■ 


1 


u 


■ ILJ 


1 t 


u 


i 



5cs/e; % & /'n = /ft 



£>LrfA/ 



633 





€35 



Fig. 683. — View of Coping over Gable Wall 
Fig. 685. — Re-enforced Corners 

the copper coping is set. Allowance is made at the 
bottom of the brackets to receive the flange of the 
drip, and the two washes of the coping are seamed 
at A. Brass screws, i^> in. long, are placed as in- 
dicated at a; these hold the cove and drip tightly 
in position. 

As the section is drawn to a two-inch scale, set 
the dividers apart 1/12 of two inches, which repre- 
sents one inch on the two-inch scale ; starting from 
A take the girth on the right side to the end of the 
drip flange, obtaining measurement of 203/2 in. 
Since there is a lock on the opposite side of the 
coping, the left side will measure 2\ l / 2 in. giving a 
total girth of 42 in., or 3 ft. 6 in. 

As there is 48 ft. of coping in all, as shown in 
Fig. 683, and as the girth of the coping is 3 ft. 6 in., 
48 ft. x 3.5 ft. = 168 sq. ft. of copper required. 
The 20-oz. cold rolled copper specified, indicating 
20 oz. to the square foot = 20 x 168 = 3360 oz. 
Since there are 16 oz. to the lb., we have 3360 -H 16 
— 210 lbs. of cold rolled copper required. 

As there will be three seams on each side of the 
copper coping 1 in. wide or 6 seams in all, we have 
6 x 1 in = 6 in. or .5 ft. ; .5 ft. x 3.5 (the girth) 
= 1.75 sq. ft. The width of the lower head of the 
gable measures 1 ft. 6 in. and the girth of the head 
from 1 to 2 scales 9 in. Therefore .75 ft. x 1.5 ft. 
= 1. 125 x 2 = 2.25 sq. ft. Add 1.75 sq. ft. 




65^ sser/OA/ r///?a & 

M F/6. G83 



Scs/s : JS 



Fig. 684. — Obtaining Girth of Mold, and Method 
of Construction 



(for seams) -f- 2.25 sq. ft. (for heads) = 4 sq. ft. 
x 20 oz. = 80 oz. 80 oz. -4- 16 = 5 lbs. The main 
coping requires 210 lbs. plus 5; that is, 215 lbs. of 
20-oz. cold rolled copper is required. As the brass 

48 
screws can be placed 12 in. apart, ■ — • = 48 brass 

1 
screws required for each side. 48 x 2 = 96, which 
is the quantity all told of brass screws ij4 in. long, 
that is necessary. 

All the material needed for the work may be 
summed up as follows : 

215 lbs. of 20-oz. cold rolled copper. 

96 brass screws — 1}4 in. long. 

120 one-lb. copper rivets (rivets 2 in. apart on 
six seams). 

5 lbs. solder (approximate). 

To these must be added time, labor, overhead 
expenses, etc., all of which vary in different parts 
of the country. 

Fi 

lower heads are re-enforced by soldering gusset 
pieces, shown shaded by X, in the corners of the 
mold, marked by the arrow O and O in Fig. 684. 
This strengthens the corners and prevents the miters 
from bursting in the procedure of erecting the work. 



685 shows how the mitered corners of the 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



o u ;> 



COMPUTING QUANTITIES IN A 

CORNICE 

Solution 205 

An elevation of a main cornice on the roof of a 
building is shown in Fig. 686 ; it is drawn to a scale 
of }i inch to the ft. The full length of the cornice 
is to be 26 ft., its hight 4 ft. 6 in., and its projec- 
tion 24 in. Of course, it is impossible to get the 
true girth from so small a drawing, and a scale de- 
tail, from which the quantities are determined, is 
furnished by the architect. 

Specifications 

"The main cornice is to be constructed from No. 
24 galvanized iron, braced at intervals of four feet 
with band iron lookouts or braces, having thickness 
34 in x 1 }4 in. The braces are to be bolted to the 
cornice. The seams of the cornice are to be riveted 
with 2-lb. tinned rivets and all well sweated with 




half inch scale, that is, 1/12 of one-half inch. Start- 
ing at i in the section take the full girth of the main 
cornice down to the end of the drip flange at m; it 
will be found to measure 90 in. or 7 ft. 6 in. As the 
extreme length of the crown mold in Fig. 686 is 26 
ft. and that of the bed mold, panel course and foot 
mold 2 ft. less, we will, in computing the number of 
sq. ft., assume to have the full 26 ft. which will 
provide sufficient material for the two crown mold 
returns. The full girth of the cornice being 90 in. 
or, 7 ft. 6 in., we have 7.5 ft. x 26 ft. = 195 sq. ft. 
Again, setting the dividers apart one inch on the 
scale, take the girth from to r in the section of 
bracket in Fig. 687, and it will be found to have a 
girth of 66 in. or 5 ft. 6 in. As the face of the bracket 
is 9 in. or .75 ft., we have .75 ft. x 5.5 ft. = 4.125 
sq. ft. As there are five brackets, 5 x 4.125 sq. ft. = 
20.625 sq. ft. in bracket faces. 

The quantity of material for the bracket sides is 
obtained as follows: 

Extend the upper line of the bracket cap, as 



HWU l/H£ 



■ ae- o ■ 



Sea sca/c c/ete'V in f/p '5<3/ r — — 



636 



Fig. 686, 



Scale Ys" = 1 Foot 

-Elevation of Main Cornice with Bracket 



solder. Before erection of the cornice it is required 
to be painted with one coat of red lead in raw 
linseed oil on both sides. This work to be executed 
in a first-class manner, erected plumb and true." 

Taking Off the Quantities 

Fig. 687 presents a one-half inch scale detail of 
the cornice shown in elevation in Fig. 686. A full 
section of the main cornice is shown in Fig. 687, as 
well as the outline of the band iron brace (shown 
dotted). The dashes indicate the position of the 
bolts. The side view and face of the bracket is also 
show-n. 

To determine the quantity of sheet metal required 
for the construction of the cornice is a very simple 
matter. Set the dividers apart one inch on the one- 




FACE OF 3F/*CKfr 
*5 3 7 Seals : y z /n 



Fig. 687. — Scale Detail of Cornice Shown in 
Fig. 686 

a-d; then draw the diagonal, d c, to meet the hor- 
izontal line below r as c b. The line d c is averaged 
to a sufficient distance beyond the profile of the 
bracket, to allow the sink strips 1-2 to be cut from 
the waste in X Y. The distance from a to b scales 
4 ft. 6 in. ; the distance from a to d scales 1 ft. 9 in., 
and the distance from b to c scales 3 in. Then 1 ft. 
9 in. plus 3 in. equals 2 ft. 2 ft. x 4 ft. 6 in. equals 
9 sq. ft., for two sides. As there are five brackets 
in all, we have 5 x 9 sq. ft. = 45 sq. ft., required 
for bracket sides. 

Ten flat discs shown in the bed molding in Fig. 



3 66 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



686 are each of 6 in. diameter, as shown by S in the 
scale detail in Fig. 687 ; thus 6 in. x 6 in. — 36 in. x 
10 = 360 sq. in. for discs. The discs are to be 
stripped 2 in. wide ; therefore 3x6 in. = 18 
in., the approximate girth; 18 x 2 = 36 sq. in.; 
36 sq. in. x 10 = 360 sq. in. for strips. 360 sq. in. 
(discs) + 36° sq. in. (strips) = 720 sq. in. 720 
sq. in. -=- 144 = 5 sq. ft. 

There will be five 5-in. half zinc balls required, 
also five 3-in. half zinc balls for brackets. Again set 
the dividers one inch apart, according to the one- 
half inch scale rule, and step off the girth of the 
braces from 11 to v ; this will measure 78 in. or 6 ft. 
6 in. As the braces are to be spaced 4 ft. apart, seven 
braces will be required; 7 x 6.5 ft. = 45 ft. 6 in. of 
34 in x ij4 in. band iron. Computing the dashes in 
the one-half inch scale drawing, which represent the 
bolts, we have 10 bolts to each brace ; 7 x 10 = 70 — 
34 in. x -y\ in stove bolts that are required. 

In addition, there must be added approximately 
100 — 2 lb. tinned rivets ; about 9 lbs. of solder ; acid, 
coal, etc. Time and labor for construction and erec- 
tion, expenses, cartage, overhead, etc., must be 
added ; all these will vary in different sections of 
the country. 

The entire quantity of galvanized sheet iron re- 
quired may now be summed up as follows : 

Main Cornice 195 sq. ft. 

Bracket Faces 21 " " 

Bracket Sides 45 

Discs 5 " " 



Total 266 " " 

As No. 24 gauge iron is to be used and as No. 24 
galvanized sheet iron weighs 16 oz. to the sq. ft., 
266 lbs. will be required. 



Finding Quantities in Skylight Work 

The general rule in estimating skylight work is 
to measure the size of the roof frame, obtaining 
the number of square feet and to multiply the re- 
sult by the price per square foot. Many shops adopt 
a graded schedule of prices per square foot for sky- 
lights of different size in either the flat, double- 
pitched or hipped skylights, glazed with either 
rough, ribbed or wired glass and made in either 
galvanized iron or copper, of different gauges. It is 
our aim to explain how the quantities of metal and 
glass are computed, omitting the price, per square 
foot, which may be made according to prevailing 
conditions. 



Specifications 

The example under consideration is a flat sky- 
light, with the pitch in the roof frame. It is to be 
constructed of 16-oz. cold rolled copper, with con- 
densation gutters in both the rafters and curb, all 
condensation or leakage drained to the outside. The 
skylight is to be glazed with 34 ul - rough wired 
glass, well bedded in white lead putty. The rules 
and regulations of the National Board of Fire 
Underwriters are to be complied with in the con- 
struction and installation of the skylight. These 
rules and regulations are as follows : 

"All skylights, plane or inclined not over 45 
degrees to be glazed with either standard wired 
glass not less than 34 in. thick or 34 in. thick glass, 
protected with approved wire screen. Glass panes 
to be not over 20 in. wide and not to exceed 720 sq. 
in. in area." In other words these rules require that 
if the area to be glazed over is greater than 18 x 40 
in., that is, 720 sq. in., two lights of glass must be 
employed. 



COMPUTING QUANTITIES IN A 
FLAT SKYLIGHT 

Solution 206 

In Fig. 688 is shown a plan and section of a flat 
skylight, whose frame measure is 6 ft. x 10 ft. 10 
in., and in which the length has been spaced in eight 



10'- 10 






■-is'ls- 


-k'A- 


Glass 
..- v 


1 


•&'- 


-16/1- 
J 


-*!£- 


-'tfa- 




r 

1 


i 






lapped 
Joint 






P. 

2 








j 




PL rfN SFCT/O/i 

Fig. 68S.^Plan and Section of a Flat Skylight 

lights, each 163s in. wide, as follows: Total length 
10 ft. 10 in. or 130 in., less 34 in.,, for the shoulder 
on each side of the curb shown by X in Fig. 690, 

129 in. 

leaves 129 in., Fig. 688. = 1634 in. space. 

8 
As each light of glass would therefore contain more 
than 720 sq. in., the glass will be laid in two panes, 
with a two-inch over lap, as shown. 

In Fig. 689 is shown a full size section of the 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



367 



rafter and its cap. The rafter requires a girth of 
554 m - an d its cap a girth of V/2. in., making a total 
of 634 in. There are seven rafters in the skylight in 
Fig:. 688 and the length of each bar with riveting; 



/y 2 0/rM 



6/£ G/rM 








5'/+ O/r/h 



G90 



Fig. 6S0. — Obtaining: 

Girth of Common Bar 

and Cap 



Fig. 690. — Obtain- 
ing Girth of Curb 



laps included can be figured as 6 ft. or ~2 in. Thus 
J2 in. x 6.75 in. = 486 sq. in. for each bar, and 7 x 
486 sq. in. = 3,402 sq. in. 

Fig. 690 presents the full size section of the curb 
frame. The curb itself requires a 63/2 in. girth and 
the cap a !]/> in. girth, making a total of 8 in. At 
the lower end of the skylight, the copper is 
turned downward at the arrow point a. The 
skylight under consideration in Fig. 688 measures 
6 ft. by 10 ft. 10 in. Allowing for laps we may call 
it 6 ft. x 11 ft. Then 6 ft. -f- 11 ft. + 6 ft. + 11 ft. 
= 34 ft. or 408 in. Then we have 8 x 408 in. = 3,264 
sq. in. in curb. We then have 3,402 sq. in. for sky- 
light bars and caps and 3,264 sq. in for skylight curb 
and caps making a total of 6,666 sq. in. Since 144 

6,666 
sq. in. equals one sq. ft., = 46^4 sq. ft. Since 

144 
our material is 16-oz. cold rolled copper, weighing 
16 oz. or 1 lb., to the sq. ft., 46^4 lbs. of copper will 
be required. To this must be added approximately 
1 lb. of copper for clips to fasten caps, about 50 
I -lb. copper rivets, i l / 2 lb. of solder and about 15 
iJ4 _m - round head brass wood screws to secure sky- 
light curb to frame. 



The quantity of glass and putty is computed as 
follows : 

All glass is made in even numbers, unless ordered 
direct from the mill. In other words, if we require 
glass 16% in. wide, it will be cut from panes 18 in. 
wide, and \Y\ inches of glass, which would have to 
be paid for, would be waste. It is, therefore, im- 
portant, that the width of the lights be so spaced 
that there will be no waste that is not absolutely 
necessary. In this case the lights will be i6j/£ in. 
wide, as indicated in Fig. 688, allowing l / & in. for 
expansion and contraction, they may be ordered in 
16-in. widths, thus avoiding waste. The length of 
the rafter, J2 in., less 1 in. for curb shoulders, plus 
2 in. for overlap, makes J^ in. of glass required for 
each light. 16 in. x jt, in. = 1,168 sq. in. x 8 lights = 

9.344 sq- in. 
y.344 sq. in. = 65 sq. ft. of l /^-m. wired 

144 

glass. 

An approximately accurate rule for finding the 
amount of putty, is to allow 1 lb. for good imbed- 
ding for every 2 ft. of bar on both sides. Thus, we 
have in the skylight in Fig. 688 two runs of 11 ft. ; 
2 runs of 6 ft., and 7 double runs of 6 ft. There- 
fore 22 ft. -)- 12 ft. -\- 84 ft. = 118 ft. of single im- 

118 
bedding. = 2914 lbs. of white lead putty re- 

4 
quired. 

To the quantities of materials here computed 
must be added the cost of labor, expenses, etc. 
With the cost of the skylight thus obtained, divide 
that cost by 65, the number of square feet in the 
skylight in this estimate, and obtain the cost or price 
per square foot. These prices may, with advantage, 
be kept for future reference ; in this way a graded 
schedule for the various sizes is available. 

Computing Double Pitched Skylights 

In computing double pitched skylights the method 
used in calculating flat skylights is followed, simply 
allowing twice the sum of a flat skylight and sub- 
stituting, in its center, a ridge bar in the place of 
two curbs, and adding the area of the two triangular 
sections in the ends. 

COMPUTING QUANTITIES IN A 
HIPPED SKYLIGHT 

Solution 207 

The specifications used in connection with the 
preceding exercise in figuring a flat skylight may be 



3 68 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



employed also in the present case of a hipped sky- 
light. Finding the quantities in a hipped skylight 
will prove somewhat more difficult, for the reason 
that the lengths of the various bars must be com- 
puted. 




Pip.m or p~ /appro SKrueftr ro f/Pi/e o/i/r m/po p/rc/t op 
p p/se or s//j. to /2/m wore: p/z/ighte r 6e /e> 's+'iv/Vo 

Fig. 691.— Obtaining True Lengths of Skylight Bars 

Fig. 691 gives the plan of a hipped skylight, which 
will have a one-third pitch or a rise of 8 in. to a 
12-in. run. In this example the size of the frame is 
made to be 6 ft. 9*4 in. by 13 ft. 6]/ 2 in. ; the frame 
is to contain a ridge bar, without a ventilator. 

The full size section of the skylight curb is shown 
in Fig. 692; it requires a girth of 6*4 in. The 
amount of material in the curb is figured as follows : 



Referring to Fig. 691, the length of the curb is 13 ft. 
6}4 in. and the width is 6 ft. 934 in. Adding these 
dimensions, we obtain 20 ft. 334 in. Multiply this 
sum by 2 and we get the total length of 40 ft. y l / 2 in. 
We add to this result 434 in. for seams and miter 
laps, making a total of 41 ft., or 492 in. As the 
girth of the curb, Fig. 692, is 6*4 in., we have 6.5 in. 
x 492 in. = 3,198 sq. in. Divide 3,198 sq. in. by 
144 and get 22*4 sq. ft. 

The full size section of the ridge bar with its cap, 
shown in Fig. 693, has a total girth of 8 T / 2 in. The 
length of the ridge bar is found by deducting the 
width of the curb, in Fig. 691, from the length. 
Thus 13 ft. 6)A in. — 6 ft. 9% in. leaves 6 ft. g}i 
in. or 81 J4 m - Add % m - f° r l a P< making 82 in. 

697 
82 in. x 8.5 in. = 697 sq. in. and = 5 sq. ft. 

M4 
Before the quantities in the common, jack and 
hip bars can be ascertained, the lengths of the vari- 
ous bars must first be found. As a rule, the regula- 
tion pitch for hipped skylights is one-third or 8 in. 
rise to a 12 in. base and the factors used for finding 
the true lengths of the common and jack bars for 
one-third pitch is 1.2, and for the hip bar, 1.56. 
The method of obtaining these factors has already 



^ST/%. G/RTH 




695 GIRTH OF 
ri/P 3flR 



f'feGIRTH 



G/f?TH OF 
SKYLIGHT CURB 







Fig. 692. — Obtaining Girth of Skylight Curb 
Fig. 693. — Obtaining Girth of Ridge Bar 



CO/YP70A/ o/s 
JPfC/T BPJR5 



Fig. 694. — Obtaining Girth of Common and Jack Bars 
Fig. 695. — Obtaining Girth of Hip Bar 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



369 



been taken up in Solution 155, relative to hipped 
skylight work. Should the pitch be other than one- 
third, Solution 156 may be referred to for the 
method of finding the factors. 

The true length of the common bar is computed 
by the following method in consulting which refer 
also to Fig. 691. Always take the measurement of 
one-half of the narrow side of the frame and di- 



Curb 
Ridarc 



22.25 S( l- ft- 
5- " " 



51. 2s in. 



vide it by 2, thus, 



= 40.625 in. 40.625 in. 



x 1.2 = 48.75 in., the length of the common bars. 
Using the same number, 40.625 in., multiply it by 
the hip bar factor, 1.56, and obtain 63.375 m - or 
62>V& m -> the length of the hip bar. 

As the distance between all lights is 16.25 in., 
multiply this length by 1.2, to find the true length 
of the first jack bar. Thus 16.25 in. x 1.2 = 19.5 
in. 

As the second jack bar, in Fig. 691, being equally 
spaced at 16.25 in., we double the length of the first 
jack 193/ in., which will give the true length of 
39 in., all as shown in plan. If it be desired, the 
second jack bar may be computed by doubling the 
sum of the spaces as, 2 x 16*4 in = 2> 2 Y^ in. then 
multiplying this result by 1.2, obtaining, as before, 

39 in. 

Fig. 694 presents the full size section of the com- 
mon and jack bars, whose girth, including the cap, 
measures 6^4 in. The true length of the common 
bar being 48% in., as indicated in Fig. 691, we 
have 48.75 in. x 6.75 in. = 329 sq. in., in each bar. 
Therefore the ten bars are computed thus : 10 x 
329 sq. in. = 3,290 sq. in. This figure divided by 
144, gives 23 sq. ft. 

The amount of material in the jack bars is ob- 
tained thus : The length of bar, 19.5 in. x 6.75 in. 
= 131.625 sq. in., x 8 bars = 1,053 sc l- m - 1° n k e 
manner the long jack bar is figured. 39 in. x 6.75 in. 
= 263.25 sq. in. x 8 bars = 2,106 sq. in. 2,106 sq. in. 
3.159 sq. in. 

- 1 .053 sq. in. = = 22 sq. ft. The length 

144 
of hip bar is 63.375 in. x 7 in. girth, for the bar and 
cap, shown in Fig. 695, giving 443.625 sq. in. x 4 

1774-5 sq- in. 

bars = 1774.5 sq. in. = I2}4 sq. ft. 

144 
The total quantity, in square feet, if copper is used 
in the hipped skylight, Fig. 691, can now be added, 
as follows : 



10 Common bars 2^. 

16 Jack bars 22. 

4 Hip bars 12.5 



Total 84.75 " " 

Thus the total of copper required, at 16 oz. per 
square foot, is 84^4 lbs. 

To this quantity must be added approximately 2 
lbs. of copper clips for securing caps; about 150 
copper rivets to rivet bars to ridge and curb ; about 
2 lbs. of solder; and about 18 1% in. brass wood 
screws to secure skylight curb to frame. 

The glass and putty are figured as explained in 
connection with the flat skylight. The width of 
each of the panes of glass in Fig. 691 is 16% in.. 
for which 16 in. panes are to be installed. The re- 
quired quantity of wired glass may be computed 
accurately as follows : The width of panes is 16 in. 
The length of the common bars is 48% in. and that 
of the jack bars 19*^ in. and 39 in., as indicated on 
the plan. Deduct for expansion 54 i n - from the 
length of the common bar, and consider the two 
irregular lights marked X and X as full panes ; 
then will 14 rectangular lights, each 485/2 in. x 16 in., 
be required. 16 in. x 48.5 in. = 776 sq. in. 776 in. 
x 14 in. = 10,864 sq- in. Eight irregular lights 16 
in. wide, 39 in. on one side and 19.5 in. on the other 
side, will be required. The rule to follow, in find- 
ing this area, is to take one-half the sum of 
the sides and multiply it by the width, thus : 

39 x 19-5 58-5 

= = 29.25 ; 29.25 x 16 = 468 ; 

2 2 

468 x 8 = 3,744 sq. in. The eight triangular lights 
19.5 x 16 

have an area of = 156; 156 x 8 = 1,248 

2 
sq. in. 

The quantity of glass may now be summed up, 
as follows : 

14 Rectangular lights 10,864 sq. in. 

8 Irregular lights = 3,744 " " 

8 Triangular lights 1,248 " " 



15-856 



144 



1 5,856 " " 
no sq. ft. (of 34 in. thick wired glass). 



Figuring four linear ft. of putty to the pound, we 
have 40 ft. for curb, 14 ft. for ridge bar, 80 ft. for 
common bars, 40 ft. for hip bars, 80 ft. for jack 



37° 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



254 



bars ; total, 254 ft. 



64 lbs. of wbite lead 



putty. 

In this way are obtained quantities for hipped 
skylights ; to these must be added expense of time 
and labor, which differ in various districts. It is 
advisable to preserve all estimating blanks as they 
supply valuable information, which can be utilized 
when skylights of similar size are figured ; from 
them a schedule can also be made. 

Skylights to contain stationary or movable 
louvres and glazed-side sashes or ridge ventilators, 
involve also the foregoing methods for finding quan- 
tities. 



FINDING TRUE LENGTHS OF HIPS, 

VALLEYS AND RIDGES ON 

GABLE AND HIPPED ROOF 

Solution 208 

In Fig. 696 is given a perspective view of a gable 
and hipped roof, showing clearly the hips, valleys 




Fig. 696. — View of Dwelling 

and ridges. We will take up the method of finding 
true lengths direct from the architect's plans. Re- 
ferring to Fig. 697 a roof plan and the four eleva- 
tions are shown, comprising the various views of 
the building, shown in Fig. 696. Fig. 697 compre- 
hends the roof plan showing the hips, ridges and 
valleys. In their proper positions are shown the 
front, rear, left side and right side views, although 
in practice the front elevation and roof plan serve 
requirements in finding the various true lengths, as 
shall be made clear. 

Finding True Lengths of Hips 

The vertical hight A in the front view, represents 



the hight of the hip ; place this at right angles to one 
of the hip lines in plan, as a 0, as shown by b. A 
line drawn from a to b gives the true length of the 
hip, of which there are three, indicated by I, 2 and 
3. Another hip is indicated by 5, the true length of 
which is found by taking the vertical hight, marked 
C in the front view, and placing it at right angles to 
e r in plan, as shown from r to /. e f gives the true 
length of the hip, shown by e r in plan. 

Finding True Lengths of Valleys 

The lines, marked 3 , 4 and 6 in plan, represent 
valleys. As 3 and 4 are alike the true length of 
both will be the same. It is obtained by taking the 
vertical hight, B in the front view, and placing it at 
right angles to d fin plan, as shown from t to c. A 
line drawn from c to d shows the true length of the 
valley, two of which will be required. The true 
length of the valley, marked 6, is obtained in like 
manner. Take the vertical hight, D in the front 
view, and set it off at right angles to i r in plan, as 
indicated from r to h. A line drawn from h to i is 
the desired true length. 

True Ridge Lengths 

The true ridge lengths are found to be shown on 
the plan where they are indicated by the distances 
u t, e and r s. The foregoing procedure is em- 
ployed in finding the true length of any valley or hip. 
As the plan is drawn to correspond with the illus- 
tration in Fig. 696, comparison of the several views 
in Fig. 697 with Fig. 696 will make the various 
operations clear. 

Estimating Sheet Metal Quantities in 
Building Construction 

In the three examples to follow, the procedure for 
estimating sheet metal quantities from architect's 
scale drawings will be outlined. 

Fig. 698 is a photograph of a house taken as a 
subject for treatment. Architects' plans are, as 
already mentioned, usually drawn to a scale of one- 
quarter inch to the foot and from these the quanti- 
ties must be measured with a scale rule. The draw- 
ings here presented are reproductions of architect's 
plans and should be carefully followed in the course 
of the discussion. 

Specifications 

A flat seam tin roof is to be laid over the porch, 
also on the steep part of the roofs at the foot 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



37i 




Fig. 697.— Finding the True Lengths of Hips, Valleys and Ridges on a Gable and Hipped Roof 



of the gables over main roof, shown in the front 
and right side elevations. The steep roofs over 
the main building to be covered with standing seam 
tin roofing. The tin roof over the porch to be fitted 
with a boxdined tin gutter, the pitched roof over 
the main building to have a galvanized iron eave 
gutter. All leaders to be of galvanized iron and 
have shoes at the base, or be connected to the pipes 
leading to the sewer or cesspool. All galvanized iron 
work to be of No. 24 gauge; all tin work to be of 
40 lb. coating, laid with cleats ; all cleats and other 
tin and galvanized iron work to be nailed with 




Fig. 698— View of Dwelling 



37 2 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



tinned roofing nails. All tin work to flash up under 
all siding not less than 6 in. ; flashings around brick 
chimney to turn up not less than 12 in. Wood col- 
umns supporting balustrade on porch roof to be 
flashed not less than 6 in. high and tin from the 
gutter lining turned down over the top member of 
the wooden cornice not less than one inch, and 
nailed along this edge with tinned roofing nails. 
Under all tin roofing put one-ply rosin sized paper, 
paint all tin roofing one coat on the underside before 
laying and two coats on the top. All galvanized 
iron work to be painted one coat before erection 
and a second coat after erection. All paint to be 
of metallic brown, ground in linseed oil. Gutter 
hangers, straps and leader fasteners to be gal- 
vanized. 



ESTIMATING QUANTITIES OF 
FLAT SEAM ROOFING 

Solution 209 

We will first consider the flat seam tin roofing 
on the porch roof, the front elevation of which is 
shown in Fig. 699, and of which a plan view is 
found in Fig. 700. The length of the roof to the 
inner edges of the box gutter is 27 ft., as is indi- 
cated, and its width from the inner edge of the 
gutter to the building line is 9 ft. No deduction 
need be made for the bay window B, since extra 
materials are used at the returns at D and C, as 
well as for flashing up around the balustrade col- 
umns, a, b and c. As the flashing under the siding 
is to turn up 6 in., add this amount to the 9 ft. 
width, obtaining 9 ft. 6 in. Thus we have 9.5 ft. x 
27 ft. = 256.5 sq. ft. The same quantity of one- 
ply rosin sized paper will be required. 

Referring to Fig. 701, which shows the detail of 
the porch roof gutter, note that the girth of the 
gutter lining scales I ft. 3 in. and that the total 
lengths of the gutters required, as found in Fig. 
700, will be 2.5 ft. -f 12 ft. -)- 28 ft. + 12 ft. 
-j- 2.5 ft. = 57 ft. Thus we have 57 ft. X I - 2 5 
ft. = 71.25 sq. ft. of gutter lining. 

As flat seam roofing is required at the foot of 
the gables, shown in Fig. 699 and Fig. 702, measure 
this quantity as follows : Referring to the extreme 
right of the front elevation in Fig. 699, the pitch 
of the lower wash of the gable scales 2 ft. 6 in., 
which plus 6 in. allowance for turning up under 
the siding, makes a total of 3 ft. girth. Find the 
average distance of this wash, that is, bisect 
the distance between the eaves line and top 



intersection with the siding; it scales 15 ft., as 
shown to the extreme edges of the gable molds, 
which allows for the flashings to turn up 
at the ends of the wash under the molds. Thus 
3 ft. X I 5 ft- = 45 sc l- ft- ft> r tne ft° nt: gable wash. 
As there is a corresponding gable of like dimen- 
sions on the right side elevation, Fig. 702, we have 
2 X 45 S T ft- = 9° sc l- ft-> calling, of course, also 
for 90 sq. ft. of rosin sized paper. 

The total of flat seam tin roofing required will 
be as follows : 

Porch Roof, 256.50 sq. ft. 

Porch Gutter, /i- 2 5 

Two Gable Washes, 90. 



a tc 



Total, 4 I 7-75 

or 418 sq. ft. of tin roofing, with the same amount 
of one-ply rosin sized paper, the tin to receive one 
coat of paint on the under side and two coats on 
the upper side. 

Assuming that the roof is to be laid with 14 in. x 
20 in. sheets edged ^ in., each sheet will have an 
exposed surface of 12% in. X i8js in., or 243 1/64 
sq. in. 418 sq. ft. contain 60,192 sq. in., each 
sheet containing 243 1/64 sq. in., therefore 60,- 
192 -=- 243 1/64 results in 248 sheets of tin of 
14 X 20 in. size, the quantity required. Refer to 
Tables on page 335. 

ESTIMATING QUANTITIES OF 

STANDING SEAM ROOFING 

Solution 210 

To obtain the quantities of standing seam for the 
steep roofs, refer to Fig. 699, the front elevation 
of the pitched roof, Fig. 702 the right side elevation, 
Fig. 703 the rear elevation and Fig. 704 the left side 
elevation. Fig. 705 is the roof plan, showing the 
hips, valleys and ridges of the main roof. 

In estimating the quantities for this pitched roof, 
it is necessary to consult only the four elevations. In 
fact, an experienced estimator might dispense with 
the roof plan and obtain all quantities from 
these elevations. For the benefit of the less expe- 
rienced, the roof plan is presented, to make clear 
the procedure of computing all surfaces. 

In estimating irregular surfaces of pitched or 
hipped roofs, the various parts of the roof are 
divided into irregular geometrical figures ; this pro- 
cedure permits the area of the surfaces to be ascer- 
tained easily. Note that the roof plan is divided 
into various geometrical figures, marked A, A 1 , A 2 , 
indicating that the three surfaces with similar Let- 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



373 




374 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



FLASH 6" 
UNDER SIDING 




Y i 



LIVING ROOM 



COAT 
CLOSET 









2'0" 't<r 

C L— FLASH 6" 

/•UNDER SIDING 



0t.:i 



y_— 



-28'0" 



2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FEET 



Fig. 700. — Part of Second Story Plan 



ters have like dimensions. We have also B and B 1 , 
C and C\ D and D\ E, F, G. H, and J. 

The first quantity measured will be that for the 
surface marked A. Bisect the distance between the 
ridge line a and the eave line b and obtain c, through 
which draw a line parallel to the ridge line a f, thus 
obtaining d e, which scales 7 ft. The length of the 
rafter of this surface A is indicated in the front 
elevation in Fig. 699 by the scaled measurement 
of 10 ft. 9 in. Thus, 10.75 ft- X 7 ft = 75-25 sq. 
ft. As the roof surfaces A, A 1 and A- in Fig. 705 
have like dimensions, 3 X 75- 2 5 sq. ft. = 225.75 
sq. ft., the total area of the three surfaces. 

To obtain the area of the surface of B, 
draw a line from the intersection of the 
valley and ridge at / parallel to the eave 
line, as indicated by / g. As f g is of length 
equal to that of the eave line, that is, 10 
ft. 6 in., and as / g B forms a triangle, we 
compute one-half of / g as 5 ft. 3 in., or 
the distance from h to i. The length of the 
rafter from the line f g to the apex B is 
indicated in the right side elevation in Fig. 
702 shown by the scaled dimension of 
6 ft. 6 in. Thus, 6.5 ft. X 5- 2 5 ft - = 
34.125 sq. ft. As the roof surface t j B 1 , 
in the roof plan in Fig. 705 is of cor- 
responding dimensions to the surface B, 
2 X 34- I2 5 sq. ft. = 68.25 sq. ft., the total 
area of the two surfaces. 



The horizontal distance of the surface C is 10 ft. 
6 in. both at the eave line and along / g. The length 
of the rafter through C is indicated in Fig. 702 by 




Ot 23456 789 1011 1 FOOT 2 FEET 

SCALE OF FEET AND INCHES 



Fig. 701. — Detail of Porch Roof Gutter 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



375 




376 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



the scaled dimension of 10 ft. 9 in. 10.75 ft- X 
10.5 ft. = 112.875 sq. ft. As the roof surface C 1 
in Fig. 705 is of dimensions corresponding to C, 
we have, 2 X 112.875 sq. ft. = 225.750 sq. ft., the 
total area of the two surfaces. If the reader finds 
difficulty in following the roof plan and elevations, 
a helpful practice is to place the plan in the center 
of the table and lay the various elevations around it. 
to correspond to the "front," "right side," "rear" 
and "left side." 



scales 6 ft. 6 in. Thus, 6.5 ft. X 19 ft. = 123.5 
sq. ft. As the surface / t B 1 B in Fig. 705 is of like 
dimensions to D, then 2 X I2 3-5 S< F ft. = 247 sq. 
ft., the total area of these two surfaces. 

The area of the surface E is next to be obtained. 
The length g n is equal to the length of the eave 
line at the bottom, that is, 13 ft. 9 in. The length 
of the rafter between the line g n and the eave line 
is indicated in the front elevation in Fig. 699, which 
scales 10 ft. 9 in., as shown. Thus, 10.75 ft. X 




SCALE I I 



2 3 4 6 6 7 8 FEET 

lilil.hhlil 



Fig. 703. — Rear Elevation 



To obtain the area of the surface of D in roof 
plan in Fig. 705, extend the ridge line o j intersect- 
ing the two valley intersections at n and meeting 
the intersection at the hip line at g. At right angles 
to the ridge line B B 1 draw the line k I, meeting the 
line / g at I. Bisect k I, thus obtaining x. Through 
x draw a line, parallel to ; g, meeting the hip lines 
at i and m, which scales 19 ft. The length of the 
rafter on k I is found in either the front elevation in 
Fig. 699 or the rear elevation in Fig. 703, which 



13.75 ft. = 147.8125 sq. ft. of surface for outline E. 

The length of n of the surface F in the roof 
plan in Fig. 705 is equal to the lower eave line, or 
17 ft. 9 in. The length of the rafter between the 
eave line and the line n is indicated in the rear 
elevation in Fig. 703 by the scaled dimension of 
10 ft. 9 in. Thus, 10.75 ft. X 17-75 ft. = 190.8125 
sq. ft., the total area. 

The area of the surface G in Fig. 705 is com- 
puted as follows : The length of the extreme front 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



377 



edge of the gutter scales 19 ft., and as the gutter 
is to be 5 in. wide, deduct 2X5 in., or 10 in., from 
19 ft., obtaining 18 ft. 2 in. The roof surface G 
is of triangular shape, and the distance through 
r s, the center of the triangle, will be one-half of 
18 ft. 2 in., or 9 ft. 1 in, The length of the rafter 
from the eave line to the apex at is shown in the 
right side elevation in Fig. 702 and scales 10 ft. 9 in., 
as shown. Thus 9 ft. X IO -75 ft- = 0-75 sq. ft., 
the total area of G. 

The roof surface H in Fig. 705, next to be con- 



in the front elevation in Fig. 699 and scales 10 ft. 
9 in. Thus 10.75 ft - X 40-5 ft. = 435-375 sq. ft- 
of surface. 

This completes the task of finding the areas of 
all the surfaces of the main roof. No allowance 
has been made for the brick chimney in Fig. 705, as 
the quantity of tin roofing cut out at the chimney 
will be used in the flashings and saddle, as shown. 

The total amount of standing seam roofing may 
then be summed up, as follows, referring to the 
roof plan in Fig. 705: 




012345678 
SCALE I ij ,| ,| 1 I ,| || ,| 1 I 



Fig. 704. — Left Side Elevation 



sidered. Its ridge line o j is of the same length as 
the eave line, that is, 7 ft. The length of the rafter 
of the surface H is indicated in the rear elevation 
in Fig. 703 and scales 10 ft. 9 in. Thus 7 ft. X 
10.75 ft. = 75.25 sq. ft. of surface. 

The last surface to be computed is shown by J 
in the roof plan in Fig. 705. In this case extend 
the ridge line a f until it meets the intersection t at 
the hip. At right angles to t a draw the line a' b' ; 
bisect this line and obtain the point u, through 
which draw a line parallel to the eave line, cutting 
the gable line at v and the hip line at w. This dis- 
tance v w scales 40 ft. 6 in. The run of the rafter 
between the eave line and the line t f is indicated 



Areas 


i A, 


A 1 


and J 


S? = 225.75 


" 


B 


and 


B 1 


= 68.25 


" 


C 


and 


C l 


= 225.75 


" • 


D 


and 


D l 


= 247. 


Area ' 

tt l 


E 
F 
G 
H 
J 






= 147-8125 
= 190.8125 

= 96-75 
= 75-25 
= 435-375 



sq. ft. 



Total 



1712.75 sq.ft. 



Assuming that the cross seams are single locked, 
with edges }i in. wide consuming 1]/% in. of tin,. 



378 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



KLrth 




Fig. 705. — Roof Plan Showing Dimensi 



each sheet of 14 in. X 20 in. tin will cover 212 3/32 
sq. in., if edged i 1 /^ in. and i 1 /, in., giving a finished 
standing locked seam of 1 in. 

The number of sheets of tin required for the 
main roof may now be ascertained, as follows : 
1713 sq. ft. reduced to square inches will be 1713 X 
144, or 246,672 sq. in. As each sheet covers 212 



sq. in., we have 246,672 -4- 212 = 1164 sheets of 
14 in. X 20 in. tin; or 10 boxes and 44 sheets. 
There will also be required 171 3 sq. ft. of one-ply 
rosin sized paper, as well as solder, cleats, nails, 
rosin, charcoal, etc. All tin roofing must be painted 
one coat underneath before laying, and two coats on 
top after laying. 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



379 



COMPUTING QUANTITIES IN GUT- 
TERS AND LEADERS 
Solution 211 

The girth of No. 24 galvanized iron gutters re- 
quired at the eave of the pitched roofs is found by 
referring to the detail shown 'in Fig. 706, where 
the girth of the gutter less the roof flange X meas- 
ures 12 in. The girth of any mold or gutter can 
be found by means of a small strip of cardboard or 



Ref erring to the roof plan in Fig. 705, it will be 
seen that four leaders will be required ; as they are 
all of equal length, the length of one can be multi- 
plied by 4 to obtain the quantity total. The scaled 
measurements shown in Fig. 699, on the left, give 



STANDING SEfln 
TIN ROOFING 



A/2 <?<? 
GfiLU //r-OA/x 

Gurrefs 



\ 



'$ c =&*^^SsSsssw;m/w/ ///;///s//W. 





'GUrr£R HiQAtC£&3 /wo 
STRIPS . ^& "/^/=W/PZ" 

>/2"G//?r/-/ AT/ A/US 



Fig. 706.— Detail of Main Roof Gutter 

a small pair of dividers set apart one inch of 
the scale in use, and then stepping off divi- 
sions, counting them as the stepping proceeds; in 
this case we have 12 steps or inches. The gutter 
flange has not been added, for the reason that the 
tin roofing was measured down to the eave line. 
The number of linear feet of gutter required is 
found to be as scaled and indicated in Fig. 705, 
which presents the plan of the gutters and the 
leaders. Beginning at the front, we have 19 ft. -f- 
2.5 ft. + 10.5 ft. + 13.75 ^. + 2.5 ft. + 19 ft. 
+ 2.5 ft. + 17.7S ft- + 19 f t. + 7 ft. + 10.5 ft. + 
46 ft. = 170 ft. of gutter. Since the gutter less the 
roof flange has a 12 in. girth, 170 sq. ft. of No. 24 
galvanized iron will be required. The square foot of 
No. 24 galvanized iron weighs one pound ; therefore 
the total of 170 square feet is 170 lbs. In the detail 
in Fig. 706, a note is made that the gutter hangers 
and straps are to be placed 24 in. apart. We have 
170 ft. of gutter, thus 170 -=- 2 = 85, the number 
of hangers and of straps, all of galvanized malleable 
iron, that will be required. 



sca/e- of fee/- anc/ /nc/ies. 

the number of feet for each run. Thus we have 
9 in. + 2 ft. 6 in. -f 18 ft. 6 in. + 9 in., giving 
22 ft. 6 in. 4 X 22.5 ft. = 90 ft. of 3 in. No. 24 
galvanized iron leader. Each run of leader will 
require 3 hinged galvanized iron fasteners, or 12 
in all. Four 3-inch galvanized wire strainers over 
all outlets, as well as four leader tubes, will be re- 
quired. Galvanized iron leaders are required for 
the porch roof, as shown in the scaled front eleva- 
tion in Fig. 699; their full-size dimensions are 
marked at the right, as follows : 9 in. -f- 1 ft. 6 in. + 
I0 ft. 4- 9 in. = 13 ft. of 3-inch No. 24 galvanized 
iron leader. As there are two runs of leader from 
the porch roof, as indicated by A and A in Fig. 
700, then 2 X 13 ft- = 26 ft. of leader required 
for that area. Each run of leader will require two 
3-inch hinged galvanized iron leader hooks, or four 
hooks in all for the porch roofs, with two 3-inch 
galvanized wire baskets or strainers over leader 
outlets. Two galvanized iron leader tubes will also 
be needed. 

This completes the total quantities of materials 
used, except that, as above mentioned, 6 lbs. ot 
half-and-half solder should be figured for each 
square (10 ft. X IO ft-) of A at seam roofing. To this 
estimate of materials must be added the costs for 
cartage and labor, allowance for profit and overhead 
expenses, all to be figured, of course, according to 
the rates and conditions prevailing in the part of 
the country where the work is executed. 



3 8o 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



ESTIMATING FURNACE HEATING 
MATERIALS 

Solution 212 

In this final example is outlined the method of 
figuring the quantity of materials utilized for fur- 
nace heating. The structure accommodates two 
families. The method for calculating the expo- 
sures, the sizes of the furnaces, diameters of base- 
ment leaders, sizes of rectangular risers, register 
boxes, etc., are omitted, these sizes usually being 
indicated on the plans. 

The plans presented herewith are reproduced 
from architect's drawings ; they are the floor plans 
of the building shown in Fig. 



Specifications 

Each floor or family will have six rooms and a 
bath, heated by a separate furnace, as shown in the 
basement plan in Fig. 708. On this basement plan 
the locations of the furnaces are indicated, as are 
the runs and sizes of leader pipes and risers, also 
the sizes of the cold air pipes, which re-circulate the 
cold air from the rooms above. On the first and 
second story plans, shown in Fig. 709 and 710, re- 
spectively, are given the dimensions of the various 
registers and cold air faces. In this house the 
return system is employed, provision being made 
for galvanized iron ducts and pipes, which take 
the cold air off the floors and leads it down to the 
furnace and up again into the rooms above, air leak- 
age from the doors and windows being depended 
on for change of air. The furnaces, Fig. 708, are 
to be equipped with double galvanized iron casings 
of No. 22 galvanized iron, with pitched bonnets and 
an inverted cone top. The leaders, elbows, collars, 
boots, etc., are to be of No. 24 galvanized iron, 
covered with asbestos air cell covering, to prevent 
loss of heat. The risers are to be made of IX. 
bright charcoal tin, also covered with asbestos air 
cell covering. Register boxes are to be of the same 
material as the pipe with which they connect, and 
of proper size, as indicated on the various plans, 
shown in Figs. 708, 709 and 710. All registers are 
to be of the sizes indicated on the plans, to be fin- 
ished in white enamel, those connecting with the 
heat pipes to be equipped with movable valves and 



S£- 




Fig. 707. — Label to Each Furnace Pipe, as Called for in 
Specifications 



those connecting with the cold air returns to have 
open faces. Dampers are to be placed in all smoke, 
heat and cold air pipes and each pipe be distinctly 
marked, showing to which room it is connected, as 
shown in Fig. 707. 

Assuming that the sizes shown on the plans have 
been correctly calculated, the various quantities can 
be scaled from the architect's drawings, as follows: 



Computing the Quantities 

Referring to Fig. 708, take off the various items, 
beginning with the furnaces, one furnace being sup- 
plied to heat each floor. The plan indicates that the 
furnaces are to have a 40 in. double casing. The 
furnace for the first floor, which is shown in the 
vertical section in Fig. 711, will require two cold 
air shoes, with round collars, size 12 in. and 18 in., 
respectively, for inside air connections from the 
hall and dining room, as shown in Fig. 709. The 
bonnet of the first story furnace, shown in Fig. 711, 
will also require four collars, one 8 in. and three 
12 in., for hot air connections. Four feet of 8-in. 
No. 22 galvanized iron smoke pipe will be required, 
as scaled from the sectional view, and two four- 
pieced 45 degree elbows of 8 in. diameter, with one 
8-in. malleable iron damper. 

The furnace heating the second floor, shown in 
plan in Fig. 708, will require three cold air shoes, 
with round collars of 12 in. diameter for inside cold 
air connections from the hall, living and dining 
rooms, shown in the second story plan in Fig. 710. 
For hot air connections five collars will be required 
in the bonnet of the second story furnace, shown in 
the basement plan in Fig. 708, four of 12 in. diam- 
eter and one of 8 in. diameter. Fourteen feet of 
8-in. smoke pipe will be required, with two four- 
pieced 45 degree adjustable elbows, of 8 in. diam- 
eter, including one 8-in. malleable iron damper. 

The total quantities of material required for the 
two furnaces, with their connections to the brick 
chimneys, may be summed up as follows : 

Two furnaces with 40 in. double casings of No. 
22 galvanized iron. 

One cold air shoe with 18-in. round collar of No. 
24 galvanized iron. 

Four cold air shoes with 12-in. round collar of 
No. 24 galvanized iron. 

Seven collars in bonnets of 12 in. diameter, 6 in. 
long, of No. 24 galvanized iron. 

Two collars in bonnets of 8 in. diameter, 6 in. 
long, of No. 24 galvanized iron. 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OE SHEET METAL 



38i 




.__J_^ 



Fig. 708. — Basement Plan 



3 82 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



Eighteen feet of 8-in. smoke pipe of No. 22 gal- 
vanized iron. 

Four four-pieced 45 degree adjustable elbows of 
8 in. diameter of No. 22 galvanized iron. 

Two 8-in. malleable iron dampers. 

The next item for consideration is the quantities 
required of cold air pipes and fittings. Two cold 
air returns run from the first story, as is indicated 
in Fig. 709. Again referring to the section in Fig. 
711, we scale the various cold air pipes, as follows: 

Six feet of 18-in. round pipe of No. 24 galvanized 
iron. 

Ten feet of 12-in. round pipe of No. 24 galvan- 
ized iron. 

Two 12-in. four-pieced 45 degree elbows of No. 
24 galvanized iron. 

One cold air face box 1254 in. X l ^> l A m - X 12 
in. deep, No. 24 galvanized iron. 

One cold air face box 16% in. X 2>° l A m - X I2 
in. deep, No. 24 galvanized iron. 

One cold air duct under dining room (see Fig. 
708) 36 in. X 60 in. X I2 m - deep, No. 24 gal- 
vanized iron, with one 12-in. round collar, 6 in. 
long. 

Lining 4 beams (see c, f, g and h in Fig. 711) 
2 in. X 8 in. X 60 in. deep, of No. 24 galvanized 
iron. 

One cold air face 12 in. X l & m - with border, 
white enameled. See Fig. 709. 

One cold air face 16 in. X 3° m - with border, 
white enameled. See Fig. 709. 

One 12-in. malleable iron damper. 

One 18-in. malleable iron damper. 

Starting with the second story plan in Fig. 710, 
we find that cold air faces are placed in the living 
room, hall and dining room, and beginning here with 
our scale rule we obtain the following quantities. 

Three cold air faces with borders, 12 in. X l & m -> 
white enameled. 

Three cold air face boxes, 12% in- X l ^> l A in., 
of IX bright tin. 

Three 90-degree elbows, with circular heels, to 
connect with 6 in. X : 6 in. risers, of IX bright 
tin. 

Six ft. 6 in. of 6 in X l & in- horizontal pipe, of 
IX bright tin, under floor of dining room and hall. 
The hight of the first floor being 9 ft., from 
ceiling line to floor line (see Fig. 711), the three 
risers of cold air pipes will measure 3 X 9 ft- or 
2j ft. of 6 in. X J 6 in. IX bright tin pipe. 

Where these three cold air returns connect with 
the 12 in. round pipe in basement, Fig. 708, 3 transi- 
tion boots will be required, to be placed between the 



beams of the basement ceiling, forming a transition 
from a 6 in. X 16 in. rectangle to a 12-in. round pipe 
of No. 24 galvanized iron, the transitions to be 12 in. 
high. The true lengths of the 12-in. diameter cold 
air returns, from the transition at the ceiling line 
to the bottom of the cold air furnace boot, is ob- 
tained as follows : 

The hight of the basement ceiling in Fig. 711 is 
7 ft. ; from this deduct the hight of the cold air 
shoe and elbow of the cold air return, as well as the 
hight of the elbow below the transition piece at the 
ceiling line ; this leaves 5 ft. 6 in. net. Place this 
hight in Fig. 708, at right angles to the cold air pipe 
A, from a to b, when the distance of the slant line 
drawn from b to c will scale 10 ft. 3 in., the true 
length of the slant. 

Proceed likewise with the other two cold air 
pipes, where the true length of d to c and h to i will 
scale 11 ft. 3 in. and 8 ft. 6 in. respectively. The 
three lengths will make a total of 30 ft. of 12-inch 
round cold air pipe of No. 24 galvanized iron. For 
each run of pipe two elbows will be required, or a 
total of 6 three-pieced 45 degree adjustable 12-inch 
round elbows of No. 24 galvanized iron. 

Three 12-inch malleable iron dampers complete 
the items for the cold air pipes from the second 
story. 

In scaling the lengths of the hot air pipes in base- 
ment, they can be measured direct from this plan, 
as the pitch is so slight as to make but little varia- 
tion from the horizontal. We will take up all hot 
air pipes and fittings leading to the first story, start- 
ing from the collars in the furnace bonnet. 

Two 45 degree three-pieced adjustable elbows 
8-inch round No. 24 galvanized iron. 

Seven 45 degree three-pieced adjustable elbows 
12-inch round No. 24 galvanized iron. 

Twenty-six ft. 6 in. of 12-inch round hot air pipe 
of No. 24 galvanized iron. 

Eleven ft. of 8-inch round hot air pipe of No. 24 
galvanized iron. 

Two transition boots from 6 in. X I( 5 in. risers to 
12-inch round pipe, 12 in. high of No. 24 galvan- 
ized iron. 

One transition boot from 4 in. X I2 in- riser to 
8-inch round pipe, 12 in. high of No. 24 galvanized 
iron. 

As the bottom of the registers set 12 inches above 
the first floor line, Fig. 711, and as there are two 
6 in. X !6 in. risers to the first floor and one 
4 in. X 12 in. riser, we will require 2 ft. of 
6 in. X I 6 in. riser made of IX bright tin. One ft. 
of 4 in. X 12 in. riser made of IX bright tin. 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



383 



7TT 



~K 



V v 



10,6- 

-5'6" s-; 



-is'^ 



E 





. 



ICE 
BOX 



ENTRY 



CHAMBER A 



WALL REG. ^, 
5'lCtf— 
BATH ROOM. 

4^WALL 



012345678 FEET 
SCALE I I 1 1 | , 1 1 I 1 I 1 I , I , ] 



Fig. 709. — First Story Plan 



3§4 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



- • • ■ ~ 



n 



i 



9wj N 



, 

B& I 
^ 



CHAMBER C im? 

WALL REG. 

6"X16' 



W^w' 



KITCHEN 

10"X 12" 
LL REG. 




12 3 4 6 6 FEET 
SCALE I I 1 I I I I I i 1 I I 1 

Fig. 710. — Second Story Plan 



ESTIMATING ITEMS AND QUANTITIES OF SHEET METAL 



335 



RIDGE LINE 




NOTE- 
PUT DAMPERS IN ALL 
COLD AIR AND HOT AIR 
PIPES, AND MARK ON EACM 
PIPE WHERE IT LEADS TO 



Fig. 711. 



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

SCALE I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 

-Vertical Section on the Lines A-B on all Plans, Shown in Figs. 708, 709 and 710 



Referring to Fig. 709 we find requirement for: 

One floor register box 12% in- X i6}4 m -» wrtn 
12 in. round collar, the box to be 12 in. deep of IX 
bright tin. 

One single top register box 8j4 in. X io}4 i n -» 
for connection to 4 in. X 12 in. riser of IX bright 
tin. 

Two double top register boxes 10% in- X ^V\ in., 
for connection to 6 in. X l & m - riser, made of IX 
bright tin. 



One floor register, with border and valves, 12 in. 
X 16 in., white enameled. 

One wall register, with valves 8 in. X IO in -> 
white enameled. 

Four wall registers, with valves 10 in. X I2 m -> 
white enameled. 

One 8-in. and three 12-in. dampers for hot air 
pipes from first story furnace in basement in Fig. 
708. To get the greatest benefit from this explana- 
tion, the reader should follow each item given and 



3 86 



THE UNIVERSAL SHEET METAL PATTERN CUTTER 



check it off carefully on the accompanying plans. 

The final items to be measured are for heating 
pipes to the second story. Here again the hot 
air pipes shown in the basement plan in Fig. 708 
are scaled as if they lay horizontally, no account 
being taken of the slight pitch which these hot air 
pipes should have. 

Again starting from the collars in the bonnet of 
the second-story furnace, shown in Fig. 708, we 
will require the following materials : 

Two 45 degree three-pieced adjustable elbows, 
8 in. round No. 24 galvanized iron. 

Eight 45 degree three-pieced adjustable elbows, 
12 in. round No. 24 galvanized iron. 

On scaling the five runs of hot air pipes or leaders 
we have 5 ft. 6 in. of 8-in. round hot air pipe made 
of No. 24 galvanized iron. 

Thirty-four ft. 9 in. of 12-in. round hot air pipe 
made of No. 24 galvanized iron. 

One transition boot from 8-in. round pipe to 
4 in. X I2 m - rectangular pipe, 12 in. high of No. 24 
galvanized iron. 

Four transition boots from 12-in. round pipe to 
6 in. X x 6 in. rectangular pipe, 12 in. high of No. 24 
galvanized iron. 

All of these transition boots run nearly flush with 
the first story and, referring to Fig. 711, it is found 
that the hight of the first story from floor to ceiling 
line is 9 ft. ; from the ceiling line to the base of the 
register on the second floor is 2 ft., thus making a 
total of 11 ft. for each second-story riser. 



The total quantities of risers for the second story 
may now be summed up as follows : 

Referring to the basement plan, in Fig. 708, we 
find one 4 in. X 12 in. riser to the second story and 
four 6 in. X l & m - risers. We will require, there- 
fore, 11 ft. of 4 in. X 12 in. riser of IX bright tin 
and 44 ft. of 6 in. X l & m - risers of IX bright tin. 

Referring to Fig. 710. the second story plan, we 
find we will require one single top register box 
8% in. X ioJ4 in., for connection to 4 in. X I2 m - 
riser of IX bright tin. 

Two single top register boxes, I2j4 in. X 16X4 in-, 
for connection to 6 in. X : 6 in. risers of IX bright 
tin. 

Two double top register boxes ioj4 in. X I2 /4 
in., for connection to 6 in. X 16 in. risers of IX 
bright tin. 

One wall register, with valves, 8 in. X 10 in., 
white enameled. 

Two wall registers, with valves, 12 in. X T 6 in. 
white enameled. 

Four wall registers, with valves 10 in. X I2 ' n -> 
white enameled. 

One 8 in. and four 12 in. malleable iron dampers 
for hot air pipes leading to second story. 

With the quantities determined, net prices must be 
made, to include, of course, the cost of the mate- 
rials, expenses of cartage, labor, loss of time, allow- 
ance for profit and overhead expenses, all of 
which necessarily vary with localities and prevailing 
conditions. 



INDEX 



PAGE 

Abacus, Definition of 7 

Allowing for Expansion and Contraction of Roofing 

Metal 31-2 

Alphabetical List of Terms of Architecture and Sheet 

Metal Work 21 

Angular and Segmental Pediments, Raking Moldings 

and Brackets for 122 

Angular Pediment, Broken, Raking Molds in 124 

Angular Pediment, Raking Crown Mold in 122 

Angular Pediment Having Returns at Octagonal Angles 129 
Applying Corrugated, Galvanized Iron or Copper Roof- 
ing and Siding 312 

Arch. Circular, Molded Keystone in 226 

Arch, Definition of 8 

Architectural Design, Detailing and Lettering 30 

Architectural Drawing 23-29 

Architectural Work, Reading Plans, Elevations and 

Section 35° 

Architecture, Styles of 30-40 

Architecture, Orders of 30-40 

Architecture, Classical, History of 30 

Architect's Plans Drawn to Scale, Reading a Com- 
plete Set of 3S4-362 

Achitrave, Definitions of 7- I0 

Arm, Definition of 13 

Assembling a Paneled Illuminated Sign 246 

Automatic Closing, Tin Clad Fire Doors, Shutters, 

etc., Construction of Various Types 252 

Averaging Profile and Determining Pattern in Curved 

Molding of Dormer Window 204 



Ball or Sphere Having Horizontal Zones 192 

Baluster, Definition of 9 

Balustrade. Definition of 9 

Band Iron Braces of Lintel Cornice, Bending and In- 
serting 82 

Bar, Common, of Skylight on Structural Steel Framing 310 

Bar, Hipped, in Hipped Skylights 283 

Bar, Jack, in Hipped Skylights 282 

Bar. Ridge, for Plain Hipped Skylight 280 

Bar, Valley, for a Pitched Skylight 293 

Bar of Saw Tooth Skylight 307 

Bars, Hipped, Skylight, Curb, Common and Jack ...281-282 
Bars, Skylight, Finding Length of by Computation .... 288 
Bars and Ventilators in Hipped Skylights. Finding True 

Lengths of 286 

Bars for Skylights of any Pitch, Finding Length of .. 290 

Bars in Hipped Skylights. Others Required 284 

Bars in an Octagonal Skylight 292 

Bars of Large Single Pitch Skylight, Framing and Re- 
inforcing 266 

Bars of Photographic Studio Skylight, Reinforcing 276 

Bars of Single Pitch Skylight Over Elevator and Stair 

Shafts 305-309 



PAGE 

Bass, Definition of 7 

Base Flashing, Definition of 17 

Base, Irregular. Reading Plans, Elevations and Con- 
structive Views of 342 

Base, Molded, Forming a Transition from Square to 

Octagonal 217 

Base, Octagonal Tapering, Including Roof Flange, In- 
tersecting the Hips and Ridge of a Hipped Roof . . 167 
Base, Tapering, Intersecting the Ridge and Hips of a 

Pitched Roof 173 

Base and Cap Flashings, Providing for Expansion and 

Contraction of Metal in 319 

Base and Roof Flange, Tapering, on the Ridge and Hips 

of a Pitched Roof 171 

Base in a Circular Bay Window, Molded 207 

Base of Irregular Bay Window of Five Sides, Re- 
quiring Two Changes of Profiles 68 

Base of Octagonal Bay Window Mitering Obliquely 

Against Wall, Requiring Raked Profiles 66 

Base of Square Bay Window, Requiring Raked Profiles 68 

Baseball, Construction of 193 

Batten and Standing Seam Metal Roofing 312 

Battens, Wood, Laying Metal Roofing Over 314 

Battens, Wood, Laying Zinc or Copper Roofing on .... 325 

Bay Window, Circular, Curved Moldings in 206 

Bay Window, Circular, Molded Base in 207 

Bay Window, Copper, Construction of 71 

Bay Window, Irregular, of Five Sides, Base Requiring 

Two Changes of Profiles 68 

Bay Window, Octagonal, Base of Mitering Obliquely 

Against Wall 66 

Bay Window, Octagonal, Bevel and Butt Miter for ... . 64 

Bay Window, Raking Bracket in Soffit of 136 

Bay Window, Rectangular 68 

Bay Window, Square, Base of Requiring Raked Profiles 68 

Bay Windows 53, 64-74, '92 

Bed and Crown Molds of Lintel Cornice, Joining . . 81 

Bed Moldings, Definition of 9 

Bell, Definition of 7 

Bending and Inserting Band Iron Braces on Lintel 

Cornice 82 

Bevel and Butt Miter for an Octagonal Bay Window . . 64 

Bevel and Butt Miters 53 

Bevel and Butt Miters in a Pediment Molding, Quick 

Method 101 

Bevel Miters 53> 56 

Beveled Shield, Flaring Strips Around 231 

Beveled Tube, Reading Plan and Elevations of 338 

Bin, Grain, Standing Seam of Conical Roof for 329 

Block Letter Signs, Electrical. Constructing 241 

Block Letters, Drawing 52 

Box Lined Gutter, Definition of 15 

Bracket, Corner, under the Soffit of a Hipped Roof . . 138 

Bracket, Definitions of 8, 13 

Bracket. Raking, Drawing Elevation 140 



387 



388 



INDEX 



PACE 

Bracket, Raking, Face of 1+2 

Bracket, Raking, in a Pediment 140 

Bracket, Raking, in Apex of Pediment 142 

Bracket, Raking in Plan, as in the Soffit of a Bay 

Window 136 

Brackets, Raking, in Soffit of Bay Window 137 

Bracket, Raking, Modified Side of 142 

Bracket Drop, Return of 223 

Brackets 122, 213 

Brackets for Angular and Segmental Pediments 122 

Brick Siding, Definition of 19 

Broken Angular Pediment, Raking Molds in 124 

Broken or Open Pediment, Definition of 8 

Broken Segmental Pediment, Raking Molds in 126 

Bulk Head, Definition of 18 

Butt, Definition of 17 

Butt and Bevel Miter for an Octagonal Bay Window . . 64 
Butt and Bevel Miters in a Pediment Molding, Quick 

Method 101 

Butt and Face Miters in a Plain Pediment 84 

Butt Miter, Definition of 10 

Butt Miter and Return Head Required by Ridge Capping 176 
Butt Miter and Roof Flange on a Right Angle Return 91 

Butt Miter on Square Dormer Return 90 

Butt Miters Against Wall 130 

Calculating Flat Seam Roofing Sheets 337 

Calculating Standing Seam, Double Lock Roofing Sheets 337 
Calculating Standing Scam, Single Lock Roofing Sheets 337 

Cant trip, Definition of 18 

Cap, Definitions of 7. 15 

Cap, Molded, Forming a Transition from Octagonal to 

Square 218 

Cap and Base Flashings of Roofing, Providing for Ex- 
pansion and Contraction of Metal in 319 

Cap and Crown Molding of Lintel Cornice, Forming 

on Cornice Brake 79 

Cap Flashing, Definition of 17 

Cap Flashing and Base Flashing of Metal Roofing, 

Setting 313-326 

Cap Mold, Definition of 10 

Cap Mold, Raked 141 

Capital, Definition of 7 

Capping, Ridge, Requiring Return Head and Butt Miter 176 

Caps Secured to Skylight Bar 268 

Casement Window, Definition of 20 

Casting Lead Plugs for Use in Metal Roofing 320 

Center Jack Bar, Definition of 14 

Center Lines 26 

Central Intersection of Sphere by a Fluted Shaft . . 237 

Chain Lifting Power, Definition of i4 

Chamfer, Molded 216 

Chamfering Wood Beam in Skylight Construction 267 

Chamfers 213 

Channel Letter Sign, Electrical, Construction of 245 

Circular Arch, Molded Keystone in 226 

Circular Bay Window, Curved Moldings in 206 

Circular Bay Window, Molded Base in 207 

Circular Louvres !95 

Circular Metal Roof, Standing Seam, Laying 327 

Circular Moldings Made by Machine 204 



PAGE 

Circular Panel, Cove Mold in 196 

Circular Panel, Quarter Round Mold in 197 

Circular Panel, Reversed Ogee in 197 

Circular Sheet Metal Work 192 

Circular Spire Mitering on Four Gable Roofs 189 

Circular Tower, Round Finial for 198 

Classical Architecture. History of 30 

Cleat, Band Iron, on Iron Framing 332 

Cleat, Roofing, Definition of 17 

Cleat, Strap Iron, on Iron Framing 332 

Cleats for Metal Roofing 313, 315 

Collar. Definition of 14 

Collars, Flanges, Ventilator Bases and Hoods 158 

Column, Definition of 7 

Column, Molded, Gable Molding Mitering Against . . 102 
Combination Pivot Hung and Stationary Fire Proof 

Windows, Construction of 252 

Combination Window, Definition of 20 

Combined Cornice and Gutter 55 

Common Bar, Definition of 14 

Common Bar in Hipped Skylights 282 

Common Bar of Skylight on Structural Steel Framing 310 

Common Jack Bar, Definition of 14 

Composite Order, Definition of 7 

Computing Divisions of a Main Cornice 46 

Computing Items and Quantities of Sheet Metal ..363-386 

Concrete Mold, Definition of 20 

Condensation Gutter of Curb, Definition of 14 

Condensation Gutter of Bar, Definition of 14 

Condensation Holes, Definition of 14 

Conductor Hook, Definition of 16 

Conductor Offset, Paneled 118 

Conductor Offsets 104 

Cone, Scalene, Reading Plan and Elevations of 340 

Conical Flange, Roof Plate and, on a Double Pitched 

Roof 170 

Conical Roof Flange on Roof Having One Inclination.. 169 

Conical Roof over Large Grain Bin 329 

Constructive View of Cornice and Gutter Combined . . 55 
Contraction of Metal in Flat Seam Roofing, Providing 

for 322 

Contraction of Metal in Standing Seam Roofing, Pro- 
viding for 323 

Contraction of Roofing Metal, Allowing for ....312, 319 
Coping, Copper, over Wall on Pitched Roof, Computing 

Quantities of 363 

Coping Pediment, Intersected by Molded Head Block.. 174 

Coping, Securing to Brick Wall 176 

Copings, Head Blocks, Hip Ridges, Finials and Spires 174 
Copper and Wire Glass Ventilated Marquise, Con- 
struction of 272 

Copper Bay Window, Construction of 71 

Copper Coping over Wall on Pitched Roof, Computing 

Quantities of 363 

Copper Lined Gutter Expansion Joints 318 

Copper or Zinc Roofing, Laying on Wood Battens . . 325 

Copper Roofing and Siding 312-337 

Copper Sheets, Table of Weights of 336 

Corbel, Definition of ° 

Core Plate, Definition of x 5 

Corinthian Order, Definition of 7 

Corner Bracket under the Soffit of a Hipped Roof 138 



INDEX 



389 



PAGE 

Corner Miter Fold of Doors and Shutters, Preparing 

Pattern Shape for and Constructing Lock and Fold 255 

Cornice, Definition of 8 

Cornice, Estimating Quantities in 365 

Cornice, Lintel, Details of Construction 75 

Cornice, Lintel, Fastening to Iron Beams 84 

Cornice, Lintel, Securing to Brick Wall and Covering 

its Top 83 

Cornice, Main. Computing Divisions of 46 

Cornice, Main, Detailing 46 

Cornice, Main. Preparing Working Details of 48 

Cornice Combined with Gutter, Construction of 55 

Cornice Miter, Reduced, at Other than a Right Angle 

in Plan 149 

Cornice on a Wood Base. Securing Lining to 317 

Cornice Pediment Requiring Face Miters 58 

Cornice Return, Right Angular, Reduced Miter on . . 148 

Cornice View, Elevation and Sectional, Reading 349 

Cornices, Construction of 53 

Cornices and Segmental Pediments 192 

Corona, Definition of 9 

Corrugated Culvert, Definition of 19 

Corrugated Galvanized Iron or Copper Roofing and 

Siding, Laying 330 

Corrugated Iron Roofing, Definition of 18 

Corrugated Iron Siding, Definition of 18 

Corrugated Leader, Definition of 16 

Corrugated Ridge Roll, Definition of 19 

Corrugated Sheets. Table of Helps for Figuring .... 237 

Counter-Balanced Sash, Definitions of 15, 20 

Cove Mold in a Circular Panel 196 

Cove Molding Intersected by Triangular Dentil 223 

Covering Roof Domes with Flat Seam Roofing .... 333 
Covering Segmental Heads in the Construction of Tin 

Clad Shutters 259 

Cross-Bar for Making Water-Tight Connection be- 
tween Glass Panes in Skylight Construction 268 

Crown, Foot and Frieze Molds of Lintel Cornice, Join- 
ing 82 

Crown and Bed Molds of Lintel Cornice, Joining .... 81 
Crown and Cap Molding of Lintel Cornice, Forming 

on Cornice Brake 79 

Crown Mold, Definition of 9 

Crown Mold, Raking, in Angular Pediment 122 

Culvert, Corrugated, Definition of 19 

Curb, Definition of 14 

Curb and Bars in an Octagonal Skylight 292 

Curb and Gutter of Skylight Over Elevator and Stair 

Shafts, Construction of 306 

Curb, Common and Jack Bars of Hipped Skylight 281 

Curb Flashing, Definition of 19 

Curb Rest, Definition of 14 

Curbs, Bars and Ventilators in Hipped Skylights, Find- 
ing True Lengths 286 

Curbless Flat Skylight, Construction of 302 

Curved Corrugated Roofing, Definition of 19 

Curved Dormer Window with Curved Roof and Roof 

Flange 210 

Curved Molding of Dormer Window, Averaging Profile 

and Determining Pattern in 204 

Curved Moldings in a Circular Bay Window 206 

Curved Roof Flange 95 



PAGE 

Curved Shaft and Bead for Round Finial of Circular 

Tower ig9 

Cut-off, Definition of 16 

Cylinder, Roof Flange and, Intersecting a Double 

Pitched Roof 159 

Cylinder, Roof Flange and, Intersecting Ridge and Hips 

of a Hipped Roof 160 

Cylinder, Roof Flange and. Intersecting Single Pitched 

Roof 158 

Deck Cornice Definition of 8 

Deck Molding, Definition of 18 

Deck Roof, Definition of 18 

Deck Roofs, and Mansard, Reading Plan and Elevations 

of a Building with 346 

Definitions in Plan Reading 338 

Dentil, Definition of 8 

Dentil, Triangular, Intersecting Cove Molding 222 

Dentil Mold, Definition of 10 

Descriptive Geometry, Definition of 23 

Design, Architectural 30 

Detail Drawing 42 

Detail of Square Molded Leader Head 42 

Detailing a Main Cornice 46 

Detailing and Lettering 30 

Diamond, Tapering, in a Keystone 225 

Diamond Panel, Raised, Reduced Miters in 144 

Die, Definition of 7 

Dimension Lines 26 

Dissimilar Moldings, Mitering at an Internal Right 

Angle in Plan 155 

Dissimilar Moldings, Mitering at an Internal Angle in 

Plan, at Other than a Right Angle 155 

Divisions of a Main Cornice, Computing 46 

Dome, Covering with Flat Seam Roofing 333 

Doors, Hollow Metal 249 

Doors, Shutters, etc., Automatic Closing, Tin Clad. Fire 

Proof, Construction of 252 

Doric Order, Definition of 7 

Dormer and Bay Windows 64-74, 206-212 

Dormer, Octagonal Return on, Against an Oblique Sur- 
face in Elevation 92 

Dormer Return, Right Angular, Roof Flange on 91 

Dormer Window, Definition of 18 

Dormer Window, Averaging Profile and Determining 

Pattern in Curved Molding of 204 

Dormer Window, Curved, with Curved Roof and Roof 

Flange 210 

Double Hung Window, Definition of 20 

Double Hung Window, Regulation Type of 251 

Double Lock Standing Seam Roofing Sheets, Calculating 337 

Double Locked, Definition of 17 

Double Pitched Skylight 279 

Double Pitched Skylight, Definition of 12 

Double Pitched Skylights, Computing Quantities in . . $67 

Drawing, Architectural and Mechanical 23-29 

Drawing Block Letters 52 

Drawing Ionic Volute, Method of 41 

Drip, Definition of 10 

Drop, Bracket, Return of 223 

Drop, Ornamental, with Reduced Miters 146 



39° 



INDEX 



PACE 

Drop Return, Ornamental, Intersecting Numerous Molds 224 
Dentil, Triangular, Intersecting Cove Molding 222 

Eave Gutter, Definition of 15 

Eave Gutter Miters, Inside and Outside, Forming a 

Right Angle in Plan 107 

Edging Metal Roofing Sheets 312 

Egyptian Letters and Figures 51 

Electric Signs and Sign Boards, Lettering Applied to.. 50 

Electrically Illuminated Signs 241 

Elevation and Sections ot a Panel, Showing the Im- 
portance of Section Lines, Reading 348 

Elevations and Soffit Plan of a Leader Head, Reading. . 330 
Elevation and Sectional View of Cornice, Reading . . . 349 

Enameled Letter Signs, Construction of 244 

End Wall Flashing, Definition of 18 

Engaged Column, Definition of 7 

Enlarged Inside Gutter, Miter for 108 

Enrichment, Definition of 10 

Entablature, Definition of 7 

Estimating Furnace Heating Materials 380-386 

Estimating Items and Quantities of Sheet Metal . .363-386 

Estimating Quantities in Cornice 365 

Estimating Quantities in Double Pitched Skylights... 367 

Estimating Quantities in Flat Skylight 366 

Estimating Quantities in Gutters and Leaders .... 379 

Estimating Quantities in Hipped Skylight 367 

Estimating Quantities in Skylight Work 366 

Estimating Quantities of Copper Coping over Wall on 

Pitched Roof 363 

Estimating Quantities of Flat Seam Roofing 372 

Estimating Quantity of Standing Seam Roofing 372 

Estimating True Lengths of Hips, Valleys and Ridges 

on Gable and Hipped Roof 370 

Expansion and Contraction of Copper Roofing and 

Gutters 316 

Expansion and Contraction of Metal in Base of Cap 

Flashing 319 

Expansion and Contraction of Metal in Laying Flat 

Seam Roofing 322 

Expansion and Contraction of Metal in Laying Standing 

Seam Roofing 323 

Expansion and Contraction of Roofing Metal 312 

Expansion Joint, Definition of 17 

Expansion Joints in Copper Lined Gutters 318 

Extension, Definition of 13 

Extension Skylight, Definition of 13 

Eyebrow Dormer Window, Definition of 18 

Face and Butt Hiters in a Plain Pediment 84 

Face Miter, Definition of 10 

Face Miter between Curved and Horizontal Moldings . 87 

Face Miters 53 

Face Miters at Different Angles 58 

Face Miters in Square Panel 60 

Face of Raking Bracket 142 

Fascia, Definition of 10 

Fastening Copper Lining in Gutter Construction 317 

Fastening Lintel Cornice to Iron Beams 84 

Fillet, Definition of 10 



PAGE 

Finial, Definition of 9 

Finial, Hip and Ridge, when Roof Pitches are Unequal 183 
Finial, Ridge and Hip, when all Roof Pitches are Equal 182 

Finial, Round, for Circular Tower 198 

Finials 174, 192 

Finding Length of Bars for Skylights of any Pitch . . 290 
Finding Length of Skylight Bars by Computation .... 288 
Finding True Lengths of Curbs, Bars and Ventilators 

in Hipped Skylights 286 

Finishing Sheet, Left Hand, at Top of Course for Door, 

and Method of Applying 258 

Finishing Sheet for Door, Left Hand, and the Method 

of Applying 258 

Fire Door, Definition of 20 

Fire Doors, Hollow Metal, and Shutters 249 

Fire Proof Windows, Doors, etc 249 

Fire Proofing Wooden Windows in Old Buildings . . 260 

Five Pointed Star 215 

Flange. Conical, Roof Plate and, on a Double Pitched 

Roof 170 

Flange. Roof, between Pitched Roof and Return Mold 

at Other than a Right Angle 93 

Flange, Roof, Conical, on Roof Having One Inclination 169 

Flange, Roof, Curved 95 

Flange, Roof, Fitting around a Tapering Base Inter- 
secting the Ridge and Hips of a Pitched Roof . . 173 
Flange, Roof, Intersecting and Hips and Ridge of a 

Hipped Roof 167 

Flange, Roof, of Curved Dormer Window with Curved 

Roof 210 

Flange, Roof, on Right Angular Dormer Return .... 91 
Flange, Roof, Square Tapering Shaft and. Intersecting 

the Ridge and Hips of a Roof 165 

Flange. Roof, Tapering Base and, on the Ridge and 

Hips of a Pitched Roof 171 

Flange and Cylinder. Roof, Intersecting Double Pitched 

Roof 159 

Flange and Cylinder, Roof, Intersecting Ridge and Hips 

of Hipped Roof 160 

Flange and Cylinder, Roof, Intersecting Single Pitched 

Roof 158 

Flange and Octagonal Shaft, Roof, Intersecting Double 

Pitched Roof 163 

Flange and Octagonal Shaft, Roof, Intersecting Hips 

and Ridge of Hipped Roof 164 

Flange and Octagonal Shaft, Roof, Intersecting Single 

Pitched Roof 162 

Flanges, Roof 91-95,158-173 

Flaring Strips around a Beveled Shield 231 

Flashing, Base and Cap, against a Brick Wall 320 

Flashing in Stone or Terra Cotta Reglet 320 

Flashing Metal Roofing 312-326 

Flashing, Face, Cap, end Wall. Side Wall, Curb, Defin- 
ition of 17, 18, 19 

Flashings and Sills of Skylight on Structural Steel 

Framing, Securing 310 

Flat Arch. Definition of 8 

Flat Head at Oblique End of Molding 93 

Flat Roof Plan and Sectional View, Reading 343 

Flat Seam Metal Roofing 312 

Flat Seam Roofing, Computing Quantities of 372 

Flat Seam Roofing, Definition of 17 



INDEX 



59i 



PAGE 

Flat Seam Roofing, Expansion and Contraction 322 

Flat Seam Roofing Sheets, Calculating 337 

Flat Skylight, Computing Quantities in 366 

Flat Skylight, Curbless 302 

Flat Skylight, Definition of 12 

Flat Skylight Set on Pitched Curb 264 

Flat Skylight when Roof Curb has the Required Pitch 263 

Flues, Ventilating, Reading Plans of 353 

Fluted Shaft Intersecting a Sphere Centrally 237 

Foot Mold, Definition of 10 

Foot Mold, Frieze and Crown Mold of Lintel Cornice, 

Joining 82 

Foot Molding of Lintel Cornice, Setting Together . . 80 
Foot Molding and Frieze of Lintel Cornice, Forming 

on Cornice Brake 78 

Forming and Seaming Paneled Pipe for Conductor 

Offset 121 

Forming Crown and Cap Molding of Lintel Cornice 

on Cornice Brake 79 

Forming Frieze and Foot Molding of Lintel Cornice 

on Cornice Brake 78 

Frame for Electrical Panel Sign 243 

Frames, Definition of 20 

Frames, Hollow Metal 249 

Framing and Reinforcing Bars of Large Single Pitch 

Skylight 266 

Frieze, Definition of 7 

Frieze, Foot and Crown Molds of Lintel Cornice, 

Joining 82 

Frieze and Foot Molding of Lintel Cornice, Forming on 

Cornice Brake 78 

Frustum of a Scalene Cone, Reading Plan and Eleva- 
tions of 340 

Furnace Heating Materials, Computing 380 

Furnace Piping, Reading Plans of 350 

Fusible Link, Definition of 15 

Gable. Definition of 8 

Gale and Hipped Roof, Computing True Lengths of 

Hips. Valleys and Ridges on 370 

Gable Miters, Definition of 10 

Gable Mold, Definition of 10 

Gable Mold Intersecting Sphere Off the Center 239 

Gable Molding, Having a Return at Other than a 

Right Angle, Reduced Miters in 153 

Gable Molding Mitering against a Molded Column . . 102 
Gable Molding, Reduced Miters in, Having a Right 

Angular Return 151 

Gable Roof, Plan and Elevations, Reading 344 

Gable Roofs 174-191 

Gable Roofs, and Hipped, with Wing on One Side, 

Reading Plan and Elevations of Building with.... 346 
Gable Roofs, Four. Having Unequal Pitches, Reading 

Plan and Elevations of Building with 345 

Gable Roofs, Four, Intersecting and Projecting. Read- 
ing Plan and Elevations of Buildings with .... 346 
Gable Roofs Having Equal Pitches, Reading Plan and 

Elevations of Building with 345 

Gable Roofs, Spire and, when an Octagonal Spire Miters 

on Four Gables 186 



Gable Roofs, Spire and, when an Octagonal Spire Miters 

on Eight Gables 187 

Gables, Spire and, when a Square Spire Intersects Four 

Gables 184 

Gables on an Octagonal Pinnacle 133 

Gables on a Square Pinnacle 132 

Galvanized Iron Roofing 312-337 

Galvanized Iron or Copper Roofing and Siding, Cor- 
rugated, Laying 330 

Gearings, Definition of ..* 13 

Glazing Regulation Type of Double Hung Window . . 252 

Glazing Skylight and Securing Caps to Bar 268 

Gores 213 

Gores of Sphere, Vertical 193 

Grain Bin with Conical Roof 329 

Gutter. Combined with Cornice 55 

Gutter, Eave, Inside and Outside Miters for, Forming 

a Right Angle in Plan 107 

Gutter, Enlarged Inside, Miter for 108 

Gutter, Ogee, Inside and Outside Miters for, at Other 

than a Right Angle in Plan no 

Gutter Brace, Definition of 16 

Gutter Strips and Tin Rolls, Table of Number of Sheets 

Required for 336 

Gutter and Curb of Skylight Over Elevator and Stair 

Shafts 306 

Gutter Miters, Raking, Mitering at Right Angles in Plan 115 
Gutter Moldings, Roof, Inside and Outside Miters for, 

on Pitched Roofs, Forming a Right Angle in Plan in 
Gutters. Condensation, Eave, Roof, Box Lined, Defini- 
tions of 14, 15 

Gutters, Copper, and Roofing, Laying and Providing for 

Expansion and Contraction 316 

Gutters, Copper Lined, Expansion Joints in 318 

Gutters, Lining of, with Sheet Copper 316 

Gutters, Raking, on Pitched Roof, at Other than a Right 

Angle in Plan 116 

Gutters, Roof, Inside and Outside Miters for, on Roofs 

of Dissimilar Pitch, Forming a Right Angle in Plan 112 

Gutters, Roof 104-117, 312-318, 324 

Gutters and Leaders, Computing Quantities in 379 



Hand Wheel, Definition of 13 

Handle, Definition of 13 

Hanging Electrical Panel Sign 244,246 

Head, Definitions of 21 

Head, Flat, at Oblique End of Molding 93 

Head Block, Molded, Intersecting Pediment Coping .... 174 

Head Blocks 174 

Heads. Segmental, in the Construction of Tin Clad 

Shutters 259 

Hexagonal Molded Ornament 215 

Hexagonal Pyramid 221 

Hinge, Definition of 13 

Hinge Stile, Definition of 21 

Hip, Definition of 10 

Hip and Ridge Finial when Roof Pitches are Unequal 183 

Hip Bar, Definition of 14 

Hip Finial, Ridge and, When all Roof Pitches are Equal 182 

Hip Mold, Definition of 10 

Hip Ridge Intersecting a Vertical Plane at Right Angles 180 



39 2 



INDEX 



PAGE 

Hip Ridge and Ridge Capping, Intersection between . . 177 

Hip Ridges 174-185 

Hip Tile. Definition of 18 

Hipped and Gable Roofs with Wing on One Side, Read- 
ing Plan and Elevations of Building with 346 

Hipped Bar in Hipped Skylights 283 

Hipped Octagonal Skylight 291 

Hipped Roof, Computing True Lengths of Hips, Valleys 

and Ridges on 370 

Hipped Roof Having Ridge and Hips, Reading Plan 

and Elevations of Building with 345 

Hipped Roof of Equal Pitch, Reading Plan and Ele- 
vations of Building with 344 

Hipped Roof of Unequal Pitches, Reading Plan and 

Elevations of Building with 344 

Hipped Skylight, Computing Quantities in 367 

Hipped Skylight, Definition of 13 

Hipped Skylight, Curbs, Bars and Ventilators, Finding 

True Lengths of 286 

Hipped Skylight. Plain, with Ridged Bar 280 

Hipped Skylight Bar, Common 282 

Hipped Skylight Bars Required 284 

Hipped Skylights, Ridge Ventilator in 283 

Hipped Ventilating Skylight 2S0 

History of Classical Architecture 30 

Hollow Metal Fire Door, Definition of 20 

Hollow Metallic Windows, Definition of 20 

Hollow Metal Windows, Frames, Sashes, Fire Doors 

and Shutters 249-262 

Hood over Ventilator 173 

Horizontal and Inclined Moldings, Reduced Miters for 144 
Horizontal Molding Intersecting a Curved Surface . . 96 
Horizontal Molding Intersecting a Curved Surface in 

Elevation 93 

Horizontal Molding Intersecting an Oblique Surface in 

Plan 93 

Horizontal Molding Intersecting a Spherical Surface. 98 

Illuminated Signs 241 

Impost, Definition of 12 

Incised Work, Definition of 10 

Inclined and Horizontal Moldings, Reduced Miters for 144 
Inclined Molding, Butting Against a Plane Surface at 

Other Than a Right Angle in Plan 99 

Inclined Molding Butting Against a Plane Surface at 

Right Angles In Plan 98 

Inclined Mold Mitering on a Wash 86 

Inside Miter, Definition of 10 

Intersecting Hipped Roofs with Ridge of Wing Lower 
than that of Main Roof, Reading Plan and Eleva- 
tions of Building with 347 

Intersecting Miter between Curved and Horizontal 

Moldings 89 

Intersecting Prejecting Gable Roofs, Four, Reading 

Plan and Elevations of Building with 346 

Intersection of Fluted Shaft with a Sphere, Centrally 237 
Intersection between Hip Ridge and Ridge Capping .... 177 
Intersection of a Hip Ridge with a Vertical Plane at 

Right Angles 180 

Intersection of Horizontal Molding with a Curved Sur- 
face 96 



PAGE 

Intersection of Horizontal Molding with a Curved Sur- 
face in Elevation 93 

Intersection of Horizontal Molding with an Oblique 

Surface in Plan 93 

Intersection of Horizontal Molding with a Spherical 

Surface 98 

Intersection of Molded Head Block with Pediment Cop- 
ing 174 

Intersection of Ornamental Drop Return, with Numer- 
ous Molds 224 

Intersection of Square Shaft with a Sphere, Centrally 234 

Intersection of Molding with a Sphere, Off the Center 238 

Intersection of Octagonal Shaft with a Sphere 235 

Intersection of Roof Flange and Cylinder with Double 

Pitched Roof 159 

Intersection of Roof Flange and Cylinder with Single 
Pitched Roof 158 

Intersection of Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft with 

Double Pitched Roof 163 

Intersection of Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft with 

Hips and Ridge of Hipped Roof 164 

Intersection of Roof Flange with the Hips and Ridge of 
a Hipped Roof 167 

Intersection of Square Shaft with a Sphere off the 

Center 236 

Intersection of a Tapering Base with the Ridge and 

Hips of a Pitched Roof 173 

Intersection of Square Tapering Shaft and Roof Flange 

with the Ridge and Hips of a Roof 165 

Intersection of Triangular Dentil with Cove Molding. . 222 

Intersections of Molds of Dissimilar Profile 144 

Ionic Order, Definition of 7 

Ionic Volute, Method of Drawing 41 

Inside and Outside Miters for Eave Gutter, Forming 

a Right Angle in Plan 107 

Inside and Outside Miters for Ogee Gutter at Other 

than a Right Angle in Plan no 

Inside and Outside Miters for Roof Gutter Moldings 
on Pitched Roofs, Forming a Right Angle in Plan in 

Inside and Outside Miters for Roof Gutters on Roofs of 

Dissimilar Pitch, Forming a Right Angle in Plan 112 

Inside and Outside Miters, Obtaining with at One Oper- 
ation 56 

Inside Gutter, Enlarged Miter for 108 

Irregular Base. Reading Plans, Elevations and Con- 
structive Views of 342 

Irregular Bay Window, of Five Sides, Base of Re- 
quiring Two Changes of Profiles 68 

Irregular Fitting or Frustum of a Scalene Cone, Reading 

Plan and Elevations of 340 

Irregular Panel 61 

Jack Bar, Definition of 14 

Tack Bars of Various Skylights 263-311 

Jamb, Definition of 21 

Joining Foot Mold, Frieze and Crown Mold of Lintel 

Cornice 82 

Joints, Expansion, in Copper Lined Gutters 318 

Joints, Water-Tight, in Metal Roofing and Siding 312 

Keystone, Definition of 12 



INDEX 



393 



PAGE 

Keystone, Molded, in a Circular Arch 226 

227 

Keystone, Raised ~" v 

Keystone, Tapering Diamond in 22 5 



Large Single Pitch Skylight; Construction and the 

Method of Framing and Reinforcing the Bars .... 266 
Corrugated Galvanized Iron or Copper Roofing 



Louvres, Circular 

Louvres, Definition of 

Louvres, Stationary and Movable 



Laying 



330 



and Siding 

Laying Flat and Standing Seam Roofing 312-337 

Laying Metal Roofing Over Wooden Strips or Battens 314 

Laying Sheet Copper Roofing and Gutters 316 

Laying Standing Seam Circular Metal Roof 327 

325 



321 

16 
339 



Laying Zinc or Copper Roofing on Wood Battens ... 
Lead Plugs for Use in Metal Roofing, Molds for Cast 

ing 

Leader Head, Definition of 

Leader Head, Reading Elevations and Soffit Plan of 

Leader Head, Square Molded, Detail of 42 

Leader Head of Dissimilar Profiles , I0 4 

Leader Heads, Roof Gutters and Conductor Offsets 104-121 

Leader Hook Covering, Ornamental 106 

Leader Hook, Definition of l6 

Leaders, Plain, Corrugated, Ornamental, Definitions of 16 

Leaders' and Gutters, Computing Quantities in 379 

Left Hand Finishing Sheet for Metal Door and Method 

of Applying • 25 

Left Hand Finishing Sheet at Top Course of Door and 

Method of Applying 2 S 8 

Length of Bars for Skylights of any Pitch, Finding 286-291 
Lengths of Various Curbs, Bars and Ventilators in 

Hipped Skylights 286 

Lengths, True, of Hips, Valleys and Ridges on Gable 

and Hipped Roof, Computing 

Lettering and Detailing 

Lettering Applied to Sign Boards and Electric S 



370 
30 
5° 



PAGE 

• 195 

• 13 

• 299 



46 
.46 



21 
21 
20 



Main Cornice, Computing Divisions of 

Main Cornice, Detailing 

Main Cornice, Preparing Working Details of 4» 

Mansard and Deck Roofs, Reading Plan and Eleva- 
tions of a Building with 340 

Mansard Roof, Definition of l8 

Marquise, Ventilated, Structural Details of 272 

Measuring Lines 

Mechanical Drawing 

Meeting Rail, Definition of 

Meeting Stile, Definition of 

Metal Doors, Definitions of 

Metal Lath, Definition of IQ 

Metal Roof, Circular, Laying Standing Seam of 327 

Metal Roofing, Gutters and Siding 312-337 

Metal Roofing Flashings 313, 319. 326 

Metal Roofing, Notching and Edging 312 322 

Metal Roofing Over Wooden Strips or Battens, Lay- 
ing 3I4 

Metal Roofing Seams, Construction of 3I3> 323-327 

Metal Windows, Definitions of 20. 21 

Metal Windows, Frames, Sashes, Fire Doors and Shut- 

249-262 

91 



Letters, Block, Drawing 5 2 

Letters and Figures, Egyptian SI 

Letters and Figures, Roman 5 1 

Lifting Power, Definition of J 3 

Lifting Skylight Sash in Long Lengths, Construction of 298 

Lines Used in Mechanical Drawing 26 

Lining Gutters with Sheet Copper ■ 31° 

Lining of Metal Cornice on a Wood Base, Securing . . 3*7 

Lintel Cornice, Definition of 

Lintel Cornice, Fastening to Iron Beams 84 

Lintel Cornice, Obtaining Reduced Profile of ..... . 76 

Lintel Cornice, Patterns for and Details of Construction 75 
Lintel Cornice Band Iron Braces, Bending and Inserting 82 
Lintel Cornice Frieze and Foot Molding, Forming on 

Cornice Brake ?8 

Lintel Cornice Crown and Bed Molds. Joining 81 

Lintel Cornice Crown and Cap Molding, Forming on 

Cornice Brake 79 

Lintel Cornice Foot Mold, Frieze and Crown Mold. 

Joining °- 

Lintel Cornice Foot Molding, Setting together 80 

Lintel Cornice Seams, Locking 82 

Lintel Cornice Secured to Brick Wall 83 

Lock Stile, Definition of 2I 

Locked Seams in Pediment Cornices, Construction of 143 
Locking Seams of Lintel Cornice 82 



ters 

Miter, Butt, and Roof Flange on a Right Angle Return 

Miter. Butt, on Square Dormer Return 

Miter, Butt, Return Head and, Required by Ridge Cap- 



90 



ping 



176 

108 

87 



Miter, Enlarged Inside Gutter 

Miter, Face, between Curved and Horizontal Moldings 

Miter! Gable Molding against a Molded Column 102 

Miter, Intersecting, between Curved and Honzont: 

Moldings 

Miter, Cornice, Reduced, at Other than a Right Angle 

in Plan 

Miter. Definition of 

Miter, Reduced, of Lintel Cornice 

Miter, Return, at a Right Angle in Plan 

Miter, Square Panel 5 ° 

Miter, Square Return S3 

Miter, Reduced, on Right Angular Return in Cornice.. 148 
Miter Fold, Corner; Preparing Pattern Shape for and 

Constructing Lock and Fold 

Mitering of Circular Spire on Four Gable Roofs 
Mitering of Dissimilar Molding at an Internal Angle in 

Plan, Other than a Right Angle • • • ■ 155 

Mitering of Dissimilar Moldings at an Internal Right 

Angle in Plan 1 3: > 

Mitering of Round Spire on Eight Gable Roofs in an 

Octagonal Turret IQ0 

Mitering of Pediments Having Unequal Pitches 135 

Miters. Bevel and Butt, in a Pediment Molding, Quick 

Method of Obtaining I01 

Miters, Butt, Against Wall l 2° 

Miters, Face, at Different Angles 58 

Miters, Face and Butt, in a Plain Pediment 84 

Miters Inside and Outside, Developing at One Opera- 
,;™ 56, 57 



89 

149 
10 

75 
53 



255 
189 



394 



INDEX 



PAGE 

Miters, Inside and Outside, for Eave Gutter, Forming 

a Right Angle in Plan 107 

Miters, Inside and Outside, for Ogee Gutter at Other 

than a Right Angle in Plan no 

Miters, Inside and Outside, for Roof Gutter Moldings 

on Pitched Roofs, Forming a Right Angle in Plan in 
Miters, Inside and Outside, for Roof Gutters on Roofs 
of Dissimilar Pitch, Forming a Right Angle in 

Plan 112 

Miters, Raking Gutter, Mitering at Right Angles in 

Plan 115 

Miters, Reduced, for Horizontal and Inclined Moldings 144 

Miters, Reduced, in Raised Diamond Panel 144 

Miters, Reduced, in a Molded Ornament 144 

Miters, Reduced, on Ornamental Drop 146 

Miters, Reduced, on a Gable Molding, Having a Return 

at Other than a Right Angle 153 

Miters, Reduced, on a Gable Molding Having a Right 

Angular Return 151 

Miters, Return, Face, Bevel and Butt 53-103 

Modillion, Definition of 8 

Modillion Band, Definition of 10 

Modillion Mold, Definition of 10 

Mold, Cove, in a Circular Panel 196 

Mold, Inclined, Mitering on a Wash 86 

Mold, Gable, Intersecting Sphere off the Center 239 

Mold, Quarter Round in a Circular Panel 197 

Mold Raked Cap 141 

Mold, Raking Crown, in Angular Pediment 122 

Molded Base Forming a Transition from Square to 

Octagonal 217 

Molded Base in a Circular Bay Window 207 

Molded Cap Forming a Transition from Octagonal to 

Square 218 

Molded Chamber 216 

Molded Column. Gable Mitering Against 102 

Molded Head Block Intersecting Pediment Coping . . . 174 

Molded Keystone in a Circular Arch 226 

Molded Leader Head, Square. Detail of 42 

Molded Ornament, Hexagonal 215 

Molded Ornament, Reduced Miters in 144 

Molded Ornament, Triangular 214 

Molded Transitions 213 

Molding, Cove, Intersected by Triangular Dentil .... 222 

Molding, Definition of 9 

Molding, Gable, Having a Return at Other than a Right 

Angle, Reduced Miters on 153 

Molding, Gable, Reduced Miters in, Having a Right 

Angular Return 151 

Molding, Pediment, Bevel and Butt Miters in 101 

Molding. Gable, Mitering against a Molded Column. . . . 102 
Molding, Horizontal, Intersecting a Curved Surface . . 96 
Molding, Horizontal, Intersecting a Curved Surface in 

Elevation 93 

Molding, Horizontal, Intersecting an Oblique Surface in 

Plan 93 

Molding, Horizontal, Intersecting a Spherical Surface 98 
Molding, Inclined, Butting against a Plane Surface at 

Other than a Right Angle in Plan 99 

Molding, Inclined, Butting against a Plane Surface at 

Right Angles in Plan 98 

Molding, Intersecting a Sphere off the Center 238 



PAGE 

Molding of Dormer Window, Curved Averaging Profile 

and Determining Pattern in 2o4 

Molding of Lintel Cornice, Frieze and Foot, Forming 

on Cornice Brake 78 

Molding of Lintel Cornice, Crown and Cap, Forming 

on Cornice Brake 79 

Moldings 53-103 

Moldings Arranged According to Purpose 38 

Moldings, Circular, Made by Machine 204 

Moldings, Curved, in a Circular Bay Window 206 

Moldings, Dissimilar, Mitering at an Internal Angle in 

Plan, at Other than a Right Angle 155 

Moldings, Dissimilar, Mitering at an Internal Right 

Angle in Plan 155 

Moldings, Horizontal and Inclined, Reduced Miters for 144 
Moldings, Raking, for Angular and Segmental Pedi- 
ments 122 

Molds, Intersections of, of Dissimilar Profile 144 

Molds, Numerous, Intersected by Ornamental Drop 

Return 224 

Molds, Raking, in Broken Angular Pediment 124 

Molds, Raking, in Broken Segmental Pediment 126 

Molds for Casting Lead Plugs for Use in Metal Roofing 321 
Molds of Lintel Cornice, Bed and Crown, Joining . . 81 
Molds of Lintel Cornice, Foot, Frieze and Crown, Join- 
ing 82 

Movable Louvres 299 

Movable Sash, Definition of 13 

Movable Sashes in a Turret Skylight 300 

Muntin, Definition of 21 

Neck Mold, Definition of 7 

Normal Profile, Definition of 10 

Notching and Edging Metal Roofing 312, 322 

Number of Sheets Required to Cover a Given Surface 

of Tin Roofing, Table of 335 

Number of Boxes and Sheets Required to Cover a Given 

Surface of Tin Roofing, Tables of 335, 336 

Number of Sheets Required for Tin Rolls and Gutter 

Strips, Table of 336 

Octagonal Pinnacle, Gables on 133 

Octagonal Return Against an oblique Surface in Ele- 
vation 91 

Octagonal Shaft, Roof Flange, and Intersecting Double 

Pitched Roof 163 

Octagonal Shaft, Roof Flange, and Intersecting Hips 

and Ridge of a Hipped Roof 164 

Octagonal Shaft, Roof Flange, and Intersecting Single 

Pitched Roof 162 

Octagonal Shaft Intersecting Sphere 235 

Octagonal Skylight, Hipped 291 

Octagonal Spire Mitering on Eight Gables 187 

Octagonal Tapering Base, Including Roof Flange, In- 
tersecting the Hips and Ridge of a Hipped Roof.. 167 

Offset, Paneled Conductor 118 

Ogee Gutter, Inside and Outside Miters for, at Other 

than a Right Angle in Plan no 

Ogee, Reversed, in a Circular Panel 197 

Open Pediment, Definition of 8 



INDEX 



395 



PAGE 

Operated Sash, Definition of r 3 

Order, Definition of 7 

Ornament, Molded, Reduced Miters in 144 

Ornament, Molded, Hexagonal 215 

Ornament, Molded Triangular 214 

Ornamental Drop Return Intersecting Numerous Molds 224 

Ornamental Drop with Reduced Miters 146 

Ornamental Leader Fastener, Definition of 16 

Ornamental Leader Hook Covering 106 

Ornamental Sheet Metal Work 213, 240 

Ornamental Trimmings on Urns 230 

Ornamental Window Cap, Working Detail of 44 

Ornaments, Brackets, Chamfers, Panels, etc 213, 240 

Orthographic Projection, Definition of 23 

Outside and Inside Miters, Developing at One Opera- 
tion 56, 57 

Outside and Inside Miters for Eave Gutter, Forming a 

Right Angle in Plan i°7 

Outside and Inside Miters for Ogee Gutter at Other 

than a Right Angle in Plan no 

Outside and Inside Miters for Roof Gutter Moldings 

on Pitched Roofs, Forming a Right Angle in Plan. Ill 
Outside and Inside Miters for Roof Gutters on Roofs 
of Dissimilar Pitch. Forming a Right Angle in 

Plan II2 

Outside Miter, Definition of I0 



Panel, Circular, Cove Mold in 196 

Panel, Circular, Quarter Round Mold in 197 

Panel, Circular, Reversed Ogee in 197 

Panel, Definition of 9 

Panel, Elevations and Sections of, Showing the Impor- 
tance of Section Lines, Reading 348 

Panel, Irregular OI 

Panel, Raised Diamond, Reduced Miters in 144 

Panel, Rectangular, Pitched 220 

Panel, Triangular 60 

Panel, Miter, Square 59 

Panel with Circular End 62 

Paneled Conductor Offset 118 

Paneled Electric Sign 246 

Panels 59-62, 196-198, 220 

Pedestal, Definition of 7 

Pedestal Course. Definition of 9 

Pediment, Angular, Raking Crown Mold in 122 

Pediment, Broken, Used Over an Entrance 36 

Pediment, Angular, Having Returns at Octagonal 

Angles 129 

Pediment, Broken Angular, Raking Molds in 124 

Pediment, Broken Segmental, Raking Molds in 126 

Pediment Coping Intersected by Molded Head Block.. 174 

Pediment, Cornice, Requiring Face Miters 58 

Pediment, Definition of 8 

Pediment, Raking Bracket in 140 

Pediment, Segmental, Having Returns at Other than a 

Right Angle, Forming Butt Miters Against Wall.. 130 
Pediment Molding, Bevel and Butt Miters in, Quick 

Method 101 

Pediment Without Crown Mold 36 

Pediments 35, 84, 101 



PAGE 

Pediments, Angular and Segmental, Raking Moldings 

and Brackets for I22 

Pediments, Segmental I 9 2 

Pediment, Segmental, Made by Hand 208 

Pediments Having Unequal Pitches, Mitering at Right 

Angles in Plan J 35 

Photographic Studio Skylight 274 

Pilaster, Definition of 7 

Pinnacle, Definition of 9 

Pinnacle, Octagonal, Gables on 133 

Pinnacle, Square, Gables on 132 

Piping, Furnace, Reading Plans of 35° 

Pitched Rectangular Panel 220 

Pivoted Window, Definition of 20 

Plain Conductor, Definition of 16 

Plain Leader. Definition of ! 6 

Plain Hipped Skylight with Ridge Bar 280 

Planceer, Definitions of 9> 10 

Plan Reading: 

Plan and Elevations of Beveled Tube 338 

Plan and Elevations of a Tee Joint 339 

Plan and Elevations of a Transition Piece 340 

Plan and Elevations of Irregular Fitting or Frustum 

of a Scalene Cone 34° 

Plan, Elevation and Constructive View of a Round 

Ventilator 341 

Plans, Elevations and Constructive Views of a Tool 

Box 341 

Plans, Elevations and Constructive Views of an 

Irregular Base 342 

Plan and Sectional View of a Flat Roof 343 

Plan and Elevations of Building with Gable Roof 344 

Plan and Elevations of Building with Hipped Roof, 

of Equal Pitch 344 

Plan and Elevations of Building with Hipped Roof 

of Unequal Pitches 344 

Plan and Elevations of Building with Hipped Roof 

Having Ridge and Hips 345 

Plan and Elevations of Building with Four Gable 

Roofs Having Unequal Pitches 345 

Plan and Elevations of Building with Four Gable 

Roofs, Having Equal Pitches 345 

Plan and Elevations of Building Having Hipped and 

Gable Roof with Wing on One Side 346 

Plan and Elevations of a Building with Four Inter- 
secting Projecting Gable Roofs 346 

Plan and Elevations of a Building with Mansard and 

Deck Roofs 346 

Plan and Elevations of Building Having Intersect- 
ing Hipped Roof with Ridge of Wing Lower than 

that of Main Roof 347 

Plan and Elevations of Building with Complex Roof 

Intersections 348 

Plans, Elevations and Section of Architectural Work. 350 
Reading a Complete Set of Architect's Plans Drawn 

to Scale ....354-362 

Planes. Definition of 25 

Plans and Profiles in Projection Drawing 27 

Plate, Roof, and Conical Flange on a Double Pitched 

Roof l 7° 

Pole Hook, Definition of ! 3 

Preparing Working Details of a Main Cornice 48 



39 6 



INDEX 



PAGE 

Principles of Projection in Architectural Drawing. .. .23-29 

Profile, Definition of 12 

Profile, Raking of 46 

Profile, Reduced, of Lintel Cornice 76 

Profile in Pattern of Curved Molding of Dormer Win- 
dow, Averaging and Determining 204 

Profiles, Various 27, 33, 34 

Projection, Principles ot, in Architectural Drawing. . .23-29 

Projectors 26 

Puttyless Skylight, Definition of IS 

Pyramid, Hexagonal 221 

Pyramid, Triangular 221 

Pyramids Developed Regardless of Shape of Polygon 

in Plan 222 

Quantities in Copper Coping over Wall on Pitched 

Roof, Computing 363 

Quantities in a Cornice, Computing 363 

Quantities in Flat Skylight, Computing 366 

Quantities in Gutters and Leaders, Computing 379 

Quantities in Hipped Skylight, Computing 367 

Quantities in Skylight Work, Computing 366 

Quantities of Flat Seam Roofing, Computing 372 

Quantity of Sheets and Boxes of Tin Required to Cover 

a Given Surface of Tin Roofing, Table of 335, 336 

Quantity of Sheets Required to Cover a Given Surface 

of Tin Roofing, Table of 335 

Quantity of Standing Seam Roofing, Computing 372 

Quarter Round Mold in a Circular Panel 197 

Quick Method of Obtaining Inside and Outside Miters 

at One Operation 57 

Rabbet (on Bar), Definition of 15 

Rabbet (on Curb) , Definition of 14 

Rabbeted Frames, Definition of 20 

Rails, Definition of 21 

Rain Water Cut-off, Definition of 16 

Raised Diamond Panel, Reduced Miters in 144 

Raised Keystone 227 

Raising Sash 296 

Raising Sashes in Water-Tight Skylight Construction.. 297 
Raising Sash of Skylight on Structural Steel Framing, 

Details of 309 

Rake Miter, Definition of 10 

Raked Cap Mold 141 

Raked Mold, Definition of 10 

Raked Profile, Definition of 10 

Raked Profiles at Base of Octagonal Bay Window 66 

Raked Profiles at Base of Square Bay Window 68 

Raking a Profile 46 

Raking Bracket, Drawing Elevation of 140 

Raking Bracket, Face of 142 

Raking Bracket, Modified Side of 142 

Raking Bracket in a Pediment 140 

Raking Bracket in Apex of Pediment 142 

Raking Bracket in Plan, as in the Soffit of a Bay Win- 
dow 136 

Raking Crown Mold in Angular Pediment 122 

Raking Gutter Miters, Mitering at Right Angles in Plan 115 
Raking Gutters on Pitched Roof, at Other than a Right 

Angle in Plan 116 



PAGE 

Raking Molds in a Broken Angular Pediment 124 

Raking Molds in a Broken Segmental Pediment 126 

Raking Moldings and Brackets for Angular and Seg- 
mental Pediments 122 

Reading a Complete Set of Architect's Plans Drawn 

to Scale 354-362 

Reading Plans, Elevations and Details of Building Con- 
struction, etc 338-362 

Reading Plans of Furnace Piping 350 

Reading Plans of Ventilating Flues 353 

Receptacles for Wiring Electrical Signs, Method of 

Securing 241 

Rectangular Bay Window 68 

Rectangular Panel, Pitched 220 

Regulation Type of Double Hung Window, Constructive 

Features of 251 

Reduced Cornice Miter at Other than a Right Angle in 

Plan 149 

Reduced Miter of Lintel Cornice 75 

Reduced Profile of Lintel Cornice, Obtaining 76 

Reduced Miters for Horizontal and Inclined Moldings 

and of Intersections of Molds of Dissimilar Profile. 144 
Reduced Miters on a Gable Molding, Having a Return 

at Other than a Right Angle 153 

Reduced Miters on a Gable Molding Having a Right 

Angular Return 151 

Reduced Miters in a Molded Ornament 144 

Reduced Miters in Raised Diamond Panel 144 

Reduced Miters on Ornamental Drop 146 

Reduced Miter on a Right Angular Return in Cornice.. 148 

Reglet, Definition of 17 

Reinforcing Bars and Framing Large Single Pitch Sky- 
light 266 

Reinforcing Strip, Definition of 15 

Return, Definition of 10 

Return, Face, Bevel and Butt Miters 53 

Return, Octagonal, Against an Oblique Surface in Ele- 
vation 91 

Return Head and Butt Miter Required by Ridge Cap- 
ping 176 

Return Miter, Definition of 10 

Return Miter, Square 53 

Return Miter at a Right Angle in Plan 53 

Return of Bracket Drop 223 

Return of Ornamental Drop Intersecting Numerous 

Molds 224 

Reversed Ogee and Flare of Round Finial 202 

Reversed Ogee in a Circular Panel 197 

Ridge, Hip and Ridge Capping, Intersection between... 177 
Ridge, Hip, Intersecting a Vertical Plane at Right 

Angles ' 180 

Ridge and Hip Finial When All Roof Pitches are Equal 182 

Ridge Bar, Definition of 14 

Ridge Bar of Plain Hipped Skylight 280 

Ridge Capping Requiring Return Head and Butt Miter. 176 
Ridge Finial, Hip, and when Roof Pitches are Unequal 183 

Ridge Mold, Definition of 10 

Ridge Pole, Wood, to Receive Metal Ridge Roll 332 

Ridge Roll, Corrugated 332 

Ridge Tile, Definition of 18 

Ridge Ventilator in Hipped Skylights 283 

Ridges, Hip 174 



INDEX 



397 



PAGE 

Right Angular Return in Cornice, Reduced Miter on.. 148 
Right Hand Starting and Center Sheets for Doors and 

Method of Applying 256 

Right Hand Starting and Center Sheets, for Top or Fin- 
ishing Course of Door, and Method of Applying.. 258 

Rock Face Siding, Definition of 19 

Rolling Top Theatre Stage Skylight; Details of Con- 
struction 269 

Rolling Type of Skylight, Definition of 15 

Roman Letters and Figures 51 

Roof, Conical, Standing Seam of over Large Grain Bin 329 
Roof, Flat, Reading Plan and Sectional View of .... 343 
Roof, Hipped, Having Ridge and Hips, Reading Plans 

and Elevations of Building with 345 

Roof Domes, Covering with Flat Seam Roofing 333 

Roof Flange, Conical, One Roof Having One Inclination 169 

Roof Flange, Curved 05 

Roof Flange, Definition of 17 

Roof Flange, Square Tapering Shaft, and Intersecting 

the Ridge and Hips of a Rcof 165 

Roof Flange, Tapering Base, and on the Ridge and Hips 

of a Pitched Roof 171 

Roof Flange and Butt Miter on a Right Angle Return. 91 
Roof Flange and Cylinder Intersecting a Double 

Pitched Roof 159 

Roof Flange and Cylinder Intersecting the Ridge and 

Hips of a Hipped Roof 160 

Roof Flange and Cylinder Intersecting Single Pitched 

Roof 158 

Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft Intersecting Double 

Pitched Roof 163 

Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft Intersecting Hips and 

Ridge of Hipped Roof 164 

Roof Flange and Octagonal Shaft, Intersecting Single 

Pitched Roof 162 

Roof Flange between Pitched Roof and Return Mold at 

Other than a Right Angle 93 

Roof Flange Fitting Around Tapering Base Intersect- 
ing Ridge and Hips of a Pitched Roof 173 

Roof Flange Intersecting the Hips and Ridge of Hipped 

Roof 167 

Roof Flange of Curved Dormer Window with Curved 

Roof 210 

Roof Flange on Right Angular Dormer Return 91 

Roof Flanges, Collars, Ventilator Bases and Hoods. .158-173 

Roof Gables 184—191 

Roof Gutter, Definition of 15 

Roof Gutter Moldings, Inside and Outside Miters for, 

on Pitched Roofs, Forming a Right Angle in Plan. 11 1 

Roof Gutters 107-1 17 

Roof Gutters on Roofs of Dissimilar Pitch, Inside and 

Outside Miters for, Forming a Right Angle in Plan 112 
Roof Intersections, Complex, Reading Plan and Eleva- 

vations of Building with 348 

Roof of Equal Pitch, Hipped, Reading Plan and Eleva- 
tions of Building with 344 

Roof of Unequal Pitches, Hipped, Reading Plan and 

Elevations of Building with 344 

Roof Plate and Conical Flange on a Double Pitched 

Roof 170 

Roofing, Flat Seam, Computing Quantities of 372 

Roofing, Flat Seam, Laying 312 



PAGE 

Roofing, Gutters and Siding 312 

Roofing, Standing Seam Computing Quantity of 372 

Roofing, Metal, Flat, Standing Seam and Batten 312 

Roofing, Zinc or Copper, Laying on Wooden Battens. . . 325 
Roofing" and Gutters, Copper, Laying and Providing for 

Expansion and Contraction 316 

Roofing and Siding of Corrugated Galvanized Iron or 

Copper, Laying 330 

Roofing Expansion and Contraction, Flat Seam 322 

Roofing Expansion and Contraction, Standing Seam.... 323 

Roofing Materials, Table of Weights 337 

Roofing Sheets, Copper, Table of Weight of 336 

Roofing Sheets, Corrugated, Table of Helps for Fig- 
uring 337 

Roofing Sheets, Flat Seam, Calculating 337 

Roofing Sheets, Number Required for Tin Rolls and 

Gutter Strips, Table of 336 

Roofing Sheets, Standing Seam Single Lock, Calcu- 
lating 337 

Roofing Sheets, Standing Seam Double Lock, Calcul- 
ating 337 

Roofing Sheets, Tin, Tables of Quantity Required to 

Cover a Given Surface 335, 336 

Roofs, Gable, Four Intersecting and Projecting, Read- 
ing Plan and Elevations of Building with 346 

Roofs. Gable, Having Unequal Pitches, Reading Plan 

and Elevations of Building with 345 

Roofs, Hipped and Gable, with Wing on One Side, 

Reading Plan and Elevations of Building with.... 346 
Roofs, Hipped Intersecting, with Ridge of Wing Lower 
than that of Main Roof, Reading Plan and Eleva- 
tions of 347 

Roofs, Mansard and Deck, Reading Plans of a Building 

with 346 

Roofs, Spire and Gable, when an Octagonal Spire Miters 

on Four Gables 186 

Roofs Having Equal Pitches, Gable, Reading Plan and 

Elevations of Building with 345 

Round Finial for Circular Tower 198 

Round Spire Mitering on Eight Gable Roofs in an Octa- 
gonal Turret 190 

Round Ventilator, Reading Plan, Elevation and Con- 
structive View of 341 

Rules, Scale, Employed in Measuring Drawings 349 

Saddle, Definition of 18 

Sash, Definition of 21 

Sashes, Hollow Metal 249 

Sashes, Movable, in a Turret Skylight, Construction of 300 
Sashes, Raising, in Water-Tight Skylight Construction. 297 
Sash for Skylight, Lifting, in Long Lengths, Construc- 
tion of 298 

Sash, Raising, Construction of 296 

Sash, Raising, of Skylight on Structural Steel Framing. 309 

Saw Tooth Skylight, Construction of 307 

Saw-Tooth Skylight, Definition of 15 

Scalene Cone, Reading Plan and Elevations of 340 

Scale Rules Employed in Measuring Drawings 349 

Seams for Metal Roofing, Construction of. 313, 314, 323-329 
Seams, Horizontal, for Combined Cornice and Gutter, 

Constructing without Soldering 55 



393 



INDEX 



PAGE 

Seams, Locked, in Pediment Cornices, Construction of 143 

Seams of Lintel Cornice, Locking 82 

Seam, Standing, of Conical Roof Over Large Grain 

Bin 329 

Sectional View and IMan of a Flat Roof, Reading 343 

Sectional View of Cornice, and Elevation, Reading 349 

Section View, Definition of 24 

Securing Lintel Cornice to Brick Wall and Covering 

Its Top 83 

Securing Metal Coping to Brick Wall 176 

Securing Skylight Caps to Bar 268 

Segmental and Angular Pediments, Raking Moldings 

and Brackets for 122 

Segmental Heads in the Construction of Tin Clad Shut- 
ters, Covering 259 

Segmental Pediment, Broken, Raking Molds in 126 

Segmental Pediment, Definition of 8 

Segmental Pediment, Having Returns at Other than a 

Right Angle, Forming Butt Miters Against Wall. . 130 

Segmental Pediment Made by Hand 208 

Semi-Hipped Skylight, Definition of 13 

Setting Skylight on Iron Construction 267 

Setting Together the Foot Molding of Lintel Cornice.. 80 

Shaft, Fluted, Intersecting Sphere Centrally 237 

Shaft, Octagonal, Intersecting Sphere 235 

Shaft, Ostagonal, Roof Flange and, Intersecting a 

Double Pitched Roof 163 

Shaft, Octagonal, Roof Flange and, Intersecting a 

Single Pitched Roof 162 

Shaft, Octagonal, Roof Flange and, Intersecting Hips 

and Ridge of a Hipped Roof 164 

Shaft, Square, Intersecting a Sphere Centrally 234 

Shaft, Square, Intersecting a Sphere off the Center.... 236 
Shaft, Tapering Square, and Roof Flange, Intersecting 

the Ridge and Hips of a Roof 165 

Sheet Copper, Table of Weight of 336 

Sheets of Roofing Tin, Number Required to Cover a 

Given Surface, Tables of 335, 336 

Sheets Required for Tin Rolls and Gutter Strips, Table 

of 336 

Shield, Beveled, Flaring Strips Around 231 

Shingled Roof, Definition of 18 

Shingle Flashing, Definition of 18 

Shutters, Automatic Closing, Tin Clad, Fireproof, Con- 
struction of 252 

Shutters, Tin Clad, Covering Segmental Heads for.... 259 

Side Wall Flashing, Definition of 18 

Siding, Corrugated, of Galvanized Iron or Copper, Lay- 
ing 330 

Siding, Roofing Gutters and 312 

Sidings, Brick, Rock-Face, Weather-Board, Definitions 

of 19 

Signboards and Electric Signs, Lettering Applied to.. 50 

Signs, Block Letter Electrical 241 

Signs, Electrical Panel, Construction of 243 

Signs, Illuminated 241 

Signs, Illuminated, Developing and Assembling 246 

Signs, Wiring 241 

Signs with Enameled Letters, Electrical, Construction 

of 244 

Sill, Definition of 21 

Single Lock Standing Seam Roofing Sheets, Calcu- 



PAGE 

lating 337 

Single Pitch Skylight, Large; Construction and the 

Method of Framing and Reinforcing the Bars.... 266 
Single Pitch Skylight, Over Elevator and Stair Shafts, 

Construction of 304 

Single Pitch Skylight with Pitch Formed in the Metal 

Curb 277 

Sink, Definition of 10 

Skylight Bars, Curbed, Common and Jack, of Hipped 

Skylight 281, 282 

Skylight Bars, Finding Length of by Computation.... 288 
Skylight Bars, Finding the Length of for Skylights of 

any Pitch 290 

Skylight Construction, Water-Tight, Involving Raising 

Sashes 297 

Skylight Cross-Bar for Making Water-Tight Connec- 
tion between Glass Panes in Skylight Construction. 268 

Skylight, Definition of 12 

Skylight, Flat, Computing Quantities in 366 

Skylight, Flat Curbless, Construction of 302 

Skylight, Flat, to be Set on a Pitched Curb 264 

Skylight, Flat, When Roof Curb has the Required Pitch 263 

Skylight Glazing and Securing Caps to Bar 268 

Skylight, Hipped, Computing Quantities in 367 

Skylight, Hipped Octagonal 291 

Skylight, Hipped Ventilating 280 

Skylight, Large Single Pitch ; Construction and the 

Method of Framing and Reinforcing the Bars.... 266 
Skylight Lifting Sash, in Long Lengths, Construction 

of 298 

Skylight, Octagonal, Curb and Bars in 292 

Skylight of Double Pitch 279 

Skylight of Single Pitch, with Pitch Formed in the 

Metal Curb 277 

Skylight on Iron Construction, Setting 267 

Skylight on Structural Steel Framing 309 

Skylight over a Photographic Studio, Construction of.. 274 
Skylight over Theatre Stage, Rolling Top; Details of 

Construction 269 

Skylight, Pitched, Valley Bar for 293 

Skylight, Plain Hipped, with Ridge Bar 280 

Skylight, Saw Tooth, Construction of 307 

Skylights, Double Pitched, Computing Quantities in... 367 

Skylights, Hipped, Curb in 282 

Skylights, Hipped, Finding True Lengths of Curbed 

Bars and Ventilators in 286 

Skylights, Hipped, Hipped Bar in 283 

Skylights, Hipped, Jack Bar in 282 

Skylights, Hipped, Other Bars Required in 284 

Skylights, Hipped. Ridge Ventilator in 283 

Skylight, Single Pitch, Over Elevator and Stair Shafts, 

Construction of 304 

Skylights of the Various Types, Construction of 263 

Skylight, Turret, Construction of Movable Sashes in.. 300 

Skylight Work, Computing Quantities in 366 

Sliding Window, Definition of 20 

Snow Guard, Definition of 19 

Soffit, Definition of 10 

Soffit of a Hipped Roof 138 

Soffit Plan of a Leader Head, Reading Elevations of.. 339 

Sphere Intersected Off the Center by a Molding 238 

Sphere Centrally Intersected by a Square Shaft 234 



INDEX 



399 



236 
193 



192 

98 

1 S 7 
186 
184 



190 

174 
8 



59 
132 



PAGE 

Sphere Centrally Intersected by Fluted Shaft 237 

Sphere Intersected by Octagonal Shaft 

Sphere Intersected Off the Center by Square Shaft 

Sphere Made Up in Vertical Gores 

Sphere or Ball Having Horizontal Zones 192 

Spheres, Louvres, Panels, Finials, Dormer and Bay 

Windows, Cornices, and Segmental Pediments. 
Spherical Surface Intersected by a Horizontal Molding 
Spire and Gable Roofs When an Octagonal Spire Miters 

on Eight Gables 

Spire and Gable Roofs When an Octagonal Spire Miters 

on Four Gables 

Spire and Gables When a Square Spire Intersects Four 

Gables 

Spire, Circular, Mitering on Four Gable Roofs 189 

Spire on Circular Tower 2 ° 3 

Spire, Round, Mitering on Fight Gable Roofs in an 

Octagonal Turret 

Spires 

Springing Line, Definition of - 

Square Bay Window, Base of, Requiring Raked Pro 

files 

Square Panel Miter 

Square Pinnacle, Gables on 

Square Return Miter S3 

Square Shaft Intersecting a Sphere Centrally 234 

Square Shaft Intersecting a Sphere Off the Center... 236 

Square Spire Intersecting Four Gables 184 

" Square Tapering Shaft and Roof Flange Intersecting 

the Ridge and Hips of a Roof 165 

Stage. Skylight, Rolling Top; Details of Construction.. 269 

Standing Seam and Batten Metal Roofing 312 

Standing Seam Circular Metal Roof, Laying 327 

Standing Seam Double Lock Roofing Sheets, Calcu- 
lating 337 

Standing Seam of Conical Roof Over Large Grain Bin. 329 

Standing Seam Roofing, Computing Quantity of 37 ^ 

Standing Seam Roofing, Definition of ■ • • l 7 

Standing Seam Roofing, Expansion and Contraction, 

Providing for 3 2 3 

Standing Seam Single Lock Roofing Sheets, Calculating 337 

Star, Five-Pointed 2I 5 

Starting and Center Sheets for Doors, Right Hand, and 

the Method of Applying 2 5 6 

Starting and Center Sheets, Right Hand, for top or Fin- 
ishing Course of Door, and Method of Applying.. 258 

Stationary and Movable Louvres, Construction of 299 

Stationary Fireproof Windows, Construction of 252 

Stationary Window, Definition of 20 

Stay, Definition of I0 

Step Flashing, Definition of l 7 

Stile, Definitions of 9. 21 

Stop, Definition of 2I 

Strainer, Definition of J " 

Strap, Definition of I 3 

Stretchout Lines a6 

Strips, Flaring, Around a Beveled Shield 231 

Structural Steel Framing Surmounted by Skylight 310 

Studio Skylight, Construction of 2 74 



PAGE 

Table of Number of Boxes and Sheets Required to 

Cover a Given Surface of Tin Roofing 235, 336 

Table of Number of Sheets Required to Cover a Given 
Surface of Tin Roofing 

Table of Number of Sheets Required for Tin Rolls and 
Gutter Strips 



335 
336 



Table of Weight of Sheet Copper 336 

Tapering Base, Octagonal, Including Roof Flange, Inter- 
secting the Hips and Ridge of a Hipped Roof .... 167 
Tapering Base and Roof Flange on the Ridge and Hips 

of a Pitched Roof I71 

Tapering Base Intersecting the Ridge and Hips of a 

Pitched Roof I73 

Tapering Diamond in a Keystone 22 5 

Tapering Shaft, Square, and Roof Flange, Intersecting 

the Ridge and Hips of a Roof l°5 

Tee Joint, Reading Plan and Elevations of 339 

Terms of Architecture and Sheet Metal Work 21 

Theater Stage Skylight, Definition of IS 

Theater Stage Skylight, Rolling Top 269 

Tilting Window, Definition of 20 

Tin Clad Fire Door and Shutter, Definition of 20 

Tin Clad Fire Doors, Shutters, etc.. Automatic Closing 

of 2 5 2 

Tin Clad Shutter Segmental Heads, Covering 259 

Tin Rolls and Gutter Strips, Table of Number of Sheets 

Required for 33° 

Tin Roofing 312-337 

Tool Box, Reading Plans, Elevations and Constructive 

Views of 341 

Top Hinged Window, Definition of 20 

Top or Finishing Course of Door, Right Hand Starting 

and Center Sheets for, and Method of Applying.. 258 

Tower, Circular, Round Finial for 198 

Transition of Molded Base from Square to Octagonal. 217 
Transition of Molded Cap from Octagonal to Square.. 218 

Transition Piece, Reading Plan and Elevations of 34° 

Transitions, Molded 2I 3 

Transom Bar, Definition of 21 

Triangular Dentil Intersecting Cove Molding 222 

Triangular Molded Ornament 214 

Triangular Panel 6o 

Triangular Pediment, Definition of 8 

Triangular Pyramid 221 

Trimmings on Urns, Ornamental 230 

True Lengths of Hips, Valleys and Ridges on Gable 

and Hipped Roof, Computing • ■ 370 

True Lengths of Various Curbs, Bars and Ventilators in 

Hipped Skylights, Finding 286 

Tube, Beveled, Reading Plan and Elevations of 338 

Tube, Definition of l6 

Turret, Octagonal, Round Spire Mitering on Eight 

Gable Roofs in J 90 

Turret Skylight Sashes, Movable 300 

Tuscan Order, Definition of 7 

Twin Window, Definition of 20 

Tympanum, Definition of ° 



Table of Helps for Figuring Corrugated Sheets 337 



Universal Joint, Definition of : 4 

Urns, Ornamental Trimmings on 2 3° 

Urns, Shields and Shafts 2I 3 



400 



INDEX 



PAGE 

Valley, Definition of 10 

Valley Bar, Definition of 14 

Valley Bar for a Pitched Skylight 293 

Vases in Any Number of Pieces, Method of Treating.. 63 

V-Criinped Roofing, Definition of 19 

Ventilated Marquise, Structural Details of 272 

Ventilating Flues, Reading Plans of 353 

Ventilating Skylight, Hipped 280 

Ventilator, Ridge, in Hipped Skylights 283 

Ventilator, Round, Reading Plan, Elevation and Con- 
structive View of 341 

Ventilator Bases 158 

Ventilator Hood 173 

Ventilators in Hipped Skylights, Finding True Lengths 

of Their Curbs and Bars 286 

Vertical Division Member, Definition of 21 

Vertical Gores of Sphere 193 

Volute, Definition of 9 

Volute, Ionic, Method of Drawing 41 

Voussoirs, Definition of 12 

Walling-In Flanges, Definition of 20 

Water-Tight Connection at Eave, Wall and Ridge of 

Corrugated Copper Roofing and Siding 330 

Water-Tight Connection Between Panes of Glass in 

Skylight Construction, Cross-Bar for Making. . . . 268 

Water-Tight Joints in Metal Roofing and Siding 312 

Water-Tight Skylight Construction Involving Raising 

Sashes 297 

Weather Board Siding, Definition of 19 

Weep Holes, Definition of 15 



PAGE 

Weights of Roofing Materials, Table of 337 

Window, Bay, Raking Bracket in Soffit of 136 

Window, Circular Bay, Curved Moldings in 206 

Window, Circular Bay, Molded Base in 207 

Window, Copper Bay, Construction of 71 

Window, Curved Dormer, with Curved Roof and Roof 

Flange 210 

Window, Dormer, Averaging Profile and Determining 

Pattern in Curved Molding of 204 

Window, Double Hung, Regulation Type of 251 

Window, Irregular Bay, of Five Sides, Base Requiring 

Two Changes of Profiles 68 

Window, Octagonal Bay; Bevel and Butt Miter for.... 64 
Window, Octagonal Bay, Mitering Obliquely Against 

Wall 66 

Window, Rectangular Bay 68 

Window, Square Bay, Base of Requiring Raked Pro- 
files 68 

Window Cap, Ornamental, Working Detail of 44 

Windows, Combination Pivot Hung and Stationary, 

Construction of 252 

Windows, Dormer and Bay 64-74, 206, 207 

Windows, Hollow Metal 249 

Windows, Wooden, Fireproofing in Old Buildings .... 260 

Wiring Electrical Panel Sign 244 

Wiring Electrical Signs 241 

Wood Battens, Laying Zinc or Copper Roofing on.... 325 

Wooden Windows in Old Buildings, Fireproofing 260 

Working Details of a Main Cornice, Preparing 48 

Working Detail of Ornamental Window Cap 44 

Zinc or Copper Roofing on Wood Battens, Laying.... 325 
Zinc Roofing 312-337 



